SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 


 

FORM 20-F

 

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(D) OF THE
SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

For the fiscal year ended 30 September, 2004

 

Commission file number 1-9945

 


 

National Australia Bank Limited

ABN 12 004 044 937

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Victoria, Australia

(Jurisdiction of incorporation)

 

500 Bourke Street, Melbourne, VICTORIA, 3000 Australia

(Address of principal executive offices)

 

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each class

 

Name of each exchange on which registered

Ordinary Shares

 

New York Stock Exchange

American Depositary Shares, each representing five Ordinary Shares

 

New York Stock Exchange

Exchangeable Capital units consisting of 77/8% Perpetual Capital Securities and Purchase Contracts

 

New York Stock Exchange

 

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: NONE

 

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act: NONE

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the registrant’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report.

 

Ordinary Shares

 

1,550,782,506

Staff Share Scheme shares

 

562,873 paid to 25 Australian cents

National Income Securities

 

20,000,000

Trust Preferred Securities

 

400,000

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.

 

Yes  ý  No  o

 

Indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.

 

Item 17  o  Item 18  ý

 

 



 

Table of contents

 

Presentation of information

2

Financial summary

3

Selected financial data

4

Business overview

9

Introduction

9

Strategy

9

Business operating model

9

Changes to the business operating model

9

Introduction to Financial Services

10

Financial Services Australia

10

Financial Services Europe

11

Financial Services New Zealand

12

Corporate & Institutional Banking

12

Wealth Management

13

Other

14

Competition

15

Regulation of the financial services system

15

Changing regulatory environment

16

Organisational structure

18

Description of property

18

Certain legal proceedings

18

Certain services provided by the external auditor and SEC investigation – matters related to independence

19

Financial review

21

Summary

21

Economic outlook

22

Net interest income

23

Net life insurance income

26

Other banking and financial services income

26

Mortgage servicing and origination revenue

28

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

28

Significant revenue

30

Operating expenses

30

Charge to provide for doubtful debts

31

Significant expenses

32

Income tax expense

33

Net profit by segment

34

Employees

42

Assets and equity

43

Return on average equity

43

Earnings and dividends per share

44

Shareholder value

45

Liquidity and funding

45

Capital resources

49

Gross loans and advances

52

Asset quality disclosures, charge to provide and provisions for doubtful debts

53

Deposits and other borrowings

57

Assets under management and administration

57

Risk management

58

Disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting

63

Transactions with related and other non-independent parties

65

Risk factors

65

Critical accounting policies

66

Accounting developments

69

Non-GAAP financial measures

69

Corporate governance

70

Report on the directors and officers

80

Financial report

99

Statement of financial performance

100

Statement of financial position

101

Statement of cash flows

102

 

 

Notes to the financial statements

103

 

1

Principal accounting policies

103

 

2

Transition to Australian equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards

112

 

3

Segment information

114

 

4

Revenue from ordinary activities

117

 

5

Profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

118

 

6

Income tax expense

121

 

7

Dividends and distributions

122

 

8

Earnings per share

123

 

9

Cash and liquid assets

124

 

10

Due from other financial institutions

124

 

11

Due from customers on acceptances

124

 

12

Trading securities

125

 

13

Available for sale securities

125

 

14

Investment securities

127

 

15

Investments relating to life insurance business

130

 

16

Loans and advances

131

 

17

Provisions for doubtful debts

133

 

18

Asset quality disclosures

137

 

19

Shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities

140

 

20

Regulatory deposits

141

 

21

Property, plant and equipment

141

 

22

Income tax assets

143

 

23

Goodwill

143

 

24

Other assets

143

 

25

Due to other financial institutions

145

 

26

Deposits and other borrowings

145

 

27

Life insurance policy liabilities

146

 

28

Income tax liabilities

147

 

29

Provisions

147

 

30

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

148

 

31

Other debt issues

150

 

32

Other liabilities

150

 

33

Contributed equity

151

 

34

Reserves

154

 

35

Retained profits

154

 

36

Outside equity interest

155

 

37

Total equity reconciliation

155

 

38

Shares, performance options and performance rights

156

 

39

Average balance sheets and related interest

164

 

40

Maturity analysis

166

 

41

Interest rate risk

168

 

42

Notes to the statement of cash flows

173

 

43

Particulars in relation to controlled entities

175

 

44

Contingent liabilities and credit commitments

176

 

45

Derivative financial instruments

180

 

46

Fair value of financial instruments

186

 

47

Superannuation commitments

187

 

48

Operating lease commitments

189

 

49

Capital expenditure commitments

189

 

50

Related party disclosures

190

 

51

Remuneration of directors and executives

192

 

52

Remuneration of external auditor

206

 

53

Fiduciary activities

207

 

54

Life insurance business disclosures

207

 

55

Supplementary statement of financial position

214

 

56

Reconciliation with US GAAP and other US GAAP disclosures

215

 

57

Events subsequent to balance date

226

Independent auditor’s report

228

Shareholder information

229

Glossary

255

Form 20-F cross reference index

256

 



 

Presentation of information

 

Basis of presentation

 

References in this document to this annual financial report refer to the 2004 annual report on Form 20-F filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission.  This annual financial report is prepared in accordance with Australian GAAP, which differs in some respects from US GAAP (as set out in note 56 in the financial report).  Comparative amounts have been reclassified to accord with changes in presentation made in 2004, except where otherwise stated.

 

Currency of presentation

 

All currency amounts are expressed in Australian dollars unless otherwise stated.  Merely for the convenience of the reader, this annual financial report contains translations of certain Australian dollar amounts into US dollars at specified rates.  These translations should not be construed as representations that the Australian dollar amounts actually represent such US dollar amounts or could be converted into US dollars at the rate indicated.  Unless otherwise stated, the translations of Australian dollars into US dollars have been made at the rate of US$0.7244 = A$1.00, the noon buying rate in New York City for cable transfers in Australian dollars as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (noon buying rate) on September 30, 2004.

 

Certain definitions and glossary

 

The Company’s fiscal year ends on September 30.  As used herein, the fiscal year ended September 30, 2004 is referred to as 2004 and other fiscal years are referred to in a corresponding manner.  The abbreviations $m and $bn represent millions and thousands of millions (ie. billions) of Australian dollars respectively.  Financial statements means the Company’s consolidated financial statements for the year ended September 30, 2004, September 30, 2003 and September 30, 2002 included herein at pages 100 to 227.  Any discrepancies between total and sums of components in tables contained in this annual financial report are due to rounding.

 

A glossary of some of the key terms used in this annual financial report is contained at page 255.  In addition, non-GAAP financial measures have been defined at page 69.

 

Forward-looking statements

 

This annual financial report contains certain ‘forward-looking statements’ within the meaning of section 21E of the United States Securities Exchange Act of 1934.  The United States Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 provides a safe harbour for forward-looking information to encourage companies to provide prospective information about themselves without fear of litigation, so long as the information is identified as forward-looking and is accompanied by meaningful cautionary statements identifying important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from those projected in the information.  The words anticipate, believe, expect, project, estimate, intend, should, could, may, target, goal, objective, plan and other similar expressions are used in connection with forward-looking statements.

 

In this annual financial report, forward-looking statements may, without limitation, relate to statements regarding:

 

             economic and financial forecasts, including but not limited to statements under the financial review and report on the directors and officers;

 

             anticipated implementation of certain control systems and programs, including, but not limited to those described under the financial review – risk management; and

 

             certain plans, strategies and objectives of management.

 

Such forward-looking statements are not guarantees of future performance and involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors, many of which are beyond the control of the Group, that may cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed in the statements contained in this annual financial report.  For example:

 

             the economic and financial forecasts contained in this annual financial report will be affected by movements in interest and foreign currency exchange rates, which may vary significantly from current levels, as well as by general economic conditions in each of the Group’s major markets.  Such variations, if adverse, may materially impact the Group’s financial condition and results of operations;

 

             the implementation of control systems and programs will be dependent on such factors as the Group’s ability to acquire or develop necessary technology or systems, its ability to attract and retain qualified personnel and the co-operation of customers and third party vendors; and

 

             the plans, strategies and objectives of management will be subject to, among other things, government regulation, which may change at any time and over which the Group has no control.  In addition, the Group will continue to be affected by general economic conditions in Australia and worldwide, movements and conditions in capital markets, the competitive environment in each of its markets and political and regulatory policies.

 

There can be no assurance that actual outcomes will not differ materially from the forward-looking statements contained in this annual financial report.

 

2



 

Financial summary (1)

 

Profitability

 

                  Net profit attributable to members of the Company decreased 19.7% to $3,177 million.

 

                  Net profit attributable to members of the Company before significant items(2) decreased 10.0% to $3,561 million.

 

                  The current year’s result includes the following after tax significant items:

 

                  net profit of $315 million on sale of shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC;

 

                  foreign currency options trading losses of $252 million;

 

                  write-down of impaired application software of $307 million;

 

                  charge to provide for doubtful debts of $204 million as a result of a revision of an accounting estimate; and

 

                  profit of $64 million on write-back of a provision for costs related to the sale of SR Investment, Inc.

 

The 2003 result included no significant items.

 

Net profit attributable to ordinary members of the Company & significant items

 

 

Shareholder returns

 

                  Diluted earnings per share decreased 19.5% to 196.1 cents.  Excluding significant items, diluted earnings per share decreased 9.5% to 220.4 cents.

 

                  Diluted cash earnings(2) per share decreased 23.1% to 201.7 cents.  Excluding significant items, diluted cash earnings per share decreased 13.8% to 226.0 cents.

 

                  Return on average ordinary shareholders funds decreased from 18.3% to 14.0% (15.8% excluding the impact of significant items).

 

                  Dividends of 166 cents per share compared with 163 cents per share last year.  In 2004, the interim dividend of 83 cents per share was fully franked and the final dividend of 83 cents per share was also fully franked.  In 2003, the interim dividend of 80 cents per share was fully franked and the final dividend of 83 cents was also fully franked.

 

                  Economic Value Added (EVA®)(2) decreased 28.4% to $1,617 million.

 

EVA® is a registered trademark of Stern Stewart & Co.  EVA® measures the economic profit earned in excess of the Group’s cost of capital.

 

Diluted cash earnings (before significant items), diluted earnings, and dividends per share

 

 

Growth and diversification

 

                  Total assets grew by 2.4% in local currency terms.

 

                  Net assets grew by 8.7% in local currency terms.

 

                  Movements in exchange rates increased total assets (in Australian dollar terms) by $4.2 billion.

 

                  Gross loans and advances increased 8.3% in local currency terms.

 

                  Assets under management and administration grew by 10.9%.

 

Assets under management and administration

 

 


(1)       Refer to note 57 of the financial report for developments up to the date of signing this annual financial report.

(2)       Refer to ‘non-GAAP financial measures’ on page 69 and ‘reconciliations of non-GAAP financial measures’ on page 6.

 

3



 

Selected financial data

 

The information hereunder has been derived from the audited financial report of the Group, or where certain items are not shown in the Group’s financial report, it has been prepared for the purpose of this annual financial report.  Accordingly, this information should be read in conjunction with and is qualified in its entirety by reference to the financial report.  Comparative amounts have been reclassified to accord with changes in presentation made in 2004, except where otherwise stated.

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2004 (1)

 

2003

 

2002 (2)

 

2001 (3)

 

2000 (4)

 

 

 

$m

 

US$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Summary of financial performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australian GAAP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

 

7,191

 

5,209

 

7,419

 

7,222

 

6,960

 

6,371

 

Net life insurance income

 

1,012

 

733

 

444

 

(10

)

128

 

332

 

Other banking and financial services income

 

4,831

 

3,500

 

5,010

 

7,006

 

4,749

 

4,124

 

Mortgage servicing and origination revenue

 

 

 

 

378

 

810

 

640

 

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

(137

)

(99

)

(160

)

(155

)

510

 

202

 

Significant revenue

 

993

 

719

 

 

2,671

 

5,314

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operating expenses

 

(6,812

)

(4,935

)

(6,354

)

(8,707

)

(6,470

)

(5,807

)

Amortisation of goodwill

 

(103

)

(75

)

(98

)

(101

)

(167

)

(197

)

Charge to provide for doubtful debts

 

(559

)

(405

)

(633

)

(697

)

(989

)

(588

)

Significant expenses

 

(1,675

)

(1,213

)

 

(3,266

)

(6,866

)

(204

)

Profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

4,741

 

3,434

 

5,628

 

4,341

 

3,979

 

4,873

 

Income tax expense relating to ordinary activities

 

(1,190

)

(862

)

(1,681

)

(962

)

(1,891

)

(1,632

)

Net profit

 

3,551

 

2,572

 

3,947

 

3,379

 

2,088

 

3,241

 

Net loss/(profit) attributable to outside equity interest – Life insurance business

 

(365

)

(264

)

16

 

(6

)

(5

)

(2

)

Net profit attributable to outside equity interest – Other

 

(9

)

(7

)

(8

)

 

 

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

3,177

 

2,301

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

2,083

 

3,239

 

Dividends paid/payable (5)

 

2,405

 

1,742

 

2,255

 

2,266

 

2,080

 

1,858

 

Adjusted to accord with US GAAP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net income

 

2,747

 

1,990

 

3,527

 

3,455

 

1,794

 

3,004

 

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2004 (1)

 

2003

 

2002 (2)

 

2001 (3)

 

2000 (4)

 

 

 

$m

 

US$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Summary of financial position

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australian GAAP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

41,013

 

29,710

 

35,846

 

31,012

 

31,381

 

31,103

 

Loans and advances (after provisions for doubtful debts)

 

247,836

 

179,532

 

225,735

 

212,929

 

197,827

 

187,079

 

Total assets

 

411,309

 

297,952

 

397,471

 

377,387

 

374,720

 

343,677

 

Total risk-weighted assets (6)

 

286,805

 

207,762

 

254,266

 

253,135

 

257,513

 

238,589

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

220,752

 

159,913

 

201,194

 

198,526

 

186,936

 

180,699

 

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

36,134

 

26,175

 

32,457

 

30,425

 

30,257

 

29,879

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

32,573

 

23,596

 

24,257

 

24,961

 

24,984

 

21,051

 

Perpetual floating rate notes

 

350

 

254

 

367

 

460

 

507

 

461

 

Exchangeable capital units (7)

 

1,262

 

914

 

1,262

 

1,262

 

1,262

 

1,262

 

Net assets

 

29,766

 

21,562

 

27,211

 

23,251

 

23,557

 

21,407

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

10,191

 

7,382

 

9,728

 

9,931

 

10,725

 

9,855

 

Ordinary shares

 

7,271

 

5,267

 

6,078

 

7,256

 

8,050

 

7,180

 

Equity instruments (8)

 

2,920

 

2,115

 

3,650

 

2,675

 

2,675

 

2,675

 

Total equity (excludes outside equity interest)

 

25,900

 

18,762

 

24,407

 

23,184

 

23,489

 

21,361

 

Adjusted to accord with US GAAP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total assets

 

418,050

 

302,835

 

398,917

 

380,280

 

377,167

 

344,227

 

Total equity

 

24,818

 

17,978

 

23,862

 

24,005

 

23,987

 

21,836

 

 

4



 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2004 (1)

 

2003

 

2002 (2)

 

2001 (3)

 

2000 (4)

 

 

 

$

 

US$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

Shareholder information

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australian GAAP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Earnings per share (9)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

1.97

 

1.43

 

2.49

 

2.06

 

1.22

 

2.02

 

Diluted

 

1.96

 

1.42

 

2.44

 

2.03

 

1.23

 

1.99

 

Earnings per share before significant items (9) (10)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

2.23

 

1.61

 

2.49

 

2.32

 

2.47

 

2.11

 

Diluted

 

2.20

 

1.60

 

2.44

 

2.27

 

2.43

 

2.08

 

Cash earnings per share (10)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

2.03

 

1.47

 

2.69

 

2.22

 

1.11

 

2.06

 

Diluted

 

2.02

 

1.46

 

2.62

 

2.18

 

1.12

 

2.02

 

Cash earnings per share before significant items (10)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

2.29

 

1.66

 

2.69

 

2.48

 

2.37

 

2.15

 

Diluted

 

2.26

 

1.64

 

2.62

 

2.43

 

2.33

 

2.11

 

Dividends per share (5)

 

1.66

 

1.20

 

1.63

 

1.47

 

1.35

 

1.23

 

Total shareholder return (3 year annualised accumulation) (%) (11)

 

3.8

 

3.8

 

11.1

 

19.2

 

12.8

 

11.3

 

Economic Value Added (EVA®) ($m) (12)

 

1,617

 

1,171

 

2,259

 

1,284

 

1,129

 

1,379

 

Dividends per American depositary share (ADS) (5)

 

8.30

 

6.01

 

8.15

 

7.35

 

6.75

 

6.15

 

Dividend payout ratio (%) (5)

 

72.14

 

72.14

 

56.46

 

56.62

 

56.13

 

57.56

 

Net assets per share

 

19.19

 

13.90

 

18.09

 

15.11

 

15.15

 

14.12

 

Share price at year end

 

26.98

 

19.54

 

30.80

 

33.48

 

25.66

 

25.51

 

Number of ordinary shares at year end (No.’000)

 

1,551,349

 

n/a

 

1,504,635

 

1,534,840

 

1,551,575

 

1,516,111

 

Adjusted to accord with US GAAP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net income per share (9)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

1.69

 

1.22

 

2.21

 

2.11

 

1.03

 

1.87

 

Diluted

 

1.69

 

1.22

 

2.13

 

2.06

 

1.04

 

1.81

 

Dividends per ADS (US$) (5) (13)

 

n/a

 

6.13

 

6.03

 

4.12

 

3.51

 

3.50

 

Dividends as percentage of net income (%)

 

90.90

 

90.90

 

66.69

 

65.59

 

115.94

 

61.85

 

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

Selected financial ratios

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australian GAAP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Average equity (ordinary shareholder funds) to average total assets (excluding statutory funds) (14) (15)

 

5.8

 

5.7

 

6.3

 

6.4

 

6.3

 

Return on average assets (16)

 

0.7

 

1.0

 

0.9

 

0.5

 

1.1

 

Return on average equity (ordinary shareholder funds) (15) (16)

 

14.0

 

18.3

 

15.1

 

9.0

 

17.3

 

Average net interest spread

 

1.94

 

2.18

 

2.39

 

2.34

 

2.39

 

Average net interest margin

 

2.35

 

2.53

 

2.67

 

2.71

 

2.88

 

Gross non-accrual loans to gross loans and acceptances

 

0.46

 

0.65

 

0.76

 

0.87

 

0.68

 

Net impaired assets to equity (parent entity interest)

 

3.5

 

5.0

 

5.7

 

6.0

 

4.9

 

Total provisions for doubtful debts to gross impaired assets

 

198.1

 

138.0

 

141.5

 

143.5

 

182.5

 

Capital – risk asset ratios (17)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tier 1

 

7.3

 

7.7

 

7.6

 

7.5

 

6.6

 

Tier 2

 

4.3

 

3.3

 

3.7

 

3.9

 

4.0

 

Deductions

 

(1.0

)

(1.4

)

(1.3

)

(1.2

)

(1.3

)

Total

 

10.6

 

9.6

 

10.0

 

10.2

 

9.3

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges (18)

 

1.4

 

1.6

 

1.5

 

1.3

 

1.4

 

Adjusted to accord with US GAAP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net income as a percentage of

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Average total assets (excluding statutory funds) (14)

 

0.8

 

1.0

 

1.0

 

0.5

 

1.1

 

Average equity

 

11.5

 

14.8

 

14.5

 

7.7

 

14.6

 

Total equity as percentage of total assets (excluding statutory funds) (14)

 

6.6

 

6.6

 

6.9

 

7.0

 

7.0

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges (18)

 

1.2

 

1.3

 

1.4

 

1.2

 

1.4

 

 

5



 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Reconciliations of non-GAAP measures (10)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net profit to cash earnings before significant items reconciliation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

2,083

 

3,239

 

Adjusted for

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net (loss)/profit attributable to outside equity interest – Life insurance business

 

365

 

(16

)

6

 

5

 

2

 

Net profit attributable to outside equity interest – Other

 

9

 

8

 

 

 

 

Net profit

 

3,551

 

3,947

 

3,379

 

2,088

 

3,241

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Adjusted for

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net loss/(profit) attributable to outside equity interest – Life insurance business

 

(365

)

16

 

(6

)

(5

)

(2

)

Net profit attributable to outside equity interest – Other

 

(9

)

(8

)

 

 

 

Distributions on other equity instruments

 

(187

)

(183

)

(187

)

(213

)

(198

)

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

137

 

160

 

155

 

(510

)

(202

)

Income tax expense/(benefit) on movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

(153

)

40

 

(3

)

177

 

56

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

103

 

98

 

101

 

167

 

197

 

Cash earnings

 

3,077

 

4,070

 

3,439

 

1,704

 

3,092

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Adjusted for

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Significant revenue

 

(993

)

 

(2,671

)

(5,314

)

 

Significant expenses

 

1,675

 

 

3,266

 

6,866

 

204

 

Income tax expense/(benefit) on significant items

 

(298

)

 

(189

)

384

 

(68

)

Cash earnings before significant items

 

3,461

 

4,070

 

3,845

 

3,640

 

3,228

 

 

EVA® reconciliation (current methodology) (19)

 

 

 

 

 

Cash earnings before significant items

 

3,461

 

4,070

 

Adjusted for

 

 

 

 

 

Imputation credit value earned

 

681

 

727

 

Other (20)

 

58

 

(7

)

EVA® net operating profit after tax

 

4,200

 

4,790

 

Average ordinary shareholder funds

 

21,341

 

20,579

 

Adjusted for

 

 

 

 

 

Cumulative amortisation of goodwill (average)

 

1,748

 

1,648

 

Significant items (average)

 

192

 

 

Cumulative movement (after tax) in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities (average)

 

(202

)

(220

)

Average economic capital (21)

 

23,079

 

22,007

 

Cost of capital (22)

 

11.0

%

11.5

%

Capital charge (23)

 

(2,583

)

(2,531

)

EVA®

 

1,617

 

2,259

 

 

EVA® reconciliation (previous methodology)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash earnings before significant items

 

4,070

 

3,845

 

3,640

 

3,228

 

Adjusted for

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Imputation credit value earned

 

733

 

622

 

695

 

545

 

Net amortisation of prior period significant items

 

(272

)

(243

)

(327

)

(25

)

Other (20)

 

(7

)

(67

)

(127

)

(68

)

EVA® net operating profit after tax

 

4,524

 

4,157

 

3,881

 

3,680

 

Capital charge (23)

 

(2,856

)

(2,873

)

(2,752

)

(2,301

)

EVA®

 

1,668

 

1,284

 

1,129

 

1,379

 

Average economic capital (21)

 

24,849

 

24,985

 

23,927

 

20,178

 

Cost of capital (22)

 

11.5

%

11.5

%

11.5

%

11.4

%

 

6



 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

Average ordinary shareholder funds reconciliation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total average equity (refer to note 39 in the financial report)

 

27,802

 

24,111

 

23,847

 

23,427

 

20,261

 

Adjusted for

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

National Income Securities (average)

 

(1,945

)

(1,945

)

(1,945

)

(1,945

)

(1,945

)

Preference shares (average)

 

(227

)

(730

)

(730

)

(730

)

(730

)

Trust Preferred Securities (average)

 

(975

)

(5

)

 

 

 

Outside equity interest (average)

 

(3,314

)

(852

)

(68

)

(67

)

(46

)

Average ordinary shareholder funds (15)

 

21,341

 

20,579

 

21,104

 

20,685

 

17,540

 

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

Other information

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total staff

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Full-time and part-time

 

47,025

 

45,206

 

46,642

 

49,710

 

51,879

 

Full-time equivalent (24)

 

43,517

 

42,540

 

43,202

 

47,597

 

49,514

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Exchange rates (average and closing per A$1.00)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Average

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

British pound

 

0.4055

 

0.3824

 

0.3622

 

0.3626

 

0.3902

 

Euro

 

0.5970

 

0.5648

 

0.5798

 

0.5880

 

0.6310

 

United States dollar

 

0.7265

 

0.6125

 

0.5324

 

0.5227

 

0.6102

 

New Zealand dollar

 

1.1254

 

1.1142

 

1.1992

 

1.2474

 

1.2648

 

Closing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

British pound

 

0.3973

 

0.4072

 

0.3474

 

0.3354

 

0.3710

 

Euro

 

0.5799

 

0.5850

 

0.5528

 

0.5393

 

0.6166

 

United States dollar

 

0.7149

 

0.6804

 

0.5440

 

0.4928

 

0.5427

 

New Zealand dollar

 

1.0682

 

1.1446

 

1.1565

 

1.2135

 

1.3351

 

United States dollar (per A$1.00)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Average (25)

 

0.7263

 

0.6167

 

0.5329

 

0.5181

 

0.6032

 

September 30

 

0.7244

 

0.6797

 

0.5628

 

0.4946

 

0.5415

 

 

On December 31, 2004 the noon buying rate was US$0.7805 per A$1.00.

 

 

 

Group 2004

 

 

 

December

 

November

 

October

 

September

 

August

 

July

 

United States dollar (per A$1.00)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

High

 

0.7805

 

0.7903

 

0.7478

 

0.7244

 

0.7245

 

0.7334

 

Low

 

0.7495

 

0.7447

 

0.7207

 

0.6880

 

0.7001

 

0.6980

 

 


(1)

 

Translated at the noon buying rate on September 30, 2004 of US$0.7244 = A$1.00.

 

 

 

(2)

 

Includes amounts relating to operating assets and operating platform of HomeSide US to February 28, 2002, sold on March 1, 2002, and SR Investment, Inc. (the parent entity of HomeSide US) to September 30, 2002, sold on October 1, 2002.

 

 

 

(3)

 

Includes amounts relating to Michigan National Corporation and its controlled entities to March 31, 2001.  The Group sold this entity on April 1, 2001.

 

 

 

(4)

 

Includes amounts relating to the MLC group from July 1, 2000.  The Group acquired these entities on June 30, 2000.

 

 

 

(5)

 

Dividend amounts for a year represent the final and interim dividend in respect of that year, irrespective of when they are declared, determined and publicly recommended and includes issues under the bonus share plan in lieu of cash and the dividend reinvestment plan.  Dividends and book value per ordinary share and per American depositary share (ADS) calculations are based on year-end fully paid equivalent ordinary shares, adjusted for loans and rights issues as appropriate.  Dividend payout ratio is based on the dividend amounts for a year by cash earnings before significant items.  Refer to page 6 for a reconciliation of cash earnings before significant items.

 

 

 

(6)

 

The calculation to determine the market risk capital component of risk-weighted assets at September 30, 2004, was carried out under the Standard Method as directed by APRA.  In previous years, the market risk capital component of risk-weighted assets was calculated using the Internal Model Method.  The Standard Method as prescribed by the APRA Prudential Standard (APS 113), limits recognition of portfolio effects on outstanding positions and is substantially more restrictive on the rules regarding the matching of positions.

 

 

 

(7)

 

The exchangeable capital units of US$1 billion are recorded in this annual financial report at the historical rate of US$0.7922 = A$1.00.

 

 

 

(8)

 

Equity instruments incorporate preference shares, National Income Securities and Trust Preferred Securities.

 

 

 

(9)

 

Refer to notes 8 and 56 in the financial report for an explanation of earnings per share.

 

7



 

(10)

 

Refer to page 69 for explanations of ‘non-GAAP financial measures’.

 

 

 

(11)

 

Total shareholder return measures the growth in the value of the investment in shares, assuming reinvestment of dividends.  The calculation does not take into account taxation of returns nor franking credits.

 

 

 

(12)

 

EVA®is a registered trademark of Stern Stewart & Co.

 

 

 

(13)

 

Dividend amounts are translated into US dollars per ADS (representing five fully paid ordinary shares) at the exchange rate on each of the respective payment dates for interim and final dividends.

 

 

 

(14)

 

Statutory funds are excluded given the significant restrictions imposed by life insurance legislation, regulations and the regulators thereunder, on these assets. However, current Australian accounting requirements do not allow for these assets and liabilities to be separated and disclosed separately on the statement of financial position.  Refer to note 55 for detailed discussion of the separation of assets from the Group’s total assets.

 

 

 

(15)

 

Refer to page 7 for a reconciliation of average ordinary shareholder funds.

 

 

 

(16)

 

Return represents net profit attributable to members of the Company after deducting distributions on other equity instruments.

 

 

 

(17)

 

As defined by APRA (refer to ‘capital resources’ on page 49 and ‘regulation of the financial services system’ on page 15).

 

 

 

(18)

 

For the purpose of calculating these ratios, fixed charges are comprised of interest on all indebtedness including interest on deposits, and one-third of rental charges (which is used to be representative of an interest factor).  Earnings are calculated after all operating and income deductions, except fixed charges, extraordinary items and tax based on profit and are stated before outside equity interest.

 

 

 

(19)

 

The revised EVA®methodology has been applied to 2003 for comparison.

 

 

 

(20)

 

Other relates to the difference between EVA®’s use of the long-term projected tax rate of 30% and the effective tax rate used for cash earnings.

 

 

 

(21)

 

Average economic capital is a measure of the amount of capital invested in the Company by shareholders which is based on average ordinary shareholders’ funds adjusted for significant items and those items excluded from the calculation of cash earnings (refer to ‘non-GAAP financial measures’ on page 69 for an explanation of significant items and cash earnings).

 

 

 

(22)

 

Cost of capital is calculated based on the capital asset pricing model.  The change in cost of capital from 11.5% per annum to 11.0% per annum took effect from April 1, 2004.

 

 

 

(23)

 

Capital charge is the average economic capital multiplied by the cost of capital.

 

 

 

(24)

 

Full-time equivalent employees (FTEs) includes part-time staff (pro-rated) and non-payroll FTEs (ie. contractors).

 

 

 

(25)

 

The daily average of the noon buying rates.

 

8



 

Business overview

 

Introduction

 

The Group is an international financial services group that provides a comprehensive and integrated range of financial products and services.

 

The Company traces its history back to the establishment of The National Bank of Australasia in 1858.  National Australia Bank Limited is a public limited company, incorporated on June 23, 1893 in Australia, which is the Company’s main domicile.  Its registered office is 24th floor, 500 Bourke Street, Melbourne Victoria 3000, Australia.  The Company operates under the requirements of the Banking Act 1959 (Cth) and Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).

 

Globally, as at September 30, 2004, the Group had:

 

                  total assets of $411 billion;

 

                  over $81 billion in assets under management and administration;

 

                  $443 billion in funds under custody and investment administration; and

 

                  8.4 million banking customers and 2.3 million wealth management customers.

 

The Company is the largest financial services institution (by market capitalisation) listed on the Australian Stock Exchange and is within the 30 most profitable financial services organisations in the world (measure: profit; source: Fortune; date: July 2004).

 

Strategy

 

To meet the challenges that the Group faces following a difficult 2004 year, the Group is utilising a strategy consisting of four core elements.  The strategy is framed around the imperatives of speed to market, sustainable growth and customer focus.

 

The Group’s focus in coming years will reinforce the actions undertaken during 2004 in order to:

 

                  simplify the operations of the business – make it easy for customers to do business with the Group;

 

                  deliver sustainable revenue growth – realise the potential in the Group’s franchises;

 

                  create the right environment for people to excel – rebuild the core of the organisation; and

 

                  embed ownership of effective risk practices – a critical ingredient of good customer service.

 

The Group is united by these objectives.  Across regions and global businesses, initiatives are either underway or being developed.

 

Substantial work is being done to make it easier for customers to do business with the Group.  Operations are being simplified in direct response to customer feedback.

 

The Group remains committed to growth in Australasia and the UK.  The integration of the banking and wealth management businesses, particularly in Australia, represents a strong avenue for growth.

 

Cultural renewal has commenced in earnest and the Group has started to embed a set of common principles to guide behaviours and aspirations.

 

Relationships with key compliance stakeholders have been the subject of intense scrutiny, both externally and internally.  The Group has acknowledged these shortcomings and is working closely with these stakeholders to re-establish positive relationships and to more broadly embed a compliance culture.

 

Business operating model

 

The Group’s operating model for the year to September 30, 2004 consisted of five lines of business:

 

                  Financial Services Australia;

 

                  Financial Services Europe;

 

                  Financial Services New Zealand;

 

                  Corporate & Institutional Banking; and

 

                  Wealth Management.

 

These business lines were supported by the following global functions — Finance, Technology, People & Culture, Risk Management, Corporate Development, and Office of the CEO.

 

The information contained within the annual financial report 2004 is based on this business operating model.

 

Changes to the business operating model

 

In August 2004, the Group announced a number of changes to the structure of its business operating model and executive management team.  The new business operating model will be run along regional lines for Australia, Europe and New Zealand, together with Institutional Markets & Services, which will operate on a global basis.  This new business operating model will be effective for the 2005 year.

 

Australia

 

The Australian and Asian-based businesses will be managed as one regional operation.  This will result in the former operations of Financial Services Australia, the Australian components of Corporate & Institutional Banking’s Corporate Banking, National Custodian Services and Transactional Solutions units, the Asian component of Corporate & Institutional Corporate Banking, and the Australian and Asian components of Wealth Management, being managed as one regional business.

 

Europe

 

The European-based businesses will be managed as one regional operation.  This will result in the former operations of Financial Services Europe, the European component of Corporate & Institutional Banking’s Corporate Banking unit, and the European components of Wealth Management, being managed as one regional business.

 

New Zealand

 

It is proposed that the New Zealand-based businesses will be managed as one regional operation.  Subject to applicable regulatory approvals, this will result in the former operations of Financial Services New Zealand, the New Zealand component of Corporate & Institutional Banking’s Corporate Banking unit, and the New Zealand components of Wealth Management, being managed as one regional business.

 

Institutional Markets & Services

 

The global businesses of the former Corporate & Institutional Banking line of business will continue to be managed together as Institutional Markets &

 

9



 

Services.

 

This includes the Financial Institutions, Markets, Specialised Finance and Services units of Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

Support units

 

The global corporate centre includes streamlined functions that support all the regional businesses, including Corporate Affairs, Corporate Strategy, Financial and Risk Management, Major Projects, People & Culture, and Technology.

 

The information contained in the annual financial report 2004 is based on the business operating model that was in place for the year to September 30, 2004.  This business operating model is described in detail below.

 

Introduction to Financial Services

 

The Group’s Financial Services businesses, or the retailing arms of the Group, provide a range of financial products and services tailored to the needs of their customers.

 

The regional structure of these businesses enables broader authority and more control over distribution, products and services.  Each region is managed separately with a distinct focus – Financial Services Australia, Financial Services Europe and Financial Services New Zealand.

 

The Financial Services businesses in each region are structured to provide customers with solutions to all their retail financial needs.  In each region, the Financial Services businesses have six core business units – Business, Personal, Agribusiness, Cards, Payments, and Asset Finance and Fleet Managementsupported by the specialist units of Marketing, Channel and Process Optimisation, and Customer Service and Operations.   The operations of each of these business units are outlined below.

 

Business

 

Business provides financial solutions to its customers, which range from sole traders to multi-national businesses.

 

Personal

 

Personal supports its retail and premium customers.

 

Agribusiness

 

Agribusiness is dedicated to serving the agricultural sector and concentrates solely on meeting the needs of primary producers, service providers to agriculture and processors of agricultural produce.

 

Cards

 

Cards manages the business and personal credit card requirements of customers.  Cards is also responsible for the personal loan platforms for the Australian region.

 

Payments

 

Payments is responsible for the processing and completion of payment transactions and the development of payment processes and systems, particularly in e-commerce.

 

Asset Finance and Fleet Management

 

Asset Finance and Fleet Management specialises in plant, equipment and motor vehicle leasing, as well as the broader area of fleet management.

 

Marketing

 

Marketing represents the centralisation of marketing and product development functions within the retailing operations in each region.

 

Channel and Process Optimisation

 

Channel and Process Optimisation is responsible for all the electronic delivery channels, call centres, quality delivery of retail products and services, development of major transformation projects and process efficiencies, and improvements within the retail operations.

 

Customer Service and Operations

 

Customer Service and Operations enables the Group to more readily take an end-to-end perspective on what it does and to give greater control over the services provided to meet the needs of local customers more effectively.  It comprises the following operational services – Account Services, Collections, Corporate Real Estate, Lending, Strategic Sourcing, Trade, and Vendor Management.  Customer Services and Operations undertakes a number of specialised business activities on behalf of the Group.

 

Financial Services Australia

 

Financial Services Australia is the Australian retailing arm of the Group that provides financial solutions that meet the needs of its 3.7 million customers in Australia at September 30, 2004.

 

At September 30, 2004, Financial Services Australia had 17,514 full-time equivalent employees.

 

This year has provided challenges for the business as some negative impacts on the Company’s brand and reputation were experienced following the discovery of losses related to the unauthorised trading in foreign currency options.

 

In order to drive business growth and development, Financial Services Australia focused on improving the customer experience.

 

Processes are being reviewed and new systems implemented to improve customer service.  For example, during the year the electronic business lending capability was rolled out across Australia.  This is a time-saving electronic alternative to manual business lending processes.

 

Financial Services Australia’s extensive physical distribution operates to service customers at a location convenient to them.  The upgrade of branches and the building of integrated financial service centres continued during the 2004 year, with 50 branches refurbished and a further 14 integrated financial service centres built across Australia.  At September 30, 2004, there are 34 integrated financial service centres (catering for all customers’ financial advice needs), 219 business banking centres, 108 agribusiness locations, 787 branches, and over 3,000 Australia Post GiroPost outlets (which allows customers to transact banking business at certain Australian Post outlets).

 

10



 

The array of financial solutions available to customers includes a range of deposit and lending products, financial planning, credit cards, payment facilities, leasing, asset finance and transaction accounts.  During the year, a range of new products were introduced, including SMART accounts, which offer flat fee transaction accounts, two new credit cards, which operate on the American Express Company network, and an improved farmers choice package providing long-term interest-only finance.  In addition, Wealth Management and Corporate & Institutional Banking products and services are available such as treasury, equity finance, custodian services, superannuation, insurance and investment solutions.

 

Financial Services Australia’s electronic distribution provides customers with the choice to meet their financial needs when they want via the internet, over the telephone, through one of more than 1,500 ATMs at September 30, 2004 or through an extensive network of point of sale (EFTPOS) terminals.  At September 30, 2004 there were more than 630 ATMs audio enabled for vision impaired customers.  There were approximately 880,000 registered internet banking customers at September 30, 2004.  Only 6% of all transactions (by volume) are now carried out through the branch network, reflecting changing customer preferences and behaviour.

 

Financial Services Australia’s relationship management philosophy supports an integrated financial services model as Business, Personal and Agribusiness bankers work closely with Wealth Management and Corporate & Institutional Banking to identify and meet the life goals of customers.

 

Financial Services Australia has the largest share of business lending (excluding agribusiness) with 25% market share as at September 30, 2004 (source: TNS, measure: credit outstanding), which is the result of initiatives over a number of years, centred on the relationship management model.

 

Initiatives have included the development of Business and Agribusiness banking teams with specialist knowledge and an understanding of the financial needs of customers.  For premium personal customers, Financial Services Australia has a relationship management philosophy where each customer has a personal banker to manage their needs.  Specialists, such as financial advisers and estate planners, are introduced to meet more complex needs.

 

A comprehensive customer relationship management (CRM) system underpins the physical and electronic distribution channels and the relationship management philosophy.

 

This CRM system has the capability to record and integrate a substantial proportion of customer interactions, which enables better knowledge of customers’ preferences and future financial needs.  Analytical capabilities allow this knowledge to be used to identify customer needs and provide leads and information to bankers and financial planners to pro-actively contact customers to meet those needs.  In December 2003, the CRM system won the National Centre for Database Marketing (USA) Gold Award for excellence in CRM.

 

In March 2004, most staff commenced relocating to the Australian operations’ new headquarters at Docklands, Melbourne.  The building was designed to facilitate teamwork, interaction and productivity, and increase employee motivation by providing an excellent working environment.

 

Refer to page 34 for detailed information of the financial performance of Financial Services Australia.

 

Financial Services Europe

 

Financial Services Europe is the European retailing arm of the Group that provides financial solutions to meet the needs of its 3.6 million customers in the UK and the Republic of Ireland at September 30, 2004.

 

At September 30, 2004, Financial Services Europe had 11,765 full-time equivalent employees.

 

The Group’s retailing activities in Europe (UK and Republic of Ireland) operate under four brands.  The Group’s regional banks are Clydesdale Bank PLC in Scotland, Yorkshire Bank PLC in Northern England, Northern Bank Limited in Northern Ireland and National Irish Bank Limited in the Republic of Ireland.  Each bank offers a broad range of financial services to both retail and business customers.  Supporting these services are the products provided by Wealth Management and Corporate & Institutional Banking, offering customers a further range of financial solutions.

 

Clydesdale Bank was established in 1838 in Glasgow and has a long history of support for Scottish industries and communities.  With 226 branches at September 30, 2004 Clydesdale Bank is one of Scotland’s largest retail banks, as well as one of the country’s leading business banks.

 

Yorkshire Bank was founded in 1859 in Halifax, West Yorkshire, and today maintains a strong regional focus in the north of England and the Midlands.  Yorkshire Bank has a strong personal customer base and a business capability.  Yorkshire Bank was acquired by the Group in 1990 and has 234 branches at September 30, 2004.

 

During the year, the Group progressed the legal entity merger of Clydesdale and Yorkshire Banks to reduce associated corporate and support infrastructure costs.  The merger was completed in December 2004.  The separate brands of Clydesdale Bank and Yorkshire Bank will be retained.

 

Northern Bank was established in 1809 when the Northern Banking Partnership was formed in Belfast, where Northern Bank is still based.  At September 30, 2004 Northern Bank has 95 branches, while the Dublin-based National Irish Bank has a network of 59 branches.

 

The 2004 year has seen the implementation of a broad range of initiatives that represent a major investment in the growth, efficiency and quality of the Group’s European businesses.  Growth initiatives have concentrated on building brands, improving sales effectiveness and expanding the Group’s distribution footprint into the south east of England.

 

The foundations are now set for this expansion program with the establishment this year of a network of strategically located financial solutions centres.  Financial solution centres offer integrated business and private banking services to business and high net worth customers and, at September 30, 2004, 8 centres were operating, being in Bristol, London City, London West End, Milton Keynes, Oxford, Reading, Southampton and Watford.  Aligned to this program, the Group also entered the intermediary market, selling Clydesdale Bank’s mortgage products through a range of key broker partners.

 

In February 2004, a new integrated branding program was launched which is designed to instil a number of key brand values – trust, expertise, approachability, and empowerment – into every aspect of the customer experience.  A significant part of this branding program was a series of new television commercials shown in prime time across key market areas in Scotland, England and Northern Ireland.

 

11



 

Efficiency programs are primarily focused on improving manufacturing productivity and the standardisation of processes and business operating models.  A key initiative was the creation of a new branch model, which has seen the introduction of new sales and service structures and the centralisation of administrative and processing functions to allow staff to focus on customers.  This is supported by other initiatives such as the standardisation and optimisation of employee roles and improvements to channel offerings such as internet banking, call centres and ATMs.

 

At September 30, 2004 the distribution network was made up of 614 outlets and 143 business banking centres and premium outlets, supported by two customer contact centres, internet facilities and 1,180 ATMs.

 

During the year, significant advances in the rationalisation and enhancement of products to a single product set supporting multiple brands and distribution channels were made, with the release of a new current account and offset mortgage product.  Another area of focus is the rationalisation of suppliers to deliver enhanced purchasing power.

 

Financial Services Europe has concentrated on operating sound businesses that meet its obligations and responsibilities.  For example, the upgrading of front-end systems enables the requirements of the Financial Services Authority mortgage and insurance regulations to be met.  The system is designed to provide a more efficient platform for sales and servicing.  The objective is to improve customer service by capturing all the relevant information at the point of contact with the customer, and having it flow directly through the processing system.

 

Attention has also been directed to further develop talent and the quality of leadership.  Several initiatives, such as the introduction of long service awards and more flexible working conditions, were introduced to attract and retain quality staff, particularly locally recruited managers.

 

On December 14, 2004, the Company announced that it had reached an agreement to sell its Irish businesses, Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited to Danske Bank A/S.  For further information on the sale of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited, refer to the ‘report on the directors and officers – events subsequent to balance date’ on page 87.

 

Refer to page 34 for detailed information of the financial performance of Financial Services Europe.

 

Financial Services New Zealand

 

Financial Services New Zealand is the New Zealand retailing banking arm of the Group that provides financial solutions to meet the needs of its 1.1 million customers in New Zealand at September 30, 2004.

 

At September 30, 2004, Financial Services New Zealand had 4,324 full-time equivalent employees.

 

The Group’s retail banking activities in New Zealand operate under the Bank of New Zealand (BNZ) brand.

 

The Group acquired BNZ in 1992.  BNZ has a strong brand position in the New Zealand market with comprehensive coverage across the country.  It offers a range of financial services and is one of the largest financial service providers in New Zealand.  BNZ offers innovative products and solutions such as GlobalPlus, a loyalty-based program which includes credit card and home loan products.

 

BNZ is facing increasingly tougher market conditions, characterised by a slowdown in the New Zealand economy and a tightening of competition following Lloyds TSB Bank PLC sale of National Bank of New Zealand to Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited in December 2003.  Partly in response to these conditions, 2004 was characterised by major investment by BNZ in products and services and in its retail network.

 

The ongoing enhancement of the physical distribution network, coupled with improved technology, automation and functionality through electronic and remote channels, continues to be a core strategy.  BNZ’s vision is to provide customers with tailored financial solutions, which are deliverable through a range of convenient and cost-effective channels.

 

The distribution network at September 30, 2004 comprised of 178 outlets including 14 business banking centres, 405 ATMs, and shared access to an extensive nationwide EFTPOS network.  BNZ also has well-established telephone banking capabilities, in addition to its internet banking service catering for more than 200,000 registered users as at September 30, 2004.

 

Continued growth is being driven through BNZ’s CRM strategy called TOPS.  TOPS is a computer-based system that notifies staff of trigger events from customer transactional activity and milestone attainment, resulting in customers being contacted by BNZ at a time when they need it.

 

During the year, BNZ has deployed a new state-of-the-art teller information technology system in its branches, launched new banking products in the youth market, and launched an internet banking service designed especially for businesses.

 

Refer to page 35 for detailed information of the financial performance of Financial Services New Zealand.

 

Corporate & Institutional Banking

 

Corporate & Institutional Banking manages the Group’s relationships with large corporations, banks, financial institutions, supranationals (such as development banks) and government bodies.  With operations in Australia, Europe, New Zealand, New York and Asia (Hong Kong, Singapore, Seoul Tokyo and Labuan), Corporate & Institutional Banking has dedicated leadership teams to provide local, accessible management for customers.

 

At September 30, 2004, Corporate & Institutional Banking had 2,832 full-time equivalent employees.

 

Corporate & Institutional Banking provides debt financing, risk management and investor services and products.  It comprises Corporate Banking, Financial Institutions, Markets, Specialised Finance, National Custodian Services, Transactional Solutions and a Services unit.

 

It embraces the Group’s purpose by devoting considerable resources to understanding the needs of customers, and to deliver first-class solutions that exceed their expectations.

 

This has been a difficult year for the business.  Following the unauthorised foreign currency options trading losses announced in January 2004, Corporate & Institutional Banking enhanced its risk systems and procedures and it is continuing to enhance its risk management framework.  The remedial actions outlined by the Australian Prudential Regulation Authority (APRA) and the Australian Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC) enforceable undertakings in response to this issue are being addressed.

 

12



 

For a detailed discussion of the Company’s losses relating to unauthorised trading in foreign currency options and associated remedial actions, refer to the ‘report on the directors and officers’ on page 84.

 

Corporate Banking

 

Corporate Banking is responsible for the Group’s relationships with large corporations and provides corporate lending products and other financing solutions.  Customer teams are selected to provide the appropriate blend of relationship management, industry knowledge and product skills.

 

Customer coverage is structured along industry segment lines to promote specialist knowledge and understanding.  There are five major industry segments: consumer goods and services; telecommunications, media and technology; industrials, materials and health care; energy and utilities; and property and construction finance.

 

Financial Institutions

 

Financial Institutions manages the Group’s relationships with banks, other financial institutions (insurance and fund managers), supranationals and government bodies, which includes the Group’s correspondent banking relationships.

 

Markets

 

Markets focuses on traded products and risk management solutions.It provides foreign exchange, money market, commodities and derivatives products globally through a dedicated 24 hour dealing capability.  These products assist both Corporate & Institutional Banking’s customers and the Group’s small and medium business customers to manage their diverse financial risks.

 

Markets is active in the debt capital markets, and securitisation and loan syndications markets, helping customers to diversify their financing arrangements and supplying investors with access to a variety of asset classes.

 

Markets also manages the liquidity portfolio for the Group in each of its major markets.  It assists in interest rate risk management and provides short-term funding for the Group.

 

Specialised Finance

 

Specialised Finance supplies a range of financial solutions utilised in large-scale, complex transactions such as project finance, structured finance and acquisition finance.

 

Using its specialised knowledge of the respective legal, commercial, regulatory and financial implications of these transactions, it develops innovative financing structures for customers.

 

National Custodian Services

 

National Custodian Services provides custody and related services to foreign institutions, superannuation funds, government bodies, fund managers, insurance companies and other entities within Australia and New Zealand.

 

The key products offered include sub-custody, global custody, master custody, investment administration outsourcing, securities lending and cash deposit facilities.

 

The Company, through National Custodian Services, is one of the largest custodian banks in Australia (measure: assets under custody and administration, source: Australian Custodial Services Association, date: June 2004) with assets under custody and administration of $432 billion at September 30, 2004.

 

On July 14, 2004, the Group announced plans to close its National Custodian Services UK operations and reached agreement to transfer its customers to The Bank of New York Company, Inc., subject to approval of customers.  The agreement represents an enhancement of a strong relationship with The Bank of New York Company, Inc., which is the Group’s global custodian for offshore assets.  As at December 31, 2004, all National Custodian Services UK customers have either transitioned or agreed to transition to The Bank of New York Company, Inc. or other custodians.  The operation is expected to close by March 31, 2005.

 

Transactional Solutions

 

Transactional Solutions provides a range of products and services including cash management, e-commerce, merchant facilities, liquidity management and international payment services.

 

Customers have access to a committed team that includes a specialist implementation manager, a transactional manager and a dedicated contact person.

 

Services

 

Services is responsible for the management of the operating platform for Corporate & Institutional Banking, including technology, operations and marketing.  These key areas have two regional hubs (Australia and Europe) to promote efficiency, optimise future investment and provide common product capability across five geographic regions.

 

Refer to page 35 for detailed information of the financial performance of Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

Wealth Management

 

Wealth Management works closely with the broader Group to provide customers with an integrated financial services experience.  This involves identifying changing customer needs and providing access to the wide range of services and solutions that the Group offers.

 

Wealth Management partners with financial advisers to provide quality financial planning services including wealth creation, wealth protection, banking, superannuation and retirement solutions to build and protect customers’ wealth throughout their lives.  It also provides corporate and institutional customers with outsourced investment, superannuation and employee benefit solutions.  Wealth Management is focused on four main business activities – Investments, Insurance, Advice Solutions, and Private Bank.

 

At September 30, 2004, Wealth Management managed $81.1 billion on behalf of 2.3 million retail and corporate customers in Australia, Europe, Asia and New Zealand.  In its core Australian market, as at June 30, 2004, it held the largest share of total individual risk business with a 15.1% share of in force annual premiums (source: DEXX&R Life Analysis Report; date: June 30, 2004).  It is ranked second in annual new individual risk business premiums with a 13.6% share (source: DEXX&R Life Analysis Report; date:

 

13



 

June 30, 2004).  At the same time, it was ranked number one in market share of master trusts with a 17.1% market share of funds under management (source: Plan for Life Australian Retail & Wholesale Investments Market Share & Dynamics Report; date: June 30, 2004).

 

As at September 30, 2004, Wealth Management employed 6,048 full-time equivalent employees.

 

Through its business relationships with financial advisers, Wealth Management is focused on encouraging the community to seek financial advice to help them achieve their lifestyle goals.  Wealth Management has more than 3,100 aligned and salaried advisers and relationships with more than 2,600 external advisers at September 30, 2004.

 

Investment in the business has continued with the launch of a new integrated advice platform, AdviserCentral, and ongoing enhancements to investment platforms and reporting and service capabilities in the Australian market.  This places Wealth Management in a strong position to be the partner of choice for financial advisers and enabler of quality advice solutions.

 

Internationally, Wealth Management is growing its competitive advantage by leveraging core capabilities that the business has developed in Australia into the European and Asian markets.  During the year, Pivotal in the UK expanded its current offering to external financial advisers beyond the MLC manager of managers capability to include a business consultancy service and the launch of the MLC Personal Pension Plan.

 

Investments

 

Investments incorporates the following business activities:

 

                  investment platforms that provide investments, superannuation and retirement solutions for retail customers.  This incorporates investment choices ranging from fully-implemented solutions for customers utilising the manager of managers capability, to fully-discretionary options where the customer and financial adviser can direct investments to the offering(s) of their choice.  All of these platforms provide reporting and administration services;

 

                  investment, superannuation and employee benefit solutions for corporate and institutional customers; and

 

                  asset management, providing investment management advisory services including research, selection and monitoring of investment managers under a multi-manager, multi-style approach that underpins Wealth Management’s investment offerings.

 

Insurance

 

Insurance includes:

 

                  life insurance, income protection and other risk insurance cover for retail customers in Australia, New Zealand and Asia;

 

                  life insurance services in the UK.  The Group sold its UK-incorporated life insurance company, National Australia Life Company Limited, on December 31, 2003.  This has enabled Wealth Management to focus on customer relationship management and distribution, rather than product manufacture.  Further, a strategic alliance with AXA was formed to offer commercial insurance to business customers of the Group’s banks in the UK and the Republic of Ireland;

 

                  general insurance agency services (incorporating home and contents, motor vehicle, loan protection, credit card and other general insurance cover) for retail customers in Australia and the UK; and

 

                  group life insurance for corporate, club or business customers to enable life insurance policies to be incorporated as part of employee entitlements.

 

Advice Solutions

 

Advice Solutions provides the financial planning tools and support services for Wealth Management’s network of salaried, self-employed aligned and external financial advisers, including:

 

                  AdviserCentral, an integrated advice platform that supports the delivery of investment, insurance and debt advice;

 

                  business development and consulting services to assist advisers to operate their financial planning businesses more efficiently;

 

                  marketing, business and customer management tools and processes;

 

                  technology, research and technical support, including paraplanning and quality review services; and

 

                  recruitment, education and development of advisers and their support staff, including quality advice programs.

 

Private Bank

 

Private Bank provides financial services to high net worth individuals, including banking, financial planning, superannuation, and access to taxation, estate planning and special expatriate services through external advisers.

 

Refer to page 36 for detailed information of the financial performance of Wealth Management.

 

Other

 

Support functions

 

The Group’s support functions focus on strategic and policy direction for the Group and incorporate the following units: Finance, Technology, People & Culture, Risk Management, Corporate Development, and Office of the CEO.  While these support functions are organised on a global basis, many of their operations are integrated within the Group’s business lines and their contribution to the Group is reported within the results of those businesses.

 

Sale of HomeSide US

 

The sale of the operating assets and platform of HomeSide US to Washington Mutual Bank, FA was completed on March 1, 2002, in accordance with the agreement reached on December 12, 2001.  Under the terms of the sale, the Group received cash of $2,314 million for the operating assets, which consisted primarily of $2,081 million in warehouse and pipeline mortgage loans.  After allowing for transaction costs and triggered costs, primarily employee liabilities, a loss (after tax) of $8 million was recorded by the Group.

 

On October 1, 2002, the Group sold SR Investment, Inc. (the parent entity of HomeSide US) to Washington Mutual Bank, FA.  Controlled entities other than HomeSide US were excluded from the sale.  The assets and liabilities of SR Investment, Inc. and its controlled entities were included in the Group’s financial position up to and including the year ended September 30, 2002 and their results were included in the Group’s financial performance up to and including the year ended September 30, 2002.  The Group received proceeds on sale of $2,671 million for assets with a cost of $2,686 million, resulting in a profit on sale of $6 million after all disposal costs and income tax.  This result was included in the Group’s financial performance for the year ended September 30, 2002.

 

14



 

Competition

 

The Australian financial system is characterised by a large number of traditional and new players and well-developed equity and, corporate bond markets.  There are four major national banks (including the Company) and many other financial conglomerates with national operations offering a complete range of financial services, as well as a number of smaller regional institutions and niche players.  Non-bank financial institutions have been a force in the Australian financial system, although many have demutualised over the past decade to capture capital-related and other competitive advantages.  Non-bank financial institutions offer a wide portfolio of products and services from insurance, investments and superannuation (pensions) to compete in the markets traditionally serviced by banks.  Competition also comes from numerous Australian and, in many cases, international non-bank financial intermediaries including investment merchant banks, specialist retail and wholesale fund managers, building societies, credit unions and finance companies.  Product and functional specialists operate and are important players in the household and business mortgage, credit card deposit and other payment services markets.  The rapid development and acceptance of the internet and other technologies have increased competition in the financial services market and improved choice and convenience for customers.

 

These forces are evident across all of the Group’s businesses in each of its geographic markets.  Within the broader financial services industry, increased competition has led to a reduction in operating margins only partly offset by fees and other non-interest income and increased efficiencies.  The latter has been largely achieved through greater investment in new technologies for processing, manufacturing and retailing products and services.  These trends towards increasingly contestable markets offering improved access, wider choice and lower prices are expected to continue in the future.

 

Over the last several years, a number of regulatory authorities have reviewed competition issues, including the UK Competition Commission with regard to the small to medium enterprise banking market, the Reserve Bank of Australia (RBA) and the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC) with regard to the payments system (refer to ‘payment system reforms in Australia’ on page 17), and the review of the Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) conducted by an Australian Commonwealth Government appointed committee chaired by Sir Daryl Dawson.

 

In March 2002, the UK Competition Commission issued its conclusion on its inquiry into the small to medium enterprise banking market.  The Commission found that major banks in England, Scotland and Northern Ireland, including Clydesdale Bank and Northern Bank, were acting as part of a complex monopoly.  Yorkshire Bank was not named as part of the complex monopoly, due to its relatively small share of the English market.

 

As a result of the Commission’s proposals, the four largest clearing banks operating in England were required to comply with a pricing remedy from January 1, 2003.  The four largest clearing banks were singled out as they were not only considered to be acting as part of a complex monopoly, but were considered to be acting against the public interest.  This remedy has resulted in these banks offering their small to medium enterprise banking market customers a more competitive proposition.  The impact of these changes on the Group’s UK operations has been negligible.

 

In 2003, the UK Office of Fair Trading also obtained further undertakings from the eight main banking groups, including Clydesdale Bank and Northern Bank, relating to the time it takes for small to medium enterprises to switch their main bank accounts to other lenders.  The banks commenced reporting their performance against targets from January 1, 2004.

 

In June 2004, the Australian Commonwealth Government introduced the Trade Practices Legislation Amendment Bill 2004 based on the recommendations reported on April 16, 2003 by an Australian Commonwealth Government appointed committee chaired by Sir Daryl Dawson reviewing the Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth).  This Bill was passed by the House of Representatives on August 4, 2004, and was introduced into the Senate on August 5, 2004.  It then lapsed with the calling of the Australian federal election on October 9, 2004 and is due to be reintroduced into Parliament in early 2005.

 

The legislation focuses on six key areas: mergers and acquisitions, joint ventures, authorisation, third line forcing, ACCC powers and accountability, and small business.  The Group supports a number of these measures as they will provide greater flexibility and accountability in the merger approval process, provide more certainty in respect of pro-competitive joint ventures and simplify the regulatory process for industry reform.

 

Regulation of the financial services system

 

Australia

 

APRA is the prudential regulator of Australian authorised deposit-taking institutions (referred to as ADIs), which comprise banks, building societies, and credit unions as well as life and general insurance companies, friendly societies and superannuation funds.

 

The RBA has overall responsibility for monetary policy, financial system stability and, through a Payments System Board, payment system regulation including the operations of Australia’s real-time gross settlement system.

 

ASIC enforces and regulates company and financial services laws to protect consumers, investors and creditors.  ASIC is an independent government body that regulates financial markets, corporations, securities, futures, consumer protection in superannuation, insurance and deposit taking.

 

The ACCC administers the Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth).  The ACCC promotes competition and fair trade in the marketplace to benefit consumers, business and the general community.

 

Consumer Affairs offices in each State and Territory are responsible for specific credit and fair trading legislation.  Financial transaction reporting legislation is federally monitored by the Australian Transaction Reports and Analysis Centre (AUSTRAC).

 

The Banking Act 1959 (Cth) allows APRA to issue prudential standards that, if breached by ADIs or groups containing ADIs, can trigger legally enforceable directions.  Under the Banking Act 1959 (Cth), APRA has strong and defined powers to direct the activities of an ADI in the interests of depositors or when an ADI or a group containing an ADI has contravened its prudential framework.  These ‘direction powers’ enable APRA to impose corrective action without taking the step of assuming control.  The Banking Act 1959 (Cth) also requires an ADI to inform APRA of breaches of prudential requirements and of any materially adverse events (whether in respect of an ADI in a group or the overall group containing that ADI), and makes provision for the application of ‘fit and proper’ tests for directors and management of ADIs.

 

15



 

APRA has issued prudential standards covering liquidity, credit quality, market risk, capital adequacy, audit and related arrangements, large exposures, associations with related entities and group risk management, outsourcing, funds management and securitisation, and risk management of credit card activities.  APRA is reviewing board composition, and has issued draft prudential standards covering ‘fit and proper’ requirements and business continuity management.

 

APRA requires ADIs to provide regular reports covering a broad range of information, including financial and statistical data relating to their financial position and prudential matters.  APRA gives special attention to capital adequacy (refer to ‘capital adequacy’ on page 49 for current details), sustainability of earnings, loan loss experience, liquidity, concentration of risks, potential exposures through equity investments, funds management and securitisation activities, and international banking operations.

 

In carrying out its supervisory role, APRA supplements its analysis of statistical data collected from ADIs with selective on-site visits by specialist teams to overview discrete areas of banks’ operations.  These include asset quality, balance sheet, interest rate risk management, market risk and operational risk reviews and formal meetings with ADIs’ management and external auditors.

 

APRA also formalises a consultative relationship with each ADI’s external auditor with the agreement of the ADI.  The external auditors provide additional assurance to APRA that prudential standards applying to ADIs are being observed, and that statutory and other banking requirements are being met.  External auditors also undertake targeted reviews of specific risk management areas selected at the annual meeting between the ADI, its external auditor and APRA.  In addition, each ADI’s chief executive officer attests to the adequacy and operating effectiveness of the ADI group’s management systems to control exposures and limit risks to prudent levels.

 

The association of an ADI with related entities is regulated by Australian Prudential Standard APS 222 “Equity Associations”.  Under that prudential standard, the Company is required to obtain APRA’s prior approval for the establishment or acquisition of a regulated presence domestically or overseas.  There are also prior consultation requirements whereby the Company must consult with APRA before establishing or acquiring a subsidiary (other than certain special purpose financing entities), committing to acquire more than a 10% equity interest in an entity that operates in the field of finance, or in certain circumstances taking up an equity interest in an entity in a work-out situation.  Further, without the consent of the Treasurer of the Commonwealth of Australia, no ADI may enter into any agreement or arrangement for the sale or disposal of its business (by amalgamation or otherwise), or for the carrying on of business in partnership with an ADI, or effect a reconstruction.

 

Wealth Management is regulated by both ASIC and APRA.  ASIC administers legislation relating to Wealth Management’s key financial services, including managed investments, superannuation, retirement income streams and insurance.  Its role is to ensure industry participants comply with legislation, while promoting fair, confident and informed participation in the Australian market by investors and consumers.  APRA provides prudential regulation through the oversight of Wealth Management’s life insurance companies and approved trustees of superannuation funds.

 

Non-Australian jurisdictions

 

APRA, under the international Basel framework, assumes the role of ‘home banking supervisor’ and maintains an active interest in overseeing the operations of the Group, including its offshore branches and subsidiaries.

 

The Group’s branch and banking subsidiaries in Europe are subject to supervision by the Financial Services Authority (FSA) in the UK, and in the Republic of Ireland, the Irish Financial Services Regulatory Authority.  The Group’s banking subsidiary in New Zealand is subject to supervision by the Reserve Bank of New Zealand (RBNZ).

 

In the UK and the Republic of Ireland, the local regulatory frameworks are broadly similar to those in force in Australia.  Each of the banking regulatory authorities in those countries has introduced risk-based capital adequacy guidelines in accordance with the framework developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision.

 

The emphasis of the RBNZ’s regulatory approach is primarily on enhanced disclosure and directors’ attestations to key matters.  Under conditions of registration, banks are required to comply with minimum prudential and capital adequacy requirements.  The RBNZ monitors banks’ financial condition and conditions of registration, off-site, principally on the basis of published disclosure statements.

 

The Group’s largest branches in the Asian region are in Hong Kong and Singapore.  The primary regulator in Hong Kong is the Hong Kong Monetary Authority, which is responsible for maintaining monetary and banking stability by regulating banking business and deposits and the supervision of authorised institutions.

 

In Singapore, the Monetary Authority of Singapore is responsible for the regulation of monetary, banking and financial policy including insurance, securities and currency issuance.

 

In the US, branch operations are subject to supervision by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency.  The other key regulators of financial services are the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and the Office of Foreign Assets Control.

 

In the UK, Wealth Management is regulated by the FSA, which is responsible for maintaining market confidence, promoting public awareness, protecting customers and reducing financial crime.  In other offshore areas of banking and wealth management activity, the Group is subject to the operating requirements of relevant local regulatory authorities.

 

Changing regulatory environment

 

Both within the financial services industry and more generally, businesses are working within a changing regulatory environment.  An outline of the more significant current or pending regulatory changes impacting the Group is set out in the following sections.  In response to these and other new legislative and regulatory requirements, the Group has established initiatives to implement compliant business processes with particular focus on improving the customer experience.

 

16



 

Australian Financial Services Licences

 

The Group has obtained from ASIC its new Australian financial services licences issued pursuant to the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).  The Group’s Australian operations are operating under 19 licences representing the wide variety of financial services that it offers.  The Group entered into the new regulatory regime from December 1, 2003, ahead of the conclusion of the industry transition period on March 11, 2004.

 

For a discussion of enforceable undertakings given by the Company to ASIC, refer to the ‘report on the directors and officers’ on page 86.

 

Corporate Law Economic Reform Program (Audit Reform and Corporate Disclosure) Act 2004 (Cth)

 

On July 1, 2004, the Corporate Law Economic Reform Program (Audit Reform and Corporate Disclosure) Act 2004 (Cth) (CLERP 9) became law and introduced a range of disclosure, audit oversight and independence, conflict of interest and other reforms.

 

In relation to financial reporting, many of the disclosure requirements introduced by CLERP 9 will take effect for the Company in 2005.  However, the Company has taken those new requirements into account, and a number of specific disclosures that will be required from 2005 have been included in this annual financial report on a voluntary basis.

 

Operating and financial review

 

Information that members of the Company would reasonably require to make an informed assessment of:

 

                  the operations of the Group;

 

                  the financial position of the Group; and

 

                  the Group’s business strategies and future prospects,

 

has been included in the report on the directors and officers.

 

Non-audit services provided by the auditor

 

Details of non-audit services provided to the Group by the auditor (including the amount paid or payable to the auditor for those services) are included in the report on the directors and officers.

 

Remuneration of directors and executives

 

The remuneration report within the report on the directors and officers includes the Board’s policy regarding remuneration, performance incentives, shares and performance options.  Detailed information regarding remuneration paid to each director and executive, shares, performance options and performance rights granted to each director and executive, and other related information is disclosed in note 51 in the financial report to minimise duplication of information currently required by relevant accounting standards.  The remuneration report includes cross-references to the location of this information.  The concise annual report also includes a detailed discussion of the Company’s remuneration arrangements.

 

Basel II Capital Accord

 

In 1988, the Bank for International Settlements (BIS) developed the Basel Capital Accord that sets out international benchmarks for assessing banks’ capital adequacy requirements.  In response to changes in banking practices, BIS reviewed the Basel Capital Accord and released a revised regulatory framework known as the Basel II Capital Accord (Basel II).

 

APRA supports the introduction of the revised framework, which will commence for the Group from the end of the 2005 financial year with the parallel run of existing and new requirements.

 

The new framework proposes changes in the formulae used to measure banks’ minimum capital requirements and additional identification of risk types.  The framework is structured on:

 

                  minimum capital requirements;

 

                  key principles of supervisory review processes; and

 

                  market discipline (public disclosure).

 

The Group is committed to the implementation of the revised framework and has a program underway to achieve this.  As part of this, areas of impact are expected to include the Group’s risk management processes and public disclosure of its risk profile.

 

The Group continues to monitor developments and is working with its key regulators in Australia and overseas to ensure that the Group’s Basel II program aligns with regulatory requirements.

 

International Financial Reporting Standards

 

In July 2002, the Financial Reporting Council in Australia formally announced that Australian reporting entities would be required to comply with Australian accounting standards equivalent to International Financial Reporting Standards (AIFRS) for financial years commencing on or after January 1, 2005.  The adoption of AIFRS is expected to have a material effect on the Group’s reported financial performance and position.

 

The Group continues to evaluate the areas most impacted by the standards.  Refer to note 2 in the financial report for additional information on the impact of adoption of AIFRS by the Group.

 

Australian tax consolidation regime

 

Under Australian income tax legislation that has now been enacted (tax consolidation regime), Australian resident entities of a corporate group may be taxed as a single taxpayer from July 1, 2002.  During the year, the Company (as the ultimate Australian parent entity of the Group) made an election to consolidate and lodged its first consolidated income tax return.  The decision to consolidate resulted in a decrease in the income tax expense of $150 million, which is reflected in the results of the Wealth Management business during 2004.

 

Payment system reforms in Australia

 

The first stage of the RBA’s reforms on the credit card payment system in Australia were introduced during 2003, providing merchants with the ability to charge an additional fee for credit card transactions.  The Group has not noticed any material impact from this change.  The second stage of the credit card reforms, effective October 31, 2003, introduced a new cost-based approach to calculating credit card interchange fees.  Interchange fees are wholesale fees that banks pay one another.  The cost-based approach has significantly reduced credit card interchange fees.

 

The third stage of the credit card reforms has also been introduced.  In February 2004, the RBA imposed ‘Access Regime’ changes under the Payment Systems (Regulations) Act 1998 (Cth).  The Access Regime requires that the class of specialist credit card institutions supervised by APRA be eligible to apply for membership in the scheme on the same basis as other ADIs.  The Access Regime also requires the removal of certain restrictions and penalties on the credit card acquiring activity of members of the scheme. 

 

17



 

The effect of the Access Regime is to facilitate participation in the scheme by institutions that specialise in credit card issuing, acquiring, or both, and that do not conduct other banking business.

 

In September 2004, the RBA made a decision to designate the Electronic Funds Transfer at Point of Sale (EFTPOS) debit card payment system as a payment system under section 11 of the Payment Systems (Regulation) Act 1998.  This follows the Australian Competition Tribunal decision to disallow banks from reducing EFTPOS interchange fees to zero.  Having designated EFTPOS as a payment system, the RBA may impose an access regime on participants and / or determine standards to be complied with by participants in the system.  After considering whether it would be in the public interest to do so, the RBA has decided not to designate the ATM system as a payment system at this stage.

 

Anti-money laundering

 

In most countries in which the Group operates, measures have been adopted to restrict the financial capacity of terrorists and their organisations, and to combat use of the financial system for money laundering.  The Group continues to develop its business practices and systems for the detection and prevention of transactions that may involve prescribed terrorists or money laundering.

 

In December 2003, the Australian Commonwealth Government announced its endorsement of the global anti-money laundering standards and the proposed overhaul of the Australian legislation.  The proposed reforms will impact the Group’s Australian banking and financial services operations.  Following the public release of an issues paper and a policy paper in 2004, the Australian Commonwealth Government is preparing a draft exposure Bill which is expected to be released by early 2005.

 

UK domestic reforms to retail financial services regulation

 

There have been substantial policy reforms under way in the UK initiated by the UK Government and the UK Financial Services Authority.  These include depolarisation, responding to the proposals of the Sandler Review, reforming soft commission rules and extending regulation to general insurance and mortgage business.

 

Mortgages are now subject to Financial Services Authority regulation for the first time since October 2004.  The Group has re-engineered its platforms in the UK to streamline compliance with pre- and post-sale regulation of mortgages that came into effect at that time.

 

General insurance has also come within the ambit of the Financial Services Authority’s regulation for the first time from January 2005.  Any entity involved in the broking of insurance needs to be authorised as an insurance intermediary.  The Group has identified the relevant entities and obtained the required authorisations.

 

Internal control reporting under the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

 

With effect from the 2005 year, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, and associated US SEC rules and US Public Company Accounting Oversight Board auditing standards, will require the Company to include in its annual report a report of management on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.  The internal control report will be required to include, amongst other things, management’s assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting and a statement that the external auditor has issued an attestation report on management’s assessment.  The Group has a global project in place to enable management to evaluate and report on internal control over financial reporting to the level of detail required by the legislation and associated rules and auditing standards.

 

Organisational structure

 

National Australia Bank Limited is the holding company for the Group, as well as the main operating company.  During 2004, the Company had seven wholly-owned main operating subsidiaries: Bank of New Zealand, Clydesdale Bank PLC, MLC Limited, National Australia Financial Management Limited, National Irish Bank Limited, Northern Bank Limited and Yorkshire Bank PLC.

 

On December 14, 2004, the Company announced that it had reached an agreement to sell its Irish businesses, Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited to Danske Bank A/S.  For further information on the sale of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited, refer to the ‘report on the directors and officers – events subsequent to balance date’ on page 87.

 

Refer to note 43 in the financial report for details of the principal controlled entities of the Group.

 

Description of property

 

As at September 30, 2004, the Group operated around 2,042 outlets and offices worldwide, of which 49% were in Australia, with the largest proportion of the remainder being in the UK.  Approximately 20% of the 2,042 outlets and offices are owned directly by the Group, with the remainder being held under commercial leases.

 

The Group’s premises are subject to continuous maintenance and upgrading and are considered suitable and adequate for the Group’s current and foreseeable future requirements.

 

Certain legal proceedings

 

Entities within the Group are defendants from time to time in legal proceedings arising from the conduct of their business.

 

On August 29, 2003, a civil class action complaint was filed in the US District Court, Southern District of New York, against the Group and others for alleged violations of the US federal securities law relating primarily to disclosure concerning the valuation of the mortgage servicing rights held by HomeSide US (sold in October 2002).  The complaint failed to specify any quantum of damages.  The plaintiffs in the complaint filed their consolidated amended class action complaint on January 30, 2004, and the Group moved to dismiss the consolidated amended class action complaint on March 11, 2004.  It is anticipated that the court will rule on the motion to dismiss during the 2005 financial year.

 

On February 26, 2004, the Company announced that it had received a voluntary document request from the SEC as part of an investigation into certain Australian registrants and public accounting firms.  The document request covers the Company and controlled entities and includes issues relating to audit independence (refer below).  In addition, the Company has provided certain information to the SEC about the accounting and internal

 

18



 

controls of the Company and its controlled entities, including the foreign currency options trading matter and HomeSide US.

 

On July 30, 2004, the Director of Corporate Enforcement in the Republic of Ireland released the report of the High Court Inspectors into certain past business activities of National Irish Bank Limited (a controlled entity of the Company).  Since 1998, when the High Court Inspectors’ investigation commenced, the Group has paid or provided $109 million associated with its involvement in the investigation and the remediation programs implemented or proposed by it.  It is not expected that any further material costs will result from these programs.

 

The Group does not consider that the outcome of any proceedings, either individually or in aggregate, is likely to have a material effect on its financial position.  Where appropriate, provisions have been made.

 

For further information on contingent liabilities of the Group, refer to note 44 in the financial report.

 

Certain services provided by the external auditor and SEC investigation – matters related to independence

 

The Company is subject to both Australian and US auditor independence rules. The US rules apply to the Company as it is a registrant and files reports with the SEC.

 

From time to time, the Company engages major accounting firms to furnish employees to supplement its own staff in performing reviews of loans categorised as requiring management by the Company’s Credit Restructuring unit in Australia.  The Company has no centralised method to identify such employees; however, since October 2003 it has been identified that, at different times during the years ended September 30, 2001, 2002 and 2003, seven employees of the Company’s external auditor, KPMG Australia (and one of its affiliated overseas firms) (KPMG), from its Corporate Recovery Services group, provided certain non-audit services to the Company’s Credit Restructuring unit.  Each of these employees may have performed initial reviews to determine whether a loan file should have been categorised as requiring management by the Credit Restructuring unit (a categorised loan).  Six of these employees also provided review services in respect of categorised loans.

 

These loan review services on categorised loans consisted primarily of reviewing files relating to selected problem loans and approving (either individually or jointly with another colleague of at least the same seniority) credit analyses or credit actions on those loans, including approvals or joint approvals regarding loan loss provisions.  These approvals or joint approvals were subsequently overviewed by a more senior person within the organisation.  For a period of approximately five weeks in 2002, one of the KPMG employees was undertaking functions that included the overview of approvals made by more junior persons.

 

On occasions, up to six of the KPMG employees also communicated about these matters, in the name of the Company, with some debtors.  In addition, some of the KPMG employees that provided these services were temporarily assigned titles by the Company and, in some instances, were provided business cards.  No such services have been provided by KPMG employees from around October 1, 2003.

 

Information to identify the fact that a KPMG employee worked on any particular loan file is not maintained by the Company in any centralised system.  Accordingly, it is not possible to precisely determine the amount of loan files worked on by KPMG employees, nor the associated specific provision for doubtful debts or non-accrual amount in the Group’s financial statements.  To provide some context for the scale of the activities undertaken by KPMG employees, monthly status reports prepared by the Credit Restructuring unit have been used to identify loan files allocated to KPMG employees.  Because these reports were originally prepared for a different purpose (ie. workflow management), they do not identify all relevant files (for example, due to informal reassignment of the loan file to another reviewer), and several reports have not been retained.  Also, the reports do not identify instances where a KPMG employee acted as a joint approver of loan actions or where a KPMG employee undertook preliminary review work to determine whether a loan file should be considered a categorised loan.  The loan files identified in these management reports, and some additional files identified through other means as having been allocated to the KPMG employees, are referred to as the ‘KPMG employee-allocated loans’.   As noted, these do not include all loan files with which the KPMG employees were involved.

 

At September 30, 2003, the total amount of KPMG employee-allocated loans was $181 million (representing 0.08% of the Group’s total loans and advances), including $33 million of non-accrual loans (or 2.02% of the Group’s non-accrual loans).  At September 30, 2002 and 2001, the analogous figures were $259 million and $268 million of loans in total (0.12% and 0.14% of the Group’s total loans and advances, respectively), including $45 million and $89 million of non-accrual loans (or 2.48% and 4.59% of the Group’s total non-accrual loans).  These percentages reflect restated loans and advances, and non-accrual loans for respective years.  The specific provision for doubtful debts established for the KPMG employee-allocated loans was $11 million, $10 million and $31 million at September 30, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.  These numbers are sourced from management information systems designed for purposes other than statutory financial reporting and do not include KPMG employee-allocated loans that at balance date were no longer managed by the Credit Restructuring unit because during the year they had been exited by the Company, fully written off or returned to the business as performing loans.  Such loans do not have a specific provision raised against them at balance date and are not non-accrual at that date.

 

The seventh KPMG employee providing services to the Credit Restructuring unit assisted for a short period in 2001 in assessing whether to categorise certain loans as requiring management by the Credit Restructuring unit.  That activity, while inherently involving credit quality, did not involve specific provisioning or decisions regarding non-accrual status of loans.  The loans analysed by this KPMG employee are not included in the figures for KPMG employee-allocated loans.

 

The provision of loan review services was brought to the attention of the Audit Committee in October 2003 and an internal review of the matter was conducted by management under the supervision of the Audit Committee.  The review included a third party review of certain loan files identified by the Company as having been KPMG employee-allocated loans.  For each of these loans, the third party identified where a KPMG employee had been involved in any financial decision making on the loan, obtained an understanding of the relevant issues that should have been considered and determined the appropriate loan loss provision, if any, that should have been applied.  The third party concluded that, during the relevant period of KPMG employees’ involvement, the loans were properly classified in accordance with the Company’s loan grading guidelines and that the loan loss provisions applied were appropriate.  The Company and KPMG have also provided information about these services to Australian regulators and the SEC.

 

19



 

The Company has received a voluntary document request from the SEC Division of Enforcement as part of an investigation into certain Australian registrants and public accounting firms.  The SEC Division of Enforcement has requested documents and information and is investigating issues since at least as early as October 1, 2000 (the commencement of the 2001 year) regarding auditor independence and regarding the Company’s accounting and internal controls, including the foreign currency options unauthorised trading matter and HomeSide US.

 

During 2003, 2002 and 2001, KPMG employees also performed other non-audit services for the Group, including in the tax and internal audit functions, while on secondment to entities within the Group.  All internal audit secondments were terminated by the end of the 2002 year and, all KPMG secondments have ceased from around the end of the 2003 year.  The Company is investigating these and other non-audit services performed by KPMG, including a loan review and recovery outsourcing engagement performed by KPMG in 2001 and 2002 in which KPMG proposed for Company approval action plans for recovery of certain problem loans and at the Company’s request implemented the plans.  While KPMG has reported that some of these engagements are potential violations of the SEC’s independence rules, KPMG has advised the Company that it does not consider its independence to have been compromised as a result of these engagements.

 

KPMG has also informed the Company and the SEC that during the 2004 year, twelve KPMG professionals maintained savings or checking accounts and three had loans with the Company that are not permitted by the SEC’s auditor independence rules.  KPMG has advised the Company that upon discovery of these accounts and loans, the KPMG professionals were removed from their assignments, the accounts and loans were closed and review or re-performance of the work undertaken by such professionals was conducted by a more senior member of the audit team.  KPMG has also advised that during 2003 and 2002, a number of KPMG professionals maintained savings or checking accounts with the Company.  While the holding of these savings / checking / loan accounts constituted violations of the SEC independence rules, KPMG has advised the Company that it does not consider its independence to have been compromised as a result of these accounts and loans.

 

The SEC is also reviewing services of KPMG relating to potential or actual borrowers from the Company, such as acting as receiver and manager, investigating accountant, monitoring consultant and an agent for a mortgagee in possession.

 

The Company announced in July 2004 that Ernst & Young had been selected as the Company’s new external auditor for the 2005 year, subject to the approval of the Company’s shareholders at the annual general meeting to be held on January 31, 2005.  The Company and KPMG have stated there have been no disagreements regarding accounting or financial reporting matters.

 

The SEC Division of Enforcement has also requested information about the Company’s investment in HomeSide US, which resulted in the recognition of $1,323 million (after tax) impairment loss on mortgage servicing rights (MSR), $1,436 million provision for changes in valuation assumptions to reduce the carrying value of the MSR to an estimated market sale value and a $858 million goodwill writedown in 2001.  Investigations conducted into the circumstances which led to these losses concluded that one of the causes of the write down of the HomeSide US asset was the existence of deficiencies in the staffing and structure of the risk management area within HomeSide US and noted that the absence of a Group executive located at HomeSide US resulted in areas of risk management weakness that the Group identified not being corrected as immediately or rigorously as the Group directed.

 

The Company has also provided to the SEC information about the Company’s $360 million pre-tax losses from foreign currency options trading announced in January 2004.  For a discussion of the foreign currency options trading losses, refer to the PricewaterhouseCoopers and APRA reports, described in the ‘report on the directors and officers’ on pages 84 to 86 and ‘disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting’ on pages 63 to 65.  The SEC has also requested information about the Company’s former head of risk management who, prior to joining the Group in July 2001, had been the KPMG engagement partner for the Company’s audit.  He departed in March 2004 in connection with a review of senior management following the foreign currency options unauthorised trading matter discussed above.

 

While the Company cannot predict action the SEC may take in response to its investigation, it has authority to impose or negotiate a broad range of possible sanctions for any breaches.  These could include requiring the Company to make a monetary payment, entry of a cease-and-desist order or injunction requiring the Company to cease future violations of the securities laws or face substantial monetary sanctions, and requiring the Company to improve the Company’s internal controls or policies, change or curtail the Company’s business, change the Company’s management or take other steps, such as engaging an independent consultant to evaluate and report on the Company’s controls, policies or other matters and the Company’s progress towards improvement within mandated time frames.  The SEC could also require the Company to engage an accounting firm other than KPMG to perform procedures and report on aspects of the Company’s accounts or financial statements relevant to areas raising auditor independence concerns.  However, as stated above, the Company cannot predict the outcome of the SEC investigation.

 

20



 

Financial review

 

Summary

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

Adjust for significant items:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Significant revenue

 

(993

)

 

(2,671

)

Significant expenses

 

1,675

 

 

3,266

 

Attributable income tax benefit

 

(298

)

 

(189

)

Significant expenses after tax

 

384

 

 

406

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company before significant items

 

3,561

 

3,955

 

3,779

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

Adjust for:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Distributions on other equity instruments

 

(187

)

(183

)

(187

)

Significant revenue

 

(993

)

 

(2,671

)

Significant expenses

 

1,675

 

 

3,266

 

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

137

 

160

 

155

 

Attributable income tax (benefit)/expense

 

(451

)

40

 

(192

)

Amortisation of goodwill

 

103

 

98

 

101

 

Cash earnings before significant items

 

3,461

 

4,070

 

3,845

 

 

Year ended September 30, 2004 compared with year ended September 30, 2003

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company of $3,177 million in 2004, decreased $778 million or 19.7% compared with 2003.  Net profit of $3,551 million in 2004, decreased $396 million or 10.0% compared with 2003.

 

Significant items are those individually significant items included in net profit.  The current year result included the following after tax significant items:

 

                  foreign currency options trading losses of $252 million;

 

                  write-down of impaired application software of $307 million;

 

                  charge to provide for doubtful debts of $204 million as a result of a revision of an accounting estimate;

 

                  net profit of $315 million on sale of strategic shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC; and

 

                  net profit of $64 million on write-back of a provision for costs related to the sale of SR Investment, Inc.

 

The 2003 result included no significant items.

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company before significant items of $3,561 million in 2004, decreased $394 million or 10.0% compared with 2003.  Cash earnings (before significant items) of $3,461 million in 2004, decreased $609 million or 15.0% compared with 2003.

 

Net interest income of $7,191 million in 2004, was $228 million or 3.1% lower than 2003.  This was driven by a decrease in the net interest margin from 2.53% to 2.35%, partly offset by lending growth.  The fall in margin largely resulted from the strong growth in lower margin mortgages and fixed rate lending within the retail banking business, as well as a reduction in contribution from the Markets and Specialised Finance divisions of Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

Net life insurance income increased by $568 million from $444 million in 2003 to $1,012 million in 2004.  This was driven by an increase in investment earnings resulting from improved performance in global equity markets and favourable claims experience, partially offset by an increase in policy liabilities.

 

Other banking and financial services income of $4,831 million in 2004, was $179 million or 3.6% lower than 2003.  This outcome reflects:

 

                  lower trading income;

 

                  a reduction in money transfer fees;

 

                  the negative impact of the Reserve Bank of Australia credit card interchange fee reform in Australia effective October 31, 2003;

 

                  lower dividend income following the sale of strategic shareholdings in January 2004;

 

                  the inclusion in the prior year of a one-off benefit on the restructure of the hedging swaps on the TrUEPrSSM preference shares;

 

                  flat loan fees from banking; and

 

                  growth in the Fleet Management and custody businesses following recent acquisitions.

 

The movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities was a loss of $137 million in 2004, an improvement of $23 million from 2003, impacted by the effect of assumption and experience changes underlying the valuation, and the impact of the Group’s election to consolidate under the Australian tax consolidations regime.

 

Personnel, occupancy and general expenses of $6,812 million in 2004, were $458 million or 7.2% higher than 2003.  This outcome reflects:

 

                  increased costs associated with the European defined pension funds, partly offset by a superannuation contribution holiday in Australia reducing Australian defined contribution superannuation expenses;

 

                  higher personnel costs (excluding pensions) reflecting salary increases and growth in staffing levels;

 

                  growth in costs associated with major Group-wide projects – Basel II and International Financial Reporting Standards;

 

                  higher occupancy costs as a result of annual rent increases and relocation costs;

 

                  increased advertising and marketing costs, including the sponsorship of the 2006 Melbourne Commonwealth Games;

 

                  higher software amortisation across the business reflecting prior year investment in infrastructure; and

 

                  $22 million (after tax) write-off of development work associated with the Integrated Systems Implementation program in the first half.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts (before significant items) of $559 million in 2004, was $74 million or 11.7% lower than 2003.  The charge was favourably impacted by the continued focus on credit quality across the business.

 

Income tax expense relating to ordinary activities of $1,190 million in 2004, was $491 million or 29.2% lower than 2003.  Income tax expense has been impacted by Wealth Management products and international activities, to which a wide range of tax rates are applied.  In addition, the decision to elect to consolidate under the Australian tax consolidation regime resulted in a tax

 

21



 

benefit of $150 million recognised in the 2004 year, due to the reset tax values of assets of life insurance subsidiaries within the Wealth Management business.  Further, the income tax expense has been impacted by the decision not to book a tax benefit on the interest expense relating to exchangeable capital units following the receipt of an Australian Taxation Office assessment.

 

Year ended September 30, 2003 compared with year ended September 30, 2002

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company of $3,955 million in 2003, increased $582 million or 17.3% compared with 2002.

 

Significant items are those individually significant items included in net profit.  There were no significant items in 2003.  The 2002 year result included the following significant items:

 

             $412 million (after tax) of restructuring expenses paid/provided for; and

 

             $6 million net profit (after tax) on sale of SR Investment, Inc., including its controlled entity, HomeSide US, which conducted the Group’s mortgage servicing rights business in the US.

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company of $3,955 million in 2003, increased $176 million or 4.7% compared with 2002.  Cash earnings (before significant items) of $4,070 million in 2003, increased $225 million or 5.9% compared with 2002.

 

Net interest income of $7,419 million in 2003, was $197 million or 2.7% higher than 2002.  This was driven by asset growth, particularly in relation to housing lending, partly offset by exchange rate movements and a 14 basis point decrease in net interest margin to 2.53%.  The fall in margin largely arose from the impact of strong growth in housing lending within the retail banking business, which was slightly offset by the funding benefit on the proceeds from the sale of HomeSide US.

 

Net life insurance income increased by $454 million to $444 million in 2003, from a $10 million loss in 2002.  This was driven by an increase in investment earnings resulting from improved performance in major stock markets over the six months to September 2003.

 

Other banking and financial services income of $5,010 million in 2003, was $1,996 million or 28.5% lower than 2002.  Excluding the proceeds received from the sale of HomeSide US’s operating assets and operating platform of $2,314 million in 2002 (refer to page 14 for an explanation on the sale of HomeSide US), other banking and financial services income was up 6.8%.  This was driven by higher income resulting from fee growth with higher volumes in housing lending and transaction fees, partly offset by exchange rate movements.

 

Mortgage servicing and origination revenue was $nil in 2003, as compared to $378 million in 2002.  Following the sale of SR Investment, Inc. (the parent entity of HomeSide US) on October 1, 2002, mortgage servicing and origination revenue was no longer derived by the Group.

 

The movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities was a loss of $160 million in 2003, a slight decline of $5 million from 2002, impacted by the effect of assumption and experience changes underlying the valuation.

 

Personnel, occupancy and general expenses of $6,354 million in 2003, were $2,353 million or 27.0% lower than 2002.  Excluding the expenses relating to HomeSide US of $2,693 million in 2002, total expenses increased 5.7%.  This outcome reflects salary increases, higher pension fund expense, computer and software expenses, an increase in costs associated with regulatory reform and compliance, partly offset by a reduction in the Group’s staff numbers and exchange rate movements.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts of $633 million in 2003 was $64 million or 9.2% lower than 2002.  The 2003 year’s charge was favourably impacted by exchange rate movements.

 

Income tax expense relating to ordinary activities of $1,681 million in 2003, was $719 million or 74.7% higher than 2002.  It was impacted by the accounting regime, which applies to unrealised gains and losses relating to Wealth Management’s statutory funds of the life business.  The income tax expense in 2003 attributable to this impact was $126 million expense, compared to an income tax benefit of $248 million in 2002.

 

Adjusted to accord with US GAAP

 

Prepared in accordance with US GAAP, consolidated net income for the year to September 30, 2004 was $2,747 million compared to $3,527 million in 2003 and $3,455 million in 2002.  There were no individually material adjustments between US GAAP net income and Australian GAAP net profit attributable to members of the Company for the years ended September 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002, other than those disclosed in note 56 in the financial report.

 

Economic outlook

 

This section contains forward-looking statements.  Refer to ‘forward-looking statements’ on page 2.

 

Global economic conditions improved significantly in 2004, with a strong pick-up in the US, as well as in Asia.  Activity in the Euro area also improved, but remained relatively weak and heavily dependent on international demand.

 

Business conditions in the countries that contain the bulk of the Group’s assets – namely, Australia, the UK and New Zealand – continued to fare better than other industrialised economies, mainly driven by ongoing strength in household spending.  Business investment spending was also quite strong in these regions, given relatively favourable profitability, relatively high rates of capacity utilisation and low unemployment rates.

 

The global outlook is for some moderation in growth during the next financial year.  Higher interest rates – particularly in the US – and to a lesser extent higher oil prices, as well as some policy tightening in China, are expected to slow the pace of the global expansion under way.  Growth is also expected to be sustained in the Group’s main operating regions.  In Australia, some moderation in household spending is expected to be offset by continued gains in exports.  In both the UK and New Zealand, growth is expected to slow down, mainly in response to significantly tighter monetary and fiscal policy.  Slower immigration may also weigh on New Zealand growth.

 

The Group’s main areas of operation continue to face similar economic risks and vulnerabilities.  With limited spare capacity, which is vulnerable to supply disruptions, sustained higher oil prices would slow the global expansion.  Already stretched fiscal positions – especially in the US and Europe – could limit any response to any increased geopolitical tensions.  Finally, house prices could soften, after their rapid rises in past years – albeit much would depend on the nature of any economic downturn.

 

22



Net interest income

 

2004

 

$

7,191

 million

2003

 

$

7,419

 million

2002

 

$

7,222

 million

 

Net interest income is the difference between interest income and interest expense.

 

Net interest income decreased by $228 million or 3.1% to $7,191 million in 2004, after increases of 2.7% in 2003 and 3.8% in 2002. During 2004, movements in exchange rates decreased net interest income by $199 million, after a decrease of $124 million in 2003 and an increase of $25 million in 2002. Excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, the decrease in 2004 was 0.4%, compared with increases of 4.4% in 2003 and 3.4% in 2002. The decrease in 2004 was driven by a decline in the average net interest margin from 2.53% to 2.35%, partly offset by lending growth, with margin decline accelerating and lending growth slowing compared to the 2003 year. Consistent with the 2003 year, the fall in margin was largely due to the strong growth in lower margin mortgages and fixed rate lending, as well as a reduction in contribution from the Markets and Specialised Finance divisions of Corporate & Institutional Banking. In addition, higher wholesale funding costs in 2004 placed futher pressure on the average net interest margin.

 

Volume and rate analysis

 

The following table allocates changes in net interest income between changes in volume and changes in rate for the last two years ended September 30. Volume and rate variances have been calculated on the movement in average balances and the change in interest rates on average interest-earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities. The variance caused by changes of both volume and rate has been allocated in proportion to the relationship of the absolute dollar amounts of each change to the total.

 

 

 

2004 over 2003
Increase/(decrease)
due to change in

 

2003 over 2002
Increase/(decrease)
due to change in

 

 

 

Average
balance

 

Average
rate

 

Total

 

Average
balance

 

Average
rate

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Interest-earning assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due from other financial institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

(10

)

(3

)

(13

)

105

 

4

 

109

 

Overseas

 

(200

)

(82

)

(282

)

123

 

(59

)

64

 

Marketable debt securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

255

 

94

 

349

 

122

 

10

 

132

 

Overseas

 

(122

)

 

(122

)

(126

)

(17

)

(143

)

Loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

1,210

 

214

 

1,424

 

1,186

 

(43

)

1,143

 

Overseas

 

35

 

(5

)

30

 

133

 

(308

)

(175

)

Regulatory deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

2

 

(3

)

(1

)

Other interest-earning assets

 

9

 

233

 

242

 

(141

)

(400

)

(541

)

Change in interest income

 

1,177

 

451

 

1,628

 

1,404

 

(816

)

588

 

 

23



 

 

 

2004 over 2003
Increase/(decrease)
due to change in

 

2003 over 2002
Increase/(decrease)
due to change in

 

 

 

Average
Balance

 

Average
rate

 

Total

 

Average
balance

 

Average
rate

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

(4

)

68

 

64

 

109

 

(7

)

102

 

Overseas

 

(229

)

(90

)

(319

)

165

 

29

 

194

 

Savings (short-term) deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

3

 

31

 

34

 

83

 

(1

)

82

 

Overseas

 

(12

)

12

 

 

9

 

5

 

14

 

Other on-demand deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

47

 

84

 

131

 

32

 

137

 

169

 

Overseas

 

(12

)

14

 

2

 

(24

)

(59

)

(83

)

Term deposits and certificates of deposit

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

365

 

313

 

678

 

335

 

(24

)

311

 

Overseas

 

(17

)

19

 

2

 

29

 

(144

)

(115

)

Government and official institution deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

1

 

4

 

5

 

4

 

1

 

5

 

Overseas

 

(8

)

(2

)

(10

)

5

 

(21

)

(16

)

Short-term borrowings

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

254

 

(33

)

221

 

61

 

(3

)

58

 

Overseas

 

31

 

9

 

40

 

(48

)

(124

)

(172

)

Long-term borrowings

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

148

 

74

 

222

 

15

 

(155

)

(140

)

Overseas

 

32

 

7

 

39

 

(103

)

23

 

(80

)

Other debt issues

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

(3

)

(2

)

(5

)

(11

)

2

 

(9

)

Overseas

 

6

 

(23

)

(17

)

9

 

(26

)

(17

)

Other interest-bearing liabilities

 

(1,078

)

1,847

 

769

 

(457

)

545

 

88

 

Change in interest expense

 

(476

)

2,332

 

1,856

 

213

 

178

 

391

 

Change in net interest income

 

1,653

 

(1,881

)

(228

)

1,191

 

(994

)

197

 

 

Average interest-earning assets for 2004 increased by $13.2 billion or 4.5% to $306.5 billion, from $293.3 billion in 2003 and $270.5 billion in 2002. (Refer to ‘volumes’ below for information.) The impact of the volume growth on interest income was an increase of $1,177 million in 2004, after an increase of $1,404 million in 2003. This reflects a continued environment of housing lending-driven volume growth, although there has been a slowdown in 2004. The movement in rates over the same period resulted in an increase in interest income of $451 million in 2004, after a decrease of $816 million in 2003. The increase in 2004 reflects an environment of rising interest rates in Australia and the UK, while the decrease in 2003 was primarily impacted by a fall in rates in the UK.

 

Average interest-bearing liabilities increased by $11.4 billion in 2004, after increases of $15.6 billion in 2003 and $10.8 billion in 2002. The impact of the increasing volumes on interest expense was a decrease of $476 million in 2004, after an increase of $213 million in 2003. The movement in rates over the same period resulted in an increase in interest expense of $2,332 million in 2004, after an increase of $178 million in 2003. The increase in interest expense on other interest-bearing liabilities of $769 million in 2004 reflects an increase in interest expense relating to swaps (an off-balance sheet item). In addition, there has been a continued increase in term deposits (primarily in Australia) due to more competitive pricing in 2004, an increase in short-term borrowings (primarily global commercial paper), and an increase in long-term borrowings in 2004.

 

Interest spreads and margins

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

 

3,822

 

3,792

 

3,613

 

Average interest-earning assets

 

173,071

 

151,225

 

129,458

 

Interest spread adjusted for interest foregone on non-accrual and restructured loans (%)

 

1.89

 

2.37

 

2.67

 

Interest foregone on non-accrual and restructured loans (%)

 

(0.02

)

(0.04

)

(0.04

)

Net interest spread (%) (1)

 

1.87

 

2.33

 

2.63

 

Benefit of net free liabilities, provisions and equity (%)

 

0.34

 

0.18

 

0.16

 

Net interest margin (%) (2)

 

2.21

 

2.51

 

2.79

 

 

24



 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

 

3,369

 

3,627

 

3,609

 

Average interest-earning assets

 

149,051

 

160,169

 

154,282

 

Interest spread adjusted for interest foregone on non-accrual and restructured loans (%)

 

1.91

 

1.86

 

2.03

 

Interest foregone on non-accrual and restructured loans (%)

 

(0.01

)

(0.02

)

(0.02

)

Net interest spread (%) (1)

 

1.90

 

1.84

 

2.01

 

Benefit of net free liabilities, provisions and equity (%)

 

0.36

 

0.43

 

0.33

 

Net interest margin (%) (2)

 

2.26

 

2.27

 

2.34

 

Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

 

7,191

 

7,419

 

7,222

 

Average interest-earning assets

 

306,500

 

293,318

 

270,527

 

Interest spread adjusted for interest foregone on non-accrual and restructured loans (%)

 

1.96

 

2.21

 

2.41

 

Interest foregone on non-accrual and restructured loans (%)

 

(0.02

)

(0.03

)

(0.02

)

Net interest spread (%) (1)

 

1.94

 

2.18

 

2.39

 

Benefit of net free liabilities, provisions and equity (%)

 

0.41

 

0.35

 

0.28

 

Net interest margin (%) (2)

 

2.35

 

2.53

 

2.67

 

 


(1)       Net interest spread represents the difference between the average interest rate earned and the average interest rate incurred on funds.

 

(2)       Net interest margin is net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.

 

Net interest income decreased by $228 million to $7,191 million in 2004, driven by an 18 basis point decline in net interest margin to 2.35%, partly offset by a 4.5% growth in average interest-earning assets to $306.5 billion. Australian net interest income increased 0.8% to $3,822 million, with average interest-earning assets growing 14.4% to $173.1 billion and net interest margin declining 30 basis points to 2.21%. Overseas net interest income decreased by 7.1% to $3,369 million, with average interest earning-assets declining by 6.9% to $149.1 billion, and the net interest margin falling 1 basis point to 2.26%.

 

Net interest income increased by $197 million to $7,419 million in 2003, driven by 8.4% growth in average interest-earning assets to $293.3 billion, partly offset by a 14 basis point decline in net interest margin to 2.53%. Australian net interest income increased by 5.0% to $3,792 million, with average interest-earning assets growing 16.8% to $151.2 billion and net interest margin declining 28 basis points to 2.51%. Overseas net interest income increased by 0.5% to $3,627 million, with average interest-earning assets growing by 3.8% to $160.2 billion, and the net interest margin falling 7 basis points to 2.27%.

 

Volumes

 

Average interest-earning assets for 2004 increased by $13.2 billion or 4.5% to $306.5 billion, from $293.3 billion in 2003 and $270.5 billion in 2002. Growth in 2004 and 2003 was primarily driven by growth in loans and advances in Australia, which increased by $17.5 billion or 13.9% in 2004 (2003: $17.5 billion or 16.2%). However, this was partly offset by a decline in amounts due from other financial institutions in Europe of $5.8 billion or 29.2% in 2004. Loan growth continued to be predominantly in housing lending. For a further discussion of the main factors influencing the movement in average interest-earning assets, refer to ‘gross loans and advances’ on page 52.

 

Net interest margin

 

The net interest margin (net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets), which includes the impact of non-accrual and restructured loans on net interest income, decreased by 18 basis points to 2.35% in 2004, from 2.53% in 2003 and 2.67% in 2002. The decrease during 2004, as with the 14 basis point decrease in 2003, was primarily driven by the mix effect of the strong growth in lower margin mortgage and fixed rate lending and a reduced contribution from the Corporate & Institutional Banking Market’s division. The 2004 year was also impacted by higher wholesale funding costs and the reversal of prior period capitalised interest of $28 million on a large exposure which has been re-classified as a non-accrual loan. A funding benefit on the proceeds of the sale of HomeSide US was recognised in 2003.

 

The interest rate on Australian interest-earning assets increased by 35 basis points to 6.7% in 2004, from 6.3% in 2003 and 6.9% in 2002, while the interest rate on interest-bearing liabilities increased by 81 basis points to 4.8% from 4.0% in 2003 and 4.2% in 2002. The decline in net interest margin in Australia of 30 basis points in 2004 and 28 basis points in 2003 resulted primarily from the mix effect of the strong growth in lower margin mortgage lending, a reduced contribution from the Corporate & Institutional Banking Market’s division and the focus on selective business lending to enhance the portfolio asset quality. The 2004 year was also impacted by higher wholesale funding costs and the reversal of prior period capitalised interest of $28 million on a large exposure, which has been reclassified as a non-accrual loan.

 

The interest rate on overseas interest-earning assets was flat at 5.0% in 2004 compared to 5.0% in 2003 and 5.2% in 2002, while the interest rate on interest-bearing liabilities was also flat at 3.1% in 2004, compared to 3.2% in 2003 and 3.2% in 2002. Overseas net interest margin decreased by 1 basis point in 2004 and primarily reflects a change in product mix towards lower margin mortgage and fixed rate lending products and a decline in personal loans in Europe. The decrease in net interest margin of 7 basis points in 2003 was driven by an increase in structured lending products in Corporate & Institutional Banking in 2003.

 

25



 

Net life insurance income

 

2004

 

$

1,012

  million

2003

 

$

444

  million

2002

 

$

(10

) million

 

Net life insurance income comprises the revenue and interest component of premiums, dividends, realised and unrealised capital gains and other returns on investments under the life insurer’s control, net of claims expense, change in policy liabilities, policy acquisition and maintenance expense, and investment management fees (refer to note 54 in the financial report for disclosures in relation to the Group’s life insurance business).

 

Net life insurance income increased by $568 million to $1,012 million income in 2004, from $444 million in 2003 and a $10 million loss in 2002.

 

Life insurance revenue increased by $2,139 million to $5,847 million in 2004 from $3,708 million in 2003 and $146 million in 2002. This increase was impacted by an increase in investment revenue (increase of $2,083 million in 2004 and $3,747 million in 2003) reflecting improvement in the performance of global equity markets. This was offset by an increase in the change in policy liabilities of $1,850 million to $3,368 million in 2004 from $1,518 million in 2003. There was a further offset within income tax expense, which includes the tax expense for policyholders relating to investment income. Premium and related revenue increased $56 million, or 5.9%, to $1,005 million due to growth in average in force premiums for personal and group protection products, and strong annuities sales. This was partly offset by reduced earnings as a result of the sale of National Australia Life Company Limited in December 2003.

 

In 2003 premium and related revenue decreased $185 million, or 16.3%, to $949 million as a result of decreased premium revenue from the international businesses arising from the strength of the Australian dollar, decreased investment business sales in Australia and a decline in premiums from the closed book of traditional business. This decrease was partly offset by increased insurance premiums reflecting growth in volumes.

 

Life insurance expenses increased by $1,571 million to $4,835 million in 2004 from $3,264 million in 2003 and $156 million in 2002. This was due to the increase in change in policy liabilities resulting from the improved performance of global equity markets, and is consistent with the increase in investment revenue during 2004 and 2003. Claims expense decreased $256 million, or 26.7%, to $702 million, as a result of decreased claims due to the sale of National Australia Life Company Limited in December 2003, and a decrease in claims driven by higher surrenders in 2003, which did not occur in 2004, due to the withdrawal from the traditional life business. In 2003, claims expense increased $2 million, or 0.2%, reflecting higher surrenders in the closed traditional life business and increased insurance claims as a result of volume growth, partly offset by the impact of the strengthening Australian dollar reducing claims expense from the international businesses.

 

In addition, net life insurance income includes investment revenue attributable to consolidated registered schemes of the Group’s life insurance statutory funds, with a corresponding increase in net profit attributable to outside equity interest.

 

Other banking and financial services income

 

2004

 

$

4,831

 million

2003

 

$

5,010

 million

2002

 

$

7,006

 million

 

Other banking and financial services income includes loan fees from banking, money transfer fees, fees and commissions, treasury-related income, investment management fees, fleet management fees and other income (including rental income, dividends received and profit on sale of property, plant and equipment and other assets).

 

Other banking and financial services income decreased by $179 million, or 3.6%, to $4,831 million in 2004, after a decrease of 28.5% in 2003 and an increase of 47.5% in 2002. Refer below for a detailed analysis of the main categories of other banking and financial services income.

 

Loan fees from banking

 

2004

 

$

1,447

 million

2003

 

$

1,441

 million

2002

 

$

1,361

 million

 

Loan fees from banking primarily consist of acceptance fees for accepting bills of exchange, application fees to cover costs of establishing lending facilities, commitment fees to compensate for undrawn funds set aside for a customer’s ultimate use, and service fees to cover costs of maintaining credit facilities.

 

Loan fees from banking increased by $6 million, or 0.4%, to $1,447 million in 2004, after increases of 5.9% in 2003 and 2.0% in 2002. The flat loan fees result reflects solid bill fee income growth in Australia, offset by the impact of changing customer behaviour to avoid fees and competitive pricing across all regions. Lending growth achieved in 2003, primarily in relation to housing in Australia and New Zealand, is reflected in the increase in loan fees from banking of $80 million, or 5.9%, in 2003.

 

26



 

Money transfer fees

 

2004

 

$

983

 million

2003

 

$

1,026

 million

2002

 

$

1,014

 million

 

Money transfer fees are fees earned on the transfer of monies between accounts and/or countries and also include fees for bank cheques and teletransfers, dishonours and special clearances, and periodical payments.

 

Money transfer fees decreased by $43 million, or 4.2%, to $983 million in 2004, after an increase of 1.2% in 2003 and a decrease of 2.8% in 2002. This decrease reflects customers moving to lower cost transaction channels and a reduction in fees as a result of competition. The $12 million increase in 2003 reflected sustained activity across all regions.

 

Fees and commissions

 

2004

 

$

1,221

 million

2003

 

$

1,158

 million

2002

 

$

1,118

 million

 

Fees and commissions consist of fees charged to cover the costs of establishing credit card facilities, commissions from selling insurance and investment products and other fees.

 

Fees and commissions increased by $63 million, or 5.4%, to $1,221 million in 2004, after an increase of 3.6% in 2003 and 12.0% in 2002. This increase is primarily due to increased contributions from life commission income in the UK, increased contributions from Plum Financial Services Group, higher fees as a result of growth in funds under management, and increased commissions due to growth in trading volumes, partly offset by negative impact of the Reserve Bank of Australia credit interchange fee reform, which was effective October 31, 2003. In 2003, the increase reflected higher fees from structured finance transactions, which in part was offset by the outsoucing of the merchant acquiring business in Europe.

 

Trading income

 

2004

 

$

575

 million

2003

 

$

625

 million

2002

 

$

563

 million

 

Trading income includes all realised and unrealised profits and losses resulting directly from foreign exchange trading activities, trading securities and interest rate-related and other derivative trading activities.

 

Trading income (excluding significant items) decreased by $50 million, or 8.0%, to $575 million in 2004, after an increase of 11.0% in 2003 and a decrease of 21.9% in 2002. The decrease in 2004 is a result of a benign trading environment influenced by flatter yield curves and reduced volatility in interest rate and foreign exchange environments. The result was also impacted by the closure of the currency options desk from January 2004 and the inability of Corporate & Institutional Banking to offer a full suite of products to customers following the closure. It was also impacted by a reduced risk profile in response to the Group’s revised risk management policy, which was issued following the unauthorised foreign currency options trading losses incident. The increase in 2003 reflected higher interest rate income due to increased activity within Corporate & Institutional Banking. The impact of this was partially offset by lower foreign exchange derivative income.

 

In January 2004, the Company announced that it has identified losses relating to unauthorised trading in foreign currency options. Based on its assessment, the Company announced a total loss of $360 million before tax, arising from the unauthorised foreign currency options trading, which has been classified as a significant item. The Company analysed the amount of losses that were incurred during the year ended September 30, 2003. This 2003 amount was estimated at $66 million ($42 million due to false transactions and $24 million due to valuation adjustments) before tax, which is included in the $360 million total loss. Under applicable accounting principles, based on a quantitative and qualitative assessment of the loss incurred in 2003, that amount was not recognised in the financial statements for that year, which were published prior to discovery of the losses. The Company recognised the total losses during the 2004 year.

 

For a more detailed discussion of the Company’s losses relating to unauthorised trading in foreign currency options, refer to page 84 of the ‘report on the directors and officers’.

 

Investment management fees

 

2004

 

$

321

 million

2003

 

$

303

 million

2002

 

$

297

 million

 

Investment management fee income relates to management fees received for services rendered acting as a responsible entity and/or an approved trustee for retail and wholesale unit trusts.

 

27



 

Investment management fees increased by $18 million, or 5.9%, to $321 million in 2004, after an increase of 2.0% in 2003 and a decrease of 2.6% in 2002. The increase in 2003 and 2004 reflects growth in management fees due to an increase in funds under management, increased trading volumes and higher sales of investment products.

 

Fleet management fees

 

2004

 

$

108

 million

2003

 

$

85

 million

2002

 

$

56

 million

 

Fleet management fees consist of fleet and custom fleet management fees. Specifically, fleet management fees include fleet management, maintenance and fleet fuel card fees, whilst custom fleet management fees includes operating lease, sale and leaseback and management service fees.

 

Fleet management fees increased by $23 million, or 27.1%, to $108 million in 2004, after an increase of 51.8% in 2003 and 3.7% in 2002. The increase primarily reflects continued growth in the custom fleet businesses following acquisitions during the 2003 year. The increase in 2004 also reflects a change in the accounting treatment for vehicle registrations income during the year, with a corresponding increase in expenses.

 

Other income

 

2004

 

$

176

 million

2003

 

$

372

 million

2002

 

$

2,597

 million

 

Other income includes rental income, dividends received, profit on sale of property, plant and equipment and other assets, other general insurance income and sundry income.

 

Other income decreased by $196 million, or 52.7%, to $176 million in 2004, after a decrease of 85.7% in 2003 and an increase of 783.3% in 2002. The 2003 result included a one-off gain on the restructure of hedging swaps in connection with the TrUEPrSSM preference shares, not repeated in 2004. The decrease in 2004 further reflects lower dividend income as a result of the sale of shareholdings in St George Bank Limited and a reduction in proceeds from the sale of property, plant and equipment. The decrease in 2003 was impacted by the sale of HomeSide US. Excluding this sale, other income increased by 56.3% in 2003 as a reflection of the one-off gain on the restructure of hedging swaps in connection with the TrUEPrSSM preference shares in 2003.

 

Mortgage servicing and origination revenue

 

Net mortgage servicing fees related to HomeSide US and represented fee income derived from mortgage servicing activities less amortisation of capitalised costs. Net mortgage origination revenue also related to HomeSide US and comprised fees earned on the origination of mortgage loans, gains and losses on the sale of loans, gains and losses resulting from hedges of secondary marketing activity, and fees charged to review loan documents for purchased loan production.

 

On March 1, 2002, HomeSide US sold its operating assets and operating platform to Washington Mutual Bank, FA. Following this sale, mortgage origination revenue was no longer derived by the Group. On October 1, 2002, the Group sold SR Investment, Inc., the parent entity of HomeSide US, to Washington Mutual Bank, FA. The sale resulted in the complete disposal of the associated mortgage servicing rights. Following this sale, mortgage servicing fees were no longer derived by the Group. Prior to the sale of SR Investment, Inc. and the operating assets of HomeSide US, $378 million of income was earned in the 2002 year.

 

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

2004

 

$

(137

) million

2003

 

$

(160

) million

2002

 

$

(155

) million

 

Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1038 “Life Insurance Business” requires life insurance entities of the Group to value their investments in controlled entities at net market value, with changes in the excess of net market value over net assets reflected in the consolidated statement of financial performance.

 

The revaluation of life insurance entities’ interest in controlled entities gave rise to a loss of $137 million before tax, reflecting the movement in the excess of the net market value over the net assets of companies owned by National Australia Financial Management Limited (NAFiM), adjusted for capital. Values shown are directors’ market valuations. The valuations are based on discounted cash flow (DCF) valuations prepared by Tillinghast-Towers Perrin, using, for the Australian and New Zealand entities, risk discount rates specified by the directors.

 

28



 

NAFiM subsidiaries market value summary

 

 

 

Net
assets (1)

 

Value of
in force
business

 

Embedded
value

 

Value of
future new
business (2)

 

Net
market
value

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Net market value at September 30, 2003

 

1,572

 

2,463

 

4,035

 

2,598

 

6,633

 

Operating profit after tax (3)

 

270

 

 

270

 

 

270

 

Net capital transfers (4)

 

(216

)

(41

)

(257

)

 

(257

)

Increase in shareholders’ net assets

 

54

 

(41

)

13

 

 

13

 

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities, components before tax:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Roll forward and business assumptions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Roll forward of DCF (5)

 

 

385

 

385

 

 

385

 

Change in assumptions and experience

 

 

(354

)

(354

)

(105

)

(459

)

Tax consolidations – transfer of franking credits to the Group

 

 

(63

)

(63

)

 

(63

)

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities before tax (6)

 

 

(32

)

(32

)

(105

)

(137

)

Excess movements (7)

 

(21

)

21

 

 

 

 

Net market value at September 30, 2004

 

1,605

 

2,411

 

4,016

 

2,493

 

6,509

 

 


(1)

 

Net assets represent the shareholder capital, reserves and retained profits. A portion of these net assets is non-distributable, as it is required to support regulatory capital requirements. The cost of this capital support is reflected in the value of in force business.

 

 

 

(2)

 

For some smaller entities, the projection of future new business and in force business is combined for the purposes of valuation. For these entities, the value of future new business is reflected in the embedded value.

 

 

 

(3)

 

Operating profit after tax is before the movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities and excludes the profits of entities outside the market value accounting environment (that is, it excludes the operating profit after tax from NAFiM’s own business, and other entities not owned by NAFiM)

 

 

 

(4)

 

Net capital transfers represent movements in value such as the payment of dividends, capital injections and reductions, acquisitions of subsidiaries and foreign exchange movements on intra-group debt related to international subsidiaries.

 

 

 

(5)

 

The roll forward of the DCF is calculated on operating profit of $320 million, before the deduction of the $50 million prior year adjustment. The change in assumptions and experience item does not include the $50 million prior year adjustment.

 

 

 

(6)

 

The movement in excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities before tax does not include revaluation uplift in respect of NAFiM’s own business. AASB 1038 requires assets of a life company to be valued at net market value; since NAFiM is the parent life entity, the change in market value of its own life business is not brought to account.

 

 

 

(7)

 

Excess movements represent excess on the increase of the Group’s interest in Plum Financial Services Limited and Advance MLC Assurance Co. Limited and foreign exchange impacts on the net assets of international subsidiaries and market value of intra-group debt.

 

The components that contributed to the $137 million loss ($16 million profit after tax) in the excess of net market value of the life insurance controlled entities comprised:

 

                       the effect of assumption and experience changes primarily comprising lower near-term sales for domestic Retail Investments business, reflecting the impact of slower recovery of retail funds flow from the recent market downturn and the closure of the MLC Platinum Global Fund to new MLC Investment Trust investors, partly offset by lower planned expenses in line with lower business volumes;

 

                       the anticipated growth in the business above current levels of operating profit (ie. the roll forward of the DCF); and

 

                       the negative impact from the transfer of franking credits from NAFiM’s subsidiaries.

 

The components that contributed to the $160 million ($200 million after tax) negative movement in 2003 in the excess of net market value of the life insurance controlled entities comprised:

 

                       the effect of assumption and experience changes primarily comprising lower retail sales volumes than anticipated at September 2002, the effect of weaker operating environments reducing the values of the international businesses, and the overall strengthening in the Australian dollar. The impact of these factors were partially mitigated by the active management of expenses; and

 

                       the anticipated growth in the business above current levels of operating profit (ie. the roll forward of the DCF).

 

29



 

Significant revenue

 

Sale of strategic shareholdings

 

On January 28, 2004, the Company sold its strategic shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC. The Group received proceeds from the sale of $993 million for assets with a cost base of $678 million, resulting in a profit on sale of $315 million (after tax).

 

Proceeds from the sale of SR Investment, Inc.

 

The results and assets and liabilities of SR Investment, Inc. and its controlled entities were included up to and including the year to September 30, 2002. On October 1, 2002, the Group sold SR Investment, Inc. (the parent entity of HomeSide US) to Washington Mutual Bank, FA. Controlled entities other than HomeSide US were excluded from the sale. The Group received proceeds on sale of $2,671 million for assets with a cost of $2,686 million, resulting in a profit on sale of $6 million after all disposal costs, including income tax.

 

Operating expenses

 

Personnel expenses

 

2004

 

$

3,616

 million

2003

 

$

3,416

 million

2002

 

$

3,379

 million

 

Personnel expenses increased by $200 million or 5.9% to $3,616 million in 2004, after an increase of 1.1% in 2003 and a decrease of 9.3% in 2002. This result reflects market-based salary increases across regions and growth in staffing (full-time equivalent employee) levels (refer to ‘employees’ on page 42), higher superannuation costs associated with the European defined benefits pension funds and increased contractor costs largely in relation to regulatory reform projects such as Basel II Capital Accord and International Financial Reporting Standards. The impact of this was partly offset by lower superannuation costs in relation to a superannuation contribution holiday in Australia, which reduced the Australian defined contribution superannuation expense and a reduction in performance-based compensation as a result of the decline in EVA® during the year.

 

Excluding the impact of the sale of HomeSide US, personnel costs increased by 5.7% during 2003. This increase reflected market-based salary increases across regions, increased defined benefit pension fund expenses and higher contractor costs; which were partly offset by a reduction in staff numbers.

 

Occupancy expenses

 

2004

 

$

591

 million

2003

 

$

556

 million

2002

 

$

559

 million

 

Occupancy expenses increased by $35 million or 6.3% to $591 million in 2004, after a decrease of 0.5% in 2003 and 4.8% in 2002. The increase primarily reflects appreciating rental rates as a result of annual market-based rent reviews and costs associated with the move of staff to the Australian operations new headquarters at Docklands, Melbourne, which commenced in March 2004.

 

The $3 million decrease in 2003 reflected a reduced contribution from HomeSide US following its sale, offset by appreciating rental rates and on-costs (ie. security expenses) and higher costs associated with the sale and lease-back of buildings in Australia and New Zealand.

 

General expenses

 

2004

 

$

2,605

 million

2003

 

$

2,382

 million

2002

 

$

4,769

 million

 

General expenses increased by $223 million or 9.4% to $2,605 million in 2004, after a decrease of 50.1% in 2003 and an increase of 121.0% in 2002. The increase has been impacted by the large growth in advertising costs, including costs associated with the sponsorship of the 2006 Commonwealth Games in Melbourne and new product launches. It has also been impacted by higher professional fees and other expenses associated with industry-wide regulatory reforms such as as Basel II Capital Accord, International Financial Reporting Standards, Financial Services Reform Act, and the United States Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. Fees and commission expenses also increased in line with the increase in trading activity within Wealth Management, as did software amortisation reflecting prior period investments in infrastructure.

 

Excluding the impact of the sale of HomeSide US of $2,533 million incurred in the 2002 year, general expenses increased $146 million during 2003. The increase was impacted by the write-off of development costs associated with the European Monetary Unit and global roll out of SAP core banking module. Contributing to the increase were higher professional fees and other expenses associated with the industry-wide regulatory reforms, outlined above. The increase was partially offset by lower compensation provided for investors relating to a reduction in unit prices, lower fees and commissions within Wealth Management, and a reduction in communications, postage and stationery costs as a result of telecommunication contract renegotiations within Australia and Europe.

 

(Refer to notes 4 and 5 in the financial report for details of revenue and expense items.)

 

30



 

Charge to provide for doubtful debts

 

2004

 

$

559

 million

2003

 

$

633

 million

2002

 

$

697

 million

 

The total charge to provide for doubtful debts (before significant items) decreased by $74 million or 11.7% to $559 million in 2004, after a decrease of 9.2% in 2003 and 29.5% in 2002. Refer to ‘significant expenses’ below for a discussion of the significant item in relation to the charge to provide for doubtful debts in 2004.

 

(The nature of general and specific provisioning is explained in note 1(p)(i) in the financial report.)

 

The charge in Australia decreased by $77 million to $244 million in 2004, after an increase of 197.2% in 2003 and a decrease of 77.2% in 2002. The 2003 charge was unfavourably impacted by a small number of large corporate exposures in Financial Services Australia and Corporate & Institutional Banking, which were not experienced in 2004. The 2002 charge reflected the favourable impact of a review of the portfolio, with a smaller residual impact in 2003.

 

The charge in Europe decreased by $2 million or 0.7% to $275 million in 2004, after a decrease of 28.1% in 2003 and 2.8% in 2002. The declining charge reflects the favourable impact of the change in the mix of the loan portfolio experienced over the past two years, with falling personal loans and higher housing volumes. In addition, 2003 was favourably impacted by the recovery of a large corporate exposure. The decrease in 2004 was partly offset by an increase in provisioning relating to corporate exposures in Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

The charge in New Zealand increased by $9 million to $20 million in 2004, compared with a charge of $11 million in 2003 and a credit of $12 million in 2002. The increase has primarily resulted from a charge in relation to a large Agribusiness exposure in the 2004 year. The $23 million increase in the 2003 year reflected a charge in relation to a large corporate exposure in Corporate & Institutional Banking, whilst 2002 reflected the favourable impact of a review of the portfolio resulting in a provisioning writeback.

 

The charge in the United States decreased by $15 million or 44.1% to $19 million in 2004, after a decrease of 84.2% in 2003 and an increase of 100.9% in 2002. The decrease in 2004 has resulted from a review of the portfolio favourably impacting the charge to provide for doubtful debts. The 2002 charge included the impact of a large corporate exposure in Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

The charge in Asia increased by $11 million to $1 million in 2004 compared with a credit of $10 million in 2003 and a charge of $1 million in 2002. The 2003 charge reflected the favourable impact of a review of the portfolio in that year resulting in a provisioning write-back.

 

Charge to provide for doubtful debts (before significant items) by region

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australia

 

244

 

321

 

108

 

Europe

 

275

 

277

 

385

 

New Zealand

 

20

 

11

 

(12

)

United States

 

19

 

34

 

215

 

Asia

 

1

 

(10

)

1

 

Total charge to provide for doubtful debts

 

559

 

633

 

697

 

 

Net write-offs (bad debts written off less recoveries) in 2004 were $605 million compared with $798 million in 2003 and $814 million in 2002. As a percentage of risk-weighted assets, net write-offs were 0.2% in 2004, 0.3% in 2003 and 0.3% in 2002.

 

Percentage of risk-weighted assets (before significant items)

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

Australia (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Charge

 

0.15

 

0.22

 

0.08

 

Net write-offs

 

0.19

 

0.28

 

0.23

 

Europe (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Charge

 

0.33

 

0.42

 

0.52

 

Net write-offs

 

0.27

 

0.50

 

0.54

 

New Zealand (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Charge

 

0.07

 

0.04

 

(0.05

)

Net write-offs

 

0.07

 

0.05

 

0.05

 

United States (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Charge

 

0.21

 

0.35

 

1.35

 

Net write-offs

 

0.48

 

0.34

 

0.64

 

Asia (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Charge

 

0.02

 

(0.23

)

0.02

 

Net write-offs

 

0.02

 

0.05

 

(0.02

)

Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Charge

 

0.19

 

0.25

 

0.28

 

Net write-offs

 

0.21

 

0.31

 

0.32

 

 


(1)            Ratio calculated as a percentage of risk-weighted assets of Australia, Europe, New Zealand, United States and Asia, as appropriate.

 

31



 

The overall provision for doubtful debts (refer to notes 1(p)(i) and 17 in the financial report) is augmented as necessary by a charge against profit having regard to both specific and general factors. An explanation of the Group’s lending and risk analysis policies is provided within ‘risk management’ on page 58.

 

Significant expenses

 

General provision for doubtful debts – revision of accounting estimate

 

During the year, the Group reviewed the level of the general provision for doubtful debts and the application of the associated statistically-based provisioning methodology, taking into account recent experience, industry practice and emerging developments. As a result, the discount rate in the statistical model was reduced from the shareholder cost of capital to a rate akin to a risk-free debt rate, resulting in a revision to the accounting estimate of general provision for doubtful debts as at September 30, 2004. This discount rate is used to determine the present value of cumulative probability of default rates used for the purpose of loan provisioning.

 

The impact of this reduction in discount rate and flow on impact was an increase in the charge to provide for doubtful debts of $292 million ($204 million after tax).

 

Charge to provide for doubtful debts (total) by region

 

2004

 

Ordinary

 

Significant

 

Total

 

Total as a
% of risk-
weighted
assets (1)

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

Australia

 

244

 

175

 

419

 

0.26

 

Europe

 

275

 

85

 

360

 

0.44

 

New Zealand

 

20

 

25

 

45

 

0.15

 

United States

 

19

 

5

 

24

 

0.26

 

Asia

 

1

 

2

 

3

 

0.06

 

Total

 

559

 

292

 

851

 

0.30

 

 


(1)            Ratio calculated as a percentage of risk-weighted assets of Australia, Europe, New Zealand, United States and Asia, as appropriate.

 

Foreign currency options trading losses

 

In January 2004, the Company announced that it had identified losses relating to unauthorised trading in foreign currency options and had established a structured process to review and resolve all issues arising from this matter.

 

The Company announced a total loss of $360 million before tax, or $252 million after tax, arising from the unauthorised foreign currency options trading. This total loss consisted of losses arising from the removal of fictitious trades from the foreign currency options portfolio of $185 million and a further loss of $175 million arising from a risk evaluation and complete mark-to-market revaluation of the foreign currency options portfolio in January 2004. The Company analysed the amount of these losses that were incurred during the 2003 year. The 2003 amount was estimated at $66 million ($42 million due to false transactions and $24 million due to valuation adjustments) before tax, or $46 million after tax, which is included in the above total loss announced. Under applicable accounting principles, based on a quantitative and qualitative assessment of the loss incurred in 2003, that amount was not recognised in the financial statements for that year, which were published prior to discovery of the losses. The Company recognised the total losses during the 2004 year. Included within the total loss of $360 million was a valuation allowance for long-dated and illiquid trading derivatives in other portfolios of $26 million as at September 30, 2004.

 

During the year, the Company also released reports by PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC) and APRA into this matter. The PwC and APRA reports provide a roadmap for the Company to address issues concerning culture, risk management, governance and operational controls, primarily related to the Market’s division of Corporate & Institutional Banking. The Company is in the process of implementing remedial actions required by APRA. On October 20, 2004, the Group announced that it had provided ASIC with a range of undertakings to review certain key systems and controls across those businesses which operate under the primary Australian Financial Services Licence applicable to the Company’s Australian banking business. The enforceable undertakings require the Group to carry out work that is in line with current regulatory requirements within a specific timeframe, as agreed with ASIC and to provide reports on each of the areas identified.

 

Refer to the ‘report on the directors and officers’ for further information on the foreign currency options trading losses, including key findings arising from the PwC and APRA investigations, and the remedial actions implemented by the Company.

 

32



 

Write-down of impaired application software

 

During the year, the Group undertook a detailed review of the carrying value of its software assets which resulted in a charge to the profit and loss account of $409 million ($307 million after tax).

 

The Group ceased its global enterprise resource planning strategy supported by its Integrated Systems Implementation application software and has indefinitely deferred the implementation of further modules of this software. The software was written down by $200 million to its recoverable amount of $87 million as at September 30, 2004.

 

The recoverable amount of the software was determined through the application of a valuation methodology performed by an external party. In performing the assessment, the external party used a number of assumptions based on its industry expertise taking into account the complexity of the software, the cost of building such software and the build environment. The resulting carrying value of the asset represents the recoverable amount of the software that is in use.

 

Other software assets that were no longer expected to provide future economic benefits with a carrying value of $209 million were identified as fully impaired and were written off.

 

SR Investment, Inc. – sale of foreign controlled entity and revision of accounting estimate

 

On October 1, 2002, the Group sold SR Investment, Inc. (the parent entity of HomeSide US) to Washington Mutual Bank, FA. Controlled entities other than HomeSide US were excluded from the sale. The Group received proceeds on sale of $2,671 million for assets with a cost of $2,686 million, resulting in a profit on sale of $6 million after all disposal costs, including income tax. Included within the sale result was a charge to provide for certain sale-related costs of $70 million. During 2004, $64 million of this provision was written back as a revision to the accounting estimate.

 

The results of SR Investment, Inc. and its controlled entities were included in the Group’s financial performance up to and including the year ended September 30, 2002. The assets and liabilities of SR Investment, Inc. and its controlled entities were included in the Group’s financial position up to and including the year ended September 30, 2002. SR Investment, Inc. contributed $98 million net profit to the Group in the 2002 year up to the date of sale. The net asset position at the date of sale was $2,267 million. The net cash outflow of SR Investment, Inc. in the 2002 year to the date of sale was $609 million, which is reflected in the Group’s cash flows.

 

Restructuring costs

 

During 2002, the Group recognised restructuring costs of $580 million resulting from the Positioning for Growth and other restructuring initiatives. The Positioning for Growth initiative comprised a fundamental reorganisation of the management and organisational structure of the Group at the time. The $580 million was comprised of termination benefits of $327 million, occupancy costs of $68 million, write-off of property, plant and equipment of $132 million (which included write-off of redundant components of the Integrated Systems Implementation application software assets of $54 million) and other costs of $53 million.

 

Personnel costs of $327 million provided for and expensed in 2002 related to termination benefits for approximately 2,955 positions in management, support and customer-facing roles. In 2004, payments of $37 million (2003: $147 million, 2002: $101 million) were made in respect of 417 positions (2003: 1,317 positions, 2002: 859 positions) made redundant. The reduction in staff numbers occurred in both managerial and non-managerial positions.

 

The remaining provision for restructuring costs raised in 2002 relates to future payments for redundancies, occupancy and other costs. Final payments for redundancies and other costs will be made in the first half of the 2005 year, whilst future payments for occupancy costs will be made in periods corresponding with the relevant lease terms.

 

Income tax expense relating to ordinary activities

 

2004

 

$

1,190

 million

2003

 

$

1,681

 million

2002

 

$

962

 million

 

Income tax expense relating to ordinary activities of $1,190 million in 2004, was $491 million or 29.2% lower than 2003. The quantum of income tax expense is impacted by Wealth Management products and international activities, to which a wide range of tax rates are applied. The decision to elect to consolidate under the Australian tax consolidation regime resulted in a tax benefit of $150 million recognised in the 2004 year, due to the reset tax values of assets of life insurance subsidiaries within the Wealth Management business. Further, income tax expense in 2004 was impacted by a tax benefit of $95 million relating to the sale of shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC, and the decision not to book a tax benefit of $33 million on the interest expense relating to exchangeable capital units following the receipt of an Australian Taxation Office assessment.

 

33



 

Net profit by segment

 

Contribution to Group net profit attributable to members of the Company by operating segment

 

 

 

2004

 

2003 (1)

 

2002 (1)

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Financial Services Australia

 

1,749

 

1,868

 

1,572

 

Financial Services Europe

 

453

 

835

 

757

 

Financial Services New Zealand

 

305

 

310

 

242

 

Corporate & Institutional Banking

 

322

 

877

 

817

 

Wealth Management

 

370

 

174

 

120

 

Other

 

(22

)

(109

)

(135

)

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

 


(1)  Net profit attributable to members of the Company by operating segment has been restated to reflect a change in business segments as described in note 3 of the financial report.

 

(Refer to note 3 in the financial report for detailed information by operating segment.)

 

2004 compared with 2003

 

Financial Services Australia

 

Financial Services Australia’s net profit decreased 6.4% to $1,749 million in 2004, from $1,868 million in 2003. Excluding the impact of significant expenses incurred during the 2004 year of $119 million (after tax) in relation to the write-down of application software and the charge to provide for doubtful debts, net profit remained flat. Details of this result (excluding significant items) are as follows.

 

Total revenue increased 1.4% to $5,545 million. Net interest income increased 0.9% to $3,552 million, reflecting higher lending income, primarily driven by housing growth and retail deposits. This has been almost entirely offset by a 33 basis point reduction in net interest margin to 2.81%, caused by the increased proportion of lower margin housing lending in the loan portfolio, higher wholesale funding costs and lower long-term term lending yields in a less favourable interest rate environment.

 

Non-interest income increased marginally by 2.2% to $1,993 million, driven by changes in accounting treatments of Wealth Management property rental recharges and fleet vehicle registration costs (both of which are offset by corresponding expense increases). Excluding these impacts, non-interest income was flat. Lending and transaction fee growth achieved during the year was offset by the Reserve Bank of Australia credit card interchange fee reforms effective October 31, 2003.

 

Total expenses increased 2.3% to $2,867 million. Total expenses in 2004 include $8 million of goodwill amortisation and a $204 million charge to provide for doubtful debts. Excluding these items, total expenses increased 6.1%. This increase was driven by higher advertising and marketing expenses partly associated with the 2006 Melbourne Commonwealth Games sponsorship, increase in technology costs arising from the sale and leaseback of voice and data equipment to obtain enhanced service delivery, as well as increased amortisation on major projects. The increase was also driven by an increase in regulatory expenses in relation to Basel II and International Financial Reporting Standards, higher occupancy costs reflecting increased market rentals, rising utility costs, and the cost of upgrading accommodation, as well as the unfavourable impact of the accounting changes offset in non-interest income (as discussed above). Personnel expenses were broadly flat, with annual salary increases offset by a superannuation contribution holiday in Australia reducing the Australian defined contribution superannuation expense and a reduction in performance-related remuneration.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts decreased from $298 million in 2003 to $204 million in 2004. This is primarily a result of a provision for a single large exposure recorded in 2003.

 

Financial Services Europe

 

Financial Services Europe’s net profit decreased 45.7% to $453 million in 2004, from $835 million in 2003. Excluding the impact of significant expenses incurred during the 2004 year of $83 million (after tax) in relation to the write-down of application software and the charge to provide for doubtful debts, net profit decreased 35.8% or 31.0% in local currency terms. Details of this result (excluding significant items) are as follows.

 

Total revenue decreased 9.0% to $2,970 million. Net interest income decreased 8.3%, or decreased 2.6% in local currency terms, to $2,133 million, primarily due to a decrease in net interest margin, partly offset by lending growth. Net interest margin declined 27 basis points to 4.03%, reflecting the change in product mix towards lower margin lending products. Lending growth was primarily in housing as a result of increased focus on mortgage lending and business variable rate term lending, while higher margin personal lending volumes declined.

 

34



 

Non-interest income decreased 10.8% or 5.0% in local currency terms, to $837 million, resulting from a reduction in account maintenance fees, overdraft fees, the outsourcing of the Merchant Acquiring business, lower levels of insurance commission income, and a reduction in credit card income due to lower customer numbers and card transaction volumes.

 

Total expenses increased 7.3% to $2,176 million. Total expenses in 2004 include $62 million of goodwill amortisation and a $224 million charge to provide for doubtful debts. Excluding these items, total expenses increased 9.9% or 16.3% in local currency terms. This was largely a result of higher defined benefit pension fund expenses, additional provisions for retiree medical expenses, and costs associated with integrated financial solutions centres, including personnel costs from the uplift in the number of customer-facing staff to support the growth strategy in the south of England. In addition, the increase reflects project expenditure on major programs, including investment in the front-end teller system and the integration of Clydesdale Bank and Yorkshire Bank, ongoing expenditure on regulatory projects, such as Basel II and International Financial Reporting Standards, as well higher occupancy costs due to increased property rentals, and growth in advertising costs in relation to branding and communication-related expenses.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts decreased from $247 million in 2003 to $224 million in 2004 and was mainly driven by a reduction in Business provisions.

 

On December 14, 2004, the Group entered into an agreement to sell its Irish businesses, Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited to Danske Bank A/S. Refer to page 87 of the ‘report on the directors and officers – events subsequent to balance date’ for further information.

 

Financial Services New Zealand

 

Financial Services New Zealand’s net profit decreased 1.6% to $305 million in 2004, from $310 million in 2003. Excluding the impact of significant expenses incurred during the 2004 year of $23 million (after tax) in relation to the write-down of application software and the charge to provide for doubtful debts, net profit increased 5.8% or 6.6% in local currency terms. Details of this result (excluding significant items) are as follows.

 

Total revenue increased 4.7% to $1,026 million. Net interest income increased 7.5% or 8.4% in local currency terms, to $700 million, reflecting strong volume growth in housing, business lending and retail deposits. This has been partly offset by a 13 basis point decrease in net interest margin to 2.58%, resulting from a change in product mix to lower margin fixed rate products in a low, but rising interest rate environment.

 

Non-interest income decreased 0.9% to $326 million, and remained flat in local currency terms. Growth from higher volumes and transaction levels have been offset by the impact of simplified fee structures and a trend by customers to move towards lower cost channels.

 

Total expenses increased 3.7% to $534 million. Total expenses in the 2004 year include $1 million of goodwill amortisation and a $17 million charge to provide for doubtful debts. Excluding these items, total expenses increased 4.7% or 5.5% in local currency terms. This was due to annual salary increases, higher pension expenses and higher regulatory costs.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts decreased from a $21 million charge in 2003 to $17 million in 2004. The lower charge is a result of favourable re-ratings of customers, partly offset by a higher specific provisioning resulting from a charge in relation to a large Agribusiness exposure in the 2004 year.

 

Corporate & Institutional Banking

 

Corporate & Institutional Banking decreased its contribution to net profit attributable to members of the Company by 63.3% to $322 million in 2004, from $877 million in 2003. Excluding the impact of the significant expenses incurred during the 2004 year of $296 million (after tax) in relation to the foreign currency option trading losses, write-down of application software and the charge to provide for doubtful debts, net profit decreased 29.5%. Details of this result (excluding significant items) are as follows.

 

Total revenue decreased 11.5% to $1,726 million. As a result of the unauthorised foreign currency option trading losses incident, income was impacted by the inability to offer a full suite of products, resulting in not only lower sales of currency options, but also reduced other income from other products as some customers utilised alternative providers to source their entire business needs. Risk and trading income was also impacted as the Market’s division reduced its risk profile in response to the Group’s revised risk management policy, which was issued following the currency options incident and the associated remedial actions.

 

Net interest income decreased 20.0% to $678 million, mainly due to a benign trading environment influenced by flatter yield curves and reduced volatility in interest rate and foreign exchange markets. It was also impacted by the unauthorised foreign currency option trading losses incident, which impacted the broader performance of the Markets division (as discussed above), and the need to reverse prior year capitalised interest of $28 million on a large project finance exposure, which has been reclassified as a non-accrual loan.

 

Non-interest income decreased 4.9% to $1,048 million, as a result of the factors that impacted net interest income. In addition, the result also reflects reduced Specialised Finance income due to a slowdown in overall deal flow.

 

35



 

Total expenses increased 17.6% to $970 million. Total expenses in 2004 include a $112 million charge to provide for doubtful debts. Excluding this item, total expenses increased 13.6%. This result reflects strategies implemented to support client revenues, increased personnel costs as a result of higher employee numbers, increased investment in the control environment following the foreign currency option trading losses incident, increased rental costs, higher volume-related expenses and higher regulatory costs for Basel II and International Financial Reporting Standards.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts increased from $70 million in 2003 to $112 million in 2004. This higher charge reflects specific provisions taken on US project finance exposures and other exposures.

 

Wealth Management

 

Wealth Management increased its contribution to net profit attributable to members of the Company by $196 million to $370 million in 2004, from $174 million in 2003. Excluding the impact of significant expenses incurred during the 2004 year of $55 million (after tax) in relation to the write-down of application software, net profit increased to $425 million. Details of this result (excluding significant items) are as follows.

 

The result comprised $409 million of profit generated through operations (2003: $374 million), and a $16 million increase (after tax) in the excess of the net market value over the net assets of life insurance controlled entities (2003: was a decrease of $200 million).

 

The main factors impacting the profit generated through operations were:

 

                  growth in investments profit resulting from growth in average funds under management driven by improved investment market conditions and strong Australian wholesale sales;

 

                  growth in annual inforce premiums and favourable claims experience in the insurance sector;

 

                  growth in the Private Bank sector reflecting strong lending growth in investment and housing;

 

                  improved global equity market conditions increasing earnings generated on shareholders’ invested capital and retained profits;

 

offset by

 

                  recognition of unfavourable adjustments from prior years; and

 

                  strategic investment expenditure of $39 million (after tax), up $11 million on 2003, including operational and amortised capitalised expenditure in Australia and Europe. During the year, the roll out of an integrated advice platform to advisers was commenced.

 

The valuation of businesses held in the mark-to-market environment decreased by $124 million from $6,633 million at September 30, 2003 to $6,509 million at September 30, 2004. The decrease in value comprised $13 million from growth in shareholders’ net assets less $137 million ($16 million profit after tax) from other components, which are reported as the movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities.

 

Contributing to the $137 million negative movement in the net market value of the life insurance controlled entities were the following:

 

                  the effect of assumption and experience changes primarily comprising lower near-term sales for domestic Retail Investments business, reflecting the impact of slower recovery of retail funds flow from the recent market downturn and the closure of the MLC Platinum Global Fund to new MLC Investment Trust investors, partly offset by lower planned expenses in line with lower business volumes;

 

                  the anticipated growth in the business above current levels of operating profit (ie. the roll forward of the discounted cash flow); and

 

                  the transfer of $63 million of franking credits to National Australia Bank Limited.

 

The after tax result of $16 million was positively impacted by:

 

                  an income tax benefit of $150 million which arose from the decision to elect to consolidate under the Australian tax consolidation regime due to the reset tax values of assets of life insurance subsidiaries within the Wealth Management business.

 

2003 compared with 2002

 

Financial Services Australia

 

Financial Services Australia increased net profit 18.8% to $1,868 million in 2003, from $1,572 million in 2002. Excluding the impact of the significant expenses incurred during 2002 of $185 million (after tax), net profit increased 6.3%. Details of the increase in net profit are as follows.

 

Total revenue increased 7.5% to $5,469 million. Net interest income increased 6.4% to $3,519 million, reflecting growth in lending volumes, particularly housing lending, and growth in retail deposits. This was partially offset by a 31 basis point reduction in net interest margin to 3.14%, caused by the increased proportion of housing lending in the loan portfolio, and the impact of lower market rates on deposit margins and capital.

 

Non-interest income increased 9.6% to $1,950 million, driven by strong housing loan growth, and strong bill acceptances growth.

 

36



 

Total expenses decreased 1.9% to $2,803 million. During 2002, significant expenses of $261 million were incurred relating to Positioning for Growth restructuring and efficiency initiatives. Total expenses in 2003, included $3 million of goodwill amortisation and a $298 million charge to provide for doubtful debts. Excluding these items, total expenses increased 2.1%. This was due to higher personnel expenses with the impact of enterprise bargaining agreements partly offset by lower staff numbers reflecting the implementation of productivity initiatives. Expenses were further impacted by higher software amortisation and costs associated with the continued roll out of customer relationship and loan processing technology.

 

Asset quality management remained a key focus during the 2003 year. The charge to provide for doubtful debts increased from $146 million in 2002 to $298 million in 2003, which was impacted by a large corporate exposure. The year saw a continued focus on credit quality and capital efficiency.

 

Financial Services Europe

 

Financial Services Europe increased net profit 10.3% to $835 million in 2003, from $757 million in 2002. Excluding the impact of the significant expenses incurred during 2002 of $117 million (after tax), net profit decreased 4.5%. Details of the movement in net profit are as follows.

 

Total revenue decreased 4.4% to $3,265 million. Net interest income decreased 3.1% to $2,327 million, but increased in local currency terms due to growth in lending, particularly mortgage and business lending. Net interest margin declined slightly reflecting falling interest rates on retail deposits, together with a change in product mix resulting from the growth in mortgage lending and the focus on selective business lending to enhance the portfolio asset quality.

 

Non-interest income decreased 7.4% to $938 million, driven by lower income from sales of creditor insurance, lower account fee income and the outsourcing of the merchant acquiring business, partly offset by increased lending fee income.

 

Total expenses decreased 11.1% to $2,028 million. During 2002 significant expenses of $166 million were incurred relating to Positioning for Growth restructuring and efficiency initiatives. Total expenses in 2003 included $62 million of goodwill amortisation and a $247 million charge to provide for doubtful debts. Excluding these items, total expenses increased 2.3%. This was largely a result of higher pension expenses, higher personnel costs due to annual salary reviews offset by reductions in staff numbers, higher investment in core infrastructure such as the teller system and higher costs associated with compliance activities including Financial Services Authority mortgage regulation and the write-off European monetary union development costs.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts decreased from $373 million in 2002 to $247 million in 2003. Asset quality management remained a key priority during the year and improved, with higher security coverage and a lower risk profile. In addition, during 2003 the book value of the largest non-accrual loan was repaid and a large previously written-off debt was recovered.

 

Financial Services New Zealand

 

Financial Services New Zealand increased net profit 28.1% to $310 million in 2003, from $242 million in 2002. Excluding the impact of the significant expenses incurred during 2002 of $13 million (after tax), net profit increased 21.6%. Details of the increase in net profit are as follows.

 

Total revenue increased 17.8% to $980 million. Net interest income increased 18.6%, or 10.4% in local currency terms, to $651 million, reflecting strong growth in lending volumes, particularly in fixed rate housing mortgages and term lending, growth in retail deposit volumes and 10 basis point increase in the net interest margin to 2.71%.

 

Non-interest income increased 16.3% to $329 million, or 8.3% in local currency terms, with increased lending fees resulting from strong volumes and transaction levels, partly offset by lower income from the transition of customers to lower cost channels.

 

Total expenses increased 11.7% to $515 million. During 2002 significant expenses of $20 million were incurred relating to Positioning for Growth restructuring and efficiency initiatives. Total expenses in the 2003 year include $1 million of goodwill amortisation and a $21 million charge to provide for doubtful debts. Excluding these items, total expenses increased 11.0%, or 3.4% in local currency terms. This was due to higher personnel expenses from the renegotiation of standard terms of employment, whilst all other expenses remained flat.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts increased from $5 million credit in 2002 to a charge of $21 million in 2003. The higher charge is a result of higher commodity prices and export conditions adversely impacting Agribusiness lending. Further, the 2002 charge was impacted by a statistical provisioning write-back adjustment.

 

37



 

Corporate & Institutional Banking

 

Corporate & Institutional Banking increased its contribution to net profit attributable to members of the Company by 7.3% to $877 million in 2003, from $817 million in 2002. Excluding the impact of the significant expenses incurred during 2002 of $31 million (after tax), it increased 3.4%. Details of the increase in net profit attributable to members of the Company are as follows.

 

Total revenue decreased marginally by 2.0% to $1,950 million, as a result of a more challenging environment and the focus on building strong relationships with customers. The split of income between net interest income and non-interest income can vary considerably in the wholesale market, depending on market activity and environmental conditions. This was particularly evident in the 2003 year’s results.

 

Net interest income decreased 22.1% to $848 million, mainly due to flat yield curves and the stabilisation of interest rates which has reduced the Markets unit’s net interest income from funding and liquidity management activities, slightly offset by the growth in securities under reverse repurchase agreements.

 

Non-interest income increased 22.2% to $1,102 million, reflecting growth from specialised finance, debt markets, trading income and corporate banking.

 

Total expenses decreased 15.5% to $825 million. During 2002 significant expenses of $42 million were incurred relating to Positioning for Growth restructuring and efficiency initiatives. Total expenses in 2003 included a $70 million charge to provide for doubtful debts. Excluding these items, total expenses decreased 0.9%. This primarily reflected the impact of cost containment initiatives.

 

The quality of the loan portfolio across all regions remains high, with approximately 91.4% of credit exposures equivalent to investment grade or above. The charge to provide for doubtful debts decreased from $172 million in 2002 to $70 million in 2003. This was due to 2002 including a number of large corporate exposures.

 

Wealth Management

 

Wealth Management increased its contribution to net profit attributable to members of the Company by 45.0% to $174 million in 2003, from $120 million in 2002. Excluding the impact of the significant expenses incurred during 2002 of $20 million (after tax), it increased 24.3%.

 

The result comprised of $374 million of profit generated through operations (2002: $272 million) and a $200 million decrease in the excess of the net market value over the net assets of life insurance controlled entities, after tax (2002: negative $152 million).

 

The main factors impacting the 2003 profit generated through operations were:

 

                  growth in insurance business volumes;

 

                  reversal of capitalised losses due to favourable expense experience;

 

                  growth in the contribution of the Private Bank as a result of strong lending and deposit volumes;

 

                  significant improvement in global equity market conditions particularly in the six months to September 30, 2003, which increased earnings generated on shareholders’ invested capital and retained earnings;

 

                  stable disability claims experience;

 

                  lower investor compensation costs of $27 million compared with $64 million in 2002;

 

                  strategic investment expenditure of $28 million (after tax), up $5 million on 2002, including operational and amortised capitalised expenditure in Australia and Europe; and

 

                  increased compliance costs and spend on regulatory projects.

 

The valuation of businesses held in the mark-to-market environment increased by $158 million from $6,475 million at September 30, 2002 to $6,633 million at September 30, 2003. This increase in value comprised $318 million from growth in shareholders’ net assets less $160 million ($200 million after tax) from other components over and above the increase in net assets, which are reported as the movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities.

 

The components that contributed to the $160 million ($200 million after tax) negative movement in the net market value of the life insurance controlled entities comprised:

 

                  the effect of assumption and experience changes primarily comprising lower retail sales volumes than anticipated at September 30, 2002, the effect of weaker operating environments reducing the values of the international businesses, and the overall strengthening in the Australian dollar. The impact of these factors has been partially mitigated by the active management of expenses; and

 

                  the anticipated growth in the business above current levels of operating profit (ie. the roll-forward of the discounted cash flow).

 

38



 

Contribution to Group net profit by major geographic area

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia (excluding Wealth Management) (1)

 

1,714

 

2,099

 

1,798

 

3,264

 

1,406

 

Wealth Management

 

365

 

127

 

73

 

666

 

241

 

Deduct: Amortisation of goodwill

 

(1

)

(3

)

(8

)

(1

)

(1

)

 

 

2,078

 

2,223

 

1,863

 

3,929

 

1,646

 

Europe

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Clydesdale and Yorkshire Banks

 

442

 

745

 

733

 

819

 

708

 

Northern and National Irish Banks

 

129

 

224

 

191

 

200

 

174

 

Other (2)

 

15

 

105

 

89

 

4

 

(16

)

Deduct: Amortisation of goodwill

 

(62

)

(62

)

(62

)

(62

)

(62

)

 

 

524

 

1,012

 

951

 

961

 

804

 

New Zealand

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank of New Zealand

 

415

 

494

 

433

 

348

 

311

 

Other (3)

 

(25

)

(36

)

(29

)

(35

)

(30

)

Deduct: Amortisation of goodwill

 

(40

)

(33

)

(31

)

(31

)

(31

)

 

 

350

 

425

 

373

 

282

 

250

 

United States

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Michigan National Corporation

 

 

 

 

156

 

291

 

SR Investment, Inc.

 

 

 

98

 

(3,438

)

141

 

Other (4)

 

157

 

213

 

31

 

191

 

161

 

Deduct: Amortisation of goodwill

 

 

 

 

(73

)

(103

)

 

 

157

 

213

 

129

 

(3,164

)

490

 

Asia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Asian branches

 

21

 

36

 

44

 

71

 

39

 

Other (5)

 

47

 

46

 

13

 

4

 

10

 

 

 

68

 

82

 

57

 

75

 

49

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

2,083

 

3,239

 

 


(1)       Australia (excluding Wealth Management) included the net profit on sale of Michigan National Corporation and its controlled entities of $1,681 million in 2001.

 

(2)       Europe Other includes National Wealth Management Europe Holdings Limited, National Australia Group Europe Limited, the London branch of the Company, NAB Investment Limited and NAB Finance (Ireland) Limited.

 

(3)       New Zealand Other includes National Australia Group (NZ) Limited and National Wealth Management New Zealand Holdings Limited.

 

(4)       United States Other includes the New York branch of the Company, National Australia Funding (Delaware), Inc. and National America Investment, Inc.

 

(5)       Asia Other includes Nautilus Insurance Pte Limited, National Australia Capital Markets (Japan) Co., Limited, National Australia Finance (Asia) Limited, Hong Kong MLC Holdings Limited, PT MLC Life Indonesia and Advance MLC Assurance Co. Limited.

 

Australia

 

Australia’s net profit attributable to members of the Company decreased by 6.5% to $2,078 million from $2,223 million in 2003 and $1,863 million in 2002. Excluding net significant expenses (after tax) of $194 million in relation to the foreign currency option trading losses, the write-down of application software, the charge to provide for doubtful debts, the profit on the sale of strategic shareholdings, and the profit on the selling-related costs provision in relation to HomeSide US, net profit increased by 2.2%, primarily due to the improvement in the net movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities (after tax) relating to Wealth Management.  Details of this result (excluding significant items) are as follows.

 

Australia (excluding Wealth Management)

 

The net profit of Australia (excluding Wealth Management and before goodwill amortisation) decreased 18.3% to $1,714 million from $2,099 million in 2003 and $1,798 million in 2002.  Excluding current year net significant expenses (as discussed above) of $180 million (after tax), net profit of $1,894 million decreased 9.8% from the prior year.

 

 

39



 

Net interest income increased by 0.8% to $3,822 million, reflecting an increase in income from lending (primarily driven by housing growth) and retail deposits, which has almost entirely been offset by net interest margin contraction.  It has also been impacted by the need to reverse prior year capitalised interest of $28 million on a large project finance exposure, which has been reclassified as a non-accrual loan.

 

Total expenses (before the charge to provide for doubtful debts) increased as a result of higher advertising and marketing expenses associated with the 2006 Melbourne Commonwealth Games sponsorship, increase in technology costs, increase in regulatory expenses in relation to Basel II and International Financial Reporting Standards, and increased investment in the control environment following the foreign currency option trading losses incident.  This has been partly offset by the favourable impacts of a superannuation contribution holiday reducing the Australian defined contribution superannuation expense during the year and a reduction in performance-related remuneration.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts (excluding significant charge) decreased by $77 million or 24.0%.  The 2003 charge was unfavourably impacted by a small number of large corporate exposures in Financial Services Australia and Corporate & Institutional Banking, which were not experienced in 2004.  However, the charge during the 2004 year was unfavourably impacted by volume-related increases.

 

Wealth Management

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company for Wealth Management Australia increased $238 million to $365 million in 2004, from $127 million in 2003.  Excluding the impact of significant expenses incurred during the 2004 year of $14 million (after tax) in relation to the write-down of application software, the result comprised $363 million of profit generated through operations (2003: $327 million), and a $16 million net movement in the excess of net market value over the net assets of life insurance controlled entities, after tax (2003: negative $200 million).

 

Factors supporting the profit generated through operations result include:

 

                  the improved global equity market conditions increasing earnings generated on shareholders’ invested capital and retained profits;

 

                  higher fee income resulting from higher funds under management;

 

                  growth in group and personal insurance;

 

                  growth in the Private Bank due to an increase in investment and housing lending; and

 

                  offset by the recognition of unfavourable adjustments from prior years.

 

For a discussion of the $16 million (after tax) increase in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities, refer to page 28.

 

Europe

 

Europe’s net profit decreased by $488 million or 48.2% in the year to $524 million from $1,012 million in 2003 and $951 million in 2002. Excluding the impact of significant expenses incurred during the year of $137 million (after tax) in relation to the write-down of application software and the charge to provide for doubtful debts, net profit decreased 34.7%.  Details of this result (excluding significant items) are as follows.

 

Clydesdale and Yorkshire Banks

 

Clydesdale and Yorkshire Banks contributed a net profit (before goodwill amortisation) of $442 million, a decrease of 40.7% from the prior year.

 

Net interest income declined by $194 million or 10.4%. The decline reflects margin contraction over the year primarily due to the impact of a change in product mix towards lower margin lending products. Lower margins were partly offset by volume growth, mainly driven from increased business lending and an increased focus on mortgage lending leading to strong growth in the mortgage portfolio.  Non-interest income decreased by 10.1% due to the outsourcing of the Merchant Acquiring business and lower levels of account maintenance fees, unauthorised overdraft charges, insurance commission and cards income.

 

Total expenses (excluding the charge to provide for doubtful debts) increased $156 million or 12.3%. The increase was mainly the result of higher defined benefit pension expenses, increased project spend on regulatory and investment programs and an increase in costs associated with the integrated financial solution centres.  Additional provisions were also raised over the year and impacted expense growth.  The charge to provide for doubtful debts (excluding significant charge) decreased $43 million or 17.2%, mainly driven by reductions in Business provisions.

 

40



 

Northern and National Irish Banks

 

Northern and National Irish Banks contributed a net profit of $129 million, a decrease of $95 million or 42.4% from the prior year.

 

Net interest income declined by $25 million.  Despite increased volume growth from mortgages and business lending, a change in mix towards lower margin products resulted in reduced income over the year.  Non-interest income decreased by 11.1% primarily reflecting lower account maintenance fees and unauthorised fees.

 

Total expenses (excluding the charge to provide for doubtful debts) increased $60 million or 14.0%.  The increase mainly reflects higher defined benefit pension expenses, increased spend on regulatory and investment programs and additional provisions raised over the year.  The charge to provide for doubtful debts (excluding significant charge) increased by $18 million, as the prior year charge included the favourable impact of a review of the portfolio.

 

On December 14, 2004, the Group entered into an agreement to sell its Irish businesses, Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited to Danske Bank A/S.  Refer to page 87 of the ‘report on the directors and officers – events subsequent to balance date’ for further information.

 

New Zealand

 

New Zealand’s net profit decreased 17.6% in the year to $350 million from $425 million in 2003 and $373 million in 2002.  Excluding the impact of significant expenses incurred during the 2004 year of $46 million (after tax) in relation to the write-down of application software and the charge to provide for doubtful debts, net profit decreased 6.8%.

 

The New Zealand operations of Bank of New Zealand contributed net profit (before goodwill amortisation) of $415 million, a decrease of 16.0% from the prior year.  Excluding the impact of significant expenses (as discussed above), net profit decreased 6.7%.

 

Net interest income grew $24.5 million or 3.0% as a result of sound growth in lending (particularly housing) and retail deposit volumes, partly offset by a decline in the net interest margin, reflecting a move towards fixed rate products in a low, but rising interest rate environment.

 

Total expenses (excluding significant expenses) increased 8.2%, primarily reflecting the impact of the higher personnel expenses as a result of annual salary increases, higher pension expenses and an increase in project expenditure on regulatory projects.  The charge to provide for doubtful debts (excluding significant charge) increased by $9 million to a charge of $20 million in 2004.  The increase has primarily resulted from a charge in relation to a large Agribusiness exposure in the 2004 year.

 

United States

 

The United States contributed a net profit of $157 million compared to $213 million in 2003 and $129 million in 2002.  Excluding the impact of significant expenses incurred during the 2004 year of $4 million (after tax) in relation to the charge to provide for doubtful debts, net profit decreased by $52 million.

 

The decrease in net profit is primarily a result of a decreased contribution from Corporate & Institutional Banking.  This mainly reflects low US interest rates, as well as the benign trading environment influenced by flatter yield curves and reduced volatility in interest rate and foreign exchange markets.  It was also impacted by the unauthorised foreign currency option trading losses incident, which impacted the broader performance of the Markets division.  This is partly offset by the decrease in the charge to provide for doubtful debts (excluding significant items) as a result of the inclusion of a major provisioning charge in 2003 for a large corporate exposure.

 

Asia

 

Asia’s net profit attributable to members of the Company decreased 17.1% in the year to $68 million from $82 million in 2003 and $57 million in 2002. Excluding the impact of significant expenses incurred during the 2004 year of $2 million (after tax) in relation to the charge to provide for doubtful debts, net profit decreased by 14.6%.

 

The decrease in net profit is primarily a result of a decreased contribution from Corporate & Institutional Banking.  This mainly reflects the charge to provide for doubtful debts, which increased by $11 million to $1 million in 2004 compared with a credit of $10 million in 2003.  The low charge in 2003 reflected the favourable impact of a review of the portfolio.  The decrease also reflects a reduction in income from the Markets division of Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

41



 

Employees

 

The following tables summarise the Group’s staffing position as at September 30:

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002 (1)

 

 

 

Number

 

Number

 

Number

 

By region

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

24,567

 

23,880

 

24,294

 

Europe

 

13,324

 

13,104

 

13,542

 

New Zealand

 

4,766

 

4,688

 

4,560

 

United States

 

141

 

136

 

165

 

Asia

 

719

 

732

 

641

 

Total full-time equivalents (3)

 

43,517

 

42,540

 

43,202

 

 

 

 

2004

 

2003 (2)

 

2002 (1)(2)

 

 

 

Number

 

Number

 

Number

 

By line of business

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Financial Services Australia

 

17,514

 

17,233

 

17,928

 

Financial Services Europe

 

11,765

 

11,411

 

11,707

 

Financial Services New Zealand

 

4,324

 

4,257

 

4,277

 

Corporate & Institutional Banking

 

2,832

 

2,624

 

2,576

 

Wealth Management

 

6,048

 

6,174

 

6,105

 

Other (4)

 

1,034

 

841

 

609

 

Total full-time equivalents (3)

 

43,517

 

42,540

 

43,202

 

 


(1)       Includes full-time equivalent employees for SR Investment, Inc. (the parent entity of HomeSide US) of 38 at September 30, 2002.

 

(2)       Divisional full-time equivalent employees (FTEs) in relation to 2003 and 2002 have been restated as described in note 3 in the financial report.

 

(3)       FTEs includes part-time (pro-rated) and non-payroll FTEs (ie. contractors).

 

(4)       Includes Corporate Centre functions.

 

The Group’s full-time equivalent (FTE) employee numbers increased by 977 or 2.3% from 42,540 at September 30, 2003 to 43,517 at September 30, 2004.  This compares to a 1.5% decrease from 2002 to 2003.  The 2004 increase is largely due to an increase in employees on major projects, including Basel II Capital Accord, International Financial Reporting Standards, compliance and technology projects, growth in customer-facing staff in Australia and the impact of the Group’s growth strategy in Europe, partly offset by a reduction in staff as a result of redundancies (refer to note 5(a) in the financial report).

 

In Australia, there was a net increase in employee numbers of 687 in 2004, following a decrease of 414 in the previous year.  The 2004 increase reflects growth in customer-facing staff (following reductions in the prior year), more staff to support the roll out of Wealth Management’s integrated advice platform to advisers, increases to support large compliance projects such as Basel II Capital Accord and International Financial Reporting Standards, and more staff to address APRA’s remedial actions following the foreign currency options trading losses.

 

In Europe, employees increased by 220 in 2004, having decreased by 438 in the previous year.  The net increase in employees in 2004 primarily resulted from the European growth strategy, in particular the establishment of a network of Financial Solutions Centres, and additional staff required in relation to regulatory and compliance projects.

 

In New Zealand, employees increased by 78 in 2004, having increased by 128 in the previous year.  This is due to more technology staff driven by project work and an increase in staff in the customer contact centre.  In the United States, employees increased by 5 in 2004, having decreased by 29 in the previous year.  In Asia, employees decreased by 13 in 2004, having increased by 91 in the previous year.

 

In August 2004, a statement of Corporate Principles was sent to all employees globally.  The principles will become the over-arching ‘way we do things’ and defines the behaviours expected of all employees.  One of the behaviours states that ‘we actively promote the health and wellbeing of our employees with a balance between personal and work life’.  During the year, a new global occupational, health and safety strategy was developed.  The strategy is aimed to renew the focus on a risk management approach to prevent injury and illness in the workplace.

 

In Australia, approximately 43% of employees are members of the Finance Sector Union.  In New Zealand, approximately 30% of employees are members of FinSec.  In Europe, 50% to 60% are members of Irish Bank Official’s Association and UNIFI.  The Group has continued to work constructively with the global unions, recognising both the unions and their members as key stakeholders in the organisation.  During 2004, the Group hosted a Global Unions conference during which a set of principles were agreed to highlight the strength of engagement with unions and the dedication of both parties to constructive and consultative processes.

 

42



 

The Group has a number of industrial instruments including collective agreements that are negotiated or renewed regularly with the relevant trade unions globally.  In Australia, two agreements are due to expire in the 2005 calendar year.  The Enterprise Bargaining Agreement expires in October 2005 and the Wealth Management Enterprise Development Agreement expires in December 2005.  Additionally, the Bank of New Zealand has two collective agreements covering the branch network and contact centres which will expire on October 31 each year, with negotiations commencing during the months of September and October.  Three separate pay negotiations occur annually during October and November in the UK.  No pay negotiations occur for National Irish Bank, as the National Wage Agreement determines pay.

 

Assets and equity

 

Year-end total assets increased to $411.3 billion from $397.5 billion at September 30, 2003 and $377.4 billion at September 30, 2002.  Excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, total assets (in Australian dollar terms) grew $9.6 billion or 2.4% during 2004 (2003: $48.3 billion or 13.8%, excluding the impact of the sale of SR Investment, Inc.), primarily reflecting continued growth in lending.  This reflects the following:

 

                  in Australia, total assets grew by $12.7 billion to $256.5 billion (2003: $30.3 billion to $243.7 billion) with gross loans and advances increasing by 9.0% to $148.4 billion (2003: 16.5% to $136.1 billion).  As for the 2003 year, the major contributor to this increase was housing loans, which grew by 9.9% to $91.3 billion (2003: 21.3% to $83.0 billion), buoyed by a continuing low interest rate environment.  Investments relating to life insurance business increased by $5.2 billion (2003: $4.9 billion); however, this is largely offset by an increase in life insurance policy liabilities;

 

                  in Australian dollar terms, total assets in Europe increased by 0.2% to $104.1 billion during 2004 (2003: decrease of 3.1% to $103.9 billion).  Excluding the effect of exchange rate movements, total assets in Europe decreased by 2.1% (2003: increase of 12.1%).  This was impacted by a $6.7 billion decline in due from other financial institutions reflecting a reduction in reverse repurchase agreements, and a $3.6 billion reduction in the fair value of trading derivatives (although the net position in Europe is largely unchanged).  These reductions were partly offset by an 8.9% or $5.3 billion increase in net loans and advances, driven by continued growth in housing lending and an increase in business lending.  The increase in 2003 was driven by growth in Corporate & Institutional Banking lending as well as solid housing lending growth;

 

                  in Australian dollar terms, total assets in New Zealand increased by 13.0% to $36.8 billion in 2004 (2003: 7.4% to $32.6 billion).  Excluding the effect of exchange rate movements, total assets in New Zealand increased by 5.5% (2003: 6.2%), buoyed by continued strong retail lending growth, particularly in relation to housing lending, up 17.9% (2003: 17.9%) and growth in other term lending;

 

                  in Australian dollar terms, total assets in the United States decreased by 18.0% to $6.8 billion in 2004 (2003: 37.8% to $8.3 billion, excluding the impact of the sale of SR Investment, Inc.).  Excluding the effect of exchange rate movements, total assets in the United States fell by 13.9% (2003: 22.2%, excluding the impact of the sale of SR Investment, Inc.), reflecting reduced activity in Corporate & Institutional Banking; and

 

                  in Australian dollar terms, total assets in Asia decreased by 21.1% to $7.1 billion in 2004 (2003: flat at $9.0 billion).  Excluding the effect of exchange rate movements, total assets in Asia decreased 17.6% (2003: increase of 17.5%), reflecting a reduction in activity in Corporate & Institutional Banking, following an increase in activity in 2003.

 

Year-end total equity increased to $29.8 billion from $27.2 billion at September 30, 2003 and $23.3 billion at September 30, 2002.  Total parent entity interest in equity increased $1.5 billion to $25.9 billion during 2004 (2003: $1.2 billion to $24.4 billion).  This reflects an increase in contributed equity of $0.5 billion to $10.2 billion (2003: decrease of $0.2 billion to $9.7 billion), reflecting ordinary share issues and dividend reinvestment of $1.4 billion (2003: $0.4 billion), including the underwriting of the dividend reinvestment plan, partially offset by $0.7 billion on the buy-back of preference shares and the impact of the $0.2 billion on-market ordinary share buy-back (2003: $1.6 billion).  In addition, reserves increased by $0.3 billion to $1.2 billion (2003: decrease of $1.2 billion to $0.9 billion), primarily reflecting positive movements in the foreign currency translation reserve, following negative movements in 2003.  Retained profits have increased $0.7 billion to $14.5 billion (2003: $2.6 billion to $13.8 billion).  Further, outside equity interest has increased $1.1 billion (2003: $2.7 billion) following consolidation of the registered schemes of the Group’s life insurance statutory funds.

 

Assets and equity adjusted to accord with US GAAP

 

Year-end total assets calculated in accordance with US GAAP increased to $418.1 billion in 2004 after an increase to $398.9 billion at September 30, 2003.  In US dollar terms, year-end total assets increased by US$31.7 billion, or 11.7%, from US$271.1 billion in 2003 to US$302.8 billion in 2004 (2003: increase of US$64.6 billion, or 31.3%, from US$206.5 billion in 2002).  The increase in total assets in 2004 and 2003 is mainly attributable to the factors outlined above.  In 2004, total equity under US GAAP reported in Australian dollars increased 3.8% to $24.8 billion (2003: flat at $23.9 billion), primarily reflecting the factors outlined above.  (Refer to note 56 in the financial report for a detailed reconciliation of total assets and total equity according to US GAAP.)

 

Return on average equity

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Weighted average equity (1)

 

21,341

 

20,579

 

21,104

 

20,685

 

17,540

 

Return on average equity (%) (1)(2)

 

14.0

 

18.3

 

15.1

 

9.0

 

17.3

 

Return (before significant items) on average equity (%) (1)(2)

 

15.8

 

18.3

 

17.0

 

18.6

 

18.1

 

 


(1)       Based on average ordinary shareholder funds.

 

(2)       Based on amounts attributable to ordinary shareholders.

 

43



 

Profitability is measured by return on average equity, which decreased to 14.0% in 2004 from 18.3% in 2003 and 15.1% in 2002.  Excluding the impact of significant items, return on average equity decreased to 15.8% in 2004 from 18.3% in 2003 and 17.0% in 2002.  This has been impacted by a deterioration in underlying operating performance in major areas of the business, including Australia, Europe and Corporate & Institutional Banking.   Weighted average equity increased by 3.7%, primarily due to the increase in average retained profits.

 

Earnings and dividends per share

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

Cents

 

Cents

 

Cents

 

Cents

 

Cents

 

Earnings per share

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

197.3

 

248.8

 

205.7

 

121.5

 

202.3

 

Diluted (1)

 

196.1

 

243.6

 

202.5

 

122.8

 

199.1

 

Earnings per share before significant items

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

222.7

 

248.8

 

231.9

 

247.4

 

211.3

 

Diluted (1)

 

220.4

 

243.6

 

227.4

 

243.2

 

207.7

 

Cash earnings per share

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

203.1

 

268.5

 

222.0

 

110.7

 

205.7

 

Diluted (1)

 

201.7

 

262.3

 

218.2

 

112.4

 

202.0

 

Cash earnings per share before significant items

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

228.5

 

268.5

 

248.2

 

236.6

 

214.8

 

Diluted (1)

 

226.0

 

262.3

 

243.0

 

233.0

 

211.0

 

Dividends per share

 

166.0

 

163.0

 

147.0

 

135.0

 

123.0

 

 


(1)       Calculated based on the weighted average diluted number of ordinary shares, which includes the impact of performance options, potential conversion of exchangeable capital units, performance rights and partly paid ordinary shares, as set out in note 8 in the financial report.

 

Management use growth in diluted cash earnings per share as a key indicator of performance.  Cash earnings is a key performance measure and financial target used by the Group.  Refer to ‘non-GAAP financial measures’ for a more detailed discussion on page 69.  Diluted cash earnings per share takes full account of the impact of the exchangeable capital units and provides a consistent basis for year on year comparison moving forward.  The potential conversion of exchangeable capital units has a dilutive impact on earnings per share, which varies from year to year depending on conversion.

 

Diluted earnings per share decreased 19.5% in 2004 to 196.1 cents, from 243.6 cents in 2003 and 202.5 cents in 2002.  Excluding the impact of significant items, diluted earnings per share decreased 9.5% for 2004 to 220.4 cents, from 243.6 cents in 2003 and 227.4 cents in 2002.

 

Diluted cash earnings per share decreased 23.1% in 2004 to 201.7 cents, from 262.3 cents in 2003 and 218.2 cents in 2002.  Excluding the impact of significant items, diluted cash earnings per share decreased 13.8% in 2004 to 226.0 cents, from 262.3 cents in 2003 and 243.0 cents in 2002.  The decrease in diluted cash earnings per share before significant items reflects a deterioration in underlying operating performance in major areas of the business, including Australia, Europe and Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

An interim dividend of 83 cents per fully paid ordinary share was paid during the year ended September 30, 2004, compared to an interim dividend of 80 and 72 cents per share in 2003 and 2002 respectively.  The final dividend declared from the 2004 profit was 83 cents per share, which remained consistent with the 2003 final dividend.  The 2004 final dividend was paid on December 8, 2004.

 

The Company expects to continue its policy of paying regular cash dividends; however, there is no assurance as to future dividends.  Future dividends will be determined by the Board with regard to the Company’s earnings, capital requirements, financial conditions and applicable government regulations and policies.   The dividend payout ratio for 2004 was equivalent to 72.1% of after-tax cash earnings (before significant items).  In addition, the payment of dividends is subject to the restrictions described in note 7 in the financial report.

 

The interim dividend paid was fully franked and the final dividend was also fully franked.  These dividends carry imputation tax credits at a tax rate of 30%, reflecting the current Australian company tax rate of 30%.  For non-resident shareholders of the Company for Australian tax purposes, the dividends will not be subject to Australian withholding tax.

 

The extent to which future dividends will be franked will depend on a number of factors, including the level of the Group’s profits that will be subject to Australian income tax and any future changes to the Australian business tax systems as a result of the Australian Commonwealth Government’s tax reform initiatives.

 

The Company has a bonus share plan enabling shareholders (principally those who do not benefit from dividend imputation) to elect to take all or part of their dividend in the form of unfranked bonus ordinary shares.  The Company’s dividend reinvestment plan permits reinvestment of cash dividends in new ordinary shares.  In addition, the UK dividend plan permits ordinary shareholders to receive dividends paid out of the profits of a UK controlled entity.

 

44



 

Shareholder value

 

EVA® is a measure designed to recognise the shareholder requirement to generate a satisfactory return on the economic capital invested in the business.  If the business produces profit in excess of its cost of capital, then value is being created for shareholders.  The first three year EVA® cycle concluded on September 30, 2003.  Subsequently, with effect from October 1, 2003, the Group simplified the EVA® calculation methodology, such that it is now comparable to the Group’s banking peers and aligned more closely with cash earnings and ordinary shareholders funds.   The new methodology has been applied to the 2003 results for comparative purposes.  Refer to ‘non-GAAP financial measures’ on page 69 for a further discussion on EVA® and the new methodology.

 

EVA®’s net operating profit after tax (NOPAT) is based on cash earnings before significant items, and includes the calculated benefit of imputation credits earned by paying Australian tax.  EVA®’s capital charge is currently based on an 11.0% per annum cost of capital, applied to average economic capital that is based on ordinary shareholders funds.  In 2004, EVA® NOPAT declined by 12.3% and the capital charge increased 2.1% compared to the 2003 year.  The decline in EVA® over the prior year was $642 million or 28.4%.

 

EVA® is a registered trademark of Stern Stewart & Co.

 

Current methodology

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

EVA® net operating profit after tax (1)

 

4,200

 

4,790

 

Deduct: Capital charge

 

(2,583

)

(2,531

)

EVA®

 

1,617

 

2,259

 

Cost of capital (%) (2)

 

11.0

 

11.5

 

 

Previous methodology

 

 

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

EVA® net operating profit after tax (1)

 

4,524

 

4,157

 

3,881

 

3,680

 

Deduct: Capital charge (2)

 

(2,856

)

(2,873

)

(2,752

)

(2,301

)

EVA®

 

1,668

 

1,284

 

1,129

 

1,379

 

Cost of capital (%) (2)

 

11.5

 

11.5

 

11.5

 

11.4

 

 


(1)       Refer to ‘reconciliations of non-GAAP measures’ on page 6, for reconciliation.

 

(2)       The change in cost of capital from 11.5% per annum to 11.0% per annum took effect from April 1, 2004.

 

Liquidity and funding

 

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group is unable to meet its financial obligations as they fall due.  These obligations include the repayment of deposits on-demand or at their contractual maturity dates, the repayment of borrowings and loan capital as they mature, the payment of insurance policy benefits, claims and surrenders, the payment of operating expenses and tax, the payment of dividends to shareholders, and the ability to fund new and existing loan commitments.

 

The Group’s banking entities comply with the regulatory liquidity requirements of the banking regulators in Australia, the UK, the Republic of Ireland, New Zealand, the United States, Singapore, Hong Kong, Korea and Japan as required.  Wealth Management also complies with the regulatory liquidity requirements of its Australian Financial Services Licences.  Liquidity within the Group is also managed in accordance with policies approved by the Board, with oversight from regional and Group Asset and Liability Management Committees (refer to ‘liquidity and funding’ under ‘risk management’ on page 61 for a detailed discussion).

 

The principal sources of liquidity for the Group are:

 

                  trading and available for sale securities;

 

                  interest received from customer loans;

 

                  customer deposits;

 

                  life insurance premiums;

 

                  proceeds from commercial paper, certificates of deposit, bonds, notes and subordinated debt issues;

 

                  fee income; and

 

                  interest and dividends from investments.

 

45



 

The Group’s primary source of funding is from customer deposits – either on-demand and short-term deposits, and term deposits and bank issued certificates of deposit.  Of total liabilities at September 30, 2004 of $381.5 billion, funding from customer deposits and certificates of deposit amounted to $199.4 billion (52.3%).  Although a substantial portion of customer accounts are contractually repayable within one year, on-demand, or at short-notice, customer deposit balances have traditionally provided a stable source of core long-term funding for the Group.

 

Deposits taken from the inter-bank market of $42.0 billion as at September 30, 2004 supplement the Group’s customer deposits.  The Group also accesses the domestic and international debt capital markets under its various funding programs.  As at September 30, 2004, the Group had on issue $32.6 billion of term debt securities (bonds, notes and subordinated debt) and the following funding programs available to fund the Group’s general banking businesses:

 

Short-term funding programs:

 

                  US commercial paper program;

 

                  Global commercial paper and certificate of deposit program; and

 

                  Bank of New Zealand (BNZ) global commercial paper and certificate of deposit program; and

 

Long-term funding programs:

 

                  Euro medium-term note (MTN) program;

 

                  BNZ domestic bond program;

 

                  Yen shelf;

 

                  Australian debt issuance program;

 

                  US MTN program; and

 

                  US medium-term deposit notes program (New York branch).

 

At September 30, 2004, the Company’s credit ratings were as follows:

 

 

 

Short-term debt

 

Senior long-term debt

 

Standard & Poor’s Corporation

 

A-1+

 

AA-

 

Fitch, Inc.

 

F1+

 

AA

 

Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.

 

P-1

 

Aa3

 

 

On March 12, 2004, Standards & Poor’s Ratings Service lowered its long-term counterparty credit rating on the Company and related entities from AA to AA-.  Moody’s Investors Services and Fitch Ratings both have reaffirmed their ratings at Aa3 and AA respectively.  Ratings are not a recommendation to purchase, hold or sell securities, and may be changed, superseded or withdrawn at any time.

 

The ability to sell assets quickly is an important source of liquidity for the Group.  The Group holds sizeable balances of marketable treasury and other eligible bills and debt securities which could be disposed of to provide additional funding should the need arise.  As at September 30, 2004, the Group held $24.2 billion of trading securities and $4.6 billion of available for sale securities.  In addition, the Group held $247.8 billion of net loans and advances to customers, of which $83.0 billion is due to mature within one year – although a proportion of these maturing customer loans will be extended in the normal course of business.

 

Within the Group’s Wealth Management business, the principal sources of liquidity are premiums received from policyholders, charges levied upon policyholders, investment income and proceeds from the sale and maturity of investments.  The investment policies adhered to by the Group’s life insurance companies consider the anticipated cash flow requirements by matching cash inflows with projected liabilities.

 

Based on the level of resources within the Group’s businesses, and the ability of the Group to access wholesale money markets and issue debt securities should the need arise, overall liquidity is considered more than sufficient to meet current obligations to customers, policyholders and debtholders.

 

The following table sets out the amounts and maturities of the Group’s long-term contractual cash obligations at September 30, 2004:

 

 

 

Payments due by period

 

 

 

Less than
1 year

 

1 to
3 year(s)

 

3 to
5 years

 

After
5 years

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Long-term debt – dated

 

4,673

 

8,734

 

10,844

 

8,329

 

32,580

 

Other debt issues – undated

 

 

 

 

1,612

 

1,612

 

Operating leases

 

370

 

535

 

313

 

1,014

 

2,232

 

Total contractual cash obligations

 

5,043

 

9,269

 

11,157

 

10,955

 

36,424

 

 

The above table excludes deposits and other liabilities taken in the normal course of banking business and short-term and undated liabilities, including life insurance policy liabilities.

 

46



 

The following table sets out the amounts and maturities of the Group’s contingent liabilities and other commercial commitments at September 30, 2004:

 

 

 

Amount of commitment expiration per period

 

 

 

Less than
1 year

 

1 to
3 year(s)

 

3 to
5 years

 

After
5 years

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Contingent liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Guarantees

 

4,063

 

143

 

34

 

1

 

4,241

 

Letters of credit

 

5,187

 

1,025

 

1,173

 

20

 

7,405

 

Performance-related contingencies

 

2,508

 

94

 

34

 

1

 

2,637

 

Other contingent liabilities

 

114

 

 

 

 

114

 

Other commercial commitments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other binding credit commitments (1)

 

56,836

 

13,227

 

2,284

 

4,437

 

76,784

 

Investment commitments (2)

 

554

 

 

 

 

554

 

Total commercial commitments

 

69,262

 

14,489

 

3,525

 

4,459

 

91,735

 

 


(1)       Credit-related commitments arise from contracts entered into in the normal course of business generally relating to financing needs of customers (refer to note 44 in the financial report).

 

(2)       In the normal course of business of the Group’s life insurance business statutory funds, various types of investment contracts are entered into that give rise to contingent or future obligations.

 

Refer to note 44 in the financial report for further discussion of ‘contingent liabilities and credit commitments’.

 

Special purpose entities

 

Special purpose entities (SPEs) are entities that are typically set up for a specific, limited purpose and generally would not enter into an operating activity or have any employees.

 

The primary purposes of SPEs relating to the Group are to:

 

                  obtain an alternative form of funding by the securitisation of certain Group assets;

 

                  assist customers to securitise their assets;

 

                  provide diversified funding sources to customers; and

 

                  tailor new products to satisfy customers’ funding requirements.

 

The most common form of SPE involves the acquisition of financial assets that are funded by the issuance of securities to external investors.  The repayment of these securities is determined by the performance of the assets acquired by the SPE.  These entities form an integral part of many financial markets.

 

The Group generally does not hold any material interest in the SPEs that it sponsors or sets up, but may provide arm’s length services to the SPEs.  The Group may provide standby liquidity facilities to SPEs.  Exposures that relate to such facilities are included within contingent liabilities and credit-related commitments (refer to note 44 in the financial report).  Generally, an SPE may only make a drawing under a standby liquidity facility in certain limited circumstances such as ‘market circumstances’ (where commercial paper is unable to be issued at an economic rate on a maturity date).  Standby liquidity facilities are not available to be drawn where an obligor defaults in respect of assets held by an SPE.  If such an event occurs, the commitment in respect of the liquidity facility is reduced to the extent of the amount in default.

 

An important feature of financial accounts prepared under Australian GAAP is that they are required to present a true and fair view, which includes reflecting the economic substance of transactions and arrangements and not just their legal form or structure.

 

Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1024 “Consolidated Accounts” (AASB 1024) requires a company to consolidate entities it controls and not just entities in which it has majority ownership.  Therefore, an SPE would be required to be consolidated if the Group had the capacity to dominate decision making, directly or indirectly, in relation to the financial and operating policies of the SPE, so as to enable the SPE to operate with it in pursuing the objectives of the Group.

 

Further, Urgent Issues Group Abstract 28 “Consolidation – Special Purpose Entities” provides additional guidance as to some of the factors that would indicate control relating to the activities, decision making powers, risks and benefits of an SPE that would generally require the SPE to be consolidated.

 

An SPE is consolidated in the Group if it either meets the requirements of AASB 1024 or if the risks and rewards associated with the SPE lie with the Group such that the substance of the relationship is that of a controlled entity.  Substance over form means examining all the agreements in relation to the transaction, including side letters or agreements relating to either the provision of guarantees or collateral on loans, or equity funding based on the value of the entity.

 

The Group, in the ordinary course of business, has established or sponsored the establishment of SPEs for various types of transactions, which are described below along with their Australian GAAP treatment.

 

47



 

Asset securitisation

 

The Group makes limited use of asset securitisation arrangements.  SPEs for securitisation are created when the Group has a financial asset (eg. a residential mortgage loan portfolio), which it sells to an SPE.  The SPE in turn sells interests in the asset as securities to investors.  This type of securitisation program benefits the Group by providing an alternative source of funding and enables the Group to monetise long-term assets which positively impacts the Group’s regulatory capital requirements and reduces the Group’s credit exposure.

 

The Group does not recognise the assets and liabilities of these SPEs and they are not reported on the Group’s statement of financial position at September 30, 2004.  This is because the risks and rewards of the assets in the SPEs no longer lie with the Group (ie. the Group no longer retains any significant exposure to the returns on these assets).  Further, the Group does not retain control over the financial or operational decision making of these SPEs.

 

During the year ended September 30, 2004, the Company securitised Australian residential mortgage loans amounting to $2,483 million.  The Company previously securitised Australian residential mortgage loans amounting to $1,924 million during the year ended September 30, 2001.  Outstanding securitised loans of these programs totalled $2,788 million as at September 30, 2004 (2003: $585 million).  The securities issued pursuant to the securitisation programs do not represent liabilities of the Company or the Group.  Neither the Company nor the Group stands behind the capital value or performance of securities or assets of the programs except to the limited extent provided in the transaction documents for the programs through the provision of arm’s length services and facilities.  The Company and the Group do not guarantee the payment of interest or repayment of principal due on the securities.  The Company and the Group are not obliged to support any losses that may be suffered by the investors and do not intend to provide such support.  The Company and the Group have no obligation to repurchase any of the securitised loans other than in limited circumstances.  The Company has transacted with the SPEs on an arm’s length basis to act as servicer in relation to the loans and to provide the SPEs with fixed and basis swaps and limited redraw and liquidity facilities.  (Refer to notes 1 and 16 in the financial report for additional information).

 

Multi-seller securitisation conduits

 

The Group manages two multi-seller securitisation conduits, Titan Securitisation Limited (Titan) and Quasar Securitisation Limited (Quasar).  These conduits provide off-balance sheet funding for the Group’s corporate customers.  This type of securitisation program has no material impact on the Group’s liquidity, capital resources or credit risk because the substance of the economic arrangement is to provide a securitisation service to the Group’s customers.  These securitisation conduits use SPEs to provide access to funding via the asset-backed commercial paper and medium term note (MTN) investor markets.

 

These securitisation arrangements generally involve the sale of financial assets by customers to SPEs, which then issue commercial paper or MTNs to fund the purchases.  The assets acquired by the conduits, which totalled $2,510 million at September 30, 2004, included debt securities, mortgages, lease receivables, commodity receivables and loans.  These financial assets do not represent assets of the Group and are not reported on the Group’s statement of financial position at September 30, 2004.  Certain administrative activities and the provision of liquidity and credit facilities to the programs are performed by the Group under arm’s length contracts that it or the conduits’ independent board of directors can terminate.  Fees received by the Group for performing these services are recorded as fees and commission income when earned.

 

Repackaging securitisation

 

The Group sponsors and manages a repackaging securitisation vehicle, Script Securitisation Pty Ltd (Script).  Script acquires debt instruments and, through the application of derivatives, generates master-funded repackaged debt instruments for sale to customers of the Group.  This type of securitisation arrangement has no material impact on the Group’s liquidity, capital resources or credit risk because the substance of the economic arrangement is to provide a securitisation service to the Group’s customers.  The Group has no interest in the debt instruments acquired and these instruments are not reported on the Group’s statement of financial position at September 30, 2004.

 

Structured finance transactions

 

The use of an SPE to isolate cash flows and assets is common in the banking industry to enable a customer to minimise their funding cost or maximise their investment returns, and the bank to have access to specific collateral.  The Group has relationships with numerous SPEs to provide financing to customers.  Any financing relationships are entered into under normal lending criteria and are subject to the Group’s credit approval process.  The assets arising from these financing activities are generally included in loans and advances to customers, investment securities, or shares in entities and other securities depending on the economic substance of the transaction.  The Group also has relationships with SPEs to enable the placement of customers’ surplus funds with the Group.  These surplus funds are in all cases included in the Group’s statement of financial position as deposits and other borrowings.

 

48



 

Capital resources

 

The Group assesses its capitalisation against market, regulatory and ratings agency expectations, having regard to Australian and international peers and the Group’s own asset base, risk profile and capital structure.  The Group believes it has sufficient capital to meet current and future commitments.

 

The Group’s capital position increased during the year, primarily due to the full underwriting of the Group’s dividend reinvestment plan (DRP) and bonus share plan (BSP) in respect of the 2004 interim dividend amounting to $1,253 million and the issue of $4,181 million of subordinated debt during the year.  It has also been impacted by the buy-back of 36,008,000 fully paid non-converting non-cumulative preference shares of the Company that were issued in connection with the issue of 18,004,000 Trust Units Exchangeable for Preference SharesTM (TrUEPrSSM) in 1998; the sale of strategic shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC; and the impact of the APRA requirement to deduct capitalised expenses, which amounted to $200 million from Tier 1 capital.  The capital position also increased due to the reinvestment of dividends under the Company’s DRP, BSP, issue of shares under the share purchase plan (SPP) and employee share and option plans.

 

During the years ended September 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002, 47.5 million, 10.8 million and 13.8 million fully paid ordinary shares respectively, were issued under the DRP, BSP and SPP to shareholders at varying prices.  In 2004, this included 23.0 million relating to the underwriting of the DRP in respect of the 2004 interim dividend.

 

On October 1, 2003, the Company announced its intention to buy back ordinary shares on-market approximately equal to the number of shares issued under the Company’s dividend package plans and staff share and option plans.  On March 24, 2004, the Company announced that it was terminating this share buy-back program.  During the year, the Company bought back approximately 5.5 million ordinary shares.  The shares were bought back at an average price, including incidental costs, of $29.58 per share, thereby reducing ordinary equity by $162 million.  The highest price paid was $30.22 per share and the lowest price paid was $28.70 per share.  All buy-backs are subject to appropriate pricing parameters and an assessment of the circumstances facing the Group at the relevant time.

 

Capital adequacy

 

The Group’s primary prudential supervisor is APRA.  APRA imposes capital adequacy requirements on banks, the prime objective of which is to ensure that an adequate level of capital is maintained, thereby providing a buffer to absorb unanticipated losses from activities.  Consistent with the international standards of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, APRA’s approach to assessing capital adequacy of banks focuses on three main elements: the credit risk associated with a bank’s exposures, the market risk associated with a bank’s trading activities, and the form and quantity of a bank’s capital.

 

In order to provide a broad indication of relevant credit risk, all assets are risk weighted according to four categories (0%, 20%, 50% and 100%).  The assets to which those weightings apply are described more fully below (refer to ‘risk-adjusted assets and off-balance sheet exposures’).  Off-balance sheet transactions are converted to balance sheet equivalents, using a credit conversion factor, before being allocated to a risk-weighted category.

 

Off-balance sheet activities giving rise to credit risk are categorised as follows: direct credit substitutes such as financial guarantees and standby letters of credit; trade and performance-related contingent items such as performance bonds, warranties, and documentary letters of credit; long-term commitments such as formal credit lines with a residual maturity exceeding one year; and market-related transactions such as foreign exchange contracts, currency and interest rate swaps and forward rate agreements.

 

Market risk is defined as the risk of losses in on- and off-balance sheet positions arising from movements in market prices pertaining to interest rate-related instruments and equities in the trading book, and foreign exchange risk and commodity risk throughout the Group.  APRA’s current capital requirements for market risk, which involve creating equivalent risk-weighted exposures (refer to ‘risk-adjusted assets and off-balance sheet exposures’) are broadly consistent with the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision’s recommendations.

 

For regulatory purposes, capital comprises two elements, eligible Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital, from which certain deductions are made to arrive at Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital.  Tier 1 capital includes paid-up ordinary shares, hybrid instruments (such as National Income Securities), non-cumulative irredeemable preference shares, reserves (other than asset revaluation reserves), retained profits less goodwill and other intangible assets.  In addition, where recognised future income tax benefits are greater than deferred income tax liabilities, the net future income tax benefit is deducted from Tier 1 capital.  Tier 2 capital includes asset revaluation reserves, general provision for doubtful debts (net of associated future income tax benefits), certain hybrid debt/equity instruments, and subordinated long-term debt.

 

The total amount of the resultant capital is subject to further deductions to form the capital base.  Such deductions include net assets in controlled entities that are deconsolidated for regulatory capital purposes and holdings of capital instruments in other non-subsidiary banks.  Tier 1 capital must constitute at least 50% of the capital base.

 

Under guidelines issued by APRA, investments in life insurance and funds management entities are deconsolidated for the purposes of calculating capital adequacy and those activities are excluded from the calculation of risk-weighted assets. The tangible component of the investments comprised of the embedded value and value of future business are deducted at the capital base level.  The intangible component (the difference between acquisition costs and tangible assets) is deducted from Tier 1 capital. Additionally, any profits from these entities included in the Group’s results, to the extent that they have not been remitted to the Company in the form of dividends are excluded from the determination of Tier 1 capital.

 

49



 

As the measure of capital adequacy, Australian banks are required to maintain a minimum ratio of capital base to total risk-weighted assets of 8.0%, of which a minimum of 4.0% must be held in Tier 1 capital.  The numerator of the ratio is the capital base.  The denominator of the ratio is the total risk-weighted asset exposure (ie. sum of credit risk-weighted exposures and the equivalent market risk-weighted exposure).

 

The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision has released wide-ranging and detailed proposals for the reform of capital adequacy guidelines for banks known as the Basel II Capital Accord.  The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision’s reform objective is to develop more risk-sensitive, internationally-accepted, capital adequacy guidelines that are aligned more accurately with the individual risk profiles of banks.

 

Refer to ‘Basel II Capital Accord’ on page 17 for further information.

 

Capital ratios

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

Tier 1

 

7.3

 

7.7

 

7.6

 

Tier 2

 

4.3

 

3.3

 

3.7

 

Deductions

 

(1.0

)

(1.4

)

(1.3

)

Total capital

 

10.6

 

9.6

 

10.0

 

 

The capital ratios at September 30, 2004, include the effect of the Group entering into agreements for the full underwriting of its dividend reinvestment plan and bonus share plan in respect of the 2004 interim dividend; the issue of Tier 2 subordinated debt; the effect of the on-market share buy-back program which was suspended in January 2004 and terminated in March 2004; the buy-back of 36,008,000 fully paid non-converting non-cumulative preference shares of the Company in connection with the TrUEPrSSM buy-back; the sales of strategic shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC; and the impact of the APRA requirement to deduct capitalised expenses, which amounted to $200 million from Tier 1 capital.

 

The ratios have also been impacted by the change in methodology of the calculation of the market risk component of risk-weighted assets from the Internal Model Method to the Standard Method as directed by APRA.  The Standard Method as prescribed by APRA in prudential standard APS 113 limits recognition of portfolio effects on outstanding positions and is substantially more restrictive on the rules regarding the matching of positions.

 

The total capital ratio also reflects the APRA imposed requirement for the Group’s internal target for capital to rise to 10.0% of risk weighted assets.  Previously, the Group’s internal target capital ratio was 9.0% to 9.5%.

 

Capital ratios are monitored against internal targets designed to maintain ratios above minimum regulatory capital requirements set out in APRA’s prudential standards to alert management of, and avert potential breaches of, required ratios.  Ultimately, a breach of the required ratios under the prudential standards may trigger legally enforceable directions by APRA, which can include a direction to raise additional capital or cease business.

 

Regulatory capital

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Tier 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

10,191

 

9,728

 

9,931

 

Reserves

 

1,194

 

893

 

2,105

 

Retained profits

 

14,515

 

13,786

 

11,148

 

Outside equity interest

 

3,866

 

2,804

 

67

 

Estimated reinvestment under the dividend reinvestment plan (1)

 

150

 

140

 

127

 

Deduct:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Asset revaluation reserve

 

(86

)

(16

)

(7

)

Goodwill

 

(632

)

(740

)

(775

)

Intangible component of investment in non-consolidated controlled entities (2)

 

(2,448

)

(2,448

)

(2,448

)

Estimated final dividend (3)

 

(1,287

)

(1,248

)

 

Fair value adjustment of mortgage servicing rights (10%)

 

 

 

(131

)

Deconsolidation of Wealth Management profits net of dividends

 

(349

)

(290

)

(719

)

Future income tax benefit (FITB) (excluding FITB on the general provision for doubtful debts) (4)

 

 

(66

)

 

Non-qualifying outside equity interest (2)

 

(3,866

)

(2,804

)

(67

)

Capitalised expenses

 

(200

)

 

 

Total Tier 1 capital

 

21,048

 

19,739

 

19,231

 

 

50



 

Tier 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Asset revaluation reserve

 

86

 

16

 

7

 

General provision for doubtful debts

 

1,480

 

1,248

 

1,414

 

Perpetual floating rate notes

 

350

 

367

 

460

 

Exchangeable capital units

 

1,262

 

1,262

 

1,262

 

Dated subordinated debt

 

9,044

 

5,390

 

6,174

 

Notional revaluation of investment securities to market

 

(3

)

37

 

12

 

Total Tier 2 capital

 

12,219

 

8,320

 

9,329

 

Total Tier 1 and 2 capital

 

33,267

 

28,059

 

28,560

 

Deductions (5)

 

(2,922

)

(3,591

)

(3,253

)

Total regulatory capital

 

30,345

 

24,468

 

25,307

 

 


(1)  The amount is derived from reinvestment experience on the Company’s dividend reinvestment and bonus share plans.

 

(2)  Refers to controlled entities that are required to be deconsolidated for regulatory capital adequacy purposes.

 

(3)  From October 1, 2002, the Group has adopted the Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1044 “Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets”, which has resulted in a change in the accounting for dividend provisions.  Under APRA guidelines, the estimated dividend must be deducted from Tier 1 capital.

 

(4)  APRA requires any excess FITB (excluding FITB impact on the general provision for doubtful debts) over the provision for deferred income tax liabilities be deducted from Tier 1 capital.

 

(5)  Includes $2,922 million (2003: $2,959 million) investment in non-consolidated controlled entities (net of intangible component deducted from Tier 1 capital).

 

Risk-adjusted assets and off-balance sheet exposures

 

 

 

Balance

 

Risk
weights

 

Risk-adjusted balance (1)

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

%

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash, claims on Reserve Bank of Australia, Australian Commonwealth and State Governments, OECD central governments and central banks (2)

 

23,383

 

29,867

 

25,191

 

0

 

 

 

 

Claims on Australian banks, local governments and banks incorporated in OECD countries

 

31,214

 

32,361

 

45,053

 

20

 

6,243

 

6,472

 

9,011

 

Housing loans (3)

 

117,306

 

103,926

 

87,692

 

50

 

58,653

 

51,963

 

43,846

 

All other assets

 

171,200

 

158,135

 

165,068

 

100

 

171,200

 

158,135

 

165,068

 

Total assets (4)

 

343,103

 

324,289

 

323,004

 

 

 

236,096

 

216,570

 

217,925

 

 

 

 

Contract or
notional
amount

 

Credit
equivalent
amount

 

Risk
weights

 

Risk-adjusted balance (1)

 

 

 

2004

 

2004

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

%

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Off-balance sheet exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Financial guarantees, standby letters of credit and other letters of credit

 

13,352

 

12,500

 

0 – 100

 

11,258

 

9,872

 

7,788

 

Performance-related guarantees, warranties and indemnities

 

3,199

 

1,600

 

0 – 100

 

1,584

 

1,319

 

1,452

 

Commitments to provide finance facilities with residual term to maturity of over 12 months and other commitments (6)

 

100,579

 

21,598

 

0 – 100

 

15,364

 

12,750

 

12,547

 

Foreign exchange, interest rate and other market-related transactions (5)  (6)

 

1,704,647

 

30,680

 

0 – 50

 

8,887

 

9,698

 

9,948

 

Total off-balance sheet exposures (6)

 

1,821,777

 

66,378

 

 

 

37,093

 

33,639

 

31,735

 

Total risk-adjusted assets (6)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

236,096

 

216,570

 

217,925

 

Total risk-adjusted assets and off-balance sheet exposures – credit risk (6)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

273,189

 

250,209

 

249,660

 

Add: Risk-adjusted assets – market risk (7)  (8)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

13,616

 

4,057

 

3,475

 

Total assessed risk exposure

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

286,805

 

254,266

 

253,135

 

 


(1)  Claims secured by cash, government securities or guarantees from banks and governments reflect the risk weight attaching to the collateral security or a direct claim on the guarantor.

 

(2)  Short-term claims on the Australian Commonwealth Government are those with a residual term to maturity of less than 12 months; longer-term claims are those with residual term to maturity of greater than 12 months.  Both categories held in the banking book attract a 0% risk weighting.

 

51



 

(3)  Housing loans approved after September 5, 1994 having a loan to market valuation ratio in excess of 80% must be risk weighted at 100%.  However, these loans may qualify for the 50% risk weighting if they are covered by an adequate level of mortgage insurance provided by an acceptable lenders mortgage insurer. These loans are reported under all other assets.

 

(4)  Total assets differ from those in the Group’s statement of financial position due to the adoption of APRA’s classification of certain items for capital adequacy purposes, particularly goodwill and general provision for doubtful debts.  In addition, fair values of trading derivative financial instruments have been excluded as they have been incorporated into the calculation of the credit equivalent amount of off-balance sheet exposures.

 

(5)  Refer to note 45 for additional information on derivative financial instruments.

 

(6)   Comparative information has been restated.  The revision primarily relates to New Zealand in relation to the reporting of unutilised limits in Corporate & Institutional Banking and the capture of additional retail lending products.  Certain categories of residential mortgages across risk-weightings were also  reclassified.  In addition, September 30, 2002 information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of certain off-balance sheet items.

 

(7)   Under APRA Prudential Standard APS 113 “Capital Adequacy: Market Risk”, Australian banks are required to hold sufficient levels of capital to cover market risk.

 

(8)  The calculation to determine the market risk capital component of risk-weighted assets at September 30, 2004 was carried out under the Standard Method as directed by APRA.  In previous years, the market risk capital component of risk-weighted assets was calculated using the Internal Model Method.  The Standard Method as prescribed by the APRA prudential standard (APS 113), limits recognition of portfolio effects on outstanding positions and is substantially more restrictive on the rules regarding the matching of positions.

 

Gross loans and advances

 

Average balances

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$bn

 

$bn

 

$bn

 

Average gross loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

143.1

 

125.6

 

108.1

 

Overseas

 

97.4

 

96.9

 

94.7

 

Total average gross loans and advances

 

240.5

 

222.5

 

202.8

 

 

The diversification and size of the Group is such that its lending is widely spread both in terms of geography and types of industries served.  The loan portfolio continues to consist of short-term outstandings with 33.5% of the loans at September 30, 2004 maturing within one year and 21.7% maturing between one year and five years.  Real estate mortgage lending comprises the bulk of the loan portfolio maturing after five years.  The average balance of loans and advances in 2004 equated to 59.2% of the average total assets of the Group.  This compares with 56.4% in 2003 and 55.0% in 2002.

 

The loan portfolio within Australia largely comprises real estate lending ($91.3 billion) which equates to 61.5% of the portfolio at September 30, 2004. The overseas loan portfolio comprises of real estate lending of $34.5 billion, or 33.2%, other commercial and industrial lending of $25.2 billion, or 24.2%,and instalment loans and other personal lending of $12.6 billion, or 12.1%, of the overseas portfolio as at September 30, 2004.  The nature of the Group’s lending reflects the operations of the Group’s five discrete business segments, and the regional lending markets in which these segments operate.  These segments comprise three Financial Services businesses, or retailing arms, Corporate & Institutional Banking and Wealth Management.  The Financial Services businesses operate in Australia, Europe and New Zealand; however, Corporate & Institutional Banking and Wealth Management operate across a number of regions (including Australia).  This is reflected in the composition of the Group’s lending portfolio.

 

Average gross loans and advances increased $18.0 billion, or 8.1%, to $240.5 billion in 2004, from $222.5 billion in 2003 and $202.8 billion in 2002, mainly due to continued strong growth in Australia and New Zealand.

 

Australian average gross loans and advances accounted for 59.5% of the total average gross loans and advances in 2004, compared with 56.5% in 2003 and 53.3% in 2002.  Australian average gross loans and advances increased $17.5 billion, or 13.9%, to $143.1 billion in 2004, from $125.6 billion in 2003 and $108.1 billion in 2002.  The increase mainly reflects continued strong growth in housing lending.

 

Overseas average gross loans and advances increased $0.6 billion, or 0.6%, to $97.4 billion in 2004, from $96.9 billion in 2003 and $94.7 billion in 2002.  The increase related to continued strong housing growth in Europe and New Zealand, partially offset by a decrease in personal loans and overdrafts in Europe.

 

52



 

Loans by industry for the Group as at September 30, 2004 (1)

 

 

 

Australia

 

Europe

 

New
Zealand

 

United
States

 

Asia

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Government and public authorities

 

620

 

463

 

260

 

47

 

31

 

1,421

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

6,023

 

2,551

 

4,022

 

11

 

29

 

12,636

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

6,102

 

2,982

 

2,805

 

881

 

719

 

13,489

 

Real estate – construction

 

1,728

 

2,304

 

189

 

441

 

138

 

4,800

 

Manufacturing

 

2,492

 

3,700

 

1,125

 

328

 

815

 

8,460

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

91,259

 

19,576

 

14,328

 

 

610

 

125,773

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

13,529

 

11,070

 

1,526

 

 

 

26,125

 

Lease financing

 

8,164

 

7,814

 

24

 

 

25

 

16,027

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

18,490

 

15,550

 

7,819

 

814

 

974

 

43,647

 

Total gross loans and advances

 

148,407

 

66,010

 

32,098

 

2,522

 

3,341

 

252,378

 

Deduct: Unearned income

 

(1,130

)

(891

)

(3

)

 

 

(2,024

)

Provisions for doubtful debts

 

(1,315

)

(936

)

(179

)

(71

)

(17

)

(2,518

)

Total net loans and advances

 

145,962

 

64,183

 

31,916

 

2,451

 

3,324

 

247,836

 

 


(1)       Refer to note 16 in the financial report for comparative information.

 

In Australia, net loans and advances grew by $12.1 billion, or 9.0%, to $146.0 billion at September 30, 2004, slowing from growth of $19.3 billion in the year to September 30, 2003, but with continued strong growth in housing lending and other personal lending.  Residential mortgage loans increased by $8.2 billion, or 9.9%, to $91.3 billion in the year to September 30, 2004, aided by a continuing low interest rate environment and strong housing sales.  Other commercial and industrial lending increased by $2.0 billion, or 11.9% during 2004 to $18.5 billion.

 

In Europe, net loans and advances grew by $6.6 billion, or 11.5%, to $64.2 billion at September 30, 2004; however, excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, net loans and advances grew by 8.9%.  This represented a pick up in the rate of growth from the prior year, when net loans and advances grew by only 3.3%.  Growth primarily related to residential mortgages, which were up 15.5% in 2004, reflecting an increased focus on this sector, while commercial and industrial lending increased 13.1% in 2004.

 

In New Zealand, net loans and advances grew by $4.3 billion, or 15.5%, to $31.9 billion at September 30, 2004; however, excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, net loans and advances grew by 8.1%.  In the year to September 30, 2003, net loans and advances grew by 8.3%.  In both years growth was principally in relation to residential mortgages, which were up 17.9% in 2004, reflecting the success of new product development and promotional campaigns.

 

In the United States, net loans and advances decreased by $0.8 billion, or 25.1%, to $2.5 billion at September 30, 2004; however, excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, net loans and advances decreased by 21.3%, resulting primarily from a reduction in lending balances in relation to the Corporate & Institutional Banking operations.  This is the continuation of the trend experienced in the year to September 30, 2003, when net loans and advances fell by 5.1%.

 

In Asia, net loans and advances decreased by $0.1 billion, or 2.7%, to $3.3 billion at September 30, 2004; however excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, net loans and advances were flat.  In the year to September 30, 2003, net loans and advances increased 9.5% resulting from movements in end of period loan balances in relation to Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

Asset quality disclosures, charge to provide and provisions for doubtful debts

 

Non-accrual loans

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

Gross

 

Specific
provision

 

Net

 

Gross

 

Specific
provision

 

Net

 

 

 

$m

 

$m (1)

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m (1)

 

$m

 

Australia

 

700

 

164

 

536

 

912

 

238

 

674

 

Europe

 

333

 

159

 

174

 

373

 

127

 

246

 

New Zealand

 

86

 

19

 

67

 

202

 

15

 

187

 

United States

 

109

 

32

 

77

 

145

 

41

 

104

 

Asia

 

2

 

1

 

1

 

1

 

1

 

 

Total

 

1,230

 

375

 

855

 

1,633

 

422

 

1,211

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Percentage of risk-weighted assets

 

0.4

%

0.1

%

0.3

%

0.6

%

0.2

%

0.5

%

 

53



 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Net non-accrual loans

 

855

 

1,211

 

1,311

 

Equity (parent entity interest)

 

25,900

 

24,407

 

23,184

 

Percentage of non-accrual loans to equity

 

3.3

%

5.0

%

5.7

%

 


(1)       Includes specific provisions for impaired off-balance sheet credit exposures.

 

As at September 30, 2001, 2002, and 2003, a certain Australian exposure was classified as performing.  However, the classification of this exposure as non-accrual during this period is now considered more appropriate.  As such, on this basis, comparative information for those years has been restated to include the balance of this exposure (including accrued interest) of $207 million, $221 million and $254 million respectively.  During 2004, $28 million of interest income previously recognised in relation to this exposure was reversed to the profit and loss account to reflect the revised asset quality classification.

 

Total non-accrual loans less specific provision for doubtful debts at September 30, 2004 were $855 million, a decrease of $356 million, or 29.4%, from the 2003 balance of $1,211 million.  This decrease reflects the Group’s continued focus on asset quality following a reduction of the Group’s risk profile.

 

Gross non-accrual loans (being non-accrual loans before specific provision for doubtful debts) at September 30, 2004 were $1,230 million, a decrease of $403 million, or 24.7%, from the balance at September 30, 2003.

 

The Group’s gross non-accrual loans to risk-weighted assets were 0.4% at September 30, 2004, a decrease from 0.6% at September 30, 2003, primarily reflecting the continued focus on asset quality in relation to the Group’s balance sheet (refer comment noted above).  The Australian component of the gross non-accrual loans at September 30, 2004 was $700 million, decreased $212 million, or 23.2%, from 2003.  In Europe, gross non-accrual loans decreased by $40 million, or 10.7%, to $333 million; however, excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, gross non-accrual loans decreased by 13.0%.  In New Zealand, gross non-accrual loans decreased by $116 million, or 57.4%, to $86 million; however, excluding the impact of exchange rate movements non-accrual loans decreased by 60.2%, reflecting the status of a large corporate exposure in Corporate & Institutional Banking.  In the United States, gross non-accrual loans decreased by $36 million to $109 million; however, excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, gross non-accrual loans decreased 20.6%, reflecting the status of a small number of large corporate exposure in Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

The Group has specialist credit restructuring units operating in each region, which continue to result in the earlier identification and workout of problem loans.

 

Provisions for doubtful debts closing balance by region

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

General

 

1,136

 

955

 

972

 

1,140

 

1,057

 

Specific (1)

 

180

 

248

 

219

 

266

 

208

 

 

 

1,316

 

1,203

 

1,191

 

1,406

 

1,265

 

Europe

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

General

 

765

 

641

 

808

 

803

 

641

 

Specific (1)

 

170

 

141

 

169

 

222

 

178

 

 

 

935

 

782

 

977

 

1,025

 

819

 

New Zealand

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

General

 

158

 

130

 

135

 

154

 

137

 

Specific (1)

 

21

 

14

 

10

 

10

 

14

 

 

 

179

 

144

 

145

 

164

 

151

 

United States

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

General

 

41

 

56

 

75

 

85

 

383

 

Specific (1)

 

30

 

39

 

48

 

5

 

51

 

 

 

71

 

95

 

123

 

90

 

434

 

Asia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

General

 

16

 

11

 

32

 

25

 

20

 

Specific (1)

 

1

 

5

 

2

 

5

 

3

 

 

 

17

 

16

 

34

 

30

 

23

 

Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

General

 

2,116

 

1,793

 

2,022

 

2,207

 

2,238

 

Specific (1)

 

402

 

447

 

448

 

508

 

454

 

Total provisions for doubtful debts

 

2,518

 

2,240

 

2,470

 

2,715

 

2,692

 

Percentage of risk-weighted assets

 

0.9

%

0.9

%

1.0

%

1.1

%

1.1

%

 


(1)       Excludes specific provisions for impaired off-balance sheet credit exposures.

 

54



 

Total provisions for doubtful debts, excluding off-balance sheet credit exposures, held at September 30, 2004 were $2,518 million, or 0.9%, of risk-weighted assets, compared with $2,240 million, or 0.9%, of risk-weighted assets at September 30, 2003.  Of the total provisions for doubtful debts at September 30, 2004, the general provision represented $2,116 million, or 0.7%, of risk-weighted assets.

 

For a discussion of certain services provided by the external auditor in connection with problem loan reviews and the Company’s related internal review of auditor independence refer to ‘certain services provided by the external auditor – matters related to independence’ on page 19 in the ‘business overview’section.

 

Credit quality data

 

The Group has adopted a statistically-based provisioning methodology to determine its general provision for doubtful debts (refer to notes 1(p)(i) and 17 in the financial report).  Under this methodology, the Group estimates the level of losses inherent but not specifically identified in its existing credit portfolios at balance date.

 

For retail lending (smaller-balance homogeneous loans), the general provision is assessed at a portfolio level and is based on product loss rates, to make a provision for losses inherent in the portfolio but not yet identified at balance date.  These rates are determined by reference to observed historical loss experience for the relevant product types.

 

In respect of non-retail lending, the amount of the general provision is determined by multiplying the customer’s probability of default by the loss given default.  The probability of default is determined by the Group’s internal customer rating system.  Internal ratings are assigned at the customer level.  This system utilises objective, verifiable external data, such as external credit ratings, and is supplemented with an assessment of economic and industry outlooks, conducted by the Group’s discrete specialist economics unit.  The loss given default is the amount of an individual loan at risk having regard to the level of collateral held against that facility.  The level of collateral held is determined on a loan-by-loan basis, based on the Group’s assessment of the loan security’s value at the time of loan application and any subsequent valuations.

 

The operation of the statistically-based provisioning methodology is such that when individual loans are impaired, a specific provision will be raised by making a transfer from the general provision for doubtful debts.  The general provision for doubtful debts is then re-established based on the remaining portfolios of credit exposures applying the above methodology.

 

During the year, the Group reviewed the level of the general  provision for doubtful debts and the application of the associated statistically-based provisioning methodology, taking into account recent experience, industry practice and emerging developments.  As a result, the discount rate in the statistical model was reduced from the shareholder cost of capital to a rate akin to a risk-free debt rate, resulting in a revision to the accounting estimate of general provision for doubtful debts as at September 30, 2004.  This discount rate is used to determine the present value of cumulative probability of default rates used for the purpose of loan provisioning.  The impact of this reduction in discount rate and flow on impact was an increase in the charge to provide for doubtful debts of $292 million in 2004.

 

The specific provision for doubtful debts is established to cover all identified doubtful debts and is recognised when there is reasonable doubt over the collectability of principal and interest in accordance with the loan agreement (an impaired loan).  Amounts provided for are determined by specific identification or by management’s determination of probable losses for individual loans that are considered impaired in relation to loan portfolios where specific identification is impracticable.  All bad debts are written off against the specific provision for doubtful debts in the reporting period in which they are classified as irrecoverable.

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Provisions for doubtful debts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specific (excluding off-balance sheet credit exposures)

 

402

 

447

 

448

 

508

 

454

 

General

 

2,116

 

1,793

 

2,022

 

2,207

 

2,238

 

Gross non-accrual and restructured loans

 

1,271

 

1,633

 

1,817

 

1,943

 

1,471

 

Charge to profit and loss account – ordinary

 

559

 

633

 

697

 

989

 

588

 

Charge to profit and loss account – significant

 

292

 

 

 

 

 

 

55



 

Ratios (1)

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

Provisions for doubtful debts at year-end as a percentage of year-end loans (before provisions)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specific

 

0.16

 

0.19

 

0.21

 

0.25

 

0.24

 

General

 

0.84

 

0.78

 

0.93

 

1.09

 

1.17

 

 

 

1.00

 

0.97

 

1.14

 

1.34

 

1.41

 

Provisions for doubtful debts at year-end as a percentage of year-end loans and acceptances (before provisions)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specific

 

0.15

 

0.18

 

0.19

 

0.23

 

0.21

 

General

 

0.79

 

0.72

 

0.85

 

0.99

 

1.04

 

 

 

0.94

 

0.90

 

1.04

 

1.22

 

1.25

 

Provisions for doubtful debts at year-end as a percentage of year-end risk-weighted assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specific

 

0.14

 

0.18

 

0.18

 

0.20

 

0.19

 

General

 

0.74

 

0.71

 

0.80

 

0.86

 

0.94

 

 

 

0.88

 

0.89

 

0.98

 

1.06

 

1.13

 

Non-accrual and restructured loans as a percentage of year-end loans (before provisions)

 

0.50

 

0.71

 

0.84

 

0.96

 

0.77

 

Charge to profit and loss account (ordinary and significant) as a percentage of

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year-end loans

 

0.34

 

0.28

 

0.32

 

0.49

 

0.31

 

Year-end loans and acceptances

 

0.32

 

0.25

 

0.29

 

0.45

 

0.27

 

Average loans and acceptances

 

0.33

 

0.26

 

0.31

 

0.46

 

0.30

 

Year-end risk-weighted assets

 

0.30

 

0.25

 

0.28

 

0.38

 

0.25

 

 


(1)       Ratios exclude specific provisions for impaired off-balance sheet credit exposures.

 

Provisioning coverage ratio

 

The provisioning coverage ratio (ie. the level of provisioning for non-accrual loans) is determined having regard to all identifiable losses anticipated to result from non-accrual loans.  The identifiable losses anticipated is management’s determination of probable losses for individual loans that are considered impaired. This considers all available information, including future cash flows, the effective rate of interest, the secondary market value of the loan and the fair value of collateral.  The estimate is not determined over the life of the loan, only at the point at which the loan is considered impaired.  Accordingly, the balance of the specific provision is maintained equal to the total of all estimated losses.

 

To ensure that adequate provisions and write-offs are maintained, rigorous credit monitoring procedures are in place to facilitate the early identification of all doubtful debts and correspondingly, the estimated losses likely to arise.  Central to this process, all entities in the Group are required to formally review their loan portfolio at least quarterly to ensure all doubtful debts have been identified and loss estimations made.  Provisions must be adjusted upwards or downwards to equate to the current estimates of loss on doubtful loan accounts.

 

The actual levels of specific provisioning set aside to cover estimated losses on loans which are considered to be sufficiently non-accrual and impaired to warrantraising of a provision are set out below:

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

Specific provision coverage (1)

 

29.4

 

25.9

 

27.5

 

Total provision coverage (1)

 

198.1

 

138.0

 

141.5

 

 


(1)       Ratios include specific provisions for impaired off-balance sheet credit exposures.

 

The general provision provides further coverage against these loans of 168.7% at September 30, 2004, bringing total effective coverage to 198.1%.

 

56



 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

Total deposits and other borrowings (net of set-offs) increased by $19.6 billion, or 9.7%, to $220.8 billion at September 30, 2004, compared with $201.2 billion at September 30, 2003.  Excluding the effect of exchange rate movements during 2004, deposits and other borrowings increased by 8.6%.  The increase was the result of continued growth in Australia, primarily due to more competitive pricing on term deposits and increased funding requirements.

 

Non-interest-bearing deposits at September 30, 2004 represent 6.1% of total deposits compared to 6.5% at September 30, 2003.

 

In Australia, deposits and other borrowings increased by $11.9 billion, or 11.3%, to $118.0 billion reflecting strong growth in both certificates of deposit and term deposits.  In Europe, deposits and other borrowings increased by $4.5 billion, or 7.8%, to $62.1 billion; however, excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, the increase was 5.3%, primarily in relation to term deposit growth.  In New Zealand, deposits and other borrowings increased by $3.9 billion, or 18.2% to $25.6 billion; however, excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, the increase was 10.3%.  This reflected strong growth in retail deposits (term, as well as on-demand and short-term deposits), and growth in borrowings.  In the United States, deposits and other borrowings decreased by $0.5 billion, or 4.6%, to $11.3 billion; however, excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, were flat, with higher borrowings, offsetting lower deposits.  In Asia, deposits and other borrowings remained flat.

 

Deposits and other borrowings for the Group as at September 30, 2004

 

 

 

Australia

 

Europe

 

New
Zealand

 

United
States

 

Asia

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Deposits not bearing interest

 

6,050

 

6,300

 

615

 

550

 

1

 

13,516

 

On-demand and short-term deposits

 

48,153

 

28,072

 

7,287

 

1,898

 

122

 

85,532

 

Certificates of deposit

 

19,357

 

11,083

 

3,184

 

506

 

 

34,130

 

Term deposits

 

32,057

 

15,201

 

12,179

 

3,220

 

3,555

 

66,212

 

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase

 

1,006

 

1,095

 

 

14

 

 

2,115

 

Borrowings

 

11,388

 

382

 

2,378

 

5,099

 

 

19,247

 

Total deposits and other borrowings

 

118,011

 

62,133

 

25,643

 

11,287

 

3,678

 

220,752

 

 

Assets under management and administration

 

The assets of the Group as reported on the statement of financial position include certain assets managed on behalf of others, for instance, where statutory funds and registered schemes are required to be consolidated by the Group under Australian Accounting Standards.  Assets on trust relate to funds held in trust by the Group’s trust services businesses.  The Group and its associated entities also manage and perform administration for entities such as superannuation funds and unit trusts, the assets of which do not form part of the total assets recorded on the Group’s statement of financial position, as set out below:

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

By type

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Assets under management

 

65,384

 

58,390

 

51,794

 

Assets under administration

 

10,520

 

9,414

 

7,677

 

Assets on trust

 

5,224

 

5,289

 

5,123

 

Total assets under management and administration

 

81,128

 

73,093

 

64,594

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By region

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

74,032

 

66,225

 

60,138

 

Europe

 

4,214

 

4,322

 

1,835

 

New Zealand

 

2,310

 

2,030

 

2,151

 

Asia

 

572

 

516

 

470

 

Total assets under management and administration

 

81,128

 

73,093

 

64,594

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By investor

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retail

 

59,361

 

56,554

 

52,073

 

Corporate

 

21,767

 

16,539

 

12,521

 

Total assets under management and administration

 

81,128

 

73,093

 

64,594

 

 

Total assets under management and administration increased by 11.0% to $81,128 million at September 30, 2004, compared with $73,093 million at September 30, 2003.  The growth in total assets under management and administration reflects solid net inflows in the wholesale business in Australia and increased investment returns as a result of improved investment markets in the year to September 30, 2004.

 

57



Risk management

 

Management of risk is fundamental to the business of being a financial services provider and is an essential element of the Group’s strategy.  Financial services organisations face an array of risks.

 

An enterprise-wide risk management model structure implemented throughout the Group comprises a common policy framework and a set of controls to achieve standardisation of risk/reward practices across the Group.  Each business unit is responsible for the identification and quantification of the particular risks it is exposed to and for implementation of appropriate policies, procedures and controls.

 

Overview and monitoring of this process throughout the Group is undertaken by Risk Management.  Risk Management comprises Credit Risk Management, Market Risk, Operational Risk and Insurance, Regulatory Compliance, Legal and Internal Audit.

 

Risk Management’s role is to monitor and systematically assess the Group’s risk profile in existing and proposed business operations, and to assist business units in the design and implementation of appropriate risk management policies and strategies.  Risk Management also works with the businesses to promote awareness of the need to manage risk.

 

Developments continue to be made in the quantification of risks, and the allocation of appropriate risk capital.  Portfolio management methods are being further developed to manage the Group’s risk profile.  Modelling to forecast future risk management trends is being used increasingly to assist in decision making.  This will continue to increase in importance as the Group prepares to implement Basel II across the various risk streams.

 

Risk Management prepares and submits the Group risk profile to the Board.  This document profiles the major recognised on-balance sheet and off-balance sheet strategy, performance and operational risks, together with procedures for their day-to-day responsibility, control and management.

 

The Risk Committee of the Board reviews in greater detail the Group’s risk and return appetite and oversees the Group’s overall control framework.  This Risk Committee has cross-membership with the Audit Committee of the Board.

 

The Risk Committee covers key elements of risk, including regulatory compliance, operational risk, market risk, internal audit, credit risk and balance sheet management.

 

The framework is consistent with the proposed supervisory review process (Pillar 2) of Basel II.

 

Refer to page 74 for Risk Committee members, responsibilities and charter.

 

The majority of risk policy decisions are made within each business unit.

 

A Group Risk Forum, comprising executive and senior management, is the principal risk policy decision making body within executive management.

 

This forum reviews and approves the more strategic risk assessments, and is supported by the Central Risk Management Committee, which has an operational focus, and Risk Management Committees in each region and/or line of business.

 

Major balance sheet risk areas and their management are outlined below, but many other types of risks such as payment systems, computer systems fraud, legislative compliance – environmental, business continuity/disaster recovery, and e-commerce risks are managed throughout the Group.

 

A recent report by APRA in respect of foreign currency options trading has identified deficiencies in some aspects of the Company’s risk management systems.  Refer to the ‘report on the directors and officers’ on page 84 for further details.

 

The Group has commenced a review of its Risk Management function both internally and through the engagement of external consultants in order to improve the Risk Management practices of the Group by benchmarking them against best practice.  This has resulted in the Group restructuring its finance and risk management functions to provide clear accountabilities at both a regional and group level, and is taking steps to change the culture and behaviours across the organisation globally.

 

Credit risk

 

Credit risk is the potential that a borrower or a counterparty will fail to meet its obligations in accordance with agreed terms.

 

The Group’s credit risk management infrastructure is framed to provide sound management principles and practices for the maintenance of appropriate asset quality across the Group.

 

Credit Risk Management, a division of Risk Management, is structured to develop and maintain credit policies and key credit risk systems, provide monitoring and reporting of asset quality and undertake the independent oversight of credit portfolios across the Group.

 

The management of credit risk within the Group is achieved through a focus on approval and monitoring of individual transactions together with analysis of the performance of the various credit risk portfolios.  Portfolio monitoring techniques cover such areas as industry or geographic concentrations and delinquency trends.

 

Establishing an appropriate credit risk environment

 

Significant credit risk strategies and policies are approved, and reviewed annually, by the Board and the Risk Committee.  Through such policies as borrower (single large exposure) and industry concentration limit, the Board establishes the Group’s tolerance for risk.  These policies are delegated to, and disseminated under the guidance and control of, management.

 

The Group’s credit policies, which are subject to ongoing review, are documented and disseminated in a form that provides a consistent view of all major credit policies supporting the credit operations of the Group.

 

For complex credit products and services, Credit Risk Management provides a policy profile that identifies and quantifies risks and establishes the means of mitigating such risks.

 

Single large exposure policies and industry concentration limits are in place across the Group.  Overall composition and quality of credit portfolio exposures are monitored and periodically reported to the Board, and, where required, to the relevant regional supervisory authorities.

 

A key factor in the introduction of new products and services is the identification of credit risk inherent in such products and services.  This is managed through a process requiring acceptance by all impacted areas of the

 

 

58



 

business and approval by Risk Management Committees prior to implementation.

 

Operating under a sound credit granting process

 

The Group has established processes for the granting of credit.  These include:

 

                         establishment of overall credit limits at the level of individual borrowers and counterparties, and groups of connected counterparties for both on-and off-balance sheet exposures;

 

                         satisfaction with repayment capacity and integrity of the counterparty;

 

                         use of financial covenants;

 

                         use of collateral;

 

                         consideration of economic and industry conditions; and

 

                         an objective customer rating assessment system.

 

Supporting these expectations are defined and documented policies and processes for the granting of credit.  The key elements of the process include:

                         clearly-defined authorities for the approving of credit; and

                         a system of overview of credit approvals by a higher level of authority to ensure adherence to policies and good credit practice.

 

The delegated authorities are aligned to the counterparty risk by the inclusion of customer ratings in the authority matrix.  The Group’s credit rating system has been a focus point of credit assessment and related processes for a number of years.  The system, based on probability of default of a counterparty, has been implemented globally and provides meaningful differentiation of credit risk and focus in pricing for risk.

 

For consumer credit, scoring solutions are in place and are supported by the mandatory use of appropriate monitoring tools.  These tools provide the essential continual review of data integrity, scorecard performance and decision strategies.  Software to validate and verify input data is used globally to support data integrity and reduce fraudulent activity.

 

Maintaining an appropriate credit administration, measurement and monitoring process

 

Efficient and effective credit administration operations and adequate control over back office procedures such as monitoring documentation, contractual requirements, legal covenants and collateral, are recognised as being vitally important aspects of the end-to-end credit process.

 

The Group assigns these responsibilities to various business units (ie. Business, Personal, Agribusiness, Cards, Payments, and Asset Finance and Fleet Management), together with centralised structures supporting the branch network, and business bankers, such as Customer Service and Operations.

 

Monitoring the condition of individual credits in the business units in the Financial Services businesses and Corporate & Institutional Banking principally rests with the customer-facing relationship managers, with overview by Risk Management.

 

Ensuring adequate controls over credit risk

 

There is a formal process, undertaken by specialist units, of independent oversight of credit in each region across the Group.  Periodic reporting is submitted to management, the Audit Committee and the Risk Committee.

 

Additionally, credit processes and policy compliance are subject to internal auditing and targeted credit reviews of specific business units or regions are undertaken as considered appropriate.

 

On a regular basis, credits that are outside agreed arrangements are reported to the appropriate levels of authority for attention and monitoring of actions taken.

 

Credits showing adverse trends are passed to specialist units that undertake the collections and recovery processes.  The Group utilises skilled internal resources supported by external secondments.

 

Through the use of due diligence techniques, the Group regularly targets areas of interest/concern within its credit portfolio to review and maintain the quality of the credit portfolio.

 

The role of supervisors

 

The Group is subject to supervision by APRA, together with the local supervisors in each of the countries in which the Company or its subsidiary banks, carry on business.  In addition to regular dialogue, APRA undertakes periodic visits to the Company to review asset quality and the operation of credit risk management processes.

 

The Group also provides quarterly information to APRA, detailing large exposures to individual customers or groups of related customers in excess of 10% of total Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital.  APRA imposes restrictions on the Group’s ability to accept large exposures.

 

Basel II

 

As a global financial institution, the Group aspires to the advanced internal-ratings-based approach under Basel II.

 

The Group has a Basel II program in place entrusted with developing the required capability (processes, policies, systems and data) to achieve an internal-ratings-based approach.

 

Refer to page 17 for a more detailed discussion of the ‘Basel II Capital Accord’.

 

Market risk

 

Market risk is the potential for losses to the Group resulting from adverse changes in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, option volatility and commodity prices in the financial markets in which the Group operates.

 

Trading risk management

 

The Group continues to strengthen its market risk control framework covering all trading centres for Corporate & Institutional Banking.  Market Risk is responsible for the formulation and implementation of appropriate policies and procedures to monitor and control transactional market risk generated by the Markets division of Corporate & Institutional Banking.  On a day-to-day basis, Market Risk is responsible for the maintenance and development of the market risk control framework, including custodianship of the Market Risk system.  This risk control function is fully segregated to ensure the independence necessary for prudent internal risk management and to meet regulatory requirements.

 

59



 

Trading limits

 

Trading risk is managed using a number of well-defined and developed limit structures.  These include a number of desk level portfolio measures such as:

 

                         interest rate sensitivity limits;

 

                         foreign exchange position limits;

 

                         yield curve limits;

 

                         basis risk limits; and

 

                         option portfolio limits.

 

In addition to the above desk level portfolio measures, a Value at risk (VaR) methodology is also used. VaR limits are applied to the trading portfolios within the Markets division.

 

The Board approves both an overall VaR limit for Corporate & Institutional Banking together with a VaR desk level limit allocation.

 

In addition to the above controls, trading portfolios are also subjected to stress test analysis on a regular basis.

 

VaR methodology

 

VaR is an estimate of potential losses resulting from shifts in interest rates, currency exchange rates, option volatility, equity prices and commodity prices.  The estimate is calculated on an entire trading portfolio basis, including both physical and derivative positions.

 

The Group’s VaR is predominantly calculated using historical simulation using the 99th percentile outcome based on portfolio revaluations across two years of historical pricing data.

 

For example, a VaR exposure of $1 million means that on 99 days out of 100, given the historical behaviour of rates, an overnight loss on the trading portfolio should not exceed $1 million.

 

The use of a VaR methodology has limitations, which include:

 

                         the historical data used to calculate VaR is not always an appropriate proxy for current market conditions.  The historical data may cause the underestimation of losses in more volatile market conditions, or the overestimation of losses in placid market conditions;

 

                         market rate movements may exceed the most extreme rate movement in the historical data leading to significant underestimation of losses;

 

                         VaR methodology assumes that positions are held for one day and no attempt is made to manage risk during that day.  The positive or negative impact of transactions intended to manage risk on the portfolio are excluded from the loss estimate; and

 

                         VaR is calculated at the close of business and positions may change substantially during the course of the trading day.  Intra-day exposures are not subject to intra-day VaR calculations.

 

Given these limitations of VaR methodology, the Group employs supplementary risk measures in the form of stress testing, to estimate losses resulting from extreme market shifts, and position and sensitivity limits, which provide specific controls on risk at a portfolio level.

 

The following table shows the Group’s VaR for all member banks’ trading portfolios, including both physical and derivative positions.  The figures reflect the potential trading losses across products and regions in which the Group operates.

 

Unauthorised trading in foreign currency options (for further detail refer to page 84 in the ‘report on the directors and officers’) has had an effect on the VaR numbers in these tables.  However, the nature of the trading activities during the reporting period were such that any effect on the numbers will be immaterial.

 

Value at risk at 99% confidence interval

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

Average value during reporting period

 

 

 

 

 

Foreign exchange risk

 

7

 

7

 

Interest rate risk

 

13

 

17

 

Volatility risk

 

5

 

4

 

Commodities risk

 

1

 

1

 

Diversification benefit

 

(6

)

(7

)

Total

 

20

 

22

 

Minimum value during reporting period (1)

 

 

 

 

 

Foreign exchange risk

 

1

 

2

 

Interest rate risk

 

7

 

9

 

Volatility risk

 

1

 

2

 

Maximum value during reporting period (1)

 

 

 

 

 

Foreign exchange rate

 

39

 

20

 

Interest rate

 

21

 

25

 

Volatility risk

 

20

 

7

 

Commodities risk

 

2

 

1

 

 


(1)                               The VaR numbers in these tables could be taken from different days; hence, they are not additive.

 

Balance sheet (non-trading) risk

 

The Group Asset and Liability Management Committee (Group ALCO), under delegated Board authority, sets policies in relation to the management of structural balance sheet exposures.  These exposures include structural interest rate risk, structural foreign exchange risk and liquidity risk.  The Group’s global structural balance sheet risk is monitored against approved policies by Corporate Finance and reported on a monthly basis to Group ALCO.  An Independent Risk Oversight function was created at the commencement of the year to oversee the balance sheet management process.  The Independent Risk Oversight function is mandated to verify the quantum of balance sheet risk in addition to responsibility for the robustness of the balance sheet risk management process.  It has dual but separate reporting lines to Group ALCO and to the Risk Committee via the Executive General Manager, Risk Management.

 

Wealth Management and each regional bank in the Group has an Asset and Liability Management Committee (ALCO) which is delegated the responsibility for managing local structural balance sheet risks in accordance with Group Balance Sheet Management policies.  Group ALCO supervises the management of these local structural risks and monitors activity for compliance with Group policies.

 

Structural interest rate risk

 

In carrying out its business activities, each regional bank and non-banking entity in the Group strives to meet customer demands for products with various interest rate structures and maturities.  Sensitivity to interest rate movements arises from mismatches in the repricing dates, cash flows and other characteristics of assets and liabilities.  As interest rates and yield curves change over time, the size and nature of these mismatches may result in a loss or gain in earnings.

 

60



 

Structural interest rate risks arise mainly in the Group’s banking operations. The management objective is to maximise net interest income and shareholder value arising from movements in interest rates.  Each regional bank’s ALCO is responsible for managing the structural interest rate risk within the region, in accordance with approved Group policy.

 

Structural interest rate risk is calculated using balance sheet simulation processes, which are undertaken across the Group’s banking operations.  The balance sheet simulation process is based on planned product volumes and margins, which are regularly updated to reflect the Group’s latest views on business projections and interest rate environments.  The Group applies a wide range of interest rate scenarios in measuring structural interest rate risk.  These interest rate scenarios are derived using estimates of volatility to generate a range of potential outcomes around the market implied yield curve.  This provides the ability to derive a statistical distribution of potential movements in net interest income.  The Group also measures potential movements in the market value of equity of the banking operations that may arise due to changes in market interest rates.

 

The results of balance sheet simulations in the Group’s banking operations, together with other balance sheet risk management information and strategies, are presented and reviewed by each regional ALCO and the Group ALCO on a monthly basis and at scheduled Board meetings.  Similarly, Wealth Management’s balance sheet risk management information and strategy are presented and reviewed by Wealth Management ALCO and Group ALCO on a monthly basis.

 

The table below presents a summary of the aggregated structural earnings at risk relating to non-trading assets and liabilities.  The table below contains forward-looking statements (refer to ‘forward-looking’ statements on page 2).  Based on the structural interest rate risk position at balance date, the table shows the possible impact on net interest income, for the year ending September 30, 2005 of an immediate 1% parallel movement in interest rates across the whole yield curve.

 

The non-Australian exposure (expressed in Australian dollars) is the net exposure of offshore banking and non-banking entities.  Structural interest rate exposure in some countries may be biased towards rising interest rates, whilst in others may be biased to declining interest rates, depending on different economic conditions or cycles.

 

 

 

Forecast effect on net
interest income 2005 (1)

 

Forecast effect on net
interest income 2004 (2)

 

 

 

Rates up
1%

 

Rates down
1%

 

Rates up
1%

 

Rates down
1%

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australian operations

 

50

 

(50

)

(45

)

45

 

Non-Australian operations

 

43

 

(44

)

(45

)

31

 

 


(1)                               Represents the forecast effect on net interest income for the year ending September 30, 2005.

 

(2)                               Represents the forecast effect on net interest income (as at September 30, 2003) for the year ended September 30, 2004.

 

The impact of interest rate movements on the net interest income of life insurance and funds management entities is not incorporated within the table above.  However, interest rate movement is one of the factors taken into account in determining the change in net market value of life insurance and funds management entities when applying Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1038 “Life Insurance Business”.

 

Structural foreign exchange risk

 

Structural foreign exchange risk arises from investments in the Group’s foreign branches and controlled entities.  Both earnings and capital are exposed to movements in foreign exchange rates as a result of these investments.

 

Reported earnings and equity are exposed to movements in exchange rates as a result of the need to translate earnings and net assets of the foreign operations into the Australian dollar consolidated financial statements.

 

This exposure of reported earnings and equity to movements in exchange rates is sometimes referred to as an accounting or translation exposure which, in the absence of any long-term realignment in exchange rates, has no lasting impact on underlying economic exposures.

 

The policy of the Group is that the net asset position of integrated foreign operations is to be fully hedged, whilst the net asset position and earnings of offshore subsidiaries and self-sustaining foreign operations are not to be hedged.  The rationale for this approach is that the Group bases its hedging decisions on economic considerations and not on the potential impact which short-term currency fluctuations may have on reported net assets and earnings.

 

The net assets of the Group’s integrated foreign operations are denominated in US dollars.  As at September 30, 2004, the net assets of US$134 million were fully hedged.

 

Real foreign exchange exposures, on the other hand, arise independently of the accounting process.  Such transaction exposures arise from the risk that future cash flows will be converted to Australian dollars at less favourable rates than at present.  Such cash flows could result from the repatriation of profits or capital back to the Company.  The policy of the Group is to fully hedge these exposures at the time of commitment, if they are of a material nature.  Hedging of transaction exposures relating to offshore acquisitions and divestments is assessed on a case-by-case basis.

 

Liquidity and funding

 

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group is unable to meet its financial payment obligations as they fall due.  Liquidity within the Group is managed in accordance with policies approved by the Board, with oversight from the regional bank’s ALCO and Group ALCO.

 

The Group manages liquidity risk through a combination of positive cash flow management, the maintenance of portfolios containing high quality liquid assets, and diversification of its funding base.  The Group undertakes a conservative approach in managing its liquidity as it imposes internal prudential limits that are in addition to the regulatory requirements.

 

Regulatory supervision of bank liquidity in Australia is undertaken by APRA through its Prudential Statement APS 210 “Liquidity” (APS 210).  This approach became effective on July 1, 2000.  In accordance with the requirements of APS 210, liquidity risk is measured and managed in the Group’s banking entities on a cash flow basis.  Each regional bank is required to monitor liquidity under both ‘going concern’ and ‘name crisis’ scenarios, and cash flow mismatch limits have been established to limit the Group’s liquidity exposure.  An additional prudential requirement of the regional banks is to maintain liquid asset portfolios to meet unexpected cash flow requirements.

 

61



 

Liquidity is managed on a regional basis, with day-to-day responsibility residing with regional banks, offshore branches and regional treasury operating divisions of the Group.  Regulatory authorities in some countries in which the Group operates impose their own requirements to ensure that liquidity is managed prudently.  These requirements may involve the bank maintaining a reserve deposit account with the central bank, holding a portfolio of highly liquid securities and overseeing the internal prudential supervision of liquidity.

 

A three-level contingency plan has also been established for management of an escalated liquidity requirement where the Group experiences either restricted access to wholesale funding, or a large increase in the withdrawal of funds.  The plan identifies triggers on each level, details the action required, allocates the key tasks to individuals, provides a timeframe and defines a management committee to manage the action plan.

 

Refer also to ‘liquidity and funding’ on page 45.

 

Life insurance and funds management market risk

 

The life insurance business is exposed to market risk arising from adverse movements in market prices affecting fee income on investment-linked policies and the returns obtained from investing shareholder funds held in each life company.  Market risk is also affected by mismatches between assets and the guaranteed returns offered on some classes of policy, which may not have been effectively hedged through the matching of assets.

 

The Group attempts to, wherever possible, segregate policyholder funds from shareholder funds.  Appropriate investment mandates are then developed for each.  The Group (for investment mandates set for assets in policyholder funds) attempts to match asset characteristics with the nature of policy obligations; however, certain clauses included in policy and sales documents, regulatory constraints or the lack of suitable investments may affect this.

 

The majority of the policyholder assets are held for investment-linked policies where the policyholder bears the risk of movements in the market value and determines the allocation of the assets.  Should markets fall, fee income will decrease as it is based on the amount of assets invested.

 

Market risk in the life insurance and funds management businesses also arises from movements in the value of the controlled entities of National Australia Financial Management Limited.  The economic value of these assets fluctuates based on a number of factors including interest rates, retention rates and fee income.

 

Country risk

 

Sound international credit practices require not only commercial credit analysis of the counterparty, of the type normally associated with domestic credit, but also an assessment of country risk.  Country risk arises from economic, financial, political or social factors within a country, which may affect a counterparty’s ability and willingness to repay loans made by the Group.  This consideration is applied notwithstanding the fact that the counterparty’s own credit standing domestically might not have been impaired.

 

The Group has an established process for measuring country risk, which is used in determining and monitoring its cross border exposures.  This includes setting prudential cross border limits based upon the Group’s risk appetite for each country.  Among other things, these limits are reflective of a country’s credit grading, size, level of foreign exchange reserves and ability to meet financial obligations.

 

Limits are allocated into maturity time bands, which vary according to the risks of the country concerned and the outlook for the economic/political landscape.  Exposures are monitored daily.  The Board reviews these individual country limits on a periodic basis.

 

Cross border outstandings by industry category

 

The following table analyses the aggregate cross border outstandings due from countries other than Australia where such outstandings individually exceed 0.75% of the Group’s assets.  For the purposes of the annual financial report, cross border outstandings are based on the country of domicile of the counterparty or guarantor of the ultimate risk, and comprise loans, balances due from other financial institutions, acceptances and other monetary assets including trading derivative assets and reverse repurchase agreements.  Local currency activities with local residents by foreign branches and subsidiaries are excluded.

 

The reporting threshold used below is for disclosure guidance only and is not intended as an indicator of a prudent level of lending by the Group to any one country.

 

 

 

Government
and official
institutions

 

Banks and
other
financial
institutions

 

Commercial
and
industrial

 

Other

 

Total

 

% of
total
assets

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

As at September 30, 2004

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Germany

 

2,770

 

3592

 

809

 

98

 

7,269

 

1.8

 

Italy

 

3,762

 

600

 

 

82

 

4,444

 

1.1

 

Netherlands

 

3

 

3,681

 

954

 

89

 

4,727

 

1.1

 

Switzerland

 

 

2,903

 

193

 

18

 

3,114

 

0.8

 

US

 

38

 

5,042

 

5,571

 

359

 

11,010

 

2.7

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

As at September 30, 2003

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Germany

 

2,933

 

4,131

 

751

 

103

 

7,918

 

2.0

 

Italy

 

8,230

 

669

 

78

 

7

 

8,984

 

2.3

 

UK

 

 

2,314

 

849

 

378

 

3,541

 

0.9

 

US

 

107

 

9,025

 

6,662

 

455

 

16,249

 

4.1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

As at September 30, 2002

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Germany

 

79

 

5,132

 

1,996

 

 

7,207

 

1.9

 

UK

 

 

4,358

 

1,507

 

 

5,865

 

1.6

 

US

 

 

1,596

 

3,540

 

 

5,136

 

1.4

 

 

In addition, as at September 30, 2004, the US had off-balance sheet commitments of $4,095 million (2003: $4,101 million).

 

During 2004, the Group changed its basis of defining and collating cross border outstandings information for financial reporting disclosure purposes.  The most significant change was the inclusion of trading derivatives and reverse repurchase agreement asset positions.  The comparative information for 2003 has been restated to reflect these changes.  It was impracticable to restate comparative information for 2002 on a consistent basis.

 

62



 

Operational risk

 

Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed processes, people, or systems or from external events.  Individual business units own and are responsible for the identification, assessment and mitigation of their risk profile.  Various reports are produced at management and Board level for their information and to assist in monitoring and where necessary determining appropriate actions.

 

The Operational Risk and Insurance function is responsible for:

                        operational risk policy development;

                        operational risk advice;

                        business continuity planning advice;

                        support in risk evaluation;

                        operational risk reporting; and

                        co-ordination of the risk assessment and approval process of new and re-engineered products and processes to ensure change initiatives are robustly assessed from a risk perspective.

 

To enhance the Group’s ability to identify, measure and manage operational risk, a systematic framework and methodology for operational risk management has been developed and implemented.  The methodology includes risk modelling and risk evaluation.  Risk modelling is the statistical estimation of operational risk exposure based on internal and external historical loss experience.  Risk evaluation involves the quality mapping and appraisal of the internal control environment based on end-to-end evaluation criteria.

 

Regulatory risk

 

The Group conducts its diverse geographic spread of business activities within applicable local and international laws, codes, regulatory and prudential controls and standards.

 

Regulatory risk is the risk of a Group company incurring corporate and/or personal penalties to the Group’s directors, executive management and staff for non-adherence to legal and regulatory obligations, damaging its reputation, incurring restrictive conditions and undertakings by regulators on how the Group does business, or losing or having its licence suspended to deal or engage in certain activities as a result of non-compliance with legal and regulatory obligations.  Regulatory compliance risk can also arise where the Group fails to anticipate and effectively manage the impact of regulatory change on its operations.

 

The Group aims to pro-actively manage and meet the obligations imposed on it across all business lines, customer segments and products in the jurisdictions in which it operates.

 

The Group’s regulatory compliance policy and integrated business compliance framework set out the underlying compliance management expectations and control standards.  The framework has been enhanced with the adoption of a ‘three lines of defence’ approach to compliance responsibilities and assurance, and delivery of practical compliance processes, systems and tools to assist the business in tailoring and embedding its compliance obligations into core operations.

 

Each business unit is responsible for the implementation and maintenance of those controls necessary to meet and satisfy its regulatory compliance obligations (the first line of defence).  Regulatory compliance teams work in each line of business, assisting management to fulfil these responsibilities, to address the impact of regulatory change on business practices and to test compliance controls and processes (the second line of defence).  Regulatory Compliance and Internal Audit provide assurance on the application of the compliance framework (the third line of defence).

 

Fostering a positive compliance culture throughout all levels of the Group is recognised as an integral part of excellent relationships with customers and regulators as well as good corporate governance.

 

For a discussion of certain services provided by the external auditor in connection with problem loan reviews and the Company’s related internal review of auditor independence refer to ‘certain services provided by the external auditor – matters related to independence’ on page 19 in the ‘business overview’ section.  Also, the regulatory implications of the unauthorised trading in foreign currency options is discussed on page 84 of the ‘report on the directors and officers’.

 

Life insurance risk

 

Life insurance risk occurs when the experience of mortality and morbidity claims compares adversely to that assumed when pricing life insurance policies.  Factors affecting this include the trend of future claims and incidence of actual claims, unforeseen diseases or epidemics, and longer than assumed recovery periods for morbidity claims.  Life insurance risk also occurs when the mortality and morbidity experience is higher than the assumptions used to determine the fair value of the life insurance business.

 

These risks are controlled by ensuring that the Group’s underwriting policies and procedures adequately identify any potential risk, while retaining the right to amend premiums on risk policies where appropriate, and through the effective use of reinsurance.  The experiences of the Group’s life insurance business and that of the industry are reviewed on an annual basis to ensure that the risks continue to be effectively managed.

 

Disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting

 

Under the requirements of the United States Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, and the Chief Financial Officer must each review and evaluate the Group’s disclosure controls and procedures, including internal control over financial reporting.  Under that Act, the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, and the Chief Financial Officer must certify, amongst other things, that they have presented in this annual financial report:

 

(1)          their conclusions about the effectiveness of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures as at the end of the year covered by this report; and

(2)          any change in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the year that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

This evaluation was performed as at September 30, 2004, under the supervision of and with the participation of the Company’s management, including the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, and the Chief Financial Officer.  Based on that evaluation, the Company’s Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that as of the evaluation date such disclosure controls and procedures were reasonably designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed by the Company in reports it files or submits under the United States Securities

 

63



 

Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the rules and forms of the SEC, subject to the following:

 

Discovery of unauthorised trading in foreign currency options

 

In January 2004, the Company announced that it had identified losses relating to unauthorised trading in foreign currency options.  A third party investigation into this matter was conducted by PricewaterhouseCoopers.  The key points from the PricewaterhouseCoopers ‘Investigation into foreign exchange losses at National Australia Bank’ report dated March 12, 2004 include:

                        the total losses arising from foreign currency options trading announced on January 27, 2004, was $360 million;

                        the losses arising from the foreign currency options trading increased significantly between September 2003 and January 2004;

                        four traders on the foreign currency options desk exploited loopholes and weaknesses in systems and processes to hide trading losses and protect bonuses;

                        the traders’ activities were contrary to the Company’s strategy of building customer-focused business;

                        the foreign currency options trading losses were reported to management by several junior employees;

                        no customers were directly or indirectly affected by the foreign currency options trading losses;

                        in the Corporate & Institutional Banking Market’s division there was:

                    inadequate management supervision;

                    significant gaps in back office monitoring functions;

                    escalation processes that did not work properly;

                    weaknesses in control procedures;

                    failure in risk management systems; and

                    an absence of appropriate financial controls;

                        there was not a suitable compliance culture within this area of the Company and a tendency to suppress bad news rather than be open and transparent about problems; and

                        warning signals, both inside the Company and from the regulators and other market participants, were not properly acted upon.

 

The complete PricewaterhouseCoopers report is available on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com

 

By letter dated March 24, 2004, the Company’s auditor, KPMG, reported to the Audit Committee a finding that certain deficiencies in internal control design and failure in the operation of the internal control were such as to be considered a material weakness in internal control requiring a report to the Audit Committee under US Generally Accepted Auditing Standards AU325.  The matters cited were similar to those in the PricewaterhouseCoopers report.

 

APRA also provided to the Company a report on its investigation into this matter.  That report identified problems and issues in respect of management supervision, adherence to risk management systems and controls, internal governance procedures and the culture of the Company similar to those described above.

 

The complete APRA report is available on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com

 

The Company has made good progress in its program to implement the remedial actions required to address these issues.  As at December 31, 2004, of the 81 remedial actions required by APRA, 25 have been resolved to APRA’s satisfaction and a further 44 have been submitted to APRA for assessment for closure.  Following APRA’s assessment further work may or may not be required to close the issues.

 

The 69 requirements submitted to APRA to date constitute significant progress in a number of areas, namely:

                        clarity of roles and responsibilities – ambiguity between the roles of individuals in key functions (Market Risk, Finance, Markets and Operations) has been removed and roles clearly articulated;

                        strengthening of the limit management and escalation framework – revision of applicable policies to provide a framework to monitor all trading limits and a defined consequence framework;

                        strengthening of many critical controls and processes that support the trading operations;

                        closure of trading system gaps and weaknesses identified at the time of the foreign currency options trading losses, including the processing window utilised by the traders;

                        strengthening of Internal Audit policies and procedures including escalation of overdue issues to the Audit Committee of the Board;

                        a revised governance framework for Institutional Markets & Services endorsed by the Risk Committee of the Board; and

                        A number of initiatives to drive organisational and cultural change (refer below).

 

Work is still progressing to address the remedial actions yet to be submitted to APRA.  This includes:

                        through the newly formed Product Control function within Finance, the Company is still working to address some of the remedial actions raised regarding the level of analysis undertaken by the Finance function;

                        several cultural initiatives relating to incentive arrangements and codes of conduct;

                        a framework for setting the Company’s risk appetite at the Board level; and

                        a large program of work to achieve re-accreditation of an internal model to determine market risk capital.

 

The Company has also given enforceable undertakings to ASIC in relation to the foreign currency options trading losses.  The undertakings require the Company to review certain key systems and controls across those businesses operating under the primary Australian Financial Services Licence applicable to the Company’s Australian banking business.  Further detail with respect to the enforceable undertakings is provided in the ‘report on the directors and officers’on page 86.

 

Reporting of non-accrual loans and 90 days past due loans

 

At September 30, 2001 through to September 30, 2003, a certain Australian exposure was classified as performing.  At March 31, 2004, this exposure was classified as 90 days past due.  However, the classification of this exposure as non-accrual is now considered more appropriate, and comparative information for these years has been restated to include the balance of this exposure (including accrued interest) of $254 million at September 30, 2003, $221 million at September 30, 2002 and $207 million at September 30, 2001 (refer to note 18 to the financial report).  Other than this

 

64



 

single exposure, there are no other material loan facilities that are similarly affected.

 

The Company has implemented procedures to improve its data collection procedures used to establish its 90 days past due exposures, as weaknesses in these procedures had been identified.  The disclosures in this annual financial report reflect those improved procedures.  The Company is continuing to review whether additional improvements to the controls surrounding this reporting are required.  (Refer also to note 18 to the financial report.)

 

Cross border outstandings

 

The Company disclosed in its annual financial report 2003 filed on Form 20-F that the information used for preparation of disclosures on cross border outstandings by industry category was sourced from risk management systems and not financial reporting systems.  Those risk management systems were designed for monitoring risk exposure limits and were not designed specifically for cross border disclosure purposes.  The Group has strengthened the internal control over the reporting of cross border outstandings for the purpose of improving reporting in this area.  This resulted in changes to the basis of defining and collating cross border outstandings information for financial reporting purposes.

 

Organisational and cultural change

 

Since the discovery of the foreign currency options trading losses, as described above, the Company has embarked upon a journey of revitalisation across all levels of the organisation, including the Board and senior management.  There is recognition that the Group’s results, and its reputation, have been adversely impacted by compliance issues, insufficient accountability, and the lack of a clear cultural framework.  As part of this revitalisation program, the Company is restructuring its finance and risk management functions to provide clear accountabilities at both a regional and group level.  While the core financial information systems of the Company are considered to be sound and controlled effectively, there remains scope for a range of improvements to the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting, as evidenced by the foreign currency options trading losses and other matters referred to above.  This involves projects to address these specific issues, and projects such as the Sarbanes-Oxley internal control over financial reporting project, but also involves significant change in the culture of the organisation and in the visibility and accountability of its leadership group.  The Company has already taken steps to address these cultural issues by introducing new Corporate Principles and performance assessments specifically tied to the achievement of the behaviours required by those Principles.

 

Transactions with related and other non-independent parties

 

In the year to September 30, 2004, and up to January 20, 2005, the Group had a number of related party transactions (refer to note 50 in the financial report).  These transactions were made in the ordinary course of business and were made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with other persons or charged on the basis of equitable rates agreed between the parties.  These transactions did not involve more than the normal risk of collectability or present other unfavourable features.

 

Other non-independent parties are parties that are able to negotiate terms of transactions that are not on an arm’s length basis, but do not meet the definition of a related party.  The Group is not aware of any relationships or transactions with such parties that would materially affect its financial position or results of operations.

 

Risk factors

 

Business conditions and general economy

 

As an international financial services group, the Group’s businesses are affected by the external environment in the markets in which it operates.  The profitability of the Group’s businesses could be adversely affected by a worsening of general economic conditions in Australia, New Zealand, the UK, the US, or elsewhere, as well as by foreign and domestic trading market conditions.  Such factors could also adversely affect the credit quality of the Group’s on-and off-balance sheet assets.  An economic downturn can impact the Group’s results and financial position by affecting demand for the Group’s products and services.  Such a downturn, international disruption, dispute or event, or significantly higher interest rates, could impact the credit quality of the Group’s counterparties, increasing the risk that a greater number of the Group’s customers would default on their loans or other obligations to the Group, or would refrain from seeking additional credit.

 

For a discussion of the Group’s economic outlook, refer to page 22.

 

Competitive forces

 

The Group faces intense competition in all markets in which it operates.

 

For a discussion of the competitive factors facing the Group, refer to ‘competition’ on page 15.

 

Government policies and economic controls

 

The Group’s businesses and earnings are affected by the fiscal or other policies that are adopted by various regulatory authorities of the Australian Commonwealth Government, foreign governments and international agencies.

 

The nature and impact of future changes in such policies are not predictable and are beyond the Group’s control.

 

Fluctuations in currency exchange rates

 

As the Group prepares its annual financial report in Australian dollars, changes in currency exchange rates, particularly between the Australian dollar and the British pound or US dollar, may have an adverse effect on the earnings that it reports.

 

For a discussion of the Group’s risk management procedures, including the management of currency risk, refer to ‘risk management’ on page 61.

 

Credit risk

 

The Group’s provisions for doubtful debts provide for risks of losses inherent in loans and advances.  Estimating losses inherent in the loan portfolio is of its very nature uncertain and the accuracy of those estimates depends on many factors, including general economic conditions, rating migration, structural changes within industries that alter competitive positions, and other external factors such as legal and regulatory requirements.

 

65



 

For a discussion of certain services provided by the external auditor in connection with problem loan reviews and the Company’s related internal review of auditor independence refer to ‘certain services provided by the external auditor – matters related to independence’ on page 19 in the ‘business overview’ section.

 

For a discussion of the Group’s risk management procedures, including the management of credit risk, refer to ‘risk management’ on page 58.

 

Market risk

 

The Group’s earnings are also subject to market risk exposures, principally changes in market interest and foreign exchange rates, equity and commodity prices, and associated financial derivatives.  The Group has in place controls and processes governing market risk activities.

 

For a discussion of the Company’s losses relating to unauthorised trading in foreign currency options, refer to page 84.

 

For a discussion of the Group’s risk management procedures, including the management of market risk, refer to ‘risk management’ on page 59.

 

Operational risk

 

As a financial services group, the Group is exposed to a number of other risks relating to people, processes, and systems and from external events.  These risks are identified, measured and managed by the co-ordinated efforts of the individual business units and the Operational Risk unit, through the rigorous application of the Group’s systematic risk framework and methodology.

 

For a discussion of the Group’s risk management procedures, including the management of operational risk, refer to ‘risk management’ on page 63.

 

Control systems and programs

 

The implementation of control systems and programs is dependent upon factors such as the Group’s ability to acquire or develop necessary technology or systems, its ability to attract and retain qualified personnel, the competence and performance of employees, the co-operation of customers, or third party vendors.

 

Critical accounting policies

 

The reported results of the Group are sensitive to the accounting policies, assumptions and estimates that underlie the preparation of its financial statements.  The Group’s annual financial report has been prepared in accordance with Australian GAAP.

 

The Group’s principal accounting policies are disclosed in note 1 in the financial report and in note 56 with respect to policies that differ from US GAAP.

 

Certain of these policies are considered to be critical to the representation of the Group’s financial performance and position, since they require difficult, subjective, or complex judgements.  The following disclosure is intended to provide an enhanced level of understanding of these judgements and their impact on the Group’s financial statements.  These judgements necessarily involve assumptions or estimates in respect of future events, which can vary from what is forecast.  However, the Company believes that its financial statements and its ongoing review of the estimates and assumptions utilised in preparing those financial statements, are appropriate to provide a true and fair view of the Group’s financial performance and position over the relevant period.

 

Management has discussed the development and selection of its critical accounting policies with the Audit Committee and the Committee has reviewed the Group’s disclosure relating to them in this financial review.

 

The following are considered critical accounting policies of the Group.

 

Provision for doubtful debts

 

Under Australian GAAP, loans and advances are carried at their recoverable amount, representing the gross value of the outstanding balance adjusted for provisions for doubtful debts and unearned income.  To best meet this requirement, the Group has adopted a statistically-based provisioning methodology for its general provision for doubtful debts, which is consistent with other large financial institutions in Australia and the US.  Under this methodology, the Group estimates the level of losses inherent, but not specifically identified, in its existing credit portfolios at balance date.  The statistical provisioning methodology is applied to existing credit portfolios, including loans and advances drawn down in the current year.

 

In applying the statistically-based provisioning methodology, two key inputs are used in a statistical model: probability of default and the level of collateral held.

 

In respect of non-retail lending, the amount of the general provision is determined by multiplying the customer’s probability of default by the estimated loss given default.  The probability of default is determined by the Group’s internal customer rating system.  Internal ratings are assigned at the customer level.  This system utilises objective, verifiable external data, such as external credit ratings, and is supplemented with an assessment of economic and industry outlooks, conducted by the Group’s discrete specialist economics unit.  A small degree of subjective data is input into the model in relation to an assessment of the borrower’s management and any changes in this assessment would be unlikely to result in a material change to the Group’s general provision.  In general, the key driver of changes in the general provision for doubtful debts in respect of non-retail lending is usually changes in credit quality.

 

The estimated loss given default is the amount of an individual loan at risk having regard to the level of collateral held against that facility.  The level of collateral held is determined on a loan-by-loan basis, based on the Group’s assessment of the loan security’s value at the time of loan application and any subsequent valuations.  Changes in the level of collateral held will impact the loss given default and, in turn, the determination of the general provision.

 

For retail lending (smaller-balance homogeneous loans), provisions are assessed at a portfolio level and are based on product loss rates, to make a provision for losses inherent in the portfolio but not yet identified.  These rates are determined by reference to observed historical loss experience for the relevant product types and are the key driver of changes in the general provision for retail lending.

 

For retail lending, historical collateral levels have directly influenced product loss rates.  For example, mortgage lending has historically had high levels of collateral.  Product loss rates, based on this history, are therefore lower than for unsecured lending, such as credit cards.

 

66



 

In 2004, management revised the discount rate built into the statistically-based provisioning model that impacts cumulative probabilities of default.  This was in response to recent experience, industry practice and emerging developments.  The change resulted in a revision to the accounting estimate for general provision for doubtful debts, which was recognised as a significant expense in the year ended September 30, 2004.

 

The Group undertakes periodic sensitivity analysis to assess the impact of deterioration in credit risk on the credit portfolio and on the results of the statistically-based provisioning methodology.  Sensitivity analysis includes a one-standard-deviation confidence interval around the statistical estimate of losses inherent in respect of non-retail lending.  The statistical estimate may then be adjusted for management’s estimate based on probable losses on specific categories of loans, the trends in portfolio composition and concentrations.  Such adjustments do not exceed the results of the one-standard-deviation confidence interval sensitivity analysis.

 

For the purposes of the Group’s reconciliation to US GAAP, the net effect of discounting probabilities of default and the full term to maturities of facilities within the statistically-based provisioning model is not recognised.

 

In addition to the general provision, specific provisions for doubtful debts are recognised once a loan is classified as impaired to cover any potential losses inherent in the loan.  A loan is considered impaired when there is reasonable doubt over the collectability of principal and interest in accordance with the relevant loan agreements.  Amounts provided for are determined by specific identification or by management’s determination of probable losses for individual loans that are considered impaired in relation to loan portfolios where specific identification is impracticable.

 

Upon identification of a loan requiring a specific provision (that is an impaired loan), the respective loan’s general provision balance is transferred to the specific provision.  An assessment is then made by management as to whether the transferred balance is adequate to cover the estimated credit loss at balance date on that impaired loan.

 

For larger-balance, non-homogeneous loans that have been individually determined to be impaired, the level of specific provision required is based on an assessment of the recoverability of each loan.  This takes into account available evidence on the collateral and other objective and subjective factors that may impact the collectability of the outstanding loan principal and interest.  Management judgement is required in determining the valuation of the loan collateral.  Independent valuations are frequently obtained by management to provide expert advice.

 

Each portfolio of smaller-balance, homogenous loans, including credit cards and personal loans, is collectively evaluated for impairment.  The Group uses both dynamic modelling and specific provisioning at the account level.  Management considers overall portfolio indicators, including historical credit losses and delinquency rates, in determining the level of specific provision required for each portfolio.

 

The historical experience of the Group has shown that management’s judgement of the provisions for doubtful debts required in the past has been appropriate.  The Group considers the assumptions used in the calculation of the provision for doubtful debts to be reasonable and supportable in the existing economic environment.

 

Valuation of life insurance controlled entities

 

The Group is required by Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1038 “Life Insurance Business” to measure all the assets and liabilities of its life insurance controlled entities at net market value.  Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities is recognised in the profit and loss account as an unrealised gain or loss.

 

Directors’ bi-annual valuations of the life insurance controlled entities are performed using industry-accepted actuarial valuation methodologies.  Value is determined in three distinct areas, being value of:

                        each entity’s net assets;

                        future profits from current business contracts; and

                        future profits from future (yet to be written) business contracts.

 

In determining the value of all future profits to emerge from the life insurance controlled entities, careful consideration is given to both future business and economic assumptions affecting the business.  Many of these assumptions require significant judgement because they are dependent on a number of factors that cannot be precisely determined at the time the valuation is made.

 

The key business assumptions used relate to sales (volume and growth), profit margin squeeze, discontinuances, expenses and claims.  These assumptions are determined after an examination of the experience of the Group’s life insurance controlled entities, their short-term and long-term business plans, and industry experience and expectations.

 

The key economic assumptions used relate to investment earnings, risk discount, inflation and tax rates.  These assumptions are determined after an examination of current market rates and future market expectations.  In addition, the overall assumptions set and their impact on value are reviewed against transactions in the marketplace, current prices of listed entities and other publicly-available information.

 

Changes in management’s assessment of key business factors and economic conditions (global, regional and sector specific) in the future would affect the valuation of life insurance controlled entities.  As a result, the carrying value of life insurance controlled entities recorded in the statement of financial position and the movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities recorded in the statement of financial performance could be materially different in the future.  The Group considers the assumptions used in the valuations to be reasonable and supportable in the existing economic environment.  Further, the valuations are based on discounted cash flow valuations prepared by Tillinghast-Towers Perrin using risk discount rates specified by the directors.  Key business and economic assumptions are approved by a committee of senior management and a non-executive director of the Wealth Management holding company (National Wealth Management Holdings Limited).  Recommendation of the final valuation is then made to the Wealth Management Audit committee and the board of directors of the Wealth Management holding company.

 

Key valuation results and assumptions are disclosed in note 24 in the financial report.

 

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

Policy liabilities in the Group’s statement of financial position and the change in policy liabilities disclosed as an expense have been calculated using the Margin on Services methodology in accordance with guidance

 

67



provided by the Life Insurance Actuarial Standard Board’s Actuarial Standard AS 1.03 “Valuation of Policy Liabilities”.

 

Policy liabilities for investment-linked business are calculated using the accumulation method.  The liability is generally the accumulation of amounts invested by policyholders plus investment earnings less fees specified in policy contracts.  Deferred acquisition costs are offset against this liability.

 

Policy liabilities for non-investment-linked business are measured mainly using the projection method, which is based on the net present value of estimated future policy cash flows.  Future cash flows incorporate investment income, premiums, expenses, redemptions and benefit payments (including bonuses).

 

The measurement of policy liabilities is subject to actuarial assumptions, which involve complex judgements.  Assumptions made in the calculation of policy liabilities at each balance date are based on best estimates at that date.  The assumptions include the benefits payable under the policies on death, disablement or surrender, future premiums, investment earnings and expenses.  Best estimate means that assumptions are neither optimistic nor pessimistic but reflect the most likely outcome.  The assumptions used in the calculation of the policy liabilities are reviewed at each balance date.

 

Economic assumptions are based on the prevailing interest rate and economic environment.  Other assumptions are based on company experience, or where this is insufficient, industry experience.  A summary of the significant actuarial methods and assumptions used is contained in note 54 to the financial report.  Many of these assumptions are based on actuarial tables published by the Institute of Actuaries of Australia.

 

The Group considers the assumptions used in the calculation of life insurance policy liabilities to be reasonable and supportable in the existing economic environment.  Changes in actual experience and management’s assessment of economic conditions (global, regional and sector specific) in the future could affect the level of life insurance policy liabilities recorded.  As a result, the amount of policy liabilities recorded in the Group’s statement of financial position and the change in policy liabilities recorded in the statement of financial performance could be different in the future.

 

Defined benefit superannuation and pension arrangements

 

The Group maintains several defined benefit superannuation and pension arrangements, details of which are given in note 47 in the financial report.  In accordance with applicable accounting rules, the Group does not consolidate the assets and liabilities associated with these defined benefits plans.  Instead, the Group recognises a prepaid asset for contributions the Group has made to the pension plan in excess of pension expense.  The measurement of the prepaid asset and the annual pension expense involves actuarial and economic assumptions.  The four key variables used in pension accounting relate to the size of the employee and pensioner population, actuarial assumptions, the expected long-term rate of return on plan assets, and the discount rate.  The annual pension expense and balance sheet position for the Group is currently most sensitive to discount rate and return on asset assumptions.

 

The discount rate is used to determine the present value of the Group’s future benefit obligations.  It is an assumption that reflects the rates available on long-term, high quality fixed income debt instruments.

 

The Group calculates the expected return on plan assets based on the balance in the pension asset portfolio and the expected long-term rate of return on that portfolio.  The expected long-term rate of return is designed to approximate the long-term rate of return actually earned on the plan assets over time and is generally held constant so that the pattern of income/expense recognition more closely matches the stable pattern of services provided by the Group’s employees over the life of the pension obligation.

 

There is an acceptable range in which the estimates for assumptions can validly sit.  If different estimates within that range had been chosen, the cost recognised in the profit and loss account and balance sheet position could be significantly altered.

 

In relation to the actuarial assumptions such as mortality rate, turnover rate, retirement rate, disability rate and the rate of compensation increases, because these factors do not tend to change materially over time, the range of actuarial assumptions is generally narrow.

 

Changes in actuarial assumptions, discount rate and return on asset assumptions would affect the prepaid pension cost asset and pension expense and, in certain circumstances, require the recognition of a pension liability.  The Group considers the assumptions used in the calculation of the prepaid pension cost asset and pension expense to be reasonable and supportable in the existing economic environment.  Further, the assumptions were considered reasonable by the actuaries of the respective defined benefit pension plans.

 

Carrying value of plant and equipment, including application software

 

The asset class plant and equipment reported on the Group’s statement of financial position includes leasehold improvements, furniture, fixtures and fittings and other equipment, data processing equipment, and application software.

 

Plant and equipment is carried at the lower of cost less accumulated depreciation/amortisation and recoverable amount.  Recoverable amount is the net amount expected to be recovered through the net cash flows arising from an asset’s continued use and subsequent disposal.  These cash flows are not discounted.  Any write-down to recoverable amount is recognised in the Group’s profit and loss account.

 

The Group assesses the value of plant and equipment each six months.  If impairment indicators are identified, management makes an assessment about whether the carrying value of such assets remains fully recoverable.  Where a group of assets work together to support the generation of cash inflows, such as corporate infrastructure assets (eg. enterprise application software), recoverable amount is assessed in relation to the cash-generating unit in which those assets operate.

 

Changes in management’s assessment of whether indicators of impairment have occurred and the recoverable amount in relation to impaired plant and equipment would affect the carrying value of plant and equipment.  The Group considers the impairment identification process in place to be sound and the assumptions used in the valuation of recoverable amount to be reasonable and supportable in the existing economic environment.

 

In 2004, the Integrated Systems Implementation application software asset was impaired and the corporate asset grouping approach detailed above did not result in a recoverable amount management considered to be reflective of

 

 

68



 

the level of future economic benefits to be derived from the use of the asset.  Management assessed the recoverable amount in this instance based on a replacement cost valuation method.  The resulting impairment charge was recognised as a significant expense in the profit and loss account for the year ended September 30, 2004.

 

Accounting developments

 

The following is a summary of the impact of recently issued accounting standards and other developments that are expected to have a material effect on the Group’s future financial performance or position:

 

International Financial Reporting Standards

 

In July 2002, the Financial Reporting Council in Australia formally announced that Australian reporting entities would be required to comply with Australian accounting standards equivalent to International Financial Reporting Standards (AIFRS) for financial years commencing on or after January 1, 2005.  The adoption of AIFRS is expected to have a material effect on the Group’s reported financial performance and position.

 

The Group continues to evaluate the areas most impacted by the standards.  Refer to note 2 in the financial report for additional information on the impact of adoption of AIFRS by the Group.

 

Non-GAAP financial measures

 

The following is a summary of the key non-GAAP financial measures used throughout the annual financial report:

 

Cash earnings

 

Cash earnings is a key performance measure and financial target used by the Group.  Dividends paid by the Company are based on after tax cash earnings (adjusted for significant items).  Diluted cash earnings per share is a key performance measure used in the investment broking community, as well as by those Australian peers of the Group with a similar business portfolio.  Management considers that the exclusion of the intangible and other items detailed below from net profit is a prudent and useful indicator of the Group’s underlying operating performance.  Cash earnings does not refer to, or in any way purport to represent, the cash flows, funding or liquidity position of the Group.  It does not refer to any amount represented on a statement of cash flows.

 

Adjustments are made between net profit and cash earnings as follows:

 

Outside equity interest – this reflects the allocation of profit to minority interests in the Group, and is adjusted from net profit to reflect the amount of net profit that is attributable to ordinary shareholders.

 

Distributions – this reflects payments to holders of National Income Securities, Trust Units Exchangeable for Preferred Shares and Trust Preferred Securities, and is adjusted from net profit to reflect the amount of net profit that is attributable to ordinary shareholders.

 

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities – this relates to the movement in net market value (including the value of intangible assets) of investments in life insurance controlled entities recorded on the statement of financial position in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards.  As it relates to an intangible asset, management believes it is prudent to isolate this amount from the underlying operating result.  It is separately identified and discussed in detail.  Management further separates this, as the method for accounting for the value of life insurance controlled entities is not comparable on an international basis.

 

Goodwill amortisation – relates to the straight-line method of amortising goodwill (an intangible asset recorded on the statement of financial position) in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards.  Management generally does not regard goodwill amortisation expense as being useful information in analysing investments.  As it relates to an intangible asset, management believes it is prudent to isolate this amount from the underlying operating result.

 

Refer to page 6 for the reconciliation of net profit to cash earnings before significant items.

 

Significant items

 

Significant items including significant revenue, significant expenses and the associated income tax expense are defined as follows.  When the revenue or an expense from ordinary activities is of such a size, nature or incidence that its disclosure is relevant in explaining the financial performance of the entity for the reporting period and its disclosure is not otherwise required under Australian Accounting Standards, its nature and amount must be disclosed separately either on the face of the statement of financial performance or in the notes to the financial report.

 

Management believes that the inclusion of these items distorts the underlying operating results of the Group and causes difficulty in identifying underlying performance trends and issues. Through the clear separation and identification of these items, the Group ensures that they are identified and discussed in full, as well as ensuring that the underlying performance is highlighted and discussed in full.

 

Economic Value Added (EVA®)

 

EVA® is a profitability measure designed to recognise the requirement to generate a positive return on the economic capital invested in the business.  If the business produces profit in excess of its cost of capital, then value is created for shareholders.

 

In order to encourage longer-term management decision making and sustained value creation, the Group sets EVA® growth targets for three year periods.  The Group’s EVA® target of 5% compound growth per annum basis was set in 2003, for the three years ending September 2006.

 

EVA’s® net operating profit after tax is based on cash earnings before significant items (using a 30% projected tax rate) plus the calculated benefit of imputation credits earned by paying Australian tax.  The capital charge is based on the Group’s cost of capital.  This is then applied to a calculated average economic capital, which is based on average shareholder equity less other equity instruments and adjusted for cumulative goodwill amortisation, cumulative movement (after tax) in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities, and significant items.

 

EVA ® is a registered trademark of Stern Stewart & Co.

 

69



 

Corporate governance

 

Importance of corporate governance
 

The Board of directors of the Company (Board) is responsible for the corporate governance of the Company and its controlled entities (the Group).  Corporate governance is a matter of high importance in the Company and is undertaken with due regard to all of the Company’s stakeholders and its role in the community.  Good corporate governance is a fundamental part of the culture and the business practices of the Group.  The main corporate governance practices that were in place during the 2004 year, or otherwise as referred to below, are discussed in this section.

 

The 2004 year has been one of transformation for the Company with the events of this year being a catalyst for renewal for the Group.  Six directors resigned during the year, including the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, Mr Frank J Cicutto and the Chairman, Mr D Charles K Allen.  A new Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, Mr John M Stewart, and a new Chairman, Mr Graham J Kraehe, were appointed by the Board.  Two new executive directors and five new non-executive directors were appointed by the Board up to the end of September 2004.  The board renewal program was completed in December 2004, with the appointment of Mr Michael Chaney as an independent non-executive director.  Mr Chaney will take over as Chairman of the Company after he stands down from his current chief executive role of Wesfarmers Limited in September 2005.

 

An extensive search was undertaken to ensure that the new Board would have an appropriate mix of skills and experience for an international company of the size and complexity of the Group, including depth of knowledge in the banking and financial services industry.  In addition, Mr T Kerry McDonald, Chairman of Bank of New Zealand, has been appointed as a consultant to the Board.

 

Significant changes have also occurred to the executive management of the Company, with seven executive officers resigning during the year.  Two new executive directors and two new executive general managers have been appointed from outside the Group.  In addition, three new executive general managers have been appointed from within the Group.  The new executive team has outstanding credentials to run the Group.

 

A number of the executive management positions have been restructured with greater clarity of roles and accountability to better drive the strategic direction and the operational goals of the Group.  The new Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer has formed a Group Executive Committee comprising himself, the executive directors and the executive general managers.  The Group Executive Committee acts as a collegiate body running the total Group and supports the individual divisions.

 

Integrated governance

 

During the year under review, considerable attention was given to improving the governance of the Group through improving the quality of reporting to the Board and the development of a more integrated governance system, which aligns the areas of focus for management and the Board.  This has involved a review of the management committees, particularly the management risk committees.  These developments are ongoing and are designed to identify, examine and escalate problem areas so that appropriate action can be taken in a timely manner.

 

The Board has approved corporate governance guidelines, which set out the specific roles, duties, responsibilities and rights of the directors of the Company.  Each director is expected to have regard to these guidelines in the performance of his or her duties as a director of the Company.

 

The major processes by which the Board meets its duties are described in this corporate governance statement.

 

Responsibilities and functions of the Board
 

The Board has adopted a formal charter that details the functions and responsibilities of the Board, which may be found on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com  The most significant responsibilities of the Board are to:

 

Stakeholder interests

                  serve in the interests of all stakeholders, being the shareholders, customers, regulators, staff and the communities in the geographic regions in which the Group operates;

                  build trust in the Group through consistent behaviour, transparency and accountability; and

                  establish, review and monitor processes for corporate governance throughout the Group;

 

Future strategy

                  develop an in-depth understanding of each substantial segment of the Group’s business;

                  review, approve and monitor corporate strategy and plans and review the assumptions and rationale underlying the annual plans;

                  make decisions concerning the Group’s capital structure and dividend policy; and

                  review, approve and monitor major investment and strategic commitments;

 

Review of past performance

                  review business results, monitor budgetary control and review, approve and monitor necessary corrective actions and processes;

 

Integrity of external reporting

                  review and monitor the processes, controls and procedures which are in place to maintain the integrity of the Group’s accounting and financial records and statements with the guidance of the Audit Committee;

                  review and monitor the reporting to shareholders and regulators, providing objective, comprehensive, factual and timely information to the various markets in which the Company’s shares are listed; and

                  monitor and receive reports from the Audit Committee in relation to  internal controls and internal and external audit reports;

 

Risk management and compliance

                  establish, monitor and review the risk management processes with the guidance of the Risk Committee;

                  review and monitor processes for compliance with prudential regulations and standards and other regulatory requirements;

                  review and monitor processes for the maintenance of adequate credit quality; and

                  review and monitor processes for the documentation and regular review and updating of the Group’s risk profile;

 

70



 

Executive review, succession planning and culture

                  approve key executive appointments and monitor and review executive succession planning;

                  review and monitor the performance of the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer and senior management;

                  review and approve executive remuneration with the guidance of the Human Resources Committee;

                  approve all appointments of directors to the boards of controlled entities and appointments made by the Group to non-controlled entities; and

                  monitor and influence the culture, reputation and ethical standards of the Group; and

 

Board performance

                  monitor Board composition, director selection, Board processes and performance with the guidance of the Nomination Committee;

                  monitor and review the processes to assist directors in having sufficient time to devote to Board matters in order that they discharge their duties effectively; and

                  review the charter and its continuing adequacy from time to time.

 

Composition of the Board
 

The Board requires that each of its directors possess unquestionable integrity and character.  The Nomination Committee assists the Board in identifying other appropriate skills and characteristics required for the Board as a whole and the Board’s individual members in order for the Group to fulfil its goals and responsibilities to shareholders and other key stakeholders.

 

The composition of the Board is based on the following factors:

                  the size of the Board will be of a size to assist in efficient decision making;

                  the Chairman of the Board should be an independent non-executive director and shall be elected by the directors annually;

                  the Chairman must not be a former executive officer of the Group;

                  the Board should comprise a majority of independent non-executive directors; and

                  the Board should comprise directors with a broad range of expertise, skills and experience from a diverse range of backgrounds.

 

The Board is comprised of a majority of independent non-executive directors.  There are three executive directors and ten independent non-executive directors.  The role of Chairman and the role of Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer are held by two separate individuals.  The Chairman is a non-executive director and the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer is an executive director.  The other executive directors are the Chief Executive Officer, Australia and the Chief Financial Officer.

 

The skills, experience and expertise of the directors are set out in the report on the directors and officers.

 

Independence of directors
 

In judging whether a director is independent for the purposes of services on the Board and Board committees of the Company, the Board has regard to the standards adopted by the Board from time to time to assist it in its regular independence determinations.  These standards reflect the independence requirements of applicable laws, rules and regulations, including the ASX Corporate Governance Council Principles of Good Corporate Governance and Best Practice Recommendations, the corporate governance standards of the New York Stock Exchange, and the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

 

Directors are required to provide all relevant information to allow a regular assessment of independence.  The fundamental premise of the standards is that an independent director must be independent of management and free to exercise his or her unfettered and independent judgement.

 

The non-executive directors meet informally on a regular basis, without the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, other executive directors and other members of management being present.

 

The directors considered by the Board to constitute independent directors are identified, along with their period in office, in the report on the directors and officers.

 

Disclosure of related party transactions is set out in note 50 in the financial report.

 

Appointment and re-election of Board members

 

The process for appointing a director is that, when a vacancy exists, the Board, assisted by the Nomination Committee, identifies candidates with the appropriate expertise and experience, using external consultants as appropriate.  The most suitable candidate is appointed by the Board but must stand for election by the shareholders at the next annual general meeting of the Company.

 

During the year, the Board undertook a major board renewal program.  In February 2004, Mr Graham J Kraehe was appointed as Chairman, and Mr John M Stewart as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, following the retirement of Mr D Charles K Allen as Chairman and non-executive director, and Mr Frank J Cicutto as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.

 

On April 6, 2004, the Chairman announced that the Board was conducting a search for additional non-executive members, particularly with banking and finance sector experience.  This resulted in the appointments of Mr Robert G Elstone, Mr Daniel T Gilbert, Mr Paul J Rizzo, Ms Jillian S Segal and Mr G Malcolm Williamson as independent non-executive directors.  Mr Ahmed Fahour, Chief Executive Officer, Australia and Mr Michael Ullmer, Chief Financial Officer were appointed as executive directors.

 

The appointment of Mr Michael Chaney as an independent non-executive director in December 2004, and as Chairman in place of Mr Graham J Kraehe on his retirement in September 2005 was also announced.

 

Also during the year, Dr J Brian Clark, Dr Kenneth J Moss, Dr Edward D Tweddell and Mrs Catherine M Walter resigned as directors.

 

The Company has formal letters of appointment for each of its directors appointed during the year, setting out the key terms and conditions of the appointments.

 

The process for re-election of a director is in accordance with the Company’s constitution, which requires that, other than the Managing Director and those directors appointed during the year, one-third (or the nearest number to one-third) are required to retire by rotation at each annual general meeting and are eligible to stand for re-election.  Those directors appointed during the year to fill any vacancy must retire and stand for election.

 

71



 

Prior to each annual general meeting, the Board will assess the performance of each director due to stand for re-election and determine if the Board will recommend to the shareholders that they vote in favour of the re-election, or otherwise, of each such director.  A number of directors have only recently joined the Board and they will stand for election for the first time at the next annual general meeting.  Such directors, having only recently been appointed, were not subject to this performance review process in 2004.

 

The Board has set a limit of 10 years for which an individual may serve as a director, subject to an annual review after this period.  The Board regards this as an appropriate period of service.  Directors who have served on the Board for an extended period of time have gained valuable experiences, insights and historical perspectives regarding the Group that would not be easily replaced.

 

The retirement age for directors is fixed by the Company’s constitution at 70 years of age.

 

Induction and continuing education
 

Management, working with the Board, provides an orientation program for new directors in order to assist them in fulfilling their duties and responsibilities.  The program includes discussions with the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, the other executive directors and management, the provision of reading material, tutorials and workshops.  These include detail on directors’ rights, duties and responsibilities, the Group’s strategic plans, its significant financial, accounting and risk management issues, its compliance programs, its Code of Conduct, its management structure and its internal and external audit.

 

Management conducts additional presentations and tutorial sessions for directors from time to time regarding the Group, the factors impacting, or likely to impact, on its businesses to assist the non-executive directors in gaining a broader understanding and knowledge of the Group.  Directors are also encouraged to keep up to date on relevant topical issues.

 

Board meetings
 

The frequency of Board meetings and directors’ attendance at those meetings is set out in the report on the directors and officers.  Directors are expected to prepare adequately for, attend and participate at Board meetings and meetings of committees.  Some on-site inspections are conducted in relation to which directors are also expected to attend.  The Board meets once each year in Europe, where the Group has a substantial proportion of its assets, and in New Zealand, where there are significant business interests.  The amount of work undertaken is considerable.  The time requirement varies depending on the number of Board committee meetings and controlled entity board meetings a director attends.

 

Board performance
 

The Board’s existing governance processes include the regular reviews and evaluation of the performance of the Board with the guidance of the Nomination Committee.  An external expert is regularly engaged to review many aspects of the Board’s activities and to assist in a continuous improvement process to enhance the effectiveness of the Board.  Given the major changes in the composition of the Board during 2004, the external review was deferred until 2005.

 

The Board also conducts an annual review of individual directors prior to their standing for re-election at the annual general meeting (refer to ‘appointment and re-election of Board members’ above).

 

Remuneration of directors

 

The maximum aggregate amount from which non-executive directors may be remunerated is determined by the shareholders.  It is possible that this maximum aggregate amount may not be fully utilised in any one year.  From this amount, the individual directors are remunerated based on a philosophy of compensating the directors at around the upper quartile of the market, having regard to the size and complexity of the Group.

 

The remuneration of non-executive directors involves all the non-executive directors receiving part of their remuneration in the form of shares in the Company.

 

The Human Resources Committee (formerly the Compensation Committee), provides guidance to the Board in respect of these matters.

 

The remuneration policy for the Board and the remuneration of each director is set out in note 51 of the financial report.

 

Remuneration of senior executives

 

The Group’s remuneration philosophy for senior executives is to reward high levels of sustained performance and contribution through a pay-for-performance model.

 

Remuneration comprises fixed and variable remuneration components.  Variable remuneration, also known as ‘at risk’ remuneration, comprises short-term incentives and long-term incentives.  In general, the Group aims to target the upper quartile of the market for remuneration to ensure the attraction and retention of talented senior executives.

 

The Human Resources Committee provides guidance to the Board in respect of these matters.

 

The remuneration policy for senior executives is set out in note 51 of the financial report.

 

Conflicts of interest

 

Directors are expected to avoid any action, position or interest that conflicts with an interest of the Group, or gives the appearance of a conflict.  A director who has a material personal interest in a matter that relates to the affairs of the Group must give the other directors notice of such interest.  Such notice should be provided in writing to the Company Secretary, who is to ensure that the notice is brought to the attention of the other directors.

 

The Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) together with the constitution of the Company provide that a director who has a material personal interest in a matter that is being considered at a directors’ meeting cannot be present while the matter is being considered at the meeting or vote on the matter, except in the following circumstances:

                  the directors who do not have a material personal interest in the matter have passed a resolution that identifies the director, the nature and extent of the director’s interest in the matter and its relation to the affairs of the Company, which states that the remaining directors are satisfied that the interest should not disqualify the director from voting or being present;

 

72



 

                  ASIC has made a declaration or order under the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth), which permits the director to be present and vote notwithstanding the director’s material personal interest;

                  there are not enough directors to form a quorum for a directors’ meeting because of the disqualification of the interested directors, in which event one or more of the directors (including a director with a material personal interest) may call a general meeting to address the matter; and

                  the matter is of a type which the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) specifically permits the director to vote upon and to be present at a directors’ meeting during consideration of the matter notwithstanding the director’s material personal interest.

 

However, notwithstanding the exceptions permitted by the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) and the constitution of the Company (as described above), the Group’s corporate governance standards provide that generally speaking, when a potential conflict of interest arises, the director concerned does not receive copies of the relevant Board papers and withdraws from the Board meeting while such matters are considered.  Accordingly, in such circumstances the director concerned takes no part in discussions nor exercises any influence over other members of the Board.  If a significant conflict of interest with a director exists and cannot be resolved, the director is expected to tender his or her resignation after consultation with the Chairman.

 

Financial services are provided to non-executive directors under terms and conditions that would normally apply to the public.  Executive directors are entitled to financial services under terms and conditions that would normally apply to full-time employees.  The provision of financial services to directors is subject to any applicable legal or regulatory restrictions, including the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) and the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002Refer to note 50 of the financial report for further information.

 

Access to management

 

Board members have complete and open access to members of management following consultation with the Chairman, and the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.

 

Access to independent professional advice
 

Written guidelines are in place providing for each director to have the right to seek independent professional advice at the Company’s expense, subject to the prior approval of the Chairman.

 

The Board has the authority to conduct or direct any investigation required to fulfil its responsibilities and has the ability to retain, at the Group’s expense, such legal, accounting or other services, consultants or experts as it considers necessary from time to time in the performance of its duties.

 

Restrictions on share dealings by directors
 

Directors, officers and employees are subject to the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) restrictions on applying for, acquiring and disposing of securities in, or other relevant financial products of, the Company (or procuring another person to do so), if they are in possession of inside information.  Inside information is that information which is not generally available, and which if it were generally available, a reasonable person would expect it to have a material effect on the price or value of the securities in, or other relevant financial products of, the Company.

 

Further, directors, officers and employees may only trade in the Company’s securities (subject to also complying with applicable law) during each of the eight weeks commencing the day following each half yearly results announcement or the date of issue of a prospectus.  Directors are further required to discuss their intention to trade in the Company’s securities with the Chairman prior to trading.

 

The directors, officers and employees are also subject to legal restrictions on insider trading in other jurisdictions.

 

Directors and officers must not trade in the shares of any other entity if inside information on such entity comes to the attention of the director or officer by virtue of holding office as a director or officer of the Company.

 

Shareholding requirements
 

Within two months after a director’s appointment, the director is required to hold at least 2,000 shares in the Company.  Non-executive directors are required to receive at least 10% and up to 40% of their annual remuneration in the form of shares in the Company, under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan, which was most recently approved by shareholders at the Company’s annual general meeting in 2003.  Such shares are acquired at market prices.  Executive directors may receive performance options and performance rights over shares as approved by shareholders and, as a staff member, may also receive shares in the Company.

 

Details of all shareholdings by directors in the Company are set out in the report on the directors and officers and note 51 of the financial report.

 

Confidential information
 

The Group has a written policy and fosters an appropriate culture to prevent the disclosure of confidential customer information outside the Group or the use of that information for the financial gain of any other entity (including any entity with which a director has an association).  The directors regard the confidentiality of customer information as highly important.  When the directors are serving on the boards of other companies and undertaking private transactions, they have regard to their confidentiality obligations at all times.

 

Board and committee agendas
 

Board and committee agendas are structured to assist the Board to meet its significant responsibilities.  This includes the Board’s consideration of strategy and the achievement of financial and other goals.  This also includes the Board receiving a detailed overview of the performance and significant issues confronting each business unit and support unit and to identify major risk elements for review to ensure that assets are properly valued and that protective strategies are in place.

 

Directors receive and discuss detailed financial, operational and strategy reports from management.

 

During the year, clear guidelines were established to enable matters raised by regulators to be promptly and effectively addressed and referred to the Board where necessary.

 

Board committees

 

The Board may establish committees as it considers necessary or appropriate to assist it in carrying out its responsibilities.  The Board has established the following committees and has adopted charters setting out the matters

 

73



 

relevant to the composition, responsibilities and administration of these committees:

                  Risk Committee;

                  Audit Committee;

                  Nomination Committee; and

                  Human Resources Committee.

 

Other matters of special importance in relation to which Board committees are established include consideration of borrowing programs, projects, capital strategies, major investments and commitments, capital expenditure, delegation of authorities to act, and the allocation of resources.

 

Risk Committee
 

Membership

 

The members of the Risk Committee as at December 2, 2004 were:

 

Mr Peter JB Duncan (Chairman);

Mr Robert G Elstone (joined September 2004);

Mr Paul J Rizzo (joined September 2004); and

Mr John M Stewart (joined February 2004).

 

It is appropriate that members of the Risk Committee have a range of different backgrounds, skills and experiences having regard to the operations, financial and strategic risk profile of the Group.

 

Responsibilities and Risk Committee charter

 

The roles, responsibilities, composition and membership requirements are documented in the Risk Committee charter, which has been approved by the Board and may be found on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com

 

The responsibilities of the Risk Committee include:

                  reviewing the Group’s risk profile within the context of the risk/return profile determined by the Board;

                  implementing and reviewing risk management and internal compliance and control systems throughout the Group;

                  reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s compliance management framework;

                  reviewing the balance sheet risk management framework and strategies;

                  overseeing the Group’s credit policies;

                  assessing operational risk limits;

                  reviewing business risk management;

                  reviewing country lines of credit; and

                  reviewing the liquidity policies of the Group.

 

During the year, considerable attention was given to improving the quality of risk reporting and management in the Group.  This involved a review of the management risk committees.  New charter and modes of operation were developed for the Group Risk Appetite Committee, the Central Risk Management Committee and the Corporate & Institutional Banking Risk Management Committee.  In addition, a new management committee, the Group Operational Risk Committee, was established.

 

The Risk Committee met on 18 occasions during the year.

 

The qualifications of the Risk Committee members together with the number of meetings attended by each member during the year are set out in the report on the directors and officers.

 

More comprehensive details on risk management appear on pages 58 to 63.

 

Audit Committee
 

Membership

 

The members of the Audit Committee as at December 2, 2004 were:

 

Mr John G Thorn (Chairman) (joined October 2003);

Mr Peter JB Duncan;

Mr Daniel T Gilbert (joined September 2004); and

Mr Paul J Rizzo (joined September 2004).

 

Subsequent to December 2, 2004, Mr Peter JB Duncan stood down as a member of the Audit Committee.

 

All members of the Audit Committee must be independent, non-executive directors.  Independence for these purposes is determined in accordance with the standard adopted by the Board, which reflects the independence requirements of applicable laws, rules and regulations, including the Australian Stock Exchange Corporate Governance Council Principles of Good Corporate Governance and Best Practice Recommendations, the New York Stock Exchange and the United States Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

 

Members are appointed for an initial term of three years.  Membership is reviewed every three years and periodic rotation is encouraged whereby no more than one member each year can resign as a result of periodic rotation.

 

The Audit Committee must consist of at least three members.  For a period of five days during the year, the Audit Committee had only two members due to timing differences relating to the resignation and appointments of directors.

 

It is considered appropriate that members of the Audit Committee be financially literate and have a range of different backgrounds, skills and experiences having regard to the operations, and financial and strategic risk profile of the Group.  The Board recognises the importance of the Audit Committee having at least one member with appropriate accounting or financial expertise, as required by applicable laws, best practice guidelines and listing standards.  All members of the Audit Committee are financially literate.

 

The Chairman of the Board cannot be a member of the Audit Committee.

 

The qualifications of the Audit Committee members together with the number of meetings attended by each member during the year are set out in the report on the directors and officers.

 

Audit Committee financial expert

 

The Board has determined that Mr John G Thorn is an ‘audit committee financial expert’ and is independent as defined in the listing standards of the New York Stock Exchange.  Although the Board has determined that Mr John G Thorn has the requisite attributes defined under the rules of the SEC, his responsibilities are the same as those of the other Audit Committee members.  He is not an auditor or accountant, does not perform ‘field work’ and is not an employee of the Company.  The SEC has determined that an audit committee member who is designated as an audit committee financial expert will not be deemed as an ‘expert’ for any purpose as a result of being identified as an audit committee financial

 

74



 

expert.  The Audit Committee is responsible for the oversight of management in the preparation of the Group’s financial statements and financial disclosures.  The Audit Committee relies on the information provided by management and the external auditor.  The Audit Committee does not have the duty to plan or conduct audits or to determine that the Group’s financial statements and disclosures are complete and accurate.  These are the responsibility of management and the external auditor.

 

Responsibilities and Audit Committee charter

 

The Audit Committee’s role, responsibilities, composition and membership requirements are documented in the Audit Committee charter, which has been approved by the Board and may be found on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com  The charter is reviewed at least annually.

 

The Audit Committee is responsible for review and oversight of:

                  the integrity of the accounting and financial reporting processes of the Group;

                  the Group’s external audit;

                  the Group’s internal audit; and

                  compliance with applicable accounting standards to give a true and fair view of the financial position and performance of the Group.

 

The Audit Committee met on 15 occasions during the year.

 

The Audit Committee has the authority to conduct or direct any investigation required to fulfil its responsibilities and has the ability to retain, at the Company’s expense, such legal, accounting or other advisers, consultants or experts as it considers necessary from time to time in the performance of its duties.

 

External auditor

 

The Audit Committee is responsible for the selection, evaluation, compensation and, where appropriate, replacement of the external auditor, subject to shareholder approval where required.  Responsibilities of this nature are a departure from the Australian Stock Exchange Corporate Council Principles of Good Corporate Governance and Best Practice Recommendations which provide that the Audit Committee should recommend to the Board the appointment and removal of the external auditor.  The reason for the departure is that US laws and regulations require that these responsibilities rest with the Audit Committee.

 

During the year, the Company announced that it intended to change its external auditor, subsequent to the year ended September 30, 2004.  The Audit Committee then undertook a thorough process to select a new auditor to commence from the 2005 year.  In July 2004, the Chairman of the Audit Committee announced that Ernst & Young had been selected to become the new external auditor of the Group.  Shareholders will be asked to approve the appointment of the new external auditor at the Company’s annual general meeting on January 31, 2005.

 

The Audit Committee is to ensure that the external lead audit partner and concurring review partner are rotated off the Group’s audit after no more than five years and are not reassigned to the Group’s audit for at least five years.

 

The Audit Committee meets with the external auditor throughout the year to review the adequacy of the existing external audit arrangements with particular emphasis on the scope, quality and independence of the audit.  The Audit Committee meets with internal audit representatives, the external auditor and the consulting actuary separately, without the presence of management, at least annually.

 

The Audit Committee receives assurances from the external auditor and the consulting actuary that they meet all applicable independence requirements.

 

For a discussion of certain services provided by the external auditor in connection with problem loan reviews and the Company’s related internal review of auditor independence refer to ‘certain services provided by the external auditor – matters related to independence’ on page 19 in the ‘business overview’ section.

 

Audit Committee pre-approval policies and procedures

 

The Audit Committee is responsible for the oversight of the work of the external auditor.  To assist it in discharging its oversight responsibility, the Audit Committee has adopted an External Auditor Independence Policy which requires it, among other things, to pre-approve all audit and non-audit services to be provided by the external auditor.  The External Auditor Independence Policy incorporates auditor independence requirements of applicable laws, rules and regulations and has been promulgated throughout the Group.

 

In accordance with the External Auditor Independence Policy, the external auditor may only provide a service to the Group if:

(i)             the external auditor is not prohibited from providing that service by applicable auditor independence laws, rules and regulations;

(ii)          in the opinion of the Audit Committee, the service does not otherwise impair the independence of the external auditor;

(iii)       in the opinion of the Audit Committee, there is a compelling reason for the external auditor to provide the service; and

(iv)      the service is specifically pre-approved by the Audit Committee.

 

The Audit Committee may set an annual fee limit for each type of audit or non-audit service to be provided by the external auditor.  Unless the Audit Committee approves otherwise, the fees paid or due and payable to the external auditor for the provision of non-audit services in any financial year must not exceed the fees paid or due and payable to the external auditor for audit services in that year.

 

The Audit Committee may delegate to the Audit Committee Chairman or any other member of the Audit Committee the authority to pre-approve audit and non-audit services to be provided by the external auditor.  The decision of any delegate to specifically pre-approve any audit or non-audit service is presented to the Audit Committee at its next scheduled meeting.  The Audit Committee has delegated the authority to pre-approve audit and non-audit services to the Audit Committee Chairman.

 

Details of the services provided by the external auditor to the Group and the fees paid or due and payable to the external auditor for those services are set out in the report on the directors and officers and note 52 in the financial report.

 

75



 

Confidential financial submissions

 

The Audit Committee has established procedures for the receipt, retention and treatment of complaints regarding accounting, internal accounting controls or auditing matters.  It is a responsibility of the Audit Committee to ensure that employees can make confidential, anonymous submissions regarding such matters (refer to the ‘Whistleblower Protection Program’ section on page 79 for further information).

 

Nomination Committee
 

Membership

 

The Nomination Committee’s members as at December 2, 2004 were:

 

Mr Graham J Kraehe (Chairman);

Mr Peter JB Duncan;

Mr Robert G Elstone (joined September 2004);

Mr Ahmed Fahour (joined October 2004);

Mr Daniel T Gilbert (joined September 2004);

Mr Paul J Rizzo (joined September 2004);

Ms Jillian S Segal (joined September 2004);

Mr John M Stewart;

Mr John G Thorn (joined October 2003);

Mr Geoffrey A Tomlinson;

Mr Michael J Ullmer (joined October 2004); and
Mr G Malcolm Williamson (joined May 2004),
acting in committee.

 

Subsequent to December 2, 2004, Mr Michael Chaney joined the Nomination Committee.

 

The Nomination Committee has authority from the Board to sub-delegate its authority to a Sub-Committee, comprised of a minimum of three members of the Nomination Committee, to examine, review, consider and recommend such matters, relevant to the Nomination Committee charter, as the Nomination Committee may consider appropriate from time to time.  During the year, a Nomination Sub-Committee was established to assist the Nomination Committee and the Board in the selection of directors as part of the board renewal program.

 

The number of meetings attended by each member during the year is set out in the report on the directors and officers.

 

Responsibilities and Nomination Committee charter

 

The Nomination Committee’s role, responsibilities, composition and membership requirements are documented in a Nomination Committee charter, which has been approved by the Board, and which is available on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com

 

The responsibilities of the Nomination Committee are to:

                  monitor, review and make recommendations to the Board regarding its performance;

                  monitor, review and make recommendations to the Board as necessary and appropriate regarding the objectives for and assessment of the performance of the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, Chief Executive Officer, Australia and Chief Financial Officer;

                  review and make recommendations to the Board as appropriate, with regard to:

                  the size and composition of the Board;

                  the criteria for Board membership and desirable qualifications, experience and domicile for individual new appointees to the Board;

                  the induction program for new directors;

                  the continuing education program for directors; and

                  identification of potential candidates for appointment to the Board; and

                  review the Nomination Committee’s charter, as well as its composition, annually.

 

Succession planning

 

The Nomination Committee reviews the succession planning for the Board and senior management and reports to the Board on such issues.

 

Human Resources Committee
 

Membership

 

The Human Resources Committee’s (formerly the Compensation Committee) members as at December 2, 2004 were:

 

Mr Geoffrey A Tomlinson  (Chairman) (joined August 2004);

Ms Jillian S Segal (joined September 2004); and

Mr John G Thorn (joined November 2003).

 

The number of meetings attended by each member during the year is set out in the report on the directors and officers.

 

Responsibilities and Human Resources Committee charter

 

The Human Resources Committee’s role, responsibilities, composition and membership requirements are documented in a Human Resources Committee charter, which has been approved by the Board and may be found on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com

 

The responsibilities of the Human Resources Committee are to:

 

                  monitor, review and recommend to the Board, as necessary and appropriate:

                  the remuneration, superannuation and incentive policies and arrangements for the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer and for senior executives who report directly to the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer;

                  the remuneration arrangements for non-executive directors on the Board;

                  the recruitment, retention and termination policies and procedures for senior executives;

                  key executive appointments and executive succession planning (including one or more reports and presentations to the Board each year); and

                  oversee the general remuneration strategy of the Group; and

                  monitor the culture and reputation and review the behavioural standards of the Group on a regular basis, and report and submit recommendations to the Board.

 

76



 

The Human Resources Committee has delegated authority from the Board to approve:

 

                  changes to the factors regarding the measurement of short-term performance, which impacts incentives and the  EVA® share plan;

                  incentive pool amounts for general incentive programs;

                  offers under existing share, option and performance rights plans, including setting the terms of issue and approving the issue of securities in the Company in connection with such offers (within the aggregate number of securities approved by the Board); and

                  fees payable to non-executive directors of controlled entity boards of the Company.

 

EVA® is a registered trademark of Stern Stewart & Co.

 

Performance review

 

The Board reviews performance and sets the remuneration package applicable to the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, the Chief Executive Officer, Australia and the Chief Financial Officer, following recommendations from the Human Resources Committee.  This performance review involves meeting established performance-based criteria structured on increasing shareholder value.

 

The remuneration policy for senior executives is set out in note 51 of the financial report.

 

Controlled entities

 

The activities of every company in the Group are overseen by their own board of directors.

 

Directors of each of these controlled entities are provided with Corporate Governance Guidelines, which have been approved by the Board.  The Corporate Governance Guidelines set out the specific roles, duties, responsibilities and rights of the directors of controlled entities.  Such guidelines set out the key expectations that the Board would have of the boards of controlled entities.  The guidelines have been specifically tailored for the different types of entities depending on the nature of their business and their activities.

 

Mr Geoffrey A Tomlinson is the Chairman of National Wealth Management Holdings Limited, and certain wealth management controlled entities, due to his in-depth background and expertise in wealth management and insurance business.  Mr G Malcolm Williamson is the Chairman of National Australia Group Europe Limited and of Clydesdale Bank PLC and Yorkshire Bank PLC.  Directors of controlled entities are normally selected from among the outstanding business people in the local market in which the entities operate.  A primary pre-requisite to the Board having confidence in the activities of a controlled entity board is to have a high quality controlled entity board with a commitment to the Group’s objectives.  There is a standing invitation to all of the Company’s directors to attend any board meeting of a controlled entity through consultation with the Chairman.  Such visits are undertaken to develop a broader understanding of the Group’s total operations.

 

Communicating with shareholders

 

Strategy

 

The Group aims to be open and transparent with all stakeholders, including the owners of the business – the shareholders (direct and indirect).  Plain English communications and easy access to company information are important objectives of the Company’s communications strategy.  Information is communicated to shareholders regularly through a range of forums, publications and online.  These include:

                  the Company’s annual general meeting, which will be held in Melbourne on January 31, 2005;

                  notices and explanatory memoranda of annual general meetings;

                  the concise annual report (unless a shareholder has requested not to receive this);

                  the annual financial report (for those shareholders who have requested a copy);

                  disclosures to the stock exchanges in Australia, London, New York, New Zealand and Tokyo, and to ASIC and the US SEC;

                  letters from the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer or the Chairman to specifically inform shareholders of key matters of interest;

                  during the year the Chairman wrote to shareholders to advise them of the unauthorised foreign currency options trading matter and subsequent actions taken by the Board and of the steps being taken to overhaul the membership of the Board.  The reports of PricewaterhouseCoopers and APRA into the unauthorised foreign currency options trading and the Company’s response to these reports were placed on the Group’s website at  www.nabgroup.com  For further information refer to the ‘report on the directors and officerson page 84; and

                  the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com, where there is a Shareholder Centre which includes access to Company announcements, media releases and investor presentations.

 

In addition to the registered shareholders, there are many thousands who have invested indirectly through the Group’s funds management products, and through the funds management products of a large number of organisations.  The Group encourages these beneficial owners to take an active interest in the affairs of the Group by visiting the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com  Beneficial owners and others may also access the Shareholder Centre.  Shareholders are encouraged to address questions to the Chairman, which will be responded to at the annual general meeting.

 

Meetings

 

The notice of annual general meeting provides details of the location, time and date of the meeting, the business to be considered by shareholders and details about each candidate standing for election or re-election as a director of the Company.  On average, these meetings attract around 1,000 shareholders and stakeholders.  For those shareholders who are unable to attend the meeting, the Company provides a webcast.  The Company’s external auditor attends this meeting and is available to answer shareholder questions about the conduct of the audit and the preparation and content of the auditor’s report.

 

Continuous disclosure

 

The Board’s policy is that shareholders are informed of all major developments that impact on the Group.  There is a detailed continuous disclosure policy in place, which is intended to maintain the market integrity and market efficiency of the Company’s shares listed on international stock exchanges.  The Company has established written policies and procedures designed to manage the Company’s compliance with the continuous disclosure obligations imposed by the various stock exchanges on which the Company’s securities are listed (including the ASX) and to attribute accountability at a management level for that compliance.

 

77



 

Australian Stock Exchange Corporate Governance Council Principles of Good Corporate Governance and Best Practice Recommendations

 

The Company believes that throughout the 2004 year, it has complied with all of the Recommendations contained in the ASX Corporate Governance Council Principles of Good Corporate Governance and Best Practice Recommendations, with the exception of:

                  the Code of Conduct was placed on the Company’s website on July 27, 2004, and was therefore not publicly available for the full financial year, as recommended;

                  the Insider Trading Policy was placed on the Company’s website on November 11, 2003, and was therefore not publicly available for the full financial year, as recommended;

                  during the period from August 28, 2004 to September 1, 2004 (inclusive), the Audit Committee was comprised of two members, rather than three members as recommended.  No actions were taken by the Audit Committee during that period;

                  a performance review of the full Board did not take place during the 2004 year due to the major changes in the composition of the Board during the year; and

                  under Recommendation 7.2 of the ASX Corporate Governance Council Principles of Good Corporate Governance and Best Practice Recommendations, the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, and the Chief Financial Officer are required to state to the Board in writing that the certifications they give to the Board under Recommendation 4.1 (as to the integrity of the Company’s financial statements) is founded on a sound system of risk management and internal compliance and control which implements the policies adopted by the Board, and that the Company’s risk management and internal compliance and control system is operating efficiently and effectively in all material respects.  The certifications given by the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, and the Chief Financial Officer refer to the matters arising from their evaluation of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures as set out on page 63 of this annual financial report, being the discovery of unauthorised trading in foreign currency options, reporting of non-accrual loans and 90 days past due loans, cross-border outstandings, and organisational and cultural change.

 

Comparison of the Company’s practices with the New York Stock Exchange Corporate Governance Standards
 

The New York Stock Exchange recently instituted a broad regime of corporate governance requirements for New York Stock Exchange listed companies.  Under section 303A of the New York Stock Exchange Listing Manual (the New York Stock Exchange Corporate Governance Standards), non-US companies are permitted to follow the corporate governance requirements of their home country in lieu of the requirements of the New York Stock Exchange Corporate Governance Standards, except for certain requirements pertaining to audit committees, and certain disclosure obligations.  One of those disclosure obligations is to compare the corporate governance practices of the Company with those required of domestic US companies under the New York Stock Exchange Corporate Governance Standards, and to disclose significant differences.  The significant differences identified are as follows:

                  Audit Committee – since the Company is not required to prepare annual proxy statements under US law, the Company does not prepare an audit committee report for inclusion in such annual proxy statements.  Further, the Risk Committee, rather than the Audit Committee, has responsibility for the discussion of policies with respect to risk assessment and risk management;

                  Nomination Committee – the Nomination Committee is not composed solely of independent directors; and

                  Equity compensation plans – the Company is not required under Australian law to provide shareholders with the opportunity to vote on new equity compensation plans.  It is also not required by Australian law to provide shareholders with the opportunity to vote on material revisions to existing equity compensation plans (as listed in note 38 to the financial report) other than in respect of certain changes to the terms of options that require shareholder approval under ASX Listing Rule 6.23.  However, the issue of shares to directors (whether pursuant to an equity compensation plan or otherwise) is subject to approval of shareholders.

 

Additionally, the Company sought and obtained shareholder approval in 2002 for the purposes of ASX Listing Rule 7.2 so that issues of securities under certain equity compensation plans are excluded from the calculation of whether the Company has issued share capital in excess of the 15% limit imposed by ASX Listing Rule 7.1.  However, this is not mandatory as a company may choose to not have the plans approved in this way.

 

Ethical standards
 

During the year, the Board worked with management to develop a new set of Corporate Principles, which are to be used as the basis for the Group’s core beliefs and values.  The five principles are:

                  we will be open and honest;

                  we take ownership and hold ourselves accountable (for all of our actions);

                  we expect teamwork and collaboration across our organisation for the benefit of all stakeholders;

                  we treat everyone with fairness and respect; and

                  we value speed, simplicity and efficient execution of our promises.

 

A range of activities have and will continue to be introduced throughout the Group to provide a deeper understanding of the new Corporate Principles. Measures will also be introduced to monitor whether employees are living these principles and behaving appropriately and consistently.

 

A new reward strategy and a new performance management process that are aligned to the Group’s principles have been developed and will form the basis of the way employees’ performance will be measured and rewarded from the 2005 year.

 

The Corporate Principles are reinforced by the Company’s Code of Conduct, which requires the observance of strict ethical guidelines.  The Code of Conduct applies to all employees of the Group, as well as to directors, and temporary workers.  In addition, the Board charter also governs the conduct of the Board and each director.  The Code of Conduct covers:

                  personal conduct;

                  honesty;

                  relations with customers;

                  prevention of fraud;

 

78



 

                  financial advice to customers;

                  conflict of interest; and

                  disclosure.

 

The Group regularly reviews its relationships with the external suppliers of goods and services.  Organisations with high ethical standards are favourably considered.  Where there is transition of management between the Group and major suppliers or customers, appropriate confidentiality and independence issues are addressed in both principle and process.

 

The Board supports the code of conduct issued by the Australian Institute of Company Directors.

 

In addition, the Group has adopted a Code of Conduct for financial professionals which applies to the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and all employees serving in finance, accounting, tax or investor relations roles.  This code of conduct is available on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com

 

The Company strongly supports the Code of Banking Practice 2003 of the Australian Bankers’ Association, which includes:

                  major commitments and obligations to customers;

                  principles of conduct; and

                  the roles and responsibilities of an independent external body, the Code of Compliance Monitoring Committee, which investigates complaints about non-compliance.

 

Whistleblower Protection Program

 

The Group has a Whistleblower Protection Program established for the confidential reporting of issues of unacceptable or undesirable conduct.  The system enables disclosures to be made to a protected disclosure officer by the Group’s employees, or, where applicable, if the matter is highly sensitive and the employee believes it more appropriate, direct to the Audit Committee.

 

The Group does not tolerate known or suspected incidents of fraud, corrupt conduct, adverse behaviour, legal or regulatory non-compliance, or questionable accounting and auditing matters by its employees.

 

Nor does the Group tolerate taking reprisals against those who come forward to disclose such conduct.  The Group will take all reasonable steps to protect employees who make such disclosures from any reprisal or detrimental action following the disclosure.

 

79



Report on the directors and officers

 

Directors

 

The Board of directors (the Board) has power to appoint persons as directors to fill any vacancies.  Other than the Managing Director and those directors appointed during the year, one-third (or the nearest number to) are required to retire by rotation at each annual general meeting and are eligible to stand for re-election together with those directors appointed during the year to fill any vacancy who must retire and stand for election.

 

Details of directors of the Company in office as at December 2, 2004, and each director’s qualifications, experience and special responsibilities are below:

 

Mr Graham J Kraehe

AO, BEc, FAICD

 

Mr Kraehe was appointed Chairman in February 2004 and has been a non-executive director since 1997.  He is the Chairman of the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

38 years in the wine, automotive and diversified manufacturing industries.  Managing Director of Pacifica Limited from 1985 until 1994.  Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of Southcorp Limited from 1994 until early 2001.

 

Directorships of listed entities within the last three years

Chairman of Bluescope Steel Limited – director since May 2002 and director of Djerriwarrah Investments Limited since July 2002.  He was a director of Brambles Industries from December 2000 to March 2004 and a director of The News Corporation Limited from January 2001 to April 2004.

 

Mr Peter JB Duncan

BE (Chem) (1st Class Hons), DBS (with Distinction)

 

Mr Duncan was appointed a non-executive director in 2001.  He is Chairman of the Risk Committee and is a member of the Audit Committee and the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

36 years with Royal Dutch/Shell Group of companies, including senior finance and general management positions in Australia, New Zealand, South America, Europe and South East Asia.  He was Chairman of the Shell Group of Companies in Australia and New Zealand.  Former Chairman of the Australian Institute of Petroleum.

 

Directorships of listed entities within the last three years

Orica Limited since June 2001 and GasNet Australia Limited since October 2001.  Director of Woodside Petroleum Limited from May 1999 to February 2002.

 

Other directorships

Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation (CSIRO).  Chairman of Scania Australia Pty Limited.  President of the Australian German Association.

 

Mr Robert G Elstone

BA (Hons), MA (Econ), MCom

 

Mr Elstone was appointed as a non-executive director in September 2004.  He is a member of the Risk Committee and the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

24 years in financial and senior management roles and has been Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of SFE Corporation since 2000.  Formerly Finance Director of Pioneer International Limited from 1995 to 2000 and Chief Financial Officer of Air New Zealand Limited from 1991 to 1994.  Mr Elstone is an Honorary Fellow of the Finance and Treasury Association and has completed the senior development programmes at the Harvard and Stanford business schools.

 

Directorships of listed entities within the last three years

SFE Corporation since May 2000.

 

Other directorships

SFE Corporation related entities, including the Sydney Futures Exchange, SFE Clearing Corporation and Austraclear Limited.

 

Mr Ahmed Fahour

BEc (Hons), MBA

 

Mr Fahour was appointed as Chief Executive Officer, Australia in September 2004 and an executive director in October 2004.  He is a member of the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

17 years in economics and finance, most recently as Chief Executive Officer, Australia and New Zealand, Citigroup in 2004, and he held senior management positions in Citigroup from 2000 to 2003.  Previously Managing Director, iFormation Private Equity Group and a director of the Boston Consulting Group from 1995 to 1999.

 

Other directorships

Rip Curl Group Pty Ltd since July 2004.

 

Mr Daniel T Gilbert

LLB

 

Mr Gilbert was appointed a non-executive director in September 2004.  He is a member of the Audit Committee and the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

30 years in commercial law, specialising in technology and corporate law.  Currently Managing Partner of Gilbert + Tobin, which he co-founded in 1988.

 

Other directorships

Chairman of the Australian Film, Television and Radio School.  Director of Bangarra Dance Theatre.

 

Mr Paul J Rizzo

BCom, MBA

 

Mr Rizzo was appointed a non-executive director in September 2004.  He is a member of the Audit Committee, the Risk Committee and the Nomination Committee.

 

 

80



 

Experience

36 years in banking and finance.  Formerly Dean and Director of Melbourne Business School from 2000 to 2004, Group Managing Director, Finance and Administration, Telstra Corporation Limited from 1993 to 2000, senior roles at Commonwealth Bank of Australia from 1991 to 1993, Chief Executive Officer of State Bank of Victoria in 1990 and 24 years with Australia and New Zealand Banking Group from 1966 to 1990.

 

Directorships of listed entities within the last three years

Bluescope Steel Limited since May 2002.  He was a director of NM Rothschild Australia Holdings Ltd from 2001 to 2003.

 

Other directorships

Consultant director to Mallesons Stephen Jaques.

 

Ms Jillian S Segal

BA, LLB, LLM (Harvard)

 

Ms Segal was appointed a non-executive director in September 2004.  She is a member of the Human Resources Committee (formerly the Compensation Committee) and the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

24 years as a lawyer and regulator, most recently at the Australian Securities & Investments Commission from 1997 to 2002 as Commissioner and then Deputy Chairman and as Chairman of the Board of the Banking & Financial Services Ombudsman from 2002 to 2004.  In 2002 she was a Panel Member of the Dawson Review into Trade Practices Act.

 

She was an environmental and corporate partner and consultant at Allen Allen & Hemsley and worked for Davis Polk & Wardwell in New York.

 

Directorships of listed entities within the last three years

Australian Stock Exchange Limited since July 2003.

 

Other directorships

Member of the Australia Council’s Major Performing Arts Board.

 

Mr John M Stewart

BA, ACII, FCIB

 

Mr Stewart was appointed Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer in February 2004 and has been an executive director since August 2003.  He is a member of the Risk Committee and the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

26 years in banking and finance in the United Kingdom including four years as Group Chief Executive of Woolwich PLC until its acquisition by Barclays PLC in 2000 when he was appointed Deputy Group Chief Executive of Barclays PLC.

 

Mr John G Thorn

FCA

 

Mr Thorn was appointed a non-executive director in October 2003.  He is Chairman of the Audit Committee and a member of the Human Resources Committee and the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

37 years in professional services with PricewaterhouseCoopers, over 20 years as a partner responsible for significant international and Australian clients.  Australian National Managing Partner and a member of the Global Audit Management Group until 2003.

 

Directorships of listed entities within the last three years

Caltex Australia Limited since June 2004 and Salmat Limited since September 2003.

 

Mr Geoffrey A Tomlinson

BEc

 

Mr Tomlinson was appointed a non-executive director in 2000.  He is Chairman of National Wealth Management Holdings Limited.  He is Chairman of the Human Resources Committee and a member of the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

29 years with the National Mutual Group, six years as Group Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer until 1998.

 

Directorships of listed entities within the last three years

Chairman of Funtastic Limited – director since May 2000 and Programmed Maintenance Services Limited – director since August 1999.  Deputy Chairman of Hansen Technologies Limited, director since March 2000 and a director of Amcor Limited since March 1999 and Mirrabooka Investments Limited since February 1999. He was a director of Reckon Limited from June 1999 to August 2004, Lako Pacific Limited from March 2000 to June 2002 and Neverfail Springwater Limited from April 1999 to September 2003.

 

Mr Michael J Ullmer

BSc (Maths) (Hons), FCA, FAIBF, ASA

 

Mr Ullmer was appointed Chief Financial Officer in September 2004 and an executive director in October 2004.  He is a member of the Nomination Committee.

 

Experience

32 years in banking and finance, including seven years with Commonwealth Bank of Australia as Group Executive, Institutional and Business Services from 2002 to 2004 and Group Executive, Financial and Risk Management from 1997 to 2002.  Formerly Partner of Coopers & Lybrand from 1992 to 1997 and 20 years with KPMG including partner from 1982 to 1992.

 

Other directorships

Director of Sydney Symphony Orchestra.

 

Mr G Malcolm Williamson

 

Mr Williamson was appointed a non-executive director in May 2004.  He is a member of the Nomination Committee and is a non-executive chairman of National Australia Group Europe Limited and on the boards of the Company’s main controlled entity boards in Europe.

 

Experience

37 years in banking and finance in the United Kingdom and the United States.  He served with Barclays Bank PLC from 1957 to 1985, reaching the position of Regional General Manager, London.  This was followed by a period as a member of the Post Office board and Managing Director of Girobank PLC.  In 1989 he joined Standard Chartered PLC and became Group Chief Executive.  In 1998 he moved to the United States and took

 

81



 

up the role of President and Chief Executive Officer of Visa International, which he held until 2004.

 

Directorships of listed entities within the last three years

Chairman, CDC Group PLC since July 2004, Chairman, Brittanica Group PLC since October 2004 and non-executive director, Securicor PLC since April 2004.

 

Secretaries of the Company

 

Details of company secretaries of the Company in as at December 2, 2004, and each company secretary’s qualification and experience are below:

 

Mr Garry F Nolan

MBus, FAICD, FCIS, FAIBF, ASIA, CFTP (Snr)

 

Joined the Group in 1970 and has held the position of Company Secretary since 1992.  He has senior management experience in financial management, capital markets, corporate strategy, new business development, corporate restructuring, board affairs, corporate governance, shareholder services and globalisation of business.  The Company Secretary advises and supports the Board and is the Chief Governance Officer.

 

Mr Brendan T Case

BEc, GDipAppFin, Dip Fin Plan, CPA, ACIS, ASIA

 

Joined the Group in 1997 and has held the position of Associate Company Secretary since 2003.  He is Head of the Risk Committee and the Audit Committee Secretariat.

 

Ms Susan E Crook

BA, LLB, MBA, FCIS, FSIA, MAICD

 

Joined the Group in 2000 as Associate Company Secretary and Head of the Australian Secretariat.  She is responsible for the Australian head office companies.  She is the current National President of Chartered Secretaries Australia.

 

Board changes

 

In February 2004, Mr Graham J Kraehe was appointed as Chairman and Mr John M Stewart as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.  Also in February 2004, Mr D Charles K Allen resigned as Chairman and non-executive director and Mr Frank J Cicutto resigned as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.

 

On April 6, 2004, the Chairman announced that a process of Board renewal would be undertaken.  As a result, Mr Robert G Elstone, Mr Daniel T Gilbert, Mr Paul J Rizzo, Ms Jillian S Segal and Mr G Malcolm Williamson were appointed as non-executive directors during the year.  Further, in October 2004 Mr Ahmed Fahour and Mr Michael J Ullmer were appointed as executive directors.

 

Also during the year, Dr J Brian Clark, Dr Kenneth J Moss, Dr Edward D Tweddell and Mrs Catherine M Walter resigned as non-executive directors.

 

Further, Mr Michael Chaney was appointed to the Board as a non-executive director in December 2004 and will be appointed Chairman in September 2005.

 

Directors’ and officers’ indemnity

 

The Company’s constitution

 

Article 21 of the Company’s constitution provides:

 

Every person who is or has been an officer is entitled to be indemnified out of the property of the Company to the ‘relevant extent’ against:

      every liability incurred by the person in the capacity as an officer (except a liability for legal costs); and

      all legal costs incurred in defending or resisting (or otherwise in connection with) proceedings, whether civil, criminal or of an administrative or investigatory nature, in which the officer becomes involved in that capacity,

unless:

      the Company is forbidden by statute to indemnify the person against the liability or legal costs; or

      an indemnity by the Company of the person against the liability or legal costs would, if given, be made void by statute.

 

The reference to the ‘relevant extent’ means to the extent and for the amount that the officer is not otherwise entitled to be indemnified and is not actually indemnified.

 

The Company may also pay, or agree to pay, whether directly or through an interposed entity, a premium for a contract insuring a person who is or has been an officer against liability incurred by the person in their capacity as an officer, including a liability for legal costs, unless:

      the Company is forbidden by statute to pay or agree to pay the premium; or

      the contract would, if the Company paid the premium, be made void by statute.

 

The Company may enter into a contract with an officer or former officer to give:

      effect to the rights of the officer or former officer conferred by Article 21; and

      an officer or former officer access to papers, including those documents provided from or on behalf of the Company or a related body corporate of the Company to the officer during their appointment and those documents which are referred to in such documents or were made available to the officer for the purpose of carrying out their duties as an officer.

 

Article 21 does not limit any right the officer otherwise has.  In the context of Article 21, ‘officer’ means a director, secretary or executive officer of the Company or of a related body corporate of the Company.

 

The existing and former directors, secretaries and executive officers of the Company and of its related bodies corporate are indemnified in terms of Article 21.

 

The Company has executed deeds of indemnity in terms of Article 21 in favour of each non-executive director of the Company and each non-executive director of a related body corporate of the Company.

 

The Company has, under deeds of settlement and release, indemnified former officers, Mr Cicutto, Mr Laing and Mr R McKinnon in respect of reasonable costs and expenses arising from defending certain claims and proceedings that may arise with respect to their employment with the

 

82



 

Company.  For more detailed summaries of the deeds of settlement and release, refer to pages 245 to 246.

 

Directors’ and officers’ insurance

 

During the year, the Company, pursuant to Article 21, paid a premium for a contract insuring all directors, secretaries, executive officers and officers of the Company and of each related body corporate of the Company.  The insurance does not provide cover for the independent auditors of the Company or of a related body corporate of the Company.

 

In accordance with usual commercial practice, the insurance contract prohibits disclosure of details of the nature of the liabilities covered by the insurance, the limit of indemnity and the amount of the premium paid under the contract.

 

Principal activities and significant changes in nature of activities

 

The principal activities of the Group during the year were banking services, credit and access card facilities, leasing, housing and general finance, international banking, investment banking, wealth management, funds management, life insurance, and custodian, trustee and nominee services.

 

Review of operations and group results

 

Financial performance

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company of $3,177 million in 2004, decreased $778 million or 19.7% compared with 2003.  Net profit of $3,551 million in 2004, decreased $396 million or 10.0% compared with 2003.

 

Significant items are those individually significant items included in net profit.  The current year result included the following after tax significant items:

      foreign currency options trading losses of $252 million (refer to ‘significant changes in the state of affairs’ for further information);

      write-down of impaired application software of $307 million;

      charge to provide for doubtful debts of $204 million as a result of a revision of an accounting estimate;

      net profit of $315 million on sale of strategic shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC; and

      net profit of $64 million on write-back of a provision for costs related to the sale of SR Investment, Inc.

 

The 2003 result included no significant items.

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company before significant items of $3,561 million in 2004, decreased $394 million or 10.0% compared with 2003.

 

Net interest income of $7,191 million in 2004, was $228 million or 3.1% lower than 2003.  This was driven by a decrease in the net interest margin from 2.53% to 2.35%, partly offset by lending growth.  The fall in margin largely resulted from the strong growth in lower margin mortgages and fixed rate lending within the retail banking business, as well as a reduction in contribution from the Markets and Specialised Finance divisions of Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

Net life insurance income increased by $568 million from $444 million in 2003 to $1,012 million in 2004.  This was driven by an increase in investment earnings resulting from improved performance in global equity markets and favourable claims experience, partially offset by an increase in policy liabilities.

 

Other banking and financial services income of $4,831 million in 2004, was $179 million or 3.6% lower than 2003.  This outcome reflects:

      lower trading income;

      a reduction in money transfer fees;

      the negative impact of the Reserve Bank of Australia credit card interchange fee reform in Australia effective October 31, 2003;

      lower dividend income following the sale of strategic shareholdings in January 2004;

      the inclusion in the prior year of a one-off benefit on the restructure of the hedging swaps on the TrUEPrSSM preference shares;

      flat loan fees from banking; and

      growth in the Fleet Management and custody businesses following recent acquisitions.

 

The movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities was a loss of $137 million in 2004, an improvement of $23 million from 2003, impacted by the effect of assumption and experience changes underlying the valuation, and the impact of the Group’s election to consolidate under the Australian tax consolidations regime.

 

Personnel, occupancy and general expenses of $6,812 million in 2004, were $458 million or 7.2% higher than 2003.  This outcome reflects:

      increased costs associated with the European defined pension funds, partly offset by a superannuation contribution holiday in Australia reducing Australian defined contribution superannuation expenses;

      higher personnel costs (excluding pensions) reflecting salary increases and growth in staffing levels;

      growth in costs associated with major Group-wide projects – Basel II and International Financial Reporting Standards;

      higher occupancy costs as a result of annual rent increases and relocation costs;

      increased advertising and marketing costs, including the sponsorship of the 2006 Melbourne Commonwealth Games;

      higher software amortisation across the business reflecting prior year investment in infrastructure; and

      $22 million (after tax) write-off of development work associated with the Integrated Systems Implementation program in the first half.

 

The charge to provide for doubtful debts (before significant items) of $559 million in 2004, was $74 million or 11.7% lower than 2003.  The charge was favourably impacted by the continued focus on credit quality across the business.

 

Income tax expense relating to ordinary activities of $1,190 million in 2004, was $491 million or 29.2% lower than 2003.  Income tax expense has been impacted by Wealth Management products and international activities, to which a wide range of tax rates are applied.  In addition, the decision to elect to consolidate under the Australian tax consolidation regime resulted in a tax benefit of $150 million recognised in the 2004 year, due to the reset tax values of assets of life insurance subsidiaries within the Wealth Management business.  Further, the income tax expense has been impacted by the decision not to book a tax benefit on the interest

 

83



 

expense relating to exchangeable capital units following the receipt of an Australian Taxation Office assessment.

 

Financial position

 

Total assets at September 30, 2004 increased to $411,309 million from $397,471 million at September 30, 2003.  Excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, total assets (in Australian dollar terms) grew $9,600 million or 2.4% during the year.

 

The growth in total assets was primarily driven by the growth in net loans and advances, investment securities and investments relating to the life insurance business, which offsets declines in due from other financial institutions, due from customers on acceptances, trading derivatives and available for sale securities.  Net loans and advances increased $22,101 million or 9.8% from $225,735 million at September 30, 2003 to $247,836 million at September 30, 2004.  Excluding the effect of exchange rate movements, net loans and advances increased by $19,086 million or 8.3% during the year.  This increase primarily reflects strong growth in housing lending across all regions and solid other term lending growth.

 

Total liabilities at September 30, 2004 increased to $381,543 million from $370,260 million at September 30, 2003.  Excluding the impact of exchange rate movements, total liabilities (in Australian dollar terms) increased $7,226 million or 1.9% during the year.

 

The growth in total liabilities was primarily driven by growth in deposits and other borrowings, as well as bonds, notes and subordinated debt and life insurance policy liabilities, which offset declines in due to other financial institutions, liability on acceptances and trading derivatives.  Deposits and other borrowings increased by $19,558 million or 9.7% to $220,752 million at September 30, 2004, compared with $201,194 million at September 30, 2003.  Excluding the effect of exchange rate movements, deposits and other borrowings increased by $17,390 million or 8.6% during the year.  The increase primarily relates to growth in term deposits, as well as an increase in other borrowings relating to commercial paper.  Bonds, notes and subordinated debt increased by $8,316 million or 34.3% to $32,573 million at September 30, 2004.  This increase reflects an increase in the issue of Euro and subordinated medium-term notes, as a result of the Group’s increased capital requirements.

 

Total equity in the Group increased from $27,211 million at September 30, 2003 to $29,766 million at September 30, 2004.  Total parent entity interest in equity increased by $1,493 million from $24,407 million at September 30, 2003 to $25,900 million at September 30, 2004.  The movement in total equity was impacted by an increase in contributed equity of $463 million to $10,191 million (2003: $9,728 million), reflecting share issues and dividend reinvestment of $1,355 million, including the underwriting of the dividend reinvestment plan, partially offset by $162 million impact of the on-market share buy-back of ordinary shares and $730 million on the buy-back of preference shares (refer to ‘significant changes in the state of affairs’ for further information).  Further, the reserves balance increased by $301 million to $1,194 million (2003: $893 million), primarily reflecting positive movements in the foreign currency translation reserve.  In addition, the movement in total equity included an increase in retained profits of $729 million to $14,515 million and an increase in outside equity interest of $1,062 million.

 

For a more detailed review of the operations of the Group, and the results of those operations, refer to pages 3 to 68 of this annual financial report.

 

Dividends

 

The directors declared a final dividend of 83 cents per fully paid ordinary share, 100% franked, which was paid on December 8, 2004.  The payment amount was estimated to be $1,287 million as at December 2, 2004.

 

Dividends paid since the end of the previous financial year:

      the final dividend for the year ended September 30, 2003 of 83 cents per fully paid ordinary share, fully franked, paid on December 10, 2003.  The payment amount was $1,250 million; and

      the interim dividend for the year ended September 30, 2004 of 83 cents per fully paid ordinary share, fully franked, paid on July 14, 2004.  The payment amount was $1,253 million.

 

Information on the dividends paid and declared to date is contained in note 7 in the financial report.

 

The franked portion of these dividends carry imputation tax credits at a tax rate of 30%, reflecting the current Australian company tax rate of 30%.  For non-resident shareholders of the Company for Australian taxation purposes, the unfranked portion of the dividend will be paid from the Company’s foreign dividend account.  Accordingly, for non-resident shareholders the unfranked portion of the dividend will not be subject to Australian withholding tax.

 

The extent to which future dividends will be franked, for Australian taxation purposes, will depend on a number of factors including the proportion of the Group’s profits that will be subject to Australian income tax and any future changes to Australia’s business tax system as a result of the Australian Commonwealth Government’s tax reform initiatives.

 

Significant changes in the state of affairs

 

Foreign currency options losses

 

In January 2004, the Company announced that it had identified losses relating to unauthorised trading in foreign currency options and had established a structured process to review and resolve all issues arising from this matter.  The Company took steps to manage the options trading position and a third party investigation into this matter was conducted by PricewaterhouseCoopers (refer below).  The Company also responded to related requests for information from Australian and UK authorities and regulators and the United States SEC.

 

Based on its assessment, the Company announced a total loss of $360 million before tax, or $252 million after tax, arising from the unauthorised foreign currency options trading.  This total loss consisted of losses arising from the removal of fictitious trades from the foreign currency options portfolio of $185 million and a further loss of $175 million arising from a risk evaluation and complete mark-to-market revaluation of the foreign currency options portfolio in January 2004.  The Company recognised the total losses during the 2004 year.

 

The key points from the PricewaterhouseCoopers ‘Investigation into foreign exchange losses at National Australia Bank’ report dated March 12, 2004 included:

      the total loss arising from foreign currency options trading announced on January 27, 2004 was $360 million;

      the losses arising from the foreign currency options trading increased significantly between September 2003 and January 2004;

 

84



 

      four traders on the foreign currency options desk exploited loopholes and weaknesses in systems and processes to hide trading losses and protect bonuses;

      the traders’ activities were contrary to the Company’s strategy of building customer-focused business;

      the foreign currency options trading losses were reported to management by several junior employees;

      no customers were directly or indirectly affected by the foreign currency options trading losses;

      in the Corporate & Institutional Banking Market’s division there was:

      inadequate management supervision;

      significant gaps in back office monitoring functions;

      escalation processes that did not work properly;

      weaknesses in control procedures;

      failure in risk management systems; and

      an absence of appropriate financial controls;

      there was not a suitable compliance culture within this area of the Company and a tendency to suppress bad news rather than be open and transparent about problems;

      warning signals, both inside the Company and from the regulators and other market participants, were not properly acted upon; and

      the Board had overall responsibility for corporate governance, including safeguarding stakeholder interests and reviewing and monitoring risk management and compliance.

 

The complete PricewaterhouseCoopers report is available on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com

 

APRA has also provided to the Company a report on its investigation into irregular currency options trading.  That report identified problems and issues in respect of management supervision, adherence to risk management systems and controls, internal governance procedures and the culture of the Company similar to those described above.

 

APRA has also specified in its report a number of remedial actions required to be implemented.  These include the following:

      Culture – the Board is required to review cultural norms within the Company and clearly articulate the standards of behaviour, professionalism and openness it expects of the organisation; the Board is required to develop policies that promote and support ‘whistle-blowing’; the Board is required to review incentive arrangements to ensure that these promote behaviours that have appropriate regard to risk;

      Governance – the Board, its committees and executive risk committees are required to clarify the appropriate escalation channels available to enable the Board and its committees to deliberate on serious risk issues.  The Board must establish more transparent risk reporting systems and place greater reliance on independent checks and balances on executive management to enable it to discharge its duties appropriately;

      Limit frameworks – the Board is required to review, and formally approve, all market risk limits in the Markets division of Corporate & Institutional Banking; limit policies should clearly specify mandatory (or ‘hard’) limits;  trigger levels (or ‘soft’ limits) should also be specified;  all limit excesses – whether ‘hard’ or ‘soft’ - must have a defined response;

      Markets – the respective roles and responsibilities of the Markets division of Corporate & Institutional Banking and the Market Risk division of Risk Management in respect of risk analysis and escalation of risk issues needs to be clearly specified and distinct from each other;

      Market risk – reporting lines in, and responsibilities of, the Market Risk and Prudential Control (MR&PC) role are required to be streamlined in order to ensure that adequate attention is devoted to market risk issues; roles and responsibilities in MR&PC are required to be clarified and confer an unambiguous mandate; and the process surrounding the approval of product usage authorities is to be reviewed to ensure that all relevant risk management issues are covered;

      Operations – in relation to its Corporate & Institutional Banking Operations division (part of Corporate & Institutional Banking Services), the Company is required to review: all confirmation and reconciliation procedures; operational procedures followed by Operations division staff – especially as regards interaction with the front office; and reporting of transactional and other statistical information;

      Finance – the Finance division is to be assigned responsibility for data integrity; analysis of the components of reported profit and loss data; and critical questioning of discrepancies.  The Finance division is also required to review and formally document the materiality thresholds applicable to each desk; and

      Quantitative support – a number of reforms are required to formalise and enhance the role played by the Quantitative Support division of Corporate & Institutional Banking in model validation and testing.

 

The complete APRA report is available on the Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com

 

Following the release of the PricewaterhouseCoopers and APRA reports, the Board announced a four point action plan to fully address all of the issues associated with the foreign currency options trading losses:

 

Board changes:

      the Board accepted that it was ultimately responsible for the culture and reputation of the Company;

      the Company’s former Chairman, Mr D Charles K Allen, and former Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, Mr Frank J Cicutto, have both resigned;

      the Board has appointed additional directors with banking experience (refer to ‘Board changes’ on page 82);

      the Board, through its Risk Committee, has endorsed a revised governance framework for the management risk committees within Corporate & Institutional Banking; this has included common guiding principles, strengthening of the charters, common operating procedures, increased market risk representation, and a defined risk monitoring, approval and oversight process; and

      the Board is enhancing existing governance processes including the annual review of Board performance (refer to corporate governance – Board performance section on page 72) and the review of individual directors prior to their standing for re-election at the annual general meeting (refer to corporate governance – appointment and re-election of Board members on page 71).

 

Management changes:

      primary responsibility for the unauthorised trading in foreign currency options rests with four members of the foreign currency options desk and they were summarily dismissed from the Company.  The former Head of Foreign Exchange in the Markets division, who was the direct supervisor of the four traders, was also dismissed;

 

85



 

      a number of other employees within the Company were transferred or counselled as a result of the events surrounding the unauthorised foreign currency options trading; and

      the employment of certain individuals was also reviewed.  Those who left the Company include: the former Executive General Manager, Corporate & Institutional Banking, Mr Ian F Scholes, the former Head of Markets division, Mr Ron Erdos, and the former Executive General Manager, Risk Management, Mr Christopher D Lewis. These positions have subsequently been filled.

 

Risk and control frameworks:

      the Company will continue to refine its risk management framework to get a more appropriate balance between management and policing functions.  Management has already reviewed value at risk limits and reduced the level of risk exposure.  Enhanced policies surrounding limit management, compliance and adherence have been introduced;

      weaknesses in the control procedures continue to be rectified.  This includes analysis of daily trading profits and accounts, reporting of all large and unusual transactions, investigations of all off-market rates on high risk transactions, critical review of revaluation rates sourced from third parties and a stronger back office function that properly checks all transactions;

      the management team has reviewed responsibilities between business units to ensure that there are clear reporting lines and accountabilities between Risk Management, Operations and Finance functions; and

      further, the progress in addressing the issues is being reported regularly to the Risk Committee and the Board at each meeting.

 

Culture:

      the Company is accelerating its cultural change agenda.  The development of a new set of Corporate Principles has been the foundation for driving the desired cultural change.  The organisation now has a single, consistent framework with clearly articulated behaviours.  Refer to ‘corporate governance and ethical standards’ for details of the Corporate Principles on page 78;

      a principles benchmark survey, utilising the organisational cultural Inventory (OCI), is being used as a cultural measure.  This survey (in conjunction with the Hewitt Engagement Survey) provides an externally validated and reliable measurement of culture.  The Group Executive Committee and Board have supported the ongoing use of the principles benchmark survey/OCI for at least the next five years;

      a new Performance Management Framework has been put in place. The introduction of ‘quality gates’ which demand minimum levels of compliance and behaviours, will drive increased accountability, and behavioural change; and

      the Company will continue to encourage and protect whistleblowers.  Refer to ‘Whistleblower Protection Program’ on page 79 for details of the Company’s program.

 

APRA has also required that the Company’s internal target total capital adequacy ratio is to rise to 10% until such time as APRA is satisfied that all material weaknesses identified in this report have been rectified. APRA has also withdrawn the Company’s approval to use an internal model to determine market risk capital.

 

The Company’s currency options desk will also remain closed to corporate business and proprietary trading until substantial progress has been made to redress the issues raised by APRA in its report.

 

The Company has made good progress in its program to implement these required actions according to timeframes agreed with APRA.  As at December 31, 2004, of the 81 remedial actions required, 25 have been closed and a further 44 have been responded to by the Company.  The Company will remain under close supervision by APRA until all outstanding actions are implemented.

 

Enforceable undertaking

 

On October 20, 2004, the Company announced that it had provided ASIC with an enforceable undertaking relating to the foreign currency options trading losses that occurred in January 2004.  Under the enforceable undertaking, the Company is obliged to review key systems and controls across businesses which operate under the primary Australian Financial Services Licence (AFSL) applicable to the Group’s Australian banking business.

 

In summary, the undertaking covers three main areas requiring reports on how the Group:

      identifies, records and informs ASIC of any breaches of the relevant AFSL;

      ensures that there are appropriate procedures relating to the role of responsible officers of the Group; and

      ensures that there are appropriate procedures relating to the role of representatives of the Group.

 

The enforceable undertaking requires the Group to provide reports to ASIC by specified dates on each of the areas identified, to have the reports reviewed by an auditor, and to complete any work in these areas that is identified as being required.

 

Redemption of Trust Units Exchangeable for Preference SharesTM (TrUEPrSSM) and buy-back of shares issued in connection with the TrUEPrSSM

 

On January 22, 2004 the Company bought back 36,008,000 fully paid non-converting non-cumulative preference shares of the Company that were issued in connection with the issue of 18,004,000 Trust Units Exchangeable for Preference SharesTM (TrUEPrSSM) in 1998.  The TrUEPrSSM were redeemed on the same date.  The financial effects of the buy-back, redemption and dissolution of the capital raising structure included a reduction in contributed equity of $730 million, a reduction in cash of $582 million and a net increase in retained profits and reserves of $148 million.

 

TrUEPrSSM is a service mark of Merrill Lynch & Co., Inc.

 

Events subsequent to balance date

 

At the Company’s annual general meeting to be held on January 31, 2005, the Company will seek shareholder approval to buy back the total of 20,000,000 unpaid preference shares of the Company issued in connection with the issue of 20,000,000 National Income Securities of the Company.  National Income Securities comprise a note and a preference share.  Subject to shareholder approval and the consent of APRA, the buy-back of the preference shares will be for nil consideration, but will be conducted simultaneously and in conjunction with the redemption of each note for $100 plus any unpaid accrued interest.  As part of the Group’s ongoing capital management, such a buy back may enable the Group to replace the National Income Securities with a more efficient and cost effective source of capital.  No decision to buy back the National Income Securities has yet

 

86



 

been taken, but this could occur at any time after shareholder approval is obtained, subject to obtaining the consent of APRA.

 

On December 14, 2004, the Group entered into an agreement to sell Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited to Danske Bank A/S for approximately $2.5 billion (GBP967 million) in cash.  The transaction will involve the sale of shares in National Europe Holdings (Ireland) Limited (the immediate parent entity of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited).  The profit on sale is estimated at approximately $1.1 billion after all disposal costs, including income tax, and is subject to final adjustments.  The sale is expected to be completed during the first quarter of the 2005 calendar year.  The financial effects of the sale will be recognised during the 2005 financial year.

 

The transaction is subject to the approval of certain regulatory authorities, including the Financial Services Authority in the UK, the Irish Financial Services Regulatory Authority in Ireland, the Financial Supervision Commission on the Isle of Man and the European Commission.

 

Warranties consistent with this type of transaction have been given and indemnities are provided for certain risks (including in respect of any liabilities arising in connection with the High Court investigation).  The maximum potential loss arising from the contingent liability arising in respect of these warranties and indemnities given to Danske Bank A/S will depend upon the warranty or indemnity claimed by Danske Bank A/S, as the maximum liability under some of the warranties and indemnities is subject to various caps and restrictions.  As such, it is not practicable to estimate the maximum potential loss arising from the contingent liability to Danske Bank A/S.  It is not envisaged that any material unrecorded loss is likely to arise from the contingent liability.

 

Employees of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited, including the Irish management team, will transfer with the sale of the businesses.

 

The Company and National Australia Group Europe Limited have also entered into an agreement with National Europe Holdings (Ireland) Limited and Danske Bank A/S in respect of the provision of transitional services.  The Group will provide these transitional services to Danske Bank A/S in respect of the Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited operations to assist in the transition of ownership of those businesses.  These transitional services will be provided at cost and are expected to be in place for up to 18 months.

 

On December 20, 2004, approximately $67 million (GBP 26.5 million) was stolen from Northern Bank Limited in Belfast, Northern Ireland.  This incident is not expected to have any material impact on the sale of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited.

 

No further matter, item, transaction or event of a material and unusual nature has arisen in the interval between the end of the financial year and the date of this report that, in the opinion of the directors, has significantly affected or may significantly affect the operations of the Group, the results of those operations, or the state of affairs of the Group in future financial years.

 

Future developments

 

In August 2004, the Group announced a number of changes to the structure of its business operating model and executive management team.  The new business operating model will be run along regional lines and will be effective during the 2005 year.  Refer to page 9 of the ‘business overview’ section for further information.

 

The Company announced on July 19, 2004 that it had selected Ernst & Young to become the new external auditor of the Company for the 2005 year.  Shareholders will be asked to approve the new auditor at the Company’s annual general meeting to be held on January 31, 2005.

 

Environmental regulation

 

The operations of the Group are not subject to any particular and significant environmental regulation under a law of the Australian Commonwealth Government or of a state or territory, but the Group can incur environmental liabilities as a lender.  The Group has developed credit policies to ensure this is managed appropriately.

 

Rounding of amounts

 

Pursuant to Class Order 98/100 made by the Australian Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC) on July 10, 1998, the Company has rounded off amounts in this report and the accompanying financial report to the nearest million dollars, except where indicated.

 

Proceedings on behalf of the Company

 

There are no proceedings brought or intervened in, or applications to bring or intervene in proceedings, on behalf of the Company by a member or other person entitled to do so under section 237 of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).

 

Remuneration policy and relationship to Company performance

 

This report outlines the remuneration policy for directors and secretaries of the Company and senior executives of the Group.

 

Non-executive directors

 

The fees paid to non-executive directors of the Board are based on advice and data from the Company’s remuneration specialists and from external remuneration advisers.  This advice takes into consideration the level of fees paid to board members of other major Australian corporations, the size and complexity of the Group’s operations, the activities of the Group and the responsibilities and workload requirements of Board members.

 

Because the focus of the Board is on the long-term strategic direction of the Company, there is no direct link between non-executive director remuneration and the short-term results of the Company.  The fee pool is periodically proposed to shareholders at the annual general meeting for approval.  Shareholders approved an increase in the fee pool of $1.3 million to a maximum of $3.5 million at the Company’s annual general meeting held on December 19, 2003.

 

Fees are established annually for the Chairman and other non-executive directors.  Additional fees are paid, where applicable, for participation in Board committees and for serving on the boards of controlled entities.  The total fees paid to members of the Board, including fees paid for their involvement on Board committees and controlled entity boards, are kept within the total approved by shareholders from time to time.

 

At the Company’s annual general meeting held in December 2003, shareholders approved the continuation of the non-executive directors’

 

87



 

share arrangement under the Non-Executive Directors’ Share Plan (which is operated through the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan).  Under this arrangement, shares are provided to non-executive directors as part of their remuneration, (a minimum 10% of fees) rather than receiving cash.  The shares are either issued or acquired on-market on behalf of participants and allocated to non-executive directors on dates determined by the trustee of the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan in its sole discretion.

 

Agreements between the Company and certain of the non-executive directors provided that upon, and in the consequence of, each of these directors ceasing to be a director by reason of retirement or death, the Company should pay a lump sum retirement allowance.  This retirement benefit, as approved by shareholders, was based on period of service, as follows:

 

Less than 15 years
One third of the average yearly emoluments paid by the Company to the director:

(a)   during the last three years of service; or

(b)   when the period of such service is less than three years, during that period, for each completed year of service and proportionately for part of a year, as a non-executive director; or

 

15 years or more

 

Five times the average yearly emoluments paid by the Company to the director during the last three years of service as a non-executive director.

 

During 2002, the Board decided not to enter into any new contractual obligations to pay retirement allowance benefits to non-executive directors appointed after December 31, 2002.  At the Company’s annual general meeting held on December 19, 2003, a proposal was approved permitting directors of the Company and its controlled entities who had accrued retirement benefits to apply those benefits frozen as at December 31, 2003 to either cash, (to be paid on retirement), to additional Company superannuation contributions or to the acquisition of shares in the Company (to be held in trust until retirement).  Directors’ fees for these directors have been increased to reflect the cessation of the retirement benefit program.

 

For those non-executive directors, who would have no entitlement to a retirement allowance benefit, their directors’ fees were set at this higher level.  All directors now have flexibility in relation to their remuneration, including the opportunity to set aside additional Company superannuation contributions.

 

Non-executive director emoluments (current and former non-executive directors at September 30, 2004)

 

The following table shows details of the nature and amount of each element of the emoluments of each non-executive director of the Company relating to services provided in the 2004 year.  Total retirement benefits paid during the year relating to benefits accrued in current and prior years are set out in footnote (3) below.  No options or performance rights have been granted to non-executive directors during or since the end of 2004 as part of their remuneration.

 

 

 

Primary

 

Post-employment

 

Equity

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash salary

 

 

 

Non-monetary

 

Super-

 

Retirement

 

 

 

options and

 

Termination

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

and fees (1)

 

Bonus

 

benefits

 

annuation (2)

 

benefits (3)

 

Shares (4)

 

rights

 

benefits

 

Other

 

Total

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GJ Kraehe

 

284,017

 

 

 

25,562

 

27,369

 

67,883

 

 

 

 

404,831

 

PJB Duncan

 

154,598

 

 

 

13,913

 

11,385

 

27,971

 

 

 

 

207,867

 

RG Elstone

 

12,224

 

 

 

 

 

1,246

 

 

 

 

13,470

 

DT Gilbert

 

11,215

 

 

 

1,009

 

 

1,246

 

 

 

 

13,470

 

PJ Rizzo

 

13,746

 

 

 

 

 

1,401

 

 

 

 

15,147

 

JS Segal

 

8,868

 

 

 

798

 

 

985

 

 

 

 

10,651

 

JG Thorn

 

143,843

 

 

 

12,946

 

 

26,750

 

 

 

 

183,539

 

GA Tomlinson

 

208,313

 

 

 

18,576

 

33,074

 

79,356

 

 

 

 

339,319

 

GM Williamson

 

212,610

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

212,610

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DCK Allen

 

110,537

 

 

 

9,948

 

83,710

 

35,567

 

 

 

 

239,762

 

JB Clark

 

84,522

 

 

 

7,607

 

11,132

 

39,453

 

 

 

 

142,714

 

KJ Moss

 

112,309

 

 

 

10,108

 

26,836

 

39,493

 

 

 

 

188,746

 

ED Tweddell

 

138,761

 

 

 

12,489

 

18,153

 

11,176

 

 

 

 

180,579

 

CM Walter

 

92,506

 

 

 

8,325

 

116,650

 

6,775

 

 

 

 

224,256

 

 


(1) Non-executive directors’ remuneration represents fees in connection with their roles, duties and responsibilities as non-executive director, and includes attendance at meetings of the Board, Board committees and boards of controlled entities and includes payments of $109,219 to Mr Tomlinson and $164,410 to Mr Williamson in respect of services performed as non-executive directors of controlled entity boards and committees.

 

(2) Reflects compulsory Company contributions to superannuation and includes contributions of $9,739 to Mr Tomlinson in respect of services performed as a non-executive director of controlled entity boards and committees.

 

(3) Former directors received retirement benefits upon cessation of their directorship with the Company.  No further retirement benefits were accrued by these directors beyond January 1, 2004 in accordance with shareholder approval at the Company’s annual general meeting on December 19, 2003 to freeze contractual entitlements.  The following accrued entitlements were paid to former directors: Mr Allen, $1,166,928; Dr Clark, $76,447; Dr Moss, $151,014;  Dr Tweddell, $270,620; and Mrs Walter, $663,512.  The value of accumulated retirement benefits which will be provided to current directors in the form of shares is: Mr Kraehe, $279,680; Mr Duncan, $104,855; and Mr Tomlinson $272,608.  From December 31, 2003, neither new nor existing non-executive directors are entitled to additional retirement benefits.

 

(4) Includes shares to the value of $42,388 provided to Mr Tomlinson in respect of services performed as a non-executive director of controlled entity boards and committees.

 

88



 

Total reward for executives

 

Total reward for executives (including secretaries) of the Group is closely aligned to that of the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer in order to promote consistent, clear reward messages and to align remuneration outcomes across the executive team.  This alignment is provided under the Group’s reward strategy, which provides a common framework for reward, talent and performance management across the Group.  Total reward levels are set with advice from independent remuneration consultants to ensure that they are in line with general market practice and appropriately competitive in order to attract top executive talent.

 

Linking total reward to performance

 

During 2004 the Human Resources Committee and management extensively reviewed the Group’s performance management framework.  Three major enhancements to this framework were initiated for the 2005 year onwards:

    calibration of key performance indicators at the commencement of the performance period, which define what performance looks like;

    the introduction of a peer review process.  This process validates performance at the end of the period by calibrating it relative to the performance of other individuals; and

    the introduction of quality gates, being threshold compliance and behaviour measures.  If an individual fails either gate, then no incentive can be provided.

 

This is a significant shift in approach as the quality gates are separate from the scorecard and must be achieved before the scorecard is considered. All employees are required to achieve the behavioural and compliance quality gates and this will be progressively implemented over the next two years commencing with management employees and above in 2005.

 

The peer review process will allow for performance to be differentiated and will bias the outcome to those with the best performance and potential.  It also identifies those employees who require development and those who are poor performers.

 

The structure of total reward

 

Total reward encompasses three main components as described below.  The target reward mix emphasises at-risk rewards (short-term and long-term incentives), increasing with the level of responsibility and/or criticality of the role.  From 2005, amounts above target are provided in shares with restrictions on trading (subject to any legal or taxation constraints).  The target total reward mix for the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer is 25 – 30% fixed remuneration, 30 – 35% short-term incentive, and 40 – 50% long-term incentive.  The target total reward mix for other specified executives is 40 – 65% fixed remuneration, 20 – 30% short-term incentive and 15 – 35% long-term incentive.

 

Fixed remuneration reflects the scope of the role and the level of skill and experience of the individual and is generally referenced to the median of the applicable remuneration market, with higher outcomes for the best performing individuals.  The Group operates in a number of countries and business segments and fixed remuneration reviews aim to achieve equitable outcomes for employees in comparable roles within the context of the different geographical and specialist remuneration markets in which the Group competes for top executive talent.

 

Short-term incentives for senior executives during 2004 related solely to the EVA® performance of the Group.  The weighting between EVA® performance and individual performance varied depending on the nature of the specific executive role.  Under that program, a pre-defined EVA® performance weighting for an individual flowed through automatically with only the non-financial component being variable based on the individual’s achievement of objectives.

 

The incentive program commencing from the 2005 year is structured to reward the achievement against key individual, business and Group annual performance outcomes.  Target amounts are set relative to the applicable remuneration market for executive incentive purposes.  The performance of the Group will be measured by growth in earnings per share (EPS) and EVA® and determines the pool available for payments (subject to Board approval), while the performance of an individual executive against their scorecard of performance measures, determines their share of the available pool.

 

For management employees and above, a threshold level of performance and the achievement of behavioral and compliance quality gates will be required before any short-term incentive reward can be earned.

 

Relative individual performance may give rise to anywhere between zero and two times the target incentive amount being earned, with only the most outstanding performers (less than 5% of employees) receiving amounts at the top end of the scale.  Also, subject to any legal or taxation constraints, all above-target rewards are to be provided in shares with restrictions on trading for at least one year, provided threshold performance is being achieved over the subsequent performance year.

 

Long-term incentives, in the form of Company shares (subject to various restrictions), performance options and performance rights have become a key mechanism for rewarding executive potential and talent over the last two years.

 

Shares issued as a long-term incentive are held in trust until various time and/or performance criteria are achieved (dividends are normally received by the individual while the shares are in trust).  Performance options and performance rights are rights to acquire shares, if and when specified time and performance hurdles are achieved.  The performance hurdles ensure that executive rewards are linked directly to the total shareholder return (TSR) of the Company and are therefore aligned to the outcomes experienced by other shareholders over a specified timeframe (from September 30, 2004 this will generally be three to five years).  The value of any long-term incentive rewards is also heavily dependent on the market value of the Company’s ordinary shares at the time of exercise (if and when any securities vest).

 

The Human Resources Committee introduced performance rights in 2003. Performance rights allow for continued motivation of employees in times when the Group outperforms its peers but for reasons not related to performance the share price may be low.

 

The Human Resources Committee has again considered the role of long-term reward in helping to drive appropriate management behaviours and to reinforce cultural change.  The Human Resources Committee sought advice from external experts in the field and considered best practice in the Australian and international markets regarding the use of long-term incentives.           The changes have been implemented with effect from a grant made on September 30, 2004 and will apply to all future grants until amended by the Human Resources Committee.  Details of the old and new performance hurdle provided in note 38 of the financial report.

 

89



 

Executive remuneration

 

The following table shows details of the nature and amount of each element of the emoluments of each executive director of the Company and each of the five most highly remunerated current and former senior executives for the year.  All emoluments reflect the remuneration paid and payable with respect to services provided for the entire period of service to the Company or Group.  No options or performance rights have been granted to the following executive directors or executives since the end of 2004 up to December 31, 2004 as part of their remuneration.

 

Executive director emoluments (current and former executive directors at September 30, 2004)

 

 

 

Primary

 

Post-employment

 

Equity

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash

 

 

 

Non-monetary

 

Super-

 

Retirement

 

 

 

options and

 

Termination

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

salary (1)

 

Bonus (2)

 

benefits (3)

 

annuation

 

benefits

 

Shares (4)

 

rights (5)

 

benefits (6)

 

Other

 

Total

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

JM Stewart

 

1,670,427

 

1,445,000

 

28,261

 

70,301

 

 

 

2,060,964

 

 

 

5,274,953

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FJ Cicutto (7)

 

677,649

 

 

7,340

 

3,952

 

 

 

229,623

 

6,618,595

 

 

7,537,159

 

 

Senior executive emoluments (current and former senior executives at September 30, 2004)

 

 

 

Primary

 

Post-employment

 

Equity

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash

 

 

 

Non-monetary

 

Super-

 

Retirement

 

 

 

options and

 

Termination

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

salary (1)

 

Bonus (2)

 

benefits (3)

 

annuation

 

benefits

 

Shares (4)

 

rights (5)

 

benefits (6)

 

Other

 

Total

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A Fahour (8)  (9)

 

132,848

 

 

141

 

1,023

 

 

6,017,937

 

 

 

4,211,881

 

10,363,830

 

IG MacDonald

 

807,564

 

 

6,338

 

12,015

 

 

 

1,421,448

 

 

 

2,247,365

 

RE Pinney

 

688,729

 

 

287,623

 

81,282

 

 

 

1,008,360

 

 

 

2,065,994

 

PB Scott

 

749,668

 

385,500

 

10,335

 

88,578

 

 

28,157

 

1,588,146

 

 

 

2,850,384

 

PL Thodey

 

500,668

 

244,358

 

23,226

 

 

 

 

945,833

 

 

 

1,714,085

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IR Crouch

 

743,776

 

 

7,091

 

12,015

 

 

 

1,110,553

 

979,887

 

 

2,853,322

 

MT Laing

 

590,233

 

65,000

 

12,964

 

10,753

 

 

 

941,348

 

1,234,790

 

 

2,855,088

 

PA McKinnon

 

686,407

 

73,000

 

11,170

 

12,015

 

 

 

1,303,920

 

1,302,625

 

 

3,389,137

 

RE McKinnon (10)

 

845,004

 

 

14,542

 

35,033

 

 

 

1,513,805

 

 

 

2,408,384

 

IF Scholes

 

275,221

 

 

3,442

 

5,313

 

 

 

737,095

 

2,243,193

 

 

3,264,264

 

 


(1)          Reflects total remuneration package consisting of fixed pay in cash, annual leave, annual leave loading and where applicable, long service and bank extended leave entitlements.  Leave earned but not taken has been recognised as part of cash salary for the first time in 2004 on adoption of AASB 1046A “Director and Executive Disclosures by Disclosing Entities”. Annual leave taken during the year has been applied first against accumulated leave accrued in prior year, and then against current year balances.  The following specified executives have carry-forward accumulated annual leave earned in prior years which is a current entitlement:  Mr MacDonald, 16 days; Mr R McKinnon, 77 days and Mr Scott, 53 days. The value of long service leave earned during the year is disclosed when it is probable the entitlement will vest.  In general terms, the entitlement represents 13 weeks for every 15 years worked, paid at the fixed pay rate on the date leave is taken.  The following specified executives have carry-forward long service leave earned in prior years: Mr MacDonald, 126 days; Mr R McKinnon, 61 days; and  Mr Pinney, 52 days.  In addition, Mr MacDonald has 84 days of bank extended leave earned in prior years. Bank extended leave has not been available to new employees since 1998.

 

(2)          Reflects performance-based remuneration accrued but not yet paid in respect of performance for the year to September 30, 2004. Specified executives can elect to be provided the bonus in the form of Company shares or additional superannuation.

 

(3)          Includes motor vehicle benefits and parking.  Expatriate specified executive non-monetary benefits include housing, health insurance and airfares.  Fringe benefits tax on non-monetary benefits is included within the value of the benefit.

 

(4)          Represents: (a) one-off compensation on joining the Company; or (b) shares received under a share ownership plan.

 

(5)          Performance options and rights are issued as part of the Group’s long term incentive plan as described in this report on the directors and officers.  Remuneration for former executives who continue to hold performance options and rights at September 30, 2004 reflects the full year benefit of the unvested performance options and performance rights.  No terms of vested performance options or rights were altered during the reporting period.  Refer below for an explanation of fair value basis used to determine remuneration.

 

(6)          Termination benefits include all annual leave, long service leave and bank extended leave accrued but not taken before cessation with the Group.  Some accrued leave reflects leave earned but not taken in prior years which has not been previously disclosed as part of cash salary.  No specified executives had post-employment benefits that required approval by members in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).

 

(7)          Remuneration relates to the period from October 1, 2003 to February 1, 2004.  Remuneration relating to performance options and rights represents the fair value of performance options vested during the year of $229,623. Performance options and rights with a fair value of $1,058,125, which were disclosed as remuneration in 2003, have been forfeited on resignation.

 

(8)          Remuneration relates to the period from September 1, 2004 to 30 September 2004.  Shares represent 75,216 shares issued on September 30, 2004 under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan of which 25% will no longer be subject to applicable forfeiture provisions on each anniversary of his commencement date

 

90



 

and 225,649 shares also issued under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan.  Remuneration for the year includes one-off performance options, performance rights and one-off cash compensation on joining the Company as described in footnote (9).

 

(9)          Other represents one-off compensation in cash  of $3,857,000  made in September 2004, plus cash payments associated with the sale of his US residence and the purchase of a principal residence in Australia.

 

(10)        Ceased as a senior executive of the Company and Group on August 31, 2004 but continues to be employed by the Company.  Remuneration disclosed reflects remuneration for the full year.

 

Fair value basis used to determine equity remuneration

 

The disclosure of the allocation of fair value of performance options and performance rights in the above tables has been based upon the requirements of AASB 1046A “Director and Executive Disclosures by Disclosing Entities”.   In accordance with these guidelines, each year a portion of the fair value of all unvested performance options and rights is included in the remuneration of directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group for disclosure purposes. This portion of the fair value is based on a straight-line allocation of fair value over the vesting period of each unvested performance option or right.  Included within some equity remuneration above is the reversal of equity remuneration disclosed as remuneration in previous periods, which subsequently lapsed due to resignation.

 

Prior to October 1, 2002, the Company disclosed the fair value of performance options granted during the financial year using a numerical pricing model, but did not allocate those values over their expected life for reporting emoluments.  Rather, the full fair value of the grant was disclosed as an emolument in the year of grant. As a result, included in the amounts disclosed above as an allocation of fair value of performance options and performance rights in relation to 2004, are amounts related to unvested performance options granted in prior years that were disclosed as part of emoluments in the relevant prior years.

 

Note however, when the Group transitions to Australian equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards, they will not require all unvested performance options and rights to be recognised in this way, only those granted after November 7, 2002 that are unvested at January 1, 2005.  A difference may therefore arise between disclosure under AASB 1046A and the remuneration expense recognised under the new accounting standards in the Group’s financial performance.

 

Performance options and rights granted as part of executive emoluments have been valued using a numerical pricing model, which takes account of factors including the performance option or right exercise price, the current level and volatility of the underlying share price, the risk-free interest rate, expected dividends on the underlying share, current market price of the underlying share and the expected life of the performance option or performance right. The probability of the performance hurdle being reached has been taken into consideration in estimating the number of performance options or rights likely to vest.  For further details, refer to note 38 in the financial report.

 

Executive performance options and performance rights

 

Performance options and performance rights are granted by the Company under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No. 2 (executive share option plan) and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan (performance rights plan).  Each performance option or performance right is for one fully paid ordinary share in the Company.

 

The number and terms of performance options and performance rights granted during 2004 and since October 1, 2004 up to December 2, 2004, over ordinary shares granted by the Group under the executive share option plan and the performance rights plan, and the Company’s valuation of those performance options and performance rights at grant date are shown in the table below:

 

 

 

Exercise period (1)

 

Exercise price (2)

 

Held at September
30, 2004
(No.)

 

Lapsed during
the period (3)
(No.)

 

Granted since October
1, 2003
(No.)

 

Fair value as at
grant date (4)

 

Grant date

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performance options

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

Mar 21, 2006 -

 

$

30.98

 

102,500

 

25,000

 

127,500

 

$

559,725

 

 

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 -

 

$

30.25

 

5,023,225

 

35,500

 

5,058,725

 

$

23,826,594

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan 30, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 -

 

$

30.25

 

448,000

 

19,750

 

467,750

 

$

2,203,103

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 -

 

$

30.25

 

156,500

 

 

156,500

 

$

677,645

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 -

 

$

29.91

 

134,625

 

 

134,625

 

$

595,043

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Sep 1, 2007 -

 

$

 26.59

 

390,625

 

 

390,625

 

$

1,562,500

 

 

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

91



 

Grant date

 

Exercise period (1)

 

Exercise price (2)

 

Held at September
30, 2004
(No.)

 

Lapsed during
the period (3)
(No.)

 

Granted since  October
1, 2003
(No.)

 

Fair value as at
grant date (4)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performance rights

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

Mar 21, 2006 -

 

$

1.00

 

25,625

 

6,250

 

31,875

 

$

720,056

 

 

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 -

 

$

1.00

 

1,250,022

 

8,873

 

1,258,895

 

$

27,519,444

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan 30, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 -

 

$

1.00

 

112,000

 

4,938

 

116,938

 

$

2,556,265

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 -

 

$

1.00

 

72,782

 

 

72,782

 

$

1,607,754

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Sep 1, 2007 -

 

$

1.00

 

97,656

 

 

97,656

 

$

1,708,980

 

 

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


(1)  Performance options and performance rights generally expire on the last day of their exercise period.

 

(2)  A notional sum of $1.00 is payable by the holder on exercise of all performance rights exercised on any particular day.

 

(3)  The performance options and performance rights generally lapse 30 days after the termination of employment unless otherwise determined by the Board in accordance with their terms.

 

(4)  Fair values of performance options and performance rights are based on a numerical pricing model.  For the purposes of this table, the fair value at grant date represents the full fair value in the year of grant and has not been allocated over the expected life of the option or performance right.  Refer above and to note 38 in the financial report for further information.

 

The executive share option plan was approved by shareholders by special resolution in January 1997 and again at the 2002 annual general meeting. All performance options that have not expired are detailed in note 38 in the financial report.

 

The executive share option plan provides for the Board to grant performance options to executives of the Group to subscribe for fully paid ordinary shares in the Company.  Each performance option is to subscribe for one fully-paid ordinary share in the Company.  The performance options cannot be transferred and are not quoted on the ASX.  No payment is required from executives at the time of the grant.  The exercise price per performance option is the market price of the Company’s fully paid ordinary shares as at the date the performance option was granted or such other date determined by the Board.  The market price is determined as the weighted average of the prices at which the Company’s fully paid ordinary shares were traded on the ASX in the one week up to and including the relevant day.  There are no voting or dividend rights attached to the performance options.  The Board may determine such other terms for the grant of performance options consistent with the ASX Listing Rules and the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).

 

Time and performance hurdles

 

Generally, the performance options may not be exercised before the third anniversary of their effective date of grant, and must be exercised before the eighth anniversary (March 2000 to June 2004 grants) or fifth anniversary (September 2004 grant and future grants) of that date.

 

Exercise of the performance options is also subject to satisfaction of a performance hurdle.  The performance hurdle for all performance options issued between March 2000 and June 2004 is measured after the first three years by comparing the performance of the Company with the performance of other companies in a peer group.  This peer group of companies is based on 50 of the companies listed in the S&P/ASX 100 by market capitalisation (excluding the Company) determined at the grant date or the effective grant date.  Performance options become exercisable depending on the maximum TSR of the Company relative to the TSR of the peer group companies.  TSR measures share price growth, assuming reinvestment of returns to the shareholders including dividends, over consecutive five day (March 2000 to June 2002 grants) or 30 day (March 2003 to June 2004 grants) periods to prevent vesting being achieved on short-term spikes in the Company’s total shareholder return performance during the performance or vesting period (years three to eight).

 

For performance options granted between June 2002 and June 2004, if the relative performance of the Company during the vesting period (years three to eight) does not reach the median (50th percentile) of the peer group during the vesting period, then no performance options will vest.  Half of the performance options will vest when the performance of the Company achieves the median (50th percentile) of the peer group, with an additional 2% of the performance options becoming exercisable with every additional percentile achieved.  All of the performance options will therefore vest when the total shareholder return performance of the Company has reached or exceeded the 75th percentile of the peer group.  Grants prior to June 2002 also allow vesting from the 25th percentile (25% of the performance options) with an additional 1% of the performance options becoming exercisable with every additional percentile achieved up to the 50th percentile.  This does not apply from June 2002 onwards.

 

The performance hurdle for performance options issued from September 2004 onwards will be measured against two separate peer groups of companies.  The first peer group is 50 of the companies listed in the S&P/ASX 200, and the second is the 13 top financial services sector organisations listed in the S&P/ASX 200 (excluding the Company).  Both peer groups are determined at the grant date or effective date when the performance options are issued.  Half of the performance options will become exercisable depending on the maximum TSR (measured over 30 consecutive days) of the Company relative to the first peer group, and the

 

92



 

other half relative to the second peer group.  The highest rank which is sustained for a 30 consecutive day period relative to each peer group will determine the percentage of performance options which will vest in relation to that peer group.  If the performance of the Company during the vesting period (years three to five) does not exceed the median (50th percentile) of either peer group during the vesting period, then no performance options will vest (ie. none are exercisable).  Half of each portion of performance options will vest and become exercisable when the performance of the Company achieves the 51st percentile of the relevant peer group, with an additional 2% of each portion of performance options becoming exercisable with every additional percentile achieved.  All of the performance options will therefore vest when the TSR performance of the Company has exceeded the 75th percentile of each peer group.

 

Lapsing of performance options

 

Performance options will lapse if unexercised on or before their expiry date at the end of eight years (March 2000 to June 2004 grants) or five years (September 2004 grant).  Performance options will also generally lapse 30 days (or such shorter time as determined at the time of grant) after an executive ceases to be employed by the Group unless the Board determines otherwise (generally only in case of retirement, redundancy, death, or total and permanent disablement).  For some grants, performance options may be automatically retained in cases of death or total and permanent disablement.

 

In some circumstances, performance options may, however, be exercised before the third anniversary of the grant and notwithstanding the performance hurdle (described below) where an executive ceases employment with the Group as the result of death or total and permanent disablement.  The Board may also allow optionholders to exercise the performance options irrespective of the normal criteria where certain events occur, such as the making of a takeover offer or announcement to the holders of fully paid ordinary shares in the Company.

 

A loan may be available to executives if and when they wish to exercise their performance options subject to the provisions of applicable laws and regulations (including the United States Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002).  The rules of this plan provide that the rate of interest applicable to such a loan shall be the Company’s base lending rate plus any margin determined by the Board.  Dividends payable in respect of a loan share are applied firstly towards payment of any interest which is due, and secondly towards repayment of the principal amount outstanding under the loan.

 

Performance options must not be granted if the total number of shares issued in the last five years under the Company’s employee share, performance option and rights plans and the total number of outstanding performance options and rights under its plans, including the proposed offer or grant, exceed 5% of the number of shares in the issued share capital of the Company at the time of the proposed offer or grant.  This calculation does not include offers or grants made or shares, performance options or performance rights acquired as a result of an offer or grant made to a person situated outside Australia at the time of the offer or grant or which did not need disclosure under section 708 of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) (eg. shares provided to executive officers of the Company) otherwise than as a result of relief granted by ASIC.

 

The performance rights plan was approved by shareholders at the 2002 annual general meeting and rights issued under this plan during the year are shown in the table above.

 

This plan provides for the Board to grant performance rights to executives of the Group to subscribe for fully-paid ordinary shares in the Company.  Each performance right is to subscribe for one fully-paid ordinary share in the Company.  The performance rights cannot be transferred and are not quoted on the ASX.

 

No payment is required from executives at the time of the grant, but the holder of performance rights must pay a nominal exercise price to exercise those rights.  The total exercise price payable on the exercise of any rights on a particular day is $1.00, irrespective of the number of rights exercised on that day.  There are no voting or dividend rights attached to the rights.  The Board may determine such other terms for the grant of performance rights consistent with ASX Listing Rules and the terms of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).

 

Exercise of the performance rights is subject to the same time and performance hurdle as performance options issued under the executive share option plan.  However, performance rights were only granted to executives for the first time in March 2003.  An unexercised performance right will lapse in similar circumstances to an unexercised option granted under the executive share option plan.

 

Performance rights cannot be granted under the performance rights plan if the number of shares to be received on exercise of those performance rights together with all shares issued under the Company’s employee incentive plans over the last five years and the number of outstanding performance options and performance rights issued under those plans exceed 5% of the Company’s issued share capital.  This calculation does not include offers or grants made or shares, performance options or performance rights acquired as a result of an offer or grant made to a person situated outside Australia at the time of the offer or grant or which did not need disclosure under section 708 of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) (eg. shares provided for no consideration under the staff share allocation plan), otherwise than as a result of relief granted by ASIC.

 

Options and performance rights on issue and number exercised

 

At December 2, 2004, there were 36,468,975 performance options and 2,947,851 performance rights which were exercisable, or may become exercisable in the future, under the respective plans.

 

The holders of exchangeable capital units have the right to exchange those units for ordinary shares in the Company or, at the Company’s option, cash.  Refer to note 31 in the financial report for full details of the number and terms of exchangeable capital units issued by the Group.

 

There were 2,205,000 fully paid ordinary shares of the Company issued during the year as a result of performance options granted being exercised, for a total consideration of $51,248,018.  There were 83,000 fully paid ordinary shares of the Company issued since September 30, 2004 up to December 2, 2004 as a result of performance options granted being exercised, for a total consideration of $1,767,070.  No performance rights were exercised during the relevant time.  The amount paid on issue of each of these shares is set out in note 38 to the financial report.

 

No person holding an option has or had, by virtue of the option, a right to participate in a share issue of any body corporate other than the Company.

 

93



 

Directors’ meetings

 

The table below shows the number of directors’ meetings held (including meetings of Board committees) and number of meetings attended by each of the directors of the Company during the year:

 

 

 

Directors’ meetings of the Company

 

Audit Committee meetings
of the Company

 

Risk Committee meetings
of the Company

 

Directors

 

Scheduled
meetings
attended

 

Scheduled
meetings
held

 

Unscheduled
meetings
attended

 

Unscheduled
meetings
held

 

Meetings
attended

 

Meetings
held

 

Meetings
attended

 

Meetings
held

 

DCK Allen

 

4

(3)

4

(3)

10

 

10

 

3

(1)

3

(1)

4

(1)

4

(1)

FJ Cicutto

 

3

(3)

3

(3)

5

 

5

 

2

(1)

2

(1)

4

 

4

 

JB Clark (8)

 

9

(3)

9

(3)

17

(2)

24

 

 

 

 

 

PJB Duncan

 

10

 

10

 

22

(2)

25

 

13

 

15

 

18

 

18

 

RG Elstone (7)

 

1

(3)

1

(3)

1

 

1

 

 

 

1

 

1

 

DT Gilbert (7)

 

1

(3)

1

(3)

1

 

1

 

1

 

1

 

 

 

GJ Kraehe (5)

 

10

 

10

 

24

(2)

25

 

6

(1)

6

(1)

17

 

17

 

KJ Moss (6)

 

9

(3)

9

(3)

22

(2)

24

 

13

 

13

 

3

(1)

3

(1)

PJ Rizzo (7)

 

1

(3)

1

(3)

1

 

1

 

1

 

1

 

1

 

1

 

JS Segal (9)

 

 

 

1

 

1

 

 

 

 

 

JM Stewart (10)

 

10

 

10

 

21

(2)

25

 

7

(1)

7

(1)

14

 

14

 

JG Thorn

 

10

 

10

 

24

(2)

25

 

15

 

15

 

3

(1)

3

(1) 

GA Tomlinson

 

10

 

10

 

22

(2)

25

 

 

 

3

(1)

3

(1)

ED Tweddell (6)

 

9

(3)

9

(3)

22

(2)

24

 

 

 

16

 

16

 

CM Walter (11)

 

7

(3)

7

 

21

(2)

23

 

5

 

5

 

3

(1)

3

(1)

GM Williamson (12)

 

3

(3)

3

(3)

2

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Human Resources Committee
meetings of the Company

 

Nomination Committee meetings
of the Company

 

Directors’ meetings of controlled
entities (3)

 

Additional
meetings

 

Directors

 

Meetings
attended

 

Meetings
held (2)

 

Meetings
attended

 

Meetings
held

 

Meetings
attended

 

Meetings
held

 

Meetings
attended (4)

 

DCK Allen

 

3

(1)

3

(1)

3

 

3

 

5

 

5

 

3

 

FJ Cicutto

 

 

 

2

 

2

 

3

 

3

 

7

 

JB Clark(8)

 

3

 

7

 

1

 

3

 

6

 

6

 

1

 

PJB Duncan

 

 

 

3

 

3

 

7

 

7

 

6

 

RG Elstone(7)

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

1

 

 

DT Gilbert (7)

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

1

 

 

GJ Kraehe (5)

 

3

(1)

3

(1)

3

 

3

 

7

 

7

 

13

 

KJ Moss (6)

 

6

 

7

 

3

 

3

 

6

 

6

 

7

 

PJ Rizzo (7)

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

1

 

 

JS Segal (9)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

JM Stewart (10)

 

2

(1)

2

(1)

2

 

3

 

15

 

37

 

11

 

JG Thorn

 

6

 

6

 

3

 

3

 

7

 

7

 

8

 

GA Tomlinson

 

2

 

2

 

3

 

3

 

29

 

33

 

8

 

ED Tweddell (6)

 

5

 

7

 

3

 

3

 

6

 

6

 

9

 

CM Walter (11)

 

 

 

3

 

3

 

5

 

5

 

13

 

GM Williamson (12)

 

 

 

 

 

14

 

14

 

4

 

 


(1)          Reflects attendance at committee meetings even though the director is not a member of that committee.

 

(2)          Where a director is unable to attend an unscheduled board meeting called at short notice, the director is provided with a separate briefing on the matters to be considered and the views of the director are obtained.

 

94



 

(3)          Reflects the number of meetings held during the time the director held office during the year.  Where a controlled entity holds board meetings in a country other than the country of residence of the director, or where there may be a potential conflict of interest, then the number of meetings held is the number of meetings the director was expected to attend, which may not be every board meeting held by the controlled entity during the year. Reflects the number of committee meetings attended, even though the director is not a member of the committee.

 

(4)          Reflects the number of additional formal meetings attended during the year by each director, including committee meetings (other than Audit Committee, Risk Committee, Human Resources Committee or Nomination Committee) where any two directors are required to form a quorum.

 

(5)          Mr Kraehe resigned as a member of Risk Committee on March 11, 2004.  Mr Kraehe attended nine meetings as a member of the Risk Committee and eight meetings as a non-member.

 

(6)          Dr Moss and Dr Tweddell resigned as directors on August 27, 2004.

 

(7)          Mr Elstone, Mr Gilbert and Mr Rizzo were appointed as directors on September 2, 2004.

 

(8)          Dr Clark resigned as a director on August 30, 2004

 

(9)          Ms Segal was appointed as a director on September 7, 2004.

 

(10)        Mr Stewart was appointed as a member of the Risk Committee on February 6, 2004.

 

(11)        Mrs Walter resigned from the Audit Committee on March 11, 2004 and resigned from the Board on May 7, 2004.

 

(12)        Mr Williamson was appointed as a director on May 10, 2004.

 

Subsequent to September 30, 2004 Mr Ahmed Fahour and Mr Michael J Ullmer were appointed as executive directors, and Mr Michael Chaney was appointed as a non-executive director.

 

Directors’ interests

 

The table below shows the interests of each director in the issued ordinary shares and National Income Securities of the Group, and in registered schemes made available by the Group as at December 31, 2004.  No director held an interest in Trust Preferred Securities or exchangeable capital units of the Company.

 

Directors

 

Fully paid ordinary
shares
of the Company

 

Performance options over
fully paid ordinary shares
of the Company

 

Performance rights over
fully paid ordinary
shares of the Company

 

National Income
Securities

 

Registered schemes

 

M Chaney

 

 

 

 

 

 

PJB Duncan (1)

 

10,006

 

 

 

950

 

 

RG Elstone (1)

 

2,256

 

 

 

 

 

A Fahour

 

302,865

 

160,000

 

40,000

 

 

 

DT Gilbert (1)

 

3,968

 

 

 

1,253

 

 

GJ Kraehe (1)

 

29,393

 

 

 

670

 

 

PJ Rizzo (1)

 

2,219

 

 

 

 

 

JS Segal (1)

 

2,598

 

 

 

180

 

 

JM Stewart

 

3,179

 

275,000

 

68,750

 

 

 

JG Thorn (1)

 

3,271

 

 

 

 

 

GA Tomlinson (1)

 

32,822

 

 

 

500

 

 

MJ Ullmer

 

2,863

 

100,000

 

25,000

 

 

 

GM Williamson

 

2,060

 

 

 

 

 

 


(1)  Includes shares acquired under the Non-Executive Director Share Plan operated through the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan.

 

There are no contracts, other than those disclosed above, to which directors are a party, or under which the directors are entitled to a benefit and that confer the right to call for or deliver interests in a registered scheme made available by the Company or a related body corporate.

 

All of the directors have disclosed interests in organisations not related to the Group and are to be regarded as interested in any contract or proposed contract that may be made between the Company and any such organisations.

 

95



 

Executives’ interests

 

The table below shows the interests of each senior executive, excluding executive directors, in the issued ordinary shares and National Income Securities of the Group, and in registered schemes made available by the Group as at December 31, 2004.  No executives held an interest in Trust Preferred Securities or exchangeable capital units of the Company.

 

Senior executives(1)

 

Fully paid ordinary
shares
of the Company

 

Performance options over
fully paid ordinary shares
of the Company (2)

 

Performance rights over
fully paid ordinary
shares of the Company(2)

 

National Income
Securities

 

Registered schemes

 

CA Clyne

 

1,000

 

55,000

 

13,750

 

 

 

JE Hooper

 

5,152

 

105,000

 

12,500

 

 

 

IG MacDonald

 

6,370

 

750,000

 

62,500

 

 

 

LM Peacock

 

 

150,000

 

37,500

 

 

 

RE Pinney (3)

 

61,451

 

700,000

 

43,750

 

 

 

PB Scott

 

3,386

 

900,000

 

62,500

 

 

 

GR Slater

 

4,525

 

67,500

 

8,125

 

 

 

PL Thodey (4)

 

129

 

487,500

 

46,875

 

 

 

GD Willis

 

22,058

 

187,500

 

15,625

 

 

 

 


(1)  Senior executives current as at September 30, 2004 where shareholding information is disclosed in note 51 to the financial report.

 

(2)  Exercise price, exercise period, expiry date and fair value of performance options and performance rights for those issued during the year are disclosed in note 51 to the financial report.

 

(3)  In addition to fully paid ordinary shares, Mr Pinney holds 4,070 partly paid shares of the Company.

 

(4)  Mr Thodey exercised 100,000 options since September 30, 2004 which were issued March 23, 2000.

 

Details of each tranche of performance options and performance rights over ordinary shares in the Company provided to each senior executive above are set out below.  Further details regarding the exercise price, exercise period and fair value are disclosed in note 38 to the financial report.

 

 

 

Performance options

 

Senior
executives

 

September 30,
2004

 

June 25, 2004

 

January 16/
January 30,
2004

 

October 30,
2003

 

March 21, 2003

 

June 14, 2002

 

March 23, 2001

 

March 23/
September 28
2000 (1)

 

CA Clyne

 

55,000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

JE Hooper

 

 

 

25,000

 

 

25,000

 

30,000

 

20,000

 

5,000

 

IG MacDonald

 

 

 

125,000

 

 

125,000

 

250,000

 

250,000

 

 

LM Peacock

 

 

25,000

 

75,000

 

50,000

 

 

 

 

 

RE Pinney

 

 

25,000

 

75,000

 

 

75,000

 

75,000

 

250,000

 

200,000

 

PB Scott

 

 

 

125,000

 

 

125,000

 

250,000

 

250,000

 

150,000

 

GR Slater

 

 

 

20,000

 

 

12,500

 

25,000

 

10,000

 

 

PL Thodey

 

 

 

100,000

 

 

87,500

 

150,000

 

150,000

 

 

GD Willis

 

 

 

30,000

 

 

32,500

 

65,000

 

60,000

 

 

 


(1)  Mr Hooper’s and Mr Pinney’s performance options were granted on March 23, 2000 and Mr Scott’s performance options were granted on September 28, 2000

 

 

 

Performance rights

 

Senior
executives

 

September 30, 2004

 

June 25, 2004

 

January 16/
January 30, 2004

 

October 30, 2003

 

March 21, 2003

 

CA Clyne

 

13,750

 

 

 

 

 

JE Hooper

 

 

 

6,250

 

 

6,250

 

IG MacDonald

 

 

 

31,250

 

 

31,250

 

LM Peacock

 

 

6,250

 

18,750

 

12,500

 

 

RE Pinney

 

 

6,250

 

18,750

 

 

18,750

 

PB Scott

 

 

 

31,250

 

 

31,250

 

GR Slater

 

 

 

5,000

 

 

3,125

 

PL Thodey

 

 

 

25,000

 

 

21,875

 

GD Willis

 

 

 

7,500

 

 

8,125

 

 

96



 

Past employment with external auditor

 

Mr Christopher D Lewis, who ceased employment with the Group on March 12, 2004 and Mr Michael J Ullmer, who commenced employment with the Group on September 1, 2004 previously held positions as partners of the Group’s external auditor, KPMG, during a time when KPMG undertook the audit of the Group.  Mr Ullmer resigned from KPMG in 1992.

 

Non-audit services

 

Fees paid or due and payable to the external auditor, KPMG, for non-audit services provided by the external auditor to the Group during the year to September 30, 2004 are set out in the table below:

 

 

 

Group
2004
$’000

 

 

 

 

 

Audit-related fees (regulatory)

 

 

 

National Custodian Services Auditing Guidance Statement (AGS) 1026 reports

 

366

 

APRA reporting (Prudential Standard APS 310 sign-off and tripartite review)

 

300

 

Regulatory audits / attestations for Wealth Management entities (in all regions)

 

277

 

UK regulatory audits / attestations

 

243

 

New Zealand regulatory audits / attestations

 

77

 

Other regulatory audits / attestations (in all regions)

 

151

 

Review of Japanese translation of annual financial report

 

35

 

Total audit-related fees (regulatory)

 

1,449

 

 

 

 

 

Audit-related fees (non-regulatory)

 

 

 

Agreed-upon procedures on results announcements

 

200

 

Services in connection with IFRS transition (including International Accounting Standard (IAS) training)

 

96

 

Audit of employee benefit plans

 

69

 

Review of reconciliation of half year financials under Australian GAAP to US GAAP

 

55

 

Accounting advice in connection with securitisation transactions

 

47

 

Other (including procedures in relation to the Group’s corporate social responsibility report)

 

33

 

Total audit-related fees (non-regulatory)

 

500

 

 

 

 

 

Tax fees

 

 

 

Tax compliance services

 

337

 

Total tax fees

 

337

 

 

 

 

 

All other fees

 

 

 

Australian Payments Clearing Association cash review reporting

 

357

 

Regulatory or compliance audits/attestations for Wealth Management entities (in all regions) unrelated to the audit or review of the Group’s financial statements

 

290

 

Internet banking security testing (Europe)

 

76

 

Other regulatory audits/attestations (in all regions) unrelated to the audit or review of the Group’s financial statements

 

24

 

Total all other fees

 

747

 

Total non-audit service fees

 

3,033

 

 

Fees exclude GST, VAT or equivalent taxes.

 

The external auditor also provides audit and non-audit services to non-consolidated securitisation vehicles sponsored by the Group, non-consolidated trusts of which a Group entity is trustee, manager or responsible entity and non-consolidated Group superannuation or pension funds.  The fees paid or due and payable to the external auditor for these services during the year to September 30, 2004 total approximately $2,731,000.

 

In accordance with advice received from the Audit Committee, the directors are satisfied that the provision of non-audit services during the year to September 30, 2004 by the external auditor is compatible with the general standard of independence for auditors imposed by the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).  The directors are so satisfied because the Audit Committee has, having regard to auditor independence requirements of applicable laws, rules and regulations, concluded in respect of each non-audit service that the provision of that service would not impair the independence of the external auditor.

 

A description of the Audit Committee’s pre-approval policies and procedures is set out on page 75.  Further details of the services provided by the external auditor to the Group and the fees paid or due and payable to the external auditor for those services are set out in note 52 in the financial report.

 

97



 

This page has been intentionally left blank

 

 

98



 

2004 Annual Financial Report

 

99



 

Statement of financial performance

 

 

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

For the year ended September 30

 

Note

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Interest income

 

4

 

18,650

 

17,022

 

16,434

 

13,707

 

11,901

 

Interest expense

 

5(b)

 

(11,459

)

(9,603

)

(9,212

)

(9,605

)

(7,850

)

Net interest income

 

 

 

7,191

 

7,419

 

7,222

 

4,102

 

4,051

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Premium and related revenue

 

4, 54

 

1,005

 

949

 

1,134

 

 

 

Investment revenue

 

4, 54

 

4,842

 

2,759

 

(988

)

 

 

Claims expense

 

5(b), 54

 

(702

)

(958

)

(956

)

 

 

Change in policy liabilities

 

5(b), 54

 

(3,368

)

(1,518

)

1,637

 

 

 

Policy acquisition and maintenance expense

 

5(b), 54

 

(723

)

(713

)

(751

)

 

 

Investment management fees

 

5(b), 54

 

(42

)

(75

)

(86

)

 

 

Net life insurance income

 

 

 

1,012

 

444

 

(10

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other banking and financial services income

 

4

 

4,831

 

5,010

 

7,006

 

3,490

 

6,230

 

Mortgage servicing and origination revenue

 

4

 

 

 

378

 

 

 

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

4

 

(137

)

(160

)

(155

)

 

 

Significant revenue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Proceeds from the sale of strategic shareholdings

 

4, 5(a)

 

993

 

 

 

993

 

 

Proceeds from the sale of foreign controlled entities

 

4, 5(a)

 

 

 

2,671

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Personnel expenses

 

5(b)

 

(3,616

)

(3,416

)

(3,379

)

(1,976

)

(1,907

)

Occupancy expenses

 

5(b)

 

(591

)

(556

)

(559

)

(297

)

(280

)

General expenses

 

5(b)

 

(2,605

)

(2,382

)

(4,769

)

(1,399

)

(1,072

)

Amortisation of goodwill

 

5(b)

 

(103

)

(98

)

(101

)

 

 

Charge to provide for doubtful debts

 

5(b), 17

 

(559

)

(633

)

(697

)

(325

)

(373

)

Significant expenses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cost of sale of strategic shareholdings

 

5(a), (b)

 

(678

)

 

 

(678

)

 

Foreign currency options trading losses

 

5(a), (b)

 

(360

)

 

 

(360

)

 

Write-down of impaired application software

 

5(a), (b)

 

(409

)

 

 

(239

)

 

Charge to provide for doubtful debts – revision of accounting estimate

 

5(a), (b), 17

 

(292

)

 

 

(190

)

 

Cost of foreign controlled entity sold – revision of accounting estimate

 

5(a), (b)

 

64

 

 

 

64

 

 

Restructuring costs

 

5(a), (b)

 

 

 

(580

)

 

 

Cost of foreign controlled entities sold

 

5(a), (b)

 

 

 

(2,686

)

 

 

Profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

 

 

4,741

 

5,628

 

4,341

 

3,185

 

6,649

 

Income tax expense relating to ordinary activities

 

6

 

(1,190

)

(1,681

)

(962

)

(768

)

(929

)

Net profit

 

 

 

3,551

 

3,947

 

3,379

 

2,417

 

5,720

 

Net loss/(profit) attributable to outside equity interest – Life insurance business

 

 

 

(365

)

16

 

(6

)

 

 

Net profit attributable to outside equity interest – Other

 

 

 

(9

)

(8

)

 

 

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

 

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

2,417

 

5,720

 

Other changes in equity other than those resulting from transactions with owners as owners

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net credit to asset revaluation reserve

 

34

 

71

 

9

 

9

 

5

 

 

Net credit/(debit) to foreign currency translation reserve

 

34

 

226

 

(1,251

)

(520

)

6

 

(40

)

Net credit to retained profits on initial adoption of AASB 1044 “Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets”

 

35

 

 

1,151

 

 

 

1,151

 

Total revenues, expenses and valuation adjustments attributable to members of the Company and recognised directly in equity

 

 

 

297

 

(91

)

(511

)

11

 

1,111

 

Total changes in equity other than those resulting from transactions with owners as owners

 

 

 

3,474

 

3,864

 

2,862

 

2,428

 

6,831

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share (cents)

 

8

 

197.3

 

248.8

 

205.7

 

 

 

 

 

Diluted earnings per share (cents)

 

8

 

196.1

 

243.6

 

202.5

 

 

 

 

 

Dividends per ordinary share (cents)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interim

 

7

 

83

 

80

 

72

 

 

 

 

 

Final

 

7

 

83

 

83

 

75

 

 

 

 

 

 

100



 

Statement of financial position

 

 

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

As at September 30

 

Note

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

9

 

8,080

 

8,405

 

4,189

 

4,152

 

Due from other financial institutions

 

10

 

23,494

 

29,234

 

21,615

 

26,475

 

Due from customers on acceptances

 

11

 

16,344

 

19,562

 

16,266

 

19,496

 

Trading securities

 

12

 

24,248

 

23,724

 

23,699

 

22,952

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

17,939

 

23,644

 

17,279

 

22,773

 

Available for sale securities

 

13

 

4,610

 

6,513

 

3,978

 

6,503

 

Investment securities

 

14

 

11,513

 

8,647

 

5,383

 

3,668

 

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

15

 

41,013

 

35,846

 

 

 

Loans and advances

 

16

 

247,836

 

225,735

 

156,035

 

143,718

 

Due from controlled entities

 

 

 

 

 

32,244

 

29,569

 

Shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities

 

19

 

158

 

1,445

 

11,432

 

12,250

 

Regulatory deposits

 

20

 

177

 

225

 

93

 

93

 

Property, plant and equipment

 

21

 

2,257

 

2,498

 

878

 

1,166

 

Income tax assets

 

22

 

1,367

 

1,203

 

876

 

679

 

Goodwill

 

23

 

632

 

740

 

 

 

Other assets

 

24

 

11,641

 

10,050

 

2,435

 

1,323

 

Total assets

 

 

 

411,309

 

397,471

 

296,402

 

294,817

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

25

 

42,044

 

52,530

 

38,675

 

48,302

 

Liability on acceptances

 

 

 

16,344

 

19,562

 

16,266

 

19,496

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

16,150

 

21,479

 

15,181

 

20,479

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

26

 

220,752

 

201,194

 

147,420

 

136,297

 

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

27

 

36,134

 

32,457

 

 

 

Income tax liabilities

 

28

 

1,178

 

1,537

 

740

 

562

 

Provisions

 

29

 

1,129

 

1,262

 

629

 

768

 

Due to controlled entities

 

 

 

 

 

18,004

 

17,025

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

30

 

32,573

 

24,257

 

31,449

 

23,643

 

Other debt issues

 

31

 

1,612

 

1,743

 

350

 

367

 

Other liabilities

 

32

 

13,627

 

14,239

 

6,600

 

7,292

 

Total liabilities

 

 

 

381,543

 

370,260

 

275,314

 

274,231

 

Net assets

 

 

 

29,766

 

27,211

 

21,088

 

20,586

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

33

 

10,191

 

9,728

 

9,216

 

8,753

 

Reserves

 

34

 

1,194

 

893

 

50

 

34

 

Retained profits

 

35

 

14,515

 

13,786

 

11,822

 

11,799

 

Total parent entity interest

 

 

 

25,900

 

24,407

 

21,088

 

20,586

 

Outside equity interest – Life insurance business

 

36

 

3,866

 

2,614

 

 

 

Outside equity interest – Other

 

36

 

 

190

 

 

 

Total equity

 

37

 

29,766

 

27,211

 

21,088

 

20,586

 

 

101



 

Statement of cash flows

 

 

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

For the year ended September 30

 

Note

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Cash flows from operating activities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest received

 

 

 

18,594

 

17,372

 

15,639

 

12,578

 

10,668

 

Interest paid

 

 

 

(11,136

)

(10,115

)

(9,263

)

(8,272

)

(6,603

)

Dividends received

 

 

 

23

 

39

 

35

 

974

 

3,534

 

Fees and other income received

 

 

 

5,068

 

3,026

 

6,182

 

3,020

 

999

 

Life insurance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Premiums received

 

 

 

7,467

 

6,546

 

10,378

 

 

 

Investment and other revenue received

 

 

 

1,339

 

1,857

 

2,024

 

 

 

Policy payments

 

 

 

(6,694

)

(5,778

)

(8,483

)

 

 

Other life insurance payments

 

 

 

(641

)

(476

)

(1,111

)

 

 

Personnel expenses paid

 

 

 

(3,521

)

(3,327

)

(3,637

)

(1,908

)

(1,847

)

Occupancy expenses paid

 

 

 

(521

)

(489

)

(549

)

(243

)

(226

)

General expenses paid

 

 

 

(3,048

)

(2,959

)

(2,339

)

(1,481

)

(1,184

)

Income tax paid

 

 

 

(1,567

)

(1,830

)

(2,131

)

(987

)

(1,118

)

Goods and services tax paid

 

 

 

(30

)

(52

)

(68

)

(8

)

(21

)

Net decrease/(increase) in trading securities

 

 

 

(449

)

(4,345

)

136

 

(725

)

(5,653

)

Net decrease/(increase) in mortgage loans held for sale

 

 

 

(22

)

50

 

1,304

 

 

 

Net cash provided by/(used in) operating activities

 

42(a)

 

4,862

 

(481

)

8,117

 

2,948

 

(1,451

)

Cash flows from investing activities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Movement in available for sale securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Purchases

 

 

 

(5,727

)

(15,052

)

(14,765

)

(5,098

)

(15,047

)

Proceeds from sale

 

 

 

2,002

 

3

 

90

 

2,001

 

 

Proceeds on maturity

 

 

 

5,399

 

13,500

 

14,543

 

5,394

 

13,761

 

Movement in investment securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Purchases

 

 

 

(15,032

)

(15,449

)

(40,653

)

(11,724

)

(11,327

)

Proceeds on maturity

 

 

 

12,373

 

18,578

 

37,434

 

10,060

 

15,985

 

Net increase in life insurance business investments and policy liabilities

 

 

 

(1,683

)

(3,650

)

(2,148

)

 

 

Net increase in loans and advances

 

 

 

(20,657

)

(28,402

)

(19,032

)

(13,690

)

(24,819

)

Net increase in amounts due from controlled entities

 

 

 

 

 

 

(2,007

)

(2,379

)

Net (increase)/decrease in shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities

 

 

 

609

 

428

 

212

 

140

 

(323

)

Payments for mortgage servicing rights

 

 

 

 

 

(74

)

 

 

Proceeds from the sale of mortgage servicing rights

 

 

 

 

 

98

 

 

 

Payments for acquisition of controlled entities

 

42(e)

 

 

(83

)

 

 

 

Proceeds from the sale of controlled entities

 

42(f)

 

110

 

2,671

 

 

 

 

Payments for property, plant and equipment

 

 

 

(660

)

(534

)

(791

)

(244

)

(298

)

Proceeds from the sale of operating assets

 

 

 

 

 

2,314

 

 

 

Proceeds from the sale of strategic shareholdings

 

 

 

993

 

 

 

993

 

 

Net proceeds from the sale of property, plant and equipment

 

 

 

157

 

166

 

418

 

53

 

108

 

Net decrease/(increase) in regulatory deposits

 

 

 

47

 

(113

)

(35

)

(3

)

(57

)

Net decrease/(increase) in other assets

 

 

 

(1,515

)

2,762

 

10,057

 

(1,191

)

2,231

 

Net cash used in investing activities

 

 

 

(23,584

)

(25,175

)

(12,332

)

(15,316

)

(22,165

)

Cash flows from financing activities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net increase in deposits and other borrowings

 

 

 

17,390

 

15,237

 

17,320

 

11,232

 

13,725

 

Net proceeds from bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

 

 

14,059

 

10,136

 

6,738

 

13,660

 

9,383

 

Repayments of bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

 

 

(5,473

)

(7,017

)

(8,314

)

(5,473

)

(5,665

)

Payments from provisions

 

 

 

(270

)

(340

)

(116

)

(233

)

(257

)

Net proceeds from issue of ordinary shares

 

 

 

739

 

216

 

130

 

739

 

216

 

Net proceeds from issue of Trust Preferred Securities

 

 

 

 

975

 

 

 

 

Payments made under on-market buy-back of ordinary shares

 

 

 

(162

)

(1,565

)

(1,248

)

(162

)

(1,565

)

Payments made on buy-back of preference shares

 

 

 

(582

)

 

 

(582

)

 

Dividends and distributions paid

 

 

 

(1,976

)

(2,255

)

(1,948

)

(1,921

)

(2,255

)

Net increase/(decrease) in other liabilities

 

 

 

(978

)

(204

)

(5,892

)

(498

)

566

 

Net cash provided by financing activities

 

 

 

22,747

 

15,183

 

6,670

 

16,762

 

14,148

 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

 

 

 

4,025

 

(10,473

)

2,455

 

4,394

 

(9,468

)

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

 

 

 

(14,891

)

(8,307

)

(12,469

)

(17,675

)

(12,707

)

Effects of exchange rate changes on balance of cash held in foreign currencies

 

 

 

396

 

3,889

 

1,707

 

410

 

4,500

 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

 

42(b)

 

(10,470

)

(14,891

)

(8,307

)

(12,871

)

(17,675

)

 

102



 

Notes to the Financial Statements

 

1 Principal accounting policies

 

This financial report is a general purpose financial report which is prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Banking Act 1959 (Cth), Corporations Act 2001 (Cth), Australian Accounting Standards, Urgent Issues Group Consensus Views and other authoritative pronouncements of the AASB.

 

The financial report also includes disclosures required by the United States SEC in respect of foreign registrants.  Other prescribed SEC disclosures, which are not required to be included in the financial report, are presented elsewhere in this annual financial report.  Certain key terms used in this financial report are defined in the glossary on page 255.

 

The preparation of the financial report requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amount of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses and the disclosed amount of contingent liabilities.  Assumptions made at each balance date are based on best estimates at that date.  Although the Group has internal control systems in place to ensure that estimates can be reliably measured, actual amounts may differ from those estimates.  It is not anticipated that such differences would be material.

 

The Group has elected to early adopt a new Australian Accounting Standard, AASB 1046A, amending AASB 1046 “Director and Executive Disclosures by Disclosing Entities”.  AASB 1046A permits the use of market condition rules when valuing equity grants within director and executive remuneration disclosures (refer to note 51).  The Group considers this to be a more appropriate basis for disclosure than that applied under AASB 1046.

 

(a)   Historical cost

 

The financial report is based on historical cost and except where stated does not take into account changing money values or fair values.

 

(b)   Currency of presentation

 

All amounts are expressed in Australian dollars unless otherwise stated.

 

(c)   Rounding of amounts

 

In accordance with Australian Securities and Investments Commission Class Order 98/100 dated July 10, 1998, all amounts have been rounded to the nearest million dollars, except where indicated.

 

(d)   Reclassifications

 

In respect of the statement of financial position, the basis of classification of three items was changed during 2004.

 

The basis of classification of transferable certificates of deposit (TCDs) has been revised and bonds issued under the Group’s TCD program have been reclassified from ‘deposits and other borrowings’ to ‘bonds, notes and subordinated debt’.  As a result of this change, on the consolidated statement of financial position $1,550 million has been reclassified in the 2003 comparatives.

 

Certain repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements with other financial institutions have been reclassified to ‘due to other financial institutions’ and ‘due from other financial institutions’ respectively, in order to provide users with an enhanced level of understanding and comparability of the Group’s loan portfolio.  Previously, these repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements were included in ‘deposits and other borrowings’ and ‘loans and advances’ respectively.

 

Accordingly, $7,402 million of repurchase agreements previously disclosed as at September 30, 2003 as deposits and other borrowings have been reclassified to due to other financial institutions.  Further, $18,851 million of reverse repurchase agreements as at September 30, 2003 previously disclosed as loans and advances have been reclassified to due from other financial institutions.  In addition, reverse repurchase agreements of $3,373 million at September 30, 2003 with non-financial institutions have been reclassified from ‘loans and advances’ to ‘cash and liquid assets’.

 

Corresponding reclassifications have also been made to revenue, expense and cash flow classifications.

 

The basis of classification of the medium-term notes (MTN) issued by the Group’s controlled entity, Bank of New Zealand (BNZ) has been revised.  Accordingly, from April 1, 2004 amounts issued under this MTN program have been reclassified from ‘deposits and other borrowings’ to ‘bonds, notes and subordinated debt’.  Comparative information has not been reclassified as it is impracticable to do so.

 

(e)   Comparative amounts

 

Comparative amounts have been reclassified to accord with changes in presentation made in 2004, except where otherwise stated.

 

(f)    Principles of consolidation

 

All entities which are controlled by the Company are consolidated in the financial report.  Control means the ability or power of the Company to dominate decision making directly or indirectly in relation to the financial and operating policies of another entity, to enable that other entity to operate with it in pursuing its objectives.

 

All inter-entity balances, transactions and profits and losses are eliminated on consolidation.  Controlled entities prepare accounts for consolidation in conformity with the Company’s accounting policies.

 

Where controlled entities have been acquired or sold during the year, their operating results have been included from the date of acquisition or to the date of sale.  Controlled entity acquisitions have been accounted for using the purchase method of accounting.

 

Outside interest in the equity and results of the entities that are controlled by the Company is shown as a separate item, ‘outside equity interest’, in the consolidated financial statements.

 

Statutory funds of the Group’s life insurance business have been consolidated into the financial report as required by Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1038 “Life Insurance Business”.  The financial report consolidates all of the assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses of the statutory funds and non-statutory fund life insurance business irrespective of whether they are designated as relating to policyholders or shareholders.  In addition, where the Group’s life insurance statutory funds have the capacity to control managed investment schemes in which they are the majority investor, the Group has consolidated all of the assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses of these managed investment schemes.

 

103



 

Joint venture entities are entities that are jointly controlled by the Group.  In the consolidated financial statements, investments in joint venture entities, including partnerships, are accounted for using equity accounting principles.

 

Investments in joint venture entities are carried at the lower of the equity accounted amount or recoverable amount.  The Group’s share of the joint venture entities net profit or loss is recognised in the profit and loss account from the date joint control commenced until the date joint control ceases.  Other movements in reserves are recognised directly in consolidated reserves.

 

(g)   Foreign currency translation

 

All foreign currency monetary assets and liabilities are revalued at the rates of exchange ruling at balance date.  Unrealised profits and losses arising from these revaluations are recognised immediately in the profit and loss account.  Foreign currency revenue and expense amounts are translated at average rates of exchange for the year.

 

Differences arising on the translation of the financial report of the Group’s overseas operations which are considered to be economically self-sustaining are included in the foreign currency translation reserve, after allowing for foreign currency hedges.  Differences arising on the translation of the financial report of all other overseas controlled entities and overseas branches are recognised immediately in the profit and loss account. Foreign exchange profits and losses, in respect of life insurance business, are recognised in the profit and loss account.

 

Assets

 

(h)   Cash assets

 

Cash assets are items readily convertible into cash and are generally repayable on demand.  Cash assets are brought to account at the face value or the gross value of the outstanding balance where appropriate.

 

(i)    Due from other financial institutions

 

Due from other financial institutions includes loans, nostro balances, reverse repurchase agreements, certificates of deposit and settlement account balances due from other financial institutions.  They are brought to account at the gross value of the outstanding balance.

 

(j)    Acceptances

 

The Group’s liability under acceptances is reported in the statement of financial position.  The Group has equal and offsetting claims against its customers which are reported as an asset.  The Group’s own acceptances discounted are held as part of either the trading securities or loan portfolio depending on whether, at the time of such discount, the intention was to hold the acceptances for resale or until maturity, respectively.

 

(k)   Trading securities

 

Trading securities are public and other debt securities which are purchased for current resale in day-to-day trading operations.  Trading securities are recorded at fair value and unrealised profits or losses in respect of fair value adjustments are recognised immediately in the profit and loss account. Trading securities are recorded on a trade-date basis.

 

(l)    Available for sale securities

 

Available for sale securities are public and other debt securities which are purchased with the intention to be held for an indefinite period of time but not necessarily to maturity.  Such securities may be sold in response to various factors including significant changes in interest rates, liquidity requirements and regulatory capital considerations.

 

Available for sale securities are recorded at the lower of aggregate cost or fair value.  Cost is adjusted for the amortisation of premiums and accretion of discounts to maturity.  Unrealised losses in respect of market value adjustments and realised profits and losses on sale of available for sale securities are recognised in the profit and loss account.  The cost of securities sold is calculated on a specific identification basis.  Available for sale securities are recorded on a trade-date basis.

 

(m)  Investment securities

 

Investment securities are public and other debt securities, which are purchased with the positive intent and ability to hold until maturity.  Such securities are recorded at original cost adjusted for the amortisation of premiums, accretion of discounts to maturity and other than temporary diminutions in their value.  Unrealised losses relating to other than temporary diminutions in the value of investment securities are recognised in the profit and loss account and the recorded values of those securities adjusted accordingly.  The sale of an investment security would only be considered in those unusual and rare situations when significant unforeseeable changes in circumstance may have caused a change in intent without calling into question the Group’s intent and ability to hold other investment securities to maturity in the future (eg. evidence of a significant deterioration in a security issuer’s creditworthiness).  In any unusual and rare instances where investment securities are sold prior to maturity, profits and losses on sale are taken to the profit and loss account when realised.  Investment securities are recorded on a trade-date basis.

 

(n)   Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements

 

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase are retained within the investment, available for sale or trading portfolios and accounted for accordingly.  The obligation to repurchase is recorded as ‘deposits and other borrowings’ or, where the transaction is with a financial institution, as ‘due to other financial institutions’.  The difference between the sale and repurchase price represents interest expense and is recognised in the profit and loss account over the term of the repurchase agreement.  Securities held under reverse repurchase agreements are recorded as ‘cash and liquid assets’, ‘due from other financial institutions’ or ‘loans and advances’ depending on liquidity and the counterparty.  The difference between the purchase and sale price represents interest income and is recognised in the profit and loss account over the term of the reverse repurchase agreement.

 

(o)   Investments relating to life insurance business

 

Investment assets held by the Group’s life insurance business have been recorded at net market value including an allowance for estimated realisation costs. Where no quoted market values exist, the directors adopt various valuation methods. In those cases, the values adopted are deemed equivalent to net market value.

 

Details of particular methods adopted are as follows:

 

      freehold land and leasehold properties are stated at values not greater than independent valuations, which are carried out at regular

 

104



 

intervals not exceeding three years.  As market value is adopted, building depreciation is not provided for;

 

      ordinary and preference shares, equity options and investments in unit trusts that are not controlled entities, are recorded at their latest available market value or, where no quoted security exists, at directors’ valuations with reference to their net tangible assets;

 

      investments in controlled entities of life insurance operations that do not have quoted market values are recorded at not greater than independent valuation or where no independent valuation is available at directors’ valuations, or, for entities in voluntary liquidation, at net tangible assets;

 

      investments in associates are recorded at directors’ valuation with reference to the life insurance entity’s proportionate interest in the market value of each associate;

 

      interest-bearing securities quoted on stock exchanges are shown at prices quoted at balance date.  Unquoted interest-bearing securities are recorded at amounts based on valuations using rates of interest equivalent to the yields obtainable on comparable quoted investments; and

 

      participations in lease transactions are included in investment assets. The transactions are recorded at market value, based on the net present value of the after-tax cash flows arising from the transactions.

 

Restrictions on assets

 

The assets and liabilities held in the statutory funds of the Australian life insurance business are subject to the restrictions of the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth) and the constitutions of the life insurance entities.  The main restrictions are that the assets in a statutory fund can only be used to meet the liabilities and expenses of that fund, to acquire investments to further the business of the fund, or to make profit distributions when solvency and capital adequacy requirements of the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth) are met.  Therefore, assets held in statutory funds are not available for use by other parts of the Group’s business other than any profits generated in the statutory funds.

 

(p)   Loans and advances

 

Loans and advances include overdrafts, credit card lending, market rate advances, bill financing, housing loans, lease finance, other term lending and redeemable preference share finance.  They are carried at recoverable amount represented by the gross value of the outstanding balance adjusted for provision for doubtful debts and unearned income.  Unearned income represents interest not yet earned on the Group’s consumer instalment lending and leasing and is calculated on an actuarial basis.  Interest is recognised as revenue when interest is earned.

 

(i)  Bad and doubtful debts

 

Provision for doubtful debts provides for losses inherent in loans, and off-balance sheet credit extensions such as letters of credit, guarantees and undrawn commitments to extend credit.

 

The specific provision for doubtful debts is established to cover all identified doubtful debts and is recognised when there is reasonable doubt over the collectability of principal and interest in accordance with the loan agreement (an impaired loan).  Amounts provided for are determined by specific identification or by management’s determination of probable losses for individual loans that are considered impaired in relation to loan portfolios where specific identification is impracticable.  All bad debts are written off against the specific provision for doubtful debts in the reporting period in which they are classified as irrecoverable.

 

The Group has adopted a statistically-based provisioning methodology for its general provision for doubtful debts.  Under this methodology, the Group estimates the level of losses inherent but not specifically identified in its existing credit portfolios at balance date.

 

For retail lending (smaller-balance homogeneous loans), the general provision is assessed at a portfolio level and is based on product loss rates, to make a provision for losses inherent in the portfolio but not yet identified at balance date.  These rates are determined by reference to observed historical loss experience for the relevant product types.

 

In respect of non-retail lending, the amount of the general provision is determined by multiplying the customer’s probability of default by the loss given default.  The probability of default is determined by the Group’s internal customer rating system.  Internal ratings are assigned at the customer level.  This system utilises objective, verifiable external data, such as external credit ratings, and is supplemented with an assessment of economic and industry outlooks, conducted by the Group’s discrete specialist economics unit.  The loss given default is the amount of an individual loan at risk having regard to the level of collateral held against that facility.  The level of collateral held is determined on a loan-by-loan basis, based on the Group’s assessment of the loan security’s value at the time of loan application and any subsequent valuations.

 

The operation of the statistically-based provisioning methodology is such that when individual loans are impaired, a specific provision will be raised by making a transfer from the general provision for doubtful debts.  The general provision for doubtful debts is then re-established based on the remaining portfolios of credit exposures applying the above methodology.

 

All loans and off-balance sheet credit extensions are subject to continuous management surveillance.

 

(ii)  Asset quality

 

A loan is considered to be impaired when, based on current information and events, the Group considers it is probable that it will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement.

 

The Group has disclosed certain components of its loan portfolios as impaired assets according to the classifications discussed below (refer to note 18).

 

Non-accrual loans consist of:

 

      retail loans (excluding credit card loans) which are contractually past due 90 days with security insufficient to cover principal and arrears of interest;

 

      non-retail loans which are contractually past due and there is sufficient doubt about the ultimate collectability of principal and interest to warrant the cessation of interest accruals; and

 

      impaired off-balance sheet credit exposures where current circumstances indicate that losses may be incurred.

 

Where required, a specific provision is raised for non-accrual loans.

 

Restructured loans are those loans on which the original contractual terms have been concessionally modified due to the financial difficulties of

 

105



 

borrowers, and on which interest continues to be accrued at a rate which is equal to or greater than the Group’s average cost of funds at the date of restructuring.

 

Assets acquired through security enforcement are those assets (primarily real estate) acquired through actual foreclosure or in full or partial satisfaction of loans.

 

Accruing portfolio facilities past due 90 to 180 days are those assets (including credit card loans) which continue to accrue interest to 180 days.  A general provision is raised against accruing portfolios loans.

 

(iii)  Revenue recognition on non-accrual loans

 

When a loan is classified as non-accrual, interest income ceases to be recognised in the profit and loss account on an accruals basis, as reasonable doubt exists as to the collectability of interest and principal. Interest charged on non-accrual loans in the current reporting period is reversed against income.

 

Cash receipts in relation to non-accrual loans are recognised as interest income to the extent that the cash receipts represent unaccrued interest except where there is a contrary agreement with the borrower, or the receipts relate to proceeds from the sale of security, or are scheduled principal repayments.

 

The accrual of interest recommences when a non-accrual loan is restored to accrual status.  This occurs when management judges that the customer is capable of fully servicing its future obligations under the facility.

 

(iv)  Leasing

 

Finance leases in which the Group is the lessor are included in loans and advances and are accounted for using the finance method, whereby income determined on an actuarial basis is taken to account over the term of the lease in proportion to the outstanding investment balance.  Where the Group is a lessee, finance lease assets are capitalised and the corresponding liability is recognised in other liabilities.

 

Leveraged leases with lease terms beginning on or after October 1, 1999 are accounted for as finance leases.  Investments in leveraged leases entered into before October 1, 1999 are recorded at an amount equal to the equity participation and are net of long-term debt for which there is no recourse to the lessor in the event of default by the lessee. Income is taken to account on an actuarial basis over the term of each lease.  Where a change occurs in estimated lease cash flows during the term of a lease, total lease profit is recalculated and reallocated over the entire lease term.  Net of tax income has been grossed up at current rates to reflect the appropriate pre-tax equivalent amount.

 

Lease rentals receivable and payable on operating leases are recognised in the profit and loss account in periodic amounts over the effective lease term.

 

(q)   Shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities

 

Except where a life insurance controlled entity consolidates a controlled entity (refer to note 1(o)), shares in controlled entities and other securities are stated at original cost less any necessary provision for diminution in value.  Unrealised losses relating to diminution in the value of shares in controlled entities and other securities are recognised in the profit and loss account.

 

Interests in joint venture entities are accounted for under the equity method of accounting (refer to note 1(f)).

 

(r)   Regulatory deposits

 

In several countries in which the Group operates, the law requires that regulatory deposits be lodged with the local central bank at a rate of interest generally below that prevailing in the market.   The amount of the deposit and the interest rate receivable are determined in accordance with the requirements of the local central bank.  Regulatory deposits are brought to account at the gross value of the outstanding balance.

 

(s)   Property, plant and equipment

 

Except for life insurance business investments, all land and buildings are revalued annually by directors to reflect fair values.  Directors’ valuations are based on advice received from independent valuers and regular independent valuations.  Revaluation increments are credited to the asset revaluation reserve.  Revaluation decrements are charged against the asset revaluation reserve to the extent that they reverse previous revaluation increments and any excess is recognised as an expense.

 

A provision for capital gains tax is only made when it is known that the relevant asset will eventually be sold.  This provision, when required, is made against the asset revaluation reserve.

 

All other items of property, plant and equipment are carried at the lower of cost, less accumulated depreciation or amortisation, and recoverable amount.  If the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment exceeds its recoverable amount, the asset is written down to the lower value.  Where a group of assets working together supports the generation of cash inflows, recoverable amount is assessed in relation to that group of assets.  In assessing recoverable amounts, the relevant cash flows have not been discounted to their present value unless otherwise stated.

 

The costs of developing, acquiring and enhancing internal-use software are capitalised on a component or module basis and amortised over the estimated useful life of the software, which ranges from three to ten years.  From October 1, 2004, the estimated useful life of application software will not exceed five years.  The annual amortisation expense for assets previously amortised over more than five years will increase to reflect the reduction in the estimate of each relevant asset’s remaining useful life.

 

With the exception of land, all items of property, plant and equipment are depreciated or amortised using the straight-line method at the rates appropriate to its estimated useful life to the Group.  For major classes of property, plant and equipment, the annual rates of depreciation or amortisation are: buildings – 3.3%; leasehold improvements – up to 10%; furniture, fixtures and fittings and other equipment – from 10% to 20%; personal computers and related application software – 33.3%; and other data processing equipment and related application software – from 10% (20% from October 1, 2004) to 33.3%.

 

Profit or loss on the sale of property, plant and equipment, which is determined as the difference between the carrying amount of the property, plant and equipment at the time of sale and the sale proceeds, is treated as revenue or expense.

 

106



 

(t)      Goodwill

 

Goodwill, representing the excess of the purchase consideration over the fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired on the date of acquisition of a non-life insurance controlled entity, is recognised as an asset.  Goodwill is amortised from the date of acquisition by systematic charges on a straight-line basis to the profit and loss account over the period in which the benefits are expected to arise, but not exceeding 20 years.  The carrying value of goodwill is reviewed at least annually.  If the carrying value of goodwill exceeds the value of the expected future benefits, the difference is charged to the profit and loss account.

 

(u)     Excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

Where a life insurance entity within the Group consolidates a controlled entity, any difference between the values consolidated line by line and the market value of the controlled entity recorded in the life insurer’s financial report is shown as ‘excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities’.  This asset is disclosed within ‘other assets’ in the statement of financial position.

 

The excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities represents:

 

        acquired goodwill to the extent it remains at balance date;

 

        increases in the value of goodwill of the controlled entity since acquisition or establishment; and

 

                       differences between the values assigned to the assets and liabilities of the controlled entity within the Group financial report and those in the financial report of the controlled entity, arising due to valuation methodology differences.

 

The significant assumptions used in the valuation basis underlying the directors’ valuations are disclosed in note 24.

 

The excess is not amortised.  Movements in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities are included in the Group’s revenue or expense.

 

Liabilities

 

(v)     Due to other financial institutions

 

Due to other financial institutions includes deposits, vostro balances, repurchase agreements and settlement account balances due to other financial institutions.  They are brought to account at the gross value of the outstanding balance.

 

(w)    Deposits and other borrowings

 

Deposits and other borrowings include non-interest-bearing deposits redeemable at call, certificates of deposit, interest-bearing deposits, debentures and other funds raised publicly by borrowing corporations.  They are brought to account at the gross value of the outstanding balance.

 

(x)     Life insurance policy liabilities

 

Policy liabilities in the Group’s statement of financial position and the change in policy liabilities disclosed as an expense have been calculated using the Margin on Services (MoS) methodology in accordance with guidance provided by the Life Insurance Actuarial Standard Board’s Actuarial Standard AS 1.03 “Valuation of Policy Liabilities” (refer to note 1(kk)).

 

Policy liabilities for investment-linked business are calculated using the accumulation method.  The liability is generally the accumulation of amounts invested by policyholders plus investment earnings less fees specified in policy contracts.  Deferred acquisition costs are offset against this liability.

 

Policy liabilities from non-investment-linked business are measured mainly using the projection method which is the net present value of estimated future policy cash flows.  Future cash flows incorporate investment income, premiums, expenses, redemptions and benefit payments (including bonuses).  The accumulation method may be used only where the result would not be materially different to the projection method.

 

Unvested policyholder benefits represent amounts that have been allocated to certain non-investment-linked policyholders that have not yet vested with specific policyholders.

 

The measurement of policy liabilities is subject to actuarial assumptions.  Assumptions made in the calculation of policy liabilities at each balance date are based on best estimates at that date.  The assumptions include the benefits payable under the policies on death, disablement or surrender, future premiums, investment earnings and expenses. Best estimate means that assumptions are neither optimistic nor pessimistic but reflect the most likely outcome.  The assumptions used in the calculation of the policy liabilities are reviewed at each balance date. A summary of the significant actuarial methods and assumptions used is contained in note 54.

 

(y)     Provisions

 

Provisions are recognised when a legal or constructive obligation exists as a result of a past event and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation.  Provisions are not discounted to the present value of their expected net future cash flows except where stated below.

 

(i)  Employee entitlements

 

Employee entitlements to long service leave are accrued using an actuarial calculation, based on legal and contractual entitlements and assessments having regard to staff departures, leave utilisation and future salary increases.  This method does not differ significantly from calculating the amount using present value techniques.

 

Wages and salaries, annual leave and other employee entitlements expected to be paid or settled within 12 months of reporting date are measured at their nominal amounts using remuneration rates that the Group expects to pay when the liabilities are settled.

 

All other employee entitlements that are not expected to be paid or settled within 12 months of the reporting date are measured at the present value of net future cash flows.

 

(ii)    Non-lending losses

 

Provision for non-lending losses is raised for losses incurred by the Group, which do not relate directly to principal outstanding for loans and advances.

 

107



 

(iii)   Restructuring costs

 

Provision for restructuring costs includes provisions for expenses incurred but not yet paid and future expenses that will arise as a direct consequence of decisions already made.  A provision for restructuring costs is only made where the Group has made a commitment and entered into an obligation such that it has no realistic alternative but to carry out the restructure and make future payments to settle the obligation.  Provision for restructuring costs is only recognised when a detailed plan has been approved and the restructuring has either commenced or been publicly announced.  This includes the cost of staff termination benefits and surplus leased space.  Costs related to ongoing activities are not provided for.

 

(iv)    Surplus leased space

 

Surplus leased space is an onerous contract and a provision is recognised when the expected benefits to be derived from the contract are less than the costs that are unavoidable under the contract.  This arises where premises are currently leased under non-cancellable operating leases and either the premises are not occupied, or are being sub-leased for lower rentals than the Group pays, or there are no substantive benefits beyond a known future date.  The provision is determined on the basis of the present value of net future cash flows.

 

(v)     Provision for dividends

 

Provision for dividends is recognised at the time the dividend is declared, determined or publicly recommended.

 

(z)     Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt issued by the Group are recorded at cost or at cost adjusted for premium or discount amortisation.

 

(aa)   Other debt issues

 

Other debt issues include perpetual floating rate notes, exchangeable capital units and fixed rate securities issued by the Group.  They are recorded at cost or at cost adjusted for premium or discount amortisation.

 

(bb)   Derivative financial instruments held or issued for trading purposes

 

Derivative financial instruments held or issued for trading purposes, also referred to as trading derivatives, include swaps, futures, forward, option and other contingent or exchange-traded contracts in the interest rate, foreign exchange, credit derivatives and commodities markets.  Trading derivatives are measured at fair value and the resultant profits and losses are recognised in other income.  The fair value of trading derivatives is reported on a gross basis as assets or liabilities as appropriate.

 

The fair value of a derivative financial instrument represents the present value of future expected cash flows arising from that instrument.

 

(cc)   Derivative financial instruments held or issued for purposes other than trading

 

The principal objective of using derivative financial instruments for purposes other than trading is to maximise the level of net interest income, while maintaining acceptable levels of interest rate, credit and liquidity risk, and to facilitate the funding needs of the Group.  To achieve this objective, a combination of derivatives including swaps, futures, forward, option and other contingent or exchange-traded contracts in the interest rate and foreign exchange markets and credit derivatives may be used.

 

Hedging derivatives must be effective at reducing the risk associated with the exposure being hedged and must be designated as a hedge at the inception of the contract.  Accordingly, changes in the fair value of the hedging derivative must be closely correlated with changes in the fair value of the underlying exposure at inception of the hedge and over the term of the hedged exposure.  The timing of the impact of hedging derivatives on the profit and loss account is consistent with the timing of the impact of the hedged items on the profit and loss account.

 

The net revenue or expense on derivatives used to manage interest rate exposures is recorded in net interest income on an accruals basis. If a derivative that is used to manage an interest rate exposure is terminated early, any resulting gain or loss is deferred within ‘other assets’ or ‘other liabilities’ and amortised to net interest income over the remaining period originally covered by the terminated contract.  If the underlying interest rate exposure position ceases to exist, any deferred gain or loss is recognised immediately in revenue.

 

Interest accruals, premiums and realised settlement amounts arising on derivatives used to hedge exposures arising from anticipated future transactions, are deferred within other assets or other liabilities until such time as the accounting impact of the anticipated transaction is recognised in the financial report.  Such amounts only qualify for deferral where there is a high probability of the future transaction materialising.  If it becomes apparent that the future transaction will not materialise, any deferred amounts are recognised immediately in other income.

 

Interest receivables and payables for interest rate swaps with the same counterparty are reported on a net basis as other assets or other liabilities where a legal right of set-off exists.

 

Margin deposits for exchange-traded derivatives are reported as other assets.

 

(dd)   Trustee and funds management activities

 

The Group acts as trustee, custodian or manager of a number of funds and trusts, including superannuation and approved deposit funds, and wholesale and retail investment trusts.  Where the Group does not have direct or indirect control of these funds and trusts as defined by Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1024 “Consolidated Accounts”, the assets and liabilities are not included in the consolidated financial statements of the Group.  Where controlled entities, as responsible entities or trustees, incur liabilities in respect of their activities, a right of indemnity exists against the assets of the applicable trusts and funds.  As these assets are sufficient to cover liabilities, and it is not probable that the controlled entities will be required to settle them, the liabilities are not included in the consolidated financial statements.

 

Commissions and fees earned in respect of the Group’s trust and funds management activities are included in the profit and loss account (refer to note 1(jj)).

 

108



 

(ee)   Securitisation

 

Through its Australian loan securitisation program, the Group packages and sells loans (principally housing mortgage loans) as securities to investors through a securitisation vehicle.  The Group determines if this special purpose entity is a controlled entity and if so the principles of consolidation outlined in note 1(f) are applied.  In such transactions, the Group receives fees for various services provided to the program on an arm’s length basis, including servicing fees and management fees.  Fee income is recognised in revenue on an accruals basis in relation to the reporting period in which the costs of providing these services are incurred.

 

Interest rate swaps and liquidity facilities are provided to the program by the Group on an arm’s length basis, in accordance with APRA guidelines.

 

The Group is entitled to any residual income of the program after all payments due to investors and costs of the program have been met.  Due to the significant uncertainties inherent in estimating the underlying loan repayment rates and interest margins with respect to the Australian loan securitisation program, future cash flows cannot be reliably measured and no asset in relation to any entitlement to residual income is recognised.  The residual income is recognised as revenue when receivable.  Furthermore, due to this uncertainty in relation to valuation of future cash flows, the assets are transferred at book value and no profit or loss on sale of the loans is recognised.

 

Revenue and expense recognition

 

(ff)    Interest income

 

Interest income is reflected in the profit and loss account when earned on an accruals basis (refer also to note 1(n), (p)(iii) and (p)(iv)).

 

(gg)  Dividend income

 

Dividend income is recorded in the profit and loss account on an accruals basis when the Group obtains control of the right to receive the dividend.

 

(hh)  Loan-related fees and costs

 

Loan origination fees, if material, are recognised as revenue over the life of the loan as an adjustment of yield.  Commitment fees are deferred, and if the commitment is exercised, recognised as revenue over the life of the loan as an adjustment of yield or, if unexercised, recognised as revenue upon expiration of the commitment.  Where commitment fees are retrospectively determined and nominal in relation to market interest rates on related loans, commitment fees are recognised as revenue when charged.  Where the likelihood of exercise of the commitment is remote, commitment fees are recognised as revenue over the commitment period.  Loan-related administration and service fees are recognised as revenue over the period of service.  Credit card fees are recognised as revenue over the card usage period. Syndication fees are recognised as revenue after certain retention, timing and yield criteria are satisfied.

 

Direct loan origination costs, if material, are netted against loan origination fees and the net amount recognised as revenue over the life of the loan as an adjustment of yield.  All other loan-related costs are expensed as incurred.

 

Loan origination fees and direct loan origination costs are recognised as revenue as an adjustment of yield using the constant yield method of amortisation.  All other loan-related fees are recognised as revenue using the straight-line method of amortisation.

 

(ii)    Trading income

 

Trading income is brought to account when earned based on changes in net fair value of financial instruments and recorded from trade date.  Further information is included in note 1(g) foreign currency translation, 1(k) trading securities and 1(bb) derivative financial instruments held or issued for trading purposes.

 

(jj)    Fees and commissions

 

Fees and commissions that relate to specific transactions or events are recognised as revenue in the period that the services are provided.  When they are charged for services provided over a period, they are recognised as revenue on an accruals basis.

 

(kk)  Life insurance business revenue and expenses

 

The Group conducts its life insurance business through a number of controlled entities including National Australia Financial Management Limited, MLC Lifetime Company Limited, MLC (Hong Kong) Limited, MLC Limited, BNZ Life Insurance Limited, National Australia Life Company Limited, PT MLC Life Indonesia and Advance MLC Assurance Co. Limited.

 

(i)      Types of business

 

The Australian life insurance operations of the Group consist of investment-linked business and non-investment-linked business, which are conducted in separate statutory funds as required under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth).  The overseas life insurance operations of the Group consist primarily of non-investment-linked business.

 

Investment-linked business relates to business where policyholders’ investments are made into the statutory funds and policyholders’ returns are directly linked to the investment performance of the assets in that fund.  The policyholder bears all the risks and rewards of the investment performance.  The policyholder has no direct access to the specific assets; however, the policy value is calculated by reference to the market value of the statutory fund’s assets.  Investment-linked business includes superannuation and allocated pension business.

 

Non-investment-linked business refers to business where an insured benefit is payable on the occurrence of a specified event such as death, injury or disability caused by accident or illness or, in the case of an annuity, either the continuance of the annuitant’s life or the expiry of the annuity term.  The benefit payable is not directly referable to the market value of the fund’s assets.  Non-investment-linked business includes traditional whole of life and endowment policies (where the risks and rewards generally are shared between policyholders and shareholders) and risk policies such as death, disability and income insurance (where the shareholder bears all the financial risks).

 

109



 

(ii)    Allocation of profit

 

Profits are brought to account in the statutory funds on a MoS basis (refer to note 1(x)). Under MoS, profit is recognised as fees are received and services are provided to policyholders.  When fees are received but the service has not been provided, the profit is not recorded at the point of sale. Losses are expensed when identified.

 

Consistent with the principle of deferring unearned profit is the requirement to defer expenditure associated with the deferred profit. MoS permits costs associated with the acquisition of policies to be charged to the profit and loss account over the period that the policy will generate profits. However, costs may only be deferred to the extent that a policy is expected to be profitable (refer to note 1 (kk)(vii)).

 

Profit from investment-linked business is derived as the excess of the fees earned by the shareholder for managing the funds invested, over operating expenses and amortisation of policy acquisition costs.

 

Profit arising from policies comprising non-investment-linked business is based on actuarial assumptions, and calculated as the excess of premiums and investment earnings less claims, operating expenses and the amortisation of acquisition costs that will be incurred over the estimated life of the policies.  The profit is systematically recognised over the estimated time period the policy will remain in force.

 

Certain policies are entitled to share in the profits that arise from the non-investment-linked business.  This profit sharing is governed by the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth) and the life insurance companies’ constitutions.  This profit sharing amount is treated as an expense in the profit and loss account.

 

(iii) Premium revenue

 

Premiums are separated into their revenue and liability components.  Premium amounts earned by providing services and bearing risks including protection business are treated as revenue.  Other premium amounts received, net of initial fee income, which are akin to deposits, are recognised as an increase in policy liabilities.  The initial fee, which is the difference between the premium received and the initial surrender value, is recognised as premium revenue.  For the Group’s investment-linked business, premiums are recognised as an increase in policy liabilities.

 

Premiums with a regular due date are recognised as revenue on a due basis.  Premiums with no due date are recognised as revenue or an increase in policy liabilities on a cash received basis.  Premiums due before the end of the year but not received at balance date are included as outstanding premiums in note 24.  Premiums due after but received before the end of the year are accounted for as premiums in advance.

 

(iv) Investment revenue

 

Dividend and interest income is brought to account on an accruals basis when the life insurance controlled entity obtains control of the right to receive the dividend or interest income.

 

Net realised and unrealised profits and losses represent changes in the measurement of net market values in respect of all investments recognised at net market value (refer to note 1(o)).

 

(v) Claims

 

Claims are recognised when the liability to a policyholder under a policy contract has been established or upon notification of the insured event, depending on the type of claim.

 

Claims incurred in respect of investment-linked business, which are in the nature of investment withdrawals, are recognised as a reduction in policy liabilities.

 

Claims incurred that relate to the provision of services and bearing of risks are treated as expenses and are recognised on an accruals basis.

 

(vi) Basis of expense apportionment

 

All expenses charged to the profit and loss account are equitably apportioned to the different classes of business in accordance with Division 2 of Part 6 of the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth) as follows:

 

                       expenses and other outgoings that related specifically to a particular statutory fund have been directly charged to that fund;

 

                       expenses and other outgoings (excluding commissions, medical fees and stamp duty relating to the policies which are all directly allocatable) have been apportioned between each statutory fund and shareholders’ fund. Expenses are apportioned between classes of business by first allocating the expenses to major functions and activities, including those of sales support and marketing, new business processing and policyholder servicing, and then to classes of products using relevant activity cost drivers, including commissions, policy counts, funds under management and benchmark profit; and

 

                       investment income, profits and losses on sale of property, plant and equipment, profits and losses on sale of investments, and appreciation and depreciation of investments have been directly credited or charged to the appropriate statutory fund or shareholders’ fund.

 

Apportionment between policy acquisition, policy maintenance and investment management has been made in line with principles set out in the Life Insurance Actuarial Standard Board’s Actuarial Standard AS 1.03 “Valuation of Policy Liabilities”.

 

(vii)  Deferred acquisition costs

 

Policy acquisition costs are deferred, provided that the business generated continues to be profitable. The deferred costs are reflected as a reduction in policy liabilities and are amortised in the profit and loss account over the expected duration of the relevant policies.

 

(ll)    Superannuation

 

For accumulation benefit superannuation and pension plans (also known as defined contribution plans), the superannuation expense recognised in the profit and loss account represents the contributions payable to the plans.  For defined benefit plans, the superannuation expense recognised in the profit and loss account is determined on an actuarial basis.  Under this basis, actuarial gains and losses are taken into account over the average remaining employment period of plan members, generally between 10 and 15 years. The measurement of the prepaid asset and the annual pension expense involves actuarial and economic assumptions.

 

110



 

On acquisition of entities, surpluses and deficits in their sponsored defined benefit plans at the date of acquisition are recognised on the Group’s balance sheet as a prepaid pension cost asset or an accrued pension cost liability, respectively.  The assets and liabilities of these plans are not consolidated as the Group has no control over them.  The Group also recognises a prepaid asset for contributions the Group has made to the pension plans in excess of pension expenses.  Conversely, the Group recognises a liability where pension expenses are in excess of contributions made by the Group to the pension plans.  The prepaid pension cost asset is subject to a recoverable amount test, having regard to discounted cash flows.

 

(mm)     Equity-based compensation

 

The Group operates a number of share-based compensation plans where shares are issued to employees and directors as remuneration.  The Group records an expense where it has paid cash to the respective compensation plan trustee, which in turn purchases the Company’s shares on-market.  Where the Company issues shares as compensation, no expense is recorded in the profit and loss account.

 

The Group also operates an executive share option plan and performance rights plan.  No accounting entries are made in relation to options and performance rights granted to executives until they are exercised, at which time the amounts receivable from executives are recognised in the balance sheet as contributed equity.  No expense is recorded in the profit and loss account.

 

Details of equity-based compensation plans of the Group, including the fair value of instruments granted, are provided in note 38.

 

(nn)  Income tax

 

The Group adopts tax-effect accounting using the income statement liability method.

 

The tax effect of timing differences, which occur where items are claimed for income tax purposes in a period different from when they are recognised in the financial statements, is included in the provision for deferred income tax or future income tax benefits, as applicable, at the tax rate expected to apply when the timing differences reverse.  Any future income tax benefit relating to timing differences is carried forward as an asset unless the benefits are not assured beyond any reasonable doubt of being realised.  Any future income tax benefit relating to tax losses, is not carried forward as an asset unless the benefits are virtually certain of being realised.  In the statement of financial position, future income tax benefits are disclosed within income tax assets and the provision for deferred income tax is disclosed within income tax liabilities.

 

Capital gains tax, if applicable, is provided for in determining the income tax expense in the reporting period in which an asset is sold.

 

For life insurance business, taxation is not based on the concept of profit.  Special legislative provisions apply to tax policyholders and shareholders on different bases.  According to the class of business to which their policies belong, policyholders have their investment earnings taxed at the following rates in Australia:

 

        superannuation policies – 15%;

 

        annuity policies – 0%; or

 

        non-superannuation investment policies – 30%.

 

The life insurance business shareholders’ funds are taxed at the company rate of 30% on fee income and profit arising from insurance risk policies, less deductible expenses.  For five years from July 1, 2000 (the date that the current life company tax regime commenced), there is a transitional provision that allows a one-third exemption from assessable income of fee income derived from policies in force as at July 1, 2000.

 

During the year ended September 30, 2004, the Company made the decision to elect to consolidate its Australian wholly-owned controlled entities under the Australian tax consolidation regime.  The Company is the head entity in the tax-consolidated group comprising the Company and all of its Australian wholly-owned controlled entities. The implementation date for the tax-consolidated group was October 1, 2002.

 

The head entity recognises all of the current and deferred tax assets and liabilities of the tax-consolidated group (after elimination of intra-group transactions).  Members of the tax-consolidated group have entered into a tax funding agreement that requires Australian wholly-owned controlled entities to make contributions to the Company for the Company’s tax liabilities as the head entity of the tax-consolidated group. Under the tax funding agreement, contributions are calculated as if the Australian wholly-owned controlled entities were taxed on a ‘stand-alone basis’.  The Company has agreed to reimburse its Australian wholly-owned controlled entities for current and deferred tax assets arising at the date of entering tax consolidation and that arise from the actions and operations of the particular controlled entity following formation of the tax-consolidated group.  Australian wholly-owned controlled entities have agreed to reimburse the Company for deferred tax liabilities arising at the date of entering tax consolidation and that arise from the actions and operations of the particular subsidiary following formation of the tax-consolidated group.  Ongoing assets and liabilities arising under the tax funding agreement are recognised by the Australian wholly-owned controlled entities as inter-company assets and liabilities with a corresponding charge to income tax expense.

 

(oo)   Goods and services tax

 

Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of goods and services tax or other value-added tax, except where the tax incurred is not recoverable from the relevant taxation authority.  In these circumstances, the tax is recognised as part of the expense or the cost of acquisition of the asset.

 

Receivables and payables are stated at an amount with tax included.  The net amount of tax recoverable from, or payable to, the relevant taxation authority is included within other assets or other liabilities.

 

Cash flows are included in the statement of cash flows on a gross basis.  The tax component of cash flows arising from investing and financing activities which is recoverable from, or payable to, the relevant taxation authority is classified as operating cash flows.

 

(pp)   Overseas classification

 

Amounts booked in branches and controlled entities outside Australia are classified as overseas.

 

111



 

2    Transition to Australian equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards

 

In July 2002, the Financial Reporting Council in Australia formally announced that Australian reporting entities would be required to comply with Australian accounting standards equivalent to International Financial Reporting Standards (AIFRS) and other pronouncements set by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) for financial years commencing on or after January 1, 2005.

 

The Group will be required to adopt these standards for the financial year commencing October 1, 2005 and they will be first reflected in the Group’s financial statements for the half year ending March 31, 2006.  Comparative financial information prepared in compliance with AIFRS will be required for the year commencing October 1, 2004.  Comparative information is not required for AASB 132 “Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation”, AASB 139 “Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement” and AASB 4 “Insurance Contracts”.

 

A program board is monitoring the Group’s AIFRS implementation plans.  Dedicated work streams are responsible for evaluating the impact of specific accounting changes and how the necessary changes will be made.  Consistent with general project management methodology, each work stream is progressing through phases of technical evaluation, design, development, and implementation and testing.  The program is well progressed through these phases and is achieving scheduled plan milestones.  The program will be complete by September 30, 2005, although there are several future changes that the Group will need to address, including Phase II of the IASB’s insurance project and proposed further amendments to IAS 39 “Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement”.  The Group continues to monitor these and other developments, including emerging industry interpretations and practice.

 

AIFRS frequently require application of fair value measurement techniques.  This will potentially introduce greater volatility to the Group’s reported financial performance.  The Group continues to evaluate the areas impacted by these standards.  The adoption of these standards is expected to have a material effect on the Group’s reported financial performance and financial position; however, the underlying economics of the business will not change.  It is not possible at this time to estimate reliably the quantitative impact of the changes upon the Group’s reported financial performance and financial position or regulatory capital adequacy. Most accounting policy changes to retrospectively apply AIFRS will be made against opening retained profits in the first AIFRS balance sheet.

 

Upon transition to AIFRS, a number of the Group’s accounting policies will be altered.  The areas of most significant impact are outlined below:

 

(a) Recognition of derivative financial instruments and hedging

 

Under AIFRS, the Group will be required to recognise all derivative financial instruments at fair value on the balance sheet, irrespective of whether the instrument is used in a hedging relationship or otherwise under AIFRS.

 

Where fair value hedge accounting criteria are met, fair value changes on both the hedged item and the hedging instrument will be recognised directly in the income statement.  Where cash flow hedge accounting criteria are met, fair value changes on the related hedging instruments will be deferred in an equity reserve and will then be transferred to the income statement at the time the cash flows occur.

 

It should be noted that the underlying economics and risks of the Group will not change.  The change affects the manner by which the Group will account for the way it mitigates its interest rate risk.  In this accounting, the Group will most likely use a hybrid of approaches with a predominance of cash flow hedge accounting.  As a consequence, this will create volatility in the balance of the cash flow hedge equity reserve.

 

All hedging arrangements will be subject to rigorous effectiveness testing and where an arrangement fails effectiveness tests, hedge accounting cannot be applied and fair value changes on the hedging instrument will generally be recognised in the income statement.  This raises the potential for income statement volatility.

 

Whilst hedge accounting rules may alter the accounting for the Group’s interest rate risk management process, the treatment of trading derivatives is not likely to be affected by hedge accounting.

 

In certain circumstances, the Group will seek to minimise the impact of the fair value measurement requirements by recognising both the item that is subject to an economic hedge and the accompanying derivative instrument at fair value in the income statement.

 

These changes do not require comparatives for the 2005 financial year.

 

(b) Loan provisioning

 

Under AIFRS, the Group is not able to recognise loan impairment (currently referred to as provision for doubtful debts) until objective evidence is available that a loss event has occurred.  Further, loan impairment is calculated as the difference between the carrying amount and the present value of future expected cash flows discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate.  Significant loans will be individually assessed for impairment.  Those loans that are not assessed as impaired will then be placed into portfolios of assets with similar risk profiles and be subjected to a collective assessment of impairment.  Smaller loans will not be individually assessed but impairment tested in portfolios based upon similar risk profiles using objective evidence, which may be based on historical experience adjusted to accommodate the effects of current conditions at each balance date.  The impact of AIFRS on the Group’s current methodology for calculating the provision for doubtful debts is still being evaluated.

 

These changes do not require comparatives for the 2005 financial year.

 

(c) Wealth Management revaluation – excess of market value over net assets (EMVONA)

 

EMVONA represents:

 

             acquired goodwill in respect of life insurance controlled entities remaining at balance date;

 

             increases in the value of goodwill of the controlled entities since acquisition; and

 

             the difference between the values assigned to assets and liabilities of the controlled entity within the Group financial report and those in the report of the controlled entity arising due to valuation methodology differences.

 

On transition to AIFRS, the Group must derecognise the asset EMVONA.  At the same time, the Group will derecognise a deferred tax liability

 

112



 

associated with EMVONA and recognise goodwill and any other acquired intangible assets arising from acquisition of the MLC group to the extent of the remaining balance.

 

(d) Securitisation

 

The combined effect of financial asset derecognition rules and the consolidation of special purpose entity rules is likely to impact both existing and new securitisation arrangements involving both the Group’s assets and those of its customers.  The rules provide more stringent criteria for the derecognition of financial assets.  AIFRS consolidation rules may require the Group to consolidate assets that, in the past, have been sold into a special purpose entity.  In addition, special purpose entities holding assets originated outside the Group will require consolidation where the Group has access to the majority of the residual income or is exposed to the majority of the residual risk associated with the special purpose entity.

 

(e) Taxation

 

The Group will be required to adopt a balance sheet approach to determining deferred tax items.  This approach is based upon a comparison of carrying amounts of assets and liabilities with their tax base, thereby identifying a broader range of differences than those that arise under the current tax-effect accounting standard.  Consequently, the Group may be required to recognise additional levels of deferred tax assets and liabilities.

 

(f) Insurance contracts

 

Contracts that do not have significant insurance risk will no longer be treated as insurance contracts but as financial instruments.  Further, it will not be possible to defer any internal acquisition costs for those contracts.  These changes will likely have a negative impact on accounting profit in respect of new business.  Accounting profits will be higher in later periods as a result of the expense being recognised upfront.

 

For those contracts that continue to meet the definition of an insurance contract, the Group will account for those under the existing Margin on Services (MoS) approach.  It is expected that further changes to insurance accounting will arise under Phase II of the IASB’s insurance project at which time the existing MoS approach will be phased out.

 

(g) Share-based payments

 

AIFRS introduces a new requirement for the Group to recognise performance options and performance rights granted and shares issued to employees as an expense in the income statement.  The fair value of the performance options and performance rights at grant date will be expensed over their expected vesting period on a straight-line basis.  This rule must be applied to performance options and performance rights granted from November 7, 2002 and unvested at January 1, 2005.

 

In addition, shares issued under the Company’s staff share schemes, as described in note 38, will be recognised as an expense when issued.

 

(h) Post-employment benefits

 

AIFRS will require all periodic movements in defined benefit pension/superannuation plan surpluses/deficits, including the full actuarial gain or loss in each period, to be reflected in the income statement, thereby introducing volatility.  A corresponding asset or liability will be recognised on the Group’s balance sheet.

 

(i) Revenue recognition

 

At present, loan origination fee revenue is either recognised upfront or deferred in the balance sheet and amortised as an adjustment of yield over the life of the loan.  It is likely that a greater volume of fees will be deferred and amortised over the life of the respective loans under AIFRS.  Revenue that is deferred must be amortised on an effective interest rate basis.  Whilst some revenue classification changes may arise, where the level of business remains constant, the change is not expected to materially affect annual income recognition.

 

(j) Intangible assets

 

The amortisation of goodwill acquired in a business combination is prohibited under AIFRS.  Instead, any goodwill recognised within the Group is subject to an impairment test at least annually and where impairment is identified it must be recognised immediately in the income statement.

 

Other intangibles will be amortised on a systematic basis that best reflects the expected pattern of consumption of the assets’ benefits over their respective useful lives.

 

(k) Transitional policy changes

 

On the date of transition to AIFRS, the Group will need to effect two types of changes:

 

             those concerning presentation and disclosure of items in the financial statements (eg. the format of the income statement and balance sheet); and

 

             those concerning recognition and measurement of items in the financial statements.

 

Any recognition and measurement adjustments that arise as a result of the transitional process will be recognised in either retained earnings or the appropriate equity reserve.

 

Under the AASB’s transitional rules, several one-off exemptions are available on first time adoption of AIFRS.  The exemptions recognise some of the practical difficulties that arise in making the transition to AIFRS. The Group will apply these exemptions, the most significant of which is not needing to change the original acquisition accounting for all controlled entities and businesses acquired throughout the Group’s history.

 

(l) Capital implications

 

The full implications for the Group’s capital adequacy are dependent on rules currently being developed by APRA.  Priority areas for review by APRA include the treatment of innovative capital instruments, defined benefit pension/superannuation surpluses/deficits, and EMVONA.  APRA has stated that it will not make any AIFRS-related changes to the existing prudential framework until it has completed relevant consultations and not before July 1, 2005 at the earliest.  Existing prudential rules continue to apply in the interim.  Developments are being closely monitored by the Group.

 

113



3 Segment information

 

The following segment information is disclosed in accordance with Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1005 “Segment Reporting” and US accounting standard, SFAS 131 “Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information”. For the purposes of this note, a business/primary operating segment is defined as a component of an enterprise about which separate financial information is available that is evaluated regularly by the chief operating decision maker, or decision making group, in assessing performance. The Group results are based on the business segments as reviewed separately by the chief operating decision maker, the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, as well as other members of senior management.

 

The Group’s business is organised into five major operating segments: Financial Services Australia, Financial Services Europe, Financial Services New Zealand, Corporate & Institutional Banking and Wealth Management. Financial Services Australia, Europe and New Zealand are the retailing arms of the Group and provide a full range of financial services to customers. These Financial Services businesses are managed on a regional basis across Australia, Europe and New Zealand. Corporate & Institutional Banking is responsible for the Group’s relationships with large corporations, institutions, supranationals and government bodies worldwide. It comprises Corporate Banking, Financial Institutions, Markets, Specialised Finance, National Custodian Services and a Services unit. Wealth Management manages a diverse portfolio of financial services businesses, comprising Investments, Insurance and Other (Private Bank and Advice Solutions). The Group’s ‘Other’ business segment includes Finance, Technology, People & Culture, Risk Management, Corporate Development, and Office of the CEO, which are not considered to be separate reportable operating segments.

 

Revenues and expenses directly associated with each business segment are included in determining their result. Transactions between business segments are based on agreed recharges between segments operating within the same country and are at arm’s length between segments operating in different countries.

 

A change to business segments has been made in the 2004 year as a result of certain European corporate customers previously managed as part of Financial Services Europe being transferred to Corporate & Institutional Banking. The 2003 and 2002 business segment results, assets and liabilities have been restated to reflect this change.

 

In August 2004, the Group announced a number of changes to the structure of its business operating model. The new business operating model will be managed along regional lines and will be made effective during the 2005 year. It is impracticable at the date of this report to restate the 2004 and prior years to this new basis of segmentation. In the next reporting period, once the basis of segmentation is finalised, the Group will restate its comparatives (where practicable). For further information on the new business operating model, refer to the ‘business overview’ section of the annual financial report.

 

Business segments

 

Year ended
September 30, 2004

 

Financial
Services
Australia

 

Financial
Services
Europe

 

Financial
Services
New Zealand

 

Corporate &
Institutional
Banking

 

Wealth
Management

 

Other

 

Inter-segment
eliminations

 

Total
Group

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Net interest income (1)

 

3,552

 

2,133

 

700

 

678

 

132

 

(4

)

 

7,191

 

Non-interest income

 

1,893

 

700

 

313

 

1,056

 

6,538

 

41

 

 

10,541

 

Significant revenue (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

993

 

 

993

 

Inter-segment revenue

 

100

 

137

 

13

 

(8

)

7

 

132

 

(381

)

 

Total revenue after interest expense (3)

 

5,545

 

2,970

 

1,026

 

1,726

 

6,677

 

1,162

 

(381

)

18,725

 

Significant expenses (4)

 

(169

)

(118

)

(34

)

(422

)

(78

)

(854

)

 

(1,675

)

Other expenses

 

(2,871

)

(2,105

)

(505

)

(799

)

(5,554

)

(475

)

 

(12,309

)

Inter-segment expenses

 

4

 

(71

)

(29

)

(171

)

(180

)

66

 

381

 

 

Total expenses excluding interest expense

 

(3,036

)

(2,294

)

(568

)

(1,392

)

(5,812

)

(1,263

)

381

 

(13,984

)

Profit/(loss) from ordinary activities before tax

 

2,509

 

676

 

458

 

334

 

865

 

(101

)

 

4,741

 

Income tax (expense)/benefit (5)

 

(760

)

(223

)

(153

)

(3

)

(130

)

79

 

 

(1,190

)

Net profit/(loss)

 

1,749

 

453

 

305

 

331

 

735

 

(22

)

 

3,551

 

Net profit attributable to outside equity interest

 

 

 

 

(9

)

(365

)

 

 

(374

)

Net profit/(loss) attributable to members of the Company

 

1,749

 

453

 

305

 

322

 

370

 

(22

)

 

3,177

 

Total assets (6)

 

157,616

 

62,173

 

30,448

 

168,297

 

54,421

 

(2,090

)

(59,556

)

411,309

 

Total liabilities (6)

 

159,273

 

56,739

 

29,032

 

163,070

 

40,426

 

(7,441

)

(59,556

)

381,543

 

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

 

327

 

216

 

62

 

16

 

39

 

 

 

660

 

Depreciation and amortisation of plant and equipment

 

189

 

106

 

30

 

40

 

39

 

37

 

 

441

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

8

 

62

 

1

 

 

 

32

 

 

103

 

Non-cash expenses other than depreciation and amortisation

 

498

 

416

 

69

 

259

 

167

 

265

 

 

1,674

 

 

114



 

Year ended
September 30, 2003

 

Financial
Services
Australia

 

Financial
Services
Europe

 

Financial
Services
New Zealand

 

Corporate &
Institutional
Banking

 

Wealth
Management

 

Other

 

Inter-segment
eliminations

 

Total
Group

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Net interest income (1)

 

3,519

 

2,327

 

651

 

848

 

117

 

(43

)

 

7,419

 

Non-interest income

 

1,900

 

809

 

316

 

1,105

 

4,269

 

159

 

 

8,558

 

Inter-segment revenue

 

50

 

129

 

13

 

(3

)

12

 

66

 

(267

)

 

Total revenue after interest expense (3)

 

5,469

 

3,265

 

980

 

1,950

 

4,398

 

182

 

(267

)

15,977

 

Other expenses

 

(2,798

)

(1,995

)

(494

)

(700

)

(3,931

)

(431

)

 

(10,349

)

Inter-segment expenses

 

(5

)

(33

)

(21

)

(125

)

(140

)

57

 

267

 

 

Total expenses excluding interest expense

 

(2,803

)

(2,028

)

(515

)

(825

)

(4,071

)

(374

)

267

 

(10,349

)

Profit/(loss) from ordinary activities before tax

 

2,666

 

1,237

 

465

 

1,125

 

327

 

(192

)

 

5,628

 

Income tax (expense)/benefit

 

(798

)

(402

)

(155

)

(239

)

(169

)

82

 

 

(1,681

)

Net profit/(loss)

 

1,868

 

835

 

310

 

886

 

158

 

(110

)

 

3,947

 

Net (profit)/loss attributable to outside equity interest

 

 

 

 

(9

)

16

 

1

 

 

8

 

Net profit/(loss) attributable to members of the Company

 

1,868

 

835

 

310

 

877

 

174

 

(109

)

 

3,955

 

Total assets (6) (7)

 

143,203

 

56,531

 

25,532

 

163,395

 

49,971

 

7,157

 

(48,318

)

397,471

 

Total liabilities (6) (7)

 

146,316

 

50,635

 

28,111

 

150,334

 

38,551

 

4,631

 

(48,318

)

370,260

 

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

 

382

 

120

 

58

 

8

 

29

 

 

 

597

 

Depreciation and amortisation of plant and equipment

 

156

 

111

 

32

 

39

 

26

 

37

 

 

401

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

3

 

62

 

1

 

 

 

32

 

 

98

 

Non-cash expenses other than depreciation and amortisation

 

422

 

312

 

34

 

155

 

102

 

32

 

 

1,057

 

 

Year ended
September 30, 2002

 

Financial
Services
Australia

 

Financial
Services
Europe

 

Financial
Services
New Zealand

 

Corporate &
Institutional
Banking

 

Wealth
Management

 

Other (8)

 

Inter-segment
eliminations

 

Total
Group

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Net interest income (1)

 

3,307

 

2,402

 

549

 

1,088

 

101

 

(225

)

 

7,222

 

Non-interest income (9)

 

1,726

 

860

 

281

 

910

 

792

 

2,806

 

 

7,375

 

Significant revenue (10)

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,671

 

 

2,671

 

Inter-segment revenue

 

54

 

153

 

2

 

(8

)

(2

)

55

 

(254

)

 

Total revenue after interest expense (3)

 

5,087

 

3,415

 

832

 

1,990

 

891

 

5,307

 

(254

)

17,268

 

Significant expenses (11)

 

(261

)

(166

)

(20

)

(42

)

(29

)

(2,748

)

 

(3,266

)

Other expenses (12)

 

(2,633

)

(2,084

)

(426

)

(780

)

(779

)

(2,959

)

 

(9,661

)

Inter-segment expenses

 

37

 

(31

)

(15

)

(154

)

(189

)

98

 

254

 

 

Total expenses excluding interest expense

 

(2,857

)

(2,281

)

(461

)

(976

)

(997

)

(5,609

)

254

 

(12,927

)

Profit/(loss) from ordinary activities before tax

 

2,230

 

1,134

 

371

 

1,014

 

(106

)

(302

)

 

4,341

 

Income tax (expense)/benefit (13)

 

(658

)

(377

)

(129

)

(197

)

232

 

167

 

 

(962

)

Net profit/(loss)

 

1,572

 

757

 

242

 

817

 

126

 

(135

)

 

3,379

 

Net profit attributable to outside equity interest

 

 

 

 

 

(6

)

 

 

(6

)

Net profit/(loss) attributable to members of the Company

 

1,572

 

757

 

242

 

817

 

120

 

(135

)

 

3,373

 

Total assets (7)

 

123,362

 

64,999

 

22,689

 

155,285

 

46,449

 

3,564

 

(38,961

)

377,387

 

Total liabilities (7)

 

123,854

 

57,766

 

22,782

 

148,505

 

37,406

 

2,784

 

(38,961

)

354,136

 

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

 

390

 

170

 

56

 

14

 

73

 

88

 

 

791

 

Depreciation and amortisation of plant and equipment

 

196

 

128

 

34

 

14

 

28

 

19

 

 

419

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

 

62

 

2

 

 

 

37

 

 

101

 

Non-cash expenses other than depreciation and amortisation

 

509

 

557

 

23

 

289

 

110

 

52

 

 

1,540

 

 

115



 


(1)          Net interest income includes interest on capital employed by business segments.

 

(2)          Significant revenue represents the proceeds from the sale of strategic shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC of $993 million (refer to note 5(a)).

 

(3)          Total revenue has been disclosed net of interest expense. It is impracticable to disclose gross interest revenue on a business segment basis due to the Group’s business segmental management reporting system’s usage of net interest income as an operating measure rather than gross interest income and gross interest expense.

 

(4)          Significant expenses comprises the cost of sale of strategic shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC of $678 million, losses arising from unauthorised foreign currency options trading of $360 million, write-back of a provision for SR Investment, Inc. (the parent entity of HomeSide US) in respect of selling-related costs of $64 million, the write-down of impaired application software of $409 million, and the charge to provide for doubtful debts relating to a revision of an accounting estimate of $292 million (refer to note 5(a)).

 

(5)          Income tax (expense)/benefit includes an income tax benefit of $108 million attributable to the losses arising from the unauthorised foreign currency options trading within the Corporate & Institutional Banking business segment, an income tax benefit of $102 million attributable to the write-down of impaired application software, and an income tax benefit of $88 million on the charge to provide for doubtful debts relating to a revision of an accounting estimate.

 

(6)          For Corporate & Institutional Banking, this amount includes approximately $30 billion (2003: $20 billion) of funding raised on behalf of Asset & Liability Management functions in Europe and New Zealand due to the nature of the funding model in those regions and related legal entity structure.

 

(7)          For 2002 and 2003, certain internal assets and liabilities relating to the funding of the Group’s activities which were eliminated at the Group level, have now been reclassified to eliminate within Corporate & Institutional Banking.

 

(8)          Includes the results of SR Investment, Inc. and its controlled entity, HomeSide US, up to the date of their sale on October 1, 2002 (refer note 5(a)).

 

(9)          Non-interest income includes proceeds from sale of operating assets of HomeSide US of $2,314 million within the Other business segment (refer to note 4, footnote (5)).

 

(10)        Significant revenue represents the proceeds from sale of SR Investment, Inc. (refer to note 5(a)).

 

(11)        Significant expenses includes the cost of assets sold of SR Investment, Inc. of $2,686 million within the Other business segment (refer to note 5(a)).

 

(12)        Other expenses includes the carrying value of operating assets sold of HomeSide US of $2,322 million within the Other business segment (refer to note 4, footnote (5)).

 

(13)        Income tax (expense)/benefit includes an income tax benefit of $21 million attributable to the loss on sale of SR Investment, Inc. within the Other business segment.

 

Geographical segments

 

The Group has operations in Australia (the Company’s country of domicile), Europe, New Zealand, the US and Asia. The allocation of revenue and assets is based on the geographical location in which transactions are booked. There are no material inter-segment transactions.

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2004

 

2003

 

2003

 

2002

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

%

 

$m

 

%

 

$m

 

%

 

Total revenue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

19,980

 

66.3

 

15,827

 

61.9

 

11,384

 

43.0

 

Australia – significant revenue

 

993

 

3.3

 

 

 

2,671

 

10.1

 

Europe

 

5,741

 

19.0

 

6,239

 

24.3

 

6,422

 

24.3

 

New Zealand

 

2,632

 

8.7

 

2,608

 

10.2

 

2,194

 

8.3

 

US

 

251

 

0.8

 

274

 

1.1

 

3,351

 

12.6

 

Asia

 

587

 

1.9

 

632

 

2.5

 

458

 

1.7

 

Total revenue

 

30,184

 

100.0

 

25,580

 

100.0

 

26,480

 

100.0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total assets (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

256,470

 

62.5

 

243,726

 

61.3

 

213,428

 

56.6

 

Europe

 

104,148

 

25.3

 

103,904

 

26.1

 

107,169

 

28.4

 

New Zealand

 

36,805

 

8.9

 

32,565

 

8.2

 

30,319

 

8.0

 

US

 

6,768

 

1.6

 

8,257

 

2.1

 

17,339

 

4.6

 

Asia

 

7,118

 

1.7

 

9,019

 

2.3

 

9,132

 

2.4

 

Total assets

 

411,309

 

100.0

 

397,471

 

100.0

 

377,387

 

100.0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

348

 

52.7

 

383

 

64.1

 

416

 

52.6

 

Europe

 

238

 

36.1

 

150

 

25.1

 

221

 

27.9

 

New Zealand

 

63

 

9.5

 

60

 

10.1

 

59

 

7.5

 

US

 

8

 

1.2

 

 

 

90

 

11.4

 

Asia

 

3

 

0.5

 

4

 

0.7

 

5

 

0.6

 

Total acquisition of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

 

660

 

100.0

 

597

 

100.0

 

791

 

100.0

 

 


(1)                               Includes statutory funds’ assets of $41,917 million at September 30, 2004 (2003: $37,058 million, 2002: $32,743 million).

 

116



 

4 Revenue from ordinary activities

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

Note

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Interest income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loans to customers (1)

 

 

 

15,879

 

14,425

 

13,457

 

10,158

 

8,706

 

Marketable debt securities

 

 

 

1,678

 

1,451

 

1,462

 

1,328

 

1,094

 

Other financial institutions

 

 

 

798

 

1,093

 

920

 

721

 

965

 

Controlled entities

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,233

 

1,197

 

Other interest

 

 

 

295

 

53

 

595

 

267

 

(61

)

 

 

 

 

18,650

 

17,022

 

16,434

 

13,707

 

11,901

 

Life insurance income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Premium and related revenue

 

54

 

1,005

 

949

 

1,134

 

 

 

Investment revenue

 

54

 

4,842

 

2,759

 

(988

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

5,847

 

3,708

 

146

 

 

 

Other banking and financial services income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Dividends received from

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Controlled entities

 

 

 

 

 

 

952

 

3,495

 

Other entities

 

 

 

23

 

39

 

35

 

22

 

39

 

Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment and other assets (2)

 

 

 

14

 

36

 

13

 

6

 

5

 

Loan fees from banking

 

 

 

1,447

 

1,441

 

1,361

 

1,141

 

1,133

 

Money transfer fees

 

 

 

983

 

1,026

 

1,014

 

503

 

475

 

Trading income (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Foreign exchange derivatives (4)

 

 

 

313

 

442

 

457

 

178

 

308

 

Trading securities

 

 

 

168

 

170

 

214

 

117

 

154

 

Interest rate derivatives

 

 

 

94

 

13

 

(108

)

85

 

(5

)

Foreign exchange income

 

 

 

(2

)

12

 

15

 

 

1

 

Fees and commissions

 

 

 

1,221

 

1,158

 

1,118

 

461

 

479

 

Fleet management fees

 

 

 

108

 

85

 

56

 

 

 

Proceeds from sale of operating assets (5)

 

 

 

 

 

2,314

 

 

 

Investment management fees

 

 

 

321

 

303

 

297

 

 

 

Other income

 

 

 

141

 

285

 

220

 

25

 

146

 

 

 

 

 

4,831

 

5,010

 

7,006

 

3,490

 

6,230

 

Mortgage servicing and origination revenue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net mortgage servicing fees

 

 

 

 

 

187

 

 

 

Net mortgage origination revenue

 

 

 

 

 

191

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

378

 

 

 

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

 

 

(137

)

(160

)

(155

)

 

 

Significant revenue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Proceeds from the sale of strategic shareholdings

 

5(a)

 

993

 

 

 

993

 

 

Proceeds from the sale of foreign controlled entities

 

5(a)

 

 

 

2,671

 

 

 

Total revenue from ordinary activities

 

 

 

30,184

 

25,580

 

26,480

 

18,190

 

18,131

 

 


(1)          Included within interest income (loans to customers) is rental income of $543 million (2003: $551 million, 2002: $423 million) and depreciation of $403 million (2003: $403 million, 2002: $299 million) in relation to operating leases where the Group is the lessor.

 

(2)          For the Group, net profit on sale of property, plant and equipment and other assets of $8 million (2003: $25 million, 2002: $7 million) is the difference between the proceeds from sale of $157 million (2003: $166 million, 2002: $418 million) and their carrying value of $149 million (2003: $141 million, 2002: $411 million). Net profit on sale consists of gross profits of $14 million (2003: $36 million, 2002: $13 million) and gross losses of $6 million (2003: $11 million, 2002: $6 million) as disclosed in note 5(b). For the Company, net profit on sale of property, plant and equipment and other assets of $3 million (2003: $4 million) is the difference between the proceeds from sale of $53 million (2003: $108 million) and their carrying value of $50 million (2003: $104 million). Net profit on sale consists of gross profits of $6 million (2003: $5 million) and gross losses of $3 million (2003: $1 million) as disclosed in note 5(b).

 

(3)          Under Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1032 “Specific Disclosures by Financial Institutions”, separate disclosure of trading income arising from foreign exchange derivatives, trading securities and interest rate derivatives is required. As the Group manages its trading positions utilising a variety of instruments, fluctuations between the disclosed components may occur. Foreign exchange derivatives income includes trading income from cross currency swaps, which includes an interest rate element.

 

(4)          Foreign currency options trading losses, reported as significant expenses due to their nature and incidence, are not included. Refer to note 5(a).

 

(5)          The operating assets of HomeSide US were sold to Washington Mutual Bank, FA on March 1, 2002. Under the terms of the sale, HomeSide US received proceeds of $2,314 million for the operating assets, which consisted primarily of loans held for sale. The carrying value of the assets sold was $2,322 million.

 

117



 

5 Profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

(a) Individually significant items included in profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

Sale of strategic shareholdings

 

On January 28, 2004, the Company sold its strategic shareholdings in St George Bank Limited, AMP Limited and HHG PLC. The Group received proceeds on sale of $993 million for assets with a carrying value of $678 million, resulting in a profit on sale of $315 million (after tax).

 

Foreign currency options trading losses

 

In January 2004, the Company announced that it had identified losses relating to unauthorised trading in foreign currency options and had established a structured process to review and resolve all issues arising from this matter.

 

The Company announced a total loss of $360 million before tax, or $252 million after tax, arising from the unauthorised foreign currency options trading. This total loss consisted of losses arising from the removal of fictitious trades from the foreign currency options portfolio of $185 million and a further loss of $175 million arising from a risk evaluation and complete mark-to-market revaluation of the foreign currency options portfolio in January 2004. Included within the total loss of $360 million was a valuation allowance for long-dated and illiquid trading derivatives in other portfolios of $26 million as at September 30, 2004.

 

During the year, the Company also released reports by PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC) and APRA into this matter. The PwC and APRA reports provide a roadmap for the Company to address issues concerning culture, risk management, governance and operational controls, primarily related to the Markets division of Corporate & Institutional Banking. The Company is in the process of implementing remedial actions required by APRA. On October 20, 2004, the Group announced that it had provided the Australian Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC) with a range of undertakings to review certain key systems and controls across those businesses which operate under the primary Australian Financial Services Licence applicable to the Company’s Australian banking business. The enforceable undertakings require the Group to carry out work that is in line with current regulatory requirements within a specific timeframe, as agreed with ASIC and to provide reports on each of the areas identified.

 

Refer to the ‘report on the directors and officers’ for further information on the foreign currency options trading losses, including key findings arising from the PwC and APRA investigations, and the remedial actions implemented by the Company.

 

Write-down of impaired application software

 

During the year, the Group undertook a detailed review of the carrying value of its software assets which resulted in a charge to the profit and loss account of $409 million ($307 million after tax).

 

The Group ceased its global enterprise resource planning strategy supported by its Integrated Systems Implementation application software and has indefinitely deferred the implementation of further modules of this software. The software was written down by $200 million to its recoverable amount of $87 million as at September 30, 2004.

 

The recoverable amount of the software was determined through the application of a valuation methodology performed by an external party. In performing the assessment, the external party used a number of assumptions based on its industry expertise taking into account the complexity of the software, the cost of building such software and the build environment. The resulting carrying value of the asset represents the recoverable amount of the software that is in use.

 

Other software assets that were no longer expected to provide future economic benefits with a carrying value of $209 million were identified as fully impaired and were written off.

 

General provision for doubtful debts – revision of accounting estimate

 

During the year, the Group reviewed the level of the general provision for doubtful debts and the application of the associated statistically-based provisioning methodology, taking into account recent experience, industry practice and emerging developments. As a result, the discount rate in the statistical model was reduced from the shareholder cost of capital to a rate akin to a risk-free debt rate, resulting in a revision to the accounting estimate of general provision for doubtful debts as at September 30, 2004. This discount rate is used to determine the present value of cumulative probability of default rates used for the purpose of loan provisioning.

 

The impact of this reduction in discount rate and flow on impact was an increase in the charge to provide for doubtful debts of $292 million ($204 million after tax).

 

SR Investment, Inc. – sale of foreign controlled entity and revision of accounting estimate

 

On October 1, 2002, the Group sold SR Investment, Inc. (the parent entity of HomeSide US) to Washington Mutual Bank, FA. Controlled entities other than HomeSide US were excluded from the sale. The Group received proceeds on sale of $2,671 million for assets with a cost of $2,686 million, resulting in a profit on sale of $6 million after all disposal costs, including income tax. Included within the sale result was a charge to provide for certain sale-related costs of $70 million. During 2004, $64 million of this provision was written back as a revision to the accounting estimate.

 

118



 

The results of SR Investment, Inc. and its controlled entities were included in the Group’s financial performance up to and including the year ended September 30, 2002. The assets and liabilities of SR Investment, Inc. and its controlled entities were included in the Group’s financial position up to and including the year ended September 30, 2002. SR Investment, Inc. contributed $98 million net profit to the Group in the 2002 year up to the date of sale. The net asset position at the date of sale was $2,267 million. The net cash outflow of SR Investment, Inc. in the 2002 year to the date of sale was $609 million, which is reflected in the Group’s cash flows.

 

Restructuring costs

 

During 2002, the Group recognised restructuring costs of $580 million resulting from the Positioning for Growth and other restructuring initiatives. The Positioning for Growth initiative comprised a fundamental reorganisation of the management and organisational structure of the Group at the time. The $580 million was comprised of termination benefits of $327 million, occupancy costs of $68 million, write-off of property, plant and equipment of $132 million (which included write-off of then redundant components of the Integrated Systems Implementation application software assets of $54 million) and other costs of $53 million.

 

Personnel costs of $327 million provided for and expensed in 2002 related to termination benefits for approximately 2,955 positions in management, support and customer-facing roles. In 2004, payments of $37 million (2003: $147 million, 2002: $101 million) were made in respect of 417 positions (2003: 1,317 positions, 2002: 859 positions) made redundant. The reduction in staff numbers occurred in both managerial and non-managerial positions in the following regions:

 

 

 

Australia

 

Europe

 

New
Zealand

 

United
States

 

Asia

 

Total

 

Original number of positions to be made redundant

 

1,852

 

910

 

121

 

36

 

36

 

2,955

 

Number of positions made redundant during 2002

 

(707

)

(56

)

(51

)

(18

)

(27

)

(859

)

Number of positions made redundant during 2003

 

(880

)

(360

)

(59

)

(11

)

(7

)

(1,317

)

Number of positions made redundant during 2004

 

(231

)

(174

)

(11

)

(1

)

 

(417

)

Adjustments to the number of positions to be made redundant in 2004

 

 

(44

)

 

 

(2

)

(46

)

Number of positions to be made redundant as at September 30, 2004

 

34

 

276

 

 

6

 

 

316

 

 

The remaining provision for restructuring costs raised in 2002 relates to future payments for redundancies, occupancy and other costs. Final payments for redundancies and other costs will be made in the first half of the 2005 year, whilst future payments for occupancy costs will be made in periods corresponding with the relevant lease terms.

 

(b) Expenses included in profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Interest expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

8,672

 

6,809

 

6,423

 

6,567

 

4,859

 

Other financial institutions

 

1,587

 

1,842

 

1,546

 

1,471

 

1,685

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

1,077

 

807

 

1,072

 

1,008

 

734

 

Controlled entities

 

 

 

 

550

 

562

 

Other debt issues

 

123

 

145

 

171

 

9

 

10

 

Total interest expense

 

11,459

 

9,603

 

9,212

 

9,605

 

7,850

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Life insurance expenses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Claims expense

 

702

 

958

 

956

 

 

 

Change in policy liabilities

 

3,368

 

1,518

 

(1,637

)

 

 

Policy acquisition and maintenance expense

 

723

 

713

 

751

 

 

 

Investment management fees

 

42

 

75

 

86

 

 

 

Total life insurance expenses

 

4,835

 

3,264

 

156

 

 

 

 

119



 

Personnel expenses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Salaries

 

2,443

 

2,379

 

2,438

 

1,441

 

1,352

 

Related personnel expenses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Superannuation

 

309

 

243

 

130

 

86

 

111

 

Payroll tax

 

175

 

170

 

158

 

96

 

95

 

Fringe benefits tax

 

23

 

33

 

46

 

20

 

29

 

Charge to provide for

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Annual leave

 

52

 

41

 

27

 

30

 

18

 

Long service leave and retiring allowances

 

43

 

46

 

43

 

38

 

42

 

Performance-based compensation

 

197

 

230

 

221

 

108

 

131

 

Restructuring costs – termination benefits

 

12

 

 

4

 

 

 

Other expenses

 

362

 

274

 

312

 

157

 

129

 

 

 

3,616

 

3,416

 

3,379

 

1,976

 

1,907

 

Significant restructuring costs (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Termination benefits

 

 

 

104

 

 

 

Charge to provide for termination benefits

 

 

 

223

 

 

 

Total personnel expenses

 

3,616

 

3,416

 

3,706

 

1,976

 

1,907

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Occupancy expenses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Depreciation of buildings

 

14

 

15

 

22

 

2

 

2

 

Amortisation of leasehold assets

 

55

 

52

 

57

 

39

 

38

 

Operating lease rental expense

 

302

 

276

 

269

 

177

 

171

 

Maintenance and repairs

 

84

 

78

 

79

 

23

 

22

 

Electricity, water and rates

 

80

 

82

 

88

 

27

 

24

 

Other expenses

 

56

 

53

 

44

 

29

 

23

 

 

 

591

 

556

 

559

 

297

 

280

 

Significant restructuring costs (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Charge to provide for surplus leased space

 

 

 

68

 

 

 

Total occupancy expenses

 

591

 

556

 

627

 

297

 

280

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

General expenses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Depreciation and amortisation of plant and equipment

 

364

 

325

 

332

 

205

 

182

 

Amortisation of leasehold plant and equipment

 

8

 

9

 

8

 

3

 

3

 

Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment and other assets (2)

 

6

 

11

 

6

 

3

 

1

 

Operating lease rental expense

 

72

 

61

 

53

 

59

 

46

 

Charge to provide for

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Non-lending losses

 

106

 

100

 

112

 

28

 

34

 

Diminution in value of shares in entities

 

4

 

 

13

 

27

 

1

 

Fees and commissions

 

176

 

137

 

172

 

101

 

81

 

Communications, postage and stationery

 

416

 

407

 

473

 

173

 

165

 

Computer equipment and software

 

271

 

289

 

222

 

172

 

178

 

Advertising

 

225

 

176

 

192

 

152

 

110

 

Professional fees

 

391

 

349

 

272

 

249

 

188

 

Travel

 

85

 

83

 

50

 

38

 

40

 

Bureau charges

 

54

 

57

 

68

 

22

 

21

 

Carrying value of operating assets sold (3)

 

 

 

2,322

 

 

 

Motor vehicle expenses

 

41

 

37

 

29

 

9

 

9

 

Insurance

 

42

 

29

 

14

 

13

 

9

 

Other expenses

 

344

 

312

 

431

 

145

 

4

 

 

 

2,605

 

2,382

 

4,769

 

1,399

 

1,072

 

Significant general and restructuring costs (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Write-down of impaired application software

 

409

 

 

 

239

 

 

Write-off of property, plant and equipment (4)

 

 

 

132

 

 

 

Other

 

 

 

53

 

 

 

Total general expenses

 

3,014

 

2,382

 

4,954

 

1,638

 

1,072

 

 

120



 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

1

 

3

 

8

 

 

 

European banks

 

62

 

62

 

62

 

 

 

New Zealand

 

40

 

33

 

31

 

 

 

Total amortisation of goodwill

 

103

 

98

 

101

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Charge to provide for doubtful debts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

General (5)

 

559

 

633

 

697

 

325

 

373

 

General – revision of accounting estimate
(1) (5)

 

292

 

 

 

190

 

 

Total charge to provide for doubtful debts (5)

 

851

 

633

 

697

 

515

 

373

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other significant expenses (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cost of sale of strategic shareholdings

 

678

 

 

 

678

 

 

Foreign currency options trading losses

 

360

 

 

 

360

 

 

Cost of foreign controlled entity sold – revision of accounting estimate

 

(64

)

 

 

(64

)

 

Cost of foreign controlled entity sold

 

 

 

2,686

 

 

 

 


(1)          Refer to note 5(a).

 

(2)          Refer to note 4, footnote(2).

 

(3)          The operating assets of HomeSide US were sold to Washington Mutual Bank, FA on March 1, 2002. Under the terms of the sale, HomeSide US received proceeds of $2,314 million for the operating assets, which consisted primarily of loans held for resale. The carrying value of the assets sold was $2,322 million.

 

(4)          Includes write-off of redundant components of the Integrated Systems Implementation application software assets of $54 million during 2002 (refer to note 5(a)).

 

(5)          Refer to note 17.

 

6 Income tax expense

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Reconciliation of income tax expense shown in the statement of financial performance with prima facie tax payable on the pre-tax accounting profit

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

3,269

 

3,309

 

2,288

 

3,116

 

6,422

 

Overseas

 

1,472

 

2,319

 

2,053

 

69

 

227

 

Add/(deduct): (Profit)/loss from ordinary activities before income tax expense attributable to the life insurance statutory funds and their controlled trusts (1)

 

(995

)

(424

)

21

 

 

 

Total profit from ordinary activities excluding that attributable to the statutory funds of the life insurance business, before income tax expense

 

3,746

 

5,204

 

4,362

 

3,185

 

6,649

 

Prima facie income tax at 30%

 

1,124

 

1,561

 

1,309

 

956

 

1,995

 

Add/(deduct): Tax effect of permanent differences

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rebate of tax on dividends, interest, etc.

 

(43

)

(28

)

44

 

(291

)

(1,066

)

Amortisation of goodwill

 

31

 

29

 

29

 

 

 

Assessable foreign income

 

26

 

26

 

25

 

23

 

23

 

Under/(over) provision in prior years

 

(9

)

(6

)

6

 

26

 

(3

)

Profit on sale of strategic shareholdings

 

(95

)

 

 

(45

)

 

Reimbursement to subsidiaries for capital losses transferred

 

 

 

 

38

 

 

Cost of foreign controlled entity sold – revision of accounting estimate

 

(19

)

 

 

(19

)

 

Write-down of impaired application software

 

22

 

 

 

14

 

 

Effect of reset tax values on entering tax consolidation regime

 

(150

)

 

 

 

 

Interest expense on exchangeable capital units

 

33

 

 

 

33

 

 

Non-taxable amounts attributable to HomeSide US operation

 

 

 

(53

)

 

 

Recognition of HomeSide US operation future income tax benefit not previously recognised

 

 

 

(89

)

 

 

Other

 

(31

)

(27

)

(61

)

33

 

(20

)

Total income tax expense on profit from ordinary activities excluding that attributable to the statutory funds of the life insurance business (2) (3)

 

889

 

1,555

 

1,210

 

768

 

929

 

Income tax expense/(benefit) attributable to the statutory funds of the life insurance business (1)

 

301

 

126

 

(248

)

 

 

Total income tax expense (2) (3)

 

1,190

 

1,681

 

962

 

768

 

929

 

 

121



 


(1)          The income tax expense attributable to the life insurance statutory funds and their controlled trusts has been determined after segregating the life insurance business into various classes of business and then applying, when appropriate, different tax treatments to these classes of business (refer to note 1(nn)).

 

(2)          In 2004, total income tax expense on profit from ordinary activities includes $108 million income tax benefit attributable to the losses arising from the unauthorised foreign currency options trading, an income tax benefit of $102 million attributable to the write-down of impaired application software, and an income tax benefit of $88 million on the charge to provide for doubtful debts relating to a revision of an accounting estimate (refer to note 5(a)).

 

(3)          In 2002, total income tax expense on profit from ordinary activities includes $21 million income tax benefit attributable to the loss on sale of SR Investment, Inc. (refer to note 5(a)).

 

During the year ended September 30, 2004, the Company made the decision to elect to consolidate its Australian wholly-owned controlled entities under the Australian tax consolidation regime. The Company is the head entity in the tax-consolidated group comprising the Company and all of its Australian wholly-owned controlled entities. The implementation date for the tax-consolidated group was October 1, 2002.

 

Tax consolidation calculations at September 30, 2004 have been based on legislation enacted to that date.

 

As part of the election to enter tax consolidations, the Company is able to elect to reset the tax values of certain wholly-owned Australian controlled entities under tax allocation rules (‘the reset tax values’). Under Urgent Issues Group Abstract 52 “Income Tax Accounting under the Tax Consolidation System”, the Company is required to recognise the effects of its election to enter tax consolidation. The decision to enter tax consolidation resulted in a tax benefit of $150 million, recognised in the 2004 year. The $150 million tax benefit is due to the reset tax values of assets of life insurance controlled entities within the Wealth Management group. This benefit reflects the reduction of the provision for deferred income tax relating to the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities.

 

7 Dividends and distributions

 

 

 

Amount
per
share

 

Total
amount

 

Franked
amount
per
share

 

 

 

cents

 

$m

 

%

 

Dividends recognised by the Company for the years shown below at September, 30:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2004

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Final 2003 ordinary (1)

 

83

 

1,250

 

100

 

Interim 2004 ordinary

 

83

 

1,253

 

100

 

Deduct: Bonus shares in lieu of dividend

 

n/a

 

(98

)

n/a

 

Total dividends paid

 

 

 

2,405

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2003

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Final 2002 ordinary (1)

 

75

 

1,207

 

90

 

Interim 2003 ordinary

 

80

 

1,153

 

100

 

Deduct: Bonus shares in lieu of dividend

 

n/a

 

(105

)

n/a

 

Total dividends paid

 

 

 

2,255

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2002

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interim 2002 ordinary

 

72

 

1,160

 

100

 

Final 2002 ordinary (1)

 

75

 

1,195

 

90

 

Deduct: Bonus shares in lieu of dividend

 

n/a

 

(89

)

n/a

 

Total dividends paid or provided for

 

 

 

2,266

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Franked dividends declared or paid during the year were franked at a tax rate of 30%.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Proposed final dividend

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

On November 10, 2004, the directors declared the following dividend:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Final 2004 ordinary

 

83

 

1,287

 

100

 

 


(1)          The Group adopted Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1044 “Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets” for the first time from October 1, 2002. Provisions for dividends are recognised at the time the dividends are declared, determined or publicly recommended and as a result, the final dividend in respect of the year ended September 30, 2003 has been recognised in 2004, the year the final dividend was paid. For the year ended September 30, 2002, the Group recognised a provision for dividend in the reporting period to which the dividend related, even though the dividend was declared or announced after the end of that reporting period. This provision was subsequently reversed on October 1, 2002 and recognised during 2003.

 

The final 2004 ordinary dividend was paid on December 8, 2004. The financial effect of this dividend has not been brought to account in the financial statements for the year ended September 30, 2004 and will be recognised in subsequent financial reports.

 

The dividend payout for each reported year was based on after tax cash earnings (adjusted for significant items). Refer to page 6 for a reconciliation of non-GAAP measures and page 69 for further information on ‘non-GAAP financial measures’.

 

122



 

Franking credits

 

The Company elected during the year ended September 30, 2004 to be taxed as a single entity under the tax consolidation regime in Australia (for further details, refer to note 1(nn)). The tax consolidation regime requires the tax-consolidated group (comprising the Company and all of its Australian wholly-owned controlled entities) to keep a single franking account. Accordingly, the amount of franking credits available to members of the Company at September 30, 2004 represents those available from the tax-consolidated group. This includes the benefit of imputation credits on dividends received by the Australian wholly-owned controlled entities. Previously, members of the Company only had access to franking credits available from the Company.

 

The franking credits available to the Group at September 30, 2004, after allowing for tax payable in respect of the current reporting period’s profits that will be subject to Australian income tax, the payment of the proposed final dividend, and the receipt of dividends recognised as receivable at balance date, are estimated to be $nil (2003: $nil, 2002: $nil). The extent to which future dividends will be franked will depend on a number of factors including the level of the Group’s profits that will be subject to Australian income tax and any future changes to Australia’s business tax system (including the dividend imputation system) as a result of the Australian Commonwealth Government’s tax reform initiatives.

 

New Zealand imputation credits

 

The Company is now able to attach available New Zealand imputation credits to dividends paid. As a result, New Zealand imputation credits of NZ$0.13 per share have been attached to the final 2004 ordinary dividend paid by the Company. New Zealand imputation credits are only relevant for shareholders who are required to file New Zealand income tax returns.

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Distributions on other equity instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trust units exchangeable for preference shares (1)

 

16

 

61

 

70

 

 

 

National Income Securities

 

132

 

122

 

117

 

132

 

122

 

Trust Preferred Securities (2)

 

39

 

 

 

 

 

Total distributions on other equity instruments

 

187

 

183

 

187

 

132

 

122

 

 


(1)          On January 22, 2004, the Company bought back 36,008,000 fully paid non-converting non-cumulative preference shares of the Company that were issued in connection with the issue of 18,004,000 Trust Units Exchangeable for Preference SharesTM (TrUEPrSSM) in 1998. The TrUEPrSSM were redeemed on the same date. Refer to note 33 for further information.

 

(1)          On September 29, 2003, the Trust Preferred Securities were issued.

 

8 Earnings per share

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

Basic

 

Diluted (1)

 

Basic

 

Diluted (1)

 

Basic

 

Diluted (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Earnings ($m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

3,177

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

3,373

 

Distributions on other equity instruments

 

(187

)

(187

)

(183

)

(183

)

(187

)

(187

)

Potential dilutive adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest expense on exchangeable capital units

 

 

112

 

 

90

 

 

102

 

Adjusted earnings

 

2,990

 

3,102

 

3,772

 

3,862

 

3,186

 

3,288

 

Weighted average ordinary shares
(No. ‘000)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Weighted average ordinary shares

 

1,515,270

 

1,515,270

 

1,515,871

 

1,515,871

 

1,549,136

 

1,549,136

 

Potential dilutive ordinary shares

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Options and performance rights

 

 

711

 

 

3,742

 

 

8,335

 

Partly paid ordinary shares

 

 

375

 

 

485

 

 

670

 

Exchangeable capital units

 

 

65,454

 

 

65,460

 

 

65,460

 

Total weighted average ordinary shares

 

1,515,270

 

1,581,810

 

1,515,871

 

1,585,558

 

1,549,136

 

1,623,601

 

Earnings per share (cents)

 

197.3

 

196.1

 

248.8

 

243.6

 

205.7

 

202.5

 

 


(1)                               The weighted average diluted number of ordinary shares includes the impact of options, performance rights, partly paid ordinary shares and potential conversion of exchangeable capital units.

 

There were 83,000 fully paid ordinary shares of the Company issued since the end of the year as a result of share options granted being exercised, for a total consideration of $1,767,070. Other than these issues, there has been no conversion to, calls of, or subscriptions for ordinary shares, or issues of potential ordinary shares from October 1, 2004 up to December 2, 2004.

 

For further information on earnings per share calculations, refer to the ‘financial review’ section of the annual financial report.

 

123



 

9 Cash and liquid assets

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Coins, notes and cash at bank

 

1,524

 

1,596

 

722

 

792

 

Money at short call

 

2

 

134

 

2

 

134

 

Securities purchased under agreements to resell (1)

 

1,417

 

805

 

1,417

 

805

 

Other (including bills receivable and remittances in transit)

 

1,021

 

2,386

 

(984

)

245

 

 

 

3,964

 

4,921

 

1,157

 

1,976

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Coins, notes and cash at bank

 

625

 

623

 

10

 

2

 

Money at short call

 

495

 

401

 

 

 

Securities purchased under agreements to resell (1)

 

3,167

 

2,568

 

3,114

 

2,568

 

Other (including bills receivable and remittances in transit)

 

(171

)

(108

)

(92

)

(394

)

 

 

4,116

 

3,484

 

3,032

 

2,176

 

Total cash and liquid assets

 

8,080

 

8,405

 

4,189

 

4,152

 

 


(1)          Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of reverse repurchase agreements from ‘loans and advances’ to ‘cash and liquid assets’ and ‘due from other financial institutions’. Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

Included within cash and liquid assets are cash and liquid assets within the Group’s life insurance business statutory funds of $687 million (2003: $745 million) which are subject to restrictions imposed under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth) and other restrictions and therefore are not available for use in operating, investing or financing activities of other parts of the Group (refer to note 1(o)).

 

10 Due from other financial institutions

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest-earning (1)

 

6,152

 

6,122

 

6,035

 

5,993

 

Non-interest-earning

 

16

 

64

 

14

 

51

 

 

 

6,168

 

6,186

 

6,049

 

6,044

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest-earning (1)

 

16,763

 

22,982

 

15,035

 

20,380

 

Non-interest-earning

 

563

 

66

 

531

 

51

 

 

 

17,326

 

23,048

 

15,566

 

20,431

 

Total due from other financial institutions

 

23,494

 

29,234

 

21,615

 

26,475

 

 


(1)          Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of reverse repurchase agreements from ‘loans and advances’ to ‘cash and liquid assets’ and ‘due from other financial institutions’. Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

11 Due from customers on acceptances

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Government and public authorities

 

9

 

4

 

9

 

4

 

Agriculture, forestry and fishing

 

1,892

 

2,047

 

1,892

 

2,047

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

3,182

 

4,006

 

3,182

 

4,006

 

Real estate – construction

 

699

 

844

 

699

 

844

 

Manufacturing

 

1,043

 

1,594

 

1,043

 

1,594

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

136

 

185

 

136

 

185

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

9,305

 

10,816

 

9,305

 

10,816

 

 

 

16,266

 

19,496

 

16,266

 

19,496

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

1

 

17

 

 

 

Real estate – construction

 

2

 

 

 

 

Manufacturing

 

45

 

1

 

 

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

30

 

48

 

 

 

 

 

78

 

66

 

 

 

Total due from customers on acceptances

 

16,344

 

19,562

 

16,266

 

19,496

 

 

 

124



 

12 Trading securities

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Listed – Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australian Commonwealth Government bonds and securities

 

367

 

1,317

 

367

 

1,317

 

Securities of Australian and semi-government authorities

 

2,013

 

2,435

 

2,013

 

2,435

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit

 

4,358

 

4,197

 

4,358

 

4,197

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bills

 

13,960

 

11,327

 

13,960

 

11,327

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

399

 

352

 

399

 

352

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

 

20

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

71

 

56

 

71

 

56

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ promissory notes

 

808

 

1,107

 

808

 

1,107

 

Other securities

 

263

 

320

 

263

 

320

 

 

 

22,239

 

21,131

 

22,239

 

21,111

 

Listed – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

981

 

1,266

 

981

 

1,266

 

Other government bonds and securities

 

240

 

242

 

240

 

242

 

 

 

1,221

 

1,508

 

1,221

 

1,508

 

Total listed trading securities

 

23,460

 

22,639

 

23,460

 

22,619

 

Unlisted – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by New Zealand Government

 

196

 

351

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit

 

271

 

290

 

132

 

170

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

31

 

96

 

 

 

Other government bonds and securities

 

1

 

22

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

45

 

120

 

45

 

120

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ medium-term notes

 

62

 

43

 

62

 

43

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ promissory notes

 

182

 

163

 

 

 

Total unlisted trading securities

 

788

 

1,085

 

239

 

333

 

Total trading securities

 

24,248

 

23,724

 

23,699

 

22,952

 

 

13 Available for sale securities

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Listed – Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

142

 

186

 

142

 

186

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

97

 

183

 

97

 

183

 

Other securities

 

23

 

1,078

 

23

 

1,078

 

 

 

262

 

1,447

 

262

 

1,447

 

Listed – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by UK/Irish governments

 

3

 

3

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

2,048

 

2,873

 

2,048

 

2,873

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

714

 

201

 

90

 

201

 

 

 

2,765

 

3,077

 

2,138

 

3,074

 

Total listed available for sale securities

 

3,027

 

4,524

 

2,400

 

4,521

 

Unlisted – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

187

 

208

 

187

 

208

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

275

 

662

 

275

 

662

 

Other government treasury notes

 

16

 

56

 

16

 

56

 

Other central banks bonds and securities

 

73

 

 

73

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

847

 

700

 

847

 

700

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ medium-term notes

 

180

 

356

 

180

 

356

 

Other securities

 

5

 

7

 

 

 

Total unlisted available for sale securities

 

1,583

 

1,989

 

1,578

 

1,982

 

Total available for sale securities

 

4,610

 

6,513

 

3,978

 

6,503

 

 

 

125



 

Market value information

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Listed – Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

142

 

187

 

142

 

187

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

97

 

184

 

97

 

184

 

Other securities

 

23

 

1,077

 

23

 

1,077

 

 

 

262

 

1,448

 

262

 

1,448

 

Listed – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by UK/Irish governments

 

3

 

3

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

2,048

 

2,873

 

2,048

 

2,873

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

714

 

201

 

90

 

201

 

 

 

2,765

 

3,077

 

2,138

 

3,074

 

Total listed available for sale securities at market value

 

3,027

 

4,525

 

2,400

 

4,522

 

Unlisted – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

187

 

208

 

187

 

208

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

275

 

662

 

275

 

662

 

Other government treasury notes

 

16

 

56

 

16

 

56

 

Other central banks bonds and securities

 

73

 

 

73

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

847

 

700

 

847

 

700

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ medium-term notes

 

180

 

356

 

180

 

356

 

Other securities

 

5

 

7

 

 

 

Total unlisted available for sale securities at market value

 

1,583

 

1,989

 

1,578

 

1,982

 

Total available for sale securities at market value

 

4,610

 

6,514

 

3,978

 

6,504

 

 

The following table reconciles gross unrealised profits and losses of the Group’s holdings of available for sale securities for each year below, as at September 30:

 

 

 

2004

 

 

 

2003

 

 

 

 

 

Amortised
cost

 

Gross
unrealised
profits

 

Gross
unrealised
losses

 

Market
value

 

Amortised
cost

 

Gross
unrealised
profits

 

Gross
unrealised
losses

 

Market
value

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Securities of or guaranteed by UK/Irish governments

 

3

 

 

 

3

 

3

 

 

 

3

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

2,235

 

 

 

2,235

 

3,081

 

 

 

3,081

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

1,136

 

 

(5

)

1,131

 

1,049

 

1

 

 

1,050

 

Other government treasury notes

 

16

 

 

 

16

 

56

 

 

 

56

 

Other central banks bonds and securities

 

73

 

 

 

73

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

847

 

 

 

847

 

700

 

 

 

700

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ medium-term notes

 

180

 

 

 

180

 

356

 

 

 

356

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

97

 

 

 

97

 

183

 

1

 

 

184

 

Other securities

 

28

 

 

 

28

 

1,085

 

 

(1

)

1,084

 

Total

 

4,615

 

 

(5

)

4,610

 

6,513

 

2

 

(1

)

6,514

 

 

126



 

Maturities of available for sale securities

 

The following table analyses the maturity of the Group’s holdings of available for sale securities at September 30, 2004:

 

 

 

$m

 

0 to 1
year
yield pa

 

$m

 

1 to 5
year(s)
yield pa

 

$m

 

5 to 10
years
yield pa

 

$m

 

Over 10
years
yield pa

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

43

 

5.7

%

99

 

5.7

%

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

 

 

97

 

5.7

%

 

 

 

 

Other securities

 

9

 

5.7

%

14

 

5.8

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

52

 

 

 

210

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by UK/Irish governments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

4.8

%

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

2,235

 

1.2

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

152

 

3.8

%

837

 

3.9

%

 

 

 

 

Other government treasury notes

 

16

 

3.5

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other central banks bonds and securities

 

73

 

4.5

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

847

 

3.0

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ medium-term notes

 

180

 

2.3

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other securities

 

5

 

1.4

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,508

 

 

 

837

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

Total maturities at carrying value

 

3,560

 

 

 

1,047

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

Total maturities at market value

 

3,560

 

 

 

1,047

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

Proceeds from maturities of available for sale securities during 2004 were $5,399 million (2003: $13,500 million, 2002: $14,543 million). Proceeds from sale of available for sale securities during 2004 were $2,002 million (2003: $3 million, 2002: $90 million). Gross profits of $nil (2003: $nil, 2002: $nil) and gross losses of $5 million (2003: $nil, 2002: $1 million) were realised on sale during 2004.

 

14 Investment securities

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Listed – Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of Australian and semi-government authorities

 

 

26

 

25

 

 

26

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

50

 

49

 

 

50

 

49

 

Other securities

 

40

 

298

 

427

 

40

 

298

 

 

 

90

 

373

 

452

 

90

 

373

 

Listed – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by UK/Irish governments (1)

 

141

 

139

 

366

 

 

 

US Treasury and other US Government agencies

 

5

 

11

 

13

 

5

 

11

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

4,402

 

2,367

 

6,059

 

4,402

 

2,367

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

312

 

1,540

 

718

 

96

 

268

 

Other government bonds and securities (1)

 

375

 

214

 

29

 

 

 

Other government treasury notes

 

50

 

148

 

12

 

50

 

148

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

478

 

278

 

2,038

 

478

 

278

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

 

 

15

 

 

 

Other securities

 

 

12

 

68

 

 

12

 

 

 

5,763

 

4,709

 

9,318

 

5,031

 

3,084

 

Total listed investment securities

 

5,853

 

5,082

 

9,770

 

5,121

 

3,457

 

 

127



 

Unlisted – Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other securities

 

376

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

376

 

 

 

 

 

Unlisted – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by New Zealand Government

 

720

 

719

 

550

 

 

 

Private corporations’ Eurobonds

 

17

 

17

 

21

 

17

 

17

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

 

147

 

259

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

4,452

 

2,446

 

2,138

 

215

 

41

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

30

 

 

 

30

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ promissory notes

 

65

 

83

 

243

 

 

 

Other securities

 

 

153

 

560

 

 

153

 

Total unlisted investment securities

 

5,660

 

3,565

 

3,771

 

262

 

211

 

Total investment securities

 

11,513

 

8,647

 

13,541

 

5,383

 

3,668

 

 


(1)          $251 million (2003: $308 million, 2002: $363 million) of securities have been pledged as security for borrowings of the Group and are therefore subject to restrictions regarding sale until the pledge is released.

 

Market value information

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Listed – Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of Australian and semi-government authorities

 

 

26

 

26

 

 

26

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

50

 

52

 

 

50

 

52

 

Other securities

 

40

 

298

 

427

 

40

 

298

 

 

 

90

 

376

 

453

 

90

 

376

 

Listed – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by UK/Irish governments

 

146

 

147

 

366

 

 

 

US Treasury and other US Government agencies

 

5

 

11

 

13

 

5

 

11

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

4,401

 

2,398

 

6,066

 

4,401

 

2,398

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

316

 

1,564

 

743

 

95

 

268

 

Other government bonds and securities

 

376

 

216

 

29

 

 

 

Other government treasury notes

 

50

 

148

 

12

 

50

 

148

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

479

 

292

 

2,042

 

479

 

292

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

 

 

15

 

 

 

Other securities

 

 

12

 

68

 

 

12

 

 

 

5,773

 

4,788

 

9,354

 

5,030

 

3,129

 

Total listed investment securities at market value

 

5,863

 

5,164

 

9,807

 

5,120

 

3,505

 

Unlisted – Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other securities

 

376

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

376

 

 

 

 

 

Unlisted – Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by New Zealand Government

 

720

 

719

 

550

 

 

 

Private corporations’ Eurobonds

 

18

 

17

 

20

 

18

 

17

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

 

147

 

259

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

4,452

 

2,446

 

2,130

 

215

 

41

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

30

 

 

 

30

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ promissory notes

 

65

 

83

 

243

 

 

 

Other securities

 

 

153

 

561

 

 

153

 

Total unlisted investment securities at market value

 

5,661

 

3,565

 

3,763

 

263

 

211

 

Total investment securities at market value

 

11,524

 

8,729

 

13,570

 

5,383

 

3,716

 

 

128



 

The following table reconciles gross unrealised profits and losses of the Group’s holdings of investment securities for the years shown below as at September 30:

 

 

 

2004

 

 

 

2003

 

 

 

 

 

Amortised
cost

 

Gross
unrealised
profits

 

Gross
unrealised
losses

 

Market
value

 

Amortised
cost

 

Gross
unrealised
profits

 

Gross
unrealised
losses

 

Market
value

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Securities of Australian and semi- government authorities

 

 

 

 

 

26

 

 

 

26

 

Securities of or guaranteed by UK/Irish governments

 

141

 

5

 

 

146

 

139

 

8

 

 

147

 

Securities of or guaranteed by New Zealand Government

 

720

 

 

 

720

 

719

 

 

 

719

 

US Treasury and other US Government agencies

 

5

 

 

 

5

 

11

 

 

 

11

 

Private corporations’ Eurobonds

 

17

 

1

 

 

18

 

17

 

 

 

17

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

4,402

 

 

(1

)

4,401

 

2,514

 

35

 

(4

)

2,545

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

4,814

 

4

 

 

4,818

 

4,035

 

27

 

 

4,062

 

Other government bonds and securities

 

375

 

1

 

 

376

 

214

 

2

 

 

216

 

Other government treasury notes

 

50

 

 

 

50

 

148

 

 

 

148

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

478

 

1

 

 

479

 

278

 

14

 

 

292

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

30

 

 

 

30

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ promissory notes

 

65

 

 

 

65

 

83

 

 

 

83

 

Other securities

 

416

 

 

 

416

 

463

 

2

 

(2

)

463

 

Total

 

11,513

 

12

 

(1

)

11,524

 

8,647

 

88

 

(6

)

8,729

 

 

Maturities of investment securities

 

The following table analyses the maturity of the Group’s holdings of investment securities at September 30, 2004:

 

 

 

$m

 

0 to 1
year
yield pa

 

$m

 

1 to 5
year(s)
yield pa

 

$m

 

5 to 10
years
yield pa

 

$m

 

Over 10
years
yield pa

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

50

 

5.7

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other securities

 

17

 

5.7

%

399

 

6.5

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

67

 

 

 

399

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

129



 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by UK/Irish governments

 

3

 

 

138

 

3.0

%

 

 

 

 

Securities of or guaranteed by New Zealand Government

 

720

 

5.7

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

US Treasury and other US Government agencies

 

5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations’ Eurobonds

 

 

 

17

 

4.3

%

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ certificates of deposit/bills

 

4,402

 

3.2

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ bonds

 

1,074

 

4.1

%

3,584

 

5.1

%

106

 

0.7

%

 

 

Other government bonds and securities

 

209

 

4.1

%

166

 

3.3

%

 

 

 

 

Other government treasury notes

 

9

 

0.1

%

41

 

1.5

%

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ commercial paper

 

478

 

2.3

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ floating rate notes

 

15

 

4.3

%

15

 

4.3

%

 

 

 

 

Private corporations/other financial institutions’ promissory notes

 

65

 

6.5

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6,980

 

 

 

3,961

 

 

 

106

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total maturities at carrying value

 

7,047

 

 

 

4,360

 

 

 

106

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total maturities at market value

 

7,057

 

 

 

4,361

 

 

 

106

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Proceeds from maturities of investment securities during 2004 were $12,373 million (2003: $18,578 million, 2002: $37,434 million). The majority of those relate to the maturity of short-dated investment securities. Proceeds from the sale of investment securities during 2004 were $147 million (2003: $18 million, 2002: $nil). Gross profits of $nil (2003: $1 million, 2002: $nil) and $1 million of gross losses (2003: $nil, 2002: $nil) were realised on sale during 2004. The gross loss in 2004 related to the sale of a single investment security due to a significant unforeseeable change in circumstance that changed the intent with regard to this particular debt security without calling into question the Group’s intent and ability to hold other investment securities to maturity in the future.

 

15 Investments relating to life insurance business

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity security investments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Direct

 

6,364

 

6,993

 

 

 

Indirect

 

29,514

 

23,406

 

 

 

 

 

35,878

 

30,399

 

 

 

Debt security investments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest-earning securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

National government

 

732

 

702

 

 

 

Other public sector

 

1,077

 

523

 

 

 

Private sector

 

3,194

 

3,904

 

 

 

 

 

5,003

 

5,129

 

 

 

Properties

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Direct

 

15

 

117

 

 

 

Indirect

 

117

 

201

 

 

 

 

 

132

 

318

 

 

 

Total investments relating to life insurance business

 

41,013

 

35,846

 

 

 

 

Direct investments refer to investments that are held directly with the issuer of the investment.  Indirect investments refer to investments that are held through unit trusts or similar investment vehicles.

 

130



Included within investments relating to life insurance business are investments held in the statutory funds of the Group’s Australian life insurance business which can only be used within the restrictions imposed under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth).  The main restrictions are that the assets in a fund can only be used to meet the liabilities and expenses of the fund, to acquire investments to further the business of the fund or as distributions when solvency and capital adequacy requirements are met.  Participating policyholders can receive a distribution when solvency requirements are met, whilst shareholders can only receive a distribution when the higher level of capital adequacy requirements is met.

 

Investment assets held in statutory funds are not available for use by other parts of the Group’s business (refer to notes 1(o) and 55).

 

16 Loans and advances

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overdrafts

 

4,442

 

4,810

 

4,442

 

4,810

 

Credit card outstandings

 

4,030

 

3,850

 

4,030

 

3,850

 

Market rate advances

 

89

 

100

 

89

 

100

 

Lease finance

 

8,104

 

7,504

 

7,920

 

7,334

 

Housing loans

 

91,259

 

83,018

 

91,259

 

83,018

 

Other term lending

 

37,970

 

34,556

 

37,858

 

34,444

 

Equity participation in leveraged leases

 

60

 

92

 

60

 

92

 

Redeemable preference share finance

 

 

79

 

 

 

Other lending (1)

 

2,453

 

2,090

 

2,052

 

1,670

 

 

 

148,407

 

136,099

 

147,710

 

135,318

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overdrafts

 

14,321

 

12,395

 

6,042

 

4,901

 

Credit card outstandings

 

2,846

 

2,759

 

 

 

Market rate advances

 

 

88

 

 

 

Lease finance

 

7,863

 

7,381

 

25

 

31

 

Housing loans

 

34,514

 

28,469

 

120

 

123

 

Other term lending

 

40,920

 

39,674

 

4,317

 

5,293

 

Redeemable preference share finance

 

2,033

 

1,763

 

 

 

Other lending (1)

 

1,474

 

1,280

 

425

 

431

 

 

 

103,971

 

93,809

 

10,929

 

10,779

 

Total gross loans and advances

 

252,378

 

229,908

 

158,639

 

146,097

 

Deduct: Unearned income

 

(2,024

)

(1,933

)

(1,093

)

(1,006

)

Provision for doubtful debts (refer to note 17)

 

(2,518

)

(2,240

)

(1,511

)

(1,373

)

Total net loans and advances

 

247,836

 

225,735

 

156,035

 

143,718

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Leasing receivables included in lease finance net of unearned income:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

2,057

 

1,943

 

281

 

273

 

Non-current

 

12,558

 

11,702

 

6,784

 

6,320

 

Total leasing receivables included in lease finance

 

14,615

 

13,645

 

7,065

 

6,593

 

 


(1)    Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of reverse repurchase agreements from ‘loans and advances’ to  ‘cash and liquid assets’ and ‘due from other financial institutions’.  Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

The diversification and size of the Group are such that its lending is widely spread both geographically and in terms of the types of industries served.  In accordance with US SEC guidelines, the following table shows comparative year-end detail of the loan portfolio for each of the last five years ended September 30.  The table also demonstrates the concentration of credit risk by industry with the maximum credit risk represented by the carrying values less provision for doubtful debts.

 

131



 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Government and public authorities

 

620

 

498

 

1,588

 

425

 

478

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

6,023

 

5,368

 

4,890

 

5,251

 

5,329

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

6,102

 

6,053

 

3,053

 

4,807

 

4,656

 

Real estate – construction

 

1,728

 

1,935

 

1,807

 

1,941

 

1,661

 

Manufacturing

 

2,492

 

2,630

 

2,034

 

3,263

 

2,268

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

91,259

 

83,018

 

68,461

 

55,629

 

48,719

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

13,529

 

12,473

 

11,352

 

9,850

 

8,223

 

Lease financing

 

8,164

 

7,596

 

7,168

 

7,073

 

6,929

 

Other commercial and industrial (1)

 

18,490

 

16,528

 

16,450

 

15,174

 

14,757

 

 

 

148,407

 

136,099

 

116,803

 

103,413

 

93,020

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Government and public authorities

 

801

 

732

 

1,435

 

1,120

 

1,134

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

6,613

 

5,718

 

6,002

 

5,473

 

5,099

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

7,387

 

7,441

 

7,834

 

6,003

 

8,350

 

Real estate – construction

 

3,072

 

2,511

 

3,273

 

3,312

 

3,061

 

Manufacturing

 

5,968

 

6,233

 

6,745

 

6,476

 

7,446

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

34,514

 

28,469

 

27,615

 

26,010

 

22,611

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

12,596

 

13,059

 

13,294

 

12,903

 

12,014

 

Lease financing

 

7,863

 

7,381

 

8,714

 

8,703

 

7,448

 

Other commercial and industrial (1)

 

25,157

 

22,265

 

25,598

 

29,051

 

31,400

 

 

 

103,971

 

93,809

 

100,510

 

99,051

 

98,563

 

Total gross loans and advances

 

252,378

 

229,908

 

217,313

 

202,464

 

191,583

 

Deduct: Unearned income

 

(2,024

)

(1,933

)

(1,914

)

(1,922

)

(1,812

)

Provision for doubtful debts (refer to note 17)

 

(2,518

)

(2,240

)

(2,470

)

(2,715

)

(2,692

)

Total net loans and advances

 

247,836

 

225,735

 

212,929

 

197,827

 

187,079

 

 


(1)    At September 30, 2004, there were no concentrations of other commercial and industrial loans exceeding 10% of total loans and advances.

 

Concentrations of credit risk by geographical location are based on the geographical location of the office in which the loans or advances are booked.  The amounts shown are net of unearned income and provision for doubtful debts:

 

Australia

 

145,962

 

133,855

 

114,592

 

100,978

 

90,742

 

Europe

 

64,183

 

57,553

 

64,856

 

64,600

 

54,459

 

New Zealand

 

31,916

 

27,555

 

25,267

 

23,250

 

19,682

 

United States

 

2,451

 

3,271

 

4,311

 

4,293

 

18,867

 

Asia

 

3,324

 

3,501

 

3,903

 

4,706

 

3,329

 

Total net loans and advances

 

247,836

 

225,735

 

212,929

 

197,827

 

187,079

 

 

The following tables show the maturity distribution of loans and advances to customers and interest rate sensitivity of such loans and advances for the Group as at September 30, 2004:

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

0 to 1
year (1)

 

1 to 5
year(s)

 

Over 5
years

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Maturity distribution of loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Government and public authorities

 

185

 

204

 

231

 

620

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

3,972

 

1,565

 

486

 

6,023

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

4,292

 

786

 

1,024

 

6,102

 

Real estate – construction

 

1,181

 

171

 

376

 

1,728

 

Manufacturing

 

1,974

 

161

 

357

 

2,492

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

20,838

 

4,568

 

65,853

 

91,259

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

6,038

 

7,302

 

189

 

13,529

 

Lease financing

 

776

 

6,945

 

443

 

8,164

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

11,122

 

2,935

 

4,433

 

18,490

 

 

 

50,378

 

24,637

 

73,392

 

148,407

 

 

132



 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Government and public authorities

 

273

 

417

 

111

 

801

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

2,779

 

1,663

 

2,171

 

6,613

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

2,578

 

4,094

 

715

 

7,387

 

Real estate – construction

 

1,364

 

1,484

 

224

 

3,072

 

Manufacturing

 

2,922

 

1,617

 

1,429

 

5,968

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

4,488

 

5,726

 

24,300

 

34,514

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

7,845

 

2,952

 

1,799

 

12,596

 

Lease financing

 

1,755

 

2,515

 

3,593

 

7,863

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

10,125

 

9,760

 

5,272

 

25,157

 

 

 

34,129

 

30,228

 

39,614

 

103,971

 

Total gross loans and advances

 

84,507

 

54,865

 

113,006

 

252,378

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest rate sensitivity of loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Variable interest rates (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

32,996

 

3,097

 

53,776

 

89,869

 

Overseas

 

21,240

 

15,934

 

22,538

 

59,712

 

Fixed interest rates

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

17,382

 

21,540

 

19,616

 

58,538

 

Overseas

 

12,889

 

14,294

 

17,076

 

44,259

 

Total gross loans and advances

 

84,507

 

54,865

 

113,006

 

252,378

 

 


(1)    Overdrafts are not subject to a repayment schedule.  Due to their characteristics, overdrafts are categorised as due within one year.

 

(2)    For a range of credit products that the Group classifies as variable, the Group is required to give a period of notice before a change in the applicable interest rate is effective.

 

Securitisation of loans

 

During the year ended September 30, 2004, the Group securitised Australian residential mortgage loans amounting to $2,483 million and during the year ended September 30, 2001, the Group securitised Australian residential mortgage loans amounting to $1,924 million.  Outstanding securitised loans of the programs totalled $2,788 million as at September 30, 2004 (2003: $585 million).  The securities issued pursuant to the securitisation programs do not represent liabilities of the Company or the Group.  Neither the Company nor the Group stands behind the capital value or performance of securities or assets of the programs except to the limited extent provided in the transaction documents for the programs through the provision of arm’s length services and facilities (refer to note 1(ee)).  The Company and the Group do not guarantee the payment of interest or repayment of principal due on the securities.  The Company and the Group are not obliged to support any losses that may be suffered by the investors and do not intend to provide such support.  The Company and the Group have no obligation to repurchase any of the securitised loans other than in limited circumstances.  The Company has transacted with the special purpose entities (SPEs) on an arm’s length basis to act as servicer in relation to the loans and to provide the SPEs with fixed and basis swaps and limited redraw facilities.

 

17 Provisions for doubtful debts

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specific provision for doubtful debts

 

412

 

463

 

553

 

255

 

321

 

General provision for doubtful debts

 

2,116

 

1,793

 

2,022

 

1,261

 

1,062

 

Total provision for doubtful debts

 

2,528

 

2,256

 

2,575

 

1,516

 

1,383

 

Deduct:

Specific provision for off-balance sheet credit-related commitments (1)

 

(10

)

(16

)

(105

)

(5

)

(10

)

Net provision for doubtful debts (refer to note 16)

 

2,518

 

2,240

 

2,470

 

1,511

 

1,373

 

 


(1)  The specific provision for off-balance sheet credit-related commitments is shown as a liability in the financial report (refer to note  29.)

 

133



 

Reconciliation of movements in provisions for doubtful debts

 

Specific provision

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

463

 

553

 

586

 

321

 

369

 

Transfer from general provision

 

553

 

746

 

788

 

314

 

417

 

Bad debts written off

 

(804

)

(1,015

)

(985

)

(443

)

(527

)

Bad debts recovered

 

199

 

217

 

171

 

65

 

73

 

Foreign currency translation

 

1

 

(38

)

(7

)

(2

)

(11

)

Balance at end of year

 

412

 

463

 

553

 

255

 

321

 

General provision

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

1,793

 

2,022

 

2,207

 

1,062

 

1,113

 

Transfer to specific provision

 

(553

)

(746

)

(788

)

(314

)

(417

)

Provision of foreign controlled entity sold

 

 

 

(70

)

 

 

Charge to profit and loss account

 

559

 

633

 

697

 

325

 

373

 

Charge to profit and loss account – revision of accounting estimate (1)

 

292

 

 

 

190

 

 

Foreign currency translation

 

25

 

(116

)

(24

)

(2

)

(7

)

Balance at end of year

 

2,116

 

1,793

 

2,022

 

1,261

 

1,062

 

Total provision for doubtful debts

 

2,528

 

2,256

 

2,575

 

1,516

 

1,383

 

 


(1) Refer to note 5(a).

 

Provisions for doubtful debt ratios

 

Specific provision as a percentage of risk-weighted assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

On-balance sheet exposures

 

0.14

%

0.18

%

0.18

%

Off-balance sheet credit-related commitments

 

0.00

%

0.01

%

0.04

%

Specific provision for doubtful debts as a percentage of risk-weighted assets

 

0.14

%

0.19

%

0.22

%

Total provision for doubtful debts as a percentage of risk-weighted assets

 

0.88

%

0.89

%

1.02

%

Bad debts written off as a percentage of average loans and advances (1)

 

0.25

%

0.36

%

0.40

%

 


(1)  Refer to note 39 for average loans and advances.

 

For a discussion of certain services provided by the external auditor in connection with problem loan reviews and the Company’s related internal review of auditor independence refer to ‘certain services provided by the external auditor – matters related to independence’ on page 19 in the ‘business overview’ section.

 

Specific provision for doubtful debts by industry category

 

The following table provides an analysis of the Group’s specific provision for doubtful debts including off-balance sheet exposures by industry category for each of the five years ended September 30:

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

22

 

71

 

75

 

34

 

24

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

22

 

2

 

 

13

 

2

 

Real estate – construction

 

4

 

3

 

3

 

5

 

8

 

Manufacturing

 

16

 

 

7

 

15

 

34

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

 

9

 

3

 

 

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

23

 

7

 

3

 

14

 

46

 

Lease financing

 

12

 

 

12

 

8

 

9

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

83

 

164

 

217

 

253

 

89

 

 

 

182

 

256

 

320

 

342

 

212

 

 

134



 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

22

 

10

 

22

 

14

 

15

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

 

 

 

2

 

2

 

Real estate – construction

 

25

 

3

 

2

 

2

 

8

 

Manufacturing

 

5

 

2

 

1

 

24

 

48

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

2

 

4

 

5

 

6

 

7

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

62

 

74

 

84

 

111

 

60

 

Lease financing

 

9

 

10

 

9

 

10

 

8

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

105

 

104

 

110

 

75

 

111

 

 

 

230

 

207

 

233

 

244

 

259

 

Total specific provision for doubtful debts

 

412

 

463

 

553

 

586

 

471

 

 

General provision for doubtful debts by industry category

 

The following table provides an analysis of the Group’s general provision for doubtful debts including off-balance sheet exposures by industry category for each of the five years ended September 30:

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Government and public authorities

 

1

 

 

 

 

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

51

 

33

 

46

 

69

 

50

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

40

 

36

 

10

 

8

 

67

 

Real estate – construction (1)

 

16

 

99

 

40

 

32

 

30

 

Manufacturing

 

52

 

48

 

75

 

120

 

90

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

68

 

34

 

21

 

62

 

166

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

175

 

157

 

205

 

184

 

155

 

Lease financing

 

70

 

60

 

63

 

94

 

89

 

Other commercial and industrial (1)

 

663

 

488

 

512

 

571

 

410

 

 

 

1,136

 

955

 

972

 

1,140

 

1,057

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Government and public authorities

 

1

 

 

 

 

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

73

 

52

 

48

 

31

 

25

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

19

 

14

 

7

 

6

 

21

 

Real estate – construction (1)

 

17

 

107

 

98

 

46

 

95

 

Manufacturing

 

76

 

52

 

47

 

56

 

77

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

31

 

9

 

19

 

72

 

90

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

233

 

269

 

382

 

339

 

188

 

Lease financing

 

23

 

23

 

31

 

41

 

44

 

Other commercial and industrial (1)

 

507

 

312

 

418

 

476

 

641

 

 

 

980

 

838

 

1,050

 

1,067

 

1,181

 

Total general provision for doubtful debts

 

2,116

 

1,793

 

2,022

 

2,207

 

2,238

 

 


(1)  At September 30, 2004, the general provision for property services was reclassified from real estate - construction, to other commercial and industrial.  Comparative information has not been restated.

 

135



 

Bad debts written off and bad debts recovered by industry category

 

The following table provides an analysis of bad debts written off and bad debts recovered by industry category for each of the five year ended September 30.

For further information, refer to asset quality disclosures in note 18.

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Bad debts written off

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

51

 

7

 

24

 

9

 

27

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

9

 

4

 

17

 

9

 

26

 

Real estate – construction

 

1

 

5

 

8

 

8

 

14

 

Manufacturing

 

6

 

14

 

10

 

29

 

56

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

16

 

4

 

7

 

8

 

7

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

140

 

175

 

144

 

109

 

72

 

Lease financing

 

25

 

124

 

19

 

32

 

16

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

127

 

157

 

136

 

108

 

34

 

 

 

375

 

490

 

365

 

312

 

252

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

6

 

18

 

3

 

7

 

4

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

2

 

 

2

 

 

6

 

Real estate – construction

 

3

 

4

 

16

 

9

 

16

 

Manufacturing

 

15

 

31

 

35

 

27

 

30

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

 

1

 

2

 

2

 

3

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

294

 

340

 

386

 

289

 

206

 

Lease financing

 

4

 

14

 

11

 

9

 

11

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

105

 

117

 

165

 

83

 

129

 

 

 

429

 

525

 

620

 

426

 

405

 

Total bad debts written off

 

804

 

1,015

 

985

 

738

 

657

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bad debts recovered

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining

 

3

 

1

 

3

 

1

 

1

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

 

1

 

 

7

 

4

 

Real estate – construction

 

2

 

 

1

 

 

1

 

Manufacturing

 

2

 

1

 

2

 

1

 

2

 

Real estate – mortgage

 

 

2

 

1

 

1

 

1

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

43

 

60

 

43

 

40

 

41

 

Lease financing

 

4

 

3

 

3

 

3

 

1

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

9

 

2

 

9

 

6

 

30

 

 

 

63

 

70

 

62

 

59

 

81

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Financial, investment and insurance

 

 

 

4

 

5

 

11

 

Real estate – construction

 

 

1

 

 

 

1

 

Manufacturing

 

 

 

 

 

16

 

Instalment loans to individuals and other personal lending (including credit cards)

 

103

 

102

 

83

 

56

 

62

 

Other commercial and industrial

 

33

 

44

 

22

 

31

 

53

 

 

 

136

 

147

 

109

 

92

 

143

 

Total bad debts recovered

 

199

 

217

 

171

 

151

 

224

 

 

136



 

18 Asset quality disclosures

 

The following table provides an analysis of the asset quality of the Group’s impaired loans and advances for each of the last five years ended September 30. Gross amounts have been prepared without regard to security available for such loans and advances.  The inclusion of past due loans and restructured loans in both tables does not necessarily indicate that such loans are doubtful.  Refer to note 1(p) for a description of the Group’s accounting policy for provision for doubtful debts and asset quality.

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2001

 

2000

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Non-accrual loans (1) (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Gross

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia (3)

 

700

 

912

 

1,109

 

1,166

 

568

 

Overseas

 

530

 

721

 

702

 

773

 

899

 

 

 

1,230

 

1,633

 

1,811

 

1,939

 

1,467

 

Specific provision for doubtful debts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

164

 

238

 

299

 

325

 

196

 

Overseas

 

211

 

184

 

201

 

203

 

246

 

 

 

375

 

422

 

500

 

528

 

442

 

Net

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

536

 

674

 

810

 

841

 

372

 

Overseas

 

319

 

537

 

501

 

570

 

653

 

Total net non-accrual loans

 

855

 

1,211

 

1,311

 

1,411

 

1,025

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Restructured loans

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

6

 

4

 

4

 

Overseas

 

41

 

 

 

 

 

Total restructured loans

 

41

 

 

6

 

4

 

4

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Assets acquired through security enforcement

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Real estate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

5

 

 

 

 

8

 

 

 

5

 

 

 

 

8

 

Other assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

 

2

 

3

 

4

 

5

 

 

 

 

2

 

3

 

4

 

5

 

Total assets acquired through security enforcement

 

5

 

2

 

3

 

4

 

13

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total impaired assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Gross

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

700

 

912

 

1,115

 

1,170

 

572

 

Overseas

 

576

 

723

 

705

 

777

 

912

 

 

 

1,276

 

1,635

 

1,820

 

1,947

 

1,484

 

Specific provision for doubtful debts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

164

 

238

 

299

 

325

 

196

 

Overseas

 

211

 

184

 

201

 

203

 

246

 

 

 

375

 

422

 

500

 

528

 

442

 

Net

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

536

 

674

 

816

 

845

 

376

 

Overseas

 

365

 

539

 

504

 

574

 

666

 

Total net impaired assets

 

901

 

1,213

 

1,320

 

1,419

 

1,042

 

 


(1)  Includes loans amounting to $57 million gross, $24 million net (2003: $98 million gross, $70 million net, 2002: $137 million gross, $93 million net, 2001: $170 million gross, $124 million net, 2000: $252 million gross, $182 million net) where some concerns exist as to the ongoing ability of the borrowers to comply with existing loan terms, but on which no principal or interest payments are contractually past due.

 

(2)  Includes off-balance sheet credit-related commitments amounting to $21 million gross, $10 million net (2003: $37 million gross, $21 million net, 2002: $138 million gross, $33 million net, 2001: $219 million gross, $141 million net, 2000: $33 million gross, $16 million net).

 

(3)  As at September 30, 2001, 2002, and 2003, a certain Australian exposure was classified as performing.  However, the classification of this exposure as non-accrual during this period is now considered more appropriate.  As such, on this basis, comparative information for those years has been restated to include the balance of this exposure (including accrued interest) of $207 million, $221 million and $254 million respectively.  During 2004, $28 million of interest income previously recognised in relation to this exposure was reversed to the profit and loss account to reflect the revised asset quality classification.

 

137



 

The following table provides information regarding accruing loans past due 90 days or more.  During the year ended September 30, 2004, the Group revised its data collection procedures for establishing exposures 90 days or more past due.  Comparative information for 2003 was restated.  It was impracticable to restate comparative information for years prior to 2003 on the same basis due to definitional differences impacting data and changes to the application of the 90 days past due test prescribed in APRA guidelines during that period.

 

Accruing loans past due 90 days or more with adequate security – revised basis (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia (2)

 

766

 

436

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

63

 

56

 

 

 

 

Total accruing loans past due 90 days or more with adequate security

 

829

 

492

 

 

 

 

Accruing loans past due 90 days or more with adequate security – former basis (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

61

 

29

 

48

 

39

 

Overseas

 

 

45

 

254

 

286

 

68

 

Total accruing loans past due 90 days or more with adequate security

 

 

106

 

283

 

334

 

107

 

 


(1)  The Group has revised its data collection procedures for establishing its accruing loans past due 90 days or more.  This process now includes loans that are identified by the internal categories ‘watch’ or ‘substandard’ and are in arrears 90 days or more.  Comparative information at September 30, 2003 has been restated to include these loans.  Comparative information for earlier periods has not been restated as it is impracticable to do so.

 

(2)  Subsequent to September 30, 2004, one large Australian exposure of $204 million, which had been classified as an accruing loan past due 90 days or more with adequate security, was settled.  Settlement of the full amount of the exposure occurred in October 2004.

 

Accruing portfolio facilities past due 90 to 180 days

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Gross

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

30

 

30

 

37

 

35

 

23

 

Overseas

 

33

 

34

 

46

 

83

 

36

 

 

 

63

 

64

 

83

 

118

 

59

 

Specific provision for doubtful debts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

18

 

18

 

22

 

18

 

15

 

Overseas

 

19

 

23

 

31

 

40

 

14

 

 

 

37

 

41

 

53

 

58

 

29

 

Net

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

12

 

12

 

15

 

17

 

8

 

Overseas

 

14

 

11

 

15

 

43

 

22

 

Total net accruing portfolio facilities past due 90 to 180 days

 

26

 

23

 

30

 

60

 

30

 

 

Further analysis of non-accrual loans at year-end and interest income received and foregone under the APRA asset quality disclosure guidelines is as follows for the Group, for each of the last three years ended September 30:

 

 

 

Gross

 

2004
Specific
provision

 

Net

 

Gross

 

2003
Specific
provision

 

Net

 

Gross

 

2002
Specific
provision

 

Net

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Non-accrual loans with provisions and:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

No performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

290

 

131

 

159

 

382

 

223

 

159

 

449

 

275

 

174

 

Overseas

 

328

 

197

 

131

 

495

 

162

 

333

 

458

 

178

 

280

 

 

 

618

 

328

 

290

 

877

 

385

 

492

 

907

 

453

 

454

 

Partial performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

226

 

6

 

220

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

2

 

1

 

1

 

3

 

1

 

2

 

4

 

1

 

3

 

 

 

228

 

7

 

221

 

3

 

1

 

2

 

4

 

1

 

3

 

Full performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

46

 

27

 

19

 

35

 

15

 

20

 

74

 

24

 

50

 

Overseas

 

21

 

13

 

8

 

73

 

21

 

52

 

68

 

22

 

46

 

 

 

67

 

40

 

27

 

108

 

36

 

72

 

142

 

46

 

96

 

 

138



 

Non-accrual loans without provisions and:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

No performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia (1)

 

36

 

 

36

 

448

 

 

448

 

550

 

 

550

 

Overseas

 

160

 

 

160

 

131

 

 

131

 

142

 

 

142

 

 

 

196

 

 

196

 

579

 

 

579

 

692

 

 

692

 

Full performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

102

 

 

102

 

47

 

 

47

 

36

 

 

36

 

Overseas

 

19

 

 

19

 

19

 

 

19

 

30

 

 

30

 

 

 

121

 

 

121

 

66

 

 

66

 

66

 

 

66

 

Total non-accrual loans

 

1,230

 

375

 

855

 

1,633

 

422

 

1,211

 

1,811

 

500

 

1,311

 

 


(1)  As at September 30, 2001, 2002, and 2003, a certain Australian exposure was classified as performing.  However, the classification of this exposure as non-accrual during this period is now considered more appropriate.  As such, on this basis, comparative information for those years has been restated to include the balance of this exposure (including accrued interest) of $207 million, $221 million and $254 million respectively.  During 2004, $28 million of interest income previously recognised in relation to this exposure was reversed to the profit and loss account to reflect the revised asset quality classification.

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Interest income received and foregone

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest and other income received and taken to the profit and loss account on non-accrual loans and restructured loans

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

18

 

9

 

12

 

Overseas

 

4

 

1

 

5

 

 

 

22

 

10

 

17

 

Net interest and other income foregone on non-accrual loans and restructured loans

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

66

 

65

 

63

 

Overseas

 

24

 

31

 

29

 

 

 

90

 

96

 

92

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Additional information in respect of impaired assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fair value of security (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Non-accrual loans

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

415

 

530

 

569

 

Overseas

 

277

 

457

 

448

 

 

 

692

 

987

 

1,017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loans newly classified into impaired asset categories during the year

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

331

 

619

 

965

 

Overseas

 

606

 

754

 

526

 

 

 

937

 

1,373

 

1,491

 

 


(1)  Fair value of security is the amount for which that security could be exchanged between a knowledgeable, willing buyer and a knowledgeable, willing seller in an arm’s length transaction.  Amounts of security held in excess of the outstanding balance of individual non-accrual or restructured loans are not included in this table.

 

139



 

19 Shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares in controlled entities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At cost

 

 

 

11,562

 

11,721

 

Deduct: Provision for diminution in value

 

 

 

(138

)

(114

)

 

 

 

 

11,424

 

11,607

 

Interests in joint venture entities

 

51

 

675

 

 

 

Shares in other securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At cost

 

170

 

827

 

37

 

668

 

Deduct: Provision for diminution in value

 

(63

)

(57

)

(29

)

(25

)

 

 

107

 

770

 

8

 

643

 

Total shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities

 

158

 

1,445

 

11,432

 

12,250

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Market value information

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares in other securities

 

107

 

1,195

 

8

 

1,068

 

Total shares in other securities at market value

 

107

 

1,195

 

8

 

1,068

 

 

Interests in joint venture entities

 

Name

 

Principal
activity

 

Joint venture
reporting date

 

Ownership
interest

 

Voting
interest

 

Investment
carrying amount

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

Tokenhouse Partnership (1)

 

Investment

 

September 30

 

50

%

50

%

 

619

 

Dark City Partnership

 

Investment

 

December 31

 

50

%

50

%

19

 

22

 

Matrix Film Investment Partnership

 

Investment

 

June 30

 

60

%

50

%

32

 

34

 

 


(1)  The Tokenhouse Partnership was dissolved during the year, with the Group receiving its share of the partnership capital.

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

The Group’s share of the joint venture entities’ results consists of:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revenues from ordinary activities

 

662

 

7

 

Expenses from ordinary activities

 

(642

)

(4

)

Profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

20

 

3

 

Income tax expense relating to ordinary activities

 

 

 

Net profit – accounted for using the equity method

 

20

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The Group’s share of the joint venture entities’ assets and liabilities consists of:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Investment securities

 

 

619

 

Other investments

 

47

 

51

 

Other assets

 

4

 

5

 

Total assets

 

51

 

675

 

Total liabilities

 

 

 

 

140



 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

The Group’s share of the joint venture entities’ post-acquisition profits consists of:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Share of the joint venture entities’ accumulated losses at beginning of year

 

(17

)

(13

)

Share of the joint venture entities’ net profit

 

20

 

3

 

Distributions from joint venture entities

 

(6

)

(7

)

Share of the joint venture entities’ accumulated losses at end of year

 

(3

)

(17

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Movements in the Group’s carrying amount of the joint venture entities consists of:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Carrying amount at beginning of year

 

675

 

60

 

Investments in joint venture entities acquired

 

 

619

 

Share of the joint venture entities’ net profit

 

20

 

3

 

Return of partnership capital

 

(638

)

 

Distributions from joint venture entities

 

(6

)

(7

)

Carrying amount at end of year

 

51

 

675

 

 

20 Regulatory deposits

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Central banks overseas

 

177

 

225

 

93

 

93

 

Total regulatory deposits

 

177

 

225

 

93

 

93

 

 

21 Property, plant and equipment

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Land and buildings

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Freehold

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At cost (acquired subsequent to previous valuation date)

 

12

 

27

 

 

 

At directors’ valuation

 

524

 

470

 

24

 

23

 

Leasehold

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At cost (acquired subsequent to previous valuation date)

 

94

 

19

 

20

 

17

 

At directors’ valuation

 

78

 

80

 

 

 

Deduct: Accumulated depreciation on buildings

 

(9

)

(22

)

(7

)

(5

)

 

 

699

 

574

 

37

 

35

 

Leasehold improvements

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At cost

 

850

 

784

 

602

 

569

 

Deduct: Accumulated amortisation

 

(440

)

(402

)

(313

)

(292

)

 

 

410

 

382

 

289

 

277

 

Furniture, fixtures and fittings and other equipment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At cost

 

658

 

745

 

86

 

118

 

Under finance lease

 

31

 

18

 

 

 

Deduct: Accumulated depreciation and amortisation

 

(472

)

(460

)

(65

)

(88

)

 

 

217

 

303

 

21

 

30

 

Data processing equipment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At cost

 

1,459

 

1,409

 

722

 

684

 

Under finance lease

 

30

 

28

 

8

 

6

 

Deduct: Accumulated depreciation and amortisation

 

(1,213

)

(1,153

)

(577

)

(520

)

 

 

276

 

284

 

153

 

170

 

Application software

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At cost

 

883

 

1,262

 

526

 

853

 

At recoverable amount

 

87

 

 

72

 

 

Deduct: Accumulated amortisation

 

(315

)

(307

)

(220

)

(199

)

 

 

655

 

955

 

378

 

654

 

Total property, plant and equipment

 

2,257

 

2,498

 

878

 

1,166

 

 

141



 

Reconciliations of movements in property, plant and equipment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Land and buildings

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

574

 

663

 

35

 

48

 

Additions

 

90

 

20

 

3

 

 

Net amount of revaluation increments less decrements (1)

 

71

 

9

 

5

 

 

Disposals

 

(29

)

(35

)

(4

)

(9

)

Depreciation

 

(14

)

(15

)

(2

)

(2

)

Net foreign currency movements arising from self-sustaining foreign operations

 

7

 

(68

)

 

(2

)

Balance at end of year

 

699

 

574

 

37

 

35

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Leasehold improvements

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

382

 

384

 

277

 

274

 

Additions

 

93

 

87

 

58

 

65

 

Disposals

 

(12

)

(26

)

(7

)

(25

)

Amortisation

 

(55

)

(52

)

(39

)

(37

)

Net foreign currency movements arising from self-sustaining foreign operations

 

2

 

(11

)

 

 

Balance at end of year

 

410

 

382

 

289

 

277

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Furniture, fixtures and fittings and other equipment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

303

 

349

 

30

 

34

 

Additions

 

41

 

35

 

6

 

8

 

Disposals

 

(64

)

(2

)

(6

)

(2

)

Depreciation and amortisation

 

(68

)

(58

)

(9

)

(9

)

Net foreign currency movements arising from self-sustaining foreign operations

 

5

 

(21

)

 

(1

)

Balance at end of year

 

217

 

303

 

21

 

30

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Data processing equipment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

284

 

360

 

170

 

207

 

Additions

 

111

 

88

 

56

 

60

 

Disposals

 

(7

)

(24

)

(1

)

(19

)

Depreciation and amortisation

 

(115

)

(124

)

(72

)

(77

)

Net foreign currency movements arising from self-sustaining foreign operations

 

3

 

(16

)

 

(1

)

Balance at end of year

 

276

 

284

 

153

 

170

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Application software

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

955

 

884

 

654

 

638

 

Additions

 

325

 

304

 

121

 

165

 

Disposals and write-offs

 

(37

)

(59

)

(32

)

(49

)

Write-down of impaired assets (2)

 

(409

)

 

(239

)

 

Amortisation

 

(189

)

(152

)

(127

)

(100

)

Net foreign currency movements arising from self-sustaining foreign operations

 

10

 

(22

)

1

 

 

Balance at end of year

 

655

 

955

 

378

 

654

 

 


(1)  The fair values of freehold and leasehold land and buildings have been determined by directors based on advice from independent valuers and regular independent valuations.  Such valuations were performed on an open market basis, being the amounts for which the assets could be exchanged between a knowledgeable, willing buyer and a knowledgeable, willing seller in an arm’s length transaction at the valuation date (refer to note 1(s)).

 

(2)  Write-down of impaired application software in 2004, which has been classified as a significant item.  Refer to note 5(a).

 

142



22 Income tax assets

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Income tax receivable

 

66

 

 

66

 

 

Future income tax benefits

 

1,301

 

1,203

 

810

 

679

 

Total income tax assets

 

1,367

 

1,203

 

876

 

679

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Future income tax benefits comprise:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specific provision for doubtful debts

 

56

 

106

 

49

 

109

 

General provision for doubtful debts

 

636

 

545

 

380

 

322

 

Other provisions

 

513

 

450

 

286

 

232

 

Statutory funds

 

77

 

80

 

77

 

 

Tax losses

 

19

 

22

 

18

 

16

 

Total future income tax benefits

 

1,301

 

1,203

 

810

 

679

 

 

Future income tax benefits not brought to account

 

Future income tax benefits have not been brought to account for the following items as realisation of the benefits is not regarded as virtually certain:

 

Capital gains tax losses  (1)

 

1,786

 

1,893

 

871

 

 

Income tax losses

 

49

 

55

 

26

 

 

Timing differences

 

11

 

19

 

10

 

 

 


(1)                               Includes maximum Australian and US capital gains tax losses in relation to the sale of SR Investment, Inc. and the return of capital.

 

These future income tax benefits will only be obtained if:

                                          future assessable income is derived of a nature and an amount sufficient to enable the benefit to be realised;

                                          the conditions for deductibility imposed by tax legislation continue to be complied with; and

                                          no changes in tax legislation adversely affect the Group in realising the benefit.

 

23 Goodwill

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At cost

 

2,426

 

2,431

 

 

 

Deduct: Accumulated amortisation

 

(1,794

)

(1,691

)

 

 

Total goodwill

 

632

 

740

 

 

 

 

24 Other assets

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accrued interest receivable

 

1,505

 

1,312

 

727

 

740

 

Prepayments

 

112

 

137

 

49

 

37

 

Receivables under contracts of sale

 

 

31

 

 

 

Receivables from liquidator (1)

 

44

 

17

 

17

 

17

 

Receivables

 

961

 

911

 

445

 

270

 

Mortgage loans held for sale

 

40

 

18

 

 

 

Excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

4,904

 

5,061

 

 

 

Other life insurance assets (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accrued income receivable

 

48

 

48

 

 

 

Outstanding premiums receivable

 

82

 

75

 

 

 

Unsettled investment transactions

 

11

 

87

 

 

 

Other

 

88

 

118

 

 

 

Prepaid pension costs

 

582

 

616

 

 

 

Operating leases residual value

 

1,091

 

1,008

 

105

 

89

 

Other

 

2,173

 

611

 

1,092

 

170

 

Total other assets

 

11,641

 

10,050

 

2,435

 

1,323

 

 


(1)                               Represents the liquidators’ estimate of the net return from entities placed in voluntary liquidation.  Movements in the estimated net return other than liquidators’ distributions are recognised in the profit and loss account.

 

(2)                               Refer to note 1(o) for restrictions on assets of the life insurance business.

 

143



 

Excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

Life insurance entities within the Group are required to value their investments in controlled entities at market value, with components of the change in the excess of net market value over net assets reflected on the Group’s statement of financial performance (refer to note 1(o)). Valuations shown are directors’ valuations.The valuations used are based on discounted cash flow valuations prepared by Tillinghast-Towers Perrin, using for Australian and New Zealand entities, risk discount rates specified by the directors.

 

The following table analyses the excess of net market value over net assets of National Australia Financial Management Limited’s (NAFiM) controlled corporate entities as at September 30 for the years shown.  These controlled entities include MLC Limited, MLC Lifetime Company Limited and overseas life insurance entities.  The net market value and net assets of NAFiM’s own business are not included in this table.

 

 

 

Group 2004

 

Group 2003

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Excess of

 

 

 

 

 

Excess of

 

 

 

Net

 

 

 

net market

 

Net

 

 

 

net market

 

 

 

market

 

Net

 

value over

 

market

 

Net

 

value over

 

 

 

value (1)

 

assets

 

net assets

 

value (1)

 

assets

 

net assets

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Insurance

 

2,998

 

820

 

2,178

 

2,785

 

695

 

2,090

 

Investments

 

3,455

 

727

 

2,728

 

3,707

 

768

 

2,939

 

Other

 

56

 

58

 

(2

)

141

 

109

 

32

 

Total

 

6,509

 

1,605

 

4,904

 

6,633

 

1,572

 

5,061

 

 


(1)                               Significant assumptions used in the valuation basis underlying the directors’ valuations include:

 

                  the valuations are based on the present value of estimated after tax distributable profits together with the present value of 70% of attaching imputation credits in the case of Australian and New Zealand entities;

 

•     present values have been determined at the following risk discount rates:

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Life insurance business within Australia

 

11.0

%

11.0

%

 

 

Investment business within Australia

 

11.0-12.1

%

11.0-12.0

%

 

 

Business written in British pounds within the UK

 

10.5

%

10.0

%

 

 

Business written in NZ dollars within New Zealand

 

11.7-12.8

%

11.3-12.5

%

 

 

Life insurance business written in US dollars within Indonesia

 

12.5

%

12.5

%

 

 

Life insurance business written in Indonesian rupiah within Indonesia

 

17.5

%

17.0

%

 

 

Life insurance business written in US dollars within Hong Kong

 

12.0

%

12.5

%

 

 

Life insurance business written in Hong Kong dollars within Hong Kong

 

12.0

%

12.5

%

 

 

Life insurance business written in Thai baht within Thailand

 

n/a

 

n/a;

 

and

 

 

•     in the case of the life insurance entities, the value of future new business has been determined by applying a multiplier to the value  of one year’s sales. The average multipliers used were as follows:

 

Life insurance business in Australia

 

9.6

 

9.1

 

 

 

Investment business within Australia

 

8.9

 

9.1

 

 

 

MLC (Hong Kong) Limited

 

9.0

 

9.0

 

 

 

PT MLC Life Indonesia

 

3.0

 

4.0

 

 

 

Business written in NZ dollars within New Zealand

 

7.1

 

6.8

 

 

 

Advance MLC Assurance Co. Limited

 

n/a

 

n/a.

 

 

 

 

The following table provides an explanation of the changes in the Group’s excess of net market value over net assets of NAFiM’s controlled entities from 2003 to 2004:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

increase/

 

 

 

Increase/

 

Increase/

 

(decrease) in

 

 

 

(decrease) in

 

(decrease) in

 

excess of

 

 

 

value of

 

value of

 

net market

 

 

 

in force

 

future new

 

value over

 

 

 

business

 

business

 

net assets

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Insurance

 

(60

)

148

 

88

 

Investments

 

97

 

(308

)

(211

)

Other

 

(89

)

55

 

(34

)

Total

 

(52

)

(105

)

(157

)

 

144



 

25 Due to other financial institutions

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest-bearing (1)

 

10,936

 

9,466

 

10,936

 

9,463

 

Non-interest-bearing

 

28

 

37

 

28

 

37

 

 

 

10,964

 

9,503

 

10,964

 

9,500

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest-bearing (1)

 

30,591

 

42,673

 

27,256

 

38,512

 

Non-interest-bearing

 

489

 

354

 

455

 

290

 

 

 

31,080

 

43,027

 

27,711

 

38,802

 

Total due to other financial institutions

 

42,044

 

52,530

 

38,675

 

48,302

 

 


(1)                               Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of repurchase agreements with other financial institutions from ‘deposits and other borrowings’ to ‘due to other financial institutions’. Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

26 Deposits and other borrowings

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits not bearing interest

 

6,050

 

5,724

 

6,050

 

5,724

 

On-demand and short-term deposits (1)

 

48,153

 

48,428

 

48,153

 

48,428

 

Certificates of deposit (2)

 

19,357

 

14,352

 

19,311

 

14,275

 

Term deposits

 

32,057

 

26,653

 

32,057

 

26,546

 

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase (3)

 

1,006

 

980

 

1,006

 

980

 

Borrowings

 

11,388

 

9,938

 

11,280

 

9,937

 

 

 

118,011

 

106,075

 

117,857

 

105,890

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits not bearing interest

 

7,466

 

7,329

 

551

 

530

 

On-demand and short-term deposits (1)

 

37,379

 

37,692

 

2,816

 

5,143

 

Certificates of deposit (4)

 

14,773

 

15,299

 

11,581

 

11,929

 

Term deposits

 

34,155

 

29,876

 

13,506

 

12,774

 

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase (3)

 

1,109

 

31

 

1,109

 

31

 

Borrowings

 

7,859

 

4,892

 

 

 

 

 

102,741

 

95,119

 

29,563

 

30,407

 

Total deposits and other borrowings

 

220,752

 

201,194

 

147,420

 

136,297

 

 


(1)                               Deposits available on demand or lodged for periods of less than 30 days.

 

(2)                               Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of transferable certificates of deposit from ‘deposits and other borrowings’ to ‘bonds, notes and subordinated debt’.  Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

(3)                               Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of repurchase agreements with other financial institutions from ‘deposits and other borrowings’ to ‘due to other financial institutions’.  Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

(4)                               In relation to medium-term notes issued by the Group’s controlled entity, Bank of New Zealand, 2004 information has been reclassified from ‘deposits and other borrowings’ to ‘bonds, notes and subordinated debt’.  Comparative information has not been reclassified as it is impracticable to do so.  Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

Funds are derived from well-diversified resources spread over the following geographic locations.  Concentrations of deposits and other borrowings by geographical location are based on the geographical location of the office in which the deposits and other borrowings are recognised.

 

Australia

 

118,011

 

106,075

 

Europe

 

62,133

 

57,628

 

New Zealand

 

25,643

 

21,694

 

United States

 

11,287

 

11,828

 

Asia

 

3,678

 

3,969

 

Total deposits and other borrowings

 

220,752

 

201,194

 

 

145



 

Maturities of deposits

The following table shows the maturity profile of the Group’s certificates of deposit and term deposits issued with a value of $100,000 or more at September 30, 2004:

 

 

 

0 to 3
month(s)

 

3 to 6
months

 

6 to 12
months

 

Over 12
months

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Certificates of deposit

 

18,991

 

167

 

196

 

3

 

19,357

 

Term deposits

 

20,098

 

2,417

 

1,867

 

216

 

24,598

 

 

 

39,089

 

2,584

 

2,063

 

219

 

43,955

 

Overseas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Certificates of deposit

 

8,424

 

4,339

 

1,713

 

297

 

14,773

 

Term deposits

 

22,828

 

3,120

 

2,084

 

2,462

 

30,494

 

 

 

31,252

 

7,459

 

3,797

 

2,759

 

45,267

 

Total certificates of deposit and term deposits

 

70,341

 

10,043

 

5,860

 

2,978

 

89,222

 

 

Short-term borrowings

Short-term borrowings of the Group include the commercial paper programs of the Company, National Australia Funding (Delaware), Inc., and Bank of New Zealand.  The following table sets forth information concerning the Group’s commercial paper programs for each of the last three years ended September 30:

 

 

 

2004

 

Group
2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Commercial paper

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance outstanding at balance date

 

17,868

 

14,555

 

11,167

 

Maximum outstanding at any month end

 

20,592

 

16,621

 

15,455

 

Approximate average amount outstanding during the year

 

16,343

 

10,867

 

9,678

 

Approximate weighted average interest rate on

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance outstanding at balance date (per annum)

 

2.2

%

1.6

%

2.2

%

Average amount outstanding during the year (per annum)

 

1.9

%

2.1

%

2.5

%

 

27 Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Business valued by projection method

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Value of future policy benefits

 

5,074

 

5,375

 

 

 

Future bonuses

 

511

 

523

 

 

 

Value of future expenses

 

1,182

 

1,078

 

 

 

Future profit margins

 

1,449

 

1,442

 

 

 

Value of future premiums

 

(5,653

)

(5,352

)

 

 

Total business valued by projection method

 

2,563

 

3,066

 

 

 

Business valued by accumulation method

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Value of future policy benefits

 

34,057

 

29,784

 

 

 

Future charges for acquisition costs

 

(626

)

(541

)

 

 

Total business valued by accumulation method

 

33,431

 

29,243

 

 

 

Unvested policyholder benefits

 

140

 

148

 

 

 

Total policy liabilities (1)

 

36,134

 

32,457

 

 

 

 


(1)                               Included in the above policy liabilities are capital guarantees of $4,502 million (2003: $4,328 million) provided on annuity products, money invested in the cash options of investment-linked business, whole of life and endowment policies and investment account policies.

 

The calculation of policy liabilities is subject to various actuarial assumptions which are summarised in note 54.  All policy liabilities relate to the business conducted in the statutory funds, including international life insurance funds, and will be settled from the assets of each statutory fund (refer to note 1(x)).

 

146



 

28 Income tax liabilities

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Provision for income tax

 

203

 

725

 

55

 

319

 

Provision for deferred income tax

 

975

 

812

 

685

 

243

 

Total income tax liabilities

 

1,178

 

1,537

 

740

 

562

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Provision for deferred income tax comprises:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Lease finance

 

34

 

85

 

34

 

70

 

Leveraged leasing

 

74

 

74

 

74

 

73

 

Depreciation

 

124

 

90

 

67

 

30

 

Statutory funds

 

218

 

16

 

218

 

 

Prepaid pension costs

 

180

 

189

 

 

 

Other timing differences

 

345

 

358

 

292

 

70

 

Total provision for deferred income tax

 

975

 

812

 

685

 

243

 

 

29 Provisions

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Employee entitlements

 

594

 

574

 

492

 

476

 

Non-lending losses

 

148

 

174

 

38

 

111

 

Restructuring costs

 

86

 

159

 

28

 

78

 

Specific provision for off-balance sheet credit-related commitments

 

10

 

16

 

5

 

10

 

Other

 

291

 

339

 

66

 

93

 

Total provisions

 

1,129

 

1,262

 

629

 

768

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Provision for restructuring costs comprises:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Termination benefits and outplacement

 

47

 

96

 

5

 

29

 

Occupancy

 

29

 

46

 

19

 

35

 

Other

 

10

 

17

 

4

 

14

 

Total provision for restructuring costs

 

86

 

159

 

28

 

78

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Reconciliations of movements in provisions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Non-lending losses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

174

 

146

 

111

 

113

 

Provision

 

116

 

100

 

38

 

34

 

Payments

 

(68

)

(49

)

(37

)

(36

)

Provision no longer required (1)

 

(74

)

(23

)

(74

)

 

Balance at end of year

 

148

 

174

 

38

 

111

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Restructuring costs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

159

 

347

 

78

 

191

 

Provision

 

12

 

 

 

 

Payments

 

(85

)

(164

)

(50

)

(110

)

Provision no longer required

 

 

(24

)

 

(3

)

Balance at end of year

 

86

 

159

 

28

 

78

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specific provision for off-balance sheet credit-related commitments (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

16

 

105

 

10

 

104

 

Provision

 

 

13

 

 

8

 

Provision no longer required

 

(6

)

(102

)

(5

)

(102

)

Balance at end of year

 

10

 

16

 

5

 

10

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

339

 

532

 

93

 

114

 

Provision

 

27

 

34

 

 

1

 

Payments

 

(57

)

(60

)

(27

)

(22

)

Sale of foreign controlled entity (3)

 

 

(28

)

 

 

Provision no longer required

 

(18

)

(139

)

 

 

Balance at end of year

 

291

 

339

 

66

 

93

 

 


(1)                               For 2004, this amount includes $64 million in relation to the write-back of the HomeSide US revision of accounting estimate.  Refer to note 5(a).

 

(2)                               Movements in the specific provision for off-balance sheet credit-related commitments represent transfers to or from the provision for doubtful debts.

 

(3)                               Relates to the sale of SR Investment, Inc. on October 1, 2002 (refer to note 5(a)).

 

147



 

30 Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Medium-term notes (1)

 

21,797

 

16,685

 

21,302

 

16,685

 

Other senior notes (2)

 

1,604

 

2,164

 

975

 

1,550

 

Subordinated medium-term notes

 

9,071

 

5,289

 

9,071

 

5,289

 

Other subordinated notes

 

108

 

130

 

108

 

130

 

Total bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

32,580

 

24,268

 

31,456

 

23,654

 

Net premiums and deferred gains/(losses)

 

(7

)

(11

)

(7

)

(11

)

Total net bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

32,573

 

24,257

 

31,449

 

23,643

 

 


(1)                               In relation to medium-term notes issued by the Group’s controlled entity, Bank of New Zealand, 2004 information has been reclassified from ‘deposits and other borrowings’ to ‘bonds, notes and subordinated debt’.  Comparative information has not been reclassified as it is impracticable to do so.  Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

(2)                               Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of transferable certificates of deposit from ‘deposits and other borrowings’ to ‘bonds, notes and subordinated debt’.  Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

The maturity analysis of bonds, notes and subordinated debt based on remaining maturity is set out in note 40.

 

Medium-term notes

The Group operates a number of medium-term notes programs:

                                          under the Euro medium-term notes program of the Company, notes may be issued up to an aggregate amount of US$25.0 billion for terms of three months or more.  At September 30, 2004, based on exchange rates at dates of issue, the Company had US$16.9 billion outstanding under this program;

                                          under the domestic medium-term notes program of the Company, the aggregate issue amount is not limited.  At September 30, 2004, the Company had $1.7 billion outstanding under this program;

                                          under the Bank of New Zealand medium-term notes program, the aggregate issue amount is not limited but subject to the Asset and Liability Management Committee approval.  At September 30, 2004, the Group had NZ$563 million (gross) outstanding under this program;

                                          under the US medium-term notes program of the Company, US$2.6 billion is currently available.  At September 30, 2004, the Company had US$2.0 billion outstanding under this program; and

                                          under the US medium-term notes program through the Company’s New York branch, notes may be issued up to an aggregate amount of US$1.0 billion for terms of nine months or more.  At September 30, 2004, the Company had no outstanding issues under this program.

 

Outstanding medium-term notes issued by the Group pursuant to medium-term notes programs at September 30 were as follows:

 

AUD Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

2,485

 

2,785

 

2,485

 

2,785

 

CAD Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

826

 

 

826

 

 

EUR Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

3,509

 

1,111

 

3,509

 

1,111

 

GBP Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

3,635

 

2,701

 

3,635

 

2,701

 

HKD Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

1,023

 

1,303

 

1,023

 

1,303

 

JPY Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

889

 

536

 

889

 

536

 

NZD Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

529

 

668

 

529

 

668

 

SGD Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

91

 

94

 

91

 

94

 

USD Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

7,162

 

7,382

 

7,162

 

7,382

 

NOK Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

103

 

105

 

103

 

105

 

AUD medium-domestic notes (2)

 

1,050

 

 

1,050

 

 

NZD Bank of New Zealand medium-term notes (3)

 

495

 

 

 

 

Total medium-term notes

 

21,797

 

16,685

 

21,302

 

16,685

 

 


(1)                               Notes issued under the Company’s Euro medium-term notes program.

 

(2)                               Notes issued under the Company’s domestic medium-term notes program.

 

(3)                               Notes issued by Bank of New Zealand, net of NZ$35 million held by the Group.

 

Other senior notes

Outstanding other senior notes issued by the Group under stand-alone programs as at September 30 were as follows:

 

AUD floating rate note (FRN) transferable certificates of deposit notes (1)

 

975

 

1,550

 

975

 

1,550

 

GBP 250m structured finance bond issue due 09/03/2008

 

629

 

614

 

 

 

Total other senior notes

 

1,604

 

2,164

 

975

 

1,550

 

 


(1)                               Notes issued under the Company’s transferable certificate of deposit program.  This is net of $25 million issuance held by the Group.

 

148



 

Subordinated notes

Certain notes are subordinated in right of payment to the claims of depositors and all other creditors of the Company.  Subordinated notes with an original maturity of at least five years constitute Tier 2 capital as defined by APRA for capital adequacy purposes.

 

Subordinated medium-term notes

Subordinated notes have been issued under the Euro medium-term notes and the US medium-term notes programs of the Company, described above.

 

Outstanding subordinated medium-term notes issued by the Company under medium-term notes programs as at September 30 were as follows:

 

USD subordinated Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

USD 300m subordinated Euro medium-term FRN due 03/12/2008

 

420

 

441

 

420

 

441

 

USD 100m subordinated Euro medium-term FRN due 06/15/2009 (2)

 

 

147

 

 

147

 

USD 200m subordinated Euro medium-term FRN due 05/08/2011

 

280

 

294

 

280

 

294

 

USD 300m subordinated Euro medium-term FRN due 08/29/2013

 

420

 

441

 

420

 

441

 

USD 750m subordinated Euro medium-term FRN due 06/23/2014

 

1,049

 

 

1,049

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

USD subordinated medium-term notes (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

USD 400m 6.6% subordinated medium-term notes due 12/10/2007

 

560

 

588

 

560

 

588

 

USD 700m subordinated medium-term FRN due 05/19/2010

 

979

 

1,029

 

979

 

1,029

 

USD 900m 8.6% subordinated medium-term notes due 05/19/2010

 

1,258

 

1,322

 

1,258

 

1,322

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

EUR subordinated Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

EUR 600m subordinated Euro medium-term FRN due 09/23/2014

 

1,035

 

 

1,035

 

 

EUR 600m 3.875% subordinated Euro medium-term notes due 06/04/2015

 

1,035

 

1,027

 

1,035

 

1,027

 

EUR 500m 4.5% subordinated Euro medium-term notes due 06/23/2016

 

862

 

 

862

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GBP subordinated Euro medium-term notes (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GBP 200m 5.375% subordinated Euro medium-term notes due 10/28/2015

 

503

 

 

503

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AUD subordinated domestic medium-term notes (4)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AUD 450m 6.5% subordinated domestic medium-term note due 06/02/2014

 

450

 

 

450

 

 

AUD 220m subordinated domestic medium-term FRN due 06/02/2014

 

220

 

 

220

 

 

Total subordinated medium-term notes

 

9,071

 

5,289

 

9,071

 

5,289

 

 


(1)                               Notes issued under the Company’s Euro medium-term notes program.

 

(2)                               The call option to redeem the US$100 million subordinated Euro medium-term note maturing June 15, 2009 was exercised on June 15, 2004.  These notes were redeemed in full.

 

(3)                               Notes issued under the Company’s US medium-term notes program.

 

(4)                               Notes issued under the Company’s domestic medium-term notes program.

 

Other subordinated notes

The Company has conducted a number of stand-alone subordinated note issues.

 

Outstanding other subordinated notes issued by the Company under stand-alone programs as at September 30 were as follows:

 

AUD 22m subordinated FRN due 06/08/2004 (1)

 

 

22

 

 

22

 

AUD 25m subordinated FRN due 06/08/2006 (1)

 

25

 

25

 

25

 

25

 

AUD 40m subordinated FRN due 06/08/2008 (1)

 

40

 

40

 

40

 

40

 

AUD 3m subordinated FRN due 06/08/2010

 

3

 

3

 

3

 

3

 

AUD 20m 7.5% subordinated notes due 12/15/2027

 

20

 

20

 

20

 

20

 

AUD 20m 7.5% subordinated notes due 06/15/2028

 

20

 

20

 

20

 

20

 

Total other subordinated notes

 

108

 

130

 

108

 

130

 

 


(1)                               These extendable notes were initially issued with a maturity of June 8, 2000.  $110 million were redeemed on June 10, 1997.  As from June 8, 2001, $22 million had a maturity of June 8, 2004, $25 million have a maturity date of June 8, 2006, and the remaining $40 million have a maturity of June 8, 2008.

 

149



 

31 Other debt issues

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Perpetual floating rate notes

 

350

 

367

 

350

 

367

 

Exchangeable capital units

 

1,262

 

1,262

 

 

 

Fixed rate securities

 

 

114

 

 

 

Total other debt issues

 

1,612

 

1,743

 

350

 

367

 

 

Perpetual floating rate notes

On October 9, 1986, the Company issued US$250 million ($460 million) undated subordinated floating rate notes.  Interest is payable semi-annually in arrears in April and October at a rate of 0.15% per annum above the arithmetic average of the rates offered by the reference banks for six month US dollar deposits in London.

 

The notes are unsecured obligations of the Company, subordinated in that:

               payments of principal and interest on the notes will only be payable to the extent that, after such payment, the Company remains solvent;

               the payment of interest will also be optional if a dividend has not been declared, paid or made in the preceding 12 months; and

               in the event of the winding-up of the Company, the rights of the noteholders will rank in preference only to the rights of preferred and ordinary shareholders and creditors whose claims rank, or are expressed to rank, after the noteholders and couponholders.

 

The notes have no final maturity.  All or some of the notes may be redeemed at the option of the Company with the prior consent of APRA.

 

Exchangeable capital units

On March 19, 1997, National Australia Capital Securities (UK) PLC, a controlled entity, received funds following the issue of 40 million exchangeable capital units at US$25 each with a cumulative return of 7 7/8% per annum.  Under the terms of the exchangeable capital units, the Company has the option to require the exchange of all, but not part, of the exchangeable capital units at any time for 7 7/8% convertible non-cumulative preference shares of the Company.  Holders of the exchangeable capital units or the convertible non-cumulative preference shares have the option at any time to exchange their holdings for ordinary shares of the Company (or, at the Company’s option, cash) initially at the rate of 1.6365 ordinary shares per exchangeable capital unit or convertible non-cumulative preference share, subject to anti-dilution provisions.

 

As a result of certain holders of exchangeable capital units exercising their options to exchange their holdings for ordinary shares of the Company, the number of exchangeable capital units at September 30, 2004 is 39,995,800 (2003: 39,999,800).

 

The Company has the right to redeem all or part of the exchangeable capital units or redeem all or part of the convertible non-cumulative preference shares under a special offer at any time after March 19, 2007, with the prior consent of APRA.

 

Fixed rate securities

As at September 30, 2003, MLC Limited held US$75 million ($114 million) of funds raised through the issue of subordinated securities in a global offering outside Australia.  The securities had a fixed coupon of 7.53% per annum.  These securities were repaid on July 14, 2004.

 

32 Other liabilities

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accrued interest payable

 

1,623

 

1,282

 

1,000

 

896

 

Payables and accrued expenses

 

1,738

 

1,411

 

880

 

645

 

Notes in circulation

 

2,820

 

2,349

 

 

 

Other life insurance liabilities (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Unsettled investment liabilities

 

33

 

301

 

 

 

Outstanding policy claims

 

83

 

79

 

 

 

Reinsurance creditors

 

48

 

68

 

 

 

Other

 

103

 

110

 

 

 

Securities sold short

 

845

 

2,284

 

840

 

2,243

 

Other

 

6,334

 

6,355

 

3,880

 

3,508

 

Total other liabilities

 

13,627

 

14,239

 

6,600

 

7,292

 

 


(1)                               Life insurance statutory fund liabilities are quarantined and will be settled from the assets of the statutory funds (refer to note 1(o)).

 

150



 

33 Contributed equity

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Issued and paid-up share capital

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ordinary shares, fully paid

 

7,271

 

6,078

 

7,256

 

7,271

 

6,078

 

Ordinary shares, partly paid to 25 cents (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Preference shares, fully paid (2)

 

 

730

 

730

 

 

730

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other contributed equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

National Income Securities

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

Trust Preferred Securities

 

975

 

975

 

 

 

 

 

 

10,191

 

9,728

 

9,931

 

9,216

 

8,753

 

 


(1)          Ordinary shares, partly paid to 25 cents have a value of less than $1 million.

 

(2)          On January 22, 2004, the Company bought back 36,008,000 fully paid non-converting non-cumulative preference shares of the Company that were issued in connection with the issue of 18,004,000 Trust Units Exchangeable for Preference SharesTM (TrUEPrSSM) in 1998.  TrUEPrSSM were redeemed on the same date.

 

Reconciliations of movements in contributed equity

 

Ordinary share capital

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

6,078

 

7,256

 

8,050

 

6,078

 

7,256

 

Shares issued

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Dividend reinvestment plan

 

616

 

170

 

323

 

616

 

170

 

Underwriting of dividend reinvestment plan  (1)

 

686

 

 

 

686

 

 

Executive option plan no. 2 (2)

 

52

 

135

 

81

 

52

 

135

 

Share purchase plan (3)

 

 

80

 

47

 

 

80

 

Paying up of partly paid shares

 

1

 

2

 

3

 

1

 

2

 

Shares bought back

 

(162

)

(1,565

)

(1,248

)

(162

)

(1,565

)

Balance at end of year

 

7,271

 

6,078

 

7,256

 

7,271

 

6,078

 

 

The number of ordinary shares on issue for the last three years at September 30 was as follows:

 

 

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

No. ‘000

 

No. ‘000

 

No. ‘000

 

Ordinary shares, fully paid

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

1,503,956

 

1,533,920

 

1,550,303

 

Shares issued

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Dividend reinvestment plan

 

21,206

 

5,161

 

9,812

 

Bonus share plan

 

3,364

 

3,187

 

2,613

 

Underwriting of dividend reinvestment plan  (1)

 

22,959

 

 

 

Staff share ownership plan (2)

 

805

 

501

 

623

 

Staff share allocation plan (2)

 

1,620

 

1,065

 

734

 

Executive option plan no. 2 (2)

 

2,225

 

6,395

 

4,235

 

Share purchase plan (3)

 

 

2,435

 

1,399

 

Exchangeable capital units converted

 

7

 

 

 

Paying up of partly paid shares

 

116

 

241

 

352

 

Shares bought back

 

(5,472

)

(48,949

)

(36,151

)

 

 

1,550,786

 

1,503,956

 

1,533,920

 

Ordinary shares, partly paid to 25 cents

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

679

 

920

 

1,272

 

Paying up of partly paid shares

 

(116

)

(241

)

(352

)

 

 

563

 

679

 

920

 

Total number of ordinary shares on issue at end of year

 

1,551,349

 

1,504,635

 

1,534,840

 

 


(1)                               The dividend reinvestment plan for the 2004 interim dividend was underwritten by Merrill Lynch & Co., which subscribed for 22,959,461 ordinary shares to the value of $686 million.

 

(2)                               Refer to note 38 for details on employee share and option plans.

 

(3)                               In 2004, no ordinary shares were issued under the share purchase plan.

 

Holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time and are entitled to one vote per share on a show of hands or, on a poll, one vote for each fully paid ordinary share held at shareholders’ meetings.

 

151



 

In the event of a winding-up of the Company, ordinary shareholders rank after all other shareholders and creditors and are fully entitled to any residual proceeds of liquidation.

 

During 2004, the Company completed an on-market buy-back of 5,472,247 (2003: 48,949,487) fully paid ordinary shares, representing 0.4% (2003: 3.3%) of fully paid ordinary shares on issue.  The total consideration for shares bought back on-market was $162 million (2003: $1,565 million), being an average, including incidental costs, of $29.58 per share (2003: $31.98 per share). The highest price paid per share was $30.22 (2003: $34.35) and the lowest price paid was $28.70 (2003: $28.40).

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Preference shares

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

730

 

730

 

730

 

730

 

730

 

Preference shares bought back

 

(730

)

 

 

(730

)

 

Balance at end of year

 

 

730

 

730

 

 

730

 

 

On September 30, 1998, a total of 32,008,000 fully paid non-converting non-cumulative preference shares of the Company with a liquidation preference of US$12.50 per share (TrUEPrSSM preference shares) were issued to a depositary in connection with an issue of 16,004,000 trust units exchangeable for preference sharesTM (TrUEPrSSM) by NAB Exchangeable Preferred Trust, a Delaware business trust that is not controlled by the Company.  The underwriters with respect to the TrUEPrSSM issue subsequently exercised an option resulting in a further issuance of 2,000,000 TrUEPrSSM (and accordingly, in the issue of a further 4,000,000 TrUEPrSSM preference shares).

 

On January 22, 2004, the Company bought back 36,008,000 TrUEPrSSM preference shares that were issued in connection with the issue of the 18,004,000 TrUEPrSSM.  The TrUEPrSSM were redeemed on the same date.  The financial effects of the buy-back, redemption and dissolution of the capital raising structure included a reduction in the contributed equity of $730 million, a reduction in cash of $582 million and a net increase in retained profits of $148 million. In addition, $168 million has been transferred from the foreign currency translation reserve to retained profits representing the reserve balance attributable to the entity that had issued these instruments.

 

Prior to the redemption on January 22, 2004, the holders of TrUEPrSSM received distributions quarterly in arrears at the rate of 8% per annum on a non-cumulative basis.  Holders of the TrUEPrSSM preference shares were entitled to vote together with the holders of ordinary shares in the Company (to the extent that these shareholders were entitled to vote) on the basis of one vote per TrUEPrSSM preference share on a limited number of matters including any proposal to wind up the Company or any proposal to affect the rights attaching to the TrUEPrSSM preference shares.

 

TrUEPrSSM is a service mark of Merrill Lynch & Co., Inc.

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

National Income Securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

Balance at end of year

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

1,945

 

 

On June 29, 1999, the Company issued 20,000,000 National Income Securities (NIS) at A$100 each.  These securities are stapled securities, comprising one fully paid note of A$100 issued by the Company through its New York branch and one unpaid preference share issued by the Company (NIS preference share).  The amount unpaid on a NIS preference share will become due in certain limited circumstances, such as if an event of default occurs.  If the amount unpaid on a NIS preference share becomes due, the holder can, and must, transfer to the Company the note stapled to that NIS preference share.  The transfer of the note to the Company will satisfy the holder’s obligation to pay up the amount on the NIS preference share.  The holder will then hold a fully paid NIS preference share.

 

Each holder of NIS is entitled to non-cumulative distributions based on a rate equal to the Australian 90 day bank bill rate plus 1.25% per annum, payable quarterly in arrears commencing on August 15, 1999.  A minimum interest rate of at least 6% per annum was payable until May 15, 2000.  Holders of NIS preference shares are not entitled to dividends until the NIS preference shares become fully paid.  If the NIS preference shares become fully paid, holders will receive, if declared, a dividend calculated at the same rate and payable on the same basis as for the NIS.

 

If a dividend is not paid on the NIS preference shares, the Company cannot, in certain circumstances, pay distributions, redeem, buy back or reduce capital on any other shares of the Company that rank equally with or junior to the NIS preference shares.

 

Holders of the NIS preference shares are entitled to vote together with the holders of ordinary shares in the Company (to the extent that these shareholders are entitled to vote) on the basis of one vote per NIS preference share on a limited number of matters including any proposal to wind up the Company or any proposal to affect the rights attaching to the NIS preference shares.

 

With the prior consent of APRA, the Company may, at any time, redeem each note for A$100 (plus any accrued distributions) and buy back or cancel the NIS preference share stapled to the note for no consideration.

 

152



 

NIS have no maturity date, are quoted on ASX and on a winding-up of the Company will rank for a return of capital behind all deposit liabilities and creditors of the Company, but ahead of ordinary shareholders.  In a winding-up of the Company, the holders of fully paid NIS preference shares issued in connection with the NIS will generally rank equally with the holders of other preference shares of the Company with the same number with respect to priority on payment in a winding-up (as specified in accordance with the Company’s constitution), and will rank for a return of capital on the NIS preference shares in priority to the holders of ordinary shares.  Preference shares may be issued by the Company in connection with the exchangeable capital units and the Trust Preferred Securities.

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Trust Preferred Securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

975

 

975

 

 

 

 

Balance at end of year

 

975

 

975

 

 

 

 

 

On September 29, 2003, the Group raised GBP400 million through the issue by National Capital Trust I (a controlled entity formed in Delaware) of 400,000 Trust Preferred Securities at GBP1,000 each, to be used by the Company’s London branch.  Each Trust Preferred Security earns a non-cumulative distribution, payable semi-annually in arrears until December 17, 2018 equal to 5.62% per annum and, in respect of each five year period after that date, a non-cumulative distribution payable semi-annually in arrears at a rate equal to the sum of the yield to maturity of the five year benchmark UK government bond at the start of that period plus 1.93%.  The securities are constituted by instruments governed by New York and Delaware law.

 

In certain limited circumstances, the Trust Preferred Securities will be exchanged for redeemable preference shares in the Company (TPS preference shares).  These take the form of Global Depositary Shares evidenced by Global Depositary Receipts.  The circumstances in which the exchange event will occur include if a distribution is not paid on the Trust Preferred Securities or if the Company does not maintain certain prudential regulatory standards.  The Company also has discretion to exchange the Trust Preferred Securities for TPS preference shares at any time.

 

If issued, each holder of a TPS preference share would receive, if declared, non-cumulative dividends calculated at the same rate and payable on the same basis as apply to the Trust Preferred Securities.

 

If a distribution is not paid on the Trust Preferred Securities, or a dividend is not paid on the TPS preference shares, the Company cannot, with certain exceptions, pay distributions, redeem, buy back or reduce capital on any other shares or other capital instruments of the Company that rank equally with or junior to the securities unless it has paid 12 months’ distributions on the securities or an optional dividend.

 

Holders of the TPS preference shares (if issued) would be entitled to vote together with the holders of ordinary shares in the Company (to the extent that these shareholders were entitled to vote) on the basis of one vote per TPS preference share on a limited number of matters, including any proposal to wind up the Company or any proposal to affect the rights attaching to the TPS preference shares.

 

With the prior consent of APRA, the Trust Preferred Securities may be redeemed by the issuer in certain limited circumstances.  These circumstances are on December 17, 2018 and on every subsequent fifth anniversary, in which case the redemption price is GBP1,000 per Trust Preferred Security plus the unpaid distributions for the last six month distribution period, and otherwise only where certain adverse tax or regulatory events have occurred, in which case the redemption price may include a ‘make-whole’ adjustment to compensate the investor for the investment opportunity lost by the early redemption (except where the tax event relates to withholding tax).

 

The TPS preference shares may be redeemed at any time after their issue (except where the Company has exercised its discretion to issue the TPS preference shares, in which case they can only be redeemed if certain adverse tax or regulatory events have occurred). The redemption price includes a ‘make-whole’ adjustment to compensate the investor for the investment opportunity lost by the early redemption (except where the redemption relates to withholding tax).  The TPS preference shares may also be redeemed on December 17, 2018 and on any subsequent fifth anniversary at par value of GBP1,000 per share plus the unpaid dividend for the last six month dividend period.

 

In a winding-up of the Company, the Trust Preferred Securities and (if issued) the TPS preference shares will generally rank equally with the holders of other preference shares and will rank for return of capital behind all deposit liabilities and creditors of the Company, but ahead of ordinary shareholders.

 

153



 

34 Reserves

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

General reserve

 

942

 

1,128

 

856

 

14

 

12

 

Asset revaluation reserve

 

86

 

16

 

7

 

13

 

8

 

Foreign currency translation reserve

 

166

 

(251

)

1,242

 

23

 

14

 

Total reserves

 

1,194

 

893

 

2,105

 

50

 

34

 

 

Reconciliations of movements in reserves

 

General reserve

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

1,128

 

856

 

649

 

12

 

11

 

Transfer (to)/from retained profits

 

(186

)

272

 

207

 

2

 

1

 

Balance at end of year

 

942

 

1,128

 

856

 

14

 

12

 

 

The general reserve includes statutory funds’ retained profits from the Group’s life insurance business.  Profits from the statutory funds are not immediately available for distribution.  These profits will only be available after the respective life company’s board has approved the transfer of surpluses from the statutory funds to the shareholders’ fund.

 

Asset revaluation reserve

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

16

 

7

 

16

 

8

 

8

 

Net increment on revaluation of land and buildings

 

71

 

9

 

9

 

5

 

 

Transfer to retained profits

 

(1

)

 

(18

)

 

 

Balance at end of year

 

86

 

16

 

7

 

13

 

8

 

 

The asset revaluation reserve includes the net revaluation increments and decrements arising from the revaluation of non-current assets in accordance with Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1041 “Revaluation of Non-Current Assets”.

 

Foreign currency translation reserve

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

(251

)

1,242

 

1,762

 

14

 

54

 

Currency translation adjustments

 

226

 

(1,251

)

(520

)

6

 

(40

)

Transfer to retained profits (1)

 

168

 

 

 

 

 

Transfer to retained profits on sale of foreign controlled entity

 

23

 

(242

)

 

3

 

 

Balance at end of year

 

166

 

(251

)

1,242

 

23

 

14

 

 


(1)                               The financial effects of the buy-back of preference shares and redemption of TrUEPrSSM included a reduction in contributed equity of $730 million, a reduction in cash of $582 million and an increase in retained profits of $148 million.  In addition, $168 million was transferred from the foreign currency translation reserve to retained profits representing the reserve balance attributable to the entity that had issued these instruments.

 

The foreign currency translation reserve records the foreign currency differences arising from the translation of self-sustaining foreign operations, the translation of transactions that hedge the Company’s net investment in a foreign operation or the translation of foreign currency monetary items forming part of the net investment in a self-sustaining operation.

 

35 Retained profits

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

13,786

 

11,148

 

10,337

 

11,799

 

7,306

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

2,417

 

5,720

 

Net effect on adoption of AASB 1044 “Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets”

 

 

1,151

 

 

 

1,151

 

Transfer from/(to) general reserve

 

186

 

(272

)

(207

)

(2

)

(1

)

Transfer from asset revaluation reserve

 

1

 

 

18

 

 

 

Transfer from foreign currency translation reserve (1)

 

(168

)

 

 

 

 

Increment on buy-back of preference shares (1)

 

148

 

 

 

148

 

 

Transfer (to)/from foreign currency translation reserve on sale of foreign controlled entity

 

(23

)

242

 

 

(3

)

 

Dividends paid (2)

 

(2,405

)

(2,255

)

(2,266

)

(2,405

)

(2,255

)

Dividend provision not required

 

 

 

80

 

 

 

Distributions on other equity instruments

 

(187

)

(183

)

(187

)

(132

)

(122

)

Balance at end of year

 

14,515

 

13,786

 

11,148

 

11,822

 

11,799

 

 


(1)                               The financial effects of the buy-back of preference shares and redemption of TrUEPrSSM included a reduction in contributed equity of $730 million, a reduction in cash of $582 million and an increase in retained profits of $148 million.  In addition, $168 million was transferred from the foreign currency translation reserve to retained profits representing the reserve balance attributable to the entity that had issued these instruments.

 

154



 

(2)                               In respect of the year ended September 30, 2002, this amount includes dividends paid or provided for.  Prior to the Group adopting the Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1044 “Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets”, which was adopted by the Group from October 1, 2002, the Group recognised a provision for dividends in the reporting period to which the dividend related, rather than at the time the dividend was declared, determined or publicly recommended.

 

36 Outside equity interest

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Life insurance business

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

3,365

 

2,288

 

68

 

 

 

Reserves

 

139

 

(26

)

 

 

 

Retained profits/(accumulated losses)

 

362

 

352

 

(1

)

 

 

Outside equity interest – Life insurance business (1)

 

3,866

 

2,614

 

67

 

 

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

 

198

 

 

 

 

Accumulated losses

 

 

(8

)

 

 

 

Outside equity interest – Other

 

 

190

 

 

 

 

Total outside equity interest

 

3,866

 

2,804

 

67

 

 

 

 


(1)                               During 2003, the Group’s life insurance statutory funds reorganised their business operating model to increase the level of investments held through registered schemes rather than directly held investments in debt and equity securities.  As the statutory funds are considered to have the capacity to control a certain number of these registered schemes, the Group has consolidated them.  Refer to note 1(f).  The names of the registered schemes which the Group has consolidated as at September 30, 2004, are as follows:

                  MLC (NCIT) Global Share Trust;

                  WM Pool – NISM Cash Trust (formerly MLCI Pool – NAM Cash Trust);

                  WM Pool – Private Equity Trust;

                  WM Sector – Australian Equity Trust;

                  WM Sector – Diversified Debt (All) Trust;

                  WM Sector – Diversified Debt (Short) Trust;

                  WM Sector – Property Securities Trust;

                  National Managed Investor International Trust;

                  National Diversified Managers Fixed Interest Fund;

                  National Diversified Managers Australian Share Fund; and

                  National Short Term Money Market Fund.

 

37 Total equity reconciliation

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance at beginning of year

 

27,211

 

23,251

 

23,557

 

20,586

 

17,310

 

Total changes in equity recognised in the statement of financial performance (1)

 

3,474

 

3,864

 

2,862

 

2,428

 

6,831

 

Transactions with owners as owners

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributions of equity

 

1,355

 

1,362

 

454

 

1,355

 

387

 

Share buy-back

 

(162

)

(1,565

)

(1,248

)

(162

)

(1,565

)

Dividends (2)

 

(2,405

)

(2,255

)

(2,186

)

(2,405

)

(2,255

)

Distributions on other equity instruments

 

(187

)

(183

)

(187

)

(132

)

(122

)

Buy-back of preference shares (3)

 

(582

)

 

 

(582

)

 

Total changes in outside equity interest

 

1,062

 

2,737

 

(1

)

 

 

Balance at end of year

 

29,766

 

27,211

 

23,251

 

21,088

 

20,586

 

 


(1)       This represents comprehensive income using US GAAP terminology (refer to note 56 for total comprehensive income under US GAAP).

(2)       Comprises dividends paid or provided for net of dividend provisions not required.

(3)       The financial effects of the buy-back of preference shares and redemption of TrUEPrSSM included a reduction in contributed equity of $730 million, a reduction in cash of $582 million and an increase in retained profits of $148 million.  In addition, $168 million was transferred from the foreign currency translation reserve to retained profits representing the reserve balance attributable to the entity that had issued these instruments.

 

155



38          Shares, performance options and performance rights

 

Shares (subject to various restrictions), performance options and performance rights are used by the Group to provide short-term and long-term incentives to employees.  These incentives are an integral part of the Group’s remuneration strategy in rewarding an employee’s current and future contribution to the Group’s performance (refer to note 51 for further information about the Group’s remuneration strategy).

 

The plans described below involve the provision of shares to employees of the Group and to non-executive directors of the Company, and performance options and performance rights to senior employees of the Group.

 

(a) National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan (staff share ownership plan)

 

The staff share ownership plan was approved by shareholders by special resolution in January 1997 and again approved at the 2002 annual general meeting.  Details of issues and acquisitions under this plan are set out in Table 1.

 

This plan provides for the Board to invite any employee or non-executive director of the Group to participate in an offer under this plan.  The Board may also invite any employee to apply for a loan to acquire shares or offer to have the Company provide funds to acquire shares subject to the provisions of applicable laws and regulations (including the United States Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002).  The Board determines the number of shares to be made available and the formula to be used in calculating the price per share.  The Company may provide funds for a trustee to subscribe for or purchase fully paid ordinary shares in the Company on behalf of participating employees or non-executive directors (if required).  The trustee must subscribe for or purchase the shares within a predetermined timeframe.

 

Shares acquired under this plan are held in trust, and may not be dealt with by the employee or non-executive director until a prescribed period after they were acquired, unless otherwise determined by the Board.  While held in trust, employees and non-executive directors receive dividends and may exercise voting rights (through the trustee) in respect of the shares.  Other restrictions may apply to the shares depending on the program under which they are offered.  Some shares may also be forfeited in certain limited circumstances.

 

If shares are acquired using a loan under this plan, the shares are held in trust until the loan is repaid.  For so long as the loan is not due for repayment, the loan is provided at no interest and the loan will be repaid by the dividends from the shares.  The loan must be repaid if the employee ceases employment with the Group.  An employee may direct the trustee to sell the shares to satisfy this repayment obligation.  If the proceeds of the sale are insufficient to fully repay the outstanding loan balance, the Company may forgive the difference.

 

Shares must not be issued under this plan if the total number of shares issued in the last five years under the Company’s employee share, performance option or performance rights plans and the total number of outstanding performance options and performance rights granted under its plans, including any proposed offer, exceed 5% of the number of shares in the issued share capital of the Company at the time of the proposed offer.  This calculation does not include offers or grants made of shares, performance options or performance rights acquired as a result of an offer made to a person situated outside Australia at the time of the offer or offers which did not need disclosure under section 708 of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) (eg. shares provided to executive officers of the Company), otherwise than as a result of relief granted by ASIC.

 

Non-executive directors’ remuneration

 

Non-executive directors are required to receive at least 10% of their fees in the form of shares under this plan.  This arrangement is designed to align directors’ interests with shareholders’ interests, and provides flexibility in the remuneration structure.  The shares are generally acquired twice annually, and directors may receive a greater percentage of their fees in shares (up to a total of 40%), rather than payment in cash. A director will be restricted from dealing in the shares for a ‘restriction period’ of any length between one and ten years (the period is determined taking into account directors’ previously stated preferences).  The shares are transferred to the director on the expiration of this period, unless the director ceases to hold office earlier, or the trustee determines that an event has occurred (eg. a takeover offer being made in relation to the Company).

 

Employee offers

 

A number of offers were made to employees under this plan in 2004 as shown in table 1:

                    the Ownership Offer provides for certain Wealth Management group employees to receive up to 5% of their notional benefit salary in shares, based on length of service (continuing an arrangement in place prior to acquisition of the MLC group), issued biannually.  Eligibility to participate in the Ownership Offer program is dependent upon, inter alia, being employed by the Wealth Management group prior to January 1, 2003;

                    Australian employees may be provided an At-Risk Reward (short-term or annual incentive) for individual and business performance.  Wealth Management group employees may be provided a similar Performance Reward for individual or team contribution to the overall performance of the Wealth Management group.  Eligible employees were able to express a preference to be provided all or part of their reward in shares (and may express a preference for a restriction period of any length between three and ten years);

                    permanent Wealth Management group employees participate in a program known as Owning Our Success which rewards them annually in the form of shares for their contribution to the improvement in the value of the Group and of Wealth Management (measured against an EVA® target).  The January 2004 Owning Our Success offer (shown in Table 1) included only the Group portion, as there was no award under the Wealth Management portion in respect of the year to September 30, 2003.  A similar offer was made to other employees under the staff share allocation plan for the Group portion (refer to

 

156



 

(b) below).  There will be no Owning Our Success offer under the Group portion in respect of the year to September 30, 2004, as the Group EVA® target was not met;

                    recognition awards may be provided in the form of shares to reward individuals for accepting additional responsibilities for a limited period of time, and where there is no related increase in their fixed remuneration.  The provision of shares under this plan is desired over the use of cash payments as it provides a stronger retention and shareholder value link to the reward;

                    commencement benefits were provided to the Chief Executive Officer, Australia, Mr Ahmed Fahour, in September 2004 in the form of shares under this plan; and

                    the MLC group acquired an interest in Medfin Australia Pty Ltd (Medfin) prior to the acquisition of the MLC group by the Group.  Subsequently, the remaining share capital of Medfin has been acquired by the Group, which resulted in an obligation to provide retention benefits to Medfin employees by way of shares in the Company.  The final Medfin offer was made in October 2003.

 

In addition to previous offers under the above programs, details of the following are also included in table 1:

                       in January 2002 and July 2002, the Company paid retention/transition benefits in the form of shares to certain employees of the MLC group to remain within the Group (an arrangement related to the acquisition of the MLC group in 2000); and

                       in November 2001 and May 2002, permanent Wealth Management employees participated in a value share program which rewarded them for improvement in the value of Wealth Management.  This program was replaced by the Owning Our Success program described above.

 

Shareholder approval was sought and given at the 2003 annual general meeting for the provision of ‘deferred shares’ and ‘matching shares’ (under the terms of this plan) to the former Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, Mr Frank Cicutto, as part of his short-term (annual) incentive.  No shares were provided to Mr Cicutto under these arrangements due to his resignation.  The new Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, Mr John Stewart, is required to accept at least half of any short-term (annual) incentive reward in the form of shares, subject to requisite shareholder approval (under the terms of this plan).  The first offer of these shares is intended in February 2005, provided shareholder approval is given at the 2004 annual general meeting (to be held on January 31, 2005).

 

EVA® is a registered trademark of Stern Stewart & Co.

 

(b) National Australia Bank Staff Share Allocation Plan (staff share allocation plan)

 

The staff share allocation plan was approved by shareholders by special resolution in January 1997 and again at the 2002 annual general meeting.  Details of issues and acquisitions under this plan are set out in Table 1 below.

 

This plan provides for the Board to invite any employee of the Group to participate in an offer under this plan.  Under this plan, the Company provides funds (if required) for a trustee to subscribe for or purchase fully paid ordinary shares in the Company on behalf of participating employees.  These shares are held by the trustee for three years, or until the employee ceases employment with the Group.  Employees receive dividends and may exercise voting rights (through the trustee) in respect of the shares, but otherwise cannot deal with the shares until the restriction period concludes.  The shares are not subject to forfeiture.

 

Shares must not be offered under this plan if the total number of shares issued in the last five years under the Company’s employee share, performance option or performance rights plans and the total number of outstanding performance options and performance rights granted under its plans, including any proposed offer, exceed 5% of the number of shares in the issued share capital of the Company at the time of the proposed offer.  This calculation does not include offers or grants made or shares, performance options or performance rights acquired as a result of an offer or grant made to a person situated outside Australia at the time of the offer or grant which did not need disclosure under section 708 of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) (eg. shares provided to executive officers of the Company) otherwise than as a result of relief granted by ASIC.

 

EVA® Share Offer

 

Eligible employees (excluding employees for whom alternative arrangements are in place, eg. those in certain jurisdictions, and Wealth Management group employees) participate in the EVA® Share Offer under the terms of this plan.  This program is designed to offer $1,000 of ordinary shares to each employee when the Group’s EVA® performance is on target.  The 2002 to 2004 offers shown in table 1 have ranged from $930 and $1,250 of shares, reflecting each year’s Group EVA® result.  No EVA® Share Offer will be made in respect of the year to September 30, 2004, as the Group EVA® target was not achieved.

 

(c) Employee Share Savings Plan – UK and Republic of Ireland (employee share savings plan)

 

The employee share savings plan was approved by shareholders in 1995.  Shares acquired under this plan are shown in Table 1 below.  This plan ceased in March 2002, and has been replaced by the National Share Incentive Plan in the UK and the Republic of Ireland (ROI) Group Profit Sharing Scheme (refer to (d) and (e) below).  Full-time and part-time employees of controlled entities in the UK and ROI with at least one full year of continuous service at the beginning of the savings period were eligible to participate in this plan.  This plan allowed for savings out of salary (up to a maximum of 2%) by participating employees and the investment of those savings by the acquisition of fully paid ordinary shares in the Company.  At the end of each six monthly savings period, the Company made a cash contribution sufficient to purchase an equivalent number of shares as that purchased from the accumulated savings of participating employees.

 

157



 

(d) National Share Incentive Plan – UK (share incentive plan)

 

The share incentive plan was approved by shareholders at the 2002 annual general meeting and is constituted under a trust deed made between the Company and National Australia Group SSP Trustee Limited (trustee) dated March 26, 2002 and the rules of this plan.  Within the framework of this plan, employees participate in the National Partnership Share Plan and the EVA® Share Offer.  Shares acquired under this plan are shown in Table 1 below.

 

National Partnership Share Plan

 

Employees in the UK are entitled to purchase up to GBP1,500 of shares each year through the National Partnership Share Plan.  Participants contribute up to 10% of their gross salary, each month, and the trustee uses the contributions to purchase ordinary shares in the Company, which are then held in trust for the participants.  Participants are entitled to receive dividends and exercise voting rights (through the trustee) in respect of the shares and there is no risk of forfeiture.  A participant’s shares must be withdrawn from this plan if that participant leaves the employment of one of the relevant UK controlled entities for any reason.

 

EVA® Share Offer

 

Under this plan, EVA® Share Offers have been made (on similar terms as in Australia as described in (b) above) to eligible employees in the UK in January 2003 and January 2004 as shown in Table 1 below.  The value of shares offered in any year will depend on the Group’s performance against its EVA® target for the previous year to September 30.  These shares are held by the trustee for three years (during which time the shares can be forfeited if the participant is summarily dismissed) or until the employee ceases employment with the Group.  Employees receive dividends and may exercise voting rights (through the trustee) in respect of the shares, but otherwise cannot deal with the shares until the restriction period concludes.  No EVA® Share Offer will be made in respect of the year to September 30, 2004, as the Group EVA® target was not achieved.

 

Under the National Partnership Share Plan and the EVA® Share Offer, the shares will only be free of UK income tax and UK National Insurance contributions if the shares are retained in this plan for five years (except if they are withdrawn earlier for certain specified reasons, eg. death, redundancy or disability).

 

(e) Group Profit Sharing Scheme – Republic of Ireland (profit sharing scheme)

 

The profit sharing scheme was approved by shareholders in January 1996, and again at the 2002 annual general meeting and is constituted under a trust deed made between the Company and National Australia Group SSP (Republic of Ireland) Trustee Limited (trustee) dated January 30, 1996.  This scheme was amended by the Company’s Board in September 2002 to facilitate the introduction of the EVA® Share Offer and Salary Forgone program for the Group’s Republic of Ireland (ROI) employees.

 

Salary Forgone program

 

The Salary Forgone program enables the Group’s ROI employees to save on a monthly basis from their pre-tax salary and to acquire fully paid ordinary shares in the Company with these funds.  The number of shares made available to employees is a function of their monthly contribution (subject to prescribed limits), the Company’s share price at the time shares are acquired and the applicable Australian dollar to Euro exchange rate, with the number of shares being restricted by reference to the number and share price of the shares allocated under the EVA® Share Offer (or a similar offer).  Employees who are ROI tax residents and have been employed within the Group for at least six months will be eligible to participate in the Salary Forgone program in any year during which there is an allocation of shares under the EVA® Share Offer (or a similar offer).  No Salary Forgone program will be made in the year to September 30, 2004 as the Group EVA® target was not achieved.

 

EVA® Share Offer

 

Amendments to this plan in 2002 allowed for the extension of the EVA® Share Offer to ROI employees (on similar terms as in Australia and the UK as described in (b) and (d) above).  Offers were made in January 2003 and January 2004 as shown in Table 1 below.  The value of shares offered in any year will depend on the Group’s performance against its EVA® target for the previous year to September 30.  These shares are held by the trustee for three years or until the employee ceases employment with the Group.  Employees receive dividends and may exercise voting rights (through the trustee) in respect of the shares, but otherwise cannot deal with the shares until the restriction period concludes.  No EVA® Share Offer will be made in respect of the year to September 30, 2004, as the Group EVA® target was not achieved.  The shares are not subject to forfeiture.

 

(f) National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No. 2 (executive share option plan)

 

The executive share option plan was approved by shareholders by special resolution in January 1997 and again at the 2002 annual general meeting and performance options granted under this plan are shown in table 2 below.  It is anticipated that the next performance options grant will be made in February 2005.

 

The executive share option plan provides for the Board to grant performance options to executives of the Group to subscribe for fully paid ordinary shares in the Company.  Each performance option is to subscribe for one fully paid ordinary share in the Company.  The performance options cannot be transferred and are not quoted on ASX.  No payment is required from executives at the time of the grant.  The exercise price per performance option is the market price of the Company’s fully paid ordinary shares as at the date the performance option was granted or such other date determined by the Board (effective date).  The market price is determined as the weighted average of the prices at which the Company’s fully paid ordinary shares were traded on ASX in the one week up to and

 

158



 

including the relevant day.  There are no voting or dividend rights attached to the performance options.  The Board may determine such other terms for the grant of performance options consistent with the ASX Listing Rules and the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).

 

Time and performance hurdles

 

Generally, the performance options may not be exercised before the third anniversary of their grant, and must be exercised before the eighth anniversary (March 2000 to June 2004 grants) or fifth anniversary (September 2004 grant and future grants) of the grant date or effective date.

 

Exercise of the performance options is also subject to satisfaction of a performance hurdle.  The performance hurdle for all performance options issued between March 2000 and June 2004 is measured after the first three years by comparing the performance of the Company with the performance of other companies in a peer group.  This peer group of companies is based on 50 of the companies listed in the S&P/ASX 100 by market capitalisation (excluding the Company) determined at the grant date or effective date.  Performance options become exercisable depending on the maximum total shareholder return (TSR) of the Company relative to the TSR of the peer group companies.  TSR measures share price growth, assuming reinvestment of returns to shareholders including dividends, over consecutive five day (March 2000 to June 2002 grants) or 30 day (March 2003 to June 2004 grants) periods.  This is intended to prevent vesting being achieved based on short-term spikes in the Company’s TSR performance during the performance or vesting period (years three to eight).

 

For performance options granted from June 2002, if the relative performance of the Company during the vesting period (years three to eight) does not reach the median (50th percentile) of the peer group during the vesting period, then no performance options will vest (ie. none are exercisable).  Half of the performance options will vest when the performance of the Company achieves the median (50th percentile) of the peer group, with an additional 2% of the performance options becoming exercisable with every additional percentile achieved.  All (100%) of the performance options will therefore vest when the TSR performance of the Company has reached or exceeded the 75th percentile of the peer group.  Grants prior to June 2002 also allow vesting from the 25th percentile (25% of the performance options) with an additional 1% of the performance options becoming exercisable with every additional percentile achieved up to the 50th percentile.

 

The performance hurdle for performance options issued from September 2004 onwards is measured against two separate peer groups of companies.  The first peer group is 50 of the companies listed in the S&P/ASX 200, and the second is the top financial services sector organisations listed in the S&P/ASX 200 (excluding the Company).  Both peer groups are determined as at the grant date or effective date.  Half of the performance options will become exercisable depending on the maximum TSR (measured over 30 consecutive days) of the Company relative to the first peer group, and the other half relative to the second peer group.  The highest rank which is sustained for a 30 consecutive day period relative to each peer group will determine the percentage of performance options which will vest in relation to that peer group.  If the performance of the Company during the vesting period (years three to five) does not exceed the median (50th percentile) of either peer group during the vesting period, then no performance options will vest (ie. none are exercisable).  Half of each portion of performance options will vest when the performance of the Company achieves the 51st percentile of the relevant peer group, with an additional 2% of each portion of performance options becoming exercisable with every additional percentile achieved.  All (100%) of the performance options will therefore vest when the TSR performance of the Company has exceeded the 75th percentile of each peer group.

 

Lapsing of performance options

 

Performance options will lapse if unexercised on or before their expiry date at the end of eight years (March 2000 to June 2004 grants) or five years (September 2004 grant and future grants).  Performance options will also generally lapse 30 days (or such shorter time as determined at the time of grant) after an executive ceases to be employed by the Group unless the Board determines otherwise (generally only in cases of retirement, redundancy, contract completion, death, or total and permanent disablement).  For some grants, performance options may be automatically retained in cases of death or total and permanent disablement.

 

In some circumstances, performance options may, however, be exercised before the third anniversary of the grant and notwithstanding the performance hurdle (described above) where an executive ceases employment with the Group as the result of death or total and permanent disablement.  The Board may also allow optionholders to exercise the performance options irrespective of the normal criteria where certain events occur, such as the making of a takeover offer or announcement to the holders of fully paid ordinary shares in the Company.

 

A loan may be available to executives if and when they wish to exercise their performance options subject to the provisions of applicable laws and regulations (including the United States Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002).  The rules of this plan provide that the rate of interest applicable to such a loan shall be the Company’s base lending rate plus any margin determined by the Board.  Dividends payable in respect of a loan share are applied firstly towards payment of any interest which is due, and secondly towards repayment of the principal amount outstanding under the loan.

 

Performance options must not be granted if the total number of shares issued in the last five years under the Company’s employee share, option and performance rights plans and the total number of outstanding performance options and performance rights under its plans, including the proposed offer or grant, exceed 5% of the number of shares in the issued share capital of the Company at the time of the proposed offer or grant.  This calculation does not include offers or grants made or shares, performance options or performance rights acquired as a result of an offer or grant made to a person situated outside Australia at the time of the offer or grant or which did not need disclosure under section 708 of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) (eg. shares provided to executive officers of the Company) otherwise than as a result of relief granted by ASIC.

 

159



 

(g)                                 National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan (performance rights plan)

 

The performance rights plan was approved by shareholders at the 2002 annual general meeting and rights issued under this plan are shown in Table 2.  It is anticipated that the next performance rights grant will be made in February 2005.

 

This plan provides for the Board to grant performance rights to executives of the Group to subscribe for fully paid ordinary shares in the Company.  Each performance right is to subscribe for one fully paid ordinary share in the Company.  The performance rights cannot be transferred and are not quoted on ASX.

 

No payment is required from executives at the time of the grant, but the holder of performance rights must pay a nominal exercise price to exercise those rights.  The total exercise price payable on the exercise of any rights on a particular day is $1.00, irrespective of the number of rights exercised on that day.  There are no voting or dividend rights attached to the rights.  The Board may determine such other terms for the grant of performance rights consistent with ASX Listing Rules and the terms of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).

 

Exercise of the performance rights is subject to the same time and performance hurdle as performance options issued under the executive share option plan (refer to (f) above).   However, performance rights were only granted to executives for the first time in March 2003.  An unexercised performance right will lapse in similar circumstances to an unexercised performance option granted under the executive share option plan.

 

Performance rights cannot be granted under the performance rights plan if the number of shares to be received on exercise of those performance rights together with all shares issued under the Company’s employee incentive plans over the last five years and the number of outstanding performance options and performance rights issued under those plans exceed 5% of the Company’s issued share capital.  This calculation does not include offers or grants made or shares, performance options or performance rights acquired as a result of an offer or grant made to a person situated outside Australia at the time of the offer or grant or which did not need disclosure under section 708 of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) (eg. shares provided for no consideration under the staff share allocation plan) otherwise than as a result of relief granted by ASIC.

 

Table 1 Employee share plans

 

 

Current employee share plans (1)

 

Issue date

 

No. of eligible
participants

 

Issue price (2)

 

No. of fully-paid
ordinary shares

 

Staff share ownership plan

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2001 Wealth Management Ownership Offer

 

Nov 9, 2001

 

3,044

 

$

30.39

 

70,250

 

2001 Wealth Management value share

 

Nov 9, 2001

 

511

 

$

30.39

 

20,225

 

2001 Wealth Management Medfin offer

 

Nov 9, 2001

 

32

 

$

30.39

 

6,676

 

2001 Wealth Management Performance Reward

 

Dec 19, 2001

 

601

 

$

30.97

 

281,458

 

2002 Wealth Management transition benefits (3)

 

Jan 11, 2002

 

68

 

$

31.42

 

72,498

 

2002 Non-executive directors’ shares

 

Mar 26, 2002

 

8

 

$

34.48

 

4,532

 

2002 Wealth Management Ownership Offer

 

May 31, 2002

 

2,814

 

$

36.06

 

72,764

 

2002 Wealth Management value share

 

May 31, 2002

 

1,371

 

$

36.06

 

48,381

 

2002 Wealth Management Performance Reward

 

May 31, 2002

 

21

 

$

36.06

 

2,179

 

2002 Wealth Management transition benefits (3)

 

Jul 8, 2002

 

39

 

$

33.91

 

111,241

 

2002 Non-executive directors’ shares

 

Aug 16, 2002

 

8

 

$

34.51

 

4,701

 

2002 Wealth Management Medfin offer

 

Nov 14, 2002

 

15

 

$

32.37

 

5,478

 

2002 Wealth Management Ownership Offer

 

Nov 14, 2002

 

3,112

 

$

32.37

 

86,537

 

2002 Wealth Management Performance Reward

 

Nov 28, 2002

 

900

 

$

33.13

 

279,799

 

2002 At-Risk Reward

 

Jan 3, 2003

 

42

 

$

31.89

 

20,628

 

2003 Non-executive directors’ shares

 

Feb 27, 2003

 

8

 

$

29.23

 

7,457

 

2003 Wealth Management Ownership Offer

 

May 29, 2003

 

3,054

 

$

32.65

 

94,139

 

2003 Wealth Management Performance Reward

 

May 29, 2003

 

13

 

$

32.65

 

1,391

 

2003 Non-executive directors’ shares

 

Sep 26, 2003

 

8

 

$

30.45

 

5,842

 

2003 Wealth Management Medfin offer

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

15

 

$

30.98

 

5,723

 

2003 Wealth Management Ownership

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

2,818

 

$

30.98

 

99,951

 

2003 Wealth Management Performance Reward

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

812

 

$

30.25

 

221,008

 

2003 At-Risk Reward

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

361

 

$

30.25

 

51,048

 

2004 Wealth Management Owning Our Success (EVA®)

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

3,006

 

$

30.25

 

123,246

 

2004 Wealth Management Ownership Offer

 

May 20, 2004

 

2,588

 

$

28.87

 

109,131

 

2004 Wealth Management Performance Reward

 

May 20, 2004

 

12

 

$

28.87

 

1,154

 

2004 Non-executive directors’ shares

 

June 8, 2004

 

7

 

$

30.08

 

6,090

 

 

160



 

Current employee share plans (1)

 

Issue date

 

No. of eligible
participants

 

Issue price (2)

 

No. of fully paid
ordinary shares

 

2004 Recognition awards

 

Jul & Sep 2004

 

3

 

$

29.51

 

7,083

 

2004 Recognition awards

 

Sep 29, 2004

 

3

 

$

29.90

 

2,405

 

2004 Commencement benefits

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

1

 

$

26.59

 

300,865

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Staff share allocation plan

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2002 National EVA® Share Offer

 

Jan 4, 2002

 

24,227

 

$

31.92

 

703,509

 

2003 National EVA® Share Offer

 

Jan 3, 2003

 

23,426

 

$

31.89

 

702,780

 

2004 National EVA® Share Offer

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

24,170

 

$

30.25

 

990,877

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Employee share savings plan

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Aug 1, 2001 – Jan 31, 2002 (3)

 

 

 

12,562

 

$

34.81

 

139,008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Share incentive plan (United Kingdom)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2002 National Partnership Share Plan (3)

 

May 2002 – Sep 2002

 

12,587

 

$

34.49

(4)

60,668

 

2003 National Partnership Share Plan (3)

 

Oct 2002 – Sep 2003

 

13,718

 

$

29.33

(4)

153,547

 

2003 National EVA® Share Offer

 

Jan 3, 2003

 

11,408

 

$

31.89

 

342,240

 

2004 National Partnership Share Plan (3)

 

Oct 2003 – Sep 2004

 

13,505

 

$

29.30

(4)

157,239

 

2004 National EVA® Share Offer

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

11,687

 

$

30.25

 

479,151

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Profit sharing scheme (Republic of Ireland)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2003 National EVA® Share Offer

 

Jan 3, 2003

 

659

 

$

31.89

 

19,770

 

2003 Salary Forgone Program (3)

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

807

 

$

31.27

 

9,757

 

2004 National EVA® Share Offer

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

660

 

$

30.25

 

27,060

 

 


(1)                 Under ASX Listing Rules, shares, performance options and performance rights may not be issued to company directors under an employee incentive scheme without specific shareholder approval.  Shareholders approved the issue of securities to the relevant individuals at the relevant annual general meeting.  Shareholder approval for the continuation of the non-executive directors’ share arrangements was confirmed at the 2003 annual general meeting.

 

(2)                 The issue price is generally the weighted average market price of the Company’s ordinary shares that were traded on ASX in the week up to and including the day on which the shares were issued.

 

(3)                 These shares were purchased on-market.

 

(4)                 Average of monthly issue prices.

 

Table 2 Executive share option plan and performance rights plan

 

Issue date

 

Exercise
period (1)

 

Exercise
price of
options

 

No. held at
Sep 30, 2004

 

No. lapsed or
cancelled
during 2004 (2)

 

No. exercised
during 2004

 

No. held at
Sep 30, 2003

 

No. lapsed or
cancelled
during 2003 (2)

 

No. exercised

during 2003

 

Fair value as
at grant date

 

Executive share option plan

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mar 23, 2000

 

Mar 23, 2003 –

 

$

21.29

 

3,019,000

 

10,500

 

1,446,000

 

4,475,500

 

27,500

 

5,475,500

 

$

47,194,260

 

 

 

Mar 22, 2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sep 28, 2000

 

Sep 28, 2003 –

 

$

24.89

 

489,300

 

 

228,200

 

717,500

 

60,000

 

 

$

5,168,475

 

 

 

Sep 27, 2008

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mar 23, 2001

 

Mar 23, 2004 –

 

$

27.85

 

9,819,200

 

557,500

 

530,800

 

10,907,500

 

476,000

 

 

$

59,320,165

 

 

 

Mar 22, 2009

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sep 14, 2001

 

Sep 14, 2004 –

 

$

28.87

 

1,118,500

 

15,000

 

 

1,133,500

 

29,000

 

 

$

6,238,100

 

 

 

Sep 13, 2009

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jun 14, 2002

 

Jun 14, 2005 –

 

$

36.14

 

10,342,000

 

417,500

 

 

10,759,500

 

501,500

 

 

$

71,861,130

 

 

 

Jun 13, 2010

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mar 21, 2003

 

Mar 21, 2006 –

 

$

30.46

 

5,433,500

 

515,500

 

 

5,949,000

 

29,750

 

 

$

26,964,163

 

 

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Aug 8, 2003

 

Mar 21, 2006 –

 

$

30.46

 

125,000

 

 

 

125,000

 

 

 

$

563,750

 

 

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

161



 

Issue date

 

Exercise
period (1)

 

Exercise
price of
options

 

No. held at
Sep 30, 2004

 

No. lapsed or
cancelled
during 2004 (2)

 

No. exercised
during 2004

 

No. held at
Sep 30, 2003

 

No. lapsed or
cancelled
during 2003 (2)

 

No. exercised
during 2003

 

Fair value as
at grant date

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

Mar 21, 2006 –

 

$

30.98

 

102,500

 

25,000

 

 

 

 

 

$

559,725

 

 

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 –

 

$

30.25

 

5,023,225

 

35,500

 

 

 

 

 

$

23,826,594

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan 30, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 –

 

$

30.25

 

448,000

 

19,750

 

 

 

 

 

$

2,203,103

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 –

 

$

30.25

 

156,500

 

 

 

 

 

 

$

677,645

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 –

 

$

29.91

 

134,625

 

 

 

 

 

 

$

595,043

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Sep 1, 2007 –

 

$

26.59

 

390,625

 

 

 

 

 

 

$

1,562,500

 

 

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performance rights plan

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mar 21, 2003

 

Mar 21, 2006 –

 

$

1.00

(3)

1,358,516

 

153,878

 

 

1,512,394

 

7,438

 

 

$

33,466,701

 

 

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Aug 8, 2003

 

Mar 21, 2006 –

 

$

1.00

(3)

31,250

 

 

 

31,250

 

 

 

$

688,125

 

 

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

Mar 21, 2006 –

 

$

1.00

(3)

25,625

 

6,250

 

 

 

 

 

$

720,056

 

 

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 –

 

$

1.00

(3)

1,250,022

 

8,873

 

 

 

 

 

$

27,519,444

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jan 30, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 –

 

$

1.00

(3)

112,000

 

4,938

 

 

 

 

 

$

2,556,265

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 16, 2007 –

 

$

1.00

(3)

72,782

 

 

 

 

 

 

$

1,607,754

 

 

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Sep 1, 2007 –

 

$

1.00

(3)

97,656

 

 

 

 

 

 

$

1,708,980

 

 

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


(1)       The latest date to exercise performance options and performance rights is the last date of the exercise period.  The exercise period for a particular grant may reference the grant date, or may reference an effective date, which is different to the grant date.  An effective date may be used to link an executive’s reward to a particular time period, eg. an effective date may be the commencement date of an individual’s employment, although the securities are granted some time after commencement.

 

(2)       Performance options and performance rights generally lapse 30 days after cessation of employment unless otherwise determined by the Board (as provided for in the terms attaching to each grant of performance options and performance rights).

 

(3)       A notional sum of $1.00 is payable by the holder on exercise of all performance rights exercised on any particular day.

 

The market price of the Company’s shares at September 30, 2004 was $26.98 (2003: $30.80, 2002: $33.48, 2001: $25.66).

 

No expense is recognised in the profit and loss account in relation to performance options and performance rights granted to executives.  If they are exercised, the amounts receivable from executives are recognised in the balance sheet as contributed equity.

 

The fair value of performance options issued on October 30, 2003 was $4.39 each, on January 16, 2004 and January 30, 2004 was $4.71 each, on June 25, 2004 (with an exercise price of $30.25) was $4.33 each*, on June 25, 2004 (with an exercise price of $29.91) was $4.42 each*, and on September 30, 2004 was $4.00 each (August 2003 and March 2003: $4.51, June 2002: $6.38 each, September 2001: $5.33 each, March 2001: $4.91 each, September 2000: $5.89 each, March 2000: $4.47 each).

 

162



 

* The fair value of the two grants on June 25, 2004 varies, as the exercise price is an input to the valuation model.  The fair value of performance rights issued on October 30, 2003 was $22.59 each, on January 16, 2004 and January 30, 2004 was $21.86 each, on June 25, 2004 was $22.09 each, and on September 30, 2004 was $17.50 each (August 2003 and March 2003: $22.02 each).

 

Valuations are based on a numerical pricing method, which takes into account both the probability of achieving the performance hurdle required for these performance options or performance rights to vest, and the probability of early exercise after vesting. The numerical pricing model applied by the Company to value performance options and performance rights is a simulated version of the Black-Scholes method as prescribed by US accounting standard SFAS 123 “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation”.  The simulation approach allows the valuation to take into account both the probability of achieving the performance hurdle required for the performance options or performance rights to vest and the potential for early exercise of vested performance options or performance rights.  The Black-Scholes method is modified in order to incorporate the performance hurdle requirements that are integral to the number of performance options or performance rights vesting (which may be zero), and the option or performance rights holder’s ability to exercise the performance option or performance right.  The key assumptions and inputs for the valuation model are the volatility of the Company’s share price, the risk-free interest rate and the Company’s expected dividend yield.  Assumptions for the correlations and volatilities of share price returns for companies in the performance hurdle peer group are also required, but are of lesser importance to the valuation results.  The following significant assumptions were adopted to determine the fair value of performance options and performance rights:

 

 

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 16 & Jan 30,
2004

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

Risk-free interest rate (per annum)

 

5.54

%

5.60

%

5.50

%

5.57

%

Life of performance options or performance rights

 

5 years

 

8 years

 

8 years

 

8 years

 

Volatility of share price

 

21.35

%

20.90

%

21.70

%

18.00

%

Dividend rate (per annum)

 

5.13

%

5.30

%

5.10

%

4.71

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Aug 8, 2003

 

Mar 21, 2003

 

Jun 14, 2002

 

Sep 14, 2001

 

Mar 23, 2001

 

Risk-free interest rate (per annum)

 

5.38

%

5.38

%

5.89

%

5.91

%

5.64

%

Life of performance options or performance rights

 

8 years

 

8 years

 

8 years

 

8 years

 

8 years

 

Volatility of share price

 

18.00

%

18.00

%

15.00

%

24.47

%

20.74

%

Dividend rate (per annum)

 

4.71

%

4.71

%

3.73

%

4.84

%

4.56

%

 

Refer to (f) and (g) above for details of the plans and the hurdles that must be achieved before the performance options and performance rights can be exercised.

 

163



 

39 Average balance sheets and related interest

 

The following tables set forth the major categories of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, together with their respective interest rates earned or paid by the Group.  Averages are predominantly daily averages.  Interest income figures include interest income on non-accruing loans to the extent cash payments have been received (refer to note 1(p)(iii)).  Amounts classified as overseas represent interest-earning assets or interest-bearing liabilities of the controlled entities and overseas branches.  Non-accrual loans are included with interest-earning assets within loans and advances.  Comparative amounts have been reclassified to accord with changes in presentation made in 2004 (refer to note 1(d) for further information).

 

Average assets and interest income

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

Average
balance

 

Interest

 

Average
rate

 

Average
balance

 

Interest

 

Average
rate

 

Average
balance

 

Interest

 

Average
rate

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

% pa

 

$m

 

$m

 

% pa

 

$m

 

$m

 

% pa

 

Average interest-earning assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due from other financial institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

7,801

 

336

 

4.31

 

8,022

 

349

 

4.35

 

5,604

 

240

 

4.28

 

Overseas

 

16,383

 

462

 

2.82

 

23,208

 

744

 

3.21

 

19,427

 

680

 

3.50

 

Marketable debt securities (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

21,276

 

1,152

 

5.41

 

16,433

 

803

 

4.89

 

13,910

 

671

 

4.82

 

Overseas

 

14,672

 

526

 

3.59

 

18,066

 

648

 

3.59

 

21,524

 

791

 

3.67

 

Loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

143,102

 

9,952

 

6.95

 

125,641

 

8,528

 

6.79

 

108,148

 

7,385

 

6.83

 

Overseas

 

97,433

 

5,927

 

6.08

 

96,864

 

5,897

 

6.09

 

94,705

 

6,072

 

6.41

 

Regulatory deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

228

 

2

 

0.88

 

211

 

2

 

0.95

 

157

 

3

 

1.91

 

Other interest-earning assets (2)

 

5,605

 

293

 

n/a

 

4,873

 

51

 

n/a

 

7,052

 

592

 

n/a

 

Intra-Group loans

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

15,622

 

415

 

2.66

 

18,076

 

622

 

3.44

 

13,213

 

455

 

3.44

 

Average interest-earning assets and interest income including ntra-group loans

 

322,122

 

19,065

 

5.92

 

311,394

 

17,644

 

5.67

 

283,740

 

16,889

 

5.95

 

Intra-Group loans eliminations

 

(15,622

)

(415

)

2.66

 

(18,076

)

(622

)

3.44

 

(13,213

)

(455

)

3.44

 

Total average interest-earning assets and interest income

 

306,500

 

18,650

 

6.08

 

293,318

 

17,022

 

5.80

 

270,527

 

16,434

 

6.07

 

Average non-interest-earning assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

18,257

 

 

 

 

 

21,346

 

 

 

 

 

21,231

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

52

 

 

 

 

 

135

 

 

 

 

 

319

 

 

 

 

 

Investments relating to life insurance business (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

34,809

 

 

 

 

 

31,246

 

 

 

 

 

32,178

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

309

 

 

 

 

 

490

 

 

 

 

 

403

 

 

 

 

 

Property, plant and equipment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

1,343

 

 

 

 

 

1,362

 

 

 

 

 

1,381

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

819

 

 

 

 

 

865

 

 

 

 

 

979

 

 

 

 

 

Other assets (4)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

24,915

 

 

 

 

 

22,454

 

 

 

 

 

20,972

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

21,266

 

 

 

 

 

25,389

 

 

 

 

 

23,323

 

 

 

 

 

Total average non-interest- earning assets

 

101,770

 

 

 

 

 

103,287

 

 

 

 

 

100,786

 

 

 

 

 

Provision for doubtful debts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

(1,190

)

 

 

 

 

(1,200

)

 

 

 

 

(1,413

)

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

(1,074

)

 

 

 

 

(1,056

)

 

 

 

 

(1,258

)

 

 

 

 

Total average assets

 

406,006

 

 

 

 

 

394,349

 

 

 

 

 

368,642

 

 

 

 

 

Percentage of total average assets applicable to overseas operations

 

38.1

%

 

 

 

 

42.6

%

 

 

 

 

44.7

%

 

 

 

 

 

164



 

Average liabilities and interest expense

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

Average
balance

 

Interest

 

Average
rate

 

Average
balance

 

Interest

 

Average
rate

 

Average
balance

 

Interest

 

Average
rate

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

% pa

 

$m

 

$m

 

% pa

 

$m

 

$m

 

% pa

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Average interest-bearing liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

13,096

 

612

 

4.67

 

13,182

 

548

 

4.16

 

10,539

 

446

 

4.23

 

Overseas

 

32,668

 

975

 

2.98

 

40,190

 

1,294

 

3.22

 

34,993

 

1,100

 

3.14

 

Savings (short-term) deposits (5)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

8,079

 

371

 

4.59

 

8,010

 

337

 

4.21

 

6,035

 

255

 

4.23

 

Overseas

 

17,039

 

396

 

2.32

 

17,590

 

396

 

2.25

 

17,215

 

382

 

2.22

 

Other on-demand deposits (5)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

37,905

 

1,172

 

3.09

 

36,290

 

1,041

 

2.87

 

35,022

 

872

 

2.49

 

Overseas

 

21,068

 

341

 

1.62

 

21,811

 

339

 

1.55

 

23,144

 

422

 

1.82

 

Term deposits and certificates of deposits (1) (5) (6)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

46,076

 

2,330

 

5.06

 

38,335

 

1,652

 

4.31

 

30,548

 

1,341

 

4.39

 

Overseas

 

50,722

 

1,817

 

3.58

 

51,202

 

1,815

 

3.54

 

50,554

 

1,930

 

3.82

 

Government and official institution deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

907

 

41

 

4.52

 

894

 

36

 

4.03

 

805

 

31

 

3.85

 

Overseas

 

1,175

 

13

 

1.11

 

1,948

 

23

 

1.18

 

1,706

 

39

 

2.29

 

Short-term borrowings (5)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

12,534

 

536

 

4.28

 

6,665

 

315

 

4.73

 

5,381

 

257

 

4.78

 

Overseas

 

6,487

 

90

 

1.39

 

4,170

 

50

 

1.20

 

5,654

 

222

 

3.93

 

Long-term borrowings

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

26,051

 

1,013

 

3.89

 

22,143

 

791

 

3.57

 

21,810

 

931

 

4.27

 

Overseas

 

1,208

 

64

 

5.30

 

577

 

25

 

4.33

 

3,061

 

105

 

3.43

 

Other debt issues

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

344

 

15

 

4.36

 

399

 

20

 

5.01

 

626

 

29

 

4.63

 

Overseas

 

1,305

 

108

 

8.28

 

1,246

 

125

 

10.03

 

1,167

 

142

 

12.17

 

Other interest-bearing liabilities (2)

 

178

 

1,565

 

n/a

 

838

 

796

 

n/a

 

1,615

 

708

 

n/a

 

Intra-Group loans

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

15,622

 

415

 

2.66

 

18,076

 

622

 

3.44

 

13,213

 

455

 

3.44

 

Average interest-bearing liabilities and interest expense including Intra-Group

 

292,464

 

11,874

 

4.06

 

283,566

 

10,225

 

3.61

 

263,088

 

9,667

 

3.67

 

Intra-Group eliminations

 

(15,622

)

(415

)

2.66

 

(18,076

)

(622

)

3.44

 

(13,213

)

(455

)

3.44

 

Total average interest-bearing liabilities and interest expense

 

276,842

 

11,459

 

4.14

 

265,490

 

9,603

 

3.62

 

249,875

 

9,212

 

3.69

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Average non-interest-bearing liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liability on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

18,257

 

 

 

 

 

21,346

 

 

 

 

 

21,231

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

52

 

 

 

 

 

135

 

 

 

 

 

319

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits not bearing interest

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

5,936

 

 

 

 

 

5,215

 

 

 

 

 

4,790

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

6,960

 

 

 

 

 

7,049

 

 

 

 

 

6,733

 

 

 

 

 

Life insurance policy liabilities (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

33,014

 

 

 

 

 

30,782

 

 

 

 

 

30,760

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

404

 

 

 

 

 

530

 

 

 

 

 

319

 

 

 

 

 

Other liabilities (4)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

15,369

 

 

 

 

 

16,485

 

 

 

 

 

13,888

 

 

 

 

 

Overseas

 

21,370

 

 

 

 

 

23,206

 

 

 

 

 

16,880

 

 

 

 

 

Total average non-interest- bearing liabilities

 

101,362

 

 

 

 

 

104,748

 

 

 

 

 

94,920

 

 

 

 

 

Total average liabilities

 

378,204

 

 

 

 

 

370,238

 

 

 

 

 

344,795

 

 

 

 

 

 

165



 

Average equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ordinary shares

 

6,305

 

 

 

 

 

6,559

 

 

 

 

 

7,878

 

 

 

 

 

Preference shares

 

227

 

 

 

 

 

730

 

 

 

 

 

730

 

 

 

 

 

Trust Preferred Securities

 

975

 

 

 

 

 

5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

National Income Securities

 

1,945

 

 

 

 

 

1,945

 

 

 

 

 

1,945

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

9,452

 

 

 

 

 

9,239

 

 

 

 

 

10,553

 

 

 

 

 

Reserves

 

1,079

 

 

 

 

 

1,285

 

 

 

 

 

1,811

 

 

 

 

 

Retained profits

 

13,957

 

 

 

 

 

12,735

 

 

 

 

 

11,415

 

 

 

 

 

Parent entity interest

 

24,488

 

 

 

 

 

23,259

 

 

 

 

 

23,779

 

 

 

 

 

Outside equity interest in controlled entities

 

3,314

 

 

 

 

 

852

 

 

 

 

 

68

 

 

 

 

 

Total average equity

 

27,802

 

 

 

 

 

24,111

 

 

 

 

 

23,847

 

 

 

 

 

Total average liabilities and equity

 

406,006

 

 

 

 

 

394,349

 

 

 

 

 

368,642

 

 

 

 

 

Percentage of total average liabilities applicable to overseas operations

 

42.4

%

 

 

 

 

45.8

%

 

 

 

 

47.1

%

 

 

 

 

 


(1)       Interest income associated with NAB-issued certificates of deposit repurchased by the Group has been reclassified from marketable debt securities to term deposits and certificates of deposit.  As a result, amounts of $78 million and $41 million have been reclassified for the 2003 and 2002 years respectively.

 

(2)       Includes interest on derivatives and escrow deposits.

 

(3)       Included within investments relating to life insurance business are interest-earning debt securities (refer to note 15).  The interest earned from these securities is reported in life insurance income, as shown in note 4, and has therefore been treated as non-interest-earning for the purposes of this note.  The assets and liabilities held in the statutory funds of the Group’s Australian life insurance business are subject to restrictions of the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth) (refer to note 1(o)).

 

(4)       To ensure consistent classification across notes to the financial statements, the gross up of overseas trading derivatives has been revised.  For the 2003 and 2002 years, these gross up amounts are $12,088 million and $6,692 million, respectively.

 

(5)       To ensure consistent classifications across notes to the financial statements, some comparative amounts have been reclassified within categories of deposits and other borrowings.  Amounts of $12,238 million and $9,444 million for the 2003 and 2002 years, respectively, have been reclassified from term deposits and certificates of deposit to savings (short-term) deposits (2003: $908 million, 2002: $457 million), other on-demand deposits (2003: $5,110 million, 2002: $4,301 million) and short— term borrowings (2003: $6,220 million, 2002: $4,686 million).  Associated interest expenses have also been reclassified.

 

(6)       The sum of term deposits and certificates of deposit equates to time deposits.

 

40 Maturity analysis

 

The following tables represent a breakdown of the Group’s statement of financial position for the last two years as at September 30 by contractual maturity.  The majority of the longer-term monetary assets are variable rate products, with actual maturities shorter than the contractual terms.  Accordingly, this information is not relied upon by the Group in its management of interest rate risk (refer to note 41 for information on interest rate sensitivity).  Comparative amounts have been reclassified to accord with changes in presentation made in 2004 (refer to note 1(d) for further information).

 

 

 

Group 2004

 

 

 

At call

 

Overdrafts

 

0 to 3
month(s)

 

3 to 12
months

 

1 to 5
year(s)

 

Over 5
years

 

No specific
maturity

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

8,080

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8,080

 

Due from other financial institutions

 

9,885

 

34

 

9,159

 

3,368

 

1,031

 

17

 

 

23,494

 

Due from customers on acceptances

 

 

 

15,863

 

481

 

 

 

 

16,344

 

Trading securities

 

 

 

24,248

 

 

 

 

 

24,248

 

Trading derivatives (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

17,939

 

17,939

 

Available for sale securities

 

 

 

2,228

 

1,332

 

1,047

 

3

 

 

4,610

 

Investment securities

 

 

 

6,608

 

439

 

4,360

 

106

 

 

11,513

 

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

41,013

 

41,013

 

Loans and advances (2)

 

9,836

 

18,763

 

24,241

 

30,205

 

53,820

 

110,971

 

 

247,836

 

All other assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16,232

 

16,232

 

Total assets

 

27,801

 

18,797

 

82,347

 

35,825

 

60,258

 

111,097

 

75,184

 

411,309

 

 

166



 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

12,717

 

3

 

18,944

 

9,168

 

510

 

702

 

 

42,044

 

Liability on acceptances

 

 

 

15,863

 

481

 

 

 

 

16,344

 

Trading derivatives (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16,150

 

16,150

 

Deposits and borrowings

 

106,629

 

 

93,237

 

17,750

 

1,531

 

1,605

 

 

220,752

 

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

36,134

 

36,134

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

 

 

848

 

3,825

 

19,578

 

8,329

 

(7

)

32,573

 

Other debt issues

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,612

 

1,612

 

All other liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

15,934

 

15,934

 

Total liabilities

 

119,346

 

3

 

128,892

 

31,224

 

21,619

 

10,636

 

69,823

 

381,543

 

Net assets/(liabilities)

 

(91,545

)

18,794

 

(46,545

)

4,601

 

38,639

 

100,461

 

5,361

 

29,766

 

 

 

 

Group 2003

 

 

 

At call

 

Overdrafts

 

0 to 3
month(s)

 

3 to 12
months

 

1 to 5
year(s)

 

Over 5
years

 

No specific
maturity

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

8,405

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8,405

 

Due from other financial institutions

 

3,420

 

67

 

18,379

 

6,188

 

945

 

235

 

 

29,234

 

Due from customers on acceptances

 

 

 

18,950

 

594

 

18

 

 

 

19,562

 

Trading securities

 

 

 

23,724

 

 

 

 

 

23,724

 

Trading derivatives (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

23,644

 

23,644

 

Available for sale securities

 

52

 

 

2,697

 

2,067

 

1,676

 

21

 

 

6,513

 

Investment securities

 

 

 

4,129

 

594

 

3,286

 

638

 

 

8,647

 

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

35,846

 

35,846

 

Loans and advances (2)

 

7,406

 

17,205

 

13,967

 

34,873

 

52,600

 

99,684

 

 

225,735

 

All other assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16,161

 

16,161

 

Total assets

 

19,283

 

17,272

 

81,846

 

44,316

 

58,525

 

100,578

 

75,651

 

397,471

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

10,231

 

45

 

32,372

 

7,264

 

1,880

 

738

 

 

52,530

 

Liability on acceptances

 

 

 

18,950

 

594

 

18

 

 

 

19,562

 

Trading derivatives (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

21,479

 

21,479

 

Deposits and borrowings

 

107,758

 

 

73,831

 

12,554

 

5,697

 

913

 

441

 

201,194

 

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

32,457

 

32,457

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

 

 

1,623

 

3,467

 

13,768

 

5,410

 

(11

)

24,257

 

Other debt issues

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,743

 

1,743

 

All other liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

17,038

 

17,038

 

Total liabilities

 

117,989

 

45

 

126,776

 

23,879

 

21,363

 

7,061

 

73,147

 

370,260

 

Net assets/(liabilities)

 

(98,706

)

17,227

 

(44,930

)

20,437

 

37,162

 

93,517

 

2,504

 

27,211

 

 


(1)    The underlying derivative contracts have varying contractual maturity dates; however, the fair value of these contracts at balance date is more appropriately classified as no specific maturity.  This is because the fair value amounts at balance date do not necessarily represent the future cash flows of the derivative contracts at their maturity dates and would therefore not be indicative of their liquidity and solvency position.  Trading derivative positions are managed on a net basis and are highly liquid.

 

(2)    Includes provisions for doubtful debts as disclosed in note 17 and unearned income as disclosed in note 16.

 

167



 

41 Interest rate risk

 

The following tables represent a breakdown, by region and repricing dates or contractual maturity, whichever is the earlier, of the Group’s assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet items for the last two years at September 30.  As interest rates and yield curves change over time, the Group may be exposed to a loss in earnings due to the effects of interest rates on the structure of the balance sheet.  Sensitivity to interest rates arises from mismatches in the repricing dates, cash flows and other characteristics of the assets and their corresponding liability funding.  These mismatches are actively managed as part of the overall interest rate risk management process which is conducted on a regional basis in accordance with Group Balance Sheet Management policy and guidelines.  In managing the structural interest rate risk, the primary objectives are to limit the extent to which net interest income could be impacted from an adverse movement in interest rates and to maximise shareholder wealth.

 

Life insurance investment assets have been included in the following tables.  The interest income on these assets supports the life insurance policies issued by the Group’s life insurance business and does not contribute to market risk within the Group’s banking operations.  The assets and liabilities held in the statutory funds are subject to restrictions of the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth) (refer to note 1(o) and (x)).

 

The tables below provide details of the repricing periods of all interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities of the Group.  To obtain an understanding of the effective interest earned/paid on each of the assets and liabilities set out below, refer to note 39.  Comparative amounts have been reclassified to accord with changes in presentation made in 2004 (refer to note 1(d) for further information).

 

Australia – 2004

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Non-interest-
earning/
bearing

 

Total

 

Weighted
average
effective
interest rate

 

Repricing period

 

0 to 3
month(s)

 

3 to 12
month(s)

 

1 to 5
year(s)

 

Over
5 years

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

% pa

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

923

 

 

 

 

3,154

 

4,077

 

5.2

%

Due from other financial institutions

 

8,383

 

 

 

 

14

 

8,397

 

5.7

%

Due from customers on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

16,267

 

16,267

 

 

Trading securities

 

22,239

 

 

 

 

 

22,239

 

4.9

%

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

9,010

 

9,010

 

 

Available for sale and investment securities

 

495

 

232

 

 

 

 

727

 

7.6

%

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

7,978

 

450

 

665

 

1,308

 

29,952

 

40,353

 

6.2

%

Loans and advances

 

106,845

 

15,559

 

22,740

 

500

 

318

 

145,962

 

7.0

%

Other assets

 

 

 

 

 

9,438

 

9,438

 

 

Total assets

 

146,863

 

16,241

 

23,405

 

1,808

 

68,153

 

256,470

 

n/a

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

12,727

 

 

 

 

482

 

13,209

 

5.4

%

Liability on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

16,267

 

16,267

 

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

7,312

 

7,312

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

104,235

 

7,375

 

344

 

7

 

6,050

 

118,011

 

3.6

%

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

35,708

 

35,708

 

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

19,074

 

647

 

7,437

 

4,291

 

 

31,449

 

5.7

%

Other debt issues

 

350

 

 

 

1,262

 

 

1,612

 

7.4

%

Other liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

8,562

 

8,562

 

 

Total equity

 

 

 

 

 

17,704

 

17,704

 

 

Total liabilities

 

136,386

 

8,022

 

7,781

 

5,560

 

92,085

 

249,834

 

n/a

 

Off-balance sheet items attracting interest rate sensitivity

 

(602

)

(11,926

)

8,382

 

4,146

 

 

 

 

 

Total interest rate repricing gap

 

9,875

 

(3,707

)

24,006

 

394

 

(23,932

)

6,636

 

 

 

Cumulative interest rate repricing gap

 

9,875

 

6,168

 

30,174

 

30,568

 

6,636

 

 

 

 

 

 

168



 

Australia – 2003

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

1,892

 

 

 

 

1,758

 

3,650

 

4.6

%

Due from other financial institutions

 

8,244

 

3

 

9

 

 

51

 

8,307

 

3.9

%

Due from customers on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

19,496

 

19,496

 

 

Trading securities

 

21,438

 

 

 

 

 

21,438

 

5.0

%

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

10,875

 

10,875

 

 

Available for sale and investment securities

 

5,635

 

188

 

 

8

 

 

5,831

 

7.2

%

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

2,704

 

239

 

1,150

 

959

 

20,717

 

25,769

 

5.1

%

Loans and advances

 

98,048

 

16,731

 

19,767

 

608

 

688

 

135,842

 

6.8

%

Other assets

 

24

 

 

 

 

11,691

 

11,715

 

 

Total assets

 

137,985

 

17,161

 

20,926

 

1,575

 

65,276

 

242,923

 

n/a

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

13,003

 

62

 

 

 

327

 

13,392

 

3.9

%

Liability on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

19,496

 

19,496

 

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

8,643

 

8,643

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

100,152

 

3,977

 

575

 

10

 

5,724

 

110,438

 

3.3

%

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

31,994

 

31,994

 

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

3,022

 

3,620

 

11,641

 

5,358

 

 

23,641

 

5.2

%

Other debt issues

 

1,630

 

 

 

113

 

 

1,743

 

5.0

%

Other liabilities

 

1

 

 

 

1

 

12,426

 

12,428

 

 

Total equity

 

 

 

 

 

15,769

 

15,769

 

 

Total liabilities

 

117,808

 

7,659

 

12,216

 

5,482

 

94,379

 

237,544

 

n/a

 

Off-balance sheet items attracting interest rate sensitivity

 

(19,977

)

745

 

13,988

 

5,244

 

 

 

 

 

Total interest rate repricing gap

 

200

 

10,247

 

22,698

 

1,337

 

(29,103

)

5,379

 

 

 

Cumulative interest rate repricing gap

 

200

 

10,447

 

33,145

 

34,482

 

5,379

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Europe – 2004

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

125

 

1,385

 

1,151

 

 

374

 

3,035

 

3.9

%

Due from other financial institutions

 

10,001

 

3,011

 

673

 

 

74

 

13,759

 

2.4

%

Due from customers on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

59

 

59

 

 

Trading securities

 

1,221

 

 

 

 

 

1,221

 

2.2

%

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

6,956

 

6,956

 

 

Available for sale and investment securities

 

10,020

 

50

 

474

 

6

 

1

 

10,551

 

2.8

%

Loans and advances

 

49,384

 

4,802

 

7,473

 

2,261

 

263

 

64,183

 

6.3

%

Regulatory deposits

 

56

 

 

 

 

56

 

112

 

0.5

%

Other assets

 

 

 

 

 

4,272

 

4,272

 

 

Total assets

 

70,807

 

9,248

 

9,771

 

2,267

 

12,055

 

104,148

 

n/a

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

13,537

 

4,667

 

548

 

 

5

 

18,757

 

3.0

%

Liability on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

59

 

59

 

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

6,726

 

6,726

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

47,929

 

7,439

 

415

 

50

 

6,300

 

62,133

 

2.7

%

Other liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

6,057

 

6,057

 

 

Total equity

 

 

 

 

 

4,136

 

4,136

 

 

Total liabilities

 

61,466

 

12,106

 

963

 

50

 

23,283

 

97,868

 

n/a

 

Off-balance sheet items attracting interest rate sensitivity

 

7,210

 

(10,131

)

6,609

 

(3,688

)

 

 

 

 

Total interest rate repricing gap

 

16,551

 

(12,989

)

15,417

 

(1,471

)

(11,228

)

6,280

 

 

 

Cumulative interest rate repricing gap

 

16,551

 

3,562

 

18,979

 

17,508

 

6,280

 

 

 

 

 

 

169



 

Europe – 2003

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

2,070

 

 

 

 

2,167

 

4,237

 

1.6

%

Due from other financial institutions

 

13,598

 

2,115

 

 

 

83

 

15,796

 

3.0

%

Due from customers on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

66

 

66

 

 

Trading securities

 

992

 

 

 

 

 

992

 

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

10,302

 

10,302

 

 

Available for sale and investment securities

 

1,518

 

15

 

590

 

17

 

1

 

2,141

 

3.3

%

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

3

 

25

 

100

 

114

 

2,106

 

2,348

 

3.2

%

Loans and advances

 

40,212

 

7,861

 

6,673

 

1,003

 

(239

)

55,510

 

5.5

%

Regulatory deposits

 

135

 

 

 

 

51

 

186

 

1.2

%

Other assets

 

 

 

1

 

1

 

2,454

 

2,456

 

 

Total assets

 

58,528

 

10,016

 

7,364

 

1,135

 

16,991

 

94,034

 

n/a

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

15,300

 

3,458

 

491

 

 

45

 

19,294

 

2.8

%

Liability on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

66

 

66

 

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

10,131

 

10,131

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

41,217

 

5,587

 

738

 

2

 

5,870

 

53,414

 

2.1

%

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

142

 

142

 

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

 

616

 

 

 

 

616

 

5.0

%

Other liabilities

 

321

 

 

(1

)

1

 

5,301

 

5,622

 

 

Total equity

 

 

 

 

 

4,200

 

4,200

 

 

Total liabilities

 

56,838

 

9,661

 

1,228

 

3

 

25,755

 

93,485

 

n/a

 

Off-balance sheet items attracting interest rate sensitivity

 

(2,954

)

(4,406

)

12,496

 

(1,548

)

 

3,588

 

 

 

Total interest rate repricing gap

 

(1,264

)

(4,051

)

18,632

 

(416

)

(8,764

)

4,137

 

 

 

Cumulative interest rate repricing gap

 

(1,264

)

(5,315

)

13,317

 

12,901

 

4,137

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

New Zealand – 2004

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

5

 

 

 

 

696

 

701

 

0.1

%

Due from other financial institutions

 

504

 

 

 

 

 

504

 

3.7

%

Due from customers on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

18

 

18

 

 

Trading securities

 

549

 

 

 

 

 

549

 

6.7

%

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

635

 

635

 

 

Available for sale and investment securities

 

574

 

212

 

 

 

 

786

 

6.4

%

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

15

 

 

1

 

 

12

 

28

 

6.6

%

Loans and advances

 

15,120

 

5,067

 

11,596

 

133

 

 

31,916

 

7.8

%

Other assets

 

 

 

 

 

1,668

 

1,668

 

 

Total assets

 

16,767

 

5,279

 

11,597

 

133

 

3,029

 

36,805

 

n/a

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

868

 

 

 

 

 

868

 

3.9

%

Liability on acceptances

 

 

 

 

 

18

 

18

 

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

936

 

936

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

21,852

 

2,653

 

521

 

2

 

615

 

25,643

 

5.3

%

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

2

 

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

 

99

 

347

 

49

 

 

495

 

6.6

%

Other liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

963

 

963

 

 

Total equity

 

 

 

 

 

2,316

 

2,316

 

 

Total liabilities

 

22,720

 

2,752

 

868

 

51

 

4,850

 

31,241

 

n/a

 

Off-balance sheet items attracting interest rate sensitivity

 

11,077

 

(2,614

)

(8,396

)

(67

)

 

 

 

Total interest rate repricing gap

 

5,124

 

(87

)

2,333

 

15

 

(1,821

)

5,564

 

 

 

Cumulative interest rate repricing gap

 

5,124

 

5,037

 

7,370

 

7,385

 

5,564

 

 

 

 

 

 

170



 

New Zealand – 2003

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

8

 

 

 

 

453

 

461

 

0.1

%

Due from other financial institutions

 

772

 

 

 

 

 

772

 

4.0

%

Trading securities

 

730

 

 

 

 

 

730

 

5.5

%

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

842

 

842

 

 

Available for sale and investment securities

 

793

 

7

 

7

 

 

 

807

 

4.8

%

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

5

 

 

1

 

 

11

 

17

 

5.6

%

Loans and advances

 

13,742

 

5,064

 

8,305

 

506

 

28

 

27,645

 

7.2

%

Other assets

 

(1

)

 

(1

)

 

1,203

 

1,201

 

 

Total assets

 

16,049

 

5,071

 

8,312

 

506

 

2,537

 

32,475

 

n/a

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

2,651

 

7

 

 

 

 

2,658

 

4.0

%

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

982

 

982

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

17,297

 

2,974

 

747

 

93

 

930

 

22,041

 

4.0

%

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

3

 

 

Other liabilities

 

1

 

 

 

 

969

 

970

 

 

Total equity

 

 

 

 

 

2,025

 

2,025

 

 

Total liabilities

 

19,949

 

2,981

 

747

 

93

 

4,909

 

28,679

 

n/a

 

Off-balance sheet items attracting interest rate sensitivity

 

8,682

 

(2,654

)

(5,577

)

(451

)

 

 

 

 

Total interest rate repricing gap

 

4,782

 

(564

)

1,988

 

(38

)

(2,372

)

3,796

 

 

 

Cumulative interest rate repricing gap

 

4,782

 

4,218

 

6,206

 

6,168

 

3,796

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

United States and other – 2004

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

160

 

 

 

 

107

 

267

 

0.1

%

Due from other financial institutions

 

307

 

35

 

3

 

 

489

 

834

 

0.3

%

Trading securities

 

239

 

 

 

 

 

239

 

2.2

%

Trading derivatives

 

90

 

308

 

 

 

940

 

1,338

 

1.2

%

Available for sale and investment securities

 

4,038

 

5

 

16

 

 

 

4,059

 

3.3

%

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

365

 

129

 

138

 

 

 

632

 

6.0

%

Loans and advances

 

3,001

 

977

 

1,504

 

293

 

 

5,775

 

2.9

%

Regulatory deposits

 

65

 

 

 

 

 

65

 

0.9

%

Other assets

 

 

 

 

 

677

 

677

 

 

Total assets

 

8,265

 

1,454

 

1,661

 

293

 

2,213

 

13,886

 

n/a

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

7,367

 

1,843

 

 

 

 

9,210

 

3.9

%

Trading derivatives

 

267

 

 

 

 

909

 

1,176

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

13,968

 

447

 

 

 

550

 

14,965

 

1.9

%

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

424

 

424

 

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

 

 

629

 

 

 

629

 

3.5

%

Other liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

352

 

352

 

 

Total equity

 

 

 

 

 

5,610

 

5,610

 

 

Total liabilities

 

21,602

 

2,290

 

629

 

 

7,845

 

32,366

 

n/a

 

Off-balance sheet items attracting interest rate sensitivity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total interest rate repricing gap

 

(13,337

)

(836

)

1,032

 

293

 

(5,632

)

(18,480

)

 

 

Cumulative interest rate repricing gap

 

(13,337

)

(14,173

)

(13,141

)

(12,848

)

(18,480

)

 

 

 

 

 

171



 

United States and other – 2003

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

286

 

 

 

 

(229

)

57

 

1.7

%

Due from other financial institutions

 

4,359

 

 

 

 

 

4,359

 

1.4

%

Trading securities

 

564

 

 

 

 

 

564

 

0.4

%

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

1,625

 

1,625

 

 

Available for sale and investment securities

 

4,620

 

1,668

 

93

 

 

 

6,381

 

2.0

%

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

120

 

56

 

184

 

185

 

7,167

 

7,712

 

2.9

%

Loans and advances

 

2,665

 

1,277

 

1,934

 

862

 

 

6,738

 

2.2

%

Regulatory deposits

 

75

 

 

 

 

(36

)

39

 

 

Other assets

 

 

 

 

181

 

383

 

564

 

 

Total assets

 

12,689

 

3,001

 

2,211

 

1,228

 

8,910

 

28,039

 

n/a

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

14,757

 

2,429

 

 

 

 

17,186

 

1.2

%

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

1,723

 

1,723

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

12,337

 

2,362

 

73

 

 

529

 

15,301

 

1.3

%

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

318

 

318

 

 

Other liabilities

 

(1

)

 

 

 

(1,981

)

(1,982

)

 

Total equity

 

 

 

 

 

5,217

 

5,217

 

 

Total liabilities

 

27,093

 

4,791

 

73

 

 

5,806

 

37,763

 

n/a

 

Off-balance sheet items attracting interest rate sensitivity

 

1,853

 

(4,045

)

(1,380

)

(16

)

 

(3,588

)

 

 

Total interest rate repricing gap

 

(12,551

)

(5,835

)

758

 

1,212

 

3,104

 

(13,312

)

 

 

Cumulative interest rate repricing gap

 

(12,551

)

(18,386

)

(17,628

)

(16,416

)

(13,312

)

 

 

 

 

 

172



 

42 Notes to the statement of cash flows

 

(a)          Reconciliation of net profit attributable to members of the Company to net cash provided by/(used in) operating activities

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Net profit attributable to members of the Company

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

2,417

 

5,720

 

Add/(deduct): Non-cash items

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Decrease/(increase) in interest receivable

 

(170

)

460

 

(755

)

16

 

(51

)

Increase/(decrease) in interest payable

 

324

 

(512

)

(51

)

101

 

51

 

Depreciation and amortisation of plant and equipment

 

441

 

401

 

419

 

249

 

223

 

Profit on sale of strategic shareholdings

 

(315

)

 

 

(315

)

 

Loss on sale of controlled entities

 

 

 

15

 

 

 

Loss on sale of operating assets

 

 

 

8

 

 

 

Charge to provide for doubtful debts

 

559

 

633

 

697

 

325

 

373

 

Charge to provide for doubtful debts – revision of accounting estimate

 

292

 

 

 

190

 

 

Charge to provide for restructuring costs – termination benefits

 

12

 

 

265

 

 

 

Movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

137

 

160

 

155

 

 

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

103

 

98

 

101

 

 

 

Increase in life insurance policy liabilities

 

3,255

 

2,281

 

170

 

 

 

Write-down of impaired application software

 

409

 

 

 

239

 

 

Write-off of property, plant and equipment

 

 

 

132

 

 

 

Cost of foreign controlled entity sold – revision of accounting estimate

 

(64

)

 

 

(64

)

 

Decrease/(increase) in life insurance investment assets

 

(3,199

)

(1,593

)

2,359

 

 

 

Increase/(decrease) in provision for income tax

 

(453

)

(54

)

(287

)

(434

)

(201

)

Net increase/(decrease) in provision for deferred income tax and future income tax benefits

 

(65

)

19

 

(882

)

198

 

(11

)

Net decrease/(increase) in trading securities

 

(449

)

(4,345

)

136

 

(725

)

(5,653

)

Unrealised (gain)/loss on trading derivatives

 

371

 

(2,010

)

875

 

200

 

(2,030

)

Net movement in mortgage loans held for sale

 

(22

)

50

 

1,304

 

 

 

Other provisions and non-cash items

 

519

 

(24

)

83

 

551

 

128

 

Net cash provided by/(used in) operating activities

 

4,862

 

(481

)

8,117

 

2,948

 

(1,451

)

 

(b)          Reconciliation of cash and cash equivalents

 

For the purposes of reporting cash flows, cash and cash equivalents include cash and liquid assets, due from other financial institutions and due to other financial institutions.

 

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year as shown in the statement of cash flows is reconciled to the related items on the statement of financial position as follows:

 

Cash and liquid assets (1)

 

8,080

 

8,405

 

10,222

 

4,189

 

4,152

 

Due from other financial institutions (1)

 

23,494

 

29,234

 

30,319

 

21,615

 

26,475

 

Due to other financial institutions (1)

 

(42,044

)

(52,530

)

(48,848

)

(38,675

)

(48,302

)

Total cash and cash equivalents

 

(10,470

)

(14,891

)

(8,307

)

(12,871

)

(17,675

)

 


(1)       Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of reverse repurchase agreements from ‘loans and advances’ to ‘cash and liquid assets’ and ‘due from financial institutions’.  Comparative information has also been restated to reflect the reclassification of repurchase agreements with other financial institutions from ‘deposits and other borrowings’ to ‘due to other financial institutions’.  Refer to note 1(d) for further information.

 

(c)          Non-cash financing and investing activities

 

New share issues

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Dividend reinvestment plan

 

616

 

170

 

323

 

616

 

170

 

Bonus share plan

 

98

 

105

 

89

 

98

 

105

 

Movement in assets under finance lease

 

14

 

(11

)

(2

)

14

 

(11

)

 

(d)          Financing arrangements

 

The Group held no standby lines of credit or other financing arrangements for the 2004, 2003 and 2002 years.

 

173



 

(e)          Acquisitions of controlled entities

 

The following acquisitions have been made during the last three years to September 30, 2004:

 

                  on June 16, 2003, MLC Limited acquired the remaining 50% of the share capital of Plum Financial Services Group to take its interest to 100% for cash consideration;

 

                  on May 1, 2003, MLC Limited and a Thai company in the Group subscribed for an additional 10.9% of the share capital of Advance MLC Assurance Co. Limited for cash consideration to take the Group’s interest to 65.9%; and

 

                  on November 1, 2002, BNZ acquired 100% of the share capital of New Zealand-based Hertz Fleetlease Limited for cash consideration.

 

The operating results of the acquired entities have been included in the Group’s statement of financial performance from their acquisition dates.  Details of the acquisitions were as follows:

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Fair value of net assets acquired

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

Due from other financial institutions

 

 

7

 

 

 

 

Loans and advances

 

 

320

 

 

 

 

Property, plant and equipment

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

Other assets

 

 

39

 

 

 

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

 

(323

)

 

 

 

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

 

(2

)

 

 

 

Income tax liabilities

 

 

(5

)

 

 

 

Provisions

 

 

(1

)

 

 

 

Other liabilities

 

 

(35

)

 

 

 

Total net assets acquired

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

Goodwill

 

 

61

 

 

 

 

Excess of net market value over net assets at acquisition

 

 

19

 

 

 

 

Total acquisition cost

 

 

83

 

 

 

 

Cash consideration paid

 

 

83

 

 

 

 

 

(f)            Sales of controlled entities

 

The following sales were made during the last three years to September 30, 2004:

 

                  on December 31, 2003, National Europe Holdings (Wealth Management) Limited sold 100% of the share capital in National Australia Life Company Limited for cash consideration of $98 million;

 

                  on December 22, 2003, National Australia Financial Management Limited sold 100% of the share capital of National Australia Fund Management Limited for cash consideration of $12 million; and

 

                  on October 1, 2002, MSRA Holdings, Inc. sold 100% of the share capital of SR Investment, Inc. to Washington Mutual Bank, FA for cash consideration of $2,671 million.

 

The operating results of the controlled entities have been included in the Group’s statement of financial performance up to the date of sale.  Details of the sales were as follows:

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Cash consideration received

 

110

 

2,671

 

 

 

 

Net assets of controlled entities sold

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

8

 

 

 

 

 

Due from other financial institutions

 

 

37

 

 

 

 

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

12

 

 

 

 

 

Mortgage loans held for resale

 

 

85

 

 

 

 

Mortgage servicing rights

 

 

1,794

 

 

 

 

Other assets

 

108

 

2,156

 

 

 

 

Provisions

 

 

(28

)

 

 

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

 

(1,351

)

 

 

 

Other liabilities

 

(1

)

(7

)

 

 

 

Total net assets of controlled entities sold

 

127

 

2,686

 

 

 

 

Excess of net market value over net assets on disposal (1)

 

(17

)

 

 

 

 

Profit/(loss) on sale of controlled entities before income tax expense/(benefit) (2)

 

 

(15

)

 

 

 

 


(1)       Included within movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities recognised as revenue during 2004.

 

(2)       In 2003, the loss on sale before income tax credit of $15 million related to the sale of SR Investment, Inc. and was recognised in 2002 (refer to note 5(a)).

 

174



 

43 Particulars in relation to controlled entities

 

The following table highlights those controlled entities with annual contributions to Group net profit or loss of $5 million or more, or those that are deemed to be of particular interest:

 

Entity name

 

Ownership %

 

Incorporated/formed in

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

National Australia Bank Limited

 

 

 

Australia

 

National Equities Limited (1)

 

100

 

Australia

 

National Australia Group (NZ) Limited

 

100

 

New Zealand

 

Bank of New Zealand

 

100

 

New Zealand

 

BNZ Investments Limited

 

100

 

New Zealand

 

BNZ International Limited

 

100

 

New Zealand

 

BNZ Branch Properties Limited

 

100

 

New Zealand

 

BNZI Securities No. 2 Limited

 

100

 

New Zealand

 

Custom Fleet (NZ) Limited

 

100

 

New Zealand

 

National Americas Investment, Inc.

 

100

 

United States

 

MSRA Holdings, Inc.

 

100

 

United States

 

National Americas Capital Investments LLC

 

100

 

United States

 

National Australia Group Europe Limited

 

100

 

England

 

Clydesdale Bank PLC

 

100

 

Scotland

 

Clydesdale Europe Finance Limited

 

100

 

Jersey

 

Clydesdale Bank Asset Finance Limited

 

100

 

Scotland

 

National Australia Group Europe Services Limited

 

100

 

Scotland

 

National Australia Group Europe Investments Limited

 

100

 

Scotland

 

Angara Limited

 

100

 

Hong Kong

 

PMJI Incorporated

 

100

 

United States

 

NAGEO BV

 

100

 

Netherlands

 

National Australia Group Europe Finance BV

 

100

 

Netherlands

 

NAB Investment Limited

 

100

 

England

 

NAGE Asset Investments Limited

 

100

 

England

 

National Irish Bank Limited

 

100

 

Republic of Ireland

 

Northern Bank Limited

 

100

 

Northern Ireland

 

Northern Bank Executor & Trustee Company Limited

 

100

 

Northern Ireland

 

Northern Asset Finance Limited

 

100

 

Northern Ireland

 

Northern Bank Financial Services Limited

 

100

 

Northern Ireland

 

Yorkshire Bank PLC

 

100

 

England

 

Yorkshire Bank Home Loans Limited

 

100

 

England

 

Northern and General Finance Limited

 

100

 

England

 

National Wealth Management Holdings Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

National Wealth Management Services Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

National Australia Financial Management Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

MLC Holdings Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

MLC Lifetime Company Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

MLC Investments Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

MLC Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

MLC (Hong Kong) Limited

 

62

 

Hong Kong

 

WM Sector – Australian Equities Trust (2)

 

86

 

Australia

 

WM Sector – Diversified Debt (All) Trust (2)

 

83

 

Australia

 

WM Sector – Diversified Debt (Short) Trust (2)

 

82

 

Australia

 

WM Sector – Property Securities Trust (2)

 

77

 

Australia

 

National Wealth Management International Holdings Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

BNZ Investment Management Limited

 

100

 

New Zealand

 

BNZ Life Insurance Limited

 

100

 

New Zealand

 

Clydesdale Bank Insurance Brokers Limited

 

100

 

Scotland

 

MLC Trust Management Co. Limited

 

100

 

England

 

National Australia Insurance Services Limited

 

100

 

England

 

Northern Bank Insurance Services Ltd

 

100

 

Northern Ireland

 

Yorkshire Bank Financial Services Limited

 

100

 

England

 

GWM Adviser Services Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

Flexiplan Australia Limited (3)

 

100

 

Australia

 

National Corporate Investment Services Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

MLC (NCIT) Global Share Trust (2)

 

75

 

Australia

 

National Diversified Managers Australian Share Fund (2)

 

79

 

Australia

 

National Managed Investor International Trust (2)

 

77

 

Australia

 

WM Pool – NISM Cash Trust (formerly MLCI Pool – NAM Cash
Trust)
(2)

 

78

 

Australia

 

 

175



 

National Australia Group Services Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

Custom Service Leasing Limited (4)

 

100

 

Australia

 

NBA Properties Limited (1)

 

100

 

Australia

 

National Australia Merchant Bank (Singapore) Limited

 

100

 

Singapore

 

National Australia Corporate Services Limited (1)

 

100

 

Australia

 

Nautilus Insurance Pte Limited

 

100

 

Singapore

 

Nautilus Insurance (Europe) Limited

 

100

 

Republic of Ireland

 

National Markets Group Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

Australian Market Automated Quotation (AUSMAQ) System Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

National Australia Finance (Asia) Limited

 

100

 

Hong Kong

 

National Australia Trustees Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

BOACT Pty Limited

 

100

 

Australia

 

National Australian Capital Markets (Japan) Co. Limited

 

100

 

Japan

 

 


(1)       These controlled entities and those listed hereunder have entered into a deed of cross guarantee (refer to note 44 for details) with the Company pursuant to ASIC Class Order 98/1418 dated August 13, 1998.  The controlled entities and the Company form a closed group (a closed group is defined as a group of entities comprising a holding entity and its related wholly-owned entities).  Relief, therefore, was granted to these controlled entities from the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) requirements for preparation, audit and publication of an annual financial report.

 

ARDB Limited

 

C.B.C. Properties Limited

 

NBA Leasing Pty Limited

Australian Banks’ Export Re-Finance

 

Commercial Nominees Pty Limited

 

NBA Properties (Qld) Limited

Corporation Limited

 

National Australia Investment Brokers Limited

 

NBA Properties (Vic) Limited

C.B.C. Holdings Limited

 

National Nominees (London) Limited

 

VPL Securities Pty Limited

 

(2)       The percentage ownership above for registered schemes reflects ownership as at August 31, 2004.  Due to the nature of the Group’s investment in such registered schemes, the percentage ownership changes on a regular basis.

 

(3)       Flexiplan Australia Limited was placed in voluntary liquidation on September 28, 2004.

 

(4)       Custom Service Leasing Limited has entered into a deed of cross guarantee with National Australia Group Services Limited pursuant to ASIC Class Order 98/1418 dated August 13, 1998.  The Class Order provides relief to Custom Service Leasing Limited from the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) requirements for preparation, audit and publication of an annual financial report.

 

44 Contingent liabilities and credit commitments

 

The following table shows the level of the Group’s contingent liabilities used to determine the amount of risk-weighted assets at September 30:

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

Notional amount (1)

 

Credit equivalent (2)

 

Notional amount (1)

 

Credit equivalent (2)

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Contingent liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Guarantees

 

4,241

 

3,274

 

4,241

 

3,274

 

5,452

 

4,473

 

5,452

 

4,473

 

Standby letters of credit (3)

 

6,845

 

5,247

 

6,845

 

5,247

 

6,636

 

5,063

 

6,636

 

5,063

 

Documentary letters of credit (3)

 

560

 

624

 

110

 

113

 

396

 

387

 

77

 

72

 

Performance-related contingencies

 

2,637

 

2,269

 

1,319

 

1,135

 

2,039

 

1,702

 

1,028

 

851

 

Other

 

114

 

117

 

114

 

117

 

111

 

115

 

111

 

115

 

Total contingent liabilities (4)

 

14,397

 

11,531

 

12,629

 

9,886

 

14,634

 

11,740

 

13,304

 

10,574

 

 


(1)       The notional amount represents the maximum credit risk.

 

(2)       The credit equivalent amount records the estimated maximum or total potential loss if the counterparty were to default, and is determined in accordance with APRA’s risk-weighted capital adequacy guidelines.  These credit equivalents are then weighted in the same manner as balance sheet assets according to counterparty for capital adequacy purposes. (For additional information, refer to capital adequacy information in the ‘financial review’ section of the annual financial report.)

 

(3)       The Group has shared its exposure on letters of credit with other financial institutions to the extent of $7 million credit equivalent (2003: $8 million).  This amount is not included in the above figures.

 

(4)       The maximum potential amount of future payments disclosed is undiscounted and not reduced by any amounts that may be recovered under the recourse provisions that are outlined below.

 

Credit-related commitments

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

Notional amount (1)

 

Credit equivalent (2)

 

Notional amount (1)

 

Credit equivalent (2)

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Other binding credit commitments (1)  (2)

 

76,784

 

75,839

 

23,067

 

18,060

 

51,240

 

53,927

 

16,777

 

15,391

 

Total credit-related commitments

 

76,784

 

75,839

 

23,067

 

18,060

 

51,240

 

53,927

 

16,777

 

15,391

 

 


(1)       Includes the notional amount and the credit equivalent for credit derivatives where the Group has sold credit protection.

 

(2)       Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reporting of additional retail lending products in New Zealand.

 

176



Investment commitments

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

Notional amount (1)

 

Credit equivalent (2)

 

Notional amount (1)

 

Credit equivalent (2)

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Statutory funds (1)

 

554

 

454

 

554

 

454

 

 

 

 

 

Total investment commitments

 

554

 

454

 

554

 

454

 

 

 

 

 

 


(1)       In the normal course of business of the Group’s life insurance business statutory funds, various types of investment contracts are entered into that give rise to contingent or future obligations.

 

(a) Contingent liabilities

 

The Group’s exposure to potential loss in the event of non-performance by a counterparty to a financial instrument for commitments to extend credit, letters of credit and financial guarantees written, is represented by the contractual notional principal amount of those instruments.  The Group uses the same credit policies and assessment criteria in making commitments and conditional obligations for off-balance sheet risks as it does for on-balance sheet loan assets.

 

(i) Guarantees

 

The Group provides guarantees in its normal course of business on behalf of its customers.  Guarantees written are conditional commitments issued by the Group to guarantee the performance of a customer to a third party.  Guarantees are primarily issued to support direct financial obligations such as commercial bills or other debt instruments issued by a counterparty.  It is the rating of the Group as a guarantee provider that enhances the marketability of the paper issued by the counterparty in these circumstances.  Guarantees are also provided on behalf of counterparties as performance bonds and ongoing obligations to government entities. The Group has four principal types of guarantees:

 

                  bank guarantees – a financial guarantee that is an agreement by which the Group agrees to pay an amount of money on demand on behalf of a customer to a third party during the life of the guarantee;

 

                  standby letters of credit – an obligation of the Group on behalf of a customer to make payment to a third party in the event that the customer fails to meet an outstanding financial obligation;

 

                  documentary letters of credit – a guarantee that is established to indemnify exporters and importers in their trade transactions where the Group agrees to make certain trade payments on behalf of a specified customer under specific conditions; and

 

                  performance-related contingencies – a guarantee given by the Group that undertakes to pay a sum of money to a third party where the customer fails to carry out certain terms and conditions of a contract.

 

The credit risk involved in issuing letters of credit and financial guarantees is essentially the same as that involved in extending loan facilities to customers. Apart from the normal documentation for a facility of this type, the customer must also provide the Group with a written indemnity, undertaking that, in the event the Group is called upon to pay, the Group will be fully reimbursed by the customer.

 

Fees in relation to guarantees are collected over the life of the contract.  Revenue is recognised on an accruals basis.

 

In accordance with the rules governing clearing arrangements contained in the Regulations of the Australian Paper Clearing System and in the Regulations of the Bulk Electronic Clearing System under Australian Payments Clearing Associated Limited, the Company is subject to a commitment to provide liquidity support to the clearing system in the event of a failure of another clearing financial institution.

 

(ii) Legal proceedings

 

Entities within the Group are defendants from time to time in legal proceedings arising from the conduct of their business.  The Company does not consider that the outcome of any proceedings, either individually or in aggregate, is likely to have a material effect on its financial position.  Where appropriate, provisions have been made.

 

There are contingent liabilities in respect of claims, potential claims and court proceedings against entities in the Group.  The aggregate of potential liability in respect thereof cannot be accurately assessed.

 

(iii) Contingent liability – amended assessments from the Australian Taxation Office – exchangeable capital units capital raising

 

In February 2004, the Company announced that it had received amended assessments from the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) which seek to disallow interest deductions on the Company’s exchangeable capital units (ExCaps) for the tax years 1997 to 2000.  The ATO assessments are for $157 million of  primary tax and interest and penalties of $150 million (after tax), a total of $307 million (after tax).  The ATO is considering its position in respect of interest deductions claimed by the Company on its ExCaps for 2001 to 2003.  The amount of primary tax relating to these interest deductions is approximately $135 million.  If the ATO issues amended assessments in respect of these years, it is possible interest and penalties would also apply.

 

177



 

The Group is confident that its position in relation to the application of the taxation law is correct and intends to dispute the amended assessments and pursue all necessary avenues of objection and appeal.  Objections against the amended assessments have been lodged, and no provisions have been raised by the Group.

 

The Group has paid 50% of the amounts owing under the amended assessments.  This payment has been recognised as an asset on the statement of financial position, included within other assets, on the basis that the Company expects recovery of the amount paid to the ATO.

 

The Group will not tax-effect interest paid on the ExCaps after October 1, 2003 whilst the tax treatment is in dispute.  As a result, a permanent difference of $33 million has been recognised in determining income tax expense for the 2004 year.

 

(iv) Contingent liability – amended assessments from the Australian Taxation Office – TrUEPrSSM capital raising

 

In April 2004, the Company announced that it had received amended assessments from the ATO which seek to disallow interest deductions claimed in respect of its TrUEPrSSM capital raising for the years 1999 to 2002.  The ATO assessments are for $85 million of primary tax and interest and penalties of $65 million (after tax), a total of $150 million (after tax).  The ATO is also expected to issue amended assessments for the 2003 and 2004 income years and the expected total additional primary tax payable for those years is $20 million.  If the ATO issues amended assessments in respect of those years, it is possible interest and penalties would also apply.  No further disputed tax amounts will arise in relation to future years as the TrUEPrSSM were redeemed in January 2004.

 

The Group is confident that its position in relation to the application of the taxation law is correct and intends to dispute the amended assessments and pursue all necessary avenues of objection and appeal.  Objections against the amended assessments have been lodged and no provisions have been raised by the Group.

 

The Group has paid 50% of the amounts owing under the amended assessments.  This payment has been recognised as an asset on the statement of financial position, included within other assets, on the basis that the Group expects recovery of the amounts paid to the ATO.

 

(v) Contingent liability – amended assessment from the New Zealand Inland Revenue Department – structured finance transactions

 

The New Zealand Inland Revenue Department (IRD) is carrying out an industry-wide review of structured finance transactions. As part of this review, subsidiaries of the Group have received amended tax assessment from the IRD with respect to three structured finance transactions entered into in the 1998 and 1999 income years.  The amended assessments are for income tax of approximately NZ$36 million plus interest of approximately NZ$14 million (after tax).  The possible application of penalties has yet to be considered by the IRD.  In addition, the IRD has also issued amended assessments based on an alternative approach to reassessing the transactions.  This alternative approach results in a lower additional tax liability.

 

The IRD has not yet issued amended assessments for the transactions for income years after 1999.  Notwithstanding that, based on the assessments received to date, the maximum sum of primary tax which the IRD might claim for the years after 1999 is approximately NZ$240 million. Interest would be charged in the event that the IRD were to issue amended assessments for this period.  Penalties may also be considered by the IRD.

 

The IRD is also investigating two other transactions in the New Zealand structured finance portfolio, which have materially similar features to those for which the above assessments have been received.  Should the IRD take the same position across all of these transactions, the additional primary tax liability would be NZ$111 million, plus interest.  Penalties may also be considered by the IRD.

 

As at September 30, 2004, if the IRD reassessed all structured finance transactions of this nature, the maximum potential tax in dispute is likely to be NZ$387 million, plus interest of approximately NZ$86 million (after tax).  As noted above, the IRD may also consider imposing penalties.

 

The Group is confident that its position in relation to the application of the taxation law is correct and it intends to dispute the IRD’s position with respect to these transactions.  The Group has obtained legal opinions that confirm that the transactions complied with New Zealand tax law and no provisions have been  raised by the Group.  The transactions are similar to transactions undertaken by other New Zealand banks.

 

(vi) Contingent liability – sale of SR Investment, Inc.

 

The Company and its controlled entity, MSRA Holdings, Inc., have a contingent liability arising in connection with the sale of SR Investment, Inc. (which was the direct holding company of HomeSide US at the time of the sale) to Washington Mutual Bank, FA (WaMu), which was completed on October 1, 2002.   Under the sale agreement, the Company and MSRA Holdings, Inc. have given customary representations, warranties and indemnities in respect of SR  Investment, Inc. and HomeSide US and their business, assets and liabilities.  The majority of these representations, warranties and indemnities expire after four  years; however, some have differing time and liability limitations and some are uncapped in terms of time and amount.  The maximum potential loss arising  from the contingent liability to WaMu will depend upon the type of warranty or indemnity claimed by WaMu, if any.  As such, it is not practicable to estimate the maximum potential loss arising from the contingent liability to WaMu.  It is not envisaged that any material unrecorded loss is likely to arise from this  contingent liability.

 

178



 

(b) Credit-related commitments

 

Binding commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend to a customer as long as there is no violation of any condition established in the contract. Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require payment of a fee by the customer.  Since many of the commitments are expected to expire without being drawn down, the total commitment amounts do not necessarily represent future cash requirements.  The Group evaluates each customer’s creditworthiness on a case-by-case basis.  The amount of collateral obtained, if deemed necessary by the Group upon extension of credit, is based on management’s credit evaluation of the counterparty.  Collateral held varies, but may include:

 

                  a floating charge over all assets and undertakings of an entity, including uncalled capital and called but unpaid capital;

 

                  specific or interlocking guarantees;

 

                  specific charges over defined assets of the counterparty; and

 

                  loan agreements which include affirmative and negative covenants and in some instances guarantees of counterparty obligations.

 

(c) Parent entity guarantees and undertakings

 

Excluded from the Group amounts disclosed above are the following guarantees and undertakings to entities in the Group:

 

                  commercial paper issued by National Australia Funding (Delaware), Inc. totalling $4,615 million (2003: $3,915 million) is guaranteed by the Company;

 

                  the Company has agreed to guarantee existing debentureholders secured under Broadbank Corporation Limited’s (now National Australia Bank (NZ) Limited) Trust Deed as at December 31, 1987 until maturity.  The outstanding liability as at September 30, 2004 was immaterial;

 

                  under arrangements with the Financial Services Authority of the UK, a letter has been issued by the Company to Clydesdale Bank PLC (Clydesdale) undertaking to maintain Clydesdale’s capital base at regulatory levels in the event that losses are incurred on exposures to individual customers whose facilities exceed 25% of Clydesdale’s regulatory capital base;

 

                  the Company will indemnify each customer of National Nominees Limited against any loss suffered by reason of National Nominees Limited failing to perform any obligation undertaken by it to a customer; and

 

                  pursuant to ASIC Class Order 98/1418 dated August 13, 1998, relief was granted to certain controlled entities (refer to note 43, footnote (1)) from the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) requirements for preparation, audit and publication of annual financial reports.  It is a condition of the Class Order that the Company and each of the controlled entities enter into a deed of cross guarantee.  The effect of the deed is that the Company guarantees to each creditor payment in full of any debt in the event of winding-up of any of the controlled entities under certain provisions of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth). If a winding-up occurs under other provisions of the Act, the Company will only be liable in the event that after six months any creditor has not been paid in full.  The controlled entities have also given similar guarantees in the event that the Company is wound up.  Table 1 below presents consolidated pro forma statements of financial performance and financial position for the Company and controlled entities which are party to the deed, after eliminating all transactions between parties to the deed, which is known as a closed group.

 

It is not envisaged that any material unrecorded loss is likely to arise from any of the transactions described in this note.

 

Table 1 Closed group

 

Pro forma statement of financial performance

For the year ended September 30

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

3,177

 

4,446

 

Income tax expense relating to ordinary activities

 

(705

)

(958

)

Net profit

 

2,472

 

3,488

 

Net credit/(debit) to foreign currency translation reserve

 

10

 

(433

)

Total changes in equity other than those resulting from transactions  with owners as owners

 

2,482

 

3,055

 

 

179



 

Pro forma statement of financial position

As at September 30

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets (1)

 

4,230

 

4,166

 

Due from other financial institutions (1)

 

21,615

 

26,475

 

Due from customers on acceptances

 

16,266

 

19,496

 

Trading securities

 

23,699

 

22,952

 

Trading derivatives

 

17,279

 

22,773

 

Available for sale securities

 

3,978

 

6,503

 

Investment securities

 

5,383

 

3,668

 

Loans and advances (1)

 

156,081

 

143,874

 

Shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities

 

9,137

 

11,303

 

Regulatory deposits

 

93

 

93

 

Property, plant and equipment

 

1,072

 

1,293

 

Income tax assets

 

876

 

679

 

Other assets

 

33,887

 

29,157

 

Total assets

 

293,596

 

292,432

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions (1)

 

38,675

 

48,302

 

Liability on acceptances

 

16,266

 

19,496

 

Trading derivatives

 

15,181

 

20,479

 

Deposits and other borrowings (1)

 

147,465

 

136,375

 

Income tax liabilities

 

747

 

637

 

Provisions

 

629

 

768

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt (1)

 

31,449

 

23,643

 

Other debt issues

 

350

 

367

 

Other liabilities

 

22,959

 

23,024

 

Total liabilities

 

273,721

 

273,091

 

Net assets

 

19,875

 

19,341

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

9,216

 

8,754

 

Reserves

 

1,244

 

1,103

 

Retained profits

 

9,415

 

9,484

 

Total equity

 

19,875

 

19,341

 

 


(1)       Comparative amounts have been reclassified to accord with changes in presentation made in 2004 (refer to note 1(d) for further information).

 

45 Derivative financial instruments

 

The purpose of the following discussion is to inform users of the financial report of the type of instruments used by the Group, the reasons for using them, the accompanying risks, and how those risks are managed.

 

Derivative financial instruments held or issued for trading purposes

 

The Group maintains trading positions in a variety of derivative financial instruments and acts primarily in the market by satisfying the needs of its customers through foreign exchange, interest rate-related services and credit-related contracts.  In addition, the Group takes conservative positions on its own account, and carries an inventory of capital market instruments.  It satisfies customer needs and maintains access to market liquidity by quoting bid and offer prices on those instruments and trading with other market makers.  All positions held for trading purposes are revalued on a daily basis to reflect market movements, and any revaluation profit or loss is recognised immediately in the profit and loss account.  It is the Group’s policy from a trading risk viewpoint to maintain a substantially matched position in assets and liabilities in foreign currencies and net exposure to exchange risk in this respect is not material.

 

Derivative financial instruments held or issued for purposes other than trading

 

The operations of the Group are subject to risk of interest rate fluctuations, to the extent of the repricing profile of the Group’s statement of financial position. Derivative financial instruments are held or issued for the purposes of managing existing or anticipated interest rate risk from this source which is primarily in the Group’s banking operations.

 

The Group monitors its non-trading interest rate risk by simulating future net interest income resulting from applying a range of possible future interest rate environments to its projected balance sheets.

 

180



 

The Group also holds or issues derivative financial instruments for the purpose of hedging foreign exchange risk.  Foreign exchange derivatives are used to hedge foreign currency borrowings and anticipated cash flows such as those relating to dividends emanating from foreign controlled entities.

 

In addition, the Group holds or issues derivative financial instruments for the purpose of hedging credit risk.  Credit derivatives are utilised to manage credit risk in the loans and advances portfolio.

 

Risk associated with derivatives

 

Derivatives are used primarily as a means of transferring risk.  They expose the holder to various degrees and types of financial risk including market, credit and liquidity risk.  These risks are discussed below.

 

Market risk

 

Market risk of derivative financial instruments held or issued is the risk that the value of derivatives will be adversely affected by changes in the market value of the underlying instrument, reference rate or index.  Not all risks associated with intermediation can be effectively hedged.  The residual market exposures together with trading positions are managed within established limits approved by the Board.  A unit independent of the trading activities monitors compliance within delegated limits on a daily basis.

 

Table 1 shows the fair value of all derivative instruments held or issued by the Group for the last two years at September 30.  The fair value of derivative financial instruments was obtained from quoted market prices, discounted cash flow models or option pricing models as appropriate.  It should be noted that fair value at a particular point in time gives no indication of future gain or loss, or what the dimensions of that gain or loss are likely to be.

 

Table 1 Fair value of derivative financial instruments held or issued by the Group

 

 

 

Other than trading
fair value (1)

 

Trading
fair value (1)

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Foreign exchange rate-related contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Spot and forward contracts to purchase foreign exchange

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In a favourable position

 

160

 

349

 

4,543

 

7,620

 

In an unfavourable position

 

(613

)

(1,130

)

(4,599

)

(8,101

)

Cross currency swaps

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In a favourable position

 

342

 

207

 

2,708

 

2,399

 

In an unfavourable position

 

(1,781

)

(2,769

)

(985

)

(359

)

Options

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Purchased

 

132

 

1

 

3,377

 

2,992

 

Written

 

 

 

(3,699

)

(2,866

)

 

 

(1,760

)

(3,342

)

1,345

 

1,685

 

Interest rate-related contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Forward rate agreements

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In a favourable position

 

 

 

18

 

20

 

In an unfavourable position

 

(4

)

 

(19

)

(19

)

Swaps

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In a favourable position

 

402

 

867

 

6,806

 

10,131

 

In an unfavourable position

 

(591

)

(1,113

)

(6,507

)

(9,649

)

Futures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In a favourable position

 

9

 

15

 

39

 

41

 

In an unfavourable position

 

(8

)

(13

)

(26

)

(46

)

Options/swaptions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Purchased

 

(31

)

(113

)

207

 

290

 

Written

 

 

 

(104

)

(153

)

 

 

(223

)

(357

)

414

 

615

 

Credit-related contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Credit derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In a favourable position

 

2

 

4

 

62

 

60

 

In an unfavourable position

 

(10

)

(14

)

(71

)

(70

)

 

 

(8

)

(10

)

(9

)

(10

)

Other contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In a favourable position

 

2

 

4

 

179

 

91

 

In an unfavourable position

 

 

(2

)

(140

)

(216

)

 

 

2

 

2

 

39

 

(125

)

Total fair value of derivative financial instruments held or issued

 

(1,989

)

(3,707

)

1,789

 

2,165

 

 


(1)       The positive fair value represents the credit risk to the Group if all the Group’s counterparties were to default.

 

181



 

The fair value of foreign exchange rate-related contracts held or issued for trading purposes amounted to a net unrealised profit at September 30, 2004 of $1,345 million (2003: net profit of $1,685 million).  Total net realised and unrealised profits and losses on foreign exchange rate-related contracts held or issued for trading purposes during the year amounted to a net profit of $313 million (2003: net profit of $442 million) (refer to note 4).

 

The table shows that the majority of fair value for interest rate-related contracts is concentrated in interest rate swaps.

 

The fair value of interest rate-related contracts held or issued for trading purposes amounted to a net unrealised profit at September 30, 2004 of $414 million (2003: net profit of $615 million).  Total net realised and unrealised profits and losses on both trading securities and interest rate derivatives held or issued for trading purposes during the year amounted to a net profit of $262 million (2003: net profit of $183 million) (refer to note 4).

 

Value at risk for derivatives held or issued for trading purposes

 

The use of derivatives for trading purposes within the Group is subject to disciplines prescribed in Corporate & Institutional Banking policy. Under this control framework, all derivative contracts are marked-to-market at the end of each business day.

 

Businesses initiating or using derivative contracts are subject to a daily value at risk (VaR) process.  This involves the calculation of mark-to-market changes according to a two year history of market shifts to produce a range of loss estimates for statistical analysis.  The VaR methodology measures risk on net open derivative exposures, and potential losses that may arise from variance in price movements between derivatives and other transactions that the derivatives are intended to offset.

 

VaR is supplemented with a program of stress testing, in which profit and loss on contracts and portfolios are calculated in the event of extreme market conditions.

 

Further detailed portfolio sensitivity analysis is conducted, to examine the derivative portfolio risks to second order effects such as market volatility, the change in contract sensitivity at different prices and the effect of the passing of time.

 

All these processes are conducted daily. VaR and portfolio sensitivity measures are subject to limit discipline that is overseen by Market Risk units within Group Risk Management.

 

Table 2 shows the Group’s VaR according to exposures in foreign exchange, interest rate, options (volatility) and commodity markets:

 

Table 2 Value at risk for physical and derivative positions

 

 

 

Average value
during reporting period

 

Minimum value
during reporting period (1)

 

Maximum value
during reporting period (1)

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Value at risk at a 99% confidence level

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Foreign exchange risk

 

7

 

7

 

1

 

2

 

39

 

20

 

Interest rate risk

 

13

 

17

 

7

 

9

 

21

 

25

 

Volatility risk

 

5

 

4

 

1

 

2

 

20

 

7

 

Commodities risk

 

1

 

1

 

 

 

2

 

1

 

Diversification benefit

 

(6

)

(7

)

n/a

 

n/a

 

n/a

 

n/a

 

Total value at risk for physical and derivative positions (1)

 

20

 

22

 

9

 

14

 

55

 

35

 

 


(1)       Value at risk is measured individually according to foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, volatility risk and commodities risk.  The individual risk categories do not sum up to the total risk number due to portfolio effect.  Risk limits are applied in these categories separately, and against the total risk position.

 

Deferred gains and losses on derivative financial instruments held or issued for other than trading purposes

 

Table 3 shows the net deferred realised gains and losses arising from hedging contracts entered into by the Group to reduce the risk arising from identifiable assets, liabilities and commitments, together with the expected term of deferral:

 

Table 3 Net deferred gains and losses

 

 

 

Foreign exchange rate-
related contracts

 

Interest rate-
related contracts

 

Total

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Within 6 months

 

 

 

4

 

4

 

4

 

4

 

6 months – 1 year

 

 

 

1

 

10

 

1

 

10

 

1 – 2 year(s)

 

 

 

 

2

 

 

2

 

Total net deferred losses

 

 

 

5

 

16

 

5

 

16

 

 

182



 

Credit risk

 

Credit risk arises from the possibility that the counterparty to a derivative financial instrument will not adhere to the terms of the contract with the Group when settlement becomes due.

 

Notional principal is the amount of a derivative’s underlying asset, reference rate or index and is the quantum on which changes in the value of the derivative are measured.  It provides an indication of the volume of business transacted by the Group.  Changes in the value of a derivative are usually only a fraction of the notional principal amount, and it is only those changes which have a positive fair value to the Group that create a potential for credit risk.

 

The Group’s credit exposure has been determined in accordance with APRA capital adequacy guidelines.  This credit equivalent is derived by taking into account the residual maturity of each instrument, and then adding the fair value of all contracts which have a positive fair value.  Futures and option contracts which are traded on a recognised exchange and which are subject to margin payments are considered to have no credit exposure.  Internal credit assessment applies a conservative methodology to determine potential counterparty exposure.

 

Table 4 shows the fair value of all derivative instruments held or issued by the Group for the last two years at September 30.  It should be noted that fair value at a particular point in time gives no indication of future profit or loss, or what the dimensions of that profit or loss are likely to be.

 

Credit risk is constantly assessed, measured and managed in strict accordance with the Group’s risk management policies.  Banking entities within the Group may take collateral to secure amounts due under treasury transactions.  Collaterisation is assessed specifically at the time facilities are approved on a case-by-case basis.

 

In addition, the Group utilises credit derivatives to manage risk in the loans and advances asset portfolio.  Credit derivatives are financial instruments used to assume or transfer the credit risk of loans and other assets to a third party, in return for the payment of a premium or a cash flow stream.  They are over-the-counter contracts between two counterparties where the value of the instrument is linked to measurable changes in the credit quality of a designated reference asset.

 

Table 4 Notional principal, estimated credit equivalent and fair value of all derivative financial instruments

 

 

 

Notional principal

 

Credit equivalent

 

Fair value

 

Average fair value (1)

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Foreign exchange rate-related contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Spot and forward contracts to purchase foreign exchange (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading

 

268,127

 

235,393

 

6,647

 

6,808

 

(56

)

(481

)

24

 

(1,051

)

Other than trading

 

31,204

 

31,142

 

149

 

557

 

(453

)

(781

)

 

 

 

 

299,331

 

266,535

 

6,796

 

7,365

 

(509

)

(1,262

)

24

 

(1,051

)

Cross currency swaps (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading

 

100,222

 

72,245

 

7,079

 

6,565

 

1,723

 

2,040

 

2,257

 

(207

)

Other than trading

 

16,951

 

18,004

 

1,173

 

298

 

(1,439

)

(2,562

)

 

 

 

 

117,173

 

90,249

 

8,252

 

6,863

 

284

 

(522

)

2,257

 

(207

)

Futures trading

 

156

 

89

 

 

 

 

 

(46

)

 

Options

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading

 

344,956

 

253,381

 

2,612

 

4,652

 

(322

)

126

 

(244

)

(18

)

Other than trading

 

3,100

 

100

 

99

 

3

 

132

 

1

 

 

 

 

 

348,056

 

253,481

 

2,711

 

4,655

 

(190

)

127

 

(244

)

(18

)

Total foreign exchange rate-related  contracts

 

764,716

 

610,354

 

17,759

 

18,883

 

(415

)

(1,657

)

1,991

 

(1,276

)

 

183



 

Interest rate-related contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Forward rate agreements

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading

 

107,547

 

85,055

 

28

 

38

 

(1

)

1

 

 

(1

)

Other than trading

 

9,501

 

1,253

 

9

 

1

 

(4

)

 

 

 

 

 

117,048

 

86,308

 

37

 

39

 

(5

)

1

 

 

(1

)

Swaps

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading

 

641,675

 

510,623

 

10,280

 

13,054

 

299

 

482

 

299

 

10

 

Other than trading

 

64,992

 

87,532

 

566

 

1,101

 

(189

)

(246

)

 

 

 

 

706,667

 

598,155

 

10,846

 

14,155

 

110

 

236

 

299

 

10

 

Futures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading

 

215,962

 

303,522

 

 

 

13

 

(5

)

10

 

1

 

Other than trading

 

2,033

 

3,127

 

 

 

1

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

217,995

 

306,649

 

 

 

14

 

(3

)

10

 

1

 

Options/swaptions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading

 

77,072

 

77,401

 

331

 

491

 

103

 

137

 

27

 

134

 

Other than trading

 

4,785

 

22,792

 

73

 

91

 

(31

)

(113

)

 

 

 

 

81,857

 

100,193

 

404

 

582

 

72

 

24

 

27

 

134

 

Total interest rate-related contracts

 

1,123,567

 

1,091,305

 

11,287

 

14,776

 

191

 

258

 

336

 

144

 

Credit-related contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Credit derivatives (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading

 

11,983

 

10,997

 

1,100

 

658

 

(9

)

(10

)

(9

)

(10

)

Other than trading

 

2,600

 

532

 

260

 

46

 

(8

)

(10

)

 

 

Total credit-related contracts

 

14,583

 

11,529

 

1,360

 

704

 

(17

)

(20

)

(9

)

(10

)

Other contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading

 

3,502

 

1,662

 

337

 

143

 

39

 

(125

)

34

 

41

 

Other than trading

 

313

 

194

 

16

 

52

 

2

 

2

 

 

 

Total other contracts

 

3,815

 

1,856

 

353

 

195

 

41

 

(123

)

34

 

41

 

Total derivative financial instruments

 

1,906,681

 

1,715,044

 

30,759

 

34,558

 

(200

)

(1,542

)

2,352

 

(1,101

)

Deduct: Non-consolidated controlled entities (4)

 

3,519

 

4,515

 

78

 

182

 

43

 

234

 

 

 

Total derivative financial instruments reported for capital adequacy (5)

 

1,903,162

 

1,710,529

 

30,681

 

34,376

 

(243

)

(1,776

)

2,352

 

(1,101

)

 


(1)       Average fair values of other than trading contracts are not captured.

 

(2)       In accordance with industry practice, notional principal amounts disclosed for spot and forward foreign exchange contracts represent the buy leg only and for cross currency swaps represent the receivable leg only.

 

(3)       The credit equivalent in relation to credit derivatives where the Group has sold credit protection is reflected in note 44, within other binding commitments.

 

(4)     Under APRA guidelines, life insurance and funds management activities are excluded from the calculation of risk-weighted assets and the related controlled entities are deconsolidated for the purposes of calculating capital adequacy. Amounts deducted are included within other than trading.

 

(5)       Refer to the ‘financial review’ section of the annual financial report for further information on capital adequacy.

 

Credit equivalent by maturity

 

As mentioned above, the credit equivalent amount includes an adjustment which takes account of the residual maturity of contracts.  This is because credit risk is partly a function of the time over which the exposure will be held.

 

Table 5 provides a maturity profile of total counterparty exposure by credit equivalent amounts for all derivative financial instruments held or issued by the Group for the last two years at September 30.  It shows that 32% (2003: 34%) of the exposure is confined to maturities of one year or less and 73% (2003: 73%) matures within five years.

 

184



 

Table 5 Maturity profile of total derivative financial instruments counterparty exposure by credit equivalent

 

 

 

2004

 

 

 

0 to 6
month(s)

 

6 to 12
months

 

1 to 2
year(s)

 

2 to 5
years

 

After 5
years

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Foreign exchange related contracts

 

5,670

 

2,635

 

2,313

 

3,969

 

3,172

 

17,759

 

Interest rate related contracts

 

467

 

637

 

1,814

 

3,266

 

5,103

 

11,287

 

Credit-related contracts

 

49

 

3

 

30

 

1,250

 

28

 

1,360

 

Other contracts

 

29

 

307

 

7

 

10

 

 

353

 

Total credit equivalent of derivative financial instruments

 

6,215

 

3,582

 

4,164

 

8,495

 

8,303

 

30,759

 

 

 

 

2003

 

 

 

0 to 6
month(s)

 

6 to 12
months

 

1 to 2
year(s)

 

2 to 5
years

 

After 5
years

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Foreign exchange related contracts

 

7,308

 

3,375

 

2,854

 

2,591

 

2,755

 

18,883

 

Interest rate related contracts

 

476

 

557

 

2,727

 

4,351

 

6,665

 

14,776

 

Credit-related contracts

 

50

 

2

 

7

 

616

 

29

 

704

 

Other contracts

 

144

 

 

2

 

49

 

 

195

 

Total credit equivalent of derivative financial instruments

 

7,978

 

3,934

 

5,590

 

7,607

 

9,449

 

34,558

 

 

Credit equivalent by concentration

 

Depending on the risks associated with an individual counterparty or groups of counterparties, a concentration of credit risk can be perceived as indicative of more or less credit risk.  In general, the Group’s dealings in derivatives involve counterparties in the banking and financial services area, together with government and semi-government authorities and major corporates.

 

Table 6 shows the credit equivalent of derivatives allocated to broad sector and geographic locations as at September 30, 2004 for the Group.  It shows that 68% (2003: 81%) of credit exposure is to government authorities and banks.

 

Table 6 Credit equivalent of derivative financial instruments allocated to sectors and geographic locations of ultimate obligors

 

 

 

Government
authorities

 

Banks

 

Non-bank
financial
institutions

 

Corporate
and all other
sectors

 

Total

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Australia

 

57

 

9,918

 

626

 

4,349

 

14,950

 

Europe

 

21

 

7,192

 

598

 

1,098

 

8,909

 

New Zealand

 

42

 

224

 

2

 

349

 

617

 

United States

 

 

2,609

 

1,481

 

7

 

4,097

 

Asia

 

2

 

914

 

1,224

 

46

 

2,186

 

Total credit equivalent of derivative financial instruments

 

122

 

20,857

 

3,931

 

5,849

 

30,759

 

 

Liquidity risk

 

Liquidity risk arises from the possibility that market conditions prevailing at some point in the future will force the Group to sell derivative positions at a value which is far below their underlying worth, or may result in the inability to exit from the positions.  The liquidity of a derivative, or an entire market, can be reduced substantially as a result of some market event or change in market psychology, or the actions of individual participants.  In order to counter such risk, the Group concentrates its derivative activity in highly liquid markets.

 

Special considerations apply in the case of interest rate and cross currency swaps. These are often specially tailored instruments whose cash flows are structured to suit the particular needs of individual customers. Such instruments have the appearance of illiquidity because hedging the position with another counterparty with exactly offsetting requirements would be an unlikely occurrence.  However, the Group hedges the risk of customised swap structures by using a combination of instruments. Swaps, forward rate agreements, futures contracts, physical securities or even loans and deposits can be employed for this purpose. Accordingly, such swaps may appear illiquid but their component risks are not.  Furthermore, other market participants will, in normal circumstances, always be willing to provide liquidity to an instrument they are able to hedge.  In addition, value at risk utilisations (refer to table 2) ensure that open positions are maintained at a very small level relative to total volume.  Such levels ensure that, at a time of market stress, it is very unlikely the Group would be forced to compete for ever-diminishing liquidity in order to dispose of, or hedge, its existing positions.

 

185



 

46 Fair value of financial instruments

 

Australian Accounting Standard AASB 1033 “Presentation and Disclosure of Financial Instruments” requires disclosure of net fair value of on and off-balance sheet financial instruments.  Net fair value is the amount for which an asset could be exchanged, or a liability settled, between knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm’s length transaction after deducting transaction costs.  For the purposes of this note, carrying value refers to amounts reflected in the statement of financial position.

 

The estimated fair values are based on relevant information available for the last two years at September 30.  These estimates are subjective in nature and involve matters of judgement.  Changes in assumptions could have a material impact on the amounts estimated.  The methodologies and assumptions used in the net fair value estimates are described below.  These are not considered critical accounting policies of the Group, as they do not impact the recognition and measurement of items in the financial statements.

 

There are various limitations inherent in this disclosure.  Not all of the Group’s financial instruments can be exchanged in an active trading market.  In addition, it is the Group’s intent to hold most of its financial instruments to maturity and therefore it is not probable that the net fair values shown will be realised in a current transaction.  The methods used to estimate fair value exclude a wide range of intangible, franchise and relationship benefits such as core deposits and credit card intangibles, which are integral to a complete assessment of the Group’s financial position.  As a consequence, the aggregate fair value does not represent the underlying value of the Group.

 

The fair value of financial instruments required to be disclosed under US accounting standard, SFAS 107 “Disclosure about Fair Value of Financial Instruments” is calculated without regard to estimated transaction costs.  Such costs are not material, and accordingly the net fair values shown below would not differ materially from fair values calculated in accordance with SFAS 107.

 

 

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

Footnote

 

Carrying
value

 

Net fair
value

 

Carrying
value

 

Net fair
value

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets (1)

 

(a)

 

8,080

 

8,080

 

8,405

 

8,405

 

Due from other financial institutions (1)

 

(a)

 

23,494

 

23,494

 

29,234

 

29,234

 

Due from customers on acceptances

 

(a)

 

16,344

 

16,344

 

19,562

 

19,562

 

Debt securities

 

(b)

 

40,371

 

40,382

 

38,884

 

38,967

 

Trading derivatives

 

(c)

 

17,939

 

17,939

 

23,644

 

23,644

 

Investments relating to life insurance business

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity securities

 

(d)

 

35,878

 

35,878

 

30,399

 

30,399

 

Debt securities

 

(d)

 

5,003

 

5,003

 

5,129

 

5,129

 

Loans and advances (1)

 

(e)

 

247,836

 

248,579

 

225,735

 

224,698

 

Shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities

 

(f)

 

158

 

158

 

1,445

 

1,870

 

Regulatory deposits

 

(a), (g)

 

177

 

177

 

225

 

225

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Financial liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions (1)

 

(a)

 

42,044

 

42,044

 

52,530

 

52,530

 

Liability on acceptances

 

(a)

 

16,344

 

16,344

 

19,562

 

19,562

 

Trading derivatives

 

(c)

 

16,150

 

16,150

 

21,479

 

21,479

 

Deposits and other borrowings (1)

 

(h)

 

220,752

 

220,801

 

201,194

 

199,992

 

Life insurance policy liabilities

 

(i)

 

36,134

 

36,134

 

32,457

 

32,457

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt (1)

 

(j)

 

32,573

 

33,474

 

24,257

 

28,091

 

Other debt issues

 

(j)

 

1,612

 

2,257

 

1,743

 

2,627

 

 


(1)       Comparative amounts have been reclassified to accord with changes in presentation made in 2004 (refer to note 1(d) for further information).

 

The net fair value estimates are based on the following methodologies and assumptions:

 

(a)          the carrying amounts of cash and liquid assets, due from and to other financial institutions, due from and to customers on acceptances and regulatory deposits approximate their net fair value as they are short term in nature or are receivable or payable on demand;

 

(b)         debt securities consist of trading, available for sale and investment securities.  The net fair values of debt securities, together with related hedge contracts where applicable, are based on quoted closing market prices at September 30;

 

(c)          the fair values of trading derivatives, including foreign exchange contracts, interest rate swaps, interest rate and currency option contracts, and currency swaps, are obtained from quoted closing market prices at balance date, discounted cash flow models or option pricing models as appropriate;

 

(d)         the net fair values of equity and debt securities held as investments relating to life insurance business are based on quoted closing market prices at September 30.  Where no quoted market value exists, various valuation methods have been adopted by the directors as detailed in note 1(o).  In those instances, the values adopted are deemed equivalent to net market value;

 

186



 

(e)          the carrying value of loans and advances is net of specific and general provision for doubtful debts and unearned income.  The net fair values of loans and advances that reprice within six months of year end are assumed to equate to the carrying value.  The net fair values of all other loans and advances are calculated using discounted cash flow models based on the maturity of the loans and advances.  The discount rates applied are based on the current interest rates at September 30 of similar types of loans and advances, if the loans and advances were performing at balance date.  The differences between estimated net fair values of loans and advances and carrying value reflect changes in interest rates and creditworthiness of borrowers since loan or advance origination.

Net lease receivables with a carrying value of $15,968 million (2003: $14,864 million) and a net fair value of $15,934 million (2003: $14,777 million), are included in loans and advances.  Lease receivables are excluded from the definition of a financial asset under SFAS 107 and have been included in the above table for Australian reporting purposes;

 

(f)            the net fair value of shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities is based on quoted closing market prices at balance date where available.  Where quoted market prices do not exist, the net fair values are estimated after taking into account the underlying financial position of the investee or quoted market prices for similar instruments;

 

(g)         the Group is required by law to lodge regulatory deposits with certain central banks at a rate of interest below that generally prevailing in the market. As the obligation between the parties is not based on contract but on regulatory requirements, such deposits do not constitute a financial instrument within the definition contained in SFAS 107 and have been included in the above table for Australian reporting purposes;

 

(h)         with respect to deposits and other borrowings, the net fair value of non-interest-bearing, call and variable rate deposits and fixed rate deposits repricing within six months is the carrying value at September 30.  The net fair value of other term deposits is calculated using discounted cash flow models based on the deposit type and its related maturity;

 

(i)             the net fair value of life insurance policy liabilities is calculated using the Margin on Services methodology as detailed in note 1(x);

 

(j)             the net fair values of bonds, notes and subordinated debt and other debt issues are calculated based on a discounted cash flow model using a yield curve appropriate to the remaining maturity of the instruments is used; and

 

(k)          commitments to extend credit, letters of credit and guarantees and warranties and indemnities issued are considered to be financial instruments. These financial instruments are generally not sold or traded and estimated fair values are not readily ascertainable.  Net fair value of these items was not calculated for the following reasons.  Very few of the commitments extended beyond six months would commit the Group to a predetermined rate of interest.  Also, the fees attaching to these commitments are the same as those currently charged to enter into similar arrangements.  Finally, the quantum of fees collected under these arrangements, upon which a fair value calculation would be based, is not material.

 

The fair values of derivative financial instruments held or issued for purposes other than trading, including foreign exchange contracts, interest rate swaps, interest rate and currency option contracts, currency swaps and credit derivatives, are disclosed in note 45.

 

47 Superannuation commitments

 

The Group sponsors a range of superannuation plans for employees which principally offer two types of benefits:

 

            accumulation benefits which provide a lump sum benefit on retirement or withdrawal; and

 

            defined benefits which provide a pension with the option of commutation of part of the pension on retirement, or lump sum benefit.

 

Accumulation benefits are based on accumulated contributions and interest earnings thereon.  Entities in the Group are obliged to contribute sufficiently to cover specified minimum benefit levels.  These obligations are legally enforceable.  The relevant trust deed may allow for the cessation of these contributions. Members and employer contributions are calculated as percentages of members salaries or wages.  In the case of some plans, member contributions are not required.

 

The Group maintains several defined benefit superannuation and pension arrangements worldwide.  Some sponsored plans are in actuarial surplus, others are in a position of actuarial deficiency.  Surpluses and deficiencies depend on many diverse factors and can vary significantly over time having regard, for eg. to movements in the investment markets, future salary increases and changes in employment patterns.  This note sets out the Group’s position in relation to its defined benefit plans. The disclosures contained herein are in accordance with AASB 1028 “Employee Benefits”.  Plans listed below show the position using the most recent information available. All plans listed below are closed to new defined benefit members.

 

In relation to the Group’s European defined benefit plans, the plans’ actuaries have advised that using their best estimate (ie. most probable) assumptions for the long term, the European plans are in a combined surplus position of approximately $905 million at June 30, 2004.  In contrast, applying applicable accounting disclosure principles, these plans are in a combined surplus position of $690 million on a vested benefits basis.  This means the market value of plan assets exceeds the present value of benefits that are not conditional on future employment.  Further, these plans are in a combined deficit position of $1,153 million on an accrued benefits basis.  This means the present value of future benefits exceeds the market value of plan assets at June 30, 2004, being the last assessment date.  The discount rate used to determine both the vested benefit and accrued benefit positions does not reflect the actual asset mix and the expected earnings on the plans’ assets over the long term.  As such, these positions will change with future market conditions at a point in time.

 

The actuaries’ advice provides comfort to the Group that the plans will meet their long-term obligations.  In addition, the Group continues to meet the applicable statutory minimum funding requirements set by legislation in the UK and Republic of Ireland.  The Group has no obligation to make payments in respect of the plans’ deficits over and above its annual contributions.  These contributions are only set after agreement between the Group and the plans’ trustees and actuaries.  The next scheduled triennial review for this purpose is as at September 30, 2004 for all European plans.

 

187



 

The Group contributed $275 million in respect of all superannuation and pension plans for 2004 (2003: $228 million).  Included therein were contributions of $165 million in respect of the Group’s European defined benefit pension plans (2003: $89 million).

 

The Group’s accounting policy is set out in note 1(ll).  Under this accounting policy, the Group recognised superannuation and pension expenses of $309 million in 2004 (2003: $243 million), of which $210 million related to the Group’s European defined benefit pension plans (2003: $111 million). These expenses are reported within personnel expenses.  Under the accounting policy, the Group recognised defined benefit pension fund surpluses as an asset in the Group’s balance sheet on acquisition of entities.  This asset is subsequently adjusted for prepayments and accruals and is referred to as a prepaid pension cost asset. The carrying value of the prepaid pension cost asset as at September 30, 2004 was $582 million and is reported within other assets (2003: $616 million).  A provision for deferred income tax has been recognised for timing differences in relation to prepaid pension costs as at September 30, 2004 of $180 million (2003: $189 million).

 

No liabilities have been recognised in the Group’s balance sheet in relation to the current defined benefit fund deficits reflected in the table below as the Group has no obligation to make payments in respect of those deficits over and above its annual contributions to these plans unless required by the applicable statutory minimum funding requirements.  The Group’s European defined benefit plans are all adequately funded under the minimum funding requirements test in the UK and the Republic of Ireland as at September 30, 2004.

 

Listed below are details of the major plans with total assets in excess of $10 million each.  The accrued benefits, plan assets at net market value, net surplus/(deficit) and vested benefits of these plans (converted at exchange rates at September 30) were:

 

 

 

 

 

2004

 

Name of defined benefit fund

 

Most recent
plan information

 

Accrued
benefits

 

Plan
assets

 

Net
accrued benefit
surplus/(deficit)

 

Vested
benefits

 

Net
vested benefit
surplus/(deficit)

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

National Australia Bank Group
Superannuation Fund A

 

June 30, 2004 (1)
Plan Financial Report

 

1,754

 

2,046

 

292

 

1,940

 

106

 

Clydesdale Bank Pension
Scheme

 

June 30, 2004 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

2,064

 

1,540

 

(524

)

1,362

 

178

 

Northern Bank Pension
Scheme

 

June 30, 2004 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

1,331

 

1,098

 

(233

)

883

 

215

 

National Irish Bank Pension
Scheme

 

June 30, 2004 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

379

 

366

 

(13

)

212

 

154

 

National Australia Bank UK
Retirement Benefits Plan

 

June 30, 2004 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

350

 

233

 

(117

)

186

 

47

 

Yorkshire Bank PLC Pension
Fund

 

June 30, 2004 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

1,701

 

1,435

 

(266

)

1,339

 

96

 

Bank of New Zealand Officers’
Provident Association

 

June 30, 2004 (3)
Actuarial Update

 

183

 

248

 

65

 

179

 

69

 

National Wealth Management
Superannuation Fund

 

June 30, 2004 (4)
Plan Financial Report

 

95

 

122

 

27

 

116

 

6

 

Total defined benefit funds

 

 

 

7,857

 

7,088

 

(769

)

6,217

 

871

 

 

 

 

 

 

2003

 

Name of defined benefit fund

 

Most recent
plan information

 

Accrued
benefits

 

Plan
assets

 

Net
accrued benefit
surplus/(deficit)

 

Vested
benefits

 

Net
vested benefit
surplus/(deficit)

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

National Australia Bank Group
Superannuation Fund A

 

June 30, 2003 (1)
Plan Financial Report

 

1,764

 

1,811

 

47

 

1,711

 

100

 

Clydesdale Bank Pension
Scheme

 

June 30, 2003 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

1,928

 

1,301

 

(627

)

1,272

 

29

 

Northern Bank Pension
Scheme

 

June 30, 2003 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

1,245

 

946

 

(299

)

825

 

121

 

National Irish Bank Pension
Scheme

 

June 30, 2003 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

335

 

317

 

(18

)

186

 

131

 

National Australia Bank UK
Retirement Benefits Plan

 

June 30, 2003 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

302

 

179

 

(123

)

162

 

17

 

Yorkshire Bank PLC Pension
Fund

 

June 30, 2003 (2)
Actuarial Update

 

1,577

 

1,226

 

(351

)

1,240

 

(14

)

Bank of New Zealand Officers’
Provident Association

 

June 30, 2003 (3)
Actuarial Update

 

160

 

228

 

68

 

157

 

71

 

National Wealth Management
Superannuation Fund

 

June 30, 2003 (4)
Plan Financial Report

 

95

 

105

 

10

 

105

 

 

Total defined benefit funds

 

 

 

7,406

 

6,113

 

(1,293

)

5,658

 

455

 

 

188



 


(1)       National Australia Bank Group Superannuation Fund A is technically a defined benefit fund although the vast majority of members have accumulation benefits. Accrued benefits are at the date of the last actuarial assessment, which was June 30, 2003. At the date of the last actuarial assessment, plan assets were $1,811 million and vested benefits were $1,711 million.  Plan assets and vested benefits are as at June 30, 2004, being the date of the most recent financial statements of the fund (for 2003 comparative information, they are as at June 30, 2003).  Approximately 2% of disclosed accrued benefits and 6% of the disclosed plan assets relate to defined benefits.  The actuary is Mr SJ Schubert, FIA, FIAA, of Towers Perrin.

 

(2)       Accrued benefits, plan assets and vested benefits are at the date of the most recent actuarial update (which was not a full actuarial assessment) being June 30, 2004.  For 2003 comparative information, accrued benefits, plan assets and vested benefits were at the date of an actuarial update.  The last full triennial actuarial assessments were September 30, 2001, for all UK plans and September 30, 2003 for the National Irish Bank pension scheme.  The actuary for these funds is Watson Wyatt Partners, Consulting Actuaries.  These funds are closed to new members.

 

(3)       Bank of New Zealand Officers’ Provident Association has two divisions within one fund.  Division 1 is a defined benefit plan and is closed to new members. Division 2 is a cash accumulation plan and contains the majority of members.  Accrued benefits are at the date of the last actuarial assessment, which was October 31, 2002.  The total plan assets and vested benefits are as at June 30, 2004, being the date of the last actuarial update.  At October 31, 2003, being the date of the most recent financial statements of the fund, the plan assets were $231 million, and vested benefits were $169 million.  The fund actuary is Ms GR Spooner, BSc, FIAA, FNSA, of Watson Wyatt NZ Ltd.  Approximately 24% of disclosed accrued benefits and 47% of plan assets relate to defined benefits.

 

(4)       National Wealth Management Superannuation Fund is technically a defined benefit fund although the majority of members have accumulation benefits. Accrued benefits are at the date of last actuarial assessment, which was July 1, 2002.  At the date of the last acturial assessment, plan assets were $95 million and vested benefits were $99 million.  Plan assets and vested benefits are as at June 30, 2004, being the date of the most recent financial statements of the fund (for 2003 comparative information, they are as at June 30, 2003).  Approximately 61% of disclosed accrued benefits and plan assets relate to defined benefits. The fund actuary is Mr D.O’Keefe, FIAA, of Alea Actuarial Consulting.

 

48 Operating lease commitments

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Estimated minimum lease commitments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due within 1 year

 

370

 

360

 

260

 

258

 

Due within 1 – 2 year(s)

 

298

 

315

 

199

 

221

 

Due within 2 – 3 years

 

237

 

248

 

149

 

164

 

Due within 3 – 4 years

 

178

 

195

 

102

 

118

 

Due within 4 – 5 years

 

135

 

148

 

73

 

83

 

Due after 5 years

 

1,014

 

848

 

351

 

376

 

Total operating lease commitments (1)  (2)  (3)

 

2,232

 

2,114

 

1,134

 

1,220

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commitments by type

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial and residential buildings

 

2,103

 

1,960

 

1,007

 

1,067

 

Data processing and other equipment

 

129

 

154

 

127

 

153

 

Total operating lease commitments  (1)  (2)  (3)

 

2,232

 

2,114

 

1,134

 

1,220

 

 


(1)  Figures include liabilities taken up for surplus leased space and lease incentives.

 

(2)  Includes non-cancellable operating lease commitments consisting of:

 

Due within 1 year

 

286

 

284

 

185

 

190

 

Due within 1 – 2 year(s)

 

247

 

247

 

157

 

159

 

Due within 2 – 3 years

 

215

 

211

 

134

 

133

 

Due within 3 – 4 years

 

171

 

184

 

101

 

112

 

Due within 4 – 5 years

 

128

 

143

 

73

 

83

 

Due after 5 years

 

961

 

803

 

351

 

376

 

Total non-cancellable operating lease commitments

 

2,008

 

1,872

 

1,001

 

1,053

 

 

Comparative information has been restated to reflect the reclassification of operating lease commitments as non-cancellable operating leases.

 

(3)       Included in this note are lease commitments resulting from the sale and leaseback of various properties. These transactions are generally for a term of five years, or 10 years for major properties. There is no ongoing involvement in the properties other than rental payments.

 

49 Capital expenditure commitments

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Land and buildings

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due within 1 year

 

70

 

41

 

70

 

40

 

Data processing and other equipment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due within 1 year

 

16

 

25

 

12

 

23

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due within 1 year

 

12

 

5

 

 

 

Total capital expenditure commitments

 

98

 

71

 

82

 

63

 

 

189



 

50  Related party disclosures

 

During the year, there have been dealings between the Company and its controlled entities and other related parties.  The Company provides a range of services to related parties including the provision of banking facilities and standby financing arrangements.  Other dealings include granting loans, accepting deposits and providing finance, forward exchange and interest rate cover.  These transactions are normally subject to commercial terms and conditions.

 

Other transactions with controlled entities may involve leases of properties, plant and equipment, provision of data processing services or access to intellectual or other intangible property rights.  Charges for these transactions are made on the basis of equitable rates agreed between the parties.  The Company also provides various administrative services to the Group, which may include accounting, secretarial and legal.  Fees may be charged for these services.

 

The aggregate of material amounts receivable from or payable to controlled entities at balance date is as disclosed on the statement of financial position of the Company.

 

Details of directors who held office during the year are set out in the report on the directors and officers.  Details of remuneration paid or payable to the directors are set out in note 51.

 

Australian banks, parent entities of Australian banks and controlled entities of Australian banks have been exempted under the revised ASIC Class Order 98/110 dated July 10, 1998 (revised by Class Order 04/665 dated July 19, 2004) from providing details of certain loans or financial instrument transactions made by banks to personally-related entities of directors of the Company or specified executives of the Group (other than to any entity controlled or significantly influenced by them) in the ordinary course of the banking business and on an arm’s length basis or with the approval of shareholders of the relevant entity and its ultimate parent entity, if any.

 

The Company is required under the terms of the Class Order to lodge a statutory declaration, signed by two directors, with ASIC.  The declaration must provide confirmation that the Company has implemented systems of internal control and procedures that provide assurance that any loans or other financial instrument transactions of a bank with directors or specified executives or their personally-related entities which are not entered into on normal terms and conditions are drawn to the attention of the directors so that they may be disclosed in the financial report.

 

The Company lodged such a declaration with its annual return to ASIC for the year ended September 30, 2004.

 

Loans to directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group

 

Loans made to the directors other than executive directors of the Company are made in the ordinary course of business on commercial terms and conditions.  Loans to specified executives (including executive directors) of the Group may be made on similar terms and conditions generally available to other employees within the Group.  Loans to directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group, among others, are subject to restrictions under applicable laws and regulations including the United States Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002.

 

Under the revised Class Order referred to above, disclosure is limited to the aggregate amount of loans made or guaranteed by:

 

             the Company and its controlled entities to directors of the Company, specified executives of the Group and entities controlled or significantly influenced by them; and

 

             controlled non-banking entities to directors of the Company, specified executives of the Group, or their personally-related entities.

 

Details regarding the aggregate amounts of such loans outstanding, interest charged, interst not charged and write-offs for the last two years to September 30 were:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Individuals

 

 

 

Terms

 

Balance at

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

in group

 

 

 

and

 

beginning

 

Interest

 

Interest not

 

 

 

Balance at

 

during year

 

 

 

conditions

 

of year

 

charged

 

charged

 

Write-off

 

end of year

 

No.

 

 

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

$ .

 

$

 

$

 

 

 

Directors of the Company

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2004

 

Normal

 

24,824,092

 

1,495,345

 

 

 

26,137,542

 

8

 

2003 (1)

 

Normal

 

214,604

 

 

(2)

 

(2)

 

(2)

2,677,942

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specified executives of the Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2004

 

Normal

 

2,222,538

 

504,569

 

 

 

9,913,701

 

8

 

 

 

Employee

 

3,022,782

 

152,109

 

 

 

2,730,615

 

9

 

2003  (1)

 

Normal

 

997,442

 

 

(2)

 

(2)

 

(2)

1,464,444

 

3

 

 

 

Employee

 

913,427

 

 

(2)

 

(2)

 

(2)

2,102,130

 

7

 

 


(1)  Comparative information excludes loans to entities controlled or significantly incfluenced by directors and specified executives as this information was not previously required under ASIC Class Order 98/110

 

(2)  Interest charged, interest not charged and amounts written-off during 2003 were not obtained as there was no requirement to disclose this information.

 

190



 

Details regarding individuals with loans above $100,000 during the year ended September 30, 2004 were:

 

 

 

Terms

 

Balance at

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Highest

 

 

 

and

 

beginning

 

Interest

 

Interest not

 

 

 

Balance at

 

indebtedness

 

2004

 

conditions

 

of year

 

charged

 

charged

 

Write-off

 

end of year

 

during year

 

 

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

Directors of the Company

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GJ Kraehe

 

Normal

 

3,820,000

 

166,852

 

 

 

2,215,000

 

4,522,000

 

DT Gilbert (1)

 

Normal

 

11,850,060

 

738,991

 

 

 

13,338,878

 

15,666,433

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

JB Clark

 

Normal

 

546,090

 

18,620

 

 

 

2,400

 

898,490

 

KJ Moss

 

Normal

 

354,486

 

23,064

 

 

 

276,737

 

354,486

 

ED Tweddell (2)

 

Normal

 

8,250,000

 

547,344

 

 

 

10,290,846

 

10,495,000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specified executives of the Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A Fahour (3)

 

Normal

 

 

11,552

 

 

 

2,238,210

 

2,238,216

 

JE Hooper (4)

 

Employee

 

1,524,324

 

65,578

 

 

 

1,035,302

 

1,526,201

 

RE Pinney (4)

 

Normal

 

699,700

 

48,417

 

 

 

781,700

 

801,700

 

 

 

Employee

 

106,937

 

 

 

 

101,321

 

106,937

 

GR Slater (4)

 

Employee

 

319,749

 

28,760

 

 

 

542,105

 

625,749

 

GW Willis (4)

 

Employee

 

884,463

 

57,410

 

 

 

876,497

 

958,807

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IR Crouch

 

Normal

 

 

152,660

 

 

 

2,434,393

 

2,450,000

 

MT Laing

 

Normal

 

275,247

 

18,687

 

 

 

252,752

 

275,247

 

 

 

Employee

 

73,340

 

 

 

 

62,397

 

73,340

 

CD Lewis

 

Normal

 

 

2,000

 

 

 

 

800,000

 

 

 

Employee

 

2,000

 

 

 

 

2,000

 

4,000

 

PA McKinnon (4)

 

Normal

 

758,100

 

270,679

 

 

 

4,206,646

 

4,312,591

 

 

 

Employee

 

36,190

 

 

 

 

34,496

 

36,190

 

RE McKinnon (4)

 

Normal

 

489,497

 

574

 

 

 

 

490,071

 

 

 

Employee

 

73,781

 

275

 

 

 

75,378

 

79,250

 

 


(1)   Includes business loans of an entity over which Mr Gilbert has a significant influence.

 

(2)  Includes business loans of an entity over which Dr Tweddell has a significant influence.

 

(3)  Loan originated in the US and payable in US dollars.  The applicable interest rate of 2.37% per annum represents a normal market interest rate for US borrowings.

 

(4)  Included within loans on employee terms and conditions are loans to purchase Company shares at a nil interest rate. This offer, which ceased in 1999 offered all employees a loan to purchase a prescribed number of shares each year between 1997 and 1999.  The shares for the relevant individuals are held in trust and dividends are applied against the principal of the loan until the loan is repaid.  In addition to the individuals listed above, Mr MacDonald, Mr Scott and Mr Scholes, whose total loans do not exceed $100,000,  also have loans under this arrangement.  The benefit associated with this interest-free loan has been imputed at 9.6%, which is the current rate of interest for loans to purchase shares under performance option and performance rights plans, and has been disclosed as part of the non-monetary remuneration of these specified executives in note 51.

 

All loans with directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group (or related entities controlled or significantly influenced by them) have been provided on an arm’s length commercial basis including the term of the loan, security required and the interest rate (which may be fixed or variable).

 

Loans made by the Group in 2004 and 2003 to directors or to any associate of such persons, as defined by the United States SEC at no time exceeded 5% of the equity of the Group.

 

Other transactions with directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group

 

All other transactions with directors of the Company, specified executives of the Group and their personally-related entities are conducted on an arm’s length basis in the normal course of business and on commercial terms and conditions.  These transactions generally involve the provision of financial and investment services by non-bank controlled entities.  All such transactions that have occurred with directors of the Company, specified executives of the Group and their personally-related entities have been trivial or domestic in nature.  In this context, transactions are trivial in nature when they are considered of little or no interest to the users of the financial report in making and evaluating decisions about the allocation of scarce resources.  Transactions are domestic in nature when they are related to the director or executive’s personal household activities.

 

191



 

Controlled entities

 

Refer to note 19 for details of the Company’s investment in controlled entities. Refer to note 43 for details of controlled entities.

 

Details of amounts received from or paid to controlled entities in the form of dividends or interest are set out in notes 4 and 5(b).

 

In the context of the Group’s operations, the directors of the Company do not consider it practicable to collate details of dealings with controlled entities by transaction type, except to the extent that they have been collated and disclosed in respect of the specific transaction types referred to in the preceding paragraph.

 

The Company has certain guarantees and undertakings with entities in the Group.  These are set out in note 44.

 

51 Remuneration of directors and executives

 

(a)  Details of directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group

 

(i) Current directors

 

The following persons were directors of the Company at September 30, 2004:

 

Name

 

Position

 

Date commenced position, if during year

 

GJ Kraehe

 

Director (non-executive)

 

-

 

 

 

Chairman (non-executive)

 

February 16, 2004

 

JM Stewart

 

Director (executive)

 

-

 

 

 

Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer

 

February 2, 2004

 

PJB Duncan

 

Director (non-executive)

 

-

 

RG Elstone

 

Director (non-executive)

 

September 2, 2004

 

DT Gilbert

 

Director (non-executive)

 

September 2, 2004

 

PJ Rizzo

 

Director (non-executive)

 

September 2, 2004

 

JS Segal

 

Director (non-executive)

 

September 7, 2004

 

JG Thorn

 

Director (non-executive)

 

October 16, 2003

 

GA Tomlinson

 

Director (non-executive)

 

-

 

GM Williamson

 

Director (non-executive)

 

May 10, 2004

 

 

In October 2004, Mr Ahmed Fahour and Mr Michael J Ullmer were appointed directors of the Company.

 

(ii) Former directors

 

The following persons resigned from their positions as directors of the Company during the year ended September 30, 2004:

 

Name

 

Position

 

Date resigned during year

 

DCK Allen

 

Chairman (non-executive)

 

February 16, 2004

 

FJ Cicutto

 

Director (executive)

 

February 1, 2004

 

 

 

Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer

 

February 1, 2004

 

JB Clark

 

Director (non-executive)

 

August 30, 2004

 

KJ Moss

 

Director (non-executive)

 

August 27, 2004

 

ED Tweddell

 

Director (non-executive)

 

August 27, 2004

 

CM Walter

 

Director (non-executive)

 

May 7, 2004

 

 

192



 

(iii) Current specified executives

 

The following persons were the executives at September 30, 2004, in addition to those listed above as executive directors, with the greatest authority for the strategic direction and management of the Group (referred to as specified executives) during the year:

 

Name

 

Position

 

Date commenced position, if during year

 

CA Clyne

 

Executive General Manager, Customer Solutions

 

August 9, 2004

 

A Fahour

 

Chief Executive Officer, Australia

 

September 1, 2004

 

JE Hooper

 

Acting Executive General Manager, Corporate & Institutional Banking

 

March 15, 2004

 

 

 

Executive General Manager, Institutional Markets & Services

 

August 25, 2004

 

IG MacDonald

 

Executive General Manager, Financial Services Australia

 

-

 

 

 

Chief Information Officer

 

August 25, 2004

 

LM Peacock

 

Executive General Manager, People & Culture

 

May 10, 2004

 

RE Pinney

 

Chief Executive, Financial Services Europe

 

February 2, 2004

 

PB Scott (1)

 

Executive General Manager, Wealth Management

 

-

 

GR Slater

 

Group General Manager, Office of the CEO

 

April 5, 2004

 

PL Thodey

 

Chief Executive Officer, Bank of New Zealand

 

-

 

MJ Ullmer

 

Chief Financial Officer

 

September 1, 2004

 

GD Willis

 

Acting Executive General Manager, Risk Management

 

March 15, 2004

 

 


(1)                Subsequent to September 30, 2004, Mr Scott announced his intention to resign early in the 2005 year.

 

Ms Peacock continues to be employed by National Australia Group Europe Limited while working in Australia.  Mr Thodey is employed by Bank of New Zealand and Mr Scott is employed by National Wealth Management Services Limited.  All other specified executives are employed by National Australia Bank Limited.

 

(iv) Former specified executives

 

The following persons relinquished their positions as specified executives during the year:

 

Name

 

Position

 

Date relinquished position

 

IR Crouch

 

Chief Information Officer

 

August 24, 2004 (3)

 

MT Laing

 

Executive General Manager, Corporate Development

 

August 24, 2004 (3)

 

CD Lewis

 

Executive General Manager, Risk Management

 

March 12, 2004

 

PA McKinnon (1)

 

Executive General Manager, Office of the CEO

 

September 30, 2004

 

RE McKinnon (2)

 

Chief Financial Officer

 

August 31, 2004

 

IF Scholes

 

Executive General Manager, Corporate & Institutional Banking

 

March 12, 2004

 

 


(1)  Held specified executive position as Executive General Manager, People & Culture to May 9, 2004 prior to role as Executive General Manager, Office of the CEO.

 

(2)  Ceased as specified executive on August 31, 2004 but continues to be employed by National Australia Bank Limited.

 

(3)  Relinquished position as specified executive on August 24, 2004 and ceased employment with the Company on September 30, 2004.

 

All former specified executives above were employed by National Australia Bank Limited.

 

(b) Remuneration of directors and specified executives

 

The Compensation Committee regularly reviews the reward philosophy and principles of the Group to ensure they remain contemporary with and reflective of accepted market practice, both in Australia and in the international jurisdictions in which the Group operates.  During 2004, their review resulted in several changes in response to internal and external factors.  The change included a broader scope for the Compensation Committee and a consequent name change to the Human Resources Committee.  The following reward statements reflect the way in which the Group’s reward strategy is being managed at the date of this report.  A full report on ‘Remuneration at the National’ can be viewed in the concise annual report 2004.

 

The design of the share, performance option and performance rights plans seeks to conform with the guidelines set out in “Executive Share and Option Scheme Guidelines”, IFSA Guidance Note 12, Investment and Financial Services Association, 2000.  The principal difference is that performance rights issued by the Company have a nominal exercise price and that any performance options whose exercise price is set at a date other than the date of grant could potentially have an exercise price lower (or higher) than the market price prevailing at or around the date of grant.  The Group’s various employee equity plans are discussed in detail in note 38.

 

The Company’s share, performance option and performance rights plans (together with all other elements of its remuneration structure) are designed to achieve number of outcomes as part of the Group’s total reward philosophy as described below.  As also described below, the reward principles together with the linking of total reward to performance are designed to reward past performance and recognise potential future contribution to the Group’s performance.

 

193



(i) Remuneration philosophy and relationship to Group performance

 

Non-executive directors

 

The fees paid to non-executive directors of the Board are based on advice and data from the Company’s remuneration specialists and from external remuneration advisers.  This advice takes into consideration the level of fees paid to board members of other major Australian corporations, the size and complexity of the Group’s operations, the activities of the Group and the responsibilities and workload requirements of Board members.

 

Fees are established annually for the Chairman and non-executive directors.  Additional fees are paid, where applicable, for participation in Board committees and for serving on the boards of controlled entities.

 

The total fees paid to non-executive members of the Board, including fees paid for their involvement on Board committees and controlled entity boards, are kept within the total pool approved by shareholders from time to time.

 

During 2002, the Board decided not to enter into any new contractual obligations to pay retirement allowance benefits to non-executive directors appointed after December 31, 2002.  At the Company’s annual general meeting held on December 19, 2003, a proposal permitting directors of the Company and its controlled entities who had accrued retirement benefits to apply those benefits frozen as at December 31, 2003 to either cash (to be paid on retirement), to additional superannuation contributions or to the acquisition of shares in the Company (to be held in trust until retirement) was approved.

 

Executives-total reward philosophy

 

The Group manages a total reward framework (including fixed remuneration, short-term incentives and long-term incentives) designed to:

                           focus on creating value for shareholders by rewarding employees based on enhancement of shareholder value through improvements in earnings per share (EPS), Economic Value Added (EVA ®), and total shareholder return (TSR);

 

                           differentiate performance and recognise future potential;

 

                           create an environment where people can be motivated with energy and passion;

 

                           motivate, attract and retain top talent to deliver superior performance;

 

                           provide rewards, benefits and conditions that are competitive within the specific markets in which the Group operates;

 

                           provide fair and consistent rewards across the organisation, which support corporate values; and

 

                           recognise capabilities brought to roles and promote opportunities for career and professional development.

 

Reward principles

 

The following principles underpin the total reward framework:

 

                           the highest performers and those of the greatest value to the Group should receive the greatest reward;

 

                           a greater emphasis on at-risk reward (short-term incentive and long-term incentive) as a component of total reward, with the emphasis increasing with levels of responsibility/criticality of role;

 

                           key performance indicators that include financial and non-financial measures (management and development of talent, behaviour, etc);

 

                           performance is recognised for all individuals and/or teams by:

 

                           linking performance outcomes to incremental market percentiles for fixed remuneration, and also using an 80 - 120% compensation ratio around the selected percentiles;

 

                           contribution to Group performance measured by improvements in EPS (70%) and EVA® (30%) for short-term incentives, and TSR (100%) for long-term incentives; and

 

                           employee ownership through employee share plans to build a partnership between employees and other shareholders;

 

                           fixed remuneration is now generally targeted to market median levels being paid in the finance industry in the relevant global markets in which the Group operates, where other markets (eg. specialist markets) are more appropriate, these are used;

 

                           commencement ‘buy-outs’ are only entered into with the appropriate approval.  Any amounts agreed to be provided on commencement must be based on evidentiary information.

 

Total reward for the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer

 

The Human Resources Committee monitors, reviews and recommends to the Board, inter alia:

 

                           remuneration and incentive policies and structure for the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer; and

 

                           the quantum of total reward (remuneration package, superannuation arrangements, and short-term and long-term incentives) for the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.

 

194



 

The Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer’s total reward arrangements are developed by the Human Resources Committee within the Group’s reward strategy framework.  The Human Resources Committee considers an appropriate mix and quantum of total reward with advice from independent remuneration specialists based on comparisons with other major Australian companies, and taking into consideration the relevant principles of the ASX Corporate Governance Council Principles of Good Corporate Governance and Best Practice Guidelines and other relevant pronouncements.

 

Through the use of appropriate short-term and long-term incentive programs, these arrangements from 2005 take account of the achievement of EPS growth in addition to EVA® growth for the Group, the Company’s TSR performance and specific behavioural and financial key result areas that are agreed between the Board and the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.

 

Total reward for specified executives

 

Total reward for specified executives of the Group is closely aligned to that of the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer in order to promote consistent, clear reward messages and to align remuneration outcomes across the executive team.  This alignment is provided under the Group’s reward strategy, which provides a common framework for reward, talent and performance management across the Group.  Total reward levels are set with advice from independent remuneration consultants to ensure that they are in line with general market practice and appropriately competitive in order to attract top executive talent.

 

Linking total reward to performance

 

During 2004, the Human Resources Committee and management extensively reviewed the Group’s performance management framework.  Three major enhancements to this framework were initiated for the 2005 year onwards:

 

                            calibration of key performance indicators at the commencement of the performance period, which define what performance looks like;

 

                            the introduction of a peer review process.  This process validates performance at the end of the period by calibrating it relative to the performance of other individuals; and

 

                            the introduction of ‘quality gates’, being threshold compliance and behaviour measures.  If an individual fails either gate, then no incentive can be provided.

 

This is a significant shift in approach as the quality gates are separate from the scorecard and have over-arching control.  All employees will be required to achieve the behavioural and compliance quality gates and this will be progressively implemented over the next two years commencing with management employees and above in 2005.

 

The peer review process will allow for performance to be differentiated and will bias the outcome to those with the best performance and potential.  It also identifies those employees who require development and those who are poor performers.

 

The peer review helps to standardise the achievements of each relevant employee.  The reward strategy is designed to provide superior rewards to those employees with the best relative performance.  For those employees this means:

 

                           fixed remuneration levels at a higher market percentile rather than the median, which is standard across the Group;

 

                           a greater proportion of the short-term incentive reward pool (the overall value of which is determined by improvements in EPS and EVA® against target); and

 

                           an allocation of a long-term incentive (the value of which is significantly impacted by improvements in the Group’s TSR performance).

 

The structure of total reward

 

Total reward encompasses three main components as described below.  The target reward mix emphasises at-risk rewards (short-term and long-term incentives), increasing with the level of responsibility and/or criticality of the role.  From 2005, amounts above target are provided in shares with restrictions on trading (subject to any legal or taxation contstraints).  The target total reward mix for the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer is 25 - 30% fixed remuneration, 30 - 35% short-term incentive and 40 - 50% long term incentive.  The target total reward mix for other specified executives is 40 - 65% fixed remuneration, 20 - 30% short-term incentive and 15 - 35% long-term incentive.

 

Fixed remuneration

 

Fixed remuneration reflects the scope of the role and the level of skill and experience of the individual and is generally referenced to the median of the applicable remuneration market, with higher outcomes for the best performing individuals.  The Group operates in a number of countries and business segments and fixed remuneration reviews aim to achieve equitable outcomes for employees in comparable roles within the context of the different geographical and specialist remuneration markets in which the Group competes for top executive talent.

 

Short-term incentives

 

In previous years, including 2004, the short-term incentive program for senior executives related solely to the EVA® performance of the Group.  The weighting between EVA® performance and individual performance varied depending on the nature of the specific executive role.  Under that program, a pre-defined EVA® performance weighting for an individual flowed through automatically with only the non-financial component being variable based on the individual’s achievement of objectives.

 

The Human Resources Committee conducts a regular review of all aspects of total reward for executives, including the short-term incentive plan.  Changes that will be implemented from the 2005 financial year include broadening the basis for determining the short-term incentive pool, which will now be driven by both EPS (70%) and Group EVA® (30%).

 

195



The new incentive program is structured to reward the achievement against key individual, business and Group annual performance outcomes.  Target amounts are set relative to the applicable remuneration market for executive incentive purposes.  The performance of the Group will, from 2005, be measured by growth in EPS and EVA® and determines the pool available for payments (subject to Board approval), while the performance of an individual executive against their scorecard of performance measures, determines their share of the available pool.

 

For management employees and above, a threshold level of performance and the achievement of behavioural and compliance quality gates are required before any short-term incentive rewards can be earned.  Relative individual performance may give rise to anywhere between zero and two times the target incentive amount being earned, with only the most outstanding performers (less than 5% of employees) receiving amounts at the top end of the scale.  Also, subject to any legal or taxation constraints, all above-target rewards are to be provided in shares with restrictions on trading for at least one year, provided threshold performance is achieved over the subsequent performance year.  The Human Resources Committee believes that this will instil an appropriate focus on Group performance beyond the current year, make certain that quality gates are consistently achieved, and encourage a suitable level of shareholding by executives.

 

The Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer and executive directors are required to receive at least half of any short-term incentive payment in the form of Company shares, subject to shareholder approval.  Where practicable, and subject to any legal or taxation constraints, employees may choose to receive the whole or part of their short-term incentive in cash, superannuation contributions or Company shares, or a combination of these.  The shares are provided under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan and are generally held in trust for between three and ten years (unless the employee leaves the Group earlier).  Employees receive dividends in relation to these shares while they are held in trust.  They are forfeited if the participant’s employment is terminated due to serious misconduct involving dishonesty.

 

Long-term incentives

 

Long-term incentives, in the form of performance options and performance rights, have become a key mechanism for rewarding executive potential and talent.

 

Managing executive talent

 

During 2004, the Company introduced a sophisticated executive talent process, with the twin aims of enabling superior succession planning for the organisation (and management of business continuity risk), and career development for individuals.  This process identifies and tracks employees that contribute to the Group’s high performance capability, and is an essential element of employee engagement and the motivation of top talent.

 

The executive talent review follows on from the performance management framework and assesses individual executives against a matrix of business outcomes, leadership behaviours and potential capability.  The latter dimension measures the individual’s capacity to progress to the next level of management complexity within a given timeframe.

 

On an ongoing basis, the Human Resources Committee will now review the talent and succession plans for the top two levels of management twice per annum.

 

Linking talent management and long-term reward

 

Prior to 2004, long-term incentives (in the form of performance options) were allocated within a total number of performance options approved by the Board each year.  In determining individual allocations, general regard was given to market and peer relativities, with a significant amount of discretion by management.

 

The introduction of the executive talent review and the resulting individual talent assessments now provide a solid, objective basis for determining appropriate long-term rewards.  Through this process, individual long-term incentive allocations now transparently recognise current contribution, future capability and potential contribution to the Group’s performance over coming years.

 

Market relativity drives the value of long-term rewards for each talent matrix outcome for each management level based on a numerical pricing model as detailed in note 38.  The model takes account of factors including the performance option or performance right exercise price, the current level and volatility of the underlying share price, the risk-free interest rate, expected dividends on the underlying share, current market price of the underlying share, the expected life of the performance option or performance right, and the probability of the performance hurdle being reached.

 

Delivery of long-term rewards

 

Long-term incentive rewards may be provided in the form of shares (subject to various restrictions), performance options and performance rights (essentially low exercise price performance options) at the discretion of the Board.

 

Shares issued as a long-term reward are held in trust until various time and/or performance criteria are achieved (dividends aren’t normally received by the individual while the shares are in trust).  Performance options and performance rights are rights to acquire Company shares, if and when specified time and performance hurdles are achieved.  The performance hurdles ensure that executive rewards are linked directly to the total shareholder return (TSR), and are therefore aligned to the outcomes experienced by other shareholders over a specified timeframe (before September 30, 2004, this timeframe was generally three to eight years).  The value of any long-term incentive rewards is also heavily dependent on the market value of the Company’s ordinary shares at the time of

exercise (if and when any securities vest).

 

196



 

Along with moving to link the distribution of long-term incentives to talent review outcomes (as detailed above), the Human Resources Committee introduced performance rights in 2003.  The combination of performance options and performance rights was designed to reduce the number of securities issued (fewer performance rights are issued as they have a higher financial value than traditional performance options).  Performance rights also allow for continued motivation of employees in times when the Group outperforms its peers but, for reasons not related to performance, the share price may be low.

 

Review of the long-term incentive program

 

During 2004, the Human Resources Committee again considered the structure of long-term reward in helping to drive appropriate management behaviours and to reinforce cultural change.  In determining appropriate changes to the existing program, the Human Resources Committee sought advice from external experts in the field and considered best practice in the Australian and international markets.

 

The Human Resources Committee decided to enhance several aspects of the performance hurdle that applies to the performance options and performance rights.  These changes have been implemented with effect from a grant made on September 30, 2004 and will apply to all future grants until amended by the Human Resources Committee.  The nature of the changes is outlined below, with full details of the old and new performance hurdle provided in note 38.

 

Key features of the Group’s performance hurdle

 

Performance options and performance rights granted during the 2004 year in October 2003, January 2004 and June 2004

 

The normal expiry date of these performance options and performance rights is on the eighth anniversary of the effective date.  After a restriction period, generally three years from the effective date (normally the grant date), a performance hurdle must be met before any performance options and performance rights can be exercised.  The performance hurdle compares the Group’s TSR growth since the effective date (averaged over 30 trading days) with that of 50 of the companies in the S&P/ASX100 (excluding the Company) determined as at the relevant date.

 

The number of performance options or performance rights that may be exercised, if any, depends on the relevant ranking of the Company compared with this comparator group.  No performance options or performance rights will vest if the Group’s ranking is below the median (50th percentile) of the peer group.  Half of the performance options and performance rights vest when the median (50th percentile) TSR ranking is achieved and a ranking at or above the 75th percentile is required for all of the performance options and performance rights to vest.  If the performance hurdle is not fully achieved within eight years from the effective date, then any unvested securities will lapse.  Any vested but unexercised securities will also lapse at this time.

 

Performance options and performance rights granted during the 2004 year in September 2004 and subsequent grants

 

The normal expiry date of the Group’s performance options and performance rights will now be on the fifth anniversary of the effective date.  The three year restriction period from the effective date will still apply, generally with a two-year exercise period (subject to the performance hurdle being met).

 

The performance hurdle in relation to half of the performance options and to half of the performance rights will compare the Group’s TSR performance since the effective date (averaged over 30 trading days) with that of 50 of the companies in the S&P/ASX200 (excluding the Company) determined as at the effective date. The remaining half of the performance options and half of the performance rights will vest depending on the Group’s TSR performance since the effective date (averaged over 30 trading days) with that of the top financial services companies in the S&P/ASX200 (excluding the Company).

 

The number of performance options or performance rights that may be exercised, if any, will depend on the relevant ranking of the Company compared with these comparator groups over a period of 30 consecutive trading days - ie. only sustained performance will determine the amount of vesting.  Vesting will commence when the Company’s rank is above the median (50th percentile) of either peer group, with half of each portion of the performance options and performance rights vesting when the Company ranks at the 51st percentile of the relevant peer group.

 

A TSR ranking above the 75th percentile of both peer groups for 30 consecutive trading days will be required for all of the performance options and performance rights to vest.  If the performance hurdle is not fully achieved within five years (from the effective date), any unvested securities will lapse.  Any vested but unexercised securities will also lapse at this time.

 

197



 

(ii)  Service agreements

 

Remuneration and other terms of employment for current and former specified executives (including executive directors) are formalised in service agreements. Each of these agreements provide for performance-related cash bonuses, and fringe benefits and other benefits, including participation where eligible, in performance share, option and performance rights plans.  Details of the term of employment and the fixed remuneration and short term incentives for the specified executives as at September 30, 2004 are set out below:

 

Name

 

Term of agreement

 

Fixed
pay (1)

 

Target
short-term
incentive (2)

 

Termination benefits  (3)

 

 

 

 

 

$

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cameron A Clyne (4)

 

No fixed term
(contract commenced August 9, 2004)

 

525,000

 

65

%

12 months’ fixed pay

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ahmed Fahour (5)

 

4 years from September 1, 2004
Option of renewal for 1 further year

 

1,500,000

 

130

%

12 months’ fixed pay

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

John E Hooper (6)

 

No fixed term

 

700,000

 

130

%

3 months’ fixed pay

 

Ian G MacDonald

 

No fixed term

 

722,000

 

100

%

15 months’ fixed pay

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Lynne M Peacock (7)

 

No fixed term
(contract commenced May 10, 2004)

 

GBP 420,000

 

80

%

12 months’ fixed pay

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ross E Pinney

 

No fixed term

 

740,000

 

100

%

18 months’ fixed pay

 

Peter B Scott

 

No fixed term

 

771,000

 

100

%

12 months’ fixed pay

 

Gavin R Slater (8)

 

No fixed term

 

345,000

 

40

%

15 months’ fixed pay

 

John M Stewart (9)

 

3 years from February 2, 2004
Option of renewal for 1 further year

 

2,230,000

 

100

%

12 months’ fixed pay plus 6 months’ notice

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Peter L Thodey (10)

 

No fixed term

 

NZD 560,000

 

70

%

1 months’ fixed pay

 

Michael J Ullmer (11)

 

4 years from September 1, 2004

 

1,000,000

 

100

%

12 months’ fixed pay

 

 

 

Option of renewal for 1 further year

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Graeme D Willis (12)

 

No fixed term

 

445,000

 

45

%

15 months’ fixed pay

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Frank J Cicutto

 

3 years from October 23, 2003
Option of renewal for 1 further year
(contract ceased February 1, 2004)

 

2,082,000

 

110

%

150% of fixed pay plus 6 months’ notice or pay in lieu

 

Ian R Crouch

 

No fixed term
(contract ceased September 30, 2004)

 

710,000

 

70

%

18 months’ fixed pay

 

Michael T Laing

 

No fixed term
(contract ceased September 30, 2004)

 

620,000

 

70

%

15 months’ fixed pay

 

Christopher D Lewis

 

No fixed term
(contract ceased March 12, 2004)

 

681,000

 

70

%

15 months’ fixed pay

 

Peter A McKinnon

 

3 years from December 1, 2003
Option for renewal for 1 further year
(contract ceased September 30, 2004)

 

653,000

 

70

%

18 months’ fixed pay

 

Richard E McKinnon

 

No fixed term

 

810,000

 

100

%

15 months’ fixed pay

 

Ian F Scholes

 

No fixed term
(contract ceased March 12, 2004)

 

650,000

 

150

%

6 months’ fixed pay, plus 150% of fixed pay (excluding superannuation) and target short-term incentive

 

 


(1)                Fixed pay is fixed remuneration inclusive of superannuation and fringe benefits.

 

(2)                Target short-term incentive is subject to achievement of individual and Group performance goals with the target percentage (of fixed pay shown above) being earned for an on-target performance.  At least half of Mr Stewart’s, Mr Fahour’s and Mr Ullmer’s short-term incentive awards will be delivered in shares, subject to shareholder approval.  Other specified executives may elect for part of any short-term incentive reward to be provided in shares.

 

(3)                Termination benefits vary depending on the circumstances of termination.  Termination benefits shown are payable where the Company terminates the specified executives’ employment agreement on notice and without cause and makes payment in lieu of notice.  Generally, termination benefits are not payable on resignation, summary termination or unsatisfactory performance.  Performance options and performance rights generally lapse 30 days (or such shorter time as determined at the time of grant) after cessation of employment unless otherwise determined by the Board.  In certain circumstances and depending on the terms of grant, in cases such as contract completion, death, retirement, retrenchment, redundancy or total and permanent disablement, the Board may consider each case on its individual merits and may allow the executive to retain some or all of their performance options and/or performance rights for a period of time no later than the relevant expiry date of the securities.  Vesting and exercise of the securities generally remains subject to the applicable performance hurdle.  Certain shares held in trust are forfeited on termination for serious misconduct involving dishonesty.

 

(4)                One-off compensation on joining the Company comprising 55,000 performance options and 13,750 performance rights was granted on September 30, 2004.

 

(5)                 One-off compensation on joining the Company comprising: (a) 160,000 performance options and 40,000 performance rights granted on September 30, 2004; (b) 75,216 shares (with a value on issue of approximately $2,000,000) issued on September 30, 2004 under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan of which 25% will no longer be subject to forfeiture on resignation on each anniversary of his commencement date; (c) 225,649 shares (with a value on issue of

 

198



 

approximately $6,000,000) also issued under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan; (d) cash payment of $3,857,000 made in September 2004; and (e) approximately $355,000 associated with the sale of his US residence and the purchase of a principal residence in Australia.  Performance options and performance rights granted will lapse immediately on resignation or in the event of summary termination or serious misconduct.

 

(6)                On appointment as Acting Executive General Manager, Corporate & Institutional Banking,  fixed pay was not increased but three tranches of shares with varying conditions on their issue were awarded under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan with the first tranche of 1,627 shares issued on July 19, 2004 and the second tranche of 2,440 shares on September 20, 2004.  Prior to appointment, participated in the Corporate & Institutional Banking bonus plan for the first half of the year.  Upon appointment, short-term incentive is based on previous incumbent’s incentive pro-rated to September 30, 2004.  The percentage short-term incentive shown applies to his new role as Executive General Manager, Institutional Markets & Services.

 

(7)                For the purposes of this table, fixed pay is expressed in British pounds per Ms Peacock’s employment agreement.  On average, A$1 bought GBP0.4055 for the year.

 

(8)                On appointment as Group General Manager, three tranches of shares with varying restrictions on trading were awareded under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan with the first tranche,of 1,186 shares issued on July 19, 2004.

 

(9)                Approval of the granting of 900,000 performance options and 210,000 performance rights (in addition to fixed pay) will be sought at the 2004 annual general meeting to be held on January 31, 2005.

 

(10)         For the purposes of this table, fixed pay is expressed in New Zealand dollars per Mr Thodey’s employment agreement.  On average, A$1 bought NZ$1.13 for the year.

 

(11)         One-off compensation on joining the Company comprising 100,000 options and 25,000 performance rights granted on September 30, 2004.

 

(12)          On appointment as Acting Executive General Manager, fixed pay was not increased but three tranches of shares with restrictions on their trading were awarded under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan with the first tranche of 1,830 shares issued on July 19, 2004.  Upon appointment, short-term incentive is based on previous incumbent’s incentive pro-rated to September 30, 2004.  The percentage short-term incentive shown applies to his former role as Chief Credit Officer.

 

(iii) Details of remuneration

 

Directors of the Company

 

The following table shows details of the nature and amount of each element of the emoluments of each director of the Company relating to services provided in the 2004 year.  Total retirement benefits paid during the year relating to benefits accrued in current and prior years are set out in footnote (4) below. No performance options or performance rights have been granted to non-executive directors during or since the end of 2004 as part of remuneration.

 

2004

 

 

 

Primary

 

Post-employment

 

Equity

 

Other

 

 

 

Name

 

Cash salary
and fees (1)

 

Bonus (2)

 

Non-
Monetary
benefits

 

Super-
annuation (3)

 

Retirement
benefits (4)

 

Shares (5)

 

Performance
options and
rights

 

Termination
benefits

 

Other

 

Total

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GJ Kraehe

 

284,017

 

 

 

25,562

 

27,369

 

67,883

 

 

 

 

404,831

 

JM Stewart

 

1,670,427

 

1,445,000

 

28,261

 

70,301

 

 

 

2,060,964

 

 

 

5,274,953

 

PJB Duncan

 

154,598

 

 

 

13,913

 

11,385

 

27,971

 

 

 

 

207,867

 

RG Elstone

 

12,224

 

 

 

 

 

1,246

 

 

 

 

13,470

 

DT Gilbert

 

11,215

 

 

 

1,009

 

 

1,246

 

 

 

 

13,470

 

PJ Rizzo

 

13,746

 

 

 

 

 

1,401

 

 

 

 

15,147

 

JS Segal

 

8,868

 

 

 

798

 

 

985

 

 

 

 

10,651

 

JG Thorn

 

143,843

 

 

 

12,946

 

 

26,750

 

 

 

 

183,539

 

GA Tomlinson

 

208,313

 

 

 

18,576

 

33,074

 

79,356

 

 

 

 

339,319

 

GM Williamson

 

212,610

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

212,610

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DCK Allen

 

110,537

 

 

 

9,948

 

83,710

 

35,567

 

 

 

 

239,762

 

FJ Cicutto (6) (7)

 

677,649

 

 

7,340

 

3,952

 

 

 

229,623

 

6,618,595

 

 

7,537,159

 

JB Clark

 

84,522

 

 

 

7,607

 

11,132

 

39,453

 

 

 

 

142,714

 

KJ Moss

 

112,309

 

 

 

10,108

 

26,836

 

39,493

 

 

 

 

188,746

 

ED Tweddell

 

138,761

 

 

 

12,489

 

18,153

 

11,176

 

 

 

 

180,579

 

CM Walter

 

92,506

 

 

 

8,325

 

116,650

 

6,775

 

 

 

 

224,256

 

Total – 2004

 

3,936,145

 

1,445,000

 

35,601

 

195,534

 

328,309

 

339,302

 

2,290,587

 

6,618,595

 

 

15,189,073

 

Total – 2003

 

3,471,022

 

1,589,021

 

22,022

 

221,130

 

840,082

 

352,855

 

1,896,536

 

 

 

8,392,668

 

 


(1)                 Non-executive directors’ remuneration represents fees in connection with their roles, duties and responsibilities as non-executive directors, and includes attendance at meetings of the Board, Board committees and boards of controlled entities.  Includes payments of $109,219 to Mr Tomlinson and $164,410 to Mr Williamson in respect of services performed as non-executive directors of subsidiary boards and committees.  Executive directors’ remuneration is described in footnote (1) to the following table: Specified executives of the Group.

 

(2)                 Reflects performance-based remuneration accrued but not yet paid in respect of performance for the year to September 30, 2004.  Only executive directors are eligible to receive any performance-based remuneration.

 

(3)                 Reflects compulsory Company contributions to superannuation and includes contributions of $9,739 to Mr Tomlinson in respect of services performed as a non-executive director of controlled entity boards and committees.

 

199



 

(4)                 Former directors received retirement benefits upon cessation of their directorship with the Company.  No further retirement benefits were accrued by these directors beyond January 1, 2004 in accordance with shareholder approval at the Company’s annual general meeting on December 19, 2003 to freeze contractual entitlements. The following accrued entitlements were paid to former directors: Mr Allen, $1,166,928; Dr Clark, $76,447; Dr Moss, $151,014; Dr Tweddell, $270,620; and Mrs Walter $663,512.  The value of accumulated retirement benefits which will be provided to current directors in the form of shares is: Mr Kraehe, $279,680; Mr Duncan, $104,855; and Mr Tomlinson, $272,608.  From December 31, 2003, neither new nor existing non-executive directors are entitled to additional retirement benefits.

 

(5)                 Includes shares to the value of $42,388 provided to Mr Tomlinson in respect of services performed as a non-executive director of subsidiary boards and committees.

 

(6)                 Remuneration relating to performance options and performance rights represents the fair value of options vested during the year.  Performance options and performance rights with a fair value of $1,058,125, which were disclosed as remuneration in 2003, have been forfeited upon resigniation.

 

(7)                 Mr Cicutto’s termination benefit includes amounts paid in respect of annual leave, long service leave and bank extended leave accrued but not taken, plus eligible termination payment and at risk remuneration paid on termination.

 

An amount of $1,293,000 was paid to Mr Cicutto in respect of deferred performance-based remuneration incentive earned and disclosed as remuneration in in 2003 which is not included in the remuneration above.  Approval for the provision of this remuneration in the form of shares was provided by shareholders at the Company’s annual general meeting on December 19, 2003.

 

Specified executives of the Group

 

The following table shows the nature and amount of each element of the emoluments for all specified executives from the Company and the Group for their period as specified executives during 2004.  Remuneration disclosed in the table below may differ from the remuneration disclosed in the report on the directors and officers for the five most highly remunerated officers, as the report on the directors and officers discloses remuneration for the whole year (or part thereof if the officer joined or left the Group) the individual acted as an officer, which may have been longer than the period they acted as a specified executive.

 

2004

 

 

 

Primary

 

Post-employment

 

Equity

 

Other

 

 

 

Name

 

Cash salary
and fees (1)

 

Bonus (2)

 

Non-
Monetary
benefits (3)

 

Super-
annuation

 

Retirement
Benefits

 

Shares (4)

 

Performance
options and
rights (5)

 

Termination
benefits (6)

 

Other

 

Total

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CA Clyne (8)

 

80,949

 

 

 

1,808

 

 

 

 

 

 

82,757

 

A Fahour (7) (8)

 

132,848

 

 

141

 

1,023

 

 

6,017,937

 

 

 

4,211,881

 

10,363,830

 

JE Hooper (8)

 

244,259

 

194,093

 

70,971

 

42,072

 

 

159,638

 

121,297

 

 

 

832,330

 

IG MacDonald

 

807,564

 

 

6,338

 

12,015

 

 

 

1,421,448

 

 

 

2,247,365

 

LM Peacock (8)

 

341,092

 

173,667

 

42,471

 

 

 

 

156,834

 

 

 

714,064

 

RE Pinney

 

688,729

 

 

287,623

 

81,282

 

 

 

1,008,360

 

 

 

2,065,994

 

PB Scott

 

749,668

 

385,500

 

10,335

 

88,578

 

 

28,157

 

1,588,146

 

 

 

2,850,384

 

GR Slater (8)

 

286,896

 

37,014

 

20,562

 

32,988

 

 

89,057

 

54,924

 

 

 

521,441

 

PL Thodey

 

500,668

 

244,358

 

23,226

 

 

 

 

945,833

 

 

 

1,714,085

 

MJ Ullmer (8)

 

87,686

 

 

633

 

1,023

 

 

 

 

 

 

89,342

 

GD Willis (8)

 

219,454

 

57,267

 

64,121

 

6,637

 

 

150,689

 

209,893

 

 

 

708,061

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IR Crouch (8)

 

743,776

 

 

7,091

 

12,015

 

 

 

990,613

 

979,887

 

 

2,733,382

 

MT Laing (8)

 

590,233

 

65,000

 

12,964

 

10,753

 

 

 

848,483

 

1,234,790

 

 

2,762,223

 

CD Lewis (8)

 

284,080

 

 

3,442

 

15,741

 

 

 

332,903

 

1,001,395

 

 

1,637,561

 

PA McKinnon

 

686,407

 

73,000

 

11,170

 

12,015

 

 

 

1,303,920

 

1,302,625

 

 

3,389,137

 

RE McKinnon (8)

 

780,470

 

 

13,961

 

32,154

 

 

 

1,415,029

 

 

 

2,241,614

 

IF Scholes (8)

 

275,221

 

 

3,442

 

5,313

 

 

 

327,149

 

2,243,193

 

 

2,854,318

 

Total – 2004

 

7,500,000

 

1,229,899

 

578,491

 

355,417

 

 

6,445,478

 

10,724,832

 

6,761,890

 

4,211,881

 

37,807,888

 

Total – 2003

 

6,305,641

 

6,192,084

 

181,829

 

278,002

 

 

1,090,508

 

8,395,756

 

 

 

22,443,820

 

 


(1)                               Reflects total remuneration package consisting of fixed pay in cash, annual leave, annual leave loading and, where applicable, long service and bank extended leave entitlements.  Leave earned but not taken has been recognised as part of cash salary and fees for the first time in 2004 on adoption of AASB 1046A “Director and Executive Disclosures by Disclosing Entities”. Annual leave taken during the year has been applied first against accumulated leave accrued in prior years and then against current year balances.  The following specified executives have carry-forward accumulated annual leave earned in prior years which is a current entitlement:  Mr MacDonald, 16 days; Mr R McKinnon, 77 days; Mr Scott, 53 days.  The value of long service leave earned during the year is disclosed when it is probable the entitlement will vest.  In general, the entitlement represents 13 weeks for every 15 years worked, paid at the fixed pay rate on the date leave is taken.  The following specified executives have carry-forward long service leave earned in prior years: Mr MacDonald, 126 days; Mr R McKinnon, 61 days; Mr Pinney, 52 days; Mr Willis, 142 days.  In addition, Mr MacDonald has 84 days and Mr Willis has 100 days of bank extended leave earned in prior years. Bank extended leave has not been available to new employees since 1998.

 

(2)                               Reflects performance-based remuneration accrued but not yet paid in respect of performance for the year to September 30, 2004.  Specified executives can elect to be provided the bonus in the form of Company shares or additional superannuation.  Details of full bonuses for the year are included in the table below.

 

200



 

(3)                               Includes motor vehicle benefits and parking.  Expatriate specified executive non-monetary benefits include housing, health insurance and air-fares.  Fringe benefits tax on non-monetary benefits is included within the value of the benefit.

 

(4)                               Includes the value of: (a) one-off compensation on joining the Company; (b) shares granted on appointment to a role in an acting capacity; or (c) shares received under a share ownership plan.  Where the issue of shares is dependent on satisfaction of conditions, the value is recognised over the period the conditions are met.

 

(5)                               Performance options and performance rights are issued as part of the Group’s long-term incentive plan as described in the remuneration policy in this note.  Remuneration for former specified executives reflects the portion of benefit earned during their period as a specified executive only.  No terms of vested performance options or performance rights were altered during the reporting period.  Refer below for an explanation of fair value basis used to determine equity remuneration.

 

(6)                               Termination benefits include all annual leave, long service leave and bank extended leave accrued but not taken before cessation with the Group.  Some accrued leave reflects leave earned but not taken in prior years which has not been previously disclosed as part of cash salary and fees.  No specified executives had post-employment benefits that required approval by members in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).

 

(7)                               Shares represent 75,216 shares issued on September 30, 2004 under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan of which 25% will vest (ie. will not be subject to forfeiture on resignation) on each anniversary of his commencement date and 225,649 shares also issued under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan.  Other represent one-off compensation in cash of $3,857,000, plus cash payments of $354,881 associated with the sale of US residence and the purchase of a principal residence in Australia.

 

(8)                               Remuneration relates to part of the year.  Refer to section (a), details of directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group, for details of dates commenced and ceased as specified executives.

 

In addition to remuneration benefits above, the Company paid a premium for a contract insuring all directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group as officers.  It is not possible to allocate the benefit of this premium between individual directors or specified executives.  In accordance with usual commercial practice, the insurance contract prohibits disclosure of details of the premium paid under the contract.

 

The following table shows the bonuses paid and payable to all current specified executives of the Group, including executive directors, for the full year.  Bonuses for 2004 differ from the table above for those executives who received bonuses for a full year of service but acted in a position as a specified executive of the Group for part of the year.

 

 

 

Bonus paid or payable

 

Name

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

CA Clyne

(joined August 2004. No 2003 or 2004 bonus)

 

 

 

A Fahour

(joined September 2004. No 2003 or 2004 bonus)

 

 

 

JE Hooper (1)

 

 

356,000

 

700,000

 

IG MacDonald

 

 

 

906,000

 

LM Peacock

(joined August 2003. No 2003 bonus)

 

414,303

 

 

RE Pinney (1)

 

 

 

550,000

 

PB Scott

 

 

385,500

 

964,000

 

GR Slater

 

 

75,900

 

109,287

 

JM Stewart (1)

 

 

1,445,000

 

296,021

 

PL Thodey

 

 

244,358

 

495,423

 

MJ Ullmer

(joined September 2004. No 2003 or 2004 bonus)

 

 

 

GD Willis (1)

 

 

105,038

 

253,106

 

 


(1)                               Target bonus for 2004 reflects changed role or acting role during the year.  More details are provided in section (b) (ii), service agreements.

 

Fair value basis used to determine equity remuneration

 

The disclosure of the allocation of fair value of peformance options and performance rights in the above tables has been based upon the requirements of AASB 1046A “Director and Executive Disclosures by Disclosing Entities”.  In accordance with these requirements, each year a portion of the fair value of all unvested performance options and performance rights is included in the remuneration of directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group for disclosure purposes.  This portion of the fair value is based on a straight-line allocation of fair value over the vesting period of each unvested performance option or performance right.

 

Prior to October 1, 2002, the Company disclosed the fair value of performance options granted during the financial year using a numerical pricing model, but did not allocate those values over their expected life for reporting emoluments.  Rather, the full fair value of the grant was disclosed as an emolument in the year of grant.  As a result, included in the amounts disclosed above as an allocation of fair value of performance options and performance rights in relation to 2004, are amounts related to unvested performance options granted in prior years that were disclosed as part of emoluments in the relevant prior years.

 

Note however, when the Group transitions to Australian equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards, they will not require all unvested performance options and rights to be recognised in this way, only those granted after November 7, 2002 that are unvested at January 1, 2005.  A difference may therefore arise between disclosure under AASB 1046A and the remuneration expense recognised under the new accounting standards in the Group’s financial performance.

 

201



 

Performance options and rights granted as part of specified executive emoluments have been valued using a numerical pricing model, which takes account of factors including the performance option or performance right exercise price, the current level and volatility of the underlying share price, the risk-free interest rate, expected dividends on the underlying share, current market price of the underlying share and the expected life of the performance option or performance right. The probability of the performance hurdle being reached has been taken into consideration in estimating the number of options or performance rights likely to vest.  For further details, refer to note 38.

 

(c) Equity instrument disclosures relating to directors and specified executives

 

(i) Terms and conditions of performance option and performance right grants

 

The performance options and rights currently granted by the Company to executive directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group are over ordinary shares under the Company’s National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No. 2 (executive share option plan) and its National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan (performance rights plan).  The terms and conditions of each performance option and right, including grant date and exercise price under each plan, is detailed in note 38.

 

(ii) Performance options and performance rights provided as remuneration to directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group

 

Details of performance options and rights over ordinary shares in the Company provided as remuneration to each director of the Company and each of the specified executives of the Group during the year ended September 30, 2004 are set out below:

 

 

 

Performance options granted

 

Performance rights granted

 

Name

 

Grant
date

 

Expiry
date

 

Granted
during
year

 

Grant
date

 

Expiry
date

 

Granted
during
year

 

Director of the Company

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

JM Stewart

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

150,000

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

37,500

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specified executives of the Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CA Clyne

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

55,000

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

13,750

 

A Fahour

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

160,000

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

40,000

 

JE Hooper

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

25,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

6,250

 

IG MacDonald

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

125,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

31,250

 

LM Peacock

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

50,000

 

Oct 30, 2003

 

Mar 20, 2011

 

12,500

 

 

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

75,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

18,750

 

 

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

25,000

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

6,250

 

RE Pinney

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

75,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

18,750

 

 

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

25,000

 

Jun 25, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

6,250

 

PB Scott

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

125,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

31,250

 

GR Slater

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

20,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

5,000

 

PL Thodey

 

Jan 30, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

100,000

 

Jan 30, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

25,000

 

MJ Ullmer

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

100,000

 

Sep 30, 2004

 

Aug 31, 2009

 

25,000

 

GD Willis

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

30,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

7,500

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IR Crouch

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

125,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

31,250

 

MT Laing

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

100,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

25,000

 

PA McKinnon

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

100,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

25,000

 

RE McKinnon

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

125,000

 

Jan 16, 2004

 

Jan 15, 2012

 

31,250

 

 

Fair value and exercise price per performance option and performance right at each grant date are set out below:

 

 

 

Performance options

 

Performance rights

 

Performance options and performance rights

 

Grant date

 

Fair
value

 

Exercise
price

 

Fair
value

 

Exercise
price (1)

 

Exercise
period

 

From

 

to

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

$

 

 

 

 

 

October 30, 2003

 

4.39

 

30.98

 

22.59

 

 

March 21, 2006

 

March 20, 2011

 

January 16 and 30, 2004

 

4.71

 

30.25

 

21.86

 

 

January 16, 2007

 

January 15, 2012

 

June 25, 2004

 

4.42

 

29.91

 

22.09

 

 

January 16, 2007

 

January 15, 2012

 

June 25, 2004 (2)

 

4.33

 

30.25

 

22.09

 

 

January 16, 2007

 

January 15, 2012

 

September 30, 2004

 

4.00

 

26.59

 

17.50

 

 

September 1, 2007

 

August 31, 2009

 

 


(1)                                   The total exercise price payable on the exercise of any performance rights on a particular day is $1.00 irrespective of the number of rights exercised on that day.

 

(2)                                   Grant made to Mr Stewart was deferred from January 2004.  Each of these performance options has the same exercise price as January 16, 2004 grant.  This grant was approved by shareholders at the annual general meeting held on December 19, 2003.

 

202



 

All shares issued on the exercise of performance options are paid for in full by the individual on exercise based on the relevant exercise price.  Directors of the Company and specified executives of the Group have the ability to take out a loan with the Company to acquire the shares subject to the provisions of applicable laws and regulations (including the United States Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002).  Repayments of such a loan are made from dividends on the shares.  No specified executives have outstanding loan balances associated with the exercise of performance options.  The number of shares received on exercise of performance options are included in equity instrument disclosures below.

 

(iii) Performance option holdings

 

The numbers of performance options over ordinary shares in the Company held during the financial year by each director of the Company and each specified executive of the Group, including their personally-related entities, are set out below:

 

 

 

Performance options

 

Name

 

Balance
at start
of year

 

Granted during
year as
remuneration

 

Exercised
during
year

 

Other
changes during
year (1)

 

Balance
at end
of year

 

Vested
during
year

 

Vested and
exercisable at
end of year (2)

 

Directors of the Company

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

JM Stewart

 

125,000

 

150,000

 

 

 

275,000

 

 

 

FJ Cicutto (former) (3)

 

1,700,000

 

 

(500,000

)

(1,200,000

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specified executives of the Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CA Clyne (4)

 

 

55,000

 

 

 

55,000

 

 

 

A Fahour (4)

 

 

160,000

 

 

 

160,000

 

 

 

JE Hooper

 

80,000

 

25,000

 

 

 

105,000

 

 

 

 

IG MacDonald

 

725,000

 

125,000

 

 

(100,000

)

750,000

 

125,000

 

125,000

 

LM Peacock

 

 

150,000

 

 

 

150,000

 

 

 

RE Pinney

 

800,000

 

100,000

 

 

(200,000

)

700,000

 

125,000

 

325,000

 

PB Scott

 

775,000

 

125,000

 

 

 

900,000

 

125,000

 

242,000

 

GR Slater

 

47,500

 

20,000

 

 

 

67,500

 

5,000

 

5,000

 

PL Thodey

 

527,500

 

100,000

 

 

(40,000

)

587,500

 

75,000

 

175,000

 

MJ Ullmer (4)

 

 

100,000

 

 

 

100,000

 

 

 

GD Willis

 

217,500

 

30,000

 

 

(60,000

)

187,500

 

30,000

 

30,000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IR Crouch

 

462,500

 

125,000

 

 

 

587,500

 

 

 

MT Laing (5)

 

460,000

 

100,000

 

(50,000

)

(60,000

)

450,000

 

50,000

 

 

CD Lewis

 

500,000

 

 

 

(300,000

)

200,000

 

52,000

 

52,000

 

PA McKinnon (6)

 

550,000

 

100,000

 

(125,000

)

 

525,000

 

125,000

 

 

RE McKinnon (7)

 

755,000

 

125,000

 

(54,600

)

(60,000

)

765,400

 

125,000

 

125,000

 

IF Scholes

 

375,000

 

 

 

 

375,000

 

 

 

 


(1)

 

Other changes reflect performance options issued on March 19, 1999 which lapsed on March 18, 2004 upon failure to meet market performance conditions, with the exception of Mr Lewis, whose lapsed options reflect 200,000 options issued on June 14, 2002 and 100,000 options issued on March 21, 2003 and Mr Cicutto’s as per footnote (3) below.

 

 

 

(2)

 

No performance options are vested and unexercisable at September 30, 2004.

 

 

 

(3)

 

500,000 ordinary shares were issued upon exercise of performance options on June 9, 2004. Options were exercised at an exercise price of $21.29 each which was $8.18 below the market price per share on the date exercised. Performance options were exercised from the grant on March 23, 2000 under the executive share option plan. 400,000 options issued on March 19,1999 lapsed on March 18, 2004 upon failure to meet market performance condition. 500,000 options issued on March 21, 2001 and 300,000 issued on March 21, 2003 lapsed on retirement.

 

 

 

(4)

 

Performance options granted within 60 – 90 days of commencement as specified executive. These options were granted on September 30, 2004 prior to the date on which Mr Fahour and Mr Ullmer were appointed to the Board.

 

 

 

(5)

 

50,000 ordinary shares were issued upon exercise of options on July 1, 2004. Performance options were exercised at an exercise price of $27.85 each which was $2.29 below the market price per share on the date exercised. Options were exercised from the grant on March 23, 2001 under the executive share option plan.  60,000 options issued on March 19, 1999 lapsed on failure to meet the associated performance hurdle.

 

 

 

(6)

 

125,000 ordinary shares were issued upon exercise of options on June 3, 2004. Options were exercised at an exercise price of $27.85 each which was $2.45 below the market price per share on the date exercised. Performance options were exercised from the grant on March 23, 2001 under the executive share option plan.

 

 

 

(7)

 

54,600 ordinary shares were issued upon exercise of options on October 31, 2003. Performance options were exercised at an exercise price of $24.89 each which was $5.70 below the market price per share on the date exercised. Options were exercised from the grant on September 28, 2000 under the executive share option plan.

 

203



 

(iv) Performance rights holdings

 

The numbers of performance rights over ordinary shares in the Company held during the financial year by each director of the Company and each specified executive of the Group, including their personally-related entities, are set out below:

 

 

 

Performance rights

 

Name

 

Balance
at start
of year

 

Granted during
year as
remuneration

 

Exercised
during
year

 

Other
changes during
year (1)

 

Balance
at end
of year

 

Vested
during
year

 

Vested and
exercisable at
end of year

 

Directors of the Company

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

JM Stewart

 

31,250

 

37,500

 

 

 

68,750

 

 

 

FJ Cicutto (former)

 

100,000

 

 

 

(100,000

)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specified executives of the Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CA Clyne

 

 

13,750

 

 

 

13,750

 

 

 

A Fahour

 

 

40,000

 

 

 

40,000

 

 

 

JE Hooper

 

6,250

 

6,250

 

 

 

12,500

 

 

 

IG MacDonald

 

31,250

 

31,250

 

 

 

62,500

 

 

 

LM Peacock

 

 

37,500

 

 

 

37,500

 

 

 

RE Pinney

 

18,750

 

25,000

 

 

 

43,750

 

 

 

PB Scott

 

31,250

 

31,250

 

 

 

62,500

 

 

 

GR Slater

 

3,125

 

5,000

 

 

 

8,125

 

 

 

PL Thodey

 

21,875

 

25,000

 

 

 

46,875

 

 

 

MJ Ullmer

 

 

25,000

 

 

 

25,000

 

 

 

GD Willis

 

8,125

 

7,500

 

 

 

15,625

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IR Crouch

 

28,125

 

31,250

 

 

 

59,375

 

 

 

MT Laing

 

25,000

 

25,000

 

 

 

50,000

 

 

 

CD Lewis

 

25,000

 

 

 

(25,000

)

 

 

 

PA McKinnon

 

25,000

 

25,000

 

 

 

50,000

 

 

 

RE McKinnon

 

31,250

 

31,250

 

 

 

62,500

 

 

 

IF Scholes

 

31,250

 

 

 

 

31,250

 

 

 

 


(1)                               Other changes reflect performance rights issued on March 21, 2003 which lapsed on cessation of employment with the Group.

 

No performance rights held by directors of the Company or specified executives of the Group were vested and unexercisable at September 30, 2004.

 

(v) Shareholdings

 

The numbers of shares in the Company held during the financial year by each director of the Company and each specified executive of the Group, including their personally-related entities, are set out below:

 

Name

 

Balance at
start of
year

 

Granted during
year as
remuneration
(1)

 

Received during
year on exercise
of performance
options or rights

 

Other
changes
during
year

 

Balance
at end
of year

 

Ordinary shares

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Directors of the Company

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GJ Kraehe

 

15,638

 

1,301

 

 

418

 

17,357

 

JM Stewart

 

 

 

 

3,086

 

3,086

 

PJB Duncan

 

4,854

 

469

 

 

187

 

5,510

 

RG Elstone

 

 

 

 

2,000

 

2,000

 

DT Gilbert

 

 

 

 

3,772

 

3,772

 

PJ Rizzo

 

 

 

 

2,000

 

2,000

 

JS Segal

 

2,150

 

 

 

2,000

 

4,150

 

JG Thorn

 

2,000

 

585

 

 

 

2,585

 

GA Tomlinson

 

19,204

 

1,487

 

 

230

 

20,921

 

GM Williamson

 

 

 

 

2,000

 

2,000

 

 

204



 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DCK Allen

 

22,261

 

 

 

(17,678

)

4,583

 

FJ Cicutto

 

241,122

 

 

500,000

 

 

741,122

 

JB Clark

 

4,825

 

961

 

 

130

 

5,916

 

KJ Moss

 

4,957

 

1,014

 

 

72

 

6,043

 

ED Tweddell

 

4,168

 

273

 

 

175

 

4,616

 

CM Walter

 

18,011

 

 

 

516

 

18,527

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specified executives of the Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CA Clyne

 

 

 

 

1,000

 

1,000

 

A Fahour (2)

 

 

300,865

 

 

 

300,865

 

JE Hooper

 

1,044

 

4,108

 

 

 

5,152

 

IG MacDonald

 

6,155

 

41

 

 

174

 

6,370

 

LM Peacock

 

 

 

 

 

 

RE Pinney

 

63,949

 

41

 

 

1,531

 

65,521

 

PB Scott

 

1,987

 

930

 

 

 

2,917

 

GR Slater

 

1,519

 

1,227

 

 

 

2,746

 

PL Thodey

 

88

 

41

 

 

 

129

 

MJ Ullmer

 

863

 

 

 

 

863

 

GD Willis

 

77,442

 

1,871

 

 

(30,000

)

49,313

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IR Crouch

 

 

41

 

 

 

41

 

MT Laing

 

67,221

 

41

 

50,000

 

1,735

 

118,997

 

CD Lewis

 

30

 

41

 

 

 

71

 

PA McKinnon

 

2,253

 

41

 

125,000

 

 

127,294

 

RE McKinnon

 

139,308

 

41

 

54,600

 

 

193,949

 

IF Scholes

 

40

 

41

 

 

5,674

 

5,755

 

 


(1)                               Shares granted as remuneration to non-executive directors under the non-executive director’s share plan (as approved by shareholders) are allotted half yearly.  One allotment of shares has been included above of an aggregate 6,090 shares alloted to non-executive directors on July 15, 2004.  The second allotment for the 2004 year was allotted on November 17, 2004 (2003 allotted on September 26, 2003).  Shares granted as remuneration to specified executives includes 41 shares under the National EVA® Share Plan relating to the 2003 year for each specified executive with the exception of Mr Stewart, Mr Cicutto, Mr Clyne, Mr Fahour, Ms Peacock and Mr Ullmer.  Shares provided under the EVA® Share Plan (per note 38) are held in trust for the earlier of three years or resignation.  All other shares granted as remuneration during the year are held in trust for a period of up to 10 years.

 

(2)                               Represent shares granted on appointment as Chief Executive Officer, Australia.  Refer to section (b) (ii) service agreements for further details.

 

Name

 

Balance at
start of
year

 

Granted
during
year as
remuneration

 

Received during
year on exercise
of performance
options or rights

 

Other
changes
during
year

 

Balance
at end
of year

 

National Income Securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Directors of the Company

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Current

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GJ Kraehe

 

670

 

 

 

 

670

 

PJB Duncan

 

 

 

 

950

 

950

 

DT Gilbert

 

 

 

 

1,253

 

1,253

 

JM Segal

 

180

 

 

 

 

180

 

GA Tomlinson

 

500

 

 

 

 

500

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FJ Cicutto

 

10,000

 

 

 

 

10,000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specified executives of the Group

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Former

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IF Scholes

 

3,015

 

 

 

 

3,015

 

 

205



 

52 Remuneration of external auditor

 

 

 

Group

 

Company

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$’000

 

$’000

 

$’000

 

$’000

 

$’000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total fees paid or due and payable to the external auditor
(1) (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Audit fees

 

10,133

 

8,208

 

7,105

 

3,868

 

2,923

 

Audit-related fees

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Regulatory

 

1,449

 

1,892

 

1,474

 

422

 

445

 

Non-regulatory

 

500

 

3,161

 

4,022

 

391

 

1,482

 

Total audit-related fees

 

1,949

 

5,053

 

5,496

 

813

 

1,927

 

Tax fees

 

337

 

2,782

 

3,077

 

337

 

1,669

 

All other fees

 

747

 

1,341

 

4,541

 

378

 

699

 

Total remuneration of the external auditor

 

13,166

 

17,384

 

20,219

 

5,396

 

7,218

 

 


(1)       Comparatives for the previous corresponding years have been reclassified to reflect the current basis of presentation.

 

(2)       Fees exclude GST, VAT or equivalent taxes.

 

Audit fees consist of fees for the audit of the annual consolidated financial statements of the Group, the audit of the annual financial statements of the Company and each of its controlled entities that are required to prepare financial statements, the review of the Group’s half-year financial statements, the audit of the Group’s annual report on Form 20-F and the provision of comfort letters to underwriters in connection with securities offerings.

 

Audit-related fees have been divided into two sub-categories.  Audit-related fees (regulatory) consist of fees for services required by statute or regulation that are reasonably related to the performance of the audit or review of the Group’s financial statements and which are traditionally performed by the external auditor.  This sub-category includes engagements where the external auditor is required by statute or regulation to attest to the accuracy of the Group’s stated capital adequacy or other financial information or to attest to the existence or operation of specified financial controls.

 

Audit-related fees (non-regulatory) consist of fees for assurance and related services that are not required by statute or regulation but are reasonably related to the performance of the audit or review of the Group’s financial statements and which are traditionally performed by the external auditor.  This sub-category includes employee benefit plan audits, procedures in relation to financial disclosures by the Group such as its annual and half-year results announcements and its corporate social responsibility report, and consultations and advice concerning financial accounting and reporting standards.

 

Tax fees consist of fees for tax advisory and tax compliance services, including advice in connection with the sale of US subsidiaries and services in relation to the tax transfer pricing framework for a Group project.

 

All other fees consist of all other fees for services (including those required by statute or regulation), including cash review reporting, regulatory or compliance audits/attestations for and general advice to Wealth Management entities, internet banking security testing, Corporate Recovery services and social analyst services.

 

The external auditor also provides audit and non-audit services to non-consolidated securitisation vehicles sponsored by the Group, non-consolidated trusts of which a Group entity is trustee, manager or responsible entity and non-consolidated Group superannuation or pension funds.  The fees paid or due and payable to the external auditor for these services during the year to September 30, 2004 total approximately $2,731,000.

 

A description of the Audit Committee’s pre-approval policies and procedures is set out on page 75.  Further details of the non-audit services provided by the external auditor to the Group in 2004 and the fees paid or due and payable to the external auditor for those services are set out in the report on the directors and officers.

 

By virtue of ASIC Class Order 98/2000 dated September 30, 1998 (and amended on February 8, 2000) the external auditor of the Company and its controlled entities, KPMG, has been exempted from compliance with certain requirements of sections 324(1) and 324(2) of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).  The Class Order exemption applies to allow members of KPMG and bodies corporate in which a member of KPMG is a substantial shareholder (other than those members and bodies corporate in which a member of KPMG is a substantial shareholder engaged on the audit of the Company and/or controlled entities) to be indebted to the Company and its controlled entities provided that certain conditions are met, including the following:

 

                  such indebtedness does not exceed $5,000; or

 

                  section 324(3) of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) applies to the relevant indebtedness; or

 

                  the indebtedness arose upon ordinary commercial terms as to the rate of interest, the terms of repayment of principal and payment of interest, the security to be provided and otherwise, and it related to a financial arrangement between the relevant member and the Company and/or its controlled entities prior to the member becoming a member of KPMG where the arrangement was not entered into in connection with becoming a member of KPMG.

 

The Class Order was utilised in relation to two members of KPMG during the year to September 30, 2004.  One member was not a ‘covered person in the firm’ (as defined in US SEC Regulation S-X).  The other member was a ‘covered person in the firm’, but the relevant indebtedness was a mortgage loan collateralised by the member’s primary residence which was obtained prior to the member becoming a ‘covered person in the firm’.

 

206



 

53  Fiduciary activities

 

The Group’s fiduciary activities consist of investment management and other fiduciary activities conducted as manager, custodian or trustee for a number of investments and trusts, including superannuation and approved deposit funds, and wholesale and retail investment trusts.  The aggregate amounts of funds concerned, which are not included in the Group’s statement of financial position, are as follows:

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

Funds under management

 

19,241

 

15,953

 

Funds under trusteeship

 

5,224

 

4,973

 

Funds under custody and investment administration

 

443,020

 

311,163

 

 

Arrangements are in place to ensure that these activities are managed independently from all other activities of the Group.

 

54  Life insurance business disclosures

 

The Group conducts its life insurance business through a number of controlled entities including National Australia Financial Management Limited (NAFiM), MLC Limited (MLC) and MLC Lifetime Company Limited (MLC Lifetime) in Australia, National Australia Life Company Limited in Great Britain (until December 31, 2003) and Northern Ireland, BNZ Life Insurance Limited in New Zealand, MLC (Hong Kong) Limited in Hong Kong, PT MLC Life Indonesia in Indonesia and Advance MLC Assurance Co. Limited in Thailand.  This note is intended to provide detailed disclosures in relation to the life insurance business conducted through these controlled entities.  The financial information contained in this note does not represent the entire Wealth Management business segment and therefore is not intended to reconcile to note 3.

 

Appropriately qualified actuaries have been appointed in respect of each life insurance business within the Group and they have reviewed and satisfied themselves as to the accuracy of the policy liabilities included in this annual financial report, including compliance with the regulations of the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth) where appropriate.  Further details are set out in the various insurance statutory returns of these life insurers.

 

(a)  Details of the solvency position of each life insurer in the Group

 

Australian life insurers

 

Under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth), life insurers are required to hold reserves in excess of policy liabilities to meet certain solvency and capital adequacy requirements.  These additional reserves are necessary to support the life insurer’s capital requirements under its business plan and to provide a cushion against adverse experience in managing long-term risks.  In Australia, the Life Insurance Actuarial Standards Board has issued Actuarial Standard AS 2.03 “Solvency Standard” for determining the level of solvency reserves.  This standard prescribes a minimum capital requirement for each statutory fund and the minimum level of assets required to be held in each statutory fund.  Capital adequacy is determined in accordance with Actuarial Standard AS 3.03 “Capital Adequacy Standard”.

 

The summarised information provided below has been extracted from the financial statements prepared by each Australian life insurer in the Group for the purpose of fulfilling reporting requirements prescribed by local acts and prevailing prudential rules for 2004 and 2003.  For detailed solvency information on a statutory funds basis, users of this annual financial report should refer to the financial statements prepared by each life insurer.

 

 

 

NAFiM

 

MLC

 

MLC Lifetime

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Solvency reserve as at September 30, 2004

 

25

 

29

 

127

 

125

 

449

 

481

 

Assets available for solvency as at September 30, 2004

 

73

 

76

 

571

 

243

 

758

 

731

 

Coverage of solvency reserve (times)

 

2.9

 

2.6

 

4.5

 

1.9

 

1.7

 

1.5

 

 

Non-Australian life insurers

 

The non-Australian life insurers in the Group are not governed by the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth) as they are foreign-domiciled life insurance companies.  Each of these companies is required to meet similar tests of capital adequacy and solvency based on the regulations of relevant local authorities.

 

(b)  Actuarial methods and assumptions – Australian life insurers

 

(i)  Policy liabilities

 

The policy liabilities have been calculated on the Margin on Services (MoS) method as set out in Actuarial Standard AS 1.03 “Valuation of Policy Liabilities” issued by the Life Insurance Actuarial Standards Board (refer to note 1(x)).

 

207



 

(ii)  Types of business and profit carriers

 

Product type

 

Actuarial method

 

Profit carrier

Investment-linked

 

Accumulation

 

n/a

Non-investment-linked

 

 

 

 

Traditional non-participating business

 

Projection

 

Premiums

Lump sum risk – regular premiums

 

Projection

 

Premiums

Lump sum risk – single premiums

 

Projection

 

Claims

Income stream risk

 

Projection

 

Premiums

Annuity business

 

Projection

 

Annuity payments

Traditional participating business

 

Projection

 

Bonuses

 

(iii) Discount rates

 

These are the rates used to discount future cash flows under the projection method to determine the net present value.  The discount rates are determined by the earnings rate of the assets that support the policy liabilities.

 

 

 

NAFiM

 

MLC and MLC Lifetime

 

Discount rates

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

Traditional business

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ordinary

 

4.5

% (2)

5.0

%(2)

5.3

% (2)

5.0

% (2)

Superannuation

 

n/a

 

n/a

 

6.5

% (2)

6.1

% (2)

Term life insurance

 

4.5

% (1)

4.4

% (1)

4.5

% (1)

4.4

% (1)

Disability business

 

5.7

% (1)

5.4

% (1)

5.7

% (1)

5.4

% (1)

Annuity business

 

6.1

% (1)

6.5

% (1)

6.1

% (1)

5.9

% (1)

 


(1)       Before tax.

 

(2)       After tax.

 

(iv) Future expenses and indexation

 

Future maintenance expenses have been assumed to increase by a 2.5% (2003: 2.0%) per annum rate of inflation for NAFiM, MLC and MLC Lifetime.  Future investment management fees have been assumed to remain at current rates.  Benefits and/or premiums on certain policies are automatically indexed by the consumer price index.  The policy liabilities assume a future take-up of these indexation options based on the relevant company’s recent experience.

 

(v) Rates of taxation

 

Rates of taxation in relation to the Australian life insurance business are outlined in note 1(nn).

 

(vi) Mortality and morbidity

 

Future mortality and morbidity assumptions are based on actuarial tables published by the Institute of Actuaries of Australia, with adjustments to claim incidence and termination rates based on recent experience as follows:

 

 

 

NAFiM

 

MLC and MLC Lifetime

 

Traditional business

 

Male: 160% of IA 95-97 (1)

 

Male: 85% of IA 95-97 (1)

 

 

 

Female: 160% of IA 95-97 (1)

 

Female: 85% of IA 95-97 (1)

 

Term life insurance

 

Male: 65% of IA 95-97 (1)

 

Male: 90% of IA 95-97 (1)

 

 

 

Female: 65% of IA 95-97 (1)

 

Female: 80% of IA 95-97 (1)

 

Disability income

 

 

 

 

 

Income protection benefits

 

Male: Rates similar to 120% of incidence and 120% of claim costs of IAD 89-93 (2)

 

Male: Rates similar to 120% of incidence and 120% of claim costs of IAD 89-93 (2)

 

 

 

Female: Rates similar to 120% of incidence and 120% of claim costs of IAD 89-93 (2)

 

Female: Rates similar to 80% of incidence and 120% of claim costs of IAD 89-93 (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loan cover

 

Rates similar to 180% for non-smokers and 225% for smokers of incidence and 112% of claim cost of IAD 89-93 (2)

 

Rates similar to 180% for non-smokers and 225% for smokers of incidence and 112% of claim cost of IAD 89-93 (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Lump sum benefits

 

Various

 

 

 

 

208



 

Annuity business

 

Male: 61.75% + 0.95% for each year > 75 to max 95% of IM92 (3)

 

Male: 61.75% + 0.95% for each year > 75 to max 95% of IM92 (3)

 

 

 

Female: 47.5% + 1.5% for each year > 75 to max 100% of IF92 (3)

 

Female: 47.5% + 1.5% for each year > 75 to max 100% of IF92 (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accident plan

 

Australian population rates (adjusted)

 

n/a

 

 


(1)       IA 95-97 is a mortality table developed by the Institute of Actuaries of Australia based on Australian insured lives experience from 1995 to 1997.

 

(2)       IAD 89-93 is a disability table developed by the Institute of Actuaries of Australia based on Australian insured lives disability income business experience from 1989 to 1993.

 

(3)       IM 92 and IF 92 are mortality tables developed by the Institute of Actuaries and the Faculty of Actuaries based on UK annuitant lives experience from 1979 to 1982.  The tables refer to male and female lives respectively and incorporate factors which allow for mortality improvements since the date of the investigation (there is no standard Australian annuitant mortality table).

 

(vii) Discontinuances

 

Assumed future annual rates of discontinuance for the major classes of business are as follows:

 

 

 

NAFiM

 

MLC and MLC Lifetime

 

Product type

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

Traditional business – ordinary

 

4.0

%

4.0

%

7.0

%

7.0

%

Traditional business – superannuation

 

n/a

 

n/a

 

7.0

%

5.0

%

Term life insurance

 

11.0

%

11.0

%

10.0

%

11.0

%

Accident business

 

6.0

%

6.0

%

n/a

 

n/a

 

Superannuation business

 

n/a

 

n/a

 

14.0

%

13.0

%

Allocated pension

 

n/a

 

n/a

 

16.0

%

5.0

%

Disability income

 

14.0

%

14.0

%

12.0

%

12.0

%

 

(viii) Surrender values

 

Surrender values are based on the provision specified in policy contracts and on the current surrender value basis for traditional policies, and typically include a recovery of policy acquisition and maintenance costs.  In all cases, the surrender values specified in the contracts exceed those required by the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth).

 

(ix) Crediting policy and bonus philosophy

 

For participating business, the Group’s policy is to set bonus rates such that over long periods, the returns to policyholders are commensurate with the investment returns achieved on relevant assets backing the policies, together with other sources of profit arising from this business.  Pre-tax profits are split between  policyholders and shareholders with the valuation allowing for shareholders to share in the pre-tax profits at the maximum rate of 20% (15% for certain policies issued before 1980).  In applying the policyholders’ share of profits to provide bonuses, consideration is given to equity between generations of policyholders and equity between various classes and sizes of policies in force.  Assumed future bonus rates included in policy liabilities were set such that the present value of policy liabilities equates to the present value of assets supporting the business together with assumed future investment returns, allowing for the shareholders’ right to participate in future pre-tax profits.

 

Assumed future annual bonus rates for the major classes of business are:

 

 

 

Ordinary
business

 

Superannuation
business

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2004

 

2003

 

Bonus rate on sum assured

 

1.5

%

1.2

%

2.3

%

2.0

%

Bonus rate on existing bonuses

 

1.5

%

1.2

%

2.3

%

2.0

%

 

(c) Disclosure of assumptions – non-Australian life insurers

 

The policy liabilities for the Group’s non-Australian life insurers have been determined by the respective entity’s actuary in accordance with the guidelines and standards mandated by their local authorities.

 

209



 

(d) Glossary of terms relating to statutory funds business

 

Accumulation method – The outstanding calculation of the policy liability is based on the accumulation of premiums and investment earnings less fees applicable. Deferred acquisition costs are offset against this liability.

 

Annuity products – Policies that provide a regular payment to the policyholder for a specified period or until death of the insured.  Policies may also provide for a payment of a specified amount upon death.

 

Bonuses – Discretionary amounts added to the benefits currently payable under participating business.  Under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth), bonuses are a distribution to policyholders of current profits and retained profits and may take a number of forms including reversionary bonuses, interest credits and capital growth bonuses (payable on the termination of the policy).  The total amount of policyholders’ retained profits distributed in the reporting period as interim and terminal bonus distributions is included in claims expense.  Bonuses proposed during a year are included in the change in policy liabilities.

 

Classes of business – Under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth), there may be two classes of business in each statutory fund: superannuation business and ordinary business.  Superannuation business is maintained for the purpose of a superannuation or retirement scheme.  Ordinary business is all other business.Discontinuances – The voluntary termination of policies through surrender, lapse (surrender value is insufficient to support the debt on the policy) or forfeiture (non-payment of premiums when the policy has no surrender value).

 

Experience profits/(losses) – The profits/(losses) that occur when the actual experience of business is better (or worse) than that expected according to the assumptions used in the calculation of policy liabilities or when one-off events occur which were not allowed for in the assumptions.

 

Investment account policies – Policies where the benefits are calculated by reference to an account balance.  Interest is added to the account balance each year as a distribution of profits under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth).

 

Investment management expenses – The costs of managing the investment portfolio including principal investment advice, investment management and custodian expenses.

 

Maintenance expenses – The costs of all activities which support the maintenance and servicing of the business currently in force.  Maintenance expenses include the cost of processing policy renewals, the cost of processing claims and surrender payments, various management costs, renewal commission, and the cost of maintaining product and administration systems.  Maintenance expenses include all costs that are not policy acquisition costs or investment management expenses.

 

Non-participating business – Policies where the policy benefits are fully specified in the policy document.  Profits/(losses) on this business accrue solely to the shareholders.

 

Participating business – Policies where the policy benefits include, in addition to benefits guaranteed by the policy document, an entitlement to share (with the shareholders) in the profits of the life company.  These profits are usually distributed by providing additional benefits under the policies eg. by the addition of bonuses or interest credits.  The participating policyholders’ share of the profits is protected by the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth).  The participating business includes whole of life, endowment insurance, pure endowment policies and investment account policies.

 

Planned profit – The amount of profit that is expected to be generated from the profit margins for a particular reporting period.

 

Policy acquisition costs or new business selling costs – These include advisory fees, the cost of processing the application, advertising and promotion of products and services, and the cost of developing and establishing new products and related activities.

 

Profit margin – The expected profit under the policy is the profit margin.  It depends upon the premiums charged and the policy benefits provided, the policy experience to date (including the policy acquisition costs incurred) and the assumptions used in the calculation of policy liabilities.  Under the requirements of AS 1.03, profit margins are often defined in terms of the value of another income or expense item (profit carrier).  For participating business, profit margins include those for both policyholders and shareholders.  For non-participating business, all profit margins belong to shareholders.

 

Projection method – The calculation of policy liability is performed by making estimates about future expected cash flows (investment income, premiums, expenses, redemptions and benefit payments). The expected cash flows are then discounted to obtain a present value.

 

Traditional business – Policies such as whole of life insurance, endowment insurance and pure endowment policies.  The sum insured and any bonuses are payable on death or on reaching a certain age (endowment insurances and pure endowments).  Premiums are normally paid throughout the policy term. Traditional business, which is normally participating business, is included within non-investment-linked business.

 

Whole of life and endowment – Policies where the sum insured and bonuses are payable on death or on reaching a certain age.  Bonuses are added each year as distribution of profits under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth).

 

210



 

(e) Summarised financial statement information

 

The Group’s life insurance business is conducted through a number of life insurance entities in Australia and overseas.

 

In Australia, under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth), life insurance business is conducted within separate statutory funds which are distinguished from one another and from the shareholders’ funds.  The financial statements of Australian life insurers are lodged with the relevant Australian regulators and show all major components of the financial statements disaggregated between each life insurance statutory fund and the shareholders’ funds.

 

The summarised financial statements of the Group’s life insurance businesses for 2004 are set out below:

 

Summarised statement of financial performance

For the year ended September 30, 2004

 

 

 

Australian statutory funds

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Investment-
linked
business

 

Non-
investment-
linked
business

 

International
life insurance
funds (1)

 

Total
life insurance
funds

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Premium and related revenue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total premiums received or receivable (2)

 

6,313

 

815

 

274

 

7,402

 

Deduct: Policyholder investment contributions

 

(6,257

)

 

 

(6,257

)

Fee revenue in premiums

 

56

 

815

 

274

 

1,145

 

Add/(deduct): Outward reinsurance income/(expense)

 

3

 

(126

)

(17

)

(140

)

Total premium and related revenue

 

59

 

689

 

257

 

1,005

 

Investment revenue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity securities

 

3,620

 

190

 

21

 

3,831

 

Debt securities

 

697

 

153

 

28

 

878

 

Property

 

134

 

(1

)

 

133

 

Total investment revenue

 

4,451

 

342

 

49

 

4,842

 

Total life insurance revenue

 

4,510

 

1,031

 

306

 

5,847

 

Claims expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total claims paid or payable (3)

 

(5,834

)

(742

)

(66

)

(6,642

)

Add: Policyholder investment withdrawals

 

5,833

 

 

 

5,833

 

Total claims expense

 

(1

)

(742

)

(66

)

(809

)

Add: Reinsurance claim recoveries

 

 

100

 

7

 

107

 

Net claims expense

 

(1

)

(642

)

(59

)

(702

)

Change in policy liabilities

 

(3,467

)

202

 

(103

)

(3,368

)

Policy acquisition expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commission

 

(99

)

(99

)

(41

)

(239

)

Other

 

(27

)

(60

)

(27

)

(114

)

Policy maintenance expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commission

 

(88

)

(50

)

(19

)

(157

)

Other

 

(134

)

(66

)

(13

)

(213

)

Investment management fees

 

(34

)

(4

)

(4

)

(42

)

Interest (expense)/income

 

(2

)

(16

)

1

 

(17

)

Total life insurance expenses

 

(3,852

)

(735

)

(265

)

(4,852

)

Profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

658

 

296

 

41

 

995

 

Income tax (expense)/benefit relating to ordinary activities

 

(176

)

(127

)

2

 

(301

)

Net profit

 

482

 

169

 

43

 

694

 

Net profit attributable to outside equity interest

 

(354

)

 

(11

)

(365

)

Net profit attributable to parent entity

 

128

 

169

 

32

 

329

 

 

Summarised MoS shareholder profit analysis

For the year ended September 30, 2004

 

Planned profit margins

 

122

 

116

 

18

 

256

 

Experience variation and other items

 

(39

)

36

 

4

 

1

 

Operating margins

 

83

 

152

 

22

 

257

 

Investment earnings on contributed equity and retained profits

 

45

 

17

 

14

 

76

 

Other

 

 

 

(4

)

(4

)

Net profit attributable to parent entity

 

128

 

169

 

32

 

329

 

 

211



 

Summarised statement of financial position

As at September 30, 2004

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Investment assets (1)

 

36,619

 

3,734

 

660

 

41,013

 

Other assets

 

587

 

260

 

57

 

904

 

Total assets

 

37,206

 

3,994

 

717

 

41,917

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Policy liabilities (1)

 

32,624

 

2,942

 

428

 

35,994

 

Unvested policyholder benefits

 

 

140

 

 

140

 

Other liabilities

 

215

 

251

 

52

 

518

 

Total liabilities

 

32,839

 

3,333

 

480

 

36,652

 

Net assets

 

4,367

 

661

 

237

 

5,265

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

 

(5

)

199

 

194

 

Retained profits

 

578

 

666

 

38

 

1,282

 

Outside equity interest

 

3,789

 

 

 

3,789

 

Total equity

 

4,367

 

661

 

237

 

5,265

 

 


(1)  International life insurance funds refers to the financial performance and position of foreign-domiciled life insurance entities These non-Australian life insurers do not have statutory funds concepts that are directly comparable to those under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth).

 

(2)    Premiums received for investment-linked business contain two elements: firstly, amounts which are in the nature of deposits (ie. policyholder investment contributions) that are recognised as an increase in policy liabilities and secondly, the fee component which is recognised as revenue.

 

(3)    Total claims paid or payable for investment-linked business which are in the nature of policyholder investment withdrawals are recognised as reductions in policy liabilities.

 

The summarised financial statements of the Group’s life insurance businesses for 2003 are set out below:

 

Summarised statement of financial performance

For the year ended September 30, 2003

 

 

 

Australian statutory funds

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Investment-
linked
business

 

Non-
investment-
linked
business

 

International
life insurance
funds (1)

 

Total
life insurance
funds

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Premium and related revenue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total premiums received or receivable (2)

 

5,505

 

731

 

311

 

6,547

 

Deduct: Policyholder investment contributions

 

(5,445

)

 

 

(5,445

)

Fee revenue in premiums

 

60

 

731

 

311

 

1,102

 

Add/(deduct): Outward reinsurance income/(expense)

 

1

 

(130

)

(24

)

(153

)

Total premium and related revenue

 

61

 

601

 

287

 

949

 

Investment revenue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity securities

 

2,055

 

148

 

47

 

2,250

 

Debt securities

 

342

 

138

 

21

 

501

 

Property

 

 

8

 

 

8

 

Total investment revenue

 

2,397

 

294

 

68

 

2,759

 

Total life insurance revenue

 

2,458

 

895

 

355

 

3,708

 

 

212



 

Claims expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total claims paid or payable (3)

 

(4,853

)

(886

)

(209

)

(5,948

)

Add: Policyholder investment withdrawals

 

4,853

 

 

 

4,853

 

Total claims expense

 

 

(886

)

(209

)

(1,095

)

Add: Reinsurance claim recoveries

 

 

121

 

16

 

137

 

Net claims expense

 

 

(765

)

(193

)

(958

)

Change in policy liabilities

 

(1,845

)

310

 

17

 

(1,518

)

Policy acquisition expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commission

 

(95

)

(97

)

(57

)

(249

)

Other

 

(26

)

(60

)

(21

)

(107

)

Policy maintenance expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commission

 

(79

)

(41

)

(20

)

(140

)

Other

 

(127

)

(63

)

(27

)

(217

)

Investment management fees

 

(64

)

(7

)

(4

)

(75

)

Interest (expense)/income

 

(3

)

(18

)

1

 

(20

)

Total life insurance expenses

 

(2,239

)

(741

)

(304

)

(3,284

)

Profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense

 

219

 

154

 

51

 

424

 

Income tax (expense)/benefit relating to ordinary activities

 

(108

)

(21

)

3

 

(126

)

Net profit

 

111

 

133

 

54

 

298

 

Net (profit)/loss attributable to outside equity interest

 

28

 

 

(12

)

16

 

Net profit attributable to parent entity

 

139

 

133

 

42

 

314

 

 

Summarised MoS shareholder profit analysis

For the year ended September 30, 2003

 

Planned profit margins

 

127

 

95

 

18

 

240

 

Experience variation and other items

 

(14

)

16

 

4

 

6

 

Reversal of new business losses

 

 

4

 

6

 

10

 

Operating margins

 

113

 

115

 

28

 

256

 

Investment earnings on contributed equity and retained profits

 

26

 

18

 

14

 

58

 

Net profit attributable to parent entity

 

139

 

133

 

42

 

314

 

 

Summarised statement of financial position

As at September 30, 2003

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Investment assets (1)

 

31,161

 

3,908

 

777

 

35,846

 

Other assets

 

692

 

444

 

76

 

1,212

 

Total assets

 

31,853

 

4,352

 

853

 

37,058

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Policy liabilities (1)

 

28,737

 

3,109

 

463

 

32,309

 

Unvested policyholder benefits

 

 

148

 

 

148

 

Other liabilities

 

130

 

553

 

96

 

779

 

Total liabilities

 

28,867

 

3,810

 

559

 

33,236

 

Net assets

 

2,986

 

542

 

294

 

3,822

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

 

 

197

 

197

 

Retained profits

 

441

 

542

 

97

 

1,080

 

Outside equity interest

 

2,545

 

 

 

2,545

 

Total equity

 

2,986

 

542

 

294

 

3,822

 

 


(1)       International life insurance funds refers to the financial performance and position of foreign-domiciled life insurance entities. These non-Australian life insurers do not have statutory funds concepts that are directly comparable to those under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth).

 

213



 

(2)       Premiums received for investment-linked business contain two elements: firstly, amounts which are in the nature of deposits (ie. policyholder investment contributions) that are recognised as an increase in policy liabilities and secondly, the fee component which is recognised as revenue.

 

(3)       Total claims paid or payable for investment-linked business which are in the nature of policyholder investment withdrawals are recognised as reductions in policy liabilities.

 

55 Supplementary statement of financial position

 

Given the significant restrictions imposed by life insurance legislation, regulations and the regulators thereunder, the directors consider it essential that users of this annual financial report are able to easily separate the assets and liabilities of the life insurance statutory funds from all other assets and liabilities of the Group.  However, current Australian accounting requirements do not allow for these statutory funds’ assets and liabilities to be separated and disclosed separately on the statement of financial position.  In addition, the requirements also prohibit any adjustment to comparative balances or the inclusion of an adjusted comparative column, which if allowed would facilitate comparability between periods.

 

To ensure that the assets and liabilities of the statutory funds are identifiable and comparable between years, a supplementary statement of financial position for the Group has been included for each year below, as at September 30:

 

 

 

Note

 

Group
excluding
statutory
funds

 

2004
Life
insurance
statutory
funds

 

Total
Group

 

Group
excluding
statutory
funds

 

2003
Life
insurance
statutory
funds

 

Total
Group

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

9

 

7,393

 

687

 

8,080

 

7,660

 

745

 

8,405

 

Due from other financial institutions

 

10

 

23,494

 

 

23,494

 

29,234

 

 

29,234

 

Due from customers on acceptances

 

11

 

16,344

 

 

16,344

 

19,562

 

 

19,562

 

Trading securities

 

12

 

24,248

 

 

24,248

 

23,724

 

 

23,724

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

17,939

 

 

17,939

 

23,644

 

 

23,644

 

Available for sale securities

 

13

 

4,610

 

 

4,610

 

6,513

 

 

6,513

 

Investment securities

 

14

 

11,513

 

 

11,513

 

8,647

 

 

8,647

 

Investments relating to life insurance business (1)

 

15

 

 

41,013

 

41,013

 

 

35,846

 

35,846

 

Loans and advances

 

16

 

247,836

 

 

247,836

 

225,735

 

 

225,735

 

Shares in controlled entities, joint venture entities and other securities

 

19

 

158

 

 

158

 

1,445

 

 

1,445

 

Regulatory deposits

 

20

 

177

 

 

177

 

225

 

 

225

 

Property, plant and equipment

 

21

 

2,254

 

3

 

2,257

 

2,486

 

12

 

2,498

 

Income tax assets

 

22

 

1,367

 

 

1,367

 

1,123

 

80

 

1,203

 

Goodwill

 

23

 

632

 

 

632

 

740

 

 

740

 

Other assets

 

24

 

11,427

 

214

 

11,641

 

9,675

 

375

 

10,050

 

Total assets

 

 

 

369,392

 

41,917

 

411,309

 

360,413

 

37,058

 

397,471

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

25

 

42,044

 

 

42,044

 

52,530

 

 

52,530

 

Liability on acceptances

 

11

 

16,344

 

 

16,344

 

19,562

 

 

19,562

 

Trading derivatives

 

 

 

16,150

 

 

16,150

 

21,479

 

 

21,479

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

26

 

220,752

 

 

220,752

 

201,194

 

 

201,194

 

Life insurance policy liabilities (1)

 

27

 

 

36,134

 

36,134

 

 

32,457

 

32,457

 

Income tax liabilities

 

28

 

1,178

 

 

1,178

 

1,529

 

8

 

1,537

 

Provisions

 

29

 

1,070

 

59

 

1,129

 

1,221

 

41

 

1,262

 

Bonds, notes and subordinated debt

 

30

 

32,573

 

 

32,573

 

24,257

 

 

24,257

 

Other debt issues

 

31

 

1,612

 

 

1,612

 

1,675

 

68

 

1,743

 

Other liabilities

 

32

 

13,168

 

459

 

13,627

 

13,577

 

662

 

14,239

 

Total liabilities

 

 

 

344,891

 

36,652

 

381,543

 

337,024

 

33,236

 

370,260

 

Net assets

 

 

 

24,501

 

5,265

 

29,766

 

23,389

 

3,822

 

27,211

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity

 

33

 

9,997

 

194

 

10,191

 

9,531

 

197

 

9,728

 

Reserves

 

34

 

1,194

 

 

1,194

 

893

 

 

893

 

Retained profits

 

35

 

13,233

 

1,282

 

14,515

 

12,706

 

1,080

 

13,786

 

Total parent entity interest

 

 

 

24,424

 

1,476

 

25,900

 

23,130

 

1,277

 

24,407

 

Outside equity interest – Life insurance business

 

36

 

77

 

3,789

 

3,866

 

69

 

2,545

 

2,614

 

Outside equity interest – Other

 

36

 

 

 

 

190

 

 

190

 

Total equity

 

37

 

24,501

 

5,265

 

29,766

 

23,389

 

3,822

 

27,211

 

 

214



 


(1)       Included within statutory funds are assets and liabilities that relate to foreign-domiciled life insurance entities held by the Group’s life insurance business shareholders’ funds. These non-Australian life insurers do not have statutory funds concepts that are directly comparable to those under the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Cth).

 

56 Reconciliation with US GAAP and other US GAAP disclosures

 

In this note, National Australia Bank Limited is referred to as the Company and the Group consists of the Company and all entities over which it has control (refer to note 43).  A glossary of other key terms is contained at page 255.

 

The Company files its annual financial report (Form 20-F) with the US SEC.

 

The financial report of the Group is prepared in accordance with Australian GAAP (refer to note 1), which differ in some respects from US GAAP.

 

The following are reconciliations of the Group’s financial statements for the last three years to September 30 for any significant adjustments to Australian GAAP which would be reported in applying US GAAP:

 

Statement of income

For the year ended September 30

 

 

 

Footnote

 

2004

 

Group
2003

 

2002

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Net profit reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

3,177

 

3,955

 

3,373

 

Life insurance accounting adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Movement in excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

a(i)

 

167

 

137

 

224

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

a(i)

 

 

 

(166

)

Amortisation of present value of future profits (PVFP) asset

 

a(ii)

 

(159

)

(137

)

(157

)

Difference in life insurance policy liabilities, deferred acquisition cost asset and shadow policy liabilities

 

a(iii)

 

(108

)

(373

)

317

 

Difference in investments relating to life insurance business asset values and unrealised (profits)/ losses on available for sale securities

 

a(iv)

 

(73

)

(128

)

77

 

Difference in deferred tax liabilities

 

a(v)

 

8

 

48

 

21

 

Difference in minority interest share of profit

 

a(vi)

 

83

 

16

 

26

 

Reclassification of foreign currency translation adjustments

 

a(vii)

 

(192

)

168

 

60

 

Movement in net present value of subordinated debt

 

a(viii)

 

3

 

 

(11

)

Other adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Difference in depreciation charge for buildings and profit/(loss) on sale of land and buildings

 

b

 

5

 

1

 

20

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

c

 

103

 

98

 

 

Pension expense

 

d

 

(57

)

(23

)

30

 

Difference in recognition of profit on sale and leaseback transactions

 

e

 

9

 

14

 

18

 

Employee share compensation

 

f

 

(72

)

(50

)

(18

)

Employee option compensation

 

g

 

(2

)

(58

)

(44

)

Difference in lease revenue recognition

 

h

 

25

 

(7

)

(17

)

Movements in fair value of derivative financial instruments (1)

 

i, j

 

(272

)

(392

)

292

 

Difference in profit on sale of foreign controlled entity

 

j

 

 

 

(280

)

Difference in general provision for doubtful debts

 

k

 

156

 

 

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

(18

)

Net income according to US GAAP before tax impact of adjustments

 

 

 

2,801

 

3,269

 

3,747

 

Total tax impact of adjustments

 

 

 

(54

)

258

 

(292

)

Net income according to US GAAP

 

 

 

2,747

 

3,527

 

3,455

 

 


(1)  The 2002 comparative includes associated impact on provision for mortgage servicing rights. Refer to footnote (j).

 

215



 

Comprehensive income

For the year ended September 30

 

Net income according to US GAAP

 

 

 

2,747

 

3,527

 

3,455

 

Other comprehensive income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Foreign currency translation reserve (Tax: 2004: $(179)m, 2003: $640m, 2002: $223m)

 

 

 

417

 

(1,493

)

(520

)

Shadow policy liabilities (Tax: 2004: $nil, 2003: $nil, 2002: $nil)

 

a(iii)

 

(53

)

45

 

(25

)

Unrealised profits/(losses) on available for sale securities (Tax: 2004: $(17)m, 2003: $(69)m, 2002: $20m)

 

a(iv), l

 

49

 

161

 

(47

)

Foreign currency translation reserve relating to life insurance entities (Tax: 2004: $(8)m, 2003: $4m, 2002: $6m)

 

a(vii)

 

184

 

(164

)

(55

)

Asset revaluation reserve (Tax: 2004: $(30)m, 2003: $(4)m, 2002: $4m)

 

b

 

70

 

9

 

(9

)

Movements in fair value of derivative financial instruments associated with mortgage servicing rights (Tax: 2004: $nil, 2003: $(9)m, 2002: $(6)m)

 

j

 

 

20

 

15

 

 

 

 

 

667

 

(1,422

)

(641

)

Total comprehensive income according to US GAAP

 

 

 

3,414

 

2,105

 

2,814

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Earnings per share according to US GAAP (cents)

 

r

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Basic

 

 

 

168.9

 

220.6

 

211.0

 

Diluted

 

 

 

168.9

 

213.1

 

205.6

 

 

Statement of financial position

As at September 30

 

Equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Issued and fully paid capital

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributed equity reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

10,191

 

9,728

 

9,931

 

Employee share compensation

 

f

 

166

 

94

 

44

 

Employee option compensation

 

g

 

595

 

593

 

535

 

Issued and fully paid capital according to US GAAP

 

 

 

10,952

 

10,415

 

10,510

 

Reserves

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Reserves reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

1,194

 

893

 

2,105

 

Asset revaluation reserve

 

b

 

(86

)

(16

)

(7

)

Foreign currency translation reserve

 

 

 

(166

251

 

(1,242

)

Reserves according to US GAAP

 

m

 

942

 

1,128

 

856

 

 

216



 

Retained profits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retained profits less outside equity interest reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

14,515

 

13,786

 

11,148

 

Adjustment to opening retained profits – employee option compensation

 

g

 

 

 

(491

)

Life insurance accounting adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Movement in excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

a(i)

 

(4,965

)

(4,972

)

(5,081

)

Recognition and amortisation of goodwill

 

a(i)

 

2,964

 

2,964

 

2,935

 

Recognition and amortisation of PVFP asset

 

a(ii)

 

1,336

 

1,452

 

1,589

 

Difference in life insurance policy liabilities, deferred acquisition cost asset and shadow policy liabilities

 

a(iii)

 

(808

)

(714

)

(478

)

Difference in investments relating to life insurance business asset values and unrealised (profits)/ losses on available for sale securities

 

a(iv)

 

(82

)

(27

)

70

 

Difference in deferred tax liabilities

 

a(v)

 

307

 

299

 

251

 

Difference in minority interest share of profit

 

a(vi)

 

(32

)

(115

)

(131

)

Reclassification of foreign currency translation adjustments

 

a(vii)

 

(4

)

180

 

16

 

Movement in net present value of subordinated debt

 

a(viii)

 

 

(2

)

(2

)

Other adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Elimination of revaluation surplus of land and buildings

 

b

 

(177

)

(107

)

(98

)

Adjustment of provision for depreciation on buildings revalued

 

b

 

96

 

91

 

89

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

c

 

201

 

98

 

 

Pension expense

 

d

 

40

 

80

 

96

 

Unamortised profit on sale and leaseback transactions

 

e

 

(42

)

(48

)

(59

)

Employee share compensation

 

f

 

(166

)

(94

)

(44

)

Employee option compensation

 

g

 

(595

)

(593

)

(44

)

Difference in lease revenue recognition

 

h

 

(85

)

(110

)

(103

)

Movements in fair value of derivative financial instruments (1)

 

i

 

420

 

635

 

909

 

Difference in profit on sale of foreign controlled entity

 

j

 

(280

)

(280

)

(280

)

Difference in general provision for doubtful debts

 

k

 

109

 

 

 

Provision for final cash dividend

 

n

 

 

 

1,151

 

Other

 

 

 

(117

)

(251

)

(273

)

Retained profits according to US GAAP

 

 

 

12,635

 

12,272

 

11,170

 

Outside equity interest

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Outside equity interest reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

3,866

 

2,804

 

67

 

Reclassification of minority interest

 

a(vi)

 

(3,866

)

(2,804

)

(67

)

Outside equity interest according to US GAAP

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accumulated other comprehensive income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accumulated other comprehensive income reported using US GAAP at beginning of year

 

 

 

47

 

1,469

 

2,006

 

Foreign currency translation reserve

 

 

 

417

 

(1,493

)

(520

)

Shadow policy liabilities

 

a(iii)

 

(53

)

45

 

(25

)

Unrealised profits/(losses) on available for sale securities

 

a(iv), l

 

49

 

161

 

57

 

Foreign currency translation reserve relating to life insurance entities

 

a(vii)

 

184

 

(164

)

(55

)

Asset revaluation reserve

 

b

 

70

 

9

 

(9

)

Movements in fair value of derivative financial instruments associated with mortgage servicing rights

 

j

 

 

20

 

15

 

Realised profits on available for sale securities included in net income

 

l

 

(425

)

 

 

Accumulated other comprehensive income according to US GAAP

 

 

 

289

 

47

 

1,469

 

Total equity according to US GAAP

 

 

 

24,818

 

23,862

 

24,005

 

 

217



 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total assets reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

411,309

 

397,471

 

377,387

 

Life insurance accounting adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Elimination of excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

a(i)

 

(4,805

)

(4,972

)

(5,081

)

Recognition and accumulated amortisation of goodwill

 

a(i)

 

2,964

 

2,964

 

2,935

 

Recognition and accumulated amortisation of PVFP asset

 

a(ii)

 

1,845

 

1,452

 

1,589

 

Restatement and reclassification of deferred acquisition costs

 

a(iii)

 

544

 

372

 

322

 

Difference in investments relating to life insurance asset values

 

a(iv)

 

15

 

19

 

36

 

Other adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revaluation surplus of land and buildings

 

b

 

(177

)

(107

)

(98

)

Provision for depreciation on buildings revalued

 

b

 

96

 

91

 

89

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

c

 

201

 

98

 

 

Pension fund adjustment

 

d

 

249

 

80

 

96

 

Difference in lease revenue recognition

 

h

 

(93

)

(125

)

(118

)

Fair value adjustments to derivative financial instruments (1)

 

i, j

 

100

 

1,168

 

2,833

 

Difference in profit on sale of foreign controlled entity

 

j

 

 

(280

)

(280

)

Difference in general provision for doubtful debts

 

k

 

156

 

 

 

Unrealised profit on shares in entities and other securities

 

l

 

 

424

 

343

 

Assets of special purpose entities consolidated

 

o

 

5,391

 

281

 

38

 

Early pool-buyout reinstatement

 

p

 

 

 

230

 

Other

 

 

 

(19

)

(19

)

(41

)

Deferred tax assets arising from adjustments

 

q

 

274

 

 

 

Total assets according to US GAAP

 

 

 

418,050

 

398,917

 

380,280

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total liabilities reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

381,543

 

370,260

 

354,136

 

Life insurance adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Difference in life insurance policy liabilities and reclassification of deferred acquisition costs

 

a(iii)

 

1,564

 

1,094

 

853

 

Difference in deferred tax liabilities

 

a(v), q

 

 

(299

)

(251

)

Increase in and reclassification of minority interest

 

a(vi)

 

3,898

 

2,920

 

198

 

Difference in subordinated debt valuation

 

a(viii)

 

 

2

 

2

 

Other adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Unamortised profit on sale and leaseback transactions

 

e

 

60

 

48

 

59

 

Deferred tax liability associated with difference in lease revenue recognition

 

h, q

 

 

(15

)

(15

)

Fair value adjustments to derivative financial instruments (1)

 

i

 

218

 

767

 

2,070

 

Deferred tax liability associated with fair value adjustments to derivative financial instruments

 

i, q

 

 

(3

)

106

 

Elimination of dividends provided for but not formally declared prior to balance date

 

n

 

 

 

(1,151

)

Liabilities of special purpose entities consolidated

 

o

 

5,391

 

281

 

38

 

Proceeds received in advance – early pool-buyout

 

p

 

 

 

230

 

Deferred tax liabilities arising from adjustments

 

q

 

558

 

 

 

Total liabilities according to US GAAP

 

 

 

393,232

 

375,055

 

356,275

 

Net assets according to US GAAP

 

 

 

24,818

 

23,862

 

24,005

 

 


(1)    The 2002 comparative includes associated impact on provision for mortgage servicing rights.  Refer to footnote (j).

 

The following is a summary of the significant adjustments made to the Group’s net profit, equity and net assets to reconcile from Australian GAAP to US GAAP:

 

(a)  Life insurance adjustments

 

(i)  Excess of market value over net assets

For Australian GAAP, the excess of the market value of the interest of life insurance entities in their controlled entities over the net assets is required to be recognised as an asset in the balance sheet with any subsequent movements reflected in the profit and loss account.  For US GAAP, this treatment is not permitted.  Goodwill resulting from acquisitions of life insurance companies is recognised on the balance sheet.  Goodwill is no longer amortised under US GAAP but is tested annually for impairment.  (Refer to (c) below.)  In addition, under Australian GAAP, deferred tax is provided on the movement in the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities.  For US GAAP, the associated deferred tax liability on the movement in the excess of net market value is not recognised.

 

(ii)  PVFP asset

Under Australian GAAP, the excess of the market value over the net assets is recorded as a separate asset as described in note (a)(i) above.  For US GAAP, a PVFP asset is recognised on acquisition of life insurance companies.  The PVFP represents the actuarially-determined present value of estimated future US GAAP profits in respect of the in force business at acquisition.  The PVFP is amortised over the life of the acquired in force business.

 

218



 

(iii)  Life insurance policy liabilities, deferred acquisition costs and shadow policy liabilities

For Australian GAAP, policy liabilities are calculated on a Margin on Services (MoS) basis.  For US GAAP, policy liabilities are calculated under SFAS 60 “Accounting and Reporting by Insurance Enterprises”, SFAS 91 “Accounting for Nonrefundable Fees and Costs Associated with Originating or Acquiring Loans and Initial Direct Costs of Leases” and SFAS 97 “Accounting and Reporting by Insurance Enterprises for Certain Long-Duration Contracts and for Realised Gains and Losses from the Sale of Investments”, depending on the type of product.

 

One of the key differences between MoS and US GAAP is the treatment of deferred acquisition costs.  For Australian GAAP, deferred acquisition costs are held within policy liabilities and are not separately disclosed as an asset.  Further, the fixed and variable costs of acquiring new business are included in deferred acquisition costs.  For US GAAP, deferred acquisition costs are shown as a separate asset and only costs that vary directly with the acquisition of new business may be deferred.  In general, the amounts deferred under Australian GAAP will be higher than those under US GAAP.  Deferred acquisition costs in existence at the date the Group acquired the MLC group have been eliminated in accordance with US GAAP purchase accounting rules.

 

Other differences relate to the parameters used to drive the rate of acquisition cost amortisation.  The shadow policy liabilities adjustment is required because the MoS method operates to produce liabilities that are consistent with asset values based on market value whereas US GAAP methods are consistent with historical cost accounting concepts.

 

(iv)  Investments relating to life insurance business

For Australian GAAP, all assets are carried at net market value in the balance sheet with any movements in the value reflected in the profit and loss account. For US GAAP, this treatment is not permitted and the accounting treatment for investments, where different, is set out below:

 

     investments are carried at market value without including an allowance for estimated realisation costs;

 

               investments in leases are recorded using the provisions within SFAS 13 “Accounting for Leases” in order to recognise income over the term of the lease in proportion to the outstanding investment balance; and

 

               investments classified as available for sale using the provisions of SFAS 115 “Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities” are recorded in the balance sheet at fair value with unrealised profits and losses recorded as a separate component of shareholders’ equity, being other comprehensive income.

 

(v)  Deferred tax liabilities

Under Australian GAAP, life insurance tax liabilities are required to be stated at their net present value and are therefore discounted.  US GAAP does not permit the discounting of deferred tax liabilities.

 

(vi)  Minority interest

Under Australian GAAP, outside equity interest is shown as a component of total equity.  Under US GAAP, minority interest is shown as a liability in the balance sheet.  Any differences between the Australian GAAP and US GAAP profit or loss for controlled entities with a minority interest, will result in an adjustment to the US GAAP minority interest share of profit or loss.

 

(vii)  Foreign currency translation reserve

Under Australian GAAP, in respect of life insurance entities, foreign exchange gains and losses on the translation of foreign controlled entities are a component of the excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities.  Under US GAAP, where the functional currency is not the same as the ultimate parent’s reporting currency, foreign exchange gains and losses are reported within a foreign currency translation reserve, which is a separate component of shareholders’ equity, being other comprehensive income.

 

(viii)  Subordinated debt

Under Australian GAAP, liabilities of life insurance entities are required to be stated at their net present value with movements taken to the profit and loss account. US GAAP requires that the subordinated debt be held at principal.

 

(b)  Land and buildings

 

The Group revalues land and buildings annually (refer note 1(s)).  Any revaluation increments and decrements are included in the Group’s reserves which form part of total equity.  Revalued buildings are depreciated over their estimated useful lives to the entity (land is not depreciated).  Under US GAAP, revaluation of land and buildings is not permitted.  Accordingly, depreciation charges on revalued buildings and profit or loss on sale of revalued buildings are adjusted back to a historical cost basis for US GAAP purposes.

 

(c)  Amortisation of goodwill

 

Under Australian GAAP, goodwill is amortised from the date of acquisition by systematic charges on a straight-line basis to the profit and loss account over the period in which the benefits are expected to arise, but not exceeding 20 years.  The carrying value of goodwill is reviewed at least annually.  If the carrying value of goodwill exceeds the value of the expected future benefits, the difference is charged to the profit and loss account.

 

Under US GAAP, prior to October 1, 2002, goodwill was amortised over its economic life.  From October, 1 2002, the Group has adopted SFAS 142 “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets” for US GAAP reconciliation purposes.  SFAS 142 requires goodwill currently held on the balance sheet to be separately identified and reviewed annually for impairment.  In addition, goodwill balances are no longer amortised under SFAS 142.  The Group did not identify any impairment of goodwill on initial adoption of SFAS 142.

 

219



 

The following table outlines the effect of non-amortisation of goodwill on US GAAP income and earnings per share for 2002 to illustrate on a pro forma basis what the results would have been had SFAS 142 applied then:

 

 

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

Net income according to US GAAP – as reported

 

3,455

 

Add back: Goodwill amortisation

 

267

 

Net income according to US GAAP – pro forma

 

3,722

 

Basic earnings per share – as reported (cents)

 

211.0

 

Basic earnings per share – pro forma (cents)

 

228.2

 

Diluted earnings per share – as reported (cents)

 

205.6

 

Diluted earnings per share – pro forma (cents)

 

221.7

 

 

(d)  Pension expense

 

For defined benefit pension plans, under Australian GAAP, the Group recognises the pension expense on an actuarial basis.  Under this basis, actuarial gains and losses are taken into account over the average remaining employment period of plan members, generally between 10 and 15 years.  Under US GAAP, pension expense for defined benefit plans is a function of service and interest cost, return on plan assets and amortisation of any prior service costs and of any net gains or losses.  US GAAP also requires the accrued pension liability to be reconciled with the funded status of the pension plan, with the funded status being the difference between the projected benefit obligation and the fair value of the plan assets.  As a result, under US GAAP, adjustments are required to reflect the appropriate pension expense for the year (refer to pension and other post-retirement benefit plans, below).

 

(e)  Profit on sale and leaseback transactions

 

Under Australian GAAP, profits on sale and leaseback transactions where the lease is structured as an operating lease are recognised in the period that the sale takes place.  Under US GAAP, profits on sale and leaseback transactions are required to be recognised over the term of the lease.

 

(f)  Employee share compensation

 

Under Australian GAAP, an expense is recorded where cash is paid to the compensation plan trustee to purchase the Company’s shares on-market.  Where the Company issues shares as compensation, no expense is recorded in the profit and loss account.  Share issues are shown as a movement in contributed equity under Australian GAAP and no expense is recognised.  Under US GAAP, in accordance with SFAS 123 “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation”, these share offers would be considered part of employee compensation and charged to the profit and loss account based on the fair value of the shares issued at their date of issue.

 

(g)  Employee option compensation

 

Under Australian GAAP, an expense is not recognised for performance options or performance rights granted to employees.

 

In accordance with US Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25 “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees” (APB 25), the Company adopts the intrinsic value APB 25 method for valuing performance options issued under the executive share option plan and performance rights issued under the performance rights plan for US GAAP reconciliation purposes.  Under the intrinsic value method, an expense is recognised where the quoted market price of the Company’s shares at the measurement date is different to the amount, if any, that the employee is required to pay.  As both plans are variable plans under APB 25, the measurement date is the date the number of performance options or performance rights that an employee is entitled to receive is known, which in most instances is the date the respective plan’s performance hurdle is met for that performance option or performance right grant.

 

For each grant of performance options and performance rights, an expense is accrued over the service period based on the Company’s share price at year end assuming all performance conditions will be met for all performance options and performance rights granted.  Once the first measurement date occurs, an adjustment is made to the total expense accrual to reflect both the proportionate number of options and performance rights that have vested and the closing share price at that date.  If at a later date, performance conditions are further met and it is known that more or less options or performance rights may vest under the proportionate terms of the plans, a subsequent adjustment is made to the total expense accrual on the basis that a second measurement date has occurred.

 

Prior to October 1, 2002, the Group’s interpretation of APB 25 was that options granted by the Company were fixed awards.  This interpretation was based on the view that the number of options that would vest was known at grant date.  The Group revised its interpretation of APB 25 as at October 1, 2002 such that options and performance rights granted by the Company under the respective plans are considered to be variable awards.  As a result of the revised interpretation of APB 25, the 2002 comparative was restated in the statement of income reconciliation of net profit reported using Australian GAAP to net income according to US GAAP to reflect employee option compensation of $44 million in 2002 (2001: $72 million).  In addition, retained profits according to US GAAP in 2001 were adjusted by $419 million for the accumulated effect of employee option compensation relating to years prior to 2001.

 

SFAS 123 “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation” pro forma disclosures:

 

SFAS 123 allows an alternative valuation method, known as the fair value method, for measurement of employee option compensation.  SFAS 123 requires  SFAS 123, disclosure of the fair value of options where the Company adopts the intrinsic value method under APB 25.  The fair value of performance options and performance SFAS 148 rights issued during the year and the comparative years are disclosed in note 38.

 

220



 

If the fair value basis of accounting had been applied to account for employee option compensation, the following net income and earnings per share would have been disclosed:

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net income according to US GAAP – as reported

 

2,747

 

3,527

 

3,455

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Add back: Employee option compensation determined under APB 25, net of any tax effect

 

2

 

58

 

44

 

Less: Total share-based employee compensation determined under SFAS 123, net of any tax effect

 

(62

)

(62

)

(51

)

Net income according to US GAAP – pro forma

 

2,687

 

3,523

 

3,448

 

Basic earnings per share – as reported (cents)

 

168.9

 

220.6

 

211.0

 

Basic earnings per share – pro forma (cents)

 

165.0

 

220.4

 

210.5

 

Diluted earnings per share – as reported (cents)

 

168.9

 

213.1

 

205.6

 

Diluted earnings per share – pro forma (cents)

 

165.1

 

212.9

 

205.2

 

 

(h)  Lease revenue recognition

 

The Group’s accounting policy for finance lease income receivable is to allocate income to reporting periods so as to give a constant periodic rate of return on the investment.  Under US GAAP, finance lease income is recognised so as to give a level rate of return on the investment in the lease without taking into account any associated income tax cash flows.

 

(i)  Derivative financial instruments

 

Under Australian GAAP, derivative financial instruments held or issued for trading purposes are recognised on the balance sheet at fair value, with the resultant gains and losses recognised in the profit and loss account.  Derivative financial instruments that are held or issued for purposes other than trading may have hedge accounting treatment applied if the hedging derivatives are effective at reducing the risk associated with the exposure being hedged and are designated as a hedge at the inception of the contract.  Hedging derivatives are accounted for in a manner consistent with the accounting treatment of the hedged items.

 

The Group adopts SFAS 133 “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities” for US GAAP reconciliation purposes only.  SFAS 133, as amended, standardises the accounting for derivative instruments and hedging activities and requires that all derivative instruments be recognised as assets and liabilities at fair value.  If certain conditions are met, hedge accounting may be applied and the derivative instruments may be specifically designated as: (a) a hedge of the exposure to changes in the fair value of a recognised asset or liability or an unrecognised firm commitment (fair value hedge); (b) a hedge of the exposure to variability of cash flows of a recognised asset, liability or forecast transaction (cash flow hedge); or (c) a hedge of certain foreign currency exposures.  In the case of a qualifying fair value hedge, changes in the value of the derivative instruments that have been highly effective are recognised in current earnings along with the change in value of the designated hedge item.  In the case of a qualifying cash flow hedge, changes in the value of the derivative instruments that have been highly effective are recognised in other comprehensive income, until such time that earnings are affected by the cash flows of the underlying hedged item.  In either a fair value hedge or a cash flow hedge, net earnings are impacted to the extent the changes in the value of the derivative instruments do not perfectly offset the changes in the value of the hedge items (so called ineffectiveness).  Derivative instruments that are non-designated or do not meet the relevant hedge accounting criteria are accounted for at fair value with gains and losses recorded to current earnings.  The reconciliation adjustment is primarily due to the difference in treatment between Australian GAAP and US GAAP for inter-company derivatives.  Inter-company derivatives are used extensively in the Group’s risk management activities and are accounted for at fair value with gains and losses recorded in current earnings for US GAAP.  For external hedges that meet the hedge accounting criteria under SFAS 133, the derivatives and the hedged item are accounted for as detailed above.  The impact of the accounting for risk management activities pursuant to SFAS 133 is expected to create a level of ongoing volatility in reported financial results reconciled to US GAAP.

 

The Group did not enter into any SFAS 133 cash flow hedges during 2004 or 2003.  SFAS 133 cash flow hedges of the Group entered into in prior reporting periods related to HomeSide US, which was sold on October 1, 2002.

 

(j)  Mortgage servicing rights

 

On October 1, 2002, the Group sold all mortgage servicing rights and associated risk management derivative contracts.  Prior to this date, in addition to the derivative financial instruments impacted as outlined at (i) above, the application of SFAS 133 affected the US GAAP accounting treatment for HomeSide US’s mortgage servicing rights in 2002 under SFAS 140 “Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities”.  Under Australian GAAP, the carrying value of rights includes deferred hedge gains and losses as certain risk management derivative contracts qualify for Australian GAAP hedge accounting.   Under US GAAP, in 2002 the risk management derivative contracts related to mortgage servicing rights did not qualify for fair value hedge accounting under SFAS 133 and on this basis, a fair value adjustment to the underlying mortgage servicing rights asset arising from the hedged risk was not permitted.  As a result of the impact of SFAS 133, the carrying value of the mortgage servicing rights asset exceeded its fair value at September 30, 2002 and an additional provision for impairment of this asset of $2,625 million was required under SFAS 140 for US GAAP reconciliation purposes.

 

As mortgage servicing rights risk management derivative contracts are eligible for hedge accounting under Australian GAAP, hedge gains or losses were deferred against the mortgage servicing rights asset.  The mortgage servicing rights risk management derivative contracts did not qualify for fair value hedge accounting under SFAS 133 and consequently as at September 30, 2002 a gain of $3,055 million was required to reflect these derivative instruments at fair value under US GAAP.

 

221



 

The net effect of the combined SFAS 133 adjustment on mortgage servicing rights risk management derivative contracts together with the related SFAS 140 adjustment to the mortgage servicing rights provision for 2002 was a $430 million pre-tax gain to earnings.

 

As a result of the differences between Australian and US GAAP in relation to SFAS 133 and SFAS 140, as described above, the carrying value of the Group’s investment in SR Investment, Inc. was $280 million higher under US GAAP at September 30, 2002.  The profit on sale of SR Investment, Inc. was therefore $280 million lower under US GAAP.

 

(k)  General provision for doubtful debts

 

Under Australian GAAP, the Group’s general provision for doubtful debts is calculated using a statistically-based provisioning methodology.  Under this methodology, the level of losses inherent, but not specifically identified, in the existing credit portfolio, is estimated based on historical loss experience of the component exposures.

 

Commencing in 2004, for US GAAP reconciliation purposes, the net effect of discounting probabilities of default and the impact of applying the full term to maturity of facilities are reversed from the Group’s statistically-based provisioning calculation in arriving at the estimate of the general provision for doubtful debts.

 

(l)  Available for sale securities

 

Under Australian GAAP, shares in entities and other securities are carried at original cost less any provision for diminution in value.  In addition, under Australian GAAP, available for sale debt securities are carried at the lower of aggregate cost or market value with unrealised losses in respect of market value adjustments recognised in the profit and loss account.

 

Under US GAAP, these securities are deemed to be available for sale securities which are carried at market value with unrealised profits/(losses) in respect of market value adjustments recognised as a separate component of shareholders’ equity, being other comprehensive income.  These securities have been restated to market value with unrealised profits/(losses) recognised in other comprehensive income.

 

(m)  General reserve

 

The general reserve includes statutory funds’ retained profits from the Group’s life insurance business.  It represents a retention of profits that are not immediately available for general use in the business.  Refer note 34 for further information.

 

(n)  Provisions

 

The term provisions is used in Australian GAAP to designate accrued expenses with no definitive payment date.  Provisions disclosed in note 29 comply in all material respects with US GAAP with the exception of the provision for final cash dividend prior to October 1, 2002.  Under US GAAP and Australian GAAP from October 1, 2002, dividends are recorded as liabilities only if declared prior to balance date.  Under Australian GAAP prior to October 1, 2002, a provision for final cash dividend was recognised when it was declared shortly after balance date.

 

(o)  Special purpose entities

 

Under Australian GAAP, a company is required to consolidate special purpose entities (SPEs) that it controls.  Control is defined as the capacity of a company to dominate decision making in relation to the financial and operating policies of the SPE, so as to enable the SPE to operate with it in pursuing the objectives of the Group and is based on the substance of the relationship not merely its legal form.

 

Under US GAAP, FASB Interpretation No. 46 (revised December 2003) “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities” (FIN 46, as revised) has been applied.  This interpretation applies to SPEs that are identified as variable interest entities (VIEs). VIEs have one or both of the following characteristics:

 

                  equity that is not sufficient to finance its activities without additional financial support from other parties; and/or

                  equity investors lack the ability to make decisions about the entity, or do not absorb expected losses or residual returns of the entity.

 

A VIE is required to be consolidated where the Group is identified as the primary beneficiary.  The primary beneficiary has a variable interest in the VIE such that it will absorb the majority of the VIEs expected losses if they occur, receive a majority of expected returns if they occur, or both.

 

For the year ended September 30, 2003, the provisions of FIN 46 were applied to VIEs where the Group obtained an interest in or created an entity after January 31, 2003.  For the year ended September 30, 2004, of the Group has now applied the provisions of FIN 46, as revised, to all VIEs in which it has an interest.

 

The effect of US GAAP is that in some cases sponsors of, or transferors to, a SPE may be required to consolidate that SPE even if they do not in substance control that SPE.

 

As a result of the application of FIN 46, as revised, National RMBS Trust Series, Titan Securitisation Limited (and controlled entities), Quasar Securitisation Limited 1 and 2 (and controlled entities), Script Series 1 and 2 and the Medfin Trust Series have been assessed to be VIEs and have been consolidated for the purpose of US GAAP.  The total assets of the SPEs totalled $5,391 million as at September 30, 2004.  There is no material impact on US GAAP net income as a result of the consolidation of the SPEs.

 

222



 

The principal activities of the SPEs involve purchasing investment securities and raising debt securities.  The Group’s variable interest absorbs the majority of expected losses or receives the majority of expected returns if they occur, resulting in the Group being identified as the primary beneficiary of the SPEs.  The Group receives fees for services provided to the SPEs on an arm’s length basis (refer to the ‘financial review’ section in this annual financial report for additional information). The creditors of the SPEs generally do not have recourse to the general credit of the Group.

 

For the purposes of Australian GAAP, the Group does not have the capacity to control these SPEs and therefore, they are not consolidated.

 

(p)  Early pool-buyout

 

Under Australian GAAP, assets are derecognised when the reporting entity no longer controls the future economic benefits related to those assets.

 

Under US GAAP, SFAS 140 sets out strict asset derecognition rules.  Prior to its sale, the Group held loans eligible for repurchase in relation to HomeSide US. Following the sale of HomeSide US on October 1, 2002, the Group no longer holds such loans.  When certain eligibility requirements were met, HomeSide US had the unilateral right to repurchase these loans from the securitisation investor pools.  As a result, these loans were subject to the removal-of-accounts provisions of SFAS 140 and were recognised on the balance sheet.  A corresponding liability was also required to be recognised.

 

(q)  Deferred tax

 

The tax effects of significant balance sheet adjustments have been disclosed separately as either deferred tax assets or deferred tax liabilities in 2004.  In the 2003 and 2002 comparative years, significant balance sheet adjustments are disclosed net of tax.  In accordance with APB 9 “Reporting and Results of Operations” and APB 20 “Accounting Changes”, it is not appropriate to restate these comparatives as the effect of the change is not considered material to those comparatives. The relevant deferred tax adjustment amounts on a gross basis were: deferred tax assets 2003: $304 million, 2002: $318 million; and deferred tax liabilities 2003: $599 million, 2002: $750 million.

 

In accordance with the disclosure requirements of SFAS 109 “Accounting for Income Taxes”, set out below are details regarding deferred tax assets, for the last three years, as at September 30:

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Deferred tax assets reported using Australian GAAP

 

1,301

 

1,203

 

1,292

 

Add: Additional deferred tax assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Carry forward of Australian and US capital losses

 

1,786

 

1,893

 

1,110

 

Carry forward of Australian operating losses

 

49

 

55

 

 

Deductible temporary differences

 

11

 

19

 

 

Deferred tax assets according to US GAAP

 

3,147

 

3,170

 

2,402

 

Less: Valuation allowance

 

(1,846

)

(1,967

)

(1,110

)

Net deferred tax assets according to US GAAP

 

1,301

 

1,203

 

1,292

 

 

A valuation allowance is required to reduce deferred tax assets if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not (a likelihood of more than 50%) that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realised.  The valuation allowance should be sufficient to reduce the deferred tax asset to the amount that is more likely than not to be realised.  Based on the available evidence, the Group considers the realisation of the additional deferred tax assets reported above has a likelihood of less than 50% as at September 30, 2004.

 

Capital losses incurred by the Group under US federal tax law can be carried forward for a maximum of five years.  Operating and capital losses incurred by the Group under Australian tax law can be carried forward indefinitely.

 

223



 

(r)  US GAAP earnings per share

 

 

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

Basic

 

Diluted

 

Basic

 

Diluted

 

Basic

 

Diluted

 

Earnings ($m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net income according to US GAAP

 

2,747

 

2,747

 

3,527

 

3,527

 

3,455

 

3,455

 

Distributions on other equity instruments

 

(187

)

(187

)

(183

)

(183

)

(187

)

(187

)

Adjustment for notional interest on uncalled capital on partly paid shares and exercisable options and interest expense saving on exchangeable capital units

 

 

112

 

 

138

 

 

133

 

Adjusted earnings

 

2,560

 

2,672

 

3,344

 

3,482

 

3,268

 

3,401

 

Weighted average ordinary shares
(No. ‘000)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Weighted average ordinary shares

 

1,515,270

 

1,515,270

 

1,515,871

 

1,515,871

 

1,549,136

 

1,549,136

 

Potential dilutive ordinary shares

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Options and performance rights

 

 

711

 

 

51,974

 

 

38,674

 

Partly paid ordinary shares

 

 

603

 

 

811

 

 

1,063

 

Exchangeable capital units

 

 

65,454

 

 

65,460

 

 

65,460

 

Total weighted average ordinary shares

 

1,515,270

 

1,582,038

 

1,515,871

 

1,634,116

 

1,549,136

 

1,654,333

 

Earnings per share (cents)

 

168.9

 

168.9

 

220.6

 

213.1

 

211.0

 

205.6

 

 

Reconciliation of balance sheet categories

 

The following reconciliations are of significant adjustments to Australian GAAP balance sheet categories disclosed on the statement of financial position and which would be reported in accordance with US GAAP:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Group

 

 

 

 

 

Footnote

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shares in joint venture entities and other securities reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

158

 

1,445

 

1,199

 

Available for sale debt securities reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

4,610

 

6,513

 

6,192

 

Unrealised profits on available for sale securities

 

l

 

 

424

 

343

 

Available for sale securities according to US GAAP

 

 

 

4,768

 

8,382

 

7,734

 

Property, plant and equipment reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

2,257

 

2,498

 

2,640

 

Revaluation surplus of land and buildings

 

b

 

(177

)

(107

)

(98

)

Provision for depreciation on buildings revalued

 

b

 

96

 

91

 

89

 

Property, plant and equipment according to US GAAP

 

 

 

2,176

 

2,482

 

2,631

 

Goodwill reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

632

 

740

 

775

 

Recognition and accumulated amortisation of goodwill for life insurance business

 

a(i)

 

2,964

 

2,964

 

2,935

 

Amortisation of goodwill

 

c

 

201

 

98

 

 

Other

 

 

 

(19

)

(19

)

(19

)

Goodwill according to US GAAP

 

 

 

3,778

 

3,783

 

3,691

 

Other assets reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

11,641

 

10,050

 

14,151

 

Elimination of excess of net market value over net assets of life insurance controlled entities

 

a(i)

 

(4,805

)

(4,972

)

(5,081

)

Recognition and accumulated amortisation of PVFP asset

 

a(ii)

 

1,845

 

1,452

 

1,589

 

Restatement and reclassification of deferred acquisition costs

 

a(iii)

 

544

 

372

 

322

 

Pension fund adjustment

 

d

 

249

 

80

 

96

 

Fair value adjustment to derivative financial instruments (1)

 

i

 

100

 

1,168

 

2,833

 

Other assets according to US GAAP

 

 

 

9,574

 

8,150

 

13,910

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Life insurance policy liabilities reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

36,134

 

32,457

 

30,425

 

Difference in life insurance policy liabilities and reclassification of deferred acquisition costs

 

a(iii)

 

1,564

 

1,094

 

853

 

Life insurance policy liabilities according to US GAAP

 

 

 

37,698

 

33,551

 

31,278

 

Other liabilities reported using Australian GAAP

 

 

 

13,627

 

14,239

 

13,618

 

Increase in minority interest

 

a(vi)

 

32

 

116

 

131

 

Reclassification of minority interest as a liability

 

a(vi)

 

3,866

 

2,804

 

67

 

Difference in subordinated debt valuation

 

a(viii)

 

 

2

 

2

 

Unamortised profit on sale and leaseback transactions

 

e

 

60

 

48

 

59

 

Fair value adjustment to derivative financial instruments (1)

 

i

 

218

 

767

 

2,070

 

Other liabilities according to US GAAP

 

 

 

17,803

 

17,976

 

15,947

 

 


(1)       The 2002 comparative includes associated impact on provision for mortgage servicing rights.  Refer to footnote (j).

 

224



 

Pension and other post-retirement benefit plans

 

The Company and its controlled entities provide substantially all employees with superannuation or pension benefits through the operation of a number of defined benefit and accumulation benefit plans. All defined benefit pension plans have been closed to new members.  Details of the individual plans including the measurement dates used to determine pension benefits are described in note 47.

 

Set out below are the disclosure requirements of SFAS 132 “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Post-Retirement Benefits” for the Group’s significant defined benefit pension plans, for the last three years, as at June 30 (amounts shown here have been translated into Australian dollars at the rate at September 30):

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Change in benefit obligation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Benefit obligation at beginning of year

 

5,622

 

4,512

 

4,781

 

Service cost

 

206

 

153

 

157

 

Interest cost

 

303

 

266

 

279

 

Plan participants’ contributions

 

1

 

1

 

1

 

Administrative expenses

 

(15

)

(12

)

(6

)

Actuarial (loss)/gain

 

(16

)

736

 

236

 

Benefits paid

 

(176

)

(165

)

(210

)

Benefit obligation at end of year

 

5,925

 

5,491

 

5,238

 

 

The accumulated benefit obligation for the defined benefit plans was $4,083 million (2003: $3,782 million, 2002: $4,601 million).

 

The benefits expected to be paid by the defined benefit plans in the next five years have been estimated based on the same assumptions used to measure the Group’s benefit  obligation at the end of the year:

 

 

 

2005

 

2006

 

2007

 

2008

 

2009

 

Aggregate
2010-2015

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Benefits expected to be paid

 

185

 

183

 

183

 

186

 

192

 

1,105

 

 

The Group’s best estimate of contributions expected to be paid to defined benefit plans in 2005 is $175 million.

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Change in plan assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fair value of plan assets at beginning of year

 

4,310

 

4,614

 

6,173

 

Actual return on plan assets - gain/(loss)

 

617

 

(330

)

(714

)

Employer contributions

 

190

 

100

 

90

 

Plan participants’ contributions

 

(16

)

1

 

 

Administrative expenses

 

1

 

(12

)

(6

)

Benefits paid

 

(176

)

(165

)

(210

)

Fair value of plan assets at end of year

 

4,926

 

4,208

 

5,333

 

Funded status

 

(999

)

(1,283

)

96

 

Unrecognised net actuarial loss

 

1,771

 

2,119

 

850

 

Unrecognised prior service cost

 

 

2

 

26

 

Income taxes

 

(17

)

53

 

53

 

Prepaid pension cost

 

755

 

891

 

1,025

 

 

Composition of plan assets

 

Set out below is the Group’s defined benefit pension plan asset allocation shown as a percentage of fair value of plan assets, for the last three years, as at September 30:

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

Equity securities

 

80

 

78

 

80

 

Debt securities

 

17

 

20

 

17

 

Real estate

 

2

 

1

 

1

 

Other

 

1

 

1

 

2

 

Total

 

100

 

100

 

100

 

 

225



 

The investment policy and strategy for defined benefit plan assets are based on an expectation that equity securities will outperform debt securities over the long term.  The composition of plan assets is broadly maintained at a ratio of approximateley 4:1 allocation between equity and debt securities.  By managing the composition of plan assets, the Group aims to minimise investment risk.  The Group plans to make contributions in accordance with actuarial recommendations to reduce plan deficits over time.

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

Weighted average assumptions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Discount rate (per annum)

 

5.9

 

5.5

 

6.1

 

Expected return on plan assets (per annum)

 

8.0

 

8.0

 

7.6

 

Rate of compensation increase (per annum)

 

4.4

 

4.0

 

3.8

 

 

The Group’s expected rate of return on defined benefit plan assets is determined by the plan assets’ historical long-term investment performance, the current asset allocation and estimates of future long-term returns by asset class.

 

 

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

 

 

 

$m

 

$m

 

$m

 

Components of net periodic pension cost/(income)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Service cost

 

201

 

163

 

156

 

Interest cost

 

296

 

282

 

268

 

Expected return on plan assets

 

(335

)

(374

)

(448

)

Amortisation of transitional liability

 

18

 

20

 

21

 

Recognised net actuarial loss

 

109

 

31

 

(13

)

Net periodic pension cost/(income)

 

289

 

122

 

(16

)

 

The Group also sponsors accumulation benefit plans covering Australian, New Zealand and European employees (refer to note 47).  The Group’s contributions are based on salaries and amounted to $93 million in 2004 (2003: $125 million, 2002: $80 million).

 

57 Events subsequent to balance date

 

Buy-back of National Income Securities

 

At the Company’s annual general meeting to be held on January 31, 2005, the Company will seek shareholder approval to buy back the total of 20,000,000 unpaid preference shares of the Company issued in connection with the issue of 20,000,000 National Income Securities of the Company.  The financial effect of the buy-back has not been recognised in the financial statements for the year ended September 30, 2004.  National Income Securities comprise a note and a preference share.  Subject to shareholder approval and the consent of the Australian Prudential Regulation Authority, the buy-back of the preference shares will be for nil consideration, but will be conducted simultaneously and in conjunction with the redemption of each note for $100 plus any unpaid accrued interest.  If the buy-back occurs, contributed equity of the Group will be reduced by $1,945 million, with the excess of the acquisition and incidental costs of the buy-back directly reducing retained profits of the Group at the date of the buy-back.

 

Sale of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited

 

On December 14, 2004, the Group entered into an agreement to sell Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited to Danske Bank A/S for approximately $2.5 billion (GBP 967 million) in cash.  The transaction will involve the sale of shares in National Europe Holdings (Ireland) Limited (the immediate parent entity of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited).  The profit on sale is estimated at approximately $1.1 billion after all disposal costs, including income tax, and is subject to final adjustments.  The sale is expected to be completed during the first quarter of the 2005 calendar year.  The financial effects of the sale will be recognised during the 2005 financial year.

 

The carrying amounts of the major classes of assets and liabilities included as part of the sale, as at September 30, 2004, were as follows:

 

 

 

2004

 

 

 

$m

 

Assets

 

 

 

Cash and liquid assets

 

1,104

 

Due from other financial institutions

 

1,154

 

Loans and advances

 

13,082

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

Due to other financial institutions

 

1,774

 

Deposits and other borrowings

 

12,184

 

 

Refer to page 41 for information on the financial performance of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited.

 

226



 

The transaction is subject to the approval of certain regulatory authorities, including the Financial Services Authority in the UK, the Irish Financial Services Regulatory Authority in Ireland, the Financial Supervision Commission on the Isle of Man and the European Commission.

 

Warranties consistent with this type of transaction have been given and indemnities are provided for certain risks (including in respect of any liabilities arising in connection with the High Court investigation).  The maximum potential loss arising from the contingent liability arising in respect of these warranties and indemnities given to Danske Bank A/S will depend upon the type of warranty or indemnity claimed by Danske Bank A/S, as the maximum liability under some of the warranties and indemnities is subject to various caps and restrictions.  As such, it is not practicable to estimate the maximum potential loss arising from the contingent liability to Danske Bank A/S.  It is not envisaged that any material unrecorded loss is likely to arise from the contingent liability.

 

Employees of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited, including the Irish management team, will transfer with the sale of the businesses.

 

The Company and National Australia Group Europe Limited have also entered into an agreement with National Europe Holdings (Ireland) Limited and Danske Bank A/S in respect of the provision of transitional services.  The Group will provide these transitional services to Danske Bank A/S in respect of the Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited operations to assist in the transition of ownership of those businesses.  These transitional services will be provided at cost and are expected to be in place for up to 18 months.

 

On December 20, 2004, approximately $67 million (GBP 26.5 million) was stolen from Northern Bank Limited in Belfast, Northern Ireland.  This incident is not expected to have any material impact on the sale of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited.

 

227



Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

 

Independent auditor’s report to the members of National Australia Bank Limited

 

Scope

 

We have audited the financial report of National Australia Bank Limited (the Company) for the financial year ended September 30, 2004 consisting of the statements of financial performance, statements of financial position, statements of cash flows and accompanying notes (1 to 57).  The financial report includes the consolidated financial statements of the Group, comprising the Company and the entities it controlled at the end of the year or from time to time during the financial year.  The Company’s directors are responsible for the financial report.  We have conducted an independent audit of this financial report in order to express an opinion on it to the members of the Company.

 

Our audit has been conducted in accordance with the Auditing Standards of Australia and the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States of America).  Those standards require that we plan and perform an audit to obtain reasonable assurance whether the financial report is free of material misstatement.  Our procedures included examination, on a test basis, of evidence supporting the amounts and other disclosures in the financial report, and the evaluation of accounting policies and significant accounting estimates.  These procedures have been undertaken to form an opinion whether, in all material respects, the financial report is presented fairly in accordance with Accounting Standards and other mandatory professional reporting requirements and statutory requirements in Australia so as to present a view which is consistent with our understanding of the Company’s and the Group’s financial position, and performance as represented by the results of their operations and their cash flows.

 

The audit opinion expressed in this report has been formed on the above basis.

 

Audit opinion

 

In our opinion, the financial report of National Australia Bank Limited is in accordance with:

 

(a)                        the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth), including:

 

(i)                           giving a true and fair view of the Company’s and the Group’s financial position as at September 30, 2004 and 2003, of the Company’s performance for the financial years ended September 30, 2004 and 2003, and of the Group’s performance for the financial years ended September 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002; and

 

(ii)                        complying with Accounting Standards in Australia and the Corporations Regulations 2001 (Cth); and

 

(b)                       other mandatory professional reporting requirements in Australia.

 

Accounting principles generally accepted in Australia vary in certain respects from accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.  An explanation of the major differences between the two sets of principles is presented in note 56 to the financial statements.  The application of the United States principles would have affected the determination of consolidated net profit for each of the three years in the period ended September 30, 2004 and the determination of consolidated financial position as at September 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 to the extent summarised in note 56 to the financial statements.

 

 

/s/ KPMG

 

/s/ BPJ Greig

 

KPMG

BPJ Greig

 

Partner

 

 

Melbourne, Australia
December 2, 2004 except for Note 57 which is dated January 21, 2005

 

228



 

Shareholder information

 

The Company, incorporated and domiciled in Australia, is a publicly listed company limited by shares.

 

Major shareholders

 

The Company is not directly or indirectly controlled by another entity or person or any foreign government.

 

There are no arrangements known to the Company, the operation of which may after the date of this annual financial report result in a change in control of the Company.

 

Shareholdings of individual directors of the Company are set out in the report on the directors and officers.  Aggregate shareholdings of directors of the Company and senior executive officers of the Group, listed below, as at December 31, 2004 are as follows:

 

Title of class of shares

 

Identity of person or group

 

No. of shares held

 

% of class of shares

 

Ordinary shares, fully paid

 

Directors and senior executive officers (25 persons)

 

691,338

 

0.04

 

Ordinary shares, partly paid to 25 cents

 

Senior executive officers (2 persons)

 

6,220

 

0.00

 

Total number of ordinary shares held (1)

 

 

 

697,558

 

0.04

 

 


(1)          357,856 fully paid ordinary shares and all of the partly paid ordinary shares held by the executive directors and senior executive officers are held under employee share plans of the Company.

 

Directors

 

The directors of the Company at September 30, 2004 were:

 

Position

 

Name

 

Age

 

Positions
held since

 

Directorship
held since

 

Chairman

 

Graham J Kraehe

 

62

 

2004

 

1997

 

Managing Director

 

John M Stewart

 

55

 

2004

 

2003

 

Other directors

 

Peter JB Duncan

 

63

 

 

 

2001

 

 

 

Robert G Elstone

 

51

 

 

 

2004

 

 

 

Danny T Gilbert

 

53

 

 

 

2004

 

 

 

Paul J Rizzo

 

59

 

 

 

2004

 

 

 

Jillian S Segal

 

48

 

 

 

2004

 

 

 

John G Thorn

 

56

 

 

 

2003

 

 

 

Geoffrey A Tomlinson

 

57

 

 

 

2000

 

 

 

G Malcolm Williamson

 

65

 

 

 

2004

 

 

Subsequent to September 30, 2004, the following appointments were made: Mr Ahmed Fahour and Mr Michael J Ullmer were appointed as executive directors on October 7, 2004.  Mr Michael Chaney was appointed as a non-executive director on December 6, 2004 and will be appointed Chairman in September 2005.

 

Senior executives

 

The senior executives of the Group as at December 2, 2004 were:

 

Chief Executive Officer

 

John M Stewart

BA, ACII, FCIB

Age 55

Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of National Australia Bank Limited - position held since calendar 2004 and Executive Director of National Australia Bank Limited, since calendar 2003.

Joined the Group in calendar 2003 as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, National Australia Group Europe LimitedPrior to joining the Group, he held senior positions with Woolwich plc including Group Chief Executive and Deputy Group Chief Executive of Barclays PLC following its acquisition of Woolwich plc.

 

Executive General Managers

 

Cameron A Clyne

BA

Age 36

Executive General Manager, Customer Solutions - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 2004. Prior to joining the Group, he was a partner of IBM Business Consulting Services and of PricewaterhouseCoopers.  The majority of his consulting experience has been in the financial services industry.

 

229



 

Ahmed Fahour

BEc (Hons), MBA

Age 38

Chief Executive Officer, Australia - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 2004.  Prior to joining the Group, he held the position of Chief Executive Officer of Citigroup, Australia and New Zealand, from 2004, having held senior management positions in Citigroup from 2000.  From 1987 to 1997 he was employed by Boston Consulting Group.

 

Michael J Hamar

BA, MBA

Age 58

Group Chief Risk Officer - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 2004.  Prior to joining the Group, he held senior financial positions with the Commonwealth Bank of Australia, JP Morgan Chase & Company and Continental Illinois National Bank, Chicago.

 

John E Hooper

BSc Econ (Hons), MA

Age 43

Executive General Manager, Institutional Markets & Services - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 1996.  Prior to his current position, he held the positions of Executive General Manager, Corporate & Institutional Banking (Acting) and General Manager, Specialised Finance, and held senior positions in corporate finance with National Australia Group Europe Limited.  Prior to joining the Group, he held senior positions with Kleinwort Benson Limited in the United Kingdom and North America and Henry Ansbacher and Company Limited in the United Kingdom.

 

Elizabeth C Hunter

BBus, MBA, ACIPD(UK)

Age 40

Executive General Manager, People & Culture - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 1995.  Prior to her current position, she held the positions of General Manager, People & Culture, Finance Services Europe, General Manager Strategy, People & Culture, Head of People & Culture, Global Wholesale Financial Services, and Human Resources Manager of various business units in Australia.  Prior to joining the Group, she held various human resources positions in the health industry.

 

Gordon J Lefevre

BCompt (Hons), BCom

Age 44

Deputy Group Chief Financial Officer - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 1994.  Prior to his current position, he held the positions of General Manager, Personal Banking, Australia, General Manager, Finance, Financial Services Australia, Chief Financial Officer, HomeSide Lending, General Manager Finance, Europe and Advisor, Investments & Advisory.  Prior to joining the Group, he held senior positions with KPMG and First National Bank of South Africa.

 

Ian G MacDonald

Age 50

Chief Information Officer - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 1971.  Prior to his current position, he held the positions of Executive General Manager, Financial Services Australia, Executive General Manager, National Shared Services, Global General Manager, Operational Services, and Chief Operating Officer, Yorkshire Bank, and other senior positions both in Australia and overseas.

 

Lynne M Peacock

BA (Hons)

Age 50

Chief Executive Officer, Europe - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 2003 as an executive director of National Australia Group Europe Limited in September 2003 and was appointed Executive General Manager, People & Culture of the Group in April 2004. Prior to joining the Group, Ms Peacock was Chief Executive of Woolwich plc, part of the Barclays Group. She held several senior positions at Woolwich plc including Group Operations Director, General Manager Retail Operations, General Manager Customer Services and Head of Marketing.

 

Ross E Pinney

BCom, MBA, FCA

Age 56

Executive General Manager, Office of the Chief Executive - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 1990.  Prior to his current position, he held the positions of Chief Executive, Financial Services Europe, Executive General Manager, Office of the CEO, Executive General Manager, Specialist and Emerging Businesses, Executive General Manager, Products and Services, and Managing Director, National Australia Group Europe Limited, and various other senior positions within Australia and overseas.

 

Peter B Scott

BEng (Hons), MES, FIE (Australia)

Age 50

Executive General Manager, Wealth Management  - position held since calendar 2000.

Joined the Group in calendar 2000, when the Company acquired the MLC group from Lend Lease Corporation Limited.  He previously held senior positions within Lend Lease Corporation Limited including Chief Executive Officer, MLC Funds Management, and Chief Operating Officer, MLC Limited.

 

Gavin R Slater

BCom, Grad Dip (Mgmt), FCPA, FAIBF, GAICD

Age 39

Executive director, National Australia Group Europe Limited - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 1999.  Prior to his current position, he held the positions of Group General Manager, Office of the CEO, General Manager Finance, Financial Services Australia, Head of Decision Support, Global Head of Strategy & Finance and Global Head of Costing & Profitability.   Prior to joining the Group, he held senior positions with PricewaterhouseCoopers in Australia, and ABSA Bank and Standard Bank in South Africa.

 

Peter L Thodey

Age 54

Executive General Manager, Financial Services New Zealand -  position held since calendar 2002.  Chief Executive Officer, Bank of New Zealand -  position held since calendar 2000.

Joined the Group in calendar 1980.  Prior to his current position, he held the positions of General Manager, Business Financial Services at Bank of New Zealand and various other senior positions in New Zealand.  Prior to joining the Group, he held management positions with General Finance Ltd.

 

230



 

Michael J Ullmer

BSc (Maths) (Hons), FCA, FAIBF, ASA

Age 53

Chief Financial Officer - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 2004.  Prior to joining the Group, he held senior management positions with the Commonwealth Bank of Australia, including Group Executive, Institutional and Business Services, and Group Executive, Financial and Risk Management.  He was a partner of Coopers & Lybrand from 1992 to 1997 and of KPMG from 1982 to 1992.

 

Graeme D Willis

Dip Bus Studies

Age 53

Group General Manager, Regulatory Affairs - position held since calendar 2004.

Joined the Group in calendar 1968. Prior to his current position, he held the positions of Acting Executive General Manager, Risk Management, Chief Credit Officer, Chief Operating Officer, Clydesdale Bank, General Manager, Payments & Financial Services, and other senior positions in Australia.

 

Chief General Counsel

 

David M Krasnostein

BJuris (Hons), LLB, LLM

Age 50

Chief General Counsel - position held since calendar 1996.

Joined the Group in calendar 1996.  Prior to joining the Group, he held the position of General Counsel, Telstra Corporation Limited and partner/attorney positions with legal firms in the US.

 

Company Secretary

 

Garry F Nolan

MBus, FAICD, FCIS, FAIBF, ASIA, CFTP (Snr)

Age 57

Company Secretary -  position held since calendar 1992.

Joined the Group in calendar 1970.  He has senior management experience in financial management, capital markets, corporate strategy, new business development, corporate restructuring, board affairs, corporate governance, shareholder services and globalisation of business.   Prior to joining the Group, he obtained branch banking experience with a major commercial bank and corporate restructuring experience with a firm of chartered accountants.

 

The directors of the Company are classified as either executive or non-executive, with the former being those directors engaged in the full time employment of the Company. Messrs Stewart, Fahour and Ullmer are executive directors.

 

Messrs Cicutto, Crouch, Laing, Lewis, P McKinnon, R McKinnon and Scholes all relinquished their positions as executives during the year.

 

The aggregate remuneration paid by the Group during the year ended September 30, 2004 to the directors who held office during that period, the senior executive officers listed above, and those senior executive officers who held positions but retired or resigned during the year, as a group, was $56.3 million in respect of 35 positions (2003: $20.0 million paid to directors and senior executive officers in respect of 24 positions).

 

During the year ended September 30, 2004, 6,335,725 performance options and 1,578,146 performance rights were issued to 938 senior employees.  Of these, 80,250 performance options and 20,061 performance rights lapsed during the year.  The performance options issued include a total of 1,687,500 performance options issued to the executive directors, senior executive officers listed above and those senior executive officers who held positions listed above but retired or resigned during the year.  There were 421,875 performance rights issued to the executive directors and other senior executive officers listed above, and those senior executive officers who held positions but retired or resigned during the year, as a group.

 

In  2003, 6,103,750 performance options and 1,551,082 performance rights were issued to 842 senior employees, of which 29,750 performance options and 7,438 performance rights lapsed during the 2003 year. The issue included 1,592,500 performance options and 423,125 performance rights to the executive directors and to the senior executive officers.

 

Trading market

 

Ordinary shares and options over ordinary shares

 

The fully paid ordinary shares of the Company are quoted for trading on the stock market of ASX, which in part, is a self-regulatory organisation governing the open market quotation, purchase and sale of the fully paid ordinary shares in Australia. ASX is the principal market for the Company’s fully paid ordinary shares, and operates in the following cities in Australia: Melbourne, Sydney, Brisbane, Perth, Adelaide and Hobart.

 

The fully paid ordinary shares are also quoted on stock markets of London Stock Exchange PLC; Stock Exchange, New Zealand; Tokyo Stock Exchange and (in the case of ADSs) New York Stock Exchange, Inc.

 

A summary of the rights attaching to the ordinary shares appears under the heading ‘the Company’s constitution’ below.

 

As at December 31, 2004 the Company had on issue 540,683 unquoted partly paid ordinary shares held by 465 holders, 36,413,575 unquoted performance options outstanding under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No. 2 held by 3,151 option holders.

 

As at December 31, 2004 there were 3,007,301 performance rights outstanding granted under the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan held by 1,102 rights holders.  Where a person holds partly paid ordinary shares or options or performance rights issued at different times, they are categorised as a separate holder for each share, option or performance right holding.

 

As at December 31, 2004 there were also 39,994,800 exchangeable capital units issued by the Group held by a single holder of record, being The Depositary Trust Company, which holds them on behalf of participants.  These units may be exchanged for fully paid ordinary shares in the Company or, at the Company’s option, cash.

 

American depositary shares representing ordinary shares (ADSs)

 

The Company’s fully paid ordinary shares are traded in the US in the form of ADSs.  ADSs are evidenced by American depositary receipts issued by The Bank of New York Company, Inc., as depositary, pursuant to an amended and restated deposit agreement dated as of November 14, 1997, or Morgan Guaranty Trust Company of New York, its predecessor depositary, pursuant to a deposit agreement dated January 16, 1987, as amended as of June 24, 1988.  Each ADS represents five fully paid ordinary shares. The ADSs are quoted on the stock market of New York

 

231



 

Stock Exchange, Inc. (NYSE), which is the principal market in the US for the trading of the ADSs.  The ADSs trade on the NYSE under the symbol ‘NAB’.  At December 31, 2004, 4,089,434 ADSs representing 20,447,170 fully paid ordinary shares, or approximately 1.31% of the fully paid ordinary shares outstanding on such date, were held by 235 holders with registered addresses in the US.

 

National Income Securities (NIS)

 

The NIS were quoted on July 8, 1999 for trading on ASX. ASX is the principal market for the NIS.

 

A summary of the rights attaching to the preference shares forming part of the NIS appears under the heading ‘the Company’s constitution’ below.

 

Trust Preferred Securities

 

On September 29, 2003, the Group raised GBP400 million through the issue by National Capital Trust I (a controlled entity formed in Delaware) of 400,000 Trust Preferred Securities at GBP1,000 each. The Trust Preferred Securities are traded on the Luxembourg Stock Exchange.  A summary of the rights attaching to the Trust Preferred Securities, including the redeemable preference shares which may be issued in certain limited circumstances, appears under the heading ‘the Company’s constitution’ below.

 

Price histories

 

The following table sets forth, for the months, calendar quarters and financial years indicated, the high and low sale prices of the fully paid ordinary shares as reported by ASX; the high and low sale prices per ADS as reported on the NYSE composite tape; and the high and low sale prices of the NIS as reported by ASX:

 

 

 

Ordinary shares

 

ADSs

 

NIS

 

 

 

High
$

 

Low
$

 

High
US$

 

Low
US$

 

High
$

 

Low
$

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By month

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

December 2004

 

28.98

 

27.75

 

112.42

 

105.08

 

103.95

 

100.10

 

November 2004

 

28.66

 

27.52

 

110.81

 

105.36

 

103.38

 

101.71

 

October 2004

 

28.48

 

26.89

 

106.01

 

97.75

 

103.65

 

101.55

 

September 2004

 

27.40

 

26.65

 

98.23

 

93.15

 

102.50

 

101.75

 

August 2004

 

27.08

 

26.04

 

96.45

 

92.59

 

102.65

 

101.36

 

July 2004

 

30.98

 

26.42

 

112.29

 

92.77

 

102.65

 

100.70

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By quarter

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

December quarter 2004

 

28.98

 

26.89

 

112.42

 

97.75

 

103.95

 

100.10

 

September quarter 2004

 

30.98

 

26.04

 

112.29

 

92.59

 

102.65

 

100.70

 

June quarter 2004

 

31.59

 

28.51

 

120.25

 

98.20

 

101.90

 

99.80

 

March quarter 2004

 

32.12

 

29.06

 

122.90

 

112.30

 

101.50

 

99.00

 

December quarter 2003

 

31.59

 

28.53

 

112.50

 

103.60

 

101.60

 

99.30

 

September quarter 2003

 

34.11

 

30.20

 

116.00

 

98.55

 

99.99

 

97.70

 

June quarter 2003

 

34.42

 

31.05

 

114.10

 

97.26

 

99.25

 

93.70

 

March quarter 2003

 

32.94

 

28.36

 

96.18

 

85.77

 

95.25

 

93.50

 

December quarter 2002

 

34.35

 

31.00

 

89.55

 

88.79

 

93.73

 

93.20

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By year

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2004

 

32.12

 

26.04

 

122.90

 

92.59

 

102.65

 

99.00

 

2003

 

34.42

 

28.36

 

116.00

 

85.77

 

99.99

 

93.50

 

2002

 

36.78

 

30.87

 

105.79

 

80.67

 

96.00

 

91.10

 

2001

 

35.13

 

23.80

 

92.40

 

59.55

 

96.00

 

86.60

 

2000

 

30.30

 

19.88

 

83.06

 

61.31

 

97.40

 

90.00

 

 

On December 31, 2004, the closing price on ASX was $28.82 per fully paid ordinary share, with 1,558,016,351 fully paid ordinary shares (excluding partly paid ordinary shares) outstanding, held by 383,880 holders.  On December 31, 2004, the closing price per ADS as reported on the NYSE composite tape was US$112.08.  On December 31, 2004, the closing price on ASX was $101.04 per NIS, with 20,000,000 NIS outstanding, held by 45,102 holders.

 

232



 

The Company’s constitution

 

The following is a summary of some of the key aspects of the constitution of the Company.

 

Objects and purposes

 

The Company was incorporated on June 23, 1893, in the state of Victoria, Australia.  The Company is registered with ASIC and its Australian Company Number is 004 044 937.  The constitution does not specify the objects and purposes of the Company.  Under the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth), the Company has the legal capacity and powers of an individual.

 

Directors

 

The constitution regulates various matters concerning the directors of the Company:

 

(a)              Matters in which the director has a material personal interest

 

A director who has a material personal interest in a matter that is being considered at a directors’ meeting cannot be present while the matter is being considered at the meeting or vote on the matter, except in the following four circumstances permitted by the constitution and the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth):

 

(i)      directors who do not have a material personal interest in the matter have passed a resolution identifying the relevant director, the nature and extent of that director’s personal interest and its relation to the affairs of the Company and stating that the remaining directors are satisfied that the relevant director’s material personal interest should not disqualify the director from voting or being present;

 

(ii)     ASIC has made a declaration or order under the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) which permits the director to be present and vote notwithstanding the director’s material personal interest;

 

(iii)    there are not enough directors to form a quorum for a directors’ meeting because of the disqualification of the interested directors, in which event one or more of the directors (including a director with a material personal interest in the matter) may call a general meeting to deal with the matter; and

 

(iv)           the matter is of a type which the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) specifically permits the director to vote upon and to be present at a director’s meeting during consideration of the matter notwithstanding the directors’ material personal interest.

 

(b)               Compensation of non-executive directors

 

The aggregate remuneration of non-executive directors is determined by the Company in general meeting.  That aggregate remuneration is to be divided among the non-executive directors as they agree on or, in the absence of agreement, equally.  The division of aggregate remuneration among non-executive directors does not require an independent quorum.

 

In addition, each non-executive director is entitled to be reimbursed for reasonable travelling, accommodation and other expenses incurred while travelling to or from meetings or when otherwise engaged on the business of the Company.

 

(c)               Borrowing powers exercisable by directors

 

Under the constitution, the business of the Company is to be managed by the directors, who may exercise all such powers of the Company as are not required by the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) or the constitution to be exercised by the Company in general meeting.  The directors are specifically authorised to exercise all the powers of the Company to borrow or raise money, to charge any property or business of the Company or any or all of its uncalled capital and to issue debentures or give any other security for a debt, liability or obligation of the Company or of any other person.  These powers can only be altered by an amendment to the constitution, which would need to be approved by the passage of a special resolution of the Company’s members at a general meeting.

 

(d)               Retirement of directors under an age limit requirement

 

No person over the age of 70 years may be appointed as a director of the Company.  A director who attains the age of 70 is deemed to have retired from the Company on that day, unless the remaining directors have previously resolved that the director’s retirement will occur at the conclusion of the next annual general meeting of the Company.

 

(e)               Share qualification

 

Within two months after a director’s appointment, the director must hold at least 2,000 fully paid ordinary shares in the Company in the director’s own right.

 

(f)                 Re-election of directors

 

Each year at least one-third of the non-executive directors retire from office at the annual general meeting.  The retiring non-executive directors may be eligible for re-election.

 

Share rights ordinary shares

 

Holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive such dividends on those shares as may be declared by the directors from time to time.  Dividends that are paid but not claimed may be invested by the directors for the benefit of the Company until required to be dealt with in accordance with any law relating to unclaimed monies.  The holder of a partly paid ordinary share is, under the terms of issue of such shares, entitled to rank for any ordinary dividend in proportion to the amount paid up thereon on subscription (or in certain circumstances, the amount paid up thereon from time to time after subscription) on account of the nominal value of the share.

 

Dividends are only payable out of profits of the Company, and a declaration by the directors as to the amount of profits available for dividend is final and binding on all members.  Before paying any dividend, directors may set aside, out of the profits of the Company, such reserves as they think proper to be applied at their discretion for any proper purpose, and may carry forward so much of the profits remaining as they consider ought not to be distributed as dividends without transferring those profits to a reserve.

 

Each ordinary shareholder present at a general meeting (whether in person or by proxy or representative) is entitled to one vote on a show of hands or, on a poll, one vote for each fully paid ordinary share held.  Holders of partly paid ordinary shares voting on a poll are entitled to a number of votes based upon the proportion that the amount of capital called and paid up on the shares bears to the total issue price of the shares.

 

233



 

In the event of a winding-up of the Company, ordinary shareholders rank after all other shareholders and creditors and are fully entitled to any surplus proceeds on liquidation.

 

Ordinary shareholders have no right to redeem their shares.

 

Holders of fully paid ordinary shares have no liability for further capital calls by the Company.  The holders of partly paid ordinary shares are liable to pay unpaid amounts on the shares upon a call being made in accordance with the terms of issue of the shares and the constitution.

 

There is no provision of the constitution that discriminates against any existing or prospective holder of ordinary shares as a result of such shareholder owning a substantial number of shares.

 

Share rights American depositary shares representing ordinary shares (ADSs)

 

Each ADS is comprised of five fully paid ordinary shares in the Company which have been deposited with a depositary or custodian.  The rights attaching to each fully paid ordinary share comprised in an ADS are the same as the rights attaching to fully paid ordinary shares as described above.  These rights are vested in the depositary or custodian as the holder of the fully paid ordinary shares, although holders of American depositary receipts (ADRs), which evidence ADSs, have certain rights against the depositary or custodian under the terms governing the issue of the ADRs.

 

Share rights National Income Securities (NIS)

 

On June 29, 1999, the Company issued 20,000,000 NIS at $100 each.  These securities are stapled securities, comprising one fully paid note of $100 issued by the Company through its New York branch and one unpaid preference share issued by the Company (NIS preference share).  The amount unpaid on a NIS preference share will become due in certain limited circumstances, such as if an event of default occurs.  If the amount unpaid on a NIS preference share becomes due, the holder can, and must, transfer to the Company the note stapled to that NIS preference share.  The transfer of the note to the Company will satisfy the holder’s obligation to pay up the amount on the NIS preference share.  The holder will then hold a fully paid NIS preference share.

 

Each holder of NIS is entitled to non-cumulative distributions based on a rate equal to the Australian 90 day bank bill rate plus 1.25% per annum, payable quarterly in arrears commencing on August 15, 1999.  A minimum interest rate of at least 6% per annum was payable until May 15, 2000.  Holders of NIS preference shares are not entitled to dividends until the NIS preference shares become fully paid.  If the NIS preference shares become fully paid, holders will receive, if declared, a dividend calculated at the same rate and payable on the same basis as for the NIS.

 

If a dividend is not paid on the NIS preference shares, the Company cannot, in certain circumstances, pay distributions, redeem, buy back or reduce capital on any other shares of the Company that rank equally with or junior to the NIS preference shares.  Holders of the NIS preference shares are entitled to vote together with the holders of ordinary shares in the Company (to the extent that these shareholders are entitled to vote) on the basis of one vote per NIS preference share on a limited number of matters including any proposal to wind up the Company or any proposal to affect the rights attaching to the NIS preference shares.

 

With the prior consent of APRA, the Company may redeem each note for $100 (plus any accrued distributions) and buy back or cancel the NIS preference share stapled to the note for no consideration.  This may take place at any time after the fifth anniversary of the issue date of the NIS or earlier in certain limited circumstances.

 

NIS have no maturity date, are quoted on the stock market of ASX and on a winding-up of the Company will rank for a return of capital behind all deposit liabilities and creditors of the Company, but ahead of ordinary shareholders.  In a winding-up of the Company, the holders of fully paid NIS preference shares issued in connection with the NIS will generally rank equally with the holders of other preference shares of the Company with the same number with respect to priority on payment in winding-up (as specified in accordance with the constitution), and will rank for a return of capital on the NIS preference shares in priority to the holders of ordinary shares.

 

Share rights Trust Preferred Securities

 

On September 29, 2003, the Group raised GBP400 million through the issue by National Capital Trust I (a controlled entity) of 400,000 Trust Preferred Securities at GBP1,000 each, to be used by the Company’s London branch.  Each Trust Preferred Security earns a non-cumulative distribution, payable semi-annually in arrears until December 17, 2018 equal to 5.62%. Each five year period after that date, a non-cumulative distribution payable semi-annually in arrears at a rate equal to the five year benchmark UK Government bond rate at the start of that period plus 1.93%.  The securities are constituted by instruments governed by New York and Delaware law.

 

In certain limited circumstances, the Trust Preferred Securities will be exchanged for redeemable preference shares in the Company (TPS preference shares).  These take the form of global depositary shares evidenced by global depositary receipts.  The circumstances in which the exchange event will occur include if a distribution is not paid on the Trust Preferred Securities or if the Company does not maintain certain prudential regulatory standards.  The Company also has discretion to exchange the Trust Preferred Securities for TPS preference shares at any time.

 

If issued, each holder of a TPS preference share would receive, if declared, non-cumulative dividends calculated at the same rate and payable on the same basis as apply to the Trust Preferred Securities.

 

If a distribution is not paid on the Trust Preferred Securities, or a dividend is not paid on the TPS preference shares, the Company cannot, with certain exceptions, pay distributions, redeem, buy back or reduce capital on any other shares or other capital instruments of the Company that rank equally with or junior to the securities unless it has paid 12 month’s distributions on the securities or an optional dividend.

 

Holders of the TPS preference shares (if issued) would be entitled to vote together with the holders of ordinary shares in the Company (to the extent that these shareholders were entitled to vote) on the basis of one vote per TPS preference share on a limited number of matters, including any proposal to wind up the Company or any proposal to affect the rights attaching to the TPS preference shares.

 

With the prior consent of APRA, the Trust Preferred Securities may be redeemed in certain limited circumstances.  These circumstances are on December 17, 2018 and on every subsequent fifth anniversary, in which case the redemption price is GBP1,000 per Trust Preferred Security plus the distributions for the last six month distribution period, and otherwise only where certain adverse tax or regulatory events have occurred, in which case, the redemption price may include a ‘make-whole’ adjustment to compensate the investor for the investment opportunity lost by the early redemption (except where the tax event relates to withholding tax).

 

234



 

The TPS preference shares may be redeemed at any time after their issue (except where the Company has exercised its discretion to issue the TPS preference shares, in which case they can only be redeemed if certain adverse tax or regulatory events have occurred).  The redemption price includes a ‘make-whole’ adjustment to compensate the investor for the investment opportunity lost by the early redemption (except where the redemption relates to withholding tax).

 

In a winding-up of the Company, the Trust Preferred Securities and (if issued) the TPS preference shares will generally rank equally with the holders of other preference shares and will rank for return of capital behind all deposit liabilities and creditors of the Company, but ahead of ordinary shareholders.

 

Process for altering share rights

 

Unless otherwise provided by the terms of issue of a class of shares, the terms of issue of a class of shares in the Company can only be varied or cancelled in any way by a special resolution of the Company and with either the written consent of members holding at least three-quarters of the votes in that class of shares or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of that class of shares.

 

Convening of and admission to general meetings

 

A director may call a meeting of the Company’s shareholders.  The directors must call and arrange to hold a general meeting of the Company if requested to do so by shareholders who hold at least 5% of the votes that may be cast at the general meeting or 100 shareholders each holding a marketable parcel and entitled to vote at the meeting.  Shareholders who hold at least 5% of the votes that may be cast at a general meeting may also call and arrange to hold a general meeting of the Company at their own expense.

 

At least 28 day’s notice must be given of a meeting of the Company’s shareholders.  Written notice must be given to all shareholders entitled to attend and vote at the meeting.  All ordinary shareholders are entitled to attend and, subject to the constitution and the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth), to vote at general meetings of the Company.  Alternatively, ordinary shareholders may be represented by the attendance of a proxy, attorney or representative.  Voting rights attaching to other classes of shares in the Company are set out above.

 

A quorum for a general meeting is five members present in person or by proxy, attorney or representative.  If the meeting is convened on the requisition of members and a quorum is not present within half an hour of the time appointed, the meeting will be dissolved.  In all other cases where a quorum is not present within half an hour of the time appointed, the meeting shall stand adjourned to the same day in the next week at the same time and place, or to such other day, time and place as the directors appoint by notice to the members and others entitled to notice of the meeting.  A quorum at an adjourned meeting is two persons, each being a member, proxy, attorney or representative.  If a quorum is not present at an adjourned meeting within 15 minutes of the time appointed, the meeting is dissolved.

 

The directors may, in accordance with the constitution and the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth), determine a time before a meeting at which membership in the Company (for the purposes of the meeting) is to be ascertained in respect of holdings of shares that are quoted on the stock market of ASX.

 

Limitations on ownership and changes in control

 

The constitution does not contain any limitations on the rights to own securities in the Company.  However, there are detailed Australian laws and regulations which govern the acquisition of interests in the Company, and a summary of those is set out in this shareholder information section under the heading ‘Exchange controls and other limitations affecting securityholders’ below.

 

The constitution requires any sale or disposal of the Company’s main undertaking to be subject to ratification by the Company in general meeting.  Except for that provision, there are no provisions of the constitution that would have the effect of delaying, deferring or preventing a change in control of the Company which would operate only with respect to a merger, acquisition or corporate restructuring involving the Company or its controlled entities.

 

Constitution provisions governing disclosure of shareholdings

 

The constitution does not prescribe an ownership threshold above which share ownership must be disclosed.  However, the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) requires a person to disclose certain prescribed information to the Company and ASX if the person has or ceases to have a ‘substantial holding’ in the Company.  The term ‘substantial holding’ is defined in the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth), and is not limited to direct shareholdings.

 

The Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) also permits the Company or ASIC to direct any member of the Company to make certain disclosures in respect of their interest in the Company’s shares and the interest held by any other person in those shares.

 

Changes in capital

 

The constitution does not make any provision governing changes in the capital of the Company, which is more stringent than is required by law.

 

Material contracts

 

Executive contract Mr Frank J Cicutto

 

On October 23, 2003, the Company entered into an executive service agreement with Mr Cicutto (agreement) to secure his services as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer for a further three years.  The agreement has been terminated (refer to the summary of the ‘deed of settlement and release’ on page 236).

 

A summary of the agreement terms, prior to its termination, is as set out below:

 

During the employment period, Mr Cicutto was to receive annual fixed compensation and short-term incentive and long-term incentive remuneration.  Annual fixed compensation was a total remuneration package (TRP) of $1,898,000, plus an annual superannuation contribution of up to 9.7% of annual TRP.  Together the TRP and the superannuation contribution made up Mr Cicutto’s total employment compensation (TEC).  A TEC of $2,082,000 was fixed for the three year employment period.

 

Mr Cicutto’s short-term incentive remuneration was determined annually in accordance with a short-term incentive plan, which could be changed by the Board at any time.  Initially, the short-term incentive component was

 

235



 

determined by a combination of the Group’s performance against its EVA® growth target and Mr Cicutto’s individual performance.  Mr Cicutto’s short-term incentive target for the 2004 year was set at 110% of his TEC.  This short-term incentive target was determined annually by the Board, but could not be less than the target for the preceding year.  At least one-half of any short-term incentive remuneration was to be provided in the Company’s shares (deferred shares).  The Company agreed to grant Mr Cicutto one additional share to match each deferred share provided to him using the first 50% of his annual short-term incentive remuneration (matching shares).  Both the deferred shares and the matching shares were to be held on trust for Mr Cicutto under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan.  In limited circumstances, Mr Cicutto could forfeit the deferred shares and matching shares on termination of his employment.  The matching shares were also to be forfeited if Mr Cicutto resigned.

 

The long-term incentive component of Mr Cicutto’s remuneration comprised his eligibility to participate in an offer of executive performance options and/or performance rights under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No. 2 and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan, subject to shareholder approval.

 

Mr Cicutto could be considered for participation in other staff share schemes as the Board may determine.  All issues of securities in the Company to Mr Cicutto were subject to applicable legal and listing rule requirements to obtain shareholder approval.

 

Mr Cicutto was entitled to paid annual, long service and sick leave, and fringe benefits in accordance with the policies of the Company.

 

Generally, if the Company wished to terminate the agreement during the three year employment period, it was required to give six months’ notice and make a termination payment equal to 1.5 times Mr Cicutto’s annual TRP.

 

The agreement restricted the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Cicutto.  Further, a 12-month restrictive covenant generally applied on cessation of Mr Cicutto’s employment.  In consideration of this covenant, if it applied, the Company was to pay Mr Cicutto an amount equal to 12 months of his then current TRP.

 

EVA ® is a registered trademark of Stern, Stewart & Co.

 

Deed of settlement and release Mr Frank J Cicutto

 

Mr Cicutto resigned as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of the Company on February 1, 2004 and entered into a deed of settlement and release (the deed) with the Company on that date.  The deed sets out the agreed settlement of the terms of Mr Cicutto’s resignation.

 

The deed provides for the Company to pay Mr Cicutto, on or before February 16, 2004, the sum of $6,263,000, less appropriate taxation deductions as required by law, for payment of all contractual and statutory amounts in respect of the termination of Mr Cicutto’s employment and directorships with the Company.  This amount comprises a resignation payment of $3,270,000 and statutory and award entitlements of $2,993,000.  The statutory and award entitlements are estimates calculated as at January 20, 2004, and subject to adjustment to reflect the accrual to February 1, 2004.  The actual amount paid to Mr Cicutto in respect of these statutory and award entitlements were $3,273,595.  In addition, the Company is to pay Mr Cicutto an amount of $1,293,000 in respect of the deferred performance-based remuneration incentive earned in 2003, which Mr Cicutto had previously elected to take in the form of ordinary shares of the Company.  Approval for these ‘deferred shares’ was provided by shareholders at the Company’s annual general meeting on December 19, 2003.  Due to his resignation, Mr Cicutto received this incentive in cash.

 

There are mutual releases in the deed in respect of certain claims that may arise in respect of Mr Cicutto’s employment by the Company.  The Company indemnifies Mr Cicutto in respect of reasonable costs and expenses arising from defending certain claims and proceedings that may arise with respect to Mr Cicutto’s employment by the Company.

 

Mr Cicutto retained 400,000 options over shares in the Company issued on March 19, 1999 with an expiry date of March 18, 2004.  These options did not vest as the performance hurdle was not met.  Mr Cicutto also holds 500,000 vested options over shares in the Company, which have an exercise price of $21.29 each.  These options were due to expire on March 22, 2008, but must now be exercised by Mr Cicutto by no later than March 22, 2006.

 

Mr Cicutto agreed to forfeit 500,000 unvested options over shares in the Company issued on March 23, 2001 with an exercise price of $27.85, as well as 300,000 unvested options over shares in the Company issued on March 21, 2003 with an exercise price of $30.46 and 100,000 unvested performance rights issued on March 21, 2003.

 

Mr Cicutto is entitled to a defined contribution superannuation benefit valued at approximately $1,900,000, the majority of which cannot be accessed by Mr Cicutto until he attains 55 years of age.

 

The Company agrees with Mr Cicutto that it will not seek compliance with certain non-solicitation and non-competition provisions within his executive employment contract and accordingly no payment is to be made by the Company with respect to those provisions.

 

Executive employment agreement Mr John M Stewart (as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, National Australia Group Europe Limited)

 

In March 2003, National Australia Group Europe Limited (NAGE), a controlled entity of the Company, entered into an executive service agreement with Mr Stewart (agreement).  Mr Stewart commenced service on August 8, 2003 and was appointed to the Board as an executive director on August 11, 2003.  He was appointed as the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of NAGE and a director of Clydesdale Bank PLC, Northern Bank Limited, National Irish Bank Limited, Yorkshire Bank PLC and National Wealth Management Europe Holdings Limited.

 

Mr Stewart was appointed as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of the Company in February 2004 on the resignation of Mr Cicutto.  The Company and Mr Stewart entered into a new employment agreement in May 2004 to reflect Mr Stewart’s new position.  A summary of the terms of his March 2003 agreement is as follows.

 

The agreement was for an initial three year period, then a rolling annual contract unless terminated.  Generally, if NAGE wished to terminate Mr Stewart’s employment, then it was required to give 12 month’s notice (or, at NAGE’s discretion, payment in lieu of basic salary and benefits that would have been accrued during the notice period).  Termination by Mr Stewart required three month’s notice.  A restrictive covenant was to be in place for six months following termination.  The agreement did not provide for any other payments in respect of termination, other than for unpaid but accrued holiday entitlements.

 

During his employment period, Mr Stewart was to receive annual base salary, short-term incentive and long-term incentive remuneration.  Mr Stewart’s

 

236



base salary was GBP485,000 per annum reviewed annually on January 1.  The first review by the Human Resources Committee (formerly the Compensation Committee) of the Board was to be in January 2004.  Mr Stewart was entitled to additional benefits including a company car, medical cover and permanent health insurance, life insurance and participation in the National Partnership Share Plan.  Additionally, the Company would pay annual contributions to a personal pension scheme nominated by Mr Stewart up to 25% of salary subject to UK Inland Revenue restrictions.  Where a lesser amount was paid the balance was to be paid as cash salary.

 

Mr Stewart’s short-term incentive remuneration was determined in accordance with the Company’s EVA® incentive plan.  Initially, the short-term incentive component was determined by a combination of the Group’s performance against its EVA® growth target and Mr Stewart’s individual performance.  Mr Stewart’s target incentive opportunity was 100% of basic salary, subject to global Group performance and individual performance (including objectives focused on UK business performance).  For 2003, he was eligible to receive a pro-rata payment from the date of commencement.

 

The long-term incentive component of Mr Stewart’s remuneration comprised his eligibility to participate in the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No. 2 and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan.  Upon commencement of employment, he was granted 125,000 options and 31,250 performance rights.  All awards of short-term and long-term incentives are subject to the approval of the Board and, where required under applicable laws and listing rules, the approval of shareholders.

 

Mr Stewart was entitled to 30 days of paid holiday leave and up to 90 days’ paid sick leave per annum and fringe benefits in accordance with the policies of the Company.

 

As an employee, Mr Stewart could be entitled to staff loans or other program benefits offered to staff in general.  Any benefits under these arrangements would form part of his total remuneration package and would be subject to any legislative or regulatory restrictions, including the United States Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

 

The agreement restricted the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Stewart.

 

Employment agreement Mr John M Stewart (as Managing Director & Chief Executive Officer of the Group)

 

In May 2004, the Company entered into an employment agreement with Mr Stewart (the employment agreement) to appoint him as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of the Group (Chief Executive) for a period of three years from February 2, 2004.  The employment agreement expires on February 1, 2007 and may be extended for one year by mutual agreement.

 

Under the employment agreement, Mr Stewart will receive annual fixed remuneration, short-term incentive remuneration and long-term incentive remuneration.

 

Annual fixed remuneration is a total remuneration package (TRP) of $2,050,952, plus an annual superannuation contribution.  Together, the TRP and the superannuation contribution make up Mr Stewart’s total employment compensation  (TEC) of $2,230,000.  A portion of Mr Stewart’s TRP may be taken in the form of packaged benefits (such as a motor vehicle, parking and accommodation).  TEC is inclusive of fringe benefits tax and superannuation contributions.

 

The Company is not required by Australian law to provide superannuation contributions in connection with Mr Stewart’s employment due to the type of Australian visa issued to him.  However, under the agreement, the Company agrees to pay annual superannuation contributions to the National Australia Bank Group Superannuation Fund.  Those contributions form part of Mr Stewart’s TEC of $2,230,000.  Mr Stewart may, in lieu of receiving those Australian superannuation benefits, elect to participate in a pension or other scheme in the United Kingdom.  Any such payments form part of Mr Stewart’s TEC.

 

Mr Stewart’s short-term incentive remuneration is determined annually in accordance with a short-term incentive plan.  Each year the Board agrees or determines reasonable performance measures and targets for use in assessing Mr Stewart’s performance.  After the end of each financial year, the Board reviews Mr Stewart’s performance by reference to these measures and targets.  Mr Stewart’s short-term incentive target for the 2004 year was set at 100% of his TEC.  This short-term incentive target is determined annually by the Board, but cannot be less than the target for the preceding year.  The extent to which Mr Stewart receives a short-term incentive, and its quantum relative to the target, is dependent upon the extent to which he achieves his performance targets for the year, an assessment by the Board of his overall contribution to the development of the Group and the extent to which he achieves an EVA®  target set by the Board.  The Board may in its discretion award a reasonable and appropriate short-term incentive reward in excess of the target for exceptional performance in any year.

 

At least one-half of the short-term incentive remuneration must be provided in the form of shares in the Company.  The issue of these shares is subject to shareholder approval.  The shares are issued as deferred issued shares, which was held in trust for Mr Stewart under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan.  While the deferred issued shares are held in trust, Mr Stewart is entitled, through the trustee, to receive dividend payments and exercise voting rights attaching to the shares. In limited circumstances relating to summary termination of employment, the deferred issued shares may be forfeited on termination of Mr Stewart’s employment.

 

The long-term incentive component of Mr Stewart’s remuneration comprises his eligibility to participate in an offer of executive performance options and performance rights under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No.2 and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan respectively, subject to shareholder approval.  Approval is proposed to be sought from shareholders for the granting of 900,000 performance options and 210,000 performance rights under the respective plans at the Company’s annual general meeting to be held on January 31, 2005.  It is not proposed to make any further grants to Mr Stewart during the term of his employment agreement.  If Mr Stewart resigns during the first 18 months of the employment agreement, these performance options and performance rights will lapse.  If resignation occurs after 18 months, the performance options and performance rights will transfer to Mr Stewart on a pro-rated basis calculated from Mr Stewart’s appointment date of February 2, 2004 to the date of termination.  In the latter case, the performance options and performance rights will have two years to satisfy the performance conditions after which they will lapse.

 

Mr Stewart may be considered for participation in other staff share schemes as the Board may determine.  All issues of securities in the Company to Mr Stewart are subject to applicable legal and listing rule requirements to obtain shareholder approval.

 

Mr Stewart is entitled to participate in other benefits that are normally provided to executives employed by the Company.

 

237



 

Mr Stewart is entitled to 30 days’ paid annual leave per annum and to 90 days’ paid sick leave during the employment period which reflects Mr Stewart’s entitlements under his previous executive service agreement with NAGE.  There are restrictions on the amount of annual leave that Mr Stewart may accrue from year to year.  Mr Stewart is also entitled to long service leave and to other fringe benefits in accordance with the Company’s policies.

 

The employment agreement restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Stewart.

 

Both Mr Stewart and the Company may terminate the employment agreement on 6 months notice.  Generally, on termination of his employment, Mr Stewart will be entitled to a termination payment equal to 12 months TEC, in addition to any payment in lieu of the termination notice period.  This termination payment is not payable in some circumstances, eg. if Mr Stewart terminates the agreement without cause or if the Company summarily dismisses Mr Stewart for matters such as misconduct.  Irrespective of whether Mr Stewart receives a termination payment, he would be paid for any accrued but untaken annual leave and long service leave on termination.

 

For a period of up to 12 months from the date of Mr Stewart’s cessation of employment for any reason, Mr Stewart cannot solicit or entice from the Group any employees, contractors or significant customers of the Group or engage in certain restricted activities such as participating in a financial services business that is in competition with the Group.

 

Employment agreement Mr Cameron A Clyne

 

In August 2004, the Company entered into an employment agreement with Mr Clyne (the employment agreement) to appoint him as Executive General Manager, Customer Solutions, with effect from August 9, 2004.

 

Under the employment agreement, Mr Clyne will receive annual fixed remuneration, short-term incentive remuneration, long-term incentive remuneration and certain commencement benefits.

 

Annual fixed remuneration is a total remuneration package (TRP) of $482,847, plus an annual superannuation contribution of up to 9.7% of 90% of annual TRP.  Together, the TRP and the superannuation contribution make up Mr Clyne’s total employment compensation (TEC) of $525,000, which will be reviewed on October 1, 2005 and thereafter on an annual basis.  A portion of Mr Clyne’s TRP may be taken in the form of packaged benefits (such as a motor vehicle and parking).  TEC is inclusive of fringe benefits tax and superannuation contributions.

 

Mr Clyne’s short-term incentive remuneration is determined annually in accordance with the Company’s short-term incentive plan, as amended from time to time.  Mr Clyne’s annual target short-term incentive is set at 65% of his TEC.  For the 2004 year (from his commencement date to the end of September 2004), Mr Clyne will be eligible for a pro-rated short-term incentive reward based on 65% of his TEC.  Short-term incentive remuneration is not guaranteed as it is subject to the achievement of a combination of the Group’s performance target and Mr Clyne’s individual performance target.

 

The long-term incentive component of Mr Clyne’s remuneration comprises his eligibility to participate in an offer of executive performance options and performance rights under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No.2 and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan respectively, as amended from time to time.  Long-term incentive rewards are not guaranteed, as they are subject to annual talent and potential assessments.  On the termination of Mr Clyne’s employment with the Company, the retention of any options and performance rights granted to Mr Clyne during his employment with the Company will be determined in accordance with the terms of grant under the relevant plans.

 

Within 90 days of his commencement with the Company, Mr Clyne will be granted a long-term incentive reward of 55,000 performance options and 13,750 performance rights subject to the approval of the Board and in accordance with the relevant plans.

 

Mr Clyne is eligible to participate in other benefits that are normally provided to executives who are employed by the Company.  He is also entitled to paid annual leave, long service leave and sick leave in accordance with the Company’s policies.

 

The employment agreement restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Clyne.

 

The Company may terminate the employment agreement on 12 months notice (or, in the case of redundancy or unsatisfactory performance, six weeks’ notice).  On termination of his employment by the Company (other than for summary termination, unsatisfactory performance or redundancy), Mr Clyne may, in the Company’s discretion, be paid a termination payment in lieu of all or part of the notice period.  If Mr Clyne is terminated by reason of redundancy, he is entitled to a termination payment equal to the greater of 12 months TRP plus any payment in lieu of the notice period, or the redundancy payment calculated in accordance with the Company’s redundancy, redeployment and retrenchment agreement 2002 (less any payment in lieu of notice required to be made under that agreement).  A termination payment is not payable if the Company summarily dismisses Mr Clyne for matters such as misconduct or if Mr Clyne resigns.  Mr Clyne may terminate the employment agreement by giving 13 weeks’ notice.

 

Irrespective of whether or not Mr Clyne receives a termination payment, he would be paid for any accrued but untaken annual leave or long service leave on termination.

 

For a period of up to 12 months from the date of Mr Clyne’s cessation of employment from the Company for any reason, Mr Clyne cannot solicit or entice from the Group any officers, employees, contractors or significant customers of the Group or engage in certain restricted activities such as participating in a financial services business that is in competition with the Group.

 

Employment agreement Mr Ahmed Fahour

 

In August 2004, the Company entered into an employment agreement with Mr Fahour (the employment agreement) to appoint him as Chief Executive Officer, Australia, for a period of four years from September 1, 2004.  The employment agreement expires on August 31, 2008 and may be extended for one year by mutual agreement.

 

Under the employment agreement, Mr Fahour will receive annual fixed remuneration, short-term incentive remuneration, long-term incentive remuneration and certain commencement benefits.

 

Annual fixed remuneration is a total remuneration package (TRP) of $1,379,564, plus an annual superannuation contribution of up to 9.7% of 90% of annual TRP.  Together, the TRP and the superannuation contribution make up Mr Fahour’s total employment compensation (TEC) of $1,500,000, which will be reviewed on October 1, 2005 and thereafter on an annual basis.  A portion of Mr Fahour’s TRP may be taken in the form of packaged benefits

 

238



 

(such as a motor vehicle and parking).  TEC is inclusive of fringe benefits tax and superannuation contributions.

 

Mr Fahour’s short-term incentive remuneration is determined annually in accordance with the Company’s short-term incentive plan, as amended from time to time.  Mr Fahour’s annual target short-term incentive is set at 130% of his TEC.  Short-term incentive remuneration is not guaranteed as it is subject to the achievement of a combination of the Group’s performance target and Mr Fahour’s individual performance target.

 

The long-term incentive component of Mr Fahour’s remuneration comprises his eligibility to participate in an offer of executive performance options and performance rights under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No.2 and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan respectively, as amended from time to time.  Long-term incentive rewards are not guaranteed, as they are subject to annual talent and potential assessments.  On the termination of Mr Fahour’s employment with the Company, the retention of any options and performance rights granted to Mr Fahour during his employment with the Company will be determined in accordance with the terms of grant under the respective plans.

 

Within 60 days of his commencement with the Company, and subject to the approval of the Board, Mr Fahour will be:

 

                        granted a long-term incentive reward of 160,000 performance options and 40,000 performance rights.  Mr Fahour will be eligible to exercise the options and performance rights after three years from the grant date,  subject to the achievement of certain performance hurdles during the two-year exercise period.  Mr Fahour will retain options and performance rights on the termination of his employment from the Company due to redundancy, death and total and permanent disablement or on the expiration of the employment agreement on August 31, 2008, subject to the achievement of specific performance hurdles.  Mr Fahour will forfeit the options and rights on resigning from the Company or on summary termination by the Company;

 

                        issued with shares in the Company (subject to certain restrictions) under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan (the share plan) to a value of $2,000,000.  One-quarter of the shares will no longer be subject to applicable forfeiture provisions (‘vest’) on each anniversary of his commencement date with the Company.  All the shares will vest if Mr Fahour ceases employment with the Company due to death or total and permanent disablement.  Mr Fahour will forfeit any unvested shares on his resigning from the Company and will forfeit both vested and unvested shares on summary termination by the Company; and

 

                        issued with shares in the Company (subject to certain restrictions) under the share plan to a value of $6,000,000.  All the shares will be free from restriction if Mr Fahour resigns from the Company or if he ceases employment with the Company due to death or total and permanent disablement.  However, Mr Fahour will forfeit any interest in the shares on summary termination by the Company.

 

In January 2005 (or such earlier time as agreed between Mr Fahour and the Company), the Company will pay to Mr Fahour a cash amount of $3,857,000, from which income tax will be deducted.

 

The provision of these commencement benefits are conditional upon Mr Fahour relinquishing his rights and entitlements to the shares and options, and to any cash bonus (in respect of the 2004 financial year) allocated to him by his then current employer, Citigroup, except that Mr Fahour is entitled to retain up to 5,000 Citigroup shares transferred to his name prior to signing the employment agreement.

 

The Company will meet one-off costs of up to $235,000 associated with the sale of Mr Fahour’s principal residence in the US and up to $150,000 associated with the purchase of a principal residence in Australia.  Other associated relocation costs will be met by the Company in accordance with the Company’s international relocation policy.

 

Mr Fahour is eligible to participate in other benefits that are normally provided to executives who are employed by the Company.  He is also entitled to paid annual leave, long service leave and sick leave in accordance with the Company’s policies.

 

The employment agreement restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Fahour.

 

The Company may terminate the employment agreement on 12 month’s notice (or, in the case of redundancy or for unsatisfactory performance, six week’s notice).  On termination of his employment by the Company (other than for summary termination, unsatisfactory performance or redundancy), Mr Fahour may, in the Company’s discretion, be paid a termination payment in lieu of all or part of the notice period.  If Mr Fahour is terminated by reason of redundancy, he is entitled to a termination payment equal to the greater of 46 week’s TEC plus any payment in lieu of the notice period, or the redundancy payment calculated in accordance with the Company’s redundancy, redeployment and retrenchment agreement 2002 (less any payment in lieu of notice required to be made under that agreement).  A termination payment is not payable if the Company summarily dismisses Mr Fahour for matters such as misconduct or if Mr Fahour resigns.  Mr Fahour may terminate the employment agreement by giving 13 week’s notice.

 

Irrespective of whether or not Mr Fahour receives a termination payment, he would be paid for any accrued but untaken annual leave or long service leave on termination.

 

For a period of up to 12 months from the date of Mr Fahour’s cessation of employment with the Company for any reason, Mr Fahour cannot solicit or entice from the Group any officers, employees, contractors or significant customers of the Group or for a period of up to six months from the date of cessation of employment engage in certain restricted activities such as participating in a financial services business that is in competition with the Group.

 

Retention award Mr John E Hooper

 

In May 2004, in connection with Mr Hooper’s appointment as Acting Executive General Manager, Corporate & Institutional Banking, he was offered a retention award of restricted shares in the Company to a value of $240,000 (being 60% of his TEC).  Twenty percent of the award is to be used to purchase shares with immediate effect; 30% is to be used to purchase shares upon the appointment of an incumbent to Mr Hooper’s acting position or the appointment of Mr Hooper if he is the successful candidate; 50% is to be used to purchase shares six months after either a permanent appointment has been made (and subject to Mr Hooper’s co-operation in the handover process) or if Mr Hooper is appointed to the role.

 

The shares are to be purchased on a pre-tax basis at a price equal to the average of the closing prices for the five days immediately following the date of the letter.  Mr Hooper will be entitled to receive any dividends that are paid by the Company while the shares remain in trust.  The earliest Mr Hooper can apply to have the shares released is six months after a permanent appointment has been made to the position and the shares will remain in trust for up to ten years from the date of issue.  During this period they will be subject to forfeiture on grounds of serious misconduct only.

 

239



 

Mr Hooper’s short term incentive target for the second half of 2004 was reviewed and increased to a target of $490,000, subject to Mr Hooper achieving the performance objectives of his previous position and the new position over the year.

 

Employment agreement Mr Peter A McKinnon

 

In December 2003, the Company entered into an employment agreement with Mr McKinnon (the employment agreement) to confirm his position as Executive General Manager, People & Culture for a period of three years from December 1, 2003 (the employment period).  The employment period could be extended for one year by mutual agreement.  During the first year of the employment period, Mr McKinnon was to work on a full-time basis with a review of his employment status during the second and third years with the intention of changing it to a part-time basis.  The agreement has been terminated (refer to the summary of the ‘deed of settlement and release’ on page 245).  A summary of the terms of the agreement, prior to its termination, is set out below.

 

Under the employment agreement, Mr McKinnon was to receive annual fixed remuneration, short-term incentive remuneration and long-term incentive remuneration.

 

Annual fixed remuneration remained as it was immediately prior to signing the agreement.  Under this arrangement, annual fixed remuneration was a total remuneration package (TRP) of $600,570, plus an annual superannuation contribution of up to 9.7% of 90% of annual TRP.  Together, the TRP and the superannuation contribution made up Mr McKinnon’s total employment compensation (TEC) of $653,000, which was reviewed in January 2004 and thereafter on an annual basis.  A portion of Mr McKinnon’s TRP could be taken in the form of packaged benefits (such as a motor vehicle and parking).  TEC is inclusive of fringe benefits tax and superannuation contributions.

 

Mr McKinnon was entitled to participate in the Company’s incentive program, the National Australia Bank Staff Share Allocation Plan and the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan on their respective terms, and in any offers made under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No 2.

 

Mr McKinnon was eligible to participate in other benefits that are normally provided to executives who are employed by the Company.  He is also entitled to paid annual leave, long service leave and sick leave in accordance with the Company’s policies.

 

The employment agreement restricted the disclosure of confidential information by Mr McKinnon.

 

The Company could terminate the employment agreement on six weeks notice, or on 12 weeks’ notice for unsatisfactory performance.   On termination of his employment by the Company by reason of redundancy or changed requirements, Mr McKinnon was entitled to a termination payment equal to 72 weeks’ TRP (or, in the case of redundancy, the greater of 72 weeks’ TRP plus any payment in lieu of the notice period, or the redundancy payment calculated in accordance with the Company’s redundancy, redeployment and retrenchment agreement 2002 (less any payment in lieu of notice required to be made under that agreement)).  This termination payment was not payable if the Company summarily dismissed Mr McKinnon for matters such as misconduct or if Mr McKinnon was terminated for unsatisfactory performance.  Mr McKinnon could terminate the employment agreement by giving four weeks’ notice of resignation or six weeks’ notice because of certain material changes of circumstances.  Mr McKinnon was entitled, in addition to any payment in lieu of notice, to a termination payment of 72 weeks’ TRP if he resigned as a result of certain material changes of circumstances.

 

Irrespective of whether or not Mr McKinnon received a termination payment, he would be paid for any accrued but untaken annual leave or long service leave on termination.

 

Upon completion of the employment agreement, Mr McKinnon was entitled to:

 

                  receive any deferred short-term incentive amounts held on his behalf;

 

                  retain any unvested long-term incentive allocations on their original terms and conditions with the vesting of these subject to the satisfaction of the original hurdle; and

 

                  any other benefit due on retirement to an executive of Mr McKinnon’s level.

 

For a period of up to 12 months from the date of Mr McKinnon’s cessation of employment from the Company for any reason, Mr McKinnon cannot solicit or entice from the Group any officers, employees, contractors or customers of the Group.

 

Employment agreement Ms Lynne M Peacock (as General Manager, Business Development)

 

In May 2003, National Australia Group Europe Limited (NAGE), a controlled entity of the Company, entered into an employment agreement with Ms Peacock (the employment agreement) to appoint her as General Manager, Business Development.  Ms Peacock commenced service on September 1, 2003 and was appointed to the NAGE Board as an executive director on November 10, 2003.

 

Generally, if NAGE wishes to terminate Ms Peacock’s employment, it must give six months’ notice (or, at NAGE’s discretion, payment in lieu of basic salary and benefits that would have been accrued during the notice period).  Termination by Ms Peacock requires three months’ notice.  A restrictive covenant will be in place for six months following termination.  The agreement does not provide for any other payments in respect of termination, other than for unpaid but accrued holiday entitlements.

 

During her employment period, Ms Peacock will receive annual base salary, short-term incentive and long-term incentive remuneration.  Ms Peacock’s base salary will be GBP300,000 per annum reviewed annually on January 1.  The first review will be in January 2004.  Ms Peacock is entitled to additional benefits including a company car, medical cover, discounted mortgage/loans and participation in the National Partnership Share Plan.  Additionally, NAGE will pay annual contributions to a personal pension scheme nominated by Ms Peacock up to 25% of her basic salary subject to UK Inland Revenue restrictions.  Where a lesser amount is paid the balance will be paid as cash salary.

 

Ms Peacock’s short-term incentive remuneration is determined in accordance with NAGE’s EVA® incentive plan.  Currently, the short-term incentive component is determined by a combination of the Group’s performance against its EVA® growth target and Ms Peacock’s individual performance.  Ms Peacock’s target incentive opportunity was initially 80% of basic salary, subject to global Group performance and individual performance (including objectives focused on UK business performance).

 

240



 

The long-term incentive component of Ms Peacock’s remuneration comprises her eligibility to participate in the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No. 2 and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan.  Subject to any legal or regulatory requirements, in November 2003 NAGE was obliged under the employment agreement to procure that the Company offer Ms Peacock the right to be granted 50,000 options and the right to obtain 12,500 performance rights under the rules of the plans.  All awards of short-term and long-term incentives are subject to the approval of the Board and to the terms of grant.

 

Ms Peacock is entitled to 30 days of paid holiday leave per annum and up to 26 weeks’ paid sick leave and to fringe benefits in accordance with the policies of NAGE.

 

As an employee, Ms Peacock could be entitled to staff loans or other program benefits offered to staff in general.  Any benefits under these arrangements would form part of her total remuneration package and would be subject to any legislative or regulatory restrictions, including the United States Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

 

The agreement restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Ms Peacock.

 

Expatriate assignment agreement Ms Lynne M Peacock

 

In June 2004, the Company entered into an expatriate assignment agreement with Ms Peacock to appoint her as Executive General Manager, People & Culture with effect from May 10, 2004.  The term of the agreement is for an initial period to be determined by the Company.  For the term of the assignment, Ms Peacock will remain an employee of NAGE and will be seconded to the Company in Australia.  The terms of the assignment are in accordance with the Company’s international assignments policy.

 

The Company has subsequently announced that Ms Peacock has been appointed to the position of Chief Executive Officer, Europe with effect from December 1, 2004 and will be returning to Europe.  A summary of the terms of the expatriate assignment in Australia is set out below.

 

Ms Peacock’s fixed remuneration is tax equalised and is calculated using her home country base salary of GBP320,000 per annum.  Ms Peacock’s existing UK pension and existing leave arrangements will continue to apply during the assignment.  Ms Peacock’s performance incentive will be determined on the achievement against objectives agreed with the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.  Any bonuses will be paid or provided for in the UK and tax equalised.  Ms Peacock will remain eligible to participate in the Company’s option and share plans.

 

Ms Peacock will be entitled to various benefits in line with the Company’s expatriate policy, including home leave benefits, rent-free housing and furnishings, motor vehicle allowance and relocation expenses.

 

In August 2004, the Company changed the period of notice required to be given by NAGE to terminate Ms Peacock’s employment from six months to 12 months.

 

Expatriate assignment Mr Ross E Pinney

 

In July 2004, the Company entered into an expatriate assignment agreement with Mr Pinney to appoint him as Executive General Manager, Financial Services Europe with effect from February 1, 2004.  The term of the agreement is for an initial period of three years.  For the term of the assignment, Mr Pinney will remain an employee of the Company and will be seconded to NAGE in the UK.  The terms of the assignment are in accordance with the Company’s international assignments policy.

 

Subsequently, Mr Pinney has been appointed to the position of Executive General Manager, Office of the Chief Executive with effect from October 2004 and will be returning to Australia.  A summary of terms of the expatriate assignment in Europe is set out below.

 

Mr Pinney’s fixed remuneration is tax equalised and is calculated using his home country total remuneration of AUD740,000.  Mr Pinney’s existing Australian superannuation and existing leave arrangements will continue to apply during the assignment.  Mr Pinney’s performance incentive will be determined on the achievement against objectives agreed with the Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.  Any bonuses will be paid or provided for in Australia and tax equalised.  Mr Pinney will remain eligible to participate in the Company’s share and option plans and any awards made under those plans will be tax equalised.

 

Mr Pinney will be entitled to various benefits in line with the Company’s expatriate policy, including home leave benefits, housing and furnishings, motor vehicle allowance and relocation expenses.

 

Employment agreement Mr Gavin Slater

 

In June 2004, the Company entered into a new employment agreement with Mr Slater (the employment agreement) to appoint him as Group General Manager, Office of the CEO, with effect from April 5, 2004.

 

Under the employment agreement, Mr Slater will receive annual fixed remuneration, short-term incentive remuneration and long-term incentive remuneration.

 

Annual fixed remuneration is a total remuneration package (TRP) of $317,300, plus an annual superannuation contribution of up to 9.7% of 90% of annual TRP.  Together, the TRP and the superannuation contribution make up Mr Slater’s total employment compensation (TEC) of $345,000, which will be reviewed in January 2005 and thereafter on an annual basis.  A portion of Mr Slater’s TRP may be taken in the form of packaged benefits (such as a motor vehicle and parking).  TEC is inclusive of fringe benefits tax and superannuation contributions.

 

Mr Slater is entitled to participate in the Company’s incentive program, the National Australia Bank Staff Share Allocation Plan and the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan, on their respective terms, and in any offers made under the National Australia Bank Share Option Plan No 2.

 

Mr Slater is also eligible to participate in other benefits that are normally provided to executives who are employed by the Company.  He is also entitled to paid annual leave, long service leave and sick leave in accordance with the Company’s policies.

 

The employment agreement restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Slater.

 

The Company may terminate the employment agreement on six weeks’ notice, or on 12 weeks’ notice for unsatisfactory performance.  On termination of his employment by the Company by reason of redundancy or changed requirements, Mr Slater will be entitled to a termination payment equal to 59 weeks’ TRP (or, in the case of redundancy, the greater of 59 weeks’ TRP plus any payment in lieu of the notice period, or the redundancy payment calculated in accordance with the Company’s redundancy, redeployment and retrenchment agreement 2002 (less any payment in lieu of

 

241



 

notice required to be made under that agreement)).  This termination payment is not payable if the Company summarily dismisses Mr Slater for matters such as misconduct or if Mr Slater is terminated for unsatisfactory performance.  Mr Slater may terminate the employment agreement by giving four weeks’ notice of resignation or six weeks’ notice because of certain material changes of circumstances.  Mr Slater is entitled, in addition to any payment in lieu of notice, to a termination payment of 59 weeks’ TRP if he resigns as a result of certain material changes of circumstances.

 

Irrespective of whether or not Mr Slater receives a termination payment, he would be paid for any accrued but untaken annual leave or long service leave on termination.

 

For a period of up to 12 months from the date of Mr Slater’s cessation of employment from the Company for any reason, Mr Slater cannot solicit or entice from the Group any officers, employees, contractors or customers of the Group.

 

In May 2004, in connection with additional responsibilities assumed by Mr Slater, he was offered a retention award of restricted shares in the Company to a value of $175,000 (being 60% of his TEC).  20% of the award is to be used to purchase shares with immediate effect; 30% is to be used to purchase shares six months from the date of the retention letter; and 50% is to be used to purchase shares on completion of the APRA remedial action project.

 

The shares are to be purchased on a pre-tax basis and Mr Slater will be entitled to receive any dividends that are paid by the Company while the shares remain in trust.  The earliest Mr Slater can apply to have the shares released is on the completion of the APRA project.  The shares will remain in trust for up to ten years from the date of issue.  During this period they will be subject to forfeiture on the grounds of serious misconduct only.

 

Employment agreement Mr Michael J Ullmer

 

In August 2004, the Company entered into an employment agreement with Mr Ullmer (the employment agreement) to appoint him as Chief Financial Officer for a period of four years from September 1, 2004.  The employment agreement expires on August 31, 2008 and may be extended for one year by mutual agreement.

 

Under the employment agreement, Mr Ullmer will receive annual fixed remuneration, short-term incentive remuneration, long-term incentive remuneration and certain commencement benefits.

 

Annual fixed remuneration is a total remuneration package (TRP) of $919,709, plus an annual superannuation contribution of up to 9.7% of 90%  (from January 1, 2005, 100%) of annual TRP.  Together, the TRP and the superannuation contribution make up Mr Ullmer’s total employment compensation (TEC) of $1,000,000, which will be reviewed on October 1, 2005 and thereafter on an annual basis.  A portion of Mr Ullmer’s TRP may be taken in the form of packaged benefits (such as a motor vehicle and parking).  TEC is inclusive of fringe benefits tax and superannuation contributions.

 

Mr Ullmer’s short-term incentive remuneration is determined annually in accordance with the Company’s short-term incentive plan, as amended from time to time.  Mr Ullmer’s annual target short-term incentive is set at 100% of his TEC.  Short-term incentive remuneration is not guaranteed as it is subject to the achievement of a combination of the Group’s performance target and Mr Ullmer’s individual performance target.

 

The long-term incentive component of Mr Ullmer’s remuneration comprises his eligibility to participate in an offer of executive performance options and performance rights under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No.2 and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan respectively, as amended from time to time.  Long-term incentive rewards are not guaranteed, as they are subject to annual talent and potential assessments.  On the termination of Mr Ullmer’s employment with the Company, the retention of any options and performance rights granted to Mr Ullmer during his employment with the Company will be determined in accordance with the terms of grant under the respective plans.

 

Within 60 days of his commencement with the Company, Mr Ullmer is to be granted a long-term incentive reward of 100,000 performance options and 25,000 performance rights subject to the approval of the Board.  Mr Ullmer will be eligible to exercise the options and performance rights after three years from the grant date, subject to the achievement of certain performance hurdles during the two-year exercise period.  Mr Ullmer will retain these options and performance rights on the termination of his employment from the Company due to redundancy, death and total and permanent disablement or on the expiration of the employment agreement on August 31, 2008, subject to the achievement of specific performance hurdles.  Mr Ullmer will forfeit the options and rights on resigning from the Company or on summary termination by the Company.

 

The Company will meet reasonable expenses associated with the relocation of Mr Ullmer and his family from Sydney to Melbourne in accordance with the Company’s domestic relocation policy.

 

Mr Ullmer is eligible to participate in other benefits that are normally provided to executives who are employed by the Company.  He is also entitled to paid annual leave, long service leave and sick leave in accordance with the Company’s policies.

 

The employment agreement restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Ullmer.

 

The Company may terminate the employment agreement on 12 months’ notice (or, in the case of redundancy or for unsatisfactory performance, 6 weeks’ notice).  On termination of his employment by the Company (other than for summary termination, unsatisfactory performance or redundancy), Mr Ullmer may, in the Company’s discretion, be paid a termination payment in lieu of all or part of the notice period.  If Mr Ullmer is terminated by reason of redundancy, he is entitled to a termination payment equal to the greater of 46 weeks’ TEC plus any payment in lieu of the notice period, or the redundancy payment calculated in accordance with the Company’s redundancy, redeployment and retrenchment agreement 2002 (less any payment in lieu of notice required to be made under that agreement).  A termination payment is not payable if the Company summarily dismisses Mr Ullmer for matters such as misconduct or if Mr Ullmer resigns.  Mr Ullmer may terminate the employment agreement by giving 13 weeks’ notice.

 

Irrespective of whether or not Mr Ullmer receives a termination payment, he would be paid for any accrued but untaken annual leave or long service leave on termination.

 

For a period of up to 12 months from the date of Mr Ullmer’s cessation of employment with the Company for any reason, Mr Ullmer cannot solicit or entice from the Group any officers, employees, contractors or significant customers of the Group or engage in certain restricted activities such as participating in a financial services business that is in competition with the Group.

 

242



 

Retention award Mr Graeme D Willis

 

In May 2004, in connection with Mr Willis’ appointment as Acting Executive General Manager, Risk Management, he was offered a retention award of restricted shares in the Company to a value of $270,000 (being 60% of his TEC).  Twenty percent of the award is to be used to purchase shares with immediate effect; 30% is to be used to purchase shares upon the appointment of an incumbent to Mr Willis’ acting position or the appointment of Mr Willis if he is the successful candidate; 50% is to be used to purchase shares six months after either a permanent appointment has been made (and subject to Mr Willis’ co-operation in the handover process) or if Mr Willis is appointed to the role.

 

The shares are to be purchased on a pre-tax basis at a price equal to the average of the closing prices for the five days immediately following the date of the letter.  Mr Willis will be entitled to receive any dividends that are paid by the Company while the shares remain in trust.  The earliest Mr Willis can apply to have the shares released is six months after a permanent appointment has been made to the position and the shares will remain in trust for up to ten years from the date of issue.  During this period they will be subject to forfeiture on the grounds of serious misconduct only.

 

Mr Willis’ short term incentive target for the second half of 2004 was reviewed and increased to a target percentage of $250,000, subject to Mr Willis achieving the performance objectives of his previous position and the new position over the year.

 

Expatriate assignment agreement Mr Gavin R Slater (as Executive Director, National Australia Group Europe)

 

In December 2004, the Company entered into an expatriate assignment agreement with Mr Slater to appoint him as Executive Director, National Australia Group Europe.  The assignment is expected to commence on January 1, 2005 for an initial period of two years, with the potential to extend to four years. Mr Slater’s remuneration and other assignment conditions are determined in accordance with the Group’s expatriate policy.

 

Mr Slater’s expatriate assignment is subject to pre-employment screening to ensure that Mr Slater is likely to obtain approval for his role by the Financial Services Authority (UK).

 

A separate pay structure operates for expatriates and Mr Slater’s fixed remuneration is based on his TEC of $450,000.  Mr Slater’s existing Australian superannuation arrangements and existing leave arrangements will continue to apply during the assignment.  The final tranche of retention shares awarded to Mr Slater in May 2004 will be issued to him upon the satisfactory re-opening of the Company’s foreign exchange desk as determined by the Chief Executive Officer.

 

Mr Slater’s performance incentive will be determined on the achievement against objectives agreed with the Chief Executive Officer, National Australia Group Europe.  Any bonuses will be paid or provided for in Australia and tax equalised.  Mr Slater’s short-term incentive opportunity will be 55% of his home country TEC (initially $247,500) and he will remain eligible to participate in the Group’s share and option plans in accordance with the eligibility criteria.

 

Mr Slater will be entitled to various benefits in line with the Company’s expatriate policy, including home leave benefits, housing and furnishings, education allowance, provision of a motor vehicle and relocation expenses.

 

Employment agreement Mr Graeme D Willis (as Group General Manager, Regulatory Affairs)

 

In January 2005, the Company entered into an employment agreement with Mr Willis to appoint him as Group General Manager, Regulatory Affairs, with effect from December 1, 2004.

 

Under the employment agreement, Mr Willis will receive annual fixed remuneration, short-term incentive remuneration and long-term incentive remuneration.

 

Annual fixed remuneration is a total remuneration package (TRP) of $455,789 per annum, plus an annual superannuation contribution of up to 9.7% of TRP.  Together, the TRP and the superannuation contribution make up Mr Willis’ total employment compensation (TEC) of $500,000 per annum.  Mr Willis’s TEC will be reviewed in January 2006, and thereafter on an annual basis.  A portion of Mr Willis’ TRP may be taken in the form of packaged benefits (such as a motor vehicle and parking).  TEC is inclusive of fringe benefits tax and superannuation contributions.

 

Mr Willis’s short-term incentive remuneration is determined annually in accordance with the Company’s short-term incentive plan, as amended from time to time.  Mr Willis’s annual short-term incentive is set at 50% of his TEC (initially $250,000).  Short-term incentive remuneration is not guaranteed as it is subject to the achievement of a combination of the Group’s performance target and Mr Willis’s individual performance target.  Short-term incentive rewards may, at the discretion of the Company, be provided in cash or in shares in the Company with restrictions on trading or a combination of both.

 

The long-term incentive component of Mr Willis’s remuneration comprises his eligibility to participate in an offer of performance options and performance rights under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No.2 and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan respectively, as amended from time to time.  Long-term incentive rewards are not guaranteed, as they are subject to annual talent and potential assessments.  On the termination of Mr Willis’s employment with the Company, the retention of any options and performance rights granted to Mr Willis during his employment with the Company will be determined in accordance with the terms of grant under the relevant plan.

 

Mr Willis is eligible to participate in other benefits that are normally provided to executives who are employed by the Company.  He is also entitled to paid annual leave, long service leave and sick leave in accordance with the Company’s policies.

 

The employment agreement restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Willis.

 

The Company may terminate the employment agreement on 65 weeks’ written notice (or, in the case of redundancy or unsatisfactory performance, six weeks’ notice).  On termination of his employment by the Company (other than for summary termination ), Mr Willis may, in the Company’s discretion, be paid in lieu of all or part of the notice period based on his TEC.  If Mr Willis is terminated by reason of redundancy, then, in addition to any payment in lieu of notice, he is entitled to a termination payment equal to the greater of 59 weeks’ TEC , or the retrenchment payment calculated in accordance with the Company’s redundancy, redeployment and retrenchment agreement 2002.  A termination payment is not payable if the Company summarily dismisses Mr Willis for matters such as misconduct.  Mr Willis may terminate the employment agreement by giving 13 weeks’ written notice of resignation or six weeks’ notice because of certain material changes of

 

243



 

circumstances.  Mr Willis is entitled, in addition to any payment in lieu of notice, to a termination payment of 59 weeks’ TEC if he resigns as a result of certain material changes of circumstances.

 

Irrespective of whether or not Mr Willis receives a termination payment, he would be paid for any accrued but untaken annual leave or long service leave on termination.

 

For a period of up to 12 months from the date of Mr Willis’s cessation of employment from the Company for any reason, Mr Willis cannot solicit or entice from the Group any officers, employees or contractors.

 

For a period of up to six months from the date of Mr Willis’s cessation of employment from the Company, Mr Willis must not engage in certain restricted activities.  If Mr Willis resigns, and the Company does not permit Mr Willis to engage in restricted activities during the six-month restriction period, the Company will provide consideration to him of 13 weeks’ TEC, in addition to the payment of the notice period.

 

Employment agreement Mr Ross E Pinney (as Executive General Manager, Office of the Chief Executive)

 

In January 2005, the Company entered into an employment agreement with Mr Pinney to appoint him as Executive General Manager, Office of the Chief Executive, with effect from October 2004.

 

Under the employment agreement, Mr Pinney will receive annual fixed remuneration, short-term incentive remuneration and long-term incentive remuneration.

 

Annual fixed remuneration is a total remuneration package (TRP) of $674,567, plus an annual superannuation contribution of up to 9.7% of TRP.  Together, the TRP and the superannuation contribution make up Mr Pinney’s total employment compensation (TEC) of $740,000.  Mr Pinney’s TEC will increase to $748,000 per annum from the first full pay period after January 1, 2005.  Mr Pinney’s TEC will be reviewed in January 2006, and thereafter on an annual basis.  A portion of Mr Pinney’s TRP may be taken in the form of packaged benefits (such as a motor vehicle and parking).  TEC is inclusive of fringe benefits tax and superannuation contributions.

 

Mr Pinney’s short-term incentive remuneration is determined annually in accordance with the Company’s short-term incentive plan, as amended from time to time.  Mr Pinney’s annual short-term incentive is set at 100% of his TEC.  Short-term incentive remuneration is not guaranteed as it is subject to the achievement of a combination of the Group’s performance target and Mr Pinney’s individual performance target.  Short-term incentive rewards may, at the discretion of the Company, be provided in cash or in shares in the Company with restrictions on trading or a combination of both.

 

The long-term incentive component of Mr Pinney’s remuneration comprises his eligibility to participate in an offer of performance options and performance rights under the National Australia Bank Executive Share Option Plan No.2 and the National Australia Bank Performance Rights Plan respectively, as amended from time to time.  Long-term incentive rewards are not guaranteed, as they are subject to annual talent and potential assessments.  On the termination of Mr Pinney’s employment with the Company, the retention of any options and performance rights granted to Mr Pinney during his employment with the Company will be determined in accordance with the terms of grant under the relevant plan.

 

The Company will meet reasonable expenses associated with the relocation of Mr Pinney’s family from London to Melbourne in accordance with the terms of the Company’s expatriate policy.

 

Mr Pinney is eligible to participate in other benefits that are normally provided to executives who are employed by the Company.  He is also entitled to paid annual leave, long service leave and sick leave in accordance with the Company’s policies.

 

The employment agreement restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Pinney.

 

The Company may terminate the employment agreement on 78 weeks’ written notice (or, in the case of redundancy or unsatisfactory performance, six weeks’ notice).  On termination of his employment by the Company (other than for summary termination), Mr Pinney may, in the Company’s discretion, be paid in lieu of all or part of the notice period based on his TEC.  If Mr Pinney is terminated by reason of redundancy, then, in addition to any payment in lieu of notice, he is entitled to a termination payment equal to the greater of 72 weeks’ TEC , or the retrenchment payment calculated in accordance with the Company’s redundancy, redeployment and retrenchment agreement 2002.  A termination payment is not payable if the Company summarily dismisses Mr Pinney for matters such as misconduct.  Mr Pinney may terminate the employment agreement by giving 13 weeks’ written notice of resignation or six weeks’ notice because of certain material changes of circumstances.  Mr Pinney is entitled, in addition to any payment in lieu of notice, to a termination payment of 72 weeks’ TEC if he resigns as a result of certain material changes of circumstances.

 

Irrespective of whether or not Mr Pinney received a termination payment, he would be paid for any accrued but untaken annual leave or long service leave on termination.

 

For a period of up to 12 months from the date of Mr Pinney’s cessation of employment from the Company for any reason, Mr Pinney cannot solicit or entice from the Group any officers, employees or contractors .

 

For a period of up to six months from the date of Mr Pinney’s cessation of employment from the Company , Mr Pinney must not engage in certain restricted activities.  If Mr Pinney resigns, and the Company does not permit Mr Pinney to engage in restricted activities during the six-month restriction period, the Company will provide consideration to him of 13 weeks’ TEC, in addition to the payment of the notice period.

 

Variation to employment agreement Ms Lynne M Peacock (as Chief Executive Officer, Europe)

 

In January 2005, the Company and Ms Peacock agreed to vary certain provisions of Ms Peacock’s existing service agreement with National Australia Group Europe Limited (NAGE), as a consequence of her appointment in October 2004 as Chief Executive Officer, Europe.

 

Ms Peacock is now based in NAGE’s London office and was repatriated to the United Kingdom in accordance with the Company’s expatriate policy.  The period of notice required to be given by NAGE to terminate Ms Peacock’s employment was confirmed as 12 months.  Ms Peacock’s base salary increased to GBP404,000 with effect from January 1, 2005.  Her target incentive opportunity under the Company’s new Group Executive Incentive Plan for the year ending September 30, 2005 will be 100% of her total employment compensation of GBP525,000 per annum.

 

244



 

All other terms and conditions of her employment with NAGE are as provided in her employment agreement executed by the parties in May 2003.

 

Deeds of settlement and release

 

Mr Michael T Laing

 

On September 30, 2004, Mr Laing’s position was made redundant and his employment agreement with the Company ceased on that date.  Mr Laing entered into a deed of settlement and release (the deed) with the Company on October 11, 2004.  The deed sets out the agreed settlement of the terms of Mr Laing’s cessation of employment with the Company.

 

The deed provides for the Company to pay Mr Laing, on or before October 21, 2004, the sum of $1,234,790, less appropriate taxation deductions as required by law.  This amount comprises a redundancy payment of $918,259, statutory and award entitlements of $199,032 and an amount of $117,499 in respect of the deferred performance-based remuneration incentive earned in the 2003 year.  If the Company makes payments under the Group EVA® performance incentive plan for 2004, Mr Laing will be considered for such a payment in accordance with the plan’s guidelines for retrenched employees.

 

Mr Laing may continue any existing concessional lending that he has with the Company for a period of nine months following the termination date.

 

Mr Laing is entitled to retain all performance options and rights over shares in the Company granted to him under the Company’s executive option program.  The options and performance rights remain subject to the satisfaction of specified performance hurdles.

 

There are mutual releases in the deed in respect of certain claims that may arise in respect of Mr Laing’s employment by the Company.  The Company indemnifies Mr Laing in respect of reasonable costs and expenses arising from defending certain claims and proceedings that may arise with respect to Mr Laing’s employment by the Company.

 

The deed restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Mr Laing.

 

Mr Christopher D Lewis

 

On March 12, 2004, Mr Lewis’ employment with the Company was terminated.  Mr Lewis entered into a deed of settlement and release (the deed) with the Company on April 15, 2004.  The deed sets out the agreed settlement of the terms of Mr Lewis’ cessation of employment with the Company.

 

The deed provides for the Company to pay Mr Lewis, on or before April 22, 2004, the sum of approximately $900,238, less appropriate taxation deductions as required by law, for payment of all contractual and statutory amounts in respect of the termination of Mr Lewis’s employment with the Company.  This amount comprises a termination payment of approximately $710,635, payment of in lieu of six weeks’ notice of approximately $72,268, a deferred At-Risk incentive payment of $117,000 and approximately $334 resulting from an adjustment due to an increase of Mr Lewis’ total employment compensation including accrued annual leave and annual leave loading.

 

An amount of $101,157 was paid to Mr Lewis on March 15, 2004 in satisfaction of his TRP and his accrued annual leave and annual leave loading entitlements calculated to the termination date.

 

Mr Lewis is entitled to retain 200,000 performance options granted to him on September 13, 2001 on the same terms and conditions as those options were issued.

 

There are mutual releases in the deed in respect of certain claims that may arise in respect of Mr Lewis’ employment by the Company.

 

Mr Peter A McKinnon

 

On March 26, 2004, Mr McKinnon entered into a deed of settlement and release (the deed) with the Company.  On September 30, 2004, Mr McKinnon’s employment ceased with the Company.  The original termination date was December 31, 2004 but was varied to September 30, 2004 by mutual agreement, as provided for in the deed.  The deed sets out the agreed settlement of the terms of Mr McKinnon’s cessation of employment with the Company.

 

The deed provides for the Company to pay Mr McKinnon, on or before October 14, 2004, a retrenchment payment of $902,235, less appropriate taxation deductions as required by law.  In addition, the Company is to pay Mr McKinnon his deferred At-Risk incentive of $112,000 and his accrued statutory entitlements calculated to the termination date.

 

If the Company makes any payments under the Group EVA®  performance incentive plan for 2004, the Company will make a payment to Mr McKinnon on the same basis as all other executive general managers.

 

Mr McKinnon is entitled to retain 650,000 executive performance options and 50,000 performance rights granted to him under the Company’s executive options programs.  The options and performance rights remain subject to the satisfaction of specified performance hurdles.

 

There are mutual releases in the deed in respect of certain claims that may arise in respect of Mr McKinnon’s employment by the Company. The deed restricts the disclosure of confidential information by Mr McKinnon.

 

Mr Richard E McKinnon

 

On April 2, 2004, Mr McKinnon entered into a deed of settlement and release (the deed) with the Company.  The deed sets out the agreed settlement of the terms of Mr McKinnon’s cessation of employment with the Company.

 

The deed provided for Mr McKinnon to receive several payments in connection with his termination, the retention of certain performance options and performance rights, and provided for mutual releases and indemnities.

 

The deed was superseded on November 11, 2004, when the parties entered into a new deed of settlement and release (the new deed).  The new deed provides that Mr McKinnon will continue to be an employee of the Company until September 30, 2005 or earlier if Mr McKinnon provides three months’ written notice of the date on which his employment with the Company will cease (the new termination date).  From January 1, 2005, until the new termination date, Mr McKinnon will provide assistance, in an advisory capacity, and otherwise advise the Chief Executive and the Chief Financial Officer, and will be paid a compensation package of $750,000.   Mr McKinnon is to be paid a gross lump-sum severance payment of $2,311,608 and an amount in lieu of accrued and untaken annual leave and long service leave.  Mr McKinnon is also to be paid a deferred incentive amount of $146,000 and an incentive payment of $374,000 under the Company’s EVA® incentive scheme for 2004.

 

245



 

Mr McKinnon is entitled to retain all shares, performance options and performance rights granted to him under the Company’s performance options and performance rights plans.

 

The new deed restricts Mr McKinnon from accepting employment or a non-executive directorship or undertaking consulting activities with the Company’s major competitors prior to August 31, 2005. 

 

The new deed contains mutual releases in respect of certain claims that may arise in respect of Mr McKinnon’s employment with the Company.  The Company and Mr McKinnon have also entered into a deed of access, indemnity and insurance (the deed of indemnity) under which the Company indemnifies Mr McKinnon against certain liabilities that may have been incurred in his capacity as an officer of the Company.  Under the deed of indemnity the Company also undertakes to allow Mr McKinnon access to documents necessary to enable him to defend himself against certain claims and the Company undertakes to maintain certain insurance coverage.

 

Mr Ian F Scholes

 

On March 12, 2004, Mr Scholes’ employment with the Company was terminated.  Mr Scholes entered into a deed of settlement and release (the deed) with the Company on August 2, 2004.  The deed sets out the agreed settlement of the terms of Mr Scholes’ cessation of employment with the Company.

 

The deed provides for the Company to pay Mr Scholes, on or before August 16, 2004, the sum of $2,242,700, less appropriate taxation deductions as required by law, for payment of all contractual and statutory amounts in respect of the termination of Mr Scholes’ employment with the Company.  This amount comprises a termination payment of $1,979,700 (made up of 150% of TRP from March 13, 2004 to March 25, 2005 equal to $948,450, plus a target incentive payment from March 13, 2004 to March 25, 2005 of 150% of TEC equal to $1,031,250, and a deferred at-risk payment of $263,000.

 

Mr Scholes is entitled to retain 71 EVA® shares in the Company, and also 375,000 performance options and 31,250 performance rights granted over the period 2002 to 2003.

 

There are mutual releases in the deed in respect of certain claims that may arise in respect of Mr Scholes’ employment by the Company.

 

Executive director appointment letters

 

Mr Ahmed Fahour and Mr Michael J Ullmer

 

In October 2004, the Company appointed Mr Fahour and Mr Ullmer as executive directors of the Company and National Equities Limited (executive directors).  The appointments are effective from October 7, 2004, until the next annual general meeting of the Company on January 31, 2005, at which time the executive directors will be entitled to stand for election by the shareholders as directors of the Company.

 

The appointment letters for the executive directors set out the terms and conditions of their appointment.  These terms and conditions are in conjunction with, and subject to, the Company’s Constitution and the charters and policies approved by the Board from time to time.

 

The executive directors’ positions will become vacant if any of the circumstances prescribed under the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) or the Company’s constitution occur.

 

The letter of appointment varies the Company’s right to terminate the employment agreements entered into by the executive directors (as summarised above).  The Company may terminate the employment agreements effective immediately if the executive directors’ positions become vacant or are vacated by force of the Corporations Act or certain Articles of the Company’s constitution.  The Company may terminate the employment agreements if, in accordance with the Company’s constitution or the Corporations Act, they are removed or dismissed from office as an executive director or they cease to hold office as a director. 

 

The executive directors are required to hold at least 2,000 fully paid shares in the Company within two months of their appointment.  As employees of the Company, the executive directors are not entitled to any additional remuneration in their roles as executive directors.  While they are executive directors and employees of the Company, 50% of any short term incentive reward allocated to them under the Company’s short-term incentive-based plan for executive employees, as referred to in their employment agreements, will be provided in Company shares, generally restricted for a minimum period of 12 months from the date of issue.  Any issue or allocation of shares to the executive directors as employees of the Company, as part of their short-term incentive reward, will be provided under the National Australia Bank Staff Share Ownership Plan, and is subject to the specific terms of issue at the time and subject to approval by shareholders if required by law or the ASX Listing Rules.

 

The executive directors are required to comply with the Company’s policies, including the Company’s Code of Conduct and insider trading policy.  The executive directors are required to sign a confidentiality deed and they are expected to maintain the confidentiality of all materials and information obtained in connection with their positions as directors.  These obligations are in addition to their confidentiality obligations as employees of the Company.

 

The executive directors are entitled to the benefit of an indemnity provided by the Company in accordance with, and to the extent allowed under, the Company’s constitution and the Corporations Act.

 

The executive directors are entitled to seek independent professional advice in relation to their duties and powers as directors of the Company and will be reimbursed by the Company for all reasonable expenses incurred in obtaining such advice.

 

Non–executive director appointment letters

 

Mr Robert G Elstone, Mr Daniel T Gilbert, Mr Paul J Rizzo, Ms Jillian S Segal, Mr John G Thorn, Mr Michael Chaney

 

In August 2004, the Company announced that Mr Elstone, Mr Gilbert, Mr Rizzo and Ms Segal would be appointed as non-executive directors of the Company and National Equities Limited (non-executive directors).  Also in 2004, the Company wrote to Mr Thorn to confirm the terms of his appointment as a non-executive director, effective from October 16, 2003.  The appointments of Mr Elstone, Mr Gilbert, Mr Rizzo and Ms Segal became effective from September, 2004 until the next annual general meeting of the Company on January 31, 2005, at which time they will stand for election by the shareholders as directors of the Company.  In December 2004, Mr Chaney was appointed as a non-executive director of the Company and

 

246



 

National Equities Limited (as a non-executive director) until the next annual general meeting of the Company on January 31, 2005 at which time he will stand for election by the shareholders as a director of the Company.

 

The appointment letters for the non-executive directors set out the terms and conditions of their appointment.  These terms and conditions are in conjunction with, and subject to, the Company’s constitution and the charters and policies approved by the Board from time to time.

 

The office of the non-executive directors will become vacant if any of the circumstances prescribed under the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) or the Company’s constitution occur.

 

The non-executive directors are required to hold at least 2,000 fully paid shares in the Company within two months after their appointment.  However, the non-executive directors are not entitled to participate in executive remuneration schemes and do not receive performance options, performance rights, bonuses, other types of performance based remuneration or retirement benefits.  Except in limited circumstances, the non-executive directors are provided with at least 10% and up to 40% of their annual remuneration in the form of Company shares and may also elect to receive part of their remuneration in the form of superannuation contributions.  As a minimum, the Company pays superannuation contributions at the rate of 9% of the fees (and any other amounts which form part of directors’ ordinary time earnings for superannuation guarantee purposes) paid to directors.

 

The non-executive directors are entitled to receive, where relevant, the following fees for their directorship and membership of Board committees:

 

Board/Committee

 

Chairman

 

Member

 

 

 

$

 

$

 

Board and Board Nomination Committee

 

 

 

137,150

 

Board Audit Committee

 

39,000

 

19,500

 

Board Risk Committee

 

39,000

 

19,500

 

Board Human Resources Committee

 

17,550

 

7,364

 

 

The non-executive directors are appointed on the basis that they remain independent of management and free from any business or other relationship that could materially interfere with, or could reasonably be perceived to materially interfere with, the exercise of their unfettered and independent judgment.  The non-executive directors are required to inform the Board of any change in their, or in their associates’, relationship with the Company, or with the Company’s management team, which could affect their independence.

 

The non-executive directors are required to comply with the Company’s policies, including the Company’s Code of Conduct and insider trading policy.  The non-executive directors are required to sign a confidentiality deed and they are expected to maintain the confidentiality of all materials and information obtained in connection with their positions as non-executive directors of the Company.

 

The non-executive directors are entitled to the benefit of an indemnity provided by the Company in accordance with, and to the extent allowed under, the Company’s constitution and the Corporations Act.

 

The non-executive directors are entitled to seek independent professional advice in relation to their duties and powers as directors of the Company and will be reimbursed by the Company for all reasonable expenses incurred in obtaining such advice.  Non-executive directors are also entitled to be reimbursed for reasonable travel, accommodation and other expenses reasonably incurred when engaged in Company business.

 

Mr G Malcolm Williamson

 

In May 2004, the Company appointed Mr Williamson as a non-executive director of the Company, National Equities Limited and three of the Company’s main subsidiary companies in Europe: National Australia Group Europe Limited, Clydesdale Bank PLC and Yorkshire Bank PLC (UK companies). 

 

The appointment of Mr Williamson as a non-executive director is effective from May 10, 2004.  In relation to the Company, Mr Williamson holds office until the next annual general meeting of the Company on January 31, 2005, at which time he will stand for re-election to the position of director by resolution of the Company.

 

The terms and conditions of Mr Williamson’s appointment as a non-executive director of the Company and National Equities Limited are generally the same as the terms and conditions of the appointment of the non-executive directors referred to above.

 

In relation to the UK companies, the terms and conditions of Mr Williamson’s appointment as a non-executive director are in conjunction with, and subject to, the memorandum and articles of association of the UK companies.  Mr Williamson’s appointment is for an initial term of three years unless terminated earlier by either party upon the giving of three months’ notice.  Each of Mr Williamson’s appointments to the UK companies is made on a separate basis and the termination of appointment of one directorship does not of itself lead to termination of any other appointment. 

 

Mr Williamson is entitled to receive the following fees for his services as a non-executive director:

 

Entity

 

GBP

 

Company (and National Equities Limited)

 

55,000

 

National Australia Group Europe Limited

 

55,575

 

Clydesdale Bank PLC

 

45,000

 

Yorkshire Bank PLC

 

45,000

 

Chairman, European Board Risk Committee

 

9,425

 

 

Mr Williamson is not entitled to receive any additional fees for membership of any board committees or subsidiary directorships unless approved by the Compensation Committee of the Principal Board.

 

Part of the fees payable in relation to the Company will be satisfied by superannuation and shares in the Company.  The element of fees represented by shares is the minimum determined by shareholders of the Company, which is currently 10%.  The actual number of shares will be those which could otherwise be purchased by Mr Williamson with the net amount of 10% of his fees following the payment of any relevant income, national insurance or any other income or payroll-related taxes.

 

Deeds of access, indemnity and insurance

 

During the year, the Company executed deeds of access, indemnity and insurance (deeds of indemnity) in the terms of Article 21 of the Company’s constitution in favour of Mr Stewart and Mr Thorn (August 2004), Mr Elstone, Mr Gilbert, Mr Rizzo and Ms Segal (September 2004) Mr Fahour and Mr Ullmer (October 2004) and Mr Williamson (November 2004).

 

247



 

These deeds of indemnity are consistent with Article 21 of the Company’s constitution and indemnify the directors against certain liabilities that may be incurred in their capacity as officers of the Company.  The Company undertakes to hold, and allow directors access to, a complete set of board papers and all other documents made available to directors from the earlier of the first day on which the director consents or begins to act as a director of the Company until seven years from the later of the date on which the director retires, resigns or ceases to act as a director of the Company.  The directors undertake to observe their duties of confidentiality to the Company in relation to these board papers.  Under the deeds of indemnity, and consistent with Article 21 of the Company’s constitution, the Company also undertakes to maintain certain insurance coverage.

 

Sale of National Europe Holdings (Ireland) Limited

 

The Company and National Europe Holdings Limited (NEHL) entered into an agreement with Danske Bank A/S on December 14, 2004 in respect of the sale of all of the share capital of National Europe Holdings (Ireland) Limited (NEHIL).  NEHIL is the immediate parent entity of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited.

 

The purchase price payable to NEHL for the share capital of NEHIL is approximately $2.5 billion (GBP 967 million) in cash.  This amount will be subject to final adjustments as at completion to reflect changes in the net asset value of the entity between the last balance date (September 30, 2004) and completion.  All debt owed by the businesses being sold to entities in the Group will either be repaid or novated to Danske Bank A/S at face value.  The Company has guaranteed the performance by NEHL as vendor under the agreement.

 

The transaction is subject to the approval of certain regulatory authorities (including the Financial Services Authority in the UK, the Irish Financial Services Regulatory Authority in Ireland, the Financial Supervision Commission on the Isle of Man and the European Commission).

 

Under the agreement, warranties, primarily in relation to the businesses of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited, were given.  Those warranties are of a kind usual in transactions of this nature and size.  Danske Bank A/S were also given indemnities in respect of certain specified risks associated with the businesses of Northern Bank Limited and National Irish Bank Limited (including in respect of any liabilities arising in connection with the matters the subject of an investigation).  These warranties and indemnities are in some cases subject to various time limitations and liability caps and restrictions.  In addition, undertakings have been given to protect the value of the businesses acquired, effectively preventing the Company and its subsidiaries from engaging in certain competing activities in Northern Ireland or the Republic of Ireland and from soliciting employees of the businesses for two years after completion.

 

Completion will occur at the end of the month during which all conditions precedent are satisfied.  This is expected to occur during the first quarter of the 2005 calendar year.

 

Exchange controls and other limitations affecting securityholders

 

There are no limitations under the Company’s constitution restricting the rights of non-resident or foreign owners of ordinary shares to have an interest in or vote on their securities.

 

Mergers, acquisitions and divestments of Australian public companies listed on ASX are regulated by detailed and comprehensive legislation and the rules and regulations of ASX.

 

In summary, under the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth), a person must not acquire a relevant interest in issued voting shares in an Australian listed company if, broadly, because of the transaction, that person’s or someone else’s voting power in the company increases from 20% or below to more than 20%, or from a starting point that is above 20% and below 90%, unless those shares are acquired in a manner specifically permitted by law.  This restriction also limits the options available to a shareholder wanting to sell a shareholding of more than 20% in an Australian listed company.

 

The concepts of ‘relevant interest’ and ‘voting power’ are very broadly defined and shareholders should seek their own advice on their scope.   In very general terms:

 

                  a person has a relevant interest in securities broadly if they hold the securities or have the power to vote or dispose of the securities or are deemed to have a relevant interest;

 

                  a person’s voting power in a company is broadly the total number of votes attached to all the voting shares in the company that the person or an associate has a relevant interest in, divided by the total number of votes attached to all voting shares in the company; and

 

                  an associate is widely defined in Divisions 1 and 2 of Part 1.2 of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) and includes, depending on the context, parent companies or subsidiaries of the holder and persons with whom the holder has entered into various types of agreements, arrangements or understandings (formal or informal) in relation to certain matters concerning shares, the affairs of the company or the composition of its board of directors.

 

The Corporations Act 2001(Cth) also imposes certain substantial shareholding disclosure obligations on persons who are or become entitled to 5% or more of the voting shares in a company listed on ASX, such as the Company.

 

One of the more common manners in which a controller shareholding is acquired in an Australian listed company is by a takeover offer.  The form and content of the documentation are regulated by law.  Australian takeover law purports to have extra-territorial force.  Therefore, Australian law may apply to transactions outside Australia with respect to non-Australian companies if that transaction affects the control of voting shares in an Australian listed company.

 

Australian law also regulates acquisitions, which would have the effect, or be likely to have the effect, of substantially lessening competition in a market in Australia, in a state or in a territory of Australia.

 

Acquisitions of certain interests in Australian listed companies by foreign interests are subject to review and approval by the Treasurer of the Commonwealth of Australia under the Foreign Acquisitions and Takeovers Act 1975 (Cth) (FATA).  The FATA applies to any acquisition of 15% or more of the outstanding shares of an Australian listed company or any acquisition, which results in one foreign person (including a company) or group of associated foreign persons controlling 15% or more of total voting power.  In addition, the FATA applies to any acquisition by non-associated foreign persons controlling, in the aggregate, 40% or more of total voting power or ownership.

 

In addition, there are specific limitations on the acquisition of a shareholding in a bank under the Financial Sector (Shareholdings) Act 1998 (Cth).  Under this Act, a person (including a company) must not acquire an interest in an

 

248



 

Australian financial sector company where the acquisition would take that person’s voting power (which includes the voting power of the person’s associates) in the financial sector company to more than 15% of the voting power of the financial sector company without first obtaining the Treasurer’s approval.  Even if a person has less than 15% of the voting power, the Treasurer has the power to declare that a person has practical control of that company and, by applying for an order from the Federal Court of Australia may require the person to relinquish that control.  The definition of a financial sector company includes banks, such as the Company.  It also includes authorised insurance companies or an authorised insurance company’s holding company.  Three of the Company’s controlled entities are authorised insurance companies.

 

Subject to compliance with the FATA and the Financial Sector (Shareholdings) Act 1998 (Cth), non-residents of Australia have the same rights to hold shares and to vote as residents of Australia.

 

There are no formal prohibitions on the diversification by banks through equity involvements or investments in subsidiaries.  However, without the consent of the Treasurer, no bank may enter into any agreement or arrangement for the sale or disposal of its business (by amalgamation or otherwise), or for the carrying on of business in partnership with an ADI, or effect a reconstruction.

 

There are no general foreign exchange restrictions in effect in Australia at the present time.  However, the specific approval of the RBA must be obtained in connection with certain payments and transactions having a prescribed connection with countries and entities designated from time to time by the RBA for the purposes of the Banking (Foreign Exchange) Regulations.  Regulations in Australia also prohibit payments, transactions and dealings with assets having a prescribed connection with certain countries, named individuals, or entities associated with terrorism.

 

Taxation

 

The taxation discussion set forth below is intended only as a descriptive summary, and does not purport to be a complete technical analysis or listing of all potential Australian, UK, New Zealand or US tax effects to US persons who are American depositary receiptholders or holders of shares (US holders), and US holders are advised to satisfy themselves as to the overall tax effects, including state and local tax effects, by consulting their own tax advisers.  This summary is based in part on representations of the depositary, and assumes that each obligation provided for in or otherwise contemplated by the deposit agreement and any related agreement will be performed in accordance with its terms.  Except as otherwise noted, the statements of Australian, UK, New Zealand or US tax laws set out below are based on the laws in force as at December 2, 2004, and are subject to any changes in Australian, UK, New Zealand or US laws and in any double taxation convention between Australian and either the UK, New Zealand or the US occurring after that date.

 

Australian taxation

 

Under Australian taxation law, non-residents of Australia for tax purposes may be subject to withholding tax in respect of dividends received from shares in Australian companies depending upon the extent to which the dividends are franked.  Under the foreign dividend account system, the unfranked portion of a dividend paid to non-residents of Australia may not be subject to Australian withholding tax if the unfranked amount is sourced from certain foreign income earned by the Australian company on which foreign tax has been paid.  In accordance with the provisions of the Australian/US double tax agreement, withholding tax on dividend income derived by a non-resident of Australia, who is a resident of the US, is limited to 15% of the gross amount of the dividend.

 

Under the current Australian dividend imputation system, to the extent that dividends are paid out of income on which Australian income tax has been levied, such dividends are considered as franked dividends to that same extent.  Where an Australian resident shareholder for tax purposes receives a franked dividend, the shareholder receives an imputation tax credit, which can be offset against the Australian income tax payable by the shareholder.

 

The amount of the credit is dependent upon the extent to which the dividend paid is a franked dividend.  Excess imputation tax credits are refundable to Australian resident shareholders for tax purposes who are individuals, superannuation funds or charities.  Non-resident shareholders for tax purposes who do not hold the shares in connection with a permanent establishment in Australia, rather than receiving a credit, are exempt from dividend withholding tax in respect of franked dividends received.  Non-resident shareholders for tax purposes are not entitled to a refund of excess imputation tax credits.

 

The Company paid a fully franked interim dividend out of the profit for the half-year ended March 31, 2004 and paid a fully franked final dividend out of the profit for the year ended September 30, 2004.   The franked portion of these dividends carry imputation tax credits at a tax rate of 30%, reflecting the current Australian company tax rate of 30%.

 

Subject to certain exceptions, a non-resident shareholder for tax purposes disposing of shares in Australian listed companies will be free from tax in Australia.  The exceptions relate to capital assets that are treated as having the necessary connection with Australia. The following two exceptions are relevant to disposals of shares:

 

                  shares held as part of a business conducted through a permanent establishment in Australia.  In such a case, any profit on disposal would be assessable to ordinary income tax.  Any loss would constitute an allowable deduction; and

 

                  shares held in Australian resident public companies where such shares represent an associate inclusive holding of 10% or more by value in the shares of the company.  In such a case, capital gains tax would apply, but not otherwise.

 

In calculating any capital gains in respect of the disposal of assets (including shares) acquired on or after October 1, 1999, indexation of the cost of the assets for inflation is not available.  Individuals are subject to Australian tax on 50% of any actual capital gains (ie. without inflation indexation) on the disposal of assets acquired on or after October 1, 1999 and held for at least 12 months.  In the case of superannuation (pension) funds, two-thirds of any actual capital gains on the disposal of assets acquired on or after October 1, 1999 are subject to Australian tax, provided the assets have also been held for at least 12 months.

 

For the disposal of assets acquired prior to October 1, 1999, indexation of the cost of assets is frozen as at September 30, 1999.   However, for such asset disposals, individuals are able to choose whether to be taxed on any capital gain (after allowing for indexation of the cost to September 30, 1999) or 50% of any actual capital gain. Superannuation (pension) funds are also able to make the same election for the disposal of assets acquired prior to October 1, 1999; however, if an election is made to be taxed on any actual capital gain, two-thirds of the actual capital gain will be subject to Australian tax.

 

249



 

Normal rates of income tax will continue to apply to taxable capital gains so calculated. Capital losses are not subject to indexation; they are available as deductions, but only in the form of an offset against other capital gains (whether capital gains net of the frozen indexation or actual capital gains on assets acquired on or after October 1, 1999).  Any excess capital losses can be carried forward for offset against future capital gains.

 

UK dividend plan (UKDP)

 

The UKDP enables a shareholder of the Company who elects to participate in the UKDP to receive dividends from a UK controlled entity of the Company, as an alternative to the cash component of dividends paid on ordinary shares in the Company.  Dividends from UK companies continue to carry a tax credit of 10% of the grossed up amount of the dividend which can be utilised by certain shareholders.

 

The Company’s Australian resident corporate shareholders obtain no tax credits on a dividend paid by the UK controlled entity.  Dividends received from the Company on ordinary shares which do not participate in the UKDP carry an Australian imputation tax credit to the extent those dividends are franked.

 

In addition, participants of the UKDP should not suffer Australian capital gains tax due solely to their participation in, or withdrawal from, the UKDP.

 

US federal income taxation

 

A US holder must include in gross income, the gross amount of any dividend paid by the Company out of earnings and profits (as determined for US federal income tax purposes), including any Australian income tax withheld from the dividend payment.  Dividends paid to a US holder in taxable years beginning after December 31, 2002 and before January 1, 2009, that constitute qualified dividend income will be taxable at a maximum rate of 15% provided that the US holder holds the shares for more than 60 days during the 121-day period beginning 60 days before the ex-dividend date and meets other holding period requirements.  Dividends paid by the Company with respect to the shares generally will be qualified dividend income.  The dividend is taxable to a US holder when the US holder receives the dividend, actually or constructively.  The dividend will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction generally allowed to US corporations in respect of dividends paid by US corporations.  Subject to certain limitations, any Australian tax withheld from a dividend will be creditable against a US holder’s US federal income tax liability.

 

For US federal income tax purposes, US holders will not be entitled to a tax credit for the 10% UK tax credit attached to dividends paid by the UK controlled entity under the UKDP.

 

New Zealand Taxation

 

The Company is now able to attach available New Zealand imputation credits to dividends paid.  As a result, New Zealand imputation credits of NZ$0.13 per share have been attached to the final 2004 ordinary dividend paid by the Company.  New Zealand imputation credits are only relevant for shareholders who are required to file New Zealand income tax returns.  A separate shareholder dividend statement will be provided to shareholders setting out details of the New Zealand imputation credits attached to the final 2004 ordinary dividend.  The extent to which future dividends will carry New Zealand imputation credits will depend on a number of factors, including the level of the Group’s profits that are subject to New Zealand tax.

 

Exchange rates

 

Fluctuations in the exchange rate between the Australian dollar and the US dollar will affect the US dollar equivalent of the Australian dollar prices of the fully paid ordinary shares of the Company and, as a result, may affect the market price of the ADSs in the US.  (A description of the ADSs appears under the heading ‘American depositary shares representing ordinary shares (ADSs) above.)

 

Such fluctuations will also affect the US dollar conversion by the depositary of cash dividends paid in Australian dollars on the fully paid ordinary shares represented by the ADSs.  Refer to selected financial data on page 7 for the high, low, average and year-end noon buying exchange rates for the Company’s last five years.

 

Documents

 

Documents concerning the Company that are referred to in this annual financial report may be inspected at the registered office.

 

In addition, the Company files reports and other information with the SEC.  You can read and copy these reports and other information at the SEC Public Reference Room at 450 Fifth Street, North West, Washington DC 20549.

 

You can telephone the SEC at 1-800-SEC-330 for further information on the Public Reference Room.  Once reports are lodged with the SEC, you can view them electronically at the SEC website at www.sec.gov through EDGAR.  You can also read and copy these reports and other information at New York Stock Exchange, Inc., 20 Broad Street, New York NY 10005.

 

250



 

Twenty largest registered fully paid ordinary shareholders of the Company as at December 31, 2004

 

 

 

Number of shares

 

%

 

National Nominees Limited

 

193,165,866

 

12.40

 

Westpac Custodian Nominees Limited

 

167,163,978

 

10.73

 

JP Morgan Nominees Australia Limited

 

154,521,779

 

9.92

 

Citicorp Nominees Pty Limited

 

40,377,735

 

2.59

 

ANZ Nominees Limited

 

36,188,931

 

2.32

 

RBC Global Services Australia Nominees Pty Limited, PIPOOLED A/C

 

20,899,735

 

1.34

 

Cogent Nominees Pty Limited

 

20,025,077

 

1.29

 

Queensland Investment Corporation

 

18,013,019

 

1.16

 

AMP Life Limited

 

17,517,184

 

1.12

 

RBC Global Services Australia Nominees Pty Limited

 

10,523,777

 

0.68

 

HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Limited

 

9,304,835

 

0.60

 

National Australian Trustees Limited

 

7,683,293

 

0.49

 

RBC Global Services Australia Nominees Pty Limited BKCUST A/C

 

7,221,316

 

0.46

 

Australian Foundation Investment Company Limited

 

6,839,612

 

0.44

 

Citicorp Nominees Pty Limited, CFS WSLE IMPUTATION FND A/C

 

5,664,011

 

0.36

 

Cogent Nominees Pty Limited, SMP ACCOUNTS

 

5,409,076

 

0.35

 

Government Superannuation Office, A/C STATE SUPER FUND

 

5,082,391

 

0.33

 

IAG Nominees Pty Limited

 

4,524,352

 

0.29

 

Westpac Financial Services Limited

 

4,224,326

 

0.27

 

Perpetual Trustee Company Limited

 

4,215,933

 

0.27

 

 

 

738,566,226

 

47.40

 

 

The 20 largest registered shareholders held 738,566,226 fully paid ordinary shares, which is equal to 47.40% of the total issue of 1,558,016,351 fully paid ordinary shares.

 

Substantial shareholder

 

As at December 31, 2004, there were no persons with a substantial shareholding in the Company.

 

Distribution of fully paid ordinary shareholdings

 

 

 

Number of
Shareholders

 

% of
holders

 

Number of
shares

 

% of
shares

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Range (number)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1 – 1,000

 

246,796

 

64.3

 

98,685,248

 

6.3

 

1,001 – 5,000

 

111,566

 

29.0

 

241,145,563

 

15.5

 

5,001 – 10,000

 

15,583

 

4.1

 

109,179,314

 

7.0

 

10,001 – 100,000

 

9,520

 

2.5

 

200,881,391

 

12.9

 

100,001 and over

 

415

 

0.1

 

908,124,835

 

58.3

 

 

 

383,880

 

100.0

 

1,558,016,351

 

100.0

 

Less than marketable parcel of $500

 

9,276

 

 

 

77,971

 

 

 

 

Shares held in trust under the Company’s employee share plans are registered as one shareholding in the name of the trustee.

 

 

 

Number of
shareholders

 

% of
holders

 

Number of
shares

 

% of
Shares

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Address of holders

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

361,669

 

94.2

 

1,535,662,461

 

98.6

 

United Kingdom

 

11,424

 

3.0

 

8,012,348

 

0.5

 

New Zealand

 

7,615

 

2.0

 

9,274,780

 

0.6

 

United States

 

531

 

0.1

 

828,785

 

0.1

 

Other overseas

 

2,641

 

0.7

 

4,237,977

 

0.2

 

 

 

383,880

 

100.0

 

1,558,016,351

 

100.0

 

 

Voting rights

 

The voting and other rights attaching to ordinary shares are set out in the section entitled ‘the Company’s constitution’ on page 233.

 

251



 

Twenty largest registered National Income Securities (NIS) holders as at December 31, 2004

 

 

 

Number of securities

 

%

 

J P Morgan Nominees Australia Limited

 

1,007,117

 

5.04

 

Westpac Custodian Nominees Limited

 

751,205

 

3.76

 

National Nominees Limited

 

590,868

 

2.95

 

ANZ Nominees Limited

 

481,998

 

2.41

 

Australian Foundation Investment Company Limited

 

407,721

 

2.04

 

RBC Global Services Australia Nominees Pty Limited, MLCI A/C

 

304,611

 

1.52

 

Citicorp Nominees Pty Limited

 

267,190

 

1.34

 

Tower Trust Limited

 

226,246

 

1.13

 

UBS Private Clients Australia Nominees Pty Ltd

 

225,647

 

1.13

 

The University of Sydney

 

199,713

 

1.00

 

IOOF Investment Management Limited

 

188,000

 

0.94

 

Questor Financial Services Limited

 

157,905

 

0.79

 

RBC Global Services Australia Nominees Pty Limited, JBENIP A/C

 

140,519

 

0.70

 

Cogent Nominees Pty Limited, SMP ACCOUNTS

 

140,368

 

0.70

 

Perpetual Trustee Company Limited

 

137,904

 

0.69

 

Cambooya Pty Limited

 

105,615

 

0.53

 

AMP Life Limited

 

102,905

 

0.51

 

Perpetual Trustee Company Limited, CCML SERIES 2002-1 A/C

 

93,690

 

0.47

 

ANZ Executors and Trustee Company Limited

 

80,045

 

0.40

 

Gales Investments Pty Ltd

 

74,687

 

0.37

 

 

 

5,683,954

 

28.42

 

 

The 20 largest registered NIS holders held 5,683,954 NIS, which is equal to 28.42% of the total issue of 20,000,000 NIS.

 

Distribution of NIS holdings

 

 

 

Number of
holders

 

% of
holders

 

Number of
securities

 

% of
securities

 

Range (number)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1 – 1,000

 

43,325

 

96.1

 

8,408,410

 

42.0

 

1,001 – 5,000

 

1,556

 

3.5

 

3,142,942

 

15.7

 

5,001 – 10,000

 

110

 

0.2

 

771,756

 

3.9

 

10,001 – 100,000

 

94

 

0.2

 

2,241,360

 

11.2

 

100,001 and over

 

17

 

 

*

5,435,532

 

27.2

 

 

 

45,102

 

100.0

 

20,000,000

 

100.0

 

Less than marketable parcel of $500

 

15

 

 

 

38

 

 

 

 

Address of holders

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

44,135

 

97.9

 

19,341,044

 

96.7

 

United Kingdom

 

35

 

0.1

 

12,882

 

0.1

 

New Zealand

 

820

 

1.8

 

522,623

 

2.6

 

United States

 

20

 

 

*

13,238

 

0.1

 

Other overseas

 

92

 

0.2

 

110,213

 

0.5

 

 

 

45,102

 

100.0

 

20,000,000

 

100.0

 

 


Due to the small number of these NIS holders, the amounts round down to nil.

 

Voting rights

 

The voting and other rights attaching to the NIS are set out in the section entitled ‘the Company’s constitution’ on page 234.

 

252



 

National Australia Bank Limited

 

Chairman

 

Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer

 

Company Secretary

Mr Graham J Kraehe

 

Mr John M Stewart

 

Mr Garry F Nolan

AO, BEc, FAICD

 

BA, ACII, FCIB

 

MBus, FAICD, FCIS, FAIBF, ASIA, CFTP (Snr)

 

 

 

 

 

Registered office

 

Auditor

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

24th Floor

 

KPMG

 

 

500 Bourke Street

 

Chartered Accountants

 

 

Melbourne Victoria 3000

 

161 Collins Street

 

 

Australia

 

Melbourne Victoria 3000

 

 

Telephone: 1300 367 647

 

Australia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

For 2005, subject to approval of the shareholders

 

 

 

Ernst & Young

 

 

 

 

Chartered Accountants

 

 

 

 

120 Collins Street

 

 

 

 

Melbourne Victoria 3000

 

 

 

 

Australia

 

 

 

Shareholders’ centre internet service

 

The Group’s website at www.nabgroup.com has a dedicated separate section where shareholders can gain access to a wide range of secure information, including copies of recent announcements, annual financial reports and useful forms, including change of address forms, from the Share Registrar.  Email: web.queries@computershare.com.au

 

Shareholders’ centre information line

 

There is a convenient 24 hours a day, 7 days a week automated service (Australia only).  To obtain the current balance of your ordinary shareholding and relevant dividend payment details, telephone 1300 367 647 (Australia) or +61 3 9415 4299 (Overseas).

 

Contact details

 

These services are fully secure to protect your interests.  In all communications with the Share Registrar, please ensure you quote your securityholder reference number (SRN), or in case of broker sponsored shareholders, your holder identification number (HIN).

 

Principal share register

 

UK branch share register

 

US ADR depositary, transfer

 

 

 

 

agent and registrar

 

 

 

 

 

Computershare Investor Services Pty Limited

 

C/- Computershare Investor Services PLC

 

The Bank of New York

Yarra Falls

 

The Pavilions

 

Depositary Receipts Division

452 Johnston Street

 

Bridgwater Road

 

101 Barclay St, 22nd Floor

Abbotsford Victoria 3067

 

Bedminster Down

 

New York NY 10286

 

 

Bristol BS99 7NH

 

United States of America

Postal address:

 

United Kingdom

 

 

GPO Box 2333

 

 

 

 

Melbourne Victoria 3001

 

Tel: (0870) 702 0000

 

Tel: (212) 815 2293

Australia

 

Fax: (0870) 703 6101

 

Fax: (212) 571 3050, 3051, 3052

 

 

 

 

 

Local call: 1300 367 647

 

Website: www.computershare.com

 

Website: www.adrbny.com

Fax: (03) 9473 2500

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Telephone and fax (outside Australia):

 

 

 

 

T: +61 3 9415 4299; F: +61 3 9473 2500

 

 

 

 

Email: web.queries@computershare.com.au

 

 

 

 

 

253



 

Official quotation

 

Fully paid ordinary shares of the Company are quoted on the following stock exchanges:

 

                  Australian Stock Exchange Limited;

 

                  London Stock Exchange PLC;

 

                  Stock Exchange, New Zealand;

 

                  Tokyo Stock Exchange; and

 

                  New York Stock Exchange, Inc.

 

In the US, the Company’s ordinary shares are traded in the form of American depositary shares evidenced by American depositary receipts issued by The Bank of New York Company, Inc.

 

The Group has also issued:

 

                  exchangeable capital units which are quoted under the symbol ‘NAU’ on the stock market of New York Stock Exchange, Inc., and are also quoted on the Luxembourg Stock Exchange;

 

                  National Income Securities which are quoted on the stock market of Australian Stock Exchange Limited under the symbol ‘NABHA’; and

 

                  Trust Preferred Securities which are quoted on the stock market of Luxembourg Stock Exchange.

 

Signatures

 

The registrant certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual financial report on its behalf.

 

National Australia Bank Limited

Registrant

 

 

/s/ Garry F Nolan

 

 

Garry F Nolan

 

Secretary of the Company

 

 

Date: January 21, 2005

 

254



 

Glossary

 

Term used

 

Brief description

 

 

 

AASB

 

Australian Accounting Standards Board

ACCC

 

Australian Competition and Consumer Commission

ADI

 

Authorised deposit-taking institution

ADR

 

American depositary receipt

ADS

 

American depositary share

APRA

 

Australian Prudential Regulation Authority

ASIC

 

Australian Securities and Investments Commission

ASX

 

Australian Stock Exchange (the stock market conducted by Australian Stock Exchange Limited)

ATM

 

Automated teller machine

Australian GAAP

 

Generally accepted accounting principles applicable in Australia

Basel II

 

Basel II Capital Accord

BIS

 

Bank for International Settlements

Company

 

National Australia Bank Limited

CRM

 

Customer relationship management (system)

EFTPOS

 

Electronic funds transaction point of sale

GAAP

 

Generally accepted accounting principles

Group

 

National Australia Bank Limited and its controlled entities

HomeSide US

 

HomeSide Lending, Inc.

Non-GAAP

 

A financial measure which is either a numeric or ratio of historical or future financial performance, financial position, or cash flows that excludes or includes amounts which are included or excluded in a GAAP measure

Positioning for Growth

 

A program launched in October 2001, to drive long-term growth, through the simplification of the Group’s structure, systems and processes. It also examined opportunities to maximise revenues, reduce cost structures and use resources more efficiently

RBA

 

Reserve Bank of Australia

RBNZ

 

Reserve Bank of New Zealand

SEC

 

Securities and Exchange Commission

SFAS

 

Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (issued by the US Financial Accounting Standards Board)

UK

 

United Kingdom

US

 

United States of America

US GAAP

 

Generally accepted accounting principles applicable in the United States of America

 

Term used

 

Closest US equivalent or brief description

 

 

 

Asset quality disclosure

 

Impaired assets

Asset revaluation reserve

 

Increase or temporary decrease in valuation of certain assets as compared with historical cost

Charge to provide for doubtful debts

 

Provisions for loan losses

Constitution

 

By-laws

Depreciation

 

Amortisation

Equity

 

Shareholders’ equity

Finance lease

 

Capital lease

Freehold

 

Ownership with absolute rights in perpetuity

Loans and advances

 

Lendings

Net profit

 

Net income

Ordinary shares

 

Common stock

Ordinary shares, fully paid

 

Ordinary shares, issued and fully paid

Overdraft

 

A line of credit, contractually repayable on demand unless a fixed term has been agreed, established through a customer’s current account

Preference shares

 

Preferred stock

Provisions

 

Allowances

Provisions for doubtful debts

 

Allowances for loan losses

Share capital

 

Ordinary shares or common stock issued

Shares on issue

 

Shares outstanding

Significant item

 

Item of such a size, nature or incidence that its disclosure is relevant in explaining the financial performance of the entity

Statement of financial
performance

 

Income statement

Statement of financial
position

 

Balance sheet

Write-offs

 

Charge-offs

 

255



 

Form 20-F cross reference index

 

Item

 

 

 

Form 20-F proforma caption

 

Page

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Currency of presentation, exchange rates and certain definitions

 

2, 250

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Part I

 

1

 

Identity of directors, senior management and advisors

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

Offer statistics and expected timetable

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

Key information

 

 

 

 

 

 

Selected financial data

 

4

 

 

 

 

Capitalisation and indebtedness

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

Reason for the offer and use of proceeds

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

Risk factors

 

65

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

 

Information on the Company

 

 

 

 

 

 

History and development of the Company

 

9, 18, 175

 

 

 

 

Business overview

 

9

 

 

 

 

Organisational structure

 

18, 175

 

 

 

 

Property, plant and equipment

 

18

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

 

Operating and financial review and prospects

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operating results

 

21

 

 

 

 

Liquidity and capital resources

 

45, 49

 

 

 

 

Research and development, patents and licences

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

Trend information

 

15, 16, 22

 

 

 

 

Off-balance sheet arrangements

 

47

 

 

 

 

Tabular disclosure of contractual obligations

 

46

 

 

 

 

Safe harbour

 

22

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

 

Directors, senior management and employees

 

 

 

 

 

 

Directors and senior management

 

80, 229

 

 

 

 

Compensation

 

87

 

 

 

 

Board practices

 

74, 76, 87, 229

 

 

 

 

Employees

 

42

 

 

 

 

Share ownership

 

95, 156, 229

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

 

Major shareholders and related party transactions

 

 

 

 

 

 

Major shareholders

 

251, 252

 

 

 

 

Related party transactions

 

65, 190

 

 

 

 

Interests of experts and counsel

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

 

Financial information

 

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidated statements and other financial information

 

100

 

 

 

 

Significant changes

 

84

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

 

The offer and listing

 

 

 

 

 

 

Offer and listing details

 

232

 

 

 

 

Plan of distribution

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

Markets

 

231

 

 

 

 

Selling shareholders

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

Dilution

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

Expenses of the issue

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

 

Additional information

 

 

 

 

 

 

Share capital

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

Memorandum and articles of association

 

233

 

 

 

 

Material contracts

 

235

 

 

 

 

Exchange controls

 

248

 

 

 

 

Taxation

 

249

 

 

 

 

Dividends and paying agents

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

Statement of experts

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

Documents on display

 

250

 

 

 

 

Subsidiary information

 

Not required

 

256



 

Item

 

 

 

Form 20-F proforma caption

 

Page

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

 

Quantitative and qualitative disclosures about market risk

 

59

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

 

Description of securities other than equity securities

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Part II

 

13

 

Defaults, dividend arrearages and delinquencies

 

None

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

14

 

Material modifications to the rights of security holders and use of proceeds

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

15

 

Controls and procedures

 

63

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16A

 

Audit Committee financial expert

 

74

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16B

 

Code of Ethics

 

78

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16C

 

Principal accountant fees and services

 

75, 97, 206

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16D

 

Exemptions from listing standards for audit committees

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16E

 

Purchases of equity securities by the issuer and affiliated purchasers

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Part III

 

17

 

Financial statements

 

Not required

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

18

 

Financial statements

 

100

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

19

 

Exhibits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.

Constitution of National Australia Bank Limited as currently in effect

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.

Material contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.1

Executive service agreement - Mr Frank J Cicutto

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.2

Deed of settlement and release - Mr Frank J Cicutto

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.3

Executive employment agreement - Mr John M Stewart (as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, National Australia Group Europe Limited)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.4

Executive employment agreement - Mr John M Stewart (as Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of the Group)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.5

Employment agreement - Mr Cameron A Clyne

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.6

Employment agreement - Mr Ahmed Fahour

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.7

Retention award - Mr John E Hooper

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.8

Employment agreement - Mr Peter A McKinnon

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.9

Employment agreement - Ms Lynne M Peacock (as General Manager, Business Development)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.10

Expatriate assignment agreement - Ms Lynne M Peacock (as Executive General Manager, People & Culture)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.11

Expatriate assignment agreement - Mr Ross E Pinney (as Executive General Manager, Financial Services Europe)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.12

Employment agreement and retention award - Mr Gavin R Slater (as Group General Manager, Office of the Chief Executive)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.13

Employment agreement - Mr Michael J Ullmer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.14

Retention award - Mr Graeme D Willis (as Acting Executive General Manager, Risk Management)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.15

Deed of settlement and release and Deed of indemnity - Mr Michael T Laing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.16

Deed of settlement and release - Mr Christopher D Lewis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.17

Deed of settlement and release - Mr Peter A McKinnon

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.18

Deed of settlement and release and Deed of indemnity (April 2004) - Mr Richard E McKinnon

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.19

Deed of settlement and release and Deed of indemnity (November 2004) - Mr Richard E McKinnon

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.20

Deed of settlement and release - Mr Ian F Scholes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.21

Director appointment letter - Mr Ahmed Fahour

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.22

Director appointment letter - Mr Michael J Ullmer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.23

Non-executive director appointment letter - Mr Robert G Elstone

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.24

Non-executive director appointment letter - Mr Daniel T Gilbert

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.25

Non-executive director appointment letter - Mr Paul J Rizzo

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.26

Non-executive director appointment letter - Ms Jillian S Segal

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.27

Non-executive director appointment letter - Mr John G Thorn

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.28

Non-executive director appointment letter - Mr G Malcolm Williamson

 

 

 

257



 

Item

 

 

 

Form 20-F proforma caption

 

Page

 

 

19

 

Exhibits (continued)

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.

Material contracts (continued)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.29

Deed of access, indemnity and insurance - Mr John M Stewart

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.30

Deed of access, indemnity and insurance - Mr John G Thorn

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.31

Deed of access, indemnity and insurance - Mr Robert G Elstone

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.32

Deed of access, indemnity and insurance - Mr Daniel T Gilbert

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.33

Deed of access, indemnity and insurance - Mr Paul J Rizzo

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.34

Deed of access, indemnity and insurance - Ms Jillian S Segal

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.35

Deed of access, indemnity and insurance - Mr Ahmed Fahour

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.36

Deed of access, indemnity and insurance - Mr Michael J Ullmer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.37

Deed of access, indemnity and insurance - Mr G Malcolm Williamson

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.38

Expatriate assignment agreement - Mr Gavin R Slater (as Executive Director, National Australia Group Europe Limited)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.39

Employment agreement - Mr Graeme D Willis (as Group General Manager, Regulatory Affairs)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.40

Employment agreement - Mr Ross E Pinney (as Executive General Manager, Office of the Chief Executive)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.41

Variation to employment agreement - Ms Lynne M Peacock (as Chief Executive Officer, Europe)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.42

Non-executive director appointment letter - Mr Michael Chaney

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.43

Sale of National Europe Holdings (Ireland) Limited

 

 

 

 

 

 

7.

Statement explaining how the ratio of earnings to fixed charges is calculated

 

 

 

 

 

 

8.

List of subsidiaries of National Australia Bank Limited

 

 

 

 

 

 

12.

Certifications pursuant to Rule 15d-14a under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934

 

 

 

 

 

 

13.

Certifications pursuant to Rule 15d-14b under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934

 

 

 

 

 

 

Signature

 

 

254

 

258



 

SIGNATURE

 

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorised.

 

 

 

NATIONAL AUSTRALIA BANK LIMITED

 

 

 

 

         Garry F Nolan

 

Date:   21 January 2005

Title:

Company Secretary